Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
07/21/1999 Agreement
SECTION 00500 FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR THIS AGREEMENT is made by and between Monroe County, 5100 College Road, Stock Island, Key West, Florida 33040 (hereinafter referred to as "owner") and Lodge Construction. Inc. (hereinafter referred to as "contractor") for construction of The Gato Building, the specifications and architectural and engineering drawings for which are attached and incorporated into this contract as Exhibit A (hereinafter referred to as the "Project"), the owner and the contractor hereby agreeing as follows: o ARTICLE I �,�z n m THE CONTRACT AND THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS v c-� • r -n o c-� 1.1 The Contract ;:0 1.1.1 The contract between the owner and the contractor, of which this agreemgk4 Wit, rn consists of the contract documents. It shall be effective on the date this agreemeni.}s execqpd Q by the last party to execute it. F' cm o 1.2 The Contract Documents 1.2.1 The contract documents consist of this agreement, the specifications, the drawings, all change orders, any addenda and field orders issued hereafter, any other amendments hereto executed by the parties hereafter, together with the following: Exhibit A; Exhibit B. Documents not enumerated in this paragraph 1.2.1 are not contract documents and do not form part of this contract. 1.3 Entire Agreement 1.3.1 This contract, together with the contractor's public construction bond for the Project, constitute the entire and exclusive agreement between the owner and the contractor with reference to the Project. Specifically, but without limitation, this contract supersedes any bid documents and all prior written or oral communications, representations and negotiations, if any, between the owner and contractor. 1.4 No Privity with Others 1.4.1 Nothing contained in this contract shall create, or be interpreted to create, privity or any other contractual agreement between the owner and any person or entity other than the contractor. 1.5 Intent and Interpretation 1.5.1 The intent of this contract is to require complete, correct and timely execution of the work. Any work that may be required, implied or inferred by the contract documents, or any one or more of them, as necessary to produce the intended result shall be provided by the contractor for the contract price. 1.5.2 This contract is intended to be an integral whole and shall be interpreted as internally consistent. What is required by any one contract document shall be considered as required by the county commissioners. FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 1 1.5.3 When a word, term or phrase is used in this contract, it shall be interpreted or construed, first, as defined herein, second, if not defined, according to its generally accepted meaning in the construction industry; and third, if there is no generally accepted meaning in the construction industry, according to its common and customary usage. 1.5.4 The words "include," "includes," or "including," as used in this contract, shall be deemed to be followed by the phrase, "without limitation." 1.5.5 The specification herein of any act, failure, refusal, omission, event, occurrence or condition as constituting a material breach of this contract shall not imply that any other, nonspecific act, failure, refusal, omission, event, occurrence or condition shall be deemed not to constitute a material breach of this contract. 1.5.6 Words or terms used as nouns in this contract shall be inclusive of their singular and plural forms, unless the context of their usage clearly requires a contrary meaning. 1.5.7 The contractor shall have a continuing duty to read, carefully study and compare each of the contract documents, the shop drawings and the product data and shall give written notice to the owner of any inconsistency, ambiguity, error or omission which the contractor may discover with respect to these documents before proceeding with the affected work. The issuance, or the express or implied approval by the owner or the architect of the contract documents, shop drawings or product data shall not relieve the contractor of the continuing duties imposed hereby, nor shall any such approval be evidence of the contractor's compliance with this contract. The owner has requested the architect to only prepare documents for the project, including the drawings and specifications for the project, which are accurate, adequate, consistent, coordinated and sufficient for construction. HOWEVER, THE OWNER MAKES NO REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER TO THE CONTRACTOR CONCERNING SUCH DOCUMENTS. By the execution hereof, the contractor acknowledges and represents that it has received, reviewed and carefully examined such documents, has found them to be complete, accurate, adequate, consistent, coordinated and sufficient for construction and that the contractor has not, does not, and will not rely upon any representation or warranties by the owner concerning such contract documents as no such representation or warranties have been or are hereby made. 1.5.8 As between numbers and scaled measurements on the drawings and in the design, the numbers shall govern; as between larger scale and smaller scale drawings, the larger scale shall govern. 1.5.9 Neither the organization of any of the contract document into divisions, sections, paragraphs, articles (or other categories), nor the organization or arrangement of the design, shall control the contractor in dividing the work or in establishing the extent or scope of the work to be performed by subcontractors. 1.6 Ownership of Contract Documents 1.6.1 The contract documents, and each of them, shall remain the property of the owner. The contractor shall have the right to keep one record set of the contract documents upon completion of the project; provided, however, that in no event shall contractor use, or permit to be used, any or all of such contract documents on other projects without the owner's prior written authorization. FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 2 ARTICLE II THE WORK 2.1 The contractor shall perform all of the work required, implied or reasonably inferable from, this contract. 2.2 The term "work" shall mean whatever is done by or required of the contractor to perform and complete its duties under this contract, including the following: construction of the whole or a designated part of the project; furnishing of any required surety bonds and insurance; and the provision or furnishing of labor, supervision, services, materials, supplies, equipment, fixtures, appliances, facilities, tools, transportation, storage, power, the payment of any applicable sales and use taxes; royalties and product license fees; permits and licenses required of the contractor, fuel, heat, light, cooling and all other utilities as required by this contract. The work to be performed by the contractor is generally described as follows: The rehabilitation of the Gato Building located at the corner of Simonton and Virginia Streets in the City of Key West Monroe County, Florida. ARTICLE III CONTRACT TIME 3.1 Time and Liquidated Damages 3.1.1 The contractor shall commence the work within 10 days from Notice to Proceed, or 10 days from receipt of permit, and shall achieve substantial completion of the work no later than 487 calendar days. 3.1.2 The contractor shall pay the owner a sum equal to the amount of dollars as computed in Section 00350-1 "Liquidated Damages" of the Specifications per day for each and every calendar day of unexcused delay in achieving substantial completion beyond the date set forth herein for substantial completion of the work. Any sums due and payable hereunder by the contractor shall be payable, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages representing an estimate of delay damages likely to be sustained by the owner, estimated at or before the time of executing this contract. When the owner reasonably believes that substantial completion will be inexcusably delayed, the owner shall be entitled, but not required, to withhold from any amounts otherwise due the contractor an amount then believed by the owner to be adequate to recover liquidated damages applicable to such delays. If and when the contractor overcomes the delay in achieving substantial completion, or any part thereof, for which the owner has withheld payment, the owner shall promptly release to the contractor those funds withheld, but no longer applicable, as liquidated damages. 3.2 Substantial Completion 3.2.1 "Substantial Completion" shall mean that stage in the progression of the work when the work is sufficiently complete in accordance with this contract that the owner can enjoy beneficial use or occupancy of the work and can utilize the work for its intended purpose. The date of substantial completion is the date set forth by the Construction Manager on the substantial completion form. 3.3 Time is of the Essence 3.3.1 All limitation of time set forth in the contract documents are of the essence of this contract. FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 3 ARTICLE IV CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 The Contract Price 4.1.1 The owner shall pay, and the contractor shall accept, as full and complete payment for all of the work required herein, the fixed sum of $4,334,000.00. The sum set forth in this paragraph 4.1 shall constitute the contract price which shall not be modified except by change order as provided in this contract. ARTICLE V PAYMENT OF THE CONTRACT PRICE 5.1 Schedule of Values 5.1.1 Within ten (10) calendar days of the effective date hereof, the contractor shall submit to the owner and to the architect a schedule of values allocating the contract price to the various portions of the work. The contractor's schedule of values shall be prepared in such form, with such detail, and supported by such data as the architect or owner may require to substantiate its accuracy. The contractor shall not imbalance its schedule of values nor artificially inflate any element thereof. The violation of this provision by the contractor shall constitute a material breach of this contract. The schedule of values shall be used only as a basis for the contractor's applications for payment and shall only constitute such basis after it has been acknowledged in writing by the architect and the owner. 5.2 Payment Procedure 5.2.1 The owner shall pay the contract price to the contractor as provided below. 5.2.2 Progress Payments —Based upon the contractor's applications for payment submitted to the architect and upon certificates for payment subsequently issued to the owner by the architect, the owner shall make progress payments to the contractor on account of the contract price. 5.2.3 On or before the 26th day of each month after commencement of the work, the contractor shall submit an application for payment for the period ending the 25th day of the month to the architect in such form and manner, and with such supporting data and content, as the owner or the architect may require. Therein, the contractor may request payment for ninety percent (90%) of that portion of the contract price properly allocable to contract requirements properly provided, labor, materials and equipment properly incorporated in the work plus ninety percent (90%) of that portion of the contract price properly allocable to materials or equipment properly stored onsite (or elsewhere if approved in advance in writing by the owner) for subsequent incorporation in the work, less the total amount of previous payments received from the owner. Payment for stored materials and equipment shall be conditioned upon the contractor's proof satisfactory to the owner, that the owner has title to such materials and equipment and shall include proof of required insurance. Such application for payment shall be signed by the contractor and shall constitute the contractor's representation that the work has progressed to the level for which payment is requested in accordance with the schedule of values, that the work has been properly installed or performed in full accordance with this contract, and that the contractor knows of no reason why payment should not be made as requested. Thereafter, the architect will review the application for payment and may also review the work at the project site or elsewhere to determine whether the quantity and quality of the work is as represented in the application for payment and is as required by this contract. FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 4 The architect shall determine and certify to the owner the amount properly owing to the contractor. The owner shall make partial payments on account of the contract price to the contractor within twenty (20) days following the receipt by Monroe County Construction Manager, of each application for payment, from the Architect. The amount of each partial payment shall be the amount certified for payment by the architect less such amounts, if any, otherwise owing by the contractor to the owner or which the owner shall have the right to withhold as authorized by this contract. The architect's certification of the contractor's application for payment shall not preclude the owner from the exercise of any of its rights as set forth in paragraph 5.3 hereinbelow. 5.2.4 The contractor warrants that all payments to subcontractors have been made as certified on the application for payment and that title to all work covered by an application for payment will pass to the owner no later than the time of payment. The contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an application for payment, all work for which payments have been received from the owner shall be free and clear of liens, claims, security interest or other encumbrances in favor of the contractor or any other person or entity whatsoever. 5.2.5 The contractor shall promptly pay each subcontractor, out of the amount paid to the contractor on account of such subcontractor's work, the amount to which such subcontractor is entitled. If the contractor does not pay the subcontractor the amount due, the subcontractor may only seek payment from the contractor's public construction bond surety. In no event is the owner obligated to pay any subcontractor an amount owed to it by the contractor. Language similar to this paragraph 5.2.5 must appear in all contracts between the contractor and its subcontractors. 5.2.6 No progress payment, nor any use or occupancy of the project by the owner, shall be interpreted to constitute an acceptance of any work not in strict accordance with this contract. 5.3 Withheld Payment 5.3.1 The owner may decline to make payment, may withhold funds, and, if necessary, may demand the return of some or all of the amounts previously paid to the contractor, to protect the owner from loss because of: (a) defective work not remedied by the contractor nor, in the opinion of the owner, likely to be remedied by the contractor; (b) claims of third parties against the owner or the owner's property; (c) failure by the contractor to pay subcontractors or others in a prompt and proper fashion; (d) evidence that the balance of the work cannot be completed in accordance with the contract for the unpaid balance of the contract price; (e) evidence that the work will not be completed in the time required for substantial or final completion; (f) persistent failure to carry out the work in accordance with the contract; (g) damage to the owner or a third party to whom the owner is, or may be, liable. FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 5 In the event that the owner makes written demand upon the contractor for amounts previously paid by the owner as contemplated in this subparagraph 5.3.1, the contractor shall promptly comply with such demand. 5.4 Unexcused Failure to Pay 5.4.1 If within twenty (20) days after the date established herein for payment to the contractor by the owner, the owner, without cause or basis hereunder, fails to pay the contractor any amount then due and payable to the contractor, then the contractor may after seven (7) additional days' written notice to the owner and the architect, and without prejudice to any other available rights or remedies it may have, stop the work until payment of those amounts due from the owner have been received. 5.5 Substantial Completion 5.5.1 When the contractor believes that the work is substantially complete, the contractor shall submit written notice that the project is ready for substantial completion inspection. The architect, on the basis of contractor's notice, shall determine that the work is in fact substantially complete, and report findings to the Construction Manager. The Construction Manager will inspect the work and will be the final judge as to whether substantial completion has been achieved. The Architect will prepare a certificate of substantial completion which shall establish the date of substantial completion, shall state the responsibilities of the contractor for project security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the work, and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the contractor shall complete the items listed therein. The certificate of substantial completion shall be submitted to the contractor for written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in such certificate. Upon substantial completion of the work and execution by both the owner and the contractor of the certificate of substantial completion, the owner shall pay the contractor an amount sufficient to increase total payments to the contractor to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price less five percent (5%) retention and less three hundred percent (300%) of the reasonable cost as determined by the owner and the architect for completing all incomplete work, correcting and bringing into conformance all defective and nonconforming work, and handling all unsettled claims. The certificate of substantial completion shall not be signed by the Construction Manager unless accompanied by a signed certificate of occupancy from all governing authorities. 5.6 Completion and Final Payment 5.6.1 When all of the work is finally complete and the contractor is ready for a final inspection, it shall notify the owner and the architect thereof in writing. Thereupon, the architect will make final inspection of the work and, if work is complete in full accordance with this contract and this contract has been fully performed, the architect will promptly issue a final certificate for payment certifying to the owner that the project is complete and the contractor is entitled to the remainder of the unpaid contract price, less any amount withheld pursuant to this contract. Guarantees required by the contract shall commence on the date of final completion of the work. If the architect is unable to issue its final certificate for payment and is required to repeat its final inspection of the work, the contractor shall bear the cost of such repeat final inspection(s) which cost may be deducted by the owner from the contractor's final payment. 5.6.1.1 If the contractor fails to achieve final completion within the time fixed therefor by the architect in its certificate of substantial completion, the contractor shall pay the owner the sum of $500.00 per day for the first 15 days, $1,000.00 per day for the second 15 days, and 3 500.00 per day thereafter for each and every calendar day of unexcused delay in achieving FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 6 final completion beyond the date set forth herein for final completion of the work. Any sums due and payable hereunder by the contractor shall be payable, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages representing an estimate of delay damages likely to be sustained by the owner, estimated at or before the time of executing this contract. When the owner reasonably believes that final completion will be inexcusably delayed, the owner shall be entitled, but not required, to withhold from any amounts otherwise due the contractor an amount then believed by the owner to be adequate to recover liquidated damages applicable to such delays. If and when the contractor overcomes the delay in achieving final completion, or any part thereof, for which the owner has withheld payment, the owner shall promptly release to the contractor those funds withheld, but no longer applicable, as liquidated damages. 5.6.2 The contractor shall not be entitled to final payment unless and until it submits to the architect its affidavit that all payrolls, invoices for materials and equipment, and other liabilities connected with the work for which the owner, or the owner's property might be responsible, have been fully paid or otherwise satisfied; releases and waivers of lien from all subcontractors of the contractor and of any and all parties required by the architect or the owner; and the consent of surety to final payment. The affidavits, releases and waivers required from subcontractors and materialmen are for the administrative convenience of the owner only. They do not create an obligation on the part of the owner to assure that any subcontractor or materialman is paid. If unpaid, subcontractors and materialmen must seek payment from the contractor's public construction bond surety. 5.6.3 The owner shall make final payment of all sums due the contractor per Section 01027 of the Technical Specifications Project Manual. 5.6.4 Acceptance of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims against the owner by the contractor except for those claims previously made in writing against the owner by the contractor, pending at the time of final payment, and identified in writing by the contractor as unsettled at the time of its request for final payment. ARTICLE VI THE OWNER 6.1 Information and Services Required from Owner 6.1.1 The owner shall furnish to the contractor, at the time of executing this contract, any and all written and tangible material in its possession concerning conditions below ground at the site of the project. Such written and tangible material is furnished to the contractor only in order to make complete disclosure of such material and for no other purpose. By furnishing such material, the owner does not represent, warrant, or guarantee its accuracy either in whole, in part, implicitly or explicitly, or at all, and shall have no liability therefor. The owner shall also furnish surveys, legal limitations and utility locations (if known), and a legal description of the project site. 6.1.2 Excluding permits and fees normally the responsibility of the contractor, the owner shall obtain all approvals, easements, and the like required for construction and shall pay for necessary assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 7 6.1.3 The owner shall furnish the contractor, free of charge, 8 copies of the contract documents for execution of the work. The contractor will be charged, and shall pay the owner, $150.00 per additional set of contract documents which it may require. 6.2 Right to Stop Work 6.2.1 If the contractor persistently fails or refuses to perform the work in accordance with this contract, the owner may order the contractor to stop the work, or any described portion thereof, until the cause for stoppage has been corrected, no longer exists, or the owner orders that work be resumed, in such event, the contractor shall immediately obey such order. 6.3 Owner's Right to Perform Work 6.3.1 If the contractor's work is stopped by the owner under paragraph 6.2, and the contractor fails within three (3) days of such stoppage to provide adequate assurance to the owner that the cause of such stoppage will be eliminated or corrected, then the owner may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies the owner may have against the contractor, proceed to carry out the subject work. In such a situation, an appropriate change order shall be issued deducting from the contract price the cost of correcting the subject deficiencies, plus compensation for the architect's additional services and expenses necessitated thereby, if any. If the unpaid portion of the contract price is insufficient to cover the amount due the owner, the contractor shall pay the difference to the owner. ARTICLE VII THE CONTRACTOR 7.1 The contractor is again reminded of its continuing duty set forth in subparagraph 1.5.7. The contractor shall perform no part of the work at any time without adequate contract documents or, as appropriate, approved shop drawings, product data or samples for such portion of the work. If the contractor performs any of the work knowing it involves a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the contract documents without such notice to the architect, the contractor shall bear responsibility for such performance and shall bear the cost of correction. 7.2 The contractor shall perform the work strictly in accordance with this contract. 7.3 The contractor shall supervise and direct the work using the contractor's best skill, effort and attention. The contractor shall be responsible to the owner for any and all acts or omissions of the contractor, its employees and others engaged in the work on behalf of the contractor. 7.4 Warranty 7.4.1 The contractor warrants to the owner that all labor furnished to progress the work under this contract will be competent to perform the tasks undertaken, that the product of such labor will yield only first-class results, that materials and equipment furnished will be of good quality and new unless otherwise permitted by this contract, and that the work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects and in strict conformance with this contract. All work not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. 7.5 The contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, impact fees, fees and licenses necessary and ordinary for the work. The contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, governmental fees, licenses, inspections and surveys required by Federal, State, or Municipal FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 8 bodies having jurisdiction over the project for the proper execution and completion of the work which are customarily secured after execution of the contract and which are legally required at the time bids are received. The owner will not assess any County permit or County impact fees for the building permit issued by the County Building Department. The contractor is responsible for permit and impact fees issued by City Building Departments and any jurisdiction other than the County of Monroe. The contractor shall comply with all lawful requirements applicable to the work and shall give and maintain any and all notices required by applicable law pertaining to the work. 7.6 Supervision 7.6.1 The contractor shall employ and maintain at the project site only competent supervisory personnel. Absent written instruction from the contractor to the contrary, the superintendent shall be deemed the contractor's authorized representative at the site and shall be authorized to receive and accept any and all communications from the owner or the architect. 7.6.2 Key supervisory personnel assigned by the contractor to this project are as follows: Name Function So long as the individuals named above remain actively employed or retained by the contractor, they shall perform the functions indicated next to their names unless the owner agrees to the contrary in writing. In the event one or more individuals not listed above subsequently assumes one or more of those functions listed above, the contractor shall be bound by the provisions of this subparagraph 7.6.2 as though such individuals had been listed above. 7.7 The contractor, within fifteen (15) days of commencing the work, shall submit to the owner and the architect for their information, the contractor's schedule for completing the work. The contractor's schedule shall be revised no less frequently than monthly (unless the parties otherwise agree in writing) and shall be revised to reflect conditions encountered from time to time and shall be related to the entire project. Each such revision shall be furnished to the owner and the architect. Failure by the contractor to strictly comply with the provisions of this paragraph 7.7 shall constitute a material breach of this contract. 7.8 The contractor shall continuously maintain at the site, for the benefit of the owner and the architect, one record copy of this contract marked to record on a current basis changes, selections and modifications made during construction. Additionally, the contractor shall maintain at the site for the owner and the architect the approved shop drawings, product data, samples, other similar required submittals and an office for their use. Upon final completion of the work, all of these record documents shall be delivered to the owner. 7.9 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 7.9.1 Shop drawings, product data, samples and other submittals from the contractor do not constitute contract documents. Their purpose is merely to demonstrate the manner in which the contractor intends to implement the work in conformance with information received from the contract documents. FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 9 7.9.2 The contractor shall not perform any portion of the work requiring submittal and review of shop drawings, product data or samples unless and until such submittal shall have been approved by the architect. Approval by the architect, however, shall not be evidence that work installed pursuant thereto conforms with the requirements of this contract. 7.10 Cleaning the Site and the Project 7.10.1 The contractor shall keep the site reasonably clean during performance of the work. Upon final completion of the work, the contractor shall clean the site and the project and remove all waste, together with all of the contractor's property therefrom. 7.11 Access to Work 7.11.1 The owner and the architect shall have access to the work at all times from commencement of the work through final completion. The contractor shall take whatever steps necessary to provide access when requested. 7.12 Indemnification and Hold Harmless 7.12.1 The Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Monroe County Board of County Commissioners from any and all claims for bodily injury (including death), personal injury, and property damage (including property owned by Monroe County) and any other losses, damages, and expenses (including attorney's fees) which arise out of, in connection with, or by reason of services provided by the contractor or any of its Subcontractor(s) in any tier, occasioned by the negligence, errors, or other wrongful act or omission of the Contractor or its Subcontractor(s) in any tier, their employees, or agents. In the event the completion of the project (to include the work of others) is delayed or suspended as a result of the Contractor's failure to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the Contractor shall indemnify the County from any and all increased expenses resulting from such delay. The first ten dollars ($10.00) of remuneration paid to the Contractor is for the indemnification provided for above. The extent of liability is in no way limited to, reduced, or lessened by the insurance requirements contained elsewhere within this agreement. 7.12.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this paragraph 7.12 by an employee of the contractor, a subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph 7.12 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damage, compensation or benefits payable by or for the contractor or a subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 7.12.3 The contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and shall hold the owner and architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the contract. However, if the contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a patent, the contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the architect. ARTICLE VIII CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION 8.1 The Architect FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 10 8.1.1 The architect for this project is Bender & Associates Architects, P.A. In the event the owner should find it necessary or convenient to replace the architect, the owner shall retain a replacement architect and the status of the replacement architect shall be that of the former architect. 8.2 Architect's Administration 8.2.1 The architect, unless otherwise directed by the owner in writing, will perform those duties and discharge those responsibilities allocated to the architect as set forth in this contract. The architect shall be the owner's representative from the effective date of this contract until final payment has been made.. 8.2.2 The owner and the contractor shall communicate with each other in the first instance with consultation from the architect. 8.2.3 The architect shall be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the drawings and specifications and the judge of the performance thereunder by the contractor. The architect shall render written or graphic interpretations necessary for the proper execution or progress of the work with reasonable promptness on request of the contractor. 8.2.4 The architect will review the contractor's applications for payment and will certify to the owner for payment to the contractor, those amounts then due the contractor as provided in this contract. 8.2.5 The architect shall have authority to reject work which is defective or does not conform to the requirements of this contract. If the architect deems it necessary or advisable, the architect shall have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the work for compliance with contract requirements. 8.2.6 The architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action as necessary, concerning the contractor's submittals including shop drawings, product data and samples. Such review, approval or other action shall be for the sole purpose of determining conformance with the design concept and information given through the contract documents. 8.2.7 The architect will prepare change orders and may authorize minor changes in the work by field order upon approval of the owner, as provided elsewhere herein, as long as there is no change in contract price. 8.2.8 The architect shall, upon written request from the contractor, and in line with article 5, conduct inspections to determine the date of substantial completion and the date of final completion, will receive and forward to the owner for the owner's review and records, written warranties and related documents required by this contract and will issue a final certificate for payment upon compliance with the requirements of this contract. 8.3 Claims by the Contractor 8.3.1 All contractor claims shall be initiated by written notice and claim to the owner and the architect. Such written notice and claim must be furnished within three (3) days after occurrence of the event, or the first appearance of the condition, giving rise to the claim. 8.3.2 Pending final resolution of any claim of the contractor, the contractor shall diligently proceed with performance of this contract and the owner shall continue to make payments to FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 11 the contractor in accordance with this contract. The resolution of any claim under this paragraph 8.3 shall be reflected by a change order executed by the owner, the architect and the contractor. 8.3.3 Claims for Additional Costs —If the contractor wishes to make a claim for an increase in the contract price, as a condition precedent to any liability of the owner therefor, the contractor shall give the architect written notice of such claim within three (3) days after the occurrence of the event, or the first appearance of the condition, giving rise to such claim. Such notice shall be given by the contractor before proceeding to execute any additional or changed work. The failure by the contractor to give such notice and to give such notice prior to executing the work shall constitute a waiver of any claim for additional compensation. 8.3.3.1 In connection with any claim by the contractor against the owner for compensation in excess of the contract price, any liability of the owner for the contractor's costs shall be strictly limited to direct costs incurred by the contractor and shall in no event include indirect costs or consequential damages to the contractor. The owner shall not be liable to the contractor for claims of third parties, including subcontractors, unless and until liability of the contractor has been established therefor in a court of competent jurisdiction. 8.3.4 Claims for Additional Time —If the contractor is delayed in progressing any task which at the time of the delay is then critical or which during the delay becomes critical, as the sole result of any act or neglect to act by the owner or someone acting on the owner's behalf, or by changes ordered in the work, unusual delay in transportation, unusually adverse weather conditions not reasonably anticipatable, fire or any causes beyond the contractor's control, then the date for achieving substantial completion of the work shall be extended upon the written notice and claim of the contractor to the owner and the architect, for such reasonable time as the architect may determine. Any notice and claim for an extension of time by the contractor shall be made not more than three (3) days after the occurrence of the event or the first appearance of the condition giving rise to the claim and shall set forth in detail the contractor's basis for requiring additional time in which to complete the project. In the event the delay to the contractor is a continuing one, only one notice and claim for additional time shall be necessary. If the contractor fails to make such claim as required in this subparagraph, any claim for an extension of time shall be waived. In no event is the contractor entitled to additional compensation for any delay described in this paragraph 8.3.4 or other paragraphs. 8.4 Field Orders 8.4.1 The architect shall have authority to order minor changes in the work not involving a change in the contract price or in contract time and not inconsistent with the intent of the contract. Such changes shall be effected by field order and shall be binding upon the contractor. The contractor shall carry out such field orders promptly. ARTICLE IX SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1 Definition 9.1.1 A subcontractor is an entity that has a direct contract with the contractor to perform a portion of the work. 9.2 Award of Subcontracts FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 12 9.2.1 Upon execution of the contract, the contractor shall furnish the owner in writing, the names of persons or entities proposed by the contractor to act as a subcontractor on the project. The owner shall promptly reply to the contractor, in writing, stating any objections the owner may have to such proposed subcontractor. The contractor shall not enter into a subcontract with a proposed subcontractor with reference to whom the owner has made timely objection. The contractor shall not be required to subcontract with any party to whom the contractor has objection. 9.2.2 All subcontracts shall afford the contractor rights against the subcontractor which correspond to those rights afforded to the owner against the contractor herein, including those rights afforded to the owner by subparagraph 12.2.1 below. ARTICLE X CHANGES IN THE WORK 10.1 Changes Permitted 10.1.1 Changes in the work within the general scope of this contract, consisting of additions, deletions, revisions, or any combination thereof, may be ordered without invalidating this contract, by change order or by field order. 10.1.2 Changes in the work shall be performed under applicable provisions of this contract and the contractor shall proceed promptly with such changes. 10.2 Change Order Defined 10.2.1 Change order shall mean a written order to the contractor executed by the owner and the architect, issued after execution of this contract, authorizing and directing a change in the work or an adjustment in the contract price or the contract time, or any combination thereof. The contract price and the contract time may be changed only by change order. 10.3 Changes in the Contract Price 10.3.1 Any change in the contract price resulting from a change order shall be determined as follows: (a) by mutual agreement between the owner and the contractor as evidenced by (1) the change in the contract price being set forth in the change order, (2) such change in the contract price, together with any conditions or requirements related thereof, being initialed by both parties and (3) the contractor's execution of the change order; or (b) if no mutual agreement occurs between the owner and the contractor, then, as provided in subparagraph 10.3.2 below. 10.3.2 If no mutual agreement occurs between the owner and the contractor as contemplated in subparagraph 10.3.1 above, the change in the contract price, if any, shall then be determined by the architect on the basis of the reasonable expenditures or savings of those performing, deleting or revising the work attributable to the change, including, in the case of an increase or decrease in the contract price, an allowance for direct job site overhead of 5%, and profit 5%. 10.3.3 If unit prices are provided in the contract, and if the quantities contemplated are so changed in a proposed change order that application of such unit prices to the quantities of work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the owner or to the contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 10.4 Minor Changes FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 13 10.4.1 The architect shall have authority to order minor changes in the work not involving a change in the contract price or an extension of the contract time and not inconsistent with the intent of this contract. Such minor changes shall be made by written field order, and shall be binding upon the owner and the contractor. The contractor shall promptly carry out such written field orders. 10.5 Effect of Executed Change Order 10.5.1 The execution of a change order by the contractor shall constitute conclusive evidence of the contractor's agreement to the ordered changes in the work, this contract as thus amended, the contract price and the contract time. The contractor, by executing the change order, waives and forever releases any claim against the owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the work included within or affected by the executed change order. 10.6 Notice to Surety; Consent 10.6.1 The contractor shall notify and obtain the consent and approval of the contractor's surety with reference to all change orders if such notice, consent or approval is required by the contractor's surety or by law. The contractor's execution of the change order shall constitute the contractor's warranty to the owner that the surety has been notified of, and consents to, such change order and the surety shall be conclusively deemed to have been notified of such change order and to have expressly consented thereto. ARTICLE XI UNCOVERING AND CORRECTING WORK 11.1 Uncovering Work 11.1.1 If any of the work is covered contrary to the architect's request or to any provisions of this contract, it shall, if required by the architect or the owner, be uncovered for the architect's inspection and shall be properly replaced at the contractor's expense without change in the contract time. 11.1.2 If any of the work is covered in a manner not inconsistent with subparagraph 11.1.1 above, it shall, if required by the architect or owner, be uncovered for the architect's inspection. If such work conforms strictly with this contract, costs of uncovering and property replacement shall by change order be charged to the owner. If such work does not strictly conform with this contract, the contractor shall pay the costs of uncovering and proper replacement. 11.2 Correcting Work 11.2.1 The contractor shall immediately proceed to correct work rejected by the architect as defective or failing to conform to this contract. The contractor shall pay all costs and expenses associated with correcting such rejected work, including any additional testing and inspections, and reimbursement to the owner for the architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby. 11.2.2 If within one (1) year after final completion of the work any of the work is found to be defective or not in accordance with this contract, the contractor shall correct it promptly upon receipt of written notice from the owner. This obligation shall survive final payment by the owner and termination of this contract. With respect to work first performed and completed after substantial completion, this one-year obligation to specifically correct defective and FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 14 nonconforming work shall be extended by the period of time which elapses between substantial completion and completion of the subject work. 11.2.3 Nothing contained in this paragraph 11.2 shall establish any period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the contractor has either under this contract or under the laws of the State of Florida. Establishment of the one-year time period in subparagraph 11.2.2 relates only to the duty of the contractor to specifically correct the work. 11.3 Owner May Accept Defective or Nonconforming Work 11.3.1 If the owner chooses to accept defective or nonconforming work, the owner may do so. In such event, the contract price shall be reduced by the greater of (a) the reasonable cost of removing and correcting the defective or nonconforming work and (b) the difference between the fair market value of the project as constructed and the fair market value of the project had it not been constructed in such a manner as to include defective or nonconforming work. If the remaining portion of the unpaid contract price, if any, is insufficient to compensate the owner for its acceptance of defective or nonconforming work, the contractor shall, upon written demand from the owner, pay the owner such remaining compensation for accepting defective or nonconforming work. ARTICLE XII CONTRACT TERMINATION 12.1 Termination by the Contractor 12.1.1 If the work is stopped for a period of ninety (90) days by an order of any court or other public authority, or as a result of an act of the Government, through no fault of the contractor or any person or entity working directly or indirectly for the contractor, the contractor may, upon ten (10) days' written notice to the owner and the architect, terminate performance under this contract and recover from the owner payment for the actual reasonable expenditures of the contractor (as limited in Subparagraph 10.3.2 above) for all work executed and for materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery actually purchased or rented solely for the work, less any salvage value of any such items. 12.1.2 If the owner shall persistently or repeatedly fail to perform any material obligation to the contractor for a period of fifteen (15) days after receiving written notice from the contractor of its intent to terminate hereunder, the contractor may terminate performance under this contract by written notice to the architect and the owner. In such event, the contractor shall be entitled to recover from the owner as though the owner had terminated the contractor's performance under this contract for convenience pursuant to subparagraph 12.2.1 hereunder. 12.2 Termination by the Owner 12.2.1 For Convenience: 12.2.1.1 The owner may for any reason whatsoever terminate performance under this contract by the contractor for convenience. The owner shall give written notice of such termination to the contractor specifying when termination becomes effective. 12.2.1.2 The contractor shall incur no further obligations in connection with the work and the contractor shall stop work when such termination becomes effective. The contractor shall also terminate outstanding orders and subcontracts. The contractor shall settle the liabilities and claims arising out of the termination of subcontracts and orders. The owner may direct the FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 15 contractor to assign the contractor's rights, title and interest under terminated orders or subcontracts to the owner or its designee. 12.2.1.3 The contractor shall transfer title and deliver to the owner such completed or partially completed work and materials, equipment, parts, fixtures, information and contract rights as the contractor has. 12.2.1.4 (a) The contractor shall submit termination claim to the owner and the architect specifying the amounts due because of the termination for convenience together with costs, pricing or other data required by the architect. If the contractor fails to file a termination claim within one (1) year from the effective date of termination, the owner shall pay the contractor, an amount derived in accordance with subparagraph (c) below. (b) The owner and the contractor may agree to the compensation, if any, due to the contractor hereunder. (c) Absent agreement to the amount due to the contractor, the owner shall pay the contractor the following amounts: (i) Contract prices for labor, materials, equipment and other services accepted under this contract; (ii) Reasonable costs incurred in preparing to perform and in performing the terminated portion of the work, and in terminating the contractor's performance, plus a fair and reasonable allowance for overhead and profit thereon (such profit shall not include anticipated profit or consequential damages); provided however, that if it appears that the contractor would have not profited or would have sustained a loss if the entire contract would have been completed, no profit shall be allowed or included and the amount of compensation shall be reduced to reflect the anticipated rate of loss, if any; (iii) Reasonable costs of settling and paying claims arising out of the termination of subcontracts or orders pursuant to subparagraph 12.2.1.2 of this paragraph. These costs shall not include amounts paid in accordance with other provisions hereof. The total sum to be paid the contractor under this subparagraph 12.2.1 shall not exceed the total contract price as properly adjusted, shall be reduced by the amount of payments otherwise made, and shall in no event include duplication of payment. 12.2.2 For Cause: 12.2.2.1 If the contractor persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to prosecute the work in a timely manner, supply enough properly skilled workers, supervisory personnel or proper equipment or materials, or if it fails to make prompt payment to subcontractors or for materials or labor, or persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of a material provision of this contract, then the owner may by written notice to the contractor, without prejudice to any other right or remedy, terminate the employment of the contractor and take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the contractor and may finish the work by whatever methods it may deem expedient. In such case, the contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 16 12.2.2.2 If the unpaid balance of the contract price exceeds the cost of finishing the work, including compensation for the architect's additional services and expenses made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the contractor. If such cost exceeds the unpaid balance, the contractor shall pay the difference to the owner. This obligation for payment shall survive the termination of the contract. 12.2.2.3 In the event the employment of the contractor is terminated by the owner for cause pursuant to subparagraph 12.2.2 and it is subsequently determined by a Court of competent jurisdiction that such termination was without cause, such termination shall thereupon be deemed a termination for convenience under subparagraph 12.2.1 and the provisions of subparagraph 12.2.1 shall apply. ARTICLE XIII INSURANCE 13.1 The insurance required under this contract is set forth in Exhibit B. Exhibit B is attached and incorporated into this contract. ARTICLE XIV MISCELLANEOUS 14.1 Governing Law 14.1.1 This contract is governed by the laws of the State of Florida. Venue for any litigation arising under this contract must be in Monroe County, Florida. 14.2 Successors and Assigns 14.2.1 The owner and contractor bind themselves, their successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreement and obligations contained in this contract. The contractor shall not assign this contract without written consent of the owner. 14.3 Surety Bonds 14.3.1 The contractor shall furnish the public construction bond in the amount and form set forth in Section 255.05, Florida Statutes. 14.4 Ethics Clause 14.4.1 The contractor warrants that it has not employed, retained or otherwise had act on its behalf any former County officer or employee subject to the prohibition of Section 2 of Ordinance No. 010-1990 or any County officer or employee in violation of Section 3 of Ordinance No. 020-1990. For breach or violation of this provision, the owner may, in its discretion, terminate this contract without liability and may also, in its discretion, deduct from the contract or purchase price, or otherwise recover the full amount of any fee, commission, percentage, gift, or consideration paid to the former County officer or employee. 14.5 Public Entity Crime Statement 14.5.1 A person or affiliate who has been placed on the convicted vendor list following a conviction for public entity crime may not submit a bid on a contract to provide any goods or services to a public entity, may not submit a bid on a contract with a public entity for the construction or repair of a public building or public work, may not submit bids on leases of real FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 17 property to public entity, may not be awarded or perform work as a contractor, supplier, subcontractor, or consultant under a contract with any public entity, and may not transact business with any public entity in excess of the threshold amount provided in Section 287.017 of the Florida Statutes, for CATEGORY TWO for a period of 36 months from the date of being placed on the convicted vendor list. 14.6 Assignment of the Architect's Duties 14.6.1 The duties of the architect under this contract may be assigned by the owner, at his discretion, to a construction manager selected by the owner. 14.7 Trench Safety 14.7.1 If applicable to the project, the contractor shall comply with all relevant provisions of the Trench Safety Act (Secs. 553.60-553.64, Fla. Stat.). 14.8 Contingency 14.8.1 Monroe County's performance and obligation to pay under this contract is contingent upon an annual appropriation by the Board of County Commissioners. 14.9 Effective Date 14.9.1 This contract will take effect on the date of the signature of the last party to sign. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, each party has caused thi Agreement to be executed by its d a+.tX prized repGsentative this liz� day of P4� �/�`( 1999. ,,�� BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS A st: i.0.1�ihFT . N K0,�IHAGE, Clerk OF MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA ��'' - — By: C. Deputy Clerk �— Date 0-7 - a 1 — 9 9 (SEAL) Attest: By: Title: - By Mayor/Chairman CONTRACTOR Lodge Construction, Inc. By: Title: APPROVED As TO FORM A GAt B Rog RTN N. w DATE FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 18 EXHIBIT A CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Document Date FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 19 SECTION 00110 PROPOSAL FORM BID TO: MONROE COUNTY BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS c/o PURCHASING DEPARTMENT PUBLIC SERVICE BUILDING, ROOM 002 5100 COLLEGE ROAD, STOCK ISLAND KEY WEST, FLORIDA 33040 BID FROM: Lodge Construction, Inc. 2161-B McGregor Blvd. Fort Myers, Florida 33901 The undersigned, having carefully examined the Work and reference Drawings, Specifications, Proposal, and Addenda thereto and other Contract Documents for the construction of: and having carefully examined the site where the Work is to be performed, having become familiarwith all local conditions including labor affecting the cost thereof, and having familiarized himself with material availability, Federal, State, and Local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations affecting performance of the Work, does hereby propose to furnish all labor, mechanics, superintendents, tools, material, equipment, transportation services, and all incidentals necessary to perform and complete said Work and work incidental hereto, in a workman -like manner, in conformance with said Drawings, Specifications, and other Contract Documents including Addenda issued thereto. The undersigned further certifies that he has personally inspected the actual location of where the Work is to be performed, together with the local sources of supply and that he understands the conditions under which the Work is to be performed. The successful bidder shall assume the risk of any and all costs and delays arising from the existence of any subsurface or other latent physical condition which could be reasonably anticipated by reference to documentary information provided and made available, and from inspection and examination of the site. 941 Z ;U'le - "ew dollars. (Total Base Bid - words) Alternate No. 1: The Base Bid on the first floor, includes wood flooring, glued to a DURA- CAP substrate. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to eliminate the wood flooring system, and substitute thin set quarry tile and base over a leveling coat of DURA- CAP. Deduct from the Base Bid Words BID PROPOSAL 0014D-2 2. Alternate No. Z The Base Bid includes fire resistant glazing In interior fire rated transoms, fire rated glass wall systems, fire rated sidelights and fire rated glazed doors. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to omit the specified fire resistant glazing and substitute wire glazing, diamond* pattern, Installed as required by code for a fire rated assembly. //,, Deduct from the Base Bid Cfl!/mly, 9/a.-W w.,Q,,or Dollars . . / Words 3. Aftemate No. 3: The Base Bid includes aluminum fencing with concrete masonry unit piers on auger cast piles 4'-0" into grade, along the west, south and east property lines. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to omit all the aMminum, fenrirn. p iq- ^ piles, and piers, and leave the exi Ing chain link fence a ring the wdst prc:-•�- - Deduct from the Base Bid / ` - C 16-14116diaf Oo;;ars Words 4. Alternate No. 4: In lieu of Alternate No.3 above, state the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to omit the aluminum fencing, auger cast piles, and piers, from the south and east property lines only. Under this alternative, new fencing will be installed at the west property line only. . Deduct from the Base Bid 5. Alternate No. 5: The Base Bid Includes 314" BC PT plywood, installed horizontally, at partition types 11,12 and 14. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to omit the horizontal 3/4" BC PT at partition types 112 And 14. Deduct from the Base Bid 49itie4o, Dollars words 6. Alternate No. 6: The Base Bid includes providing one rotary screw chiller and Installing two roof mounted screw chillers.. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid by deleting the purchase of this rotary screw chiller, only. Installation of the two chillers and associated piping, and wiring re ins as part of the Base Bid. Deduct from the Base Bid 4&16"gl ?1/P /rl Dollars Words 7. Alternate No. 7: The Base Bid includes payment of construction permit fees required by the City of Key West. State the amount to be deducted from the base bid should the City waive these fees. Permit fees are calculated by the Building Department at the rate of $24.00 per $1,000.00 of valuation. r, Deduct from the Base Bid Words 8. Alternate No. 8: The Base Bid on the second floor, includes wood flooring on a plywood subfloor. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to delete the wood flooring and substitute the specified carpet over pad. Under this alternate the wood base will be changed to 4 inch rubber cove base. Deduct from the Base BidyM11eP.a7 SrJOl/-3�c�� Dollars Words 9. Alternate No. 9: The Base Bid includes all construction and finishes for "Tower West", the two story break room tower. State the amount to be deducted from BID PROPOSAL 00110-3 the base bid to delete the break room tower in its entirety, including foundations. Landscaping will be modified as to location, but types and number of plants will not be changed. Under this alternate, install the typical window unit complete with impact resisting glazing at the. second floor openings and locate door No. 216 accessing the courtyard, Including Its landing and romp, at the opening ounfently accessina Room 1-216. Deduct from the Base Bid 10. Alternate No. 10: The Base Bid includes glass transoms as shown on the drawings. State the amount to be deducted from the base bid to delete glass transoms from corridor walls north and south of the central courtyard running from column line 4 to column line 8, a total of eight (8) 16 foot bays, leaving the wail open above. Therefore, these partitions, Type 7 under the base bid will become Type 4 partitions under this alternate. Also, change partition Type 6 to Type 4 at the east wail of Room 2-269. / Deduct from the Base Bid G`t -11111ekZSd_.0_a Dollars Words 11. Alternate No. 11: State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to change all type "D" doors to type "E" doors. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words I acknowledge receipt of Addenda No.(s) No. 1 Dated 6/ 2 3/ 9 9 No. 7 Dated 711 19o No. 3 Dated 7/ S/ 9 9 No. Dated No. Dated I have included pages 2 through 6 of the Bid Proposal which entails the Proposal Form_�EX , the required Bid Security XX , the Non -Collusion Affidavitx_, and the Lobbying and Conflict of Interest Clause XX. In addition, I have included a certified copy of Contractor's License. BID PROPOSAL 00110-4 Mailing Address: 2161-B McGregor Blvd. Fort Myers, Florida 3390.1 Phone Number. (941) 332-4371 Date: July 15, 1999 Signed: ichael T. Dunn (Name) Lodge Construction, Inc. Vice President (Title) Witness: � / (Seal) BID PROPOSAL 00110-5 SECTION 00110 NON -COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT I, Michael T. Dunn of the city of Fort Myers to law on my oath, and under penalty of perjury, depose and say that: 1. lam Vice President of the firm of age Construction, Inc. the bidder making the Proposal for the project described in the notice for calling for bids for. Resoration & Adaptive Reuse of the Gato Cigar Factory Key West, Florida and that I executed the said proposal with full authority to do so; 2, the prices in this bid have been arrived at Independently without collusion, consultation, communication or agreement for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor, 3, unless otherwise required by law, the prices which have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder prior to bid opening, directly or indirectly, to any other bidder or to any competitor, and 4. no attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to Induce any other person, partnership or corporation to submit, or not to submit, a bid for the purpose of restricting competition; 5. the statements contained in this affidavit are true and correct, and made with full knowledge that Monroe County relies upon the truth of the statements contained in this affidavit In awarding contracts for said project. ' (Signature of I�der) Michael T. Dunn (Date) July 15, 1999 M STATE OF: F103Zida COUNTY OF: Lee PERSONALLY APPEARED BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, Michael T. Dunn who, after first being sworn by me, (name of individual signing) affixed his/her signature in the space provided above on this 15th day of July Terri IN. Vought r Now patjic. Stun of Florida b.mlilsion No. Cc Cooums W Exa 11/30r10f]S 1 a a0 A. waw sVAN s eandno co. »oo�+r+or�nr My commission expires: - NOTARY PUBLIC 00110-6 BID PROPOSAL SECTION 00110 ETHICS CLAUSE LOBBYING AND CONFLICT OF INTEREST CLAUSE SWORN STATEMENT UNDER ORDINANCE NO.010-1990 MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA Lodge Construction, Inc. (Company) M » warrants that held has not employed, retained or otherwise had act on his/its behalf any former County officer or employee in violation of Section 2 of Ordinance No. 010-1990 or any County officer or employee in violation of Section 3 of Ordinance No. 010-1990. For breach or violation of this provision the County may, in its discretion, terminate this contract without liability and may also, in its discretion, deduct from the contract or purchase price, or otherwise recover, the full amount of any fee, commission, percentage, gift, or consideration paid to the former County officer or employee". I STATE OF: Florida COUNTY OF: Lee Subscribed and sworn to (or affirmed) before me on Michael T. Dunn or has produced identification) My commission expires: ,µr Terri M. Vought Notary Public, State of Florida 0 CowniWcm No. CC 6BV45 14 pow My Cmani tim Exp. lU3Q=l t 40&J r=Aff F& wmw swwo. a eanai�- co. (Signature) ZM:LllT. Dunn - Vice Presider Date: July 15, 1999 July 15, 1999-- —� (name of affisnt). HelShe is personally known to m as niiiiaatfatf—jc�� O NOTARY PUBLIC BID PROPOSAL 00110-7 = DRUG -FREE WORKPLACE FORM The undersigned vendor in accordance with Florida Statute 287.087 hereby certifies- that: Lodge construction, Inc - (Name of Business) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. 2. Inform employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. 3. Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). 4. ' In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or polo contendere to, any violation of Chapter 893 (Florida Statutesror of any controlled substance law of the United States or any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. 5. Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, or any employee who is so convicted. 6. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug -free workplace through implementation 'bf this section. As the person authorized to sign the statement, I certify that this firm complies fully with the above requirements. Bidders Si atar� r President Date July 15, 1999 BID PROPOSAL 00110-8 00310 i SUPPLEMENTARY BID FORM FOR UNIT PRICES TO: Monroe County hereinafter called "Owner' 1. The undersigned, having examined .the proposed Contract Documents titled: Restoration and Adaptive Use of The Gato Cigar Factory Monroe County 1100 Simonton Street Key West, Florida 33040 and having visited the site and examined the conditions affecting the Work, hereby proposes and agrees to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and appliances, and to perform operations necessary to complete the Work as required by said proposed Contract Documents. The following prices include all General Contractor mark-up and are net to the Owner. 2. Should additional concrete repairs be required, the undersigned proposes the following unit prices. A. Overhead spelled concrete slab patching not requiring complete slab replacement. 1. Unit price for each additional sq. ft. of slab area: ziwl C,--� DOLLARS ($ Iff Od 1 B. Spalled concrete beam repairs per lineal foot of beam. 1. Unit price aer lineal foot of beam- DOLLARS ($ % -1Sy d C. Spalled concrete column repairs. 1. Unit price per lineal foot of column. Ae Xa,*.Vea Ile DOLLARS ($ 1��• SUPPLEMENTARY BID FORM FOR UNIT PRICES 00310-12 D. Cracks in concrete repaired using epoxy injection methods. 1. Unit price per lineal foot of crack. DOLLARS ($ �a• D 3. Should the Owner elect to add additional back mounted acoustic wail Oanel, the undersigned proposes the following unit price: A. Acoustic panel in place, complete. 1. Unit price per sq. ft. DOLLARS ($ 4. The undersigned understands and agrees to comply with and to be bound by any instructions to bidders issued for this Work. 5 The undersigned acknowledges receipt of Addenda: NO. 1 DATED: 6123.L9 9 NO. DATED:_. NO.7-DATED:7jij9 9 NO. DATED:__.___ NO._3_DATED: j %9 NO. DATED:_ BIDDER: LAdge Construction, Inc. BY: Dunn - V c esident ADDRESS: 2161-B McGrecror Blvd Fort Myers, Florida 33901 LICENSE NO.: CG-CO59635 LICENSE TYPE: General Contractor Bid dated this 15 day of JulY , 19-22-. SUPPLEMENTARY BID FORM FOR UNIT PRICES 00310-13 A ••I (nX D T Z D DDM .. ,, I; CIE C M MMIZ vcv oy Z Z m C-n n i = r= '' d in �� m mIn '. v, ,n �i o I%.1 'r+Nvr o3 O )' -1-+CO o0 W Ol z c p O i O -4 u -c m m 3 e2 ..� Cl -e p o O �s a,e�3MM NGIIWO 0 C f! O On a7Oz z O O z o c M r GI-i -< � .o o x O ra, o T c o a OOo O W a7 —f -� "' O WA r ,-4 <'v O 3 O O M %O %O w � � c7 m z z vs .p m O �= w z m D U 3 O c� %O C O A O O XT r z O m r) s IA a s,,,, III m O WC-)uo l itgNp, n� � I- ttl aANxf'"�:' a.N71(1 r .,, n w -am ..�M,iidi1(N m _ to v !? 0 Co c N C Yi .7� -•1 O .� ZinX o ,- � Itl V) O n (;) x L' -f0„y L)OU! 0 Z „to nmmc rn,-C 6 :: � in •o � r 71-13:p til w o n'1v-< o f 2: % o w utz_. 7 O O � 41 U 1•ii --•1 10/01/1999 16:31 305-295-5021 MONROE TAX COLLECTOR PAGE 01 9 -r tj 1) 0 MONROE OCCURA I IONAL TAX STATE OF FLORIDA -,L V T 3(J, 2 U U U MUST BE DISPLAYED IN CONSPICUOUS PLACE ROOMS SEATS EMPLOYEES I At Nt:w I AX I 1JANSUf4l 30140 CONTRACTORS )T4J(;lNAL I AX 35-00 M43 C T Y ou - COUNTY or MONROE ei I I- NAL I I I -200o Cq5 LODGE cONSIRUSTION INC T ("ut I,F-Gf ION 0i DLINN CABO] L il< PRES QUAL li, 2161 MCGREGOR BLVD .14 FI MYERS FL 33901 � 7RFCOMES A TAX HARRY F KNIG141,CFC, TAX COLLECTOR 1PIWIIENVALIDATEOpo EIUX 1IZ9, KEY WEST FL 33U41-1129 THIS IS ONLY A TAX. YOU Mll'; PAID 08/16/99 2817483.UUU1 35-OU MEET ALL. COUNTY PLANNII'l- AND ZONING REQUIREMENTS. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ----- z u IM ' _r :a r!, tsJ r J a: ,L < ?_ O GC:t N trio rn re 0 Az C U: .J LL Q LL IN 1L :,v O aT } M l- FW.. tool t— wD N :�Q +-+ z s In to In O ash ra• ' C10 r,_ t•) it 1._ t:1r.OPQ U) U N'•, i u R 1+7 t+r co a _ CM r.t• rJ,l.; (Y. U-) rr W . i mu LO _ !7 FO g a J J W • 3 g m W ft W Q m a g d M G C� 0 t.•1 rt: 1-4 ..z 0 Z -,. w0 a ra 1•- ra'.'0: W I-1-rtJ 0!nrt(U�;1 +-++t C'a%_C9t :C1'' tt ! l !1 2 .. w ri ��_Ir��L•. .1 H EXHIBIT B INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 20 1996 Edition MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA RISK MANAGEMENT POLICY AND PROCEDURES CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION MANUAL General Insurance Requirements for Contractors and Subcontractors Prior to the commencement of work governed by this contract (including the pre -staging of personnel and material), the Contractor shall obtain, at his/her own expense, insurance as specified in the attached schedules, which are made part of this contract. The Contractor will ensure that the insurance obtained will extend protection to all Sub -Contractors engaged by the Contractor. As an alternative, the Contractor may require all Subcontractors to obtain insurance consistent with the attached schedules. The Contractor will not be permitted to commence work governed by this contract (including pre -staging of personnel and material) until satisfactory evidence of the required insurance has been furnished to the County as specified below. Delays in the commencement of work, resulting from the failure of the Contractor to provide satisfactory evidence of the required insurance, shall not extend deadlines specified in this contract and any penalties and failure to perform assessments shall be imposed as if the work commenced on the specified date and time, except for the Contractor's failure to provide satisfactory evidence. The Contractor shall maintain the required insurance throughout the entire term of this contract and any extensions specified in any attached schedules. Failure to comply with this provision may result in the immediate suspension of all work until the required insurance has been reinstated or replaced. Delays in the completion of work resulting from the failure of the Contractor to maintain the required insurance shall not extend deadlines specified in this contract and any penalties and failure to perform assessments shall be imposed as if the work had not been suspended, except for the Contractor's failure to maintain the required insurance. The Contractor shall provide, to the County, as satisfactory evidence of the required insurance, either • Certificate of Insurance or • A certified copy of the actual insurance policy. The County, at its sole option, has the right to request a certified copy of any or all insurance policies required by this contract. All insurance policies must specify that they are not subject to cancellation, nonrenewal, material change, or reduction in coverage unless a minimum of thirty (30) days prior notification is given to the County by the insurer. The acceptance and/or approval of the Contractor's insurance shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from any liability or obligation assumed under this contract or imposed by law. The Monroe County Board of County Commissioners, its employees and officials will be included as "Additional Insured" on all policies, except for Workers' Compensation. Administrative Instruction #4709.3 1996 Edition In addition, the County will be named as an Additional Insured and Loss Payee on all policies covering County -owned property. Any deviations from these General Insurance Requirements must be requested in writing on the County prepared form entitled "Request for Waiver of Insurance Requirements" and approved by Monroe County Risk Management. Administrative Instruction #4709.3 C UNTY JMONROE —� KEY WEST FLORIDA 33040 (305)294-4641 Apaw, .Monroe County Risk Management 5100 College Road Key West, FL 33040 (305)292-4542 Voice (305)295-4364 Fax Mr. Michael Dunn, Vice President Lodge Construction, Inc. 2161 McGregor Blvd., Unit B Ft Meyers, FL 33901 Re: Request for Waiver Dear Sir/Madam: BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS MAYOR Wilhelmina Harvey, District I Mayor Pro tem Shirley Freeman, District 3 George Neugent, District 2 Nora Williams, District 4 Mary Kay Reich, District 5 September 16, 1999 vvrvJ►RIl�rrtl�r I r �rrMENT SEP2o1999 TIME; `?ECEIVED BY;a) I am in receipt of your correspondence dated 9/10/99. I appreciate your concerns. After a thorough thought process and review, I have made the following decisions with regards to the insurances. These will be of benefit to both parties involved in this contract. I will need a Builders Risk/Hazard insurance policy in the amount of $4,500,000. This Builders Risk/Hazard policy does not need to include wind or flood coverage. I will also require a General Liability policy in the amount of $5,000,000 combined single limit. I believe these conditions, with a Hold Harmless agreement for the BOCC are reasonable and fair based on the amount of this contract. Once again, thank you for your concerns and I look forward to meeting you during this project. Sincerely, A. Wayne Robertson Risk Manager Cc: Steve Piazza A(,;QR[� M i:W. Ywwa•ak..:+.ri Y k a•airn+a. a 1� 1 M � ak . ,.a>o.....>:af',+6:lilYAtf:Ott.3.YltalYY.' !k !dkl7PK• R•w'd :WA•.lSf16M.4.tl �v+iooucr� i ALTAMURA,MARS 11 &AS, 0C P.O. SOX 60287 FORT MYERS, FL 33906-6287 IN$VnCD Lodge. GorimLrUCI-i.on, Inc. Cabot & Syivia Dunn 2161 Mc:Gxegor Blvri flB For.L Myers, FL 33901 ,rli ALTER THE DATE (MM(OOW) 9/M1999 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERA4E,,,, COMPANY A RELIANCE INSURANCE COMPANY Wmpokw g EMPLOYERS SELF INSURER CO .0MPANY a LEXINGTON INSURANCE C OLWANY D I I OF IS TO,, CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE I ISTF:il BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE 114SUREO NAMEU ABOVE F'Of4 'I rlfr Nx ICY PFizIT)0 INDCATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY liP.QUIREME'NT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT Uri (A HEN iXX.)IIMFPNT WITH RESPEOT TO WHICH THI6 CERTIFIGAIr MAY Blii iseurn Oft MAY PERTAIN, THE iNSURANCE AFPUHUtU tdY IHI_ VOLICIF 5 O SC411.4f-n HEREIN 16 AUSACT TO ALL THE TERMS, ti:xcLuslclaa AtaG cnunlTtntsn e�c al ]e:IA nr�_Inlr , IMII R �Ilawra LdAV I Inter nrrN ezenilcrn av aAm r.I A,LLu L O TYPE INSURANCE POLICY POLJC•Y E"PWCTIVI DATEIMM/0DW) POLICY EXPIRATION DATEIMM)DDIYY) UMITE i ITY I aENENA,L At3ryRE0ATE .. E] F Q O O, 000 i X, COMMERCIAL OEt�CRA1 LW41tITY ,! V pRC3pUrrb .[ QMPmI* ACC E 1. , 0 0 0 000 cLA11ne, MADe n U i ul PMStewru. A AC(V INJURY 11,000,000 A l OWNI It K A r r%TRACTQR'S TROT 3 N 16 5 319 0 1 1/ 18 / 9 H 1 1/ 1 8/ 9 9 kAI:M cx:L:UNNIlNC:s $1 0 0 0 0 0 0 ~ _ rIRC DAMAOC IAnY ont file) 3 5 0 000 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO COM13114CD SiNOLC LIMIT S 1/ n 0 o, 000 AL6 UYYNWU ALOOS I NO1111. Y INjukr S 1 X Rf;HPrAJ, Fr,) AIITt)5 AVTC S N 16 5 319 0 1 1/ �'1 lj 0/ 9 liar PEfun) I HIRED =':� 1 / i 1 1/ 1 9 BODILY INJURY I I r NnraovvNeD Atrtos ` (Oat acM aant) � r, Bea•` OARAOE LJABILITY I sNvAtll'q �C� L 1fj' k PROPERTY DAMAGE i auto oN( Y . FA AC:cIDe147 : i OTHER DIANAUTO ONLY sCLs3a`�a»:Ti i �tE t ... ACCIDENT i 1 Cl>/`�FEACH . J AaUAI--IZAT'fi S j EXCESS LIABILITY P�� AX .• F.AC.H OC.CCINNf NCEi 33,000,000 ; •' A CIARRP AV:RM C�1 �,�1 y0 i11/1I1 /:�i3111./��1 Q�� A+3r�Ri(7ATC S3 �Q0 0�Q 3 '' UiHkiR 1 WW UAIBNYL�A FORM lQ I f WORNSRS COMPENSATION AND X TORY LIMR'S H• EMPLOVERS' LIABILITY ' "_ LL LACI I AQQDENT i 1 i) U 0, 0 d I I IL F QU/lkiLIUN, INCL 8301.0196 04101199 01 / 9 9 0 4/ 0 1/ 0 0 31 0 0 0 0 o o •. E. D15EA.6E- P01 ICY I ]MIT -.--• PARTNER$1EXECIIi.Vh ]• OOHC Nfi A.Yek HD.CL I .#. ...�. - ..., S A 0 0 0 0 F.I, RIP.FAHI: • LA LWLUYLL: OTHRR BUILDERS RTSK 8523093 10/04/99 10/04/UU $4,3:30,000-cIILETED ' C VALUE DESCRIPTION Or OPERATWN3(LOCAT19NBrvSHICLESr91-SCa.AL IT EMU LIMITS 311OWN ARE T140SI IN EFFECT AT POLICY INr-.r;PTTON. *30 DAYS RE1. WORKERS COMPENSATION -• STATE OV PL OPERATIONS ONLY. ! MONROF; COUNTY IS '1.1E;TED AS AN ADDITIONALINSURED AND CERTTFTCAIVE HOLDER. i SHOULD ANY OR THE ABOVE OESCRIBEO PO4I0498 SE CANCELLED SEPORE THE MUP ROE COTJNTY UU(:(; EXPIRATION VAT& THEREOF, THE ISSUWO COMPANY WILL INOBAVOR TO MAIL 5100 COLLEQ; l ROAD 'A,1 0 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CYsNIU14ATB MOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, KL Y WEST, FT, 33040 But FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIi)ATION OR UAEILITY OF ANY KING U THE COMPANY, ITS A T OR RER SENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPR .IaI FA f 1� d f seAfsa� Yt s i 4 a ti °Inks s aros1k�;, �' i�fl�teLlsy�y L a s In d> I .r .� r 7 ! . .40 e.. ,,. m!'..vs� ,...'1 l/l#1 `81ZZ££ <= tr9016Btr1tr6 Wd£tr tr 66 0£ 6 !HSUVR b'limvilb :AS iN30 1 abed N011onui SN03 391301E V80168V 1 V6 MA I WdCP = V0 66-0E-daS pan i aaaa WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT: The Gato Building BETWEEN MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA AND Lodge Construction, Inc. Prior to the commencement of work governed by this contract, the Contractor shall obtain Workers' Compensation Insurance with limits sufficient to respond to the applicable state statutes. In addition, the Contractor shall obtain Employers' Liability Insurance with limits of not less than: $1,000,000 Bodily Injury by Accident $1,000,000 Bodily Injury by Disease, policy limits $1,000,000 Bodily Injury by Disease, each employee Coverage shall be maintained throughout the entire term of the contract. Coverage shall be provided by a company or companies authorized to transact business in the state of Florida. If the Contractor has been approved by the Florida's Department of Labor, as an authorized self - insurer, the County shall recognize and honor the Contractor's status. The Contractor may be required to submit a Letter of Authorization issued by the Department of Labor and a Certificate of Insurance, providing details on the Contractor's Excess Insurance Program. If the contractor participates in a self-insurance fund, a Certificate of Insurance will be required. In addition, the Contractor may be required to submit updated financial statements from the fund upon request from the County. WC3 GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT: The Gato ding MONROE COr4TY, FLORIDA A D Lodge Cons ruction",\4nc. Prior to the commencement of work governed by Is contract, the Co Insurance. Coverage shall be maintained throughooN the life of the co • Premises Operation • Products and Completed Operations • Blanket Contractual Liability • Personal Injury Liability • Expanded Definition of Pr Damage The minimum limits acceptable all be: $1,000,000 Combined ingle Limit (CSL) If split limits are provided, the m nimum limits acc ptable shall be: Sol obtain General Liability rd Include, as a minimum: $ 500,00 per Person $ 1,000,00 per Occurre ce $ 100,00 Property Da age An Occurrence For policy is prefe )coverage is provided on a Claims Made policy, its provisions should include cov age for claims filed on or after the effective date of this contract. In addition, the period for which clai ns may be reported should extend for a minimum of twelve (12) months following the acceptance of work y the County. The\Vlonroe County issue to satisfy the of County Commissioners shall be named as Additional Insured on all policies requirements. Administrative Instruction GI-3 GEN_LIAB.DOC #4709.2 VEHICLE LIABILITY INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT: The Gato Building BETWEEN MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA AND Lodge Construction, Inc. Recognizing that the work governed by this contract requires the use of vehicles, the Contractor, prior to the commencement of work, shall obtain Vehicle Liability Insurance. Coverage shall be maintained throughout the life of the contract and include, as a minimum, liability coverage for: • Owned, Non -Owned, and Hired Vehicles The minimum limits acceptable shall be: $1,000,000 Combined single Limit (CSL) If split limits are provided, the minimum limits acceptable shall be: $ 500,000 per Person $1,000,000 per Occurrence $ 100,000 Property Damage The Monroe County Board of County Commissioners shall be named as Additional Insured on all policies issued to satisfy the above requirements. Administrative Instruction VL3 VEH-LIAB.DOC #4709.2 BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT: The Gato Building BETWEEN MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA AND Lodge Construction, Inc. The Contractor shall be required to purchase and maintain, throughout the life of the contract, and until the project is accepted by the County, Builder's Risk Insurance on an All Risk of Loss form. coverage shall include: Theft Aircraft Hail Smoke Explosion Fire Riot Collapse Civil Commotion Flood Vehicles The policy limits shall be no less than the amount of the finished project and coverage shall be provided on a completed value basis. Property located on the construction premises, which is intended to become a permanent part of the building, shall be included as property covered. The policy shall be endorsed permitting the County to occupy the building prior to completion without effecting the coverage. The Monroe County Board of County Commissioners shall be named as Additional Insured and Loss Payee. Administrative Instruction BR2 BLD_RISK.DOC #4709.2 1996 Edition MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA RISK MANAGEMENT POLICY AND PROCEDURES CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION MANUAL WAIVER OF INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS There will be times when it will be necessary, or in the best interest of the County, to deviate from the standard insurance requirements specified within this manual. Recognizing this potential, and acting on the advice of the County Attorney, the Board of County Commissioners has granted authorization to Risk Management to waive and modify various insurance provisions. Specifically excluded from this authorization is the right to waive: • The County as being named as an Additional Insured —If a letter from the Insurance Company (not the Agent) is presented, stating that they are unable or unwilling to name the County as an Additional Insured, Risk Management has been granted the authority to waive this provision. and • The Indemnification and Hold Harmless provisions Waiving of insurance provisions could expose the County to economic loss. For this reason, every attempt should be made to obtain the standard insurance requirements. If a waiver or a modification is desired, a Request for Waiver of Insurance Requirements form should be completed and submitted for consideration with the proposal. After consideration by Risk Management and if approved, the form will be returned, to the County Attorney who will submit the Waiver with the other contract documents for execution by the Clerk of the Courts. Should Risk Management deny the Waiver Request, the other party may file an appeal with the County Administrator or the Board of County Commissioners, who retains the final decision -making authority. Administrative Instruction WAIVER.DOC #4709.3 1996 Edition MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA Request For Waiver of Insurance Requirements It is requested that the insurance requirements, as specified in the County's Schedule of Insurance Requirements, be waived or modified on the following contract: Contractor: Contract for: Address of Contractor: Phone: Scope of Work: Reason for Waiver: Policies Waiver will apply to: Signature of Contractor: Approved Not Approved Risk Management: Date: County Administrator appeal: Approved Not Approved Date: Board of County Commissioners appeal: Approved Not Approved Meeting Date: Administrative Instruction #4709.3 WAIV_REQ.DOC SPECIFICATIONS for THE GATO BUILDING MONROE COUNTY PREPARED BY _. BENDER & ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS 410 ANGELA STREET ,mm KEY WEST, FLORIDA 33040 H.W. KEISTER ASSOCIATES INC. 2119 UNIVERSITY BOULEVARD NORTH, JACKSONVILLE, FLORIDA 32211 HEALEY & ASSOCIATES ENGINEERING 120 VENETIAN WAY SUITE 16 MERRITT ISLAND, FLORIDA 32953 1 JUNE 1999 SPECIFICATIONS for THE GATO BUILDING MONROE COUNTY PREPARED BY BENDER & ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS 410 ANGELA STREET KEY WEST, FLORIDA 33040 H.W. KEISTER ASSOCIATES INC. 2119 UNIVERSITY BOULEVARD NORTH, JACKSONVILLE, FLORIDA 32211 HEALEY & ASSOCIATES ENGINEERING 120 VENETIAN WAY SUITE 16 MERRITT ISLAND, FLORIDA 32953 1 JUNE 1999 GATO BUILDING- MONROE COUNTY GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. 2. 3. 4. Bidding Documents Section 00030 Notice of Calling for Bids Section 00100 Instruction to Bidders Section 00110 Proposal Form Section 00163 Pre -Bid Substitutions Section 00220 Geotechnical Data (Not used) Section 00230 Site Survey Section 00300 Scope of Work Section 00310 Unit Prices Section 00350 Milestone Schedule/Liquidated Damages Section 00440 Substitution Listing Insurance Check List Lead Based Paint Inspection Contract Documents Section 00500 Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Section 00501 Public Construction Bond Conditions Section 00750 General Conditions Section 00800 Supplementary General Conditions Section 00970 Project Safety and Health Plan Section 00980 Contractor Quality Control Plan General Requirements Section 01027 Application for Payment Section 01200 Project Meetings Section 01301 Submittals Section 01310 Progress Schedules Section 01370 Schedule of Values Section 01385 Daily Construction Reports Section 01395 Document Clarification Requests Section 01410 Testing Laboratory Services Section 01510 Temporary Utilities Section 01520 Construction Aids Section 01550 Access Roads and Parking Areas Section 01560 Temporary Controls Section 01590 Field Offices and Sheds TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 - 1 GATO BUILDING- MONROE COUNTY Section 01595 Construction Cleaning Section 01600 Material and Equipment Section 01630 Post -Bid Substitutions Section 01650 Starting of Systems Section 01670 Systems Demonstrations Section 01700 Contract Closeout Section 01710 Final Cleaning Section 01720 Project Record Documents Section 01730 Operation and Maintenance Data 5. Technical Specifications DIVISION 1 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01010 SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01020 ALLOWANCES 01030 ALTERNATES 01040 PROJECT COORDINATION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01631 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02110 SITE CLEARING 02200 EARTHWORK 02511 HOT -MIXED ASPHALT PAVING 02515 UNIT PAVERS 02520 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02668 WATER SERVICE PIPING 02720 STORM SEWERAGE 02831 FENCES AND GATES 02730 SANITARY SEWERAGE 02900 LANDSCAPE WORK DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03310 CONCRETE REPAIRS 03520 GYPSUM CAST IN PLACE UNDERLAYMENT DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04200 UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 5 - METALS 05400 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 - 2 GATO BUILDING- MONROE COUNTY DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07901 JOINT SEALERS DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08305 ACCESS DOORS 08411 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES 08510 STEEL WINDOWS 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09250 GYPSUM DRYWALL 09300 TILE 09521 ACOUSTIC WALL PANELS 09550 WOOD FLOORING 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09665 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 09678 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09680 CARPET 09900 PAINTING DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10160 TOILET PARTITIONS 10425 SIGNS 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11450 RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Not used DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not used TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 - 3 GATO BUILDING- MONROE COUNTY DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not used DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15100 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15120 PIPING SPECIALTIES 15190 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15240 VIBRATION ISOLATION 15250 MECHANICAL SYSTEM INSULATION 15400 PLUMBING WORK GENERAL 15401 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15402 PLUMBING VALVES AND HOSE BIBBS 15403 PLUMBING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15404 TESTING OF PLUMBING PIPING 15405 PLUMBING DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD 15406 PLUMBING PIPING 15407 PLUMBING INSULATION 15408 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15444 FUEL OIL SYSTEM 15460 WATER HEATERS 15540 PUMPS 15686 ROTARY SCREW WATER CHILLER 15800 CONTROL SYSTEMS 15830 FAN COIL UNITS 15840 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15850 AIR -HANDLING 15862 CENTRIFUGAL EXHAUST FANS 15899 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 15930 WATER SYSTEMS TEST ADJUST BALANCE 15940 AIR SYSTEM TEST ADJUST BALANCE 15950 SYSTEM COMPLETION 15995 HVAC COMMISSIONING DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 16020 16030 16110 16120 16130 16140 16450 16470 16490 16500 16650 BASIC ELECTRIC REQUIREMENTS TESTS & PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION RACEWAYS AND CONDUITS WIRES AND CABLES OUTLET BOXES WIRING DEVICES GROUNDING PANELBOARDS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH LIGHTING STANDBY ENGINE GENERATION TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 - 4 GATO BUILDING- MONROE COUNTY 16670 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 16709 SURGE SUPPRESSION, BONDING & GROUNDING 16720 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Drawings ARCHITECTURAL MONROE COUNTY COVER SHEET FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH NOT USED Tl INFORMATION SHEET Cl SITE PLAN -SURVEY C2 MONROE COUNTY SITE PLAN -GRADING, PARKING, STORM DRAINAGE C3 SITE PLAN -SITE LIGHTING, UTILITIES Ll MONROE COUNTY SITE PLAN -LANDSCAPE L2 MONROE COUNTY COURTYARD LANDSCAPE PLAN Al MONROE COUNTY EXISTING FIRST FLOOR PLAN -CONCRETE REPAIR AND DEMOLITION A2 MONROE COUNTY EXISTING SECOND FLOOR PLAN -CONCRETE REPAIR AND DEMOLITION A3 MONROE COUNTY EXISTING STREET ELEVATIONS -CONCRETE REPAIR A4 MONROE COUNTY EXISTING COURTYARD ELEVATIONS -CONCRETE REPAIR AND DEMOLITION AS MONROE COUNTY FIRST FLOOR PLAN A6 MONROE COUNTY SECOND FLOOR PLAN A7 FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH NOT USED A8 FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH NOT USED A9 ROOFPLAN A10 ROOF DETAILS All MONROE COUNTY BUILDING ELEVATIONS Al2 COURTYARD ELEVATIONS, PORCH HIDDEN ELEVATIONS A13 BUILDING SECTIONS, PORTICO SECTION A14 RESERVED A15 MONROE COUNTY WEST TOWER PLANS, ELEVATIONS, AND SECTION A16 EAST TOWER PLANS, ELEVATIONS, AND SECTION A17 MONROE COUNTY GENERATOR BUILDING PLANS, SECTION, ELEVATIONS, STAIR DETAILS A17.5 MONROE COUNTY STAIR PLAN, SECTION AND DETAILS A18 RESERVED A19 RESERVED A20 MONROE COUNTY INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A20.5 MONROE COUNTY INTERIOR EOEVATIONS A21 MONROE COUNTY INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A22 FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH NOT USED A23 MONROE COUNTY REFLECTED CEILING PLAN -FIRST FLOOR A24 MONROE COUNTY REFLECTED CEILING PLAN -SECOND FLOOR A25 FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH NOT USED A26 FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH NOT USED A27 PARTITION TYPES, RAISED FLOOR TYPES, AND DETAILS A28 MONROE COUNTY INTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULE A29 MONROE COUNTY INTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULE A30 FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH NOT USED A31 MONROE COUNTY WINDOW SCHEDULE -1ST FLOOR PLAN, EXISTING WINDOW DETAILS A32 MONROE COUNTY WINDOW SCHEDULE-2ND FLOOR PLAN, NEW WINDOW DETAILS A33 RESERVED A34 FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH NOT USED A35 MONROE COUNTY DOOR SCHEDULE A36 RESERVED A37 MONROE COUNTY DOOR DETAILS -EXTERIOR A38 DOOR DETAILS -INTERIOR, DOOR TYPES A39 MONROE COUNTY FIXTURE, FURNITURE, AND EQUIPMENT PLAN -FIRST FLOOR A40 MONROE COUNTY FIXTURE, FURNITURE, AND EQUIPMENT PLAN -SECOND FLOOR A41 FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH NOT USED A42 FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH NOT USED TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 - 5 GATO BUILDING- MONROE COUNTY A43 LIFE SAFETY PLAN -FIRST FLOOR - A44 LIFE SAFETY PLAN -SECOND FLOOR STRUCTURAL S-1 WEST TOWER: FOUNDATION PLAN, FIRST FLOOR PLAN, SECOND FLOOR PLAN, R FRAMING PLAN, BEAM SCHEDULE, AUGER PILE DETAIL S-2 EAST TOWER: FOUNDATION PLAN, FIRST FLOOR PLAN, SECOND FLOOR PLAN, R FRAMING PLAN, COLUMN DETAIL - S-3 S-4 SECTIONS, DETAILS S-5 STAIR DETAILS, ELEVATOR TOWER SECTION, ROOF/FLOOR REPAIR DETAIL S-6 NOTES & SPECIFICATIONS S-7 ROOF PLAN, PARTIAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN, CHILLER FRAMING PLAN SECTIONS, DETAIL MECHANICAL M-1 LEGEND, NOTES, & ABBREVIATIONS M-2 HVAC FIRST FLOOR PLAN M-3 HVAC SECOND FLOOR PLAN M4 HVAC FIRST FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN M-5 _ HVAC SECOND FLOOR MECHANICAL PLAN M-6 HVAC MECHANICAL ROOF PLAN M-7 HVAC SCHEDULES M-8 HVAC SCHEDULES CONT'D M-9 HVAC DETAILS - M-10 HVAC CHILLER & HYDRONICS PLAN M-11 HVAC CHILLER DETAILS & SCHEDULES M-12 HVAC CONTROLS -VAS SYSTEM DIAGRAM M-13 HVAC CONTROLS -CHILLER PLANT M-14 HVAC CONTROLS-AHU'S & VAV BOXES M-15 HVAC CONTROLS-100% O A UNIT CONTROL DIAGRAM M-16 HVAC CONTROLS-FCU CONTROL DIAGRAM M-17 HVAC CONTROLS-VAV BOX CONTROL FROM SSME PLUMBING P-1 FIRST FLOOR PLUMBING P-2 SECOND FLOOR PLUMBING P-3 PLUMBING ENLARGED PLAN & RISER DIAGRAMS ELECTRICAL E-1 LEGEND, NOTES AND FIXTURE SCHEDULE E-2 ELECTRICAL -SITE PLAN E-3 ELECTRICAL -FIRST FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN E4 ELECTRICAL -SECOND FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN E-5 ELECTRICAL -FIRST FLOOR POWER PLAN E-6 ELECTRICAL -SECOND FLOOR POWER PLAN E-7 ELECTRICAL -FIRST FLOOR POWER & SYSTEMS PLAN E-8 ELECTRICAL -SECOND FLOOR POWER & SYSTEMS PLAN E-9 ELECTRICAL -ROOF PLAN AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION PLAN _ E-10 ELECTRICAL -POWER ONE -LINE DIAGRAM E-11 ELECTRICAL -SYSTEMS ONE -LINE DIAGRAMS E-12 ELECTRICAL -PANEL SCHEDULES E-13 ELECTRICAL -PANEL SCHEDULES E-14 ELECTRICAL -DETAILS END OF SECTION 0001 TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 - 6 SECTION 00030 NOTICE OF CALLING FOR BIDS NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN that on July 15, 1999 at 10:00 AM, at the Purchasing Office, a committee consisting of the Director of O.M.B., the County Administrator, the County Attorney, the Construction Manager and the Division Director of Public Works, or their designees, will open sealed bids for the following: RESTORATION & ADAPTIVE REUSE OF THE GATO CIGAR FACTORY 1100 SIMONTON STREET, KEY WEST, FLORIDA 33040 The rehabilitation of the Gato Building, a 41,000 square foot historic concrete structure at the corner of Simonton and Virginia Streets, in the City of Key West, Monroe County, Florida. The work will include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following items: 1. Site work including installation of site utilities, lighting, landscaping, grading, paving, and drainage. 2. Restoration of the concrete structural shell. 3. Restoration of existing steel windows and installation of new steel windows to match the existing historic units. All units will be glazed with double pane, impact resistant glass. 4. New interior partitions and finishes. Materials will include gypsum board, metal studs, glass in aluminum frames, doors, hardware, and carpet, vinyl, and wood floor finishes. 5. Complete new mechanical elevator, plumbing, and electrical systems. Coordination with a separate contractor constructing interior build -out for the Monroe County/Key West, County Department of Health concurrently with this contract will be required. Protection of historic fabric during all construction activities will be required. A mandatory pre -bid conferences will be held on Thursday June 24, 1999 at 1:00 P.M. at the project site. . All bids must be received by the Purchasing Office, 5100 College Road, Public Service Building, Cross Wing, Room #002, Stock Island, Key West, Florida 33040 on or before 10:00 A.M. on July 15, 1999. All bids, including the recommendation of the County Administrator and the requesting Department Head, will be presented to the Board of County Commissioners of Monroe County, Florida, for final awarding or otherwise. The Board will automatically reject the bid of any person or affiliate who appears on the convicted vendor list prepared by the Department of General Services, State of Florida, under Section 287.017 of the Florida Statutes. All bidders submitting bids for construction, improvement, remodeling or repair of public buildings, will furnish evidence that the bidder holds an appropriate current certificate or registration per Ch. 489.131 F.S. unless exempt under Ch. 489.103 F.S. All bidders must submit two (2) signed originals and one (1) complete copy of each bid in a sealed envelope marked on the outside, "Sealed Bid for The Gato Building, Restoration & Adaptive Reuse, Phase Il." All bids must remain valid for a period of ninety (90) days. Drawings and specifications will be available on or after June 2, 1998 at the Monroe County Purchasing Office, (305) 292-4464. Further information may be obtained by contacting Stephen Piazza, Monroe County Construction Management, 5100 College Road, Key West, Florida, (305) 292-4429. Drawings and specifications can be obtained for the refundable deposit sum of $300.00 per set, payable to Monroe County. The Board reserves the right to reject any and all bids, to waive informalities in any or all bids, and to re -advertise for bids. The Board also reserves the right to award a contract in the best interest of the County. Dated at Key West, Florida, this day of , 19 John Carter Director, Office of Management & Budget, for Monroe County, Florida SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS To be considered, Bids must be made in accordance with these Instructions to Bidders. ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS 1.1 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the General Conditions shall have the same meanings or definitions as assigned to them in the General Conditions. 1.2 Bidding Documents include the Advertisement to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Proposal, Pre -Bid Substitutions, Scope of Work, Milestone Schedule and other sample bidding and contract forms and the proposed Contract Documents including any addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids. The Contract Documents proposed for the Work consist of the Standard Form of Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, General Requirements, Technical Specifications, Drawings, and other sample contract forms. 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Owner through the Construction Manager prior to the receipt of Bids which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications, or corrections. 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work for the lump sums, including any Owner Options or Alternates stipulated therein, and submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids or Owner Option Bids. 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. 1.7 An Owner Option Bid (or Option) is an amount stated in the Bid, which can be exercised by the Owner through the Construction Manager, for the corresponding change in the work as described in the Bidding Documents. This Owner Option can be exercised at any time during the contract duration. 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid. 1.9 A Sub -bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials or labor for a portion of the Work. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 1 1.10 An Allowance is a given amount to be included in the Bidders proposal. From this Allowance, payments will be made to the vendor for the specified service or project. If the contractor is responsible for making payments, he will be reimbursed for the payments to the vendor via presentation of invoices in his monthly payment application. Allowance includes labor, materials, installation, permits, etc. 1.11 The term "provide" means "furnish and install'. Wherever "provide" or "furnish and install' are used, this shall mean purchase, and all purchasing requirements and procedures, and installation complete, as per the specified or implied requirements. 1.12 The term "perform" means to comply fully with the specified or implied requirements. ARTICLE 2 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 2.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Notice of Calling for Bids for the stipulated deposit sum. Deposits should be made payable to Monroe County, Florida. Bidders who submit a bona fide bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within (20) calendar days after receipt of bids, will be refunded the deposit sum. If pages are written on, drawings are — torn, or if the issuing office considers the Bidding Documents unusable, then the deposit will be forfeited. 2.2 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids where applicable. Neither the Owner nor the Construction Manager, nor the Architect/Engineer assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. ARTICLE 3 EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1 Before Submitting a Bid: 3.1.1 Each Bidder shall thoroughly examine all the Bidding Documents. 3.1.2 Each Bidder shall visit the site to familiarize himself with local conditions that may in any manner affect the cost, progress, or performance of the Work. 3.2 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, right-of-ways for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractors in performing the Work are identified in the General Requirements or Drawings. 3.3 Each Bidder shall study and carefully correlate his observations with the Contract Documents. 3.4 The submission of a Bid will constitute a representation by the Bidder that he has complied with every requirement of Article 3 and that the Contract Documents are INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 2 sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance of the Work. ARTICLE 4 INTERPRETATION AND CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4.1 Bidders and Sub -bidders shall promptly notify the Construction Manager of any ambiguity, inconsistency or error which they may discover upon examination of the Bidding Documents or of the site and local conditions. 4.2 Bidders and Sub -bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall submit their questions in writing to the Construction Manager no later than ten calendar days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Any interpretation, correction or change of the Bidding Documents will be accomplished by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded as having received plans. Copies of Addenda will also be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. Interpretations, corrections, or changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon such interpretations, corrections, and changes. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. ARTICLE 5 BIDDING PROCEDURE 5.1 FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS 5.1.1 The Bid Proposal shall be submitted on the forms included in Section 00110 of these Bidding Documents with the exception of the Bid Bond, which may be submitted in alternate forms as described in Section 5.3.1 of these Instructions to Bidders. Each of the forms in Section 00110, must be properly filled out, executed, and submitted as the Bid Proposal. 5.1.2 All blanks on the Bid Form shall be filled in with ink or by typewriter. 5.1.3 Where so indicated on the Bid Form, sums shall be expressed in both words and figures, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words shall govern. 5.1.4 Any interlineation, alteration, or erasure must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. 5.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change". Failure to comply shall constitute a non -responsive bid. 5.1.6 All requested Allowances shall be bid. Failure to comply shall constitute a non- responsive bid. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 3 5.1.7 All requested Owner Options shall be bid. Failure to comply shall constitute a non -responsive bid. 5.2 ADDENDA 5.2.1 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting his Bid that he has received all Addenda issued, and he shall acknowledge their receipt in his Bid. 5.2.2 No Addenda will be issued later than five calendar days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except for an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. 5.2.3 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. 5.3 BID SECURITY 5.3.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a Bid Security made payable to Monroe County, in the amount of five percent of the Bidder's maximum Bid price. The Bid Security shall be in the form of a certified check, cashiers check or a Bid Bond issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the form in Section 00110. If a Bid Bond is submitted as Bid Security, the attorney -in -fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the Bond a certified and current copy of his power of attorney. 5.3.2 The bid surety constitutes a pledge by the Bidder that he will enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in his Bid and will furnish the required Public Construction Bond, as described in the General and Supplementary Conditions of this contract. The Bid Security of the successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has entered into a Contract with the Owner and furnished the required Public Construction Bond, whereupon it will be returned. If the successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Contract and furnish the required Bond, the Owner may annul the Notice of Award and the amount of the bid security of that Bidder shall be forfeited to the Owner not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages. 5.3.3 The bid security of any Bidder whom the Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the Owner until either (a) the Contract has been executed and the required Bond has been furnished, or (b) the ninety-first (91 st) day after the Bid opening, or (c) all Bids have been rejected. The bid security of the other Bidders will be returned within twenty-one (21) days of the Bid opening. 5.4 SCHEDULING, MANPOWER REQUIREMENTS, AND PERMITS 5.4.1 The overall schedule for construction is shown in the Bidding Documents "Milestone Schedule." INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 4 _ 5.4.2 The Contractor will be required to provide adequate manpower and equipment in order to meet the requirements of the schedule. 5.4.3 The Bidders shall determine all permits, impact fees, inspections and surveys (and fees required by same) required by Federal, State, or Municipal bodies having jurisdiction over the project and shall include in his bid proposal the cost of all such permits, impact fees, inspections and surveys. The Contractor shall be required to secure and pay for all such permits, impact fees, inspections and surveys required for the execution of this Contract, except as noted elsewhere herein (refer to subparagraph 4.7.1 on Page 00800-3 of the Contract Supplementary General Conditions). The County will not assess any County building permit or County impact fees. The Contractor will be responsible for any other building permit costs or impact fees required for this project. 5.5 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 5.5.1 Bids shall be submitted to Monroe County at the designated location not later than the time and date for receipt of Bids indicated in the Notice of Calling for Bids, or any extension thereof made by Addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. 5.5.2 Two (2) originals and one (1) copy of all bidding documents are to be submitted. Place the bid security in its own separate envelope, marking on the outside "Bid Security", and place all other bidding documents in another envelope, marking on the outside "Proposal Documents". Both envelopes are to be inserted in one larger envelope. If the Bid is hand -delivered, the envelope shall be filled out as follows: In the upper left hand corner, place the Bidder's name and address. 2. In the center of the envelope, put the following: Monroe County Purchasing Department Public Service Building, Room 002 5100 College Road, Stock Island Key West, FL 33040 3. In the lower left hand corner, put the following: Bid for: To be opened: (Date) (Time) In item 3. above, fill in the Bid for and Project Name. In addition, fill in the date and time for opening of the bids, in order that you may remind yourself of the deadline. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 5 If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. And then address the mailing envelope in the conventional manner. -- 5.5.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. 5.5.4 Oral, telephonic, or telegraphic Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 5.6 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 5.6.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn, or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids and each Bidder so agrees in submitting his Bid. 5.6.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, any Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to Monroe County Purchasing Department at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the bidder or by telegram. If by telegram, the written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids, and it shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. 5.6.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. 5.6.4 Bid Security shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as modified or resubmitted. 5.6.5 Conditional, modified, or qualified bids will be rejected. Bidders are to comply with the instructions on the bid forms, and not make any changes thereto. 5.7 RIGHT TO CLAIM ERROR IN BID 5.7.1 Each Bidder's original work papers, documents, and materials used in preparation of the bid shall be enclosed in an envelope and marked clearly as to contents, must be received by Monroe County Purchasing Department no later than 24 hours after the time and date for receipt of Bids, or any extension thereof made by Addendum. Bidders who fail to submit their original work papers, documents, and materials used in the preparation of the bid, as provided herein, waive all rights to claim error in the Bid. 5.7.2 Owner will review documents submitted within the designated time frame for the purpose of determining the validity of the Bidders claim. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 6 5.7.3 Following review of the Bidder's claim the Owner may: a. Allow the Bidder to withdraw the Bid and the Owner retains the Bid Security. b. Allow the Bidder to withdraw the Bid and the Owner returns the Bid Security. C. Allow the Bidder to enter into contract for the proposed Work at the original Bid price. ARTICLE 6 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6.1 OPENING OF BIDS 6.1.1 The properly identified Bids received on time will be opened at the Monroe County Purchasing Department. 6.1.2 Any Bid not received by the Purchasing Department on or before the deadline for receipt of bids designated in the Notice of Calling for Bids will be returned unopened. 6.2 BIDS TO REMAIN OPEN 6.2.1 All Bids shall remain open for ninety (90) days after the date designated for receipt of Bids. 6.2.2 The Owner may, at his sole discretion, release any Bid Proposal and return the Bid Security before the ninety (90) days has elapsed. 6.3 AWARD OF CONTRACT 6.3.1 The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids or any part of a Bid, to waive the right to disregard all nonconforming, nonresponsive or conditional Bids. 6.3.2 In evaluating Bids, the Owner may consider the qualifications of the bidders and whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements in the Bid Instruction. If requested by the Construction Manager, Bidders shall submit a properly filled out and executed Contractor's Qualification Statement after submission of bid, and prior to the Bid Clarification Meeting. An AIA Document A305-1986 is to be completed for this purpose. 6.3.3 The Owner shall have the right to accept alternates. The alternates will be accepted only in the order they are listed; alternate number one will be accepted first, alternate number two, second, and so on. 6.3.4 The Owner may consider the qualifications and experience of subcontractors and/or other entities (including those who are to furnish materials, or equipment INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 7 fabricated to a special design) proposed for each of the principal portions of the Work. If requested by the Construction Manager, Bidders shall submit their listing of subcontractors after submission of bids, and prior to the Bid Clarification -- Meeting. A Proposed Subcontractor Listing Form supplied by the Owner is to be completed for this purpose. 6.3.5 The Owner may conduct such investigations as he deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of the Bidders, proposed subcontractors, and other persons or organizations to do the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the Owner's satisfaction within the prescribed time. The Owner has the right to conduct Bid Clarification meetings with any bidder, to determine if bidder has bid the scope of work in its entirety. Bidder shall be required to attend bid clarification meetings, as necessary. 6.3.6 The Owner reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder who does not pass any such evaluation to their satisfaction. 6.3.7 If the Contract is awarded, it will be awarded to the Bidder whose evaluation by the Owner shows him to be responsible and has indicated to the Owner that the award will be in the best interests of the Project. 6.3.8 If the Contract is to be awarded, the Construction Manager will issue the Notice of Award to the successful Bidder within ninety (90) days after the date of receipt of bids. The Owner reserves the right to return all Bids, not make any awards, and cancel the Project. 6.3.9 The Owner is tax exempt and reserves the right to purchase directly various construction materials and equipment that may be a part of the Contract. If the Owner elects to make a particular purchase, the Owner will, via a Purchase Contract, purchase the materials and equipment, and the Contractor shall assist the Construction Manager in the preparation of these Purchase Contracts, including providing to the Owner appropriate tax credits. 6.4 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT 6.4.1 The Contractor shall sign and deliver all four copies of the Contract Agreement to the Construction Manager prior to the Board of County Commissioners Meeting scheduled to approve a Notice of Award. All other Contract Documents such as the Public Construction Bond and Insurance Certificates are to be provided to the Construction Manager within five days after receipt of Notice of Award. A Notice to Proceed will be issued to the Contractor upon satisfactory compliance with these provisions. In no event shall the failure of the Contractor to provide satisfactory bond and insurance certificates within the stipulated time be cause for an extension of the contract time. The Construction Manager will return one fully executed copy of the Contract Agreement to the Contractor with all other Contract Documents attached upon receipt from the Owner. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 8 ARTICLE 7 SPECIAL LEGAL REQUIREMENTS 7.1 Each Bidder, before submitting the Bid, shall familiarize itself with all Federal, State, and local laws, ordinances, permit fees, impact fees, rules and regulations that may apply to the Work or that may in any manner affect the cost, progress, or performance of the Work. 7.2 A person or affiliate who has been placed on the convicted vendor list following a conviction for public entity crime may not submit a bid on a contract to provide any goods or services to a public entity, may not submit a bid on a contract with a public entity for the construction or repair of a public building or public work, may not submit bids on leases of real property to public entity, may not be awarded or perform work as a contractor, supplier, subcontractor, or consultant under a contract with any public entity, and may not transact business with any public entity in excess of the threshold amount provided in Section 287.017, for CATEGORY TWO for a period of 36 months from the date of being placed on the convicted vendor list. ***END OF SECTION 00100*** INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100 - 9 SECTION 00110 BID PROPOSAL The Bid Proposal shall be submitted on the forms included in this section of the Bidding Documents as previously instructed herein. Item Description Pages 1. Proposal Form 2-4 2. Bid Bond 5 3. Non -Collusion Affidavit 6 4. Lobbying and Conflict of Interest Clause 7 5. Drug -Free Workplace Form 8 6. Contractor License Current Copy to Be Submitted with Bid Subcontractor Licenses to Be Submitted Prior to Award of Notice to Proceed BID PROPOSAL 00110-1 SECTION 00110 PROPOSAL FORM BID TO: MONROE COUNTY BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS c/o PURCHASING DEPARTMENT PUBLIC SERVICE BUILDING, ROOM 002 5100 COLLEGE ROAD, STOCK ISLAND KEY WEST, FLORIDA 33040 BID FROM: The undersigned, having carefully examined the Work and reference Drawings, Specifications, Proposal, and Addenda thereto and other Contract Documents for the construction of: and having carefully examined the site where the Work is to be performed, having become familiar with all local conditions including labor affecting the cost thereof, and having familiarized himself with material availability, Federal, State, and Local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations affecting performance of the Work, does hereby propose to furnish all labor, mechanics, superintendents, tools, material, equipment, transportation services, and all incidentals necessary to perform and complete said Work and work incidental hereto, in a workman -like manner, in conformance with said Drawings, Specifications, and other Contract Documents including Addenda issued thereto. The undersigned further certifies that he has personally inspected the actual location of where the Work is to be performed, together with the local sources of supply and that he understands the conditions under which the Work is to be performed. The successful bidder shall assume the risk of any and all costs and delays arising from the existence of any subsurface or other latent physical condition which could be reasonably anticipated by reference to documentary information provided and made available, and from inspection and examination of the site. dollars. (Total Base Bid - words) 1. Alternate No. 1: The Base Bid on the first floor, includes wood flooring, glued to a DURA- CAP substrate. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to eliminate the wood flooring system, and substitute thin set quarry tile and base over a leveling coat of DURA- CAP. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words BID PROPOSAL 00110-2 2. Alternate No. 2: The Base Bid includes fire resistant glazing in interior fire rated transoms, fire rated glass wall systems, fire rated sidelights and fire rated glazed doors. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to omit the specified fire resistant glazing and substitute wire glazing, diamond pattern, installed as required by code for a fire rated assembly. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words 3. Alternate No. 3: The Base Bid includes aluminum fencing with concrete masonry unit piers on auger cast piles 4'-0" into grade, along the west, south and east property lines. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to omit all the aluminum fencing, auger cast piles, and piers, and leave the existing chain link fence along the west property line. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words 4. Alternate No. 4: In lieu of Alternate No.3 above, state the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to omit the aluminum fencing, auger cast piles, and piers, from the south and east property lines only. Under this alternative, new fencing will be installed at the west property line only. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words 5. Alternate No. 5: The Base Bid includes 3/4" BC PT plywood, installed horizontally, at partition types 11,12 and 14. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to omit the horizontal 3/4" BC PT at partition types 12 And 14. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words Alternate No. 6: The Base Bid includes providing one rotary screw chiller and installing two -� roof mounted screw chillers.. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid by deleting the purchase of this rotary screw chiller, only. Installation of the two chillers and associated piping, and wiring remains as part of the Base Bid. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words 7. Alternate No. 7: The Base Bid includes payment of construction permit fees required by the City of Key West. State the amount to be deducted from the base bid should the City waive these fees. Permit fees are calculated by the Building Department at the rate of $24.00 per $1,000.00 of valuation. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words Alternate No. 8: The Base Bid on the second floor, includes wood flooring on a plywood subfloor. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to delete the wood flooring and substitute the specified carpet over pad. Under this alternate the wood base will be changed to 4 inch rubber cove base. BID PROPOSAL 00110-3 I acknowledge receipt of Addenda No.(s) No. Dated No. Dated No. Dated No. Dated No. Dated I have included pages 2 through 6 of the Bid Proposal which entails the Proposal Form , the required Bid Security , the Non -Collusion Affidavit , and the Lobbying and Conflict of Interest Clause . In addition, I have included a certified copy of Contractor's License. (Check mark items above, as a reminder that they are included.) Mailing Address: Phone Number: Date: Signed: (Name) (Title) Witness: (Seal) BID PROPOSAL 00110-4 SECTION 00110 NON -COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 1, of the city according to law on my oath, and under penalty of perjury, depose and say that: 1. 1 am of the firm of the bidder making the Proposal for the project described in the notice for calling for bids for: and that I executed the said proposal with full authority to do so; 2. the prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication or agreement for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor; 3. unless otherwise required by law, the prices which have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder prior to bid opening, directly or indirectly, to any other bidder or to any competitor; and 4. no attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other person, partnership or corporation to submit, or not to submit, a bid for the purpose of restricting competition; 5. the statements contained in this affidavit are true and correct, and made with full knowledge that Monroe County relies upon the truth of the statements contained in this affidavit in awarding contracts for said project. (Signature of Bidder) STATE OF: COUNTY OF: (Date) PERSONALLY APPEARED BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, who, after first being sworn by me, (name of individual signing) affixed his/her signature in the space provided above on this day of , 19 NOTARY PUBLIC My commission expires: BID PROPOSAL 00110-6 ETHICS CLAUSE SECTION 00110 LOBBYING AND CONFLICT OF INTEREST CLAUSE SWORN STATEMENT UNDER ORDINANCE NO. 010-1990 MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA (Company) warrants that he/it has not employed, retained or otherwise had act on his/its behalf any former County officer or employee in violation of Section 2 of Ordinance No. 010-1990 or any County officer or employee in violation of Section 3 of Ordinance No. 010-1990. For breach or violation of this provision the County may, in its discretion, terminate this contract without liability and may also, in its discretion, deduct from the contract or purchase price, or otherwise recover, the full amount of any fee, commission, percentage, gift, or consideration paid to the former County officer or employee". (Signature) Date: STATE OF: COUNTY OF: Subscribed and sworn to (or affirmed) before me on (date) by (name of affiant). He/She is personally known to me or has produced as identification. (type of identification) NOTARY PUBLIC My commission expires: BID PROPOSAL 00110-7 DRUG -FREE WORKPLACE FORM The undersigned vendor in accordance with Florida Statute 287.087 hereby certifies that: (Name of Business) 1. Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. 2. Inform employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug -free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. 3. Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). 4. In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of Chapter 893 (Florida Statutes) or of any controlled substance law of the United States or any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. 5. Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, or any employee who is so convicted. 6. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug -free workplace through implementation of this section. As the person authorized to sign the statement, I certify that this firm complies fully with the above requirements. Bidders Signature Date MCRAS RF\/ 61-3 BID PROPOSAL 00110-8 SECTION 00163 PRE -BID SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Document includes A. Pre -Bid Substitutions 1.2 BIDDER'S OPTIONS A. For products specified only by reference standard, select product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select one of products and manufacturers named which complies with the Technical Specifications. C. For Products specified by naming several products or manufacturers and stating "or equivalent", "or equal", or "or Architect/Engineer approved equivalent", or similar wording, submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer which is not specifically named for review and approval by the Architect. D. For products specified by naming only one product/manufacturer, there is no option and no substitution will be allowed. 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Base Bid shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Substitutions for products may be made during the bidding by submitting completed substitution request form and substantiating product data/literature a minimum of ten calendar days prior to the Bid Date to the Architect/Engineer through the Construction Manager. 2. The Architect/Engineer will consider requests utilizing this section from the Bidder for substitution of products in place of those specified. 3. Those submitted 10 calendar days prior to Bid Date will be included in an addendum if acceptable. 4. Substitution requests may be submitted utilizing a facsimile machine (FAX) if substitution request forms and substantiating data are submitted. PRE -BID SUBSTITUTIONS 00163 - 1 B. Submit separate request for each substitution. Support each request with: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with — requirements stated in Contract Documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature, identifying: 1) Product description. 2) Reference standards. 3) Performance and test data. C. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been _ used and date of each installation. 2. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified, — listing significant variations. 3. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 4. All effects of substitution on separate contracts. 5. List of changes required in other work or products. 6. Designation of required license fees or royalties. _ 7. Designation of availability of maintenance services, sources of replacement materials. C. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when: 1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. _ 2. In the judgement of the Owner or Architect/Engineer, the substitution does not include adequate information necessary for a complete - evaluation. D. The Architect/Engineer will determine the acceptability of any proposed substitution. 1.4 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION A. In making formal request for substitution the Bidder represents that: 1. He has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equivalent to, or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. He will provide same warranties or bonds for substitution as for product specified. PRE -BID SUBSTITUTIONS 00163 - 2 _ 3. He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 4. He waives claims for additional costs caused by substitution which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Cost data is complete and includes related costs under his Contract, but not: a. Costs under separate contracts. b. Architect/Engineer's costs for redesign or revision of Contract Documents. 6. Cost data need not be submitted, if request is for inclusion in an addendum. 1.5 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER'S DUTIES A. Review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. B. Issue an addendum to identify accepted substitutions. C. Substitution requests that are not approved will be returned to the party submitting the request. 1.6 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM A. The form is attached to this Section. B. Substitutions will be considered only when the attached form is completed and included with the submittal with all required back-up data. PRE -BID SUBSTITUTIONS 00163 - 3 TO: Project Architect/Engineer ph: FAX: We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above project: Drawing No. I Drawing Name I Spec Sec. I Spec Name I Paragraph I Specified Item Proposed Substitution: Attach complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. Submit with request necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality and performance to that which is specified. Clearly mark manufacturer's literature to indicate equality in performance. The undersigned certifies that the function, appearance and quality are of equal performance and assumes liability for equal performance, equal design and compatibility with adjacent materials. Submitted By: Signature Title Firm Address City / State / Zip Code Telephone Date Signature shall be by person having authority to legally bind his firm to the above terms. Failure to provide legally binding signature will result in retraction of approval. For use by the Architect: Approved Apvd as noted Not Apvd Rec'd too late Insufficient data received By Date PRE -BID SUBSTITUTIONS 00163 - 4 Fill in Blanks Below: A. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings? Yes No If yes, clearly indicate changes: B. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by the requested substitution? Yes No If no, fully explain: C. What effect does substitution have on other Contracts or other trades? D. What effect does substitution have on construction schedule? E. Manufacturer's warranties of the proposed and specified items are: Same Different. Explain: F. Reason for Request: G. Itemized comparison of specified item(s) with the proposed substitution; list significant variations: H. Designation of maintenance services and sources: (Attach additional sheets if required.) PRE -BID SUBSTITUTIONS 00163 - 5 SECTION 00220 GEOTECHNICAL DATA A. Data concerning subsurface materials and conditions obtained from test borings has been made available by the Owner for the Architect's use in designing the project. B. The report and test boring data is for information only. Requirements stated or implied in the report are not requirements of the Contract Documents. The report is solely to inform the Bidder of the type and character of the materials to be encountered. GEOTECHNICAL DATA 00220-1 SECTION 00230 SITE SURVEY A. The Plat of Survey and other survey data, are available in the Office of the Construction Manager for review, and are for the general information of the bidder. The data contained was prepared by the Owner for the Architect's use for the design of the project, and neither the Owner nor the Architect, nor the Construction Manager make any representation, guarantee of warranty as to the accuracy or completeness of data indicated, expressed or implied. B. Bidders shall visit the site, make their own investigations, assumptions and conclusions as to the nature and extent of existing surface and overhead conditions affecting the work. Neither the Owner nor the Architect, nor the Construction Manager will be responsible for additional type or extent of work required to be performed under the Contract due to any assumptions or conclusions by the successful bidder based upon the survey information provided. SITE SURVEY 00230-1 SECTION 00300 SCOPE OF WORK 1.1 GENERAL SCOPE Provide all labor, supervision, engineering, materials, supplies, equipment, tools, transportation, surveying, layout, and protection for the proper execution and completion of all the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Work shall include but not be limited to that shown on the Drawings and detailed in the Technical Specifications included in this Bid Package. 1.2 SPECIAL PROVISIONS The following Special Provisions are intended to clarify the scope of work, or highlight features of the work, or modify, change, add to, or delete from the General Scope of this Bid Package. 1 All licenses required in order to perform the scope of work in the specified location, shall be procured and maintained by the contractor and his subcontractors. Contractor shall submit copies to the Construction Manager prior to notice to proceed. Contractor's license to accompany bid. 2 Provide, replace, and maintain any safety rails and barricades as necessary during the process of work, or during deliveries of materials or equipment. 3 Contractor is to review Division 1 General Requirements for additional responsibilities required in order to perform this Work. 4 If in the event of conflicting, or overlapping requirements in any area of the bidding documents, technical specifications, or drawings, the most stringent condition shall be bid and constructed. Notify the Construction Manager in any event, in order to not compromise the Owner's right to make appropriate decisions. 5 Contractor shall maintain As -Built Drawings, (Record Drawings per Section 01720), of his work progression. 6 This Contractor shall not store materials inside the building. Contractor shall provide suitable storage container, and be responsible for disposal off -site of all debris and trash. SCOPE OF WORK 00300-1 SECTION 00350 MILESTONE SCHEDULE/LIQUIDATED DAMAGES This section contains the project milestone schedule. The contractor is required to determine his proposed schedule to meet these milestone dates. The Contractor is to note the following special milestone dates. 1. Bid Documents Available 3 June 1999 2. Pre -Bid Conference 24 June 1999 3. Last Addendum issued (by 10:00 AM) 10 July 1999 4. Bid Due Date 15 July 1999 5. Award Date (Anticipated) 31 August 1999 6. Notice to Proceed and Preconstruction Meeting (Anticipated) 7 September 1999 7. Final Completion (Anticipated) 7 January 2001 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Conditions Under Which Liquidated Damages are Imposed — The time or times stipulated in the contract for completion of the work of the contract or of specified phases of the contract shall be the calendar date or dates listed in the milestone schedule .Liquidated damages will be based on the Substantial Completion Date for all work, modified by all approved extensions in time as set forth by the Construction Manager's signature of approval on the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The liquidated damages table below shall be utilized to determine the amount of liquidated damages. FIRST SECOND 31ST DAY & CONTRACT AMOUNT 15 DAYS 15 DAYS THEREAFTER Under 50,000.00 $50.00/Day $100.00/Day $250.00/Day $50,000.00-99,999.00 100.00/Day 200.00/Day 750.00/Day $100,000.00-499,999.00 200.00/Day 500.00/Day 2,000.00/Day $500,000.00 and Up 500.00/Day 1,000.00/Day 3,500.00/Day The Contractor's recovery of damages, and sole remedy for any delay caused by the Owner shall be an extension of time on the Contract. END OF SECTION 00350 SUBSTITUTION LISTING TO: MONROE COUNTY, here after called "Owner" l . Pursuant to bidding requirements for the work titled: Gato Building Monroe County Restoration & Adaptive Reuse of the Gato Cigar Factory 1100 Simonton Street, Key West, Florida The Contract sum proposed by the undersigned on the bid form is for work shown on the Drawings, described in the Specifications, and otherwise defined in the Contract Documents. However, the undersigned proposes the following substitutions for the owner's consideration. Should the Owner accept any or all of the proposed substitutions, the bidder's proposed Contract Sum will be reduced by the amount shown. The proposed substitution will not be used in determining the apparent low bidder. Additional submittals after the award may be required to determine if the proposed substitution will be acceptable. 2. Specified Drawing product number or or Spec. Proposed material: Section: substitution: PROVIDE SIGNATURE IDENTICAL TO THEA SHOWN ON THE BID FORM an Proposed reduction in Contract Sum: SUBSTITUTION LISTING 00440 - 1 1996 Edition MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA INSURANCE CHECKLIST FOR VENDORS SUBMITTING PROPOSALS FOR WORK To assist in the development of your proposal, the insurance coverages marked with an "X" will be required in the event an award is made to your firm. Please review this form with your insurance agent and have him/her sign it in the place provided. It is also required that the bidder sign the form and submit it with each proposal. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY X Workers' Compensation WC 1 Employers Liability WC2 Employers Liability WC3 X Employers Liability WCUSLH US Longshoremen & Harbor Workers Act WCJA Federal Jones Act INSCKLST Statutory Limits $100,000/$500,000/$100,000 $ 5 00, 000/$ 5 00, 000/$ 5 00, 00 0 $1,000,000/$1,000,000/$1,000,000 Same as Employers' Liability Same as Employers' Liability 1996 Edition ENERAL LIABILITY As a minimum, the required general liability coverages will include: • Premises Operations Y Products and Completed Operations • Blanket Contractual Y Personal Injury • Expanded Definition of Property Damage Required Limits: GL 1 $100,000 per Person; $300,000 per Occurrence $50,000 Property Damage or $300,000 Combined Single Limit GL2 $250,000 per Person; $500,000 per Occurrence $50,000 Property Damage or $500,000 Combined Single Limit GL3 X $500,000 per Person; $1,000,000 per Occurrence $100,000 Property Damage or $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit GL4 $5,000,000 Combined Single Limit Required Endorsement: GLXCU Underground, Explosion and Collapse (XCU) GLLIQ Liquor Liability GLS Security Services All endorsements are required to have the same limits as the basic policy. INSCKLST 1996 Edition VEHICLE LIABILITY As a minimum, coverage should extend to liability for: • Owned; Non -owned; and Hired Vehicles Required Limits: VLl VL2 VL3 X VL4 RM MVC PRO1 PR02 PR03 $50,000 per Person, $100,000 per Occurrence $25,000 Property Damage or $100,000 Combined Single Limit $100,000 per Person; $300,000 per Occurrence $50,000 Property Damage or $300,000 Combined Single Limit $500,000 per Person; $1,000,000 per Occurrence $100,000 Property Damage or $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit $5,000,000 Combined Single Limit MISCELLANEOUS COVERAGES X Builders' Limits equal to the Risk completed project. Motor Truck Limits equal to the maximum cargo value of any one shipment. Professional $ 250,000 per Occurrence/$ 500,000 Agg. Liability $ 500,000 per Occurrence/$1,000,000 Agg. $1,000,000 per Occurrence/$2,000,000 Agg. INSCKLST 1996 Edition POL1 Pollution $ 500,000 per Occurrence/$1,000,000 Agg. POL2 Liability $1,000,000 per Occurrence/$2,000,000 Agg. POL3 $5,000,000 per Occurrence/$10,000,000 Agg. ED1 Employee $ 10,000 ED2 Dishonesty $100,000 GK1 Garage $ 300,000 ($ 25,000 per Veh) GK2 Keepers $ 500,000 ($100,000 per Veh) GK3 $1,000,000 ($250,000 per Veh) MEDI Medical $ 250,000/$ 750,000 Agg. MED2 Professional $ 500,000/$ 1,000,000 Agg. MED3 $1,000,0001 3,000,000 Agg. MED4 $5,000,000310,000,000 Agg. IF Installation Maximum value of Equipment Floater Installed VLP1 Hazardous $ 300,000 (Requires MCS-90) VLP2 Cargo $ 500,000 (Requires MCS-90) VLP3 Transporter $1,000,000 (Requires MCS-90) BLL Bailee Liab. Maximum Value of Property HKL1 Hangarkeepers $ 300,000 HKL2 Liability $ 500,000 HKL3 $ 1,000,000 AIRI Aircraft $ 1,000,000 AIR2 Liability $ 5,000,000 AIR3 $50,000,000 AEO1 Architects Errors $ 250,000 per Occurrence/$ 500,000 Agg. AE02 & Omissions $ 500,000 per Occurrence/$1,000,000 Agg. AE03 $1,000,000 per Occurrence/$3,000,000 Agg. EO1 Engineers Errors $ 250,000 per Occurrence/$ 500,000 Agg. E02 & Omissions $ 500,000 per Occurrence/$1,000,000 Agg. E03 $1,000,000 per Occurrence/$3,000,000 Agg. INSCKLST Evans Environmental & Geol LEAD -BASED PAINT INSPECTI of FORMER NAVY COMMISSARY located at the Corner of Virginia and Simonton Streets Key West, Florida 33040 EE&G Project #: 7002811014 Prepared by: Evans Environmental and Geological Science Management, Inc. (EE&G). 99 SE 5th Street, Floor 4 Miami, Florida 33131 Prepared for: Bender Architects and Associates 720 Caroline Street Key West, Florida 33040 Attention: Mr. Bert Bender August 9, 1996 LEAD -BASED PAINT INSPECTION CERTIFICATION OF RESULTS CLIENT: . Bender Architects and Associates PROJECT: Former Navy Commissary Virginia & Simonton Streets Key West, Florida CERTIFIED TEST DATE: July 26, 1996 TEST CATEGORY: Portable X-ray Fluorescence Spectrum Analyzer REPORT MEDIUM: Milligrams of lead per square centimeter INSTRUMENTATION: Niton portable XL XRF Spectrum Analyzer CALIBRATION: The Niton portable XL XRF Spectrum Analyzer • measures lead L-line X-ray emissions. This instrument is factory calibrated with -HUD approved: reference standards.: As per manufacturer's ASTM type recommendations, the instrument is field checked approximately every hour using NIST standards. OPERATOR'S LICENSE: Florida HRS 2010-2 OPERATOR'S CERTIFICATE: #94306 I hereby certify that to the best of my knowledge and capabilities, the following report reflects the true lead contents of the painted surfaces at the above referenced residence. Matt Weber Project Manager Date EE&G Science and Management, Inc. Lead -Based Paint Inspection Former Navy Commissary Key West, Florida INTRODUCTION A Lead -Based Paint inspection was conducted on July 26, .1996 in the Former navy Commissary Building located at the corner of Viginia and Simonton Streets, Key West, Florida. The purpose of this inspection was to determine the presence, extent, and condition of lead -based painted surfaces. The scope of work consisted of the inspection of all exterior and interior painted components. The inspection was conducted utilizing a modification of the protocol established in the "Lead -Based Paint: Interim Guidelines for Hazard Identification and Abatement -in Public and Indian Housing", Housing and Urban Development, September 1990. METHODS Each area of the structure was inspected for painted surfaces. Due to the possibility of nonuniform painting avd renovation work, each area (room) of the dwelling was treated separately when classifying homogeneous areas. A portable spectrum analyzing X-ray fluorescence detector (XRF) manufactured by Niton was used for the LBP analysis. One component per room was tested (one baseboard, one wall, etc.). Walls were letter designated. The letter "A" .was assigned to the entrance. wall.of a room where.the. door (main door. _ if more than one door to the room existed) was located. The letter "B" was assigned to the first wall to the left and proceeding clockwise the last two walls were lettered "C" and "D" respectively. QUALITY CONTROL PROTOCOL Quality control measurements were conducted using U.S. Department of Commerce National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIS I') lead -based paint (LBP) film to determine instrument accuracy and measure reproducibility. These readings are taken at the beginning of each day and then approximately every hour. The Niton instrument is factory -calibrated and perfor►ns a "self -calibration" when the ii1strOmerit is initialized. A quality control check is performed with the NISI standards at the beginning of each day and tile" eVery hour with the Niton instrument. Quality Control readings are listed in the XRF Results section as a Calibration under the Room Tested column. EE&G: bead -Based Paint Inspection Form- Na Y Commissa ry :August 9, 1996 INSPECTION LIMITATIONS The objective of this survey was to identify existing lead -based painted components in the residence. Interpretation of XRF data was done using an modification of the HUD Interim Guidelines (Section 4.1.6). This report reflects conditions, operations, and practice as observed on the date of the inspection only. This report -is not designed or intended to be used as a design specification for abatement. INSPECTION RESULTS Results are reported according to the "Lead -Based Paint: Interim Guidelines for Hazard Identification and Abatement in Public and Indian Housing," Housing and Urban Development, September 1990, Section 4.1.6, Interpretations of XRF Sampling Data for Spectrum Analyzers. Components reported as negative tested less than 0.8 mg lead/cm', components reported as positive tested greater than 1.2 mg/cm2, and components reported as inconclusive tested from 0.8 to 1.2 mg/cm'- (XRF results). Most surfaces tested'were found to be within acceptable levels (less than 0.8 mg lead/cm2) according to HUD established Guidelines. See XRF RESULTS section. However, low levels of lead that were found in the building should be noted. These levels of lead range from 0.01 to 0.73mg/cm2.- These levels are low. enough to be considered. unlikely to pose a health risk according to HUD established Guidelines. The following surfaces were found to contain lead in levels greater than the acceptable limit (0.8 mg lead/cm'-) according to HUD established Guidelines: Floor l: North halls - red paint on concrete floor approx. 1,000 sf Room between freezers - red paint on lower wall approx. 50 sf Floor 2: Southeast office - paint on wall approx. 500 sf Packing bay - yellow lines on floor approx. 50 sf Exterior: Loading dock - yellow paint on loading dock approx. 50 sf See XRF RESULTS section (where PbL reading is greater than 1.2). 2 EE&G: I.oad.Based Paint Inspection Former NavyCommissary ssa ry :August 9, 1996 RECOMMNDATIONS Presently, only Public Housing Authorities are required by law to conduct lead -based paint abatement. These regulations do not apply to the subject building. Thera are, at the current time, no laws regulating this building in regard to the testing or removal of lead -based paint. The lead -based paint is presently in poor condition. Additional testing, such as soil and dust sampling should be considered if the facility will be occupied by children or females of child- bearing age. This sampling will indicate if there are hazardous levels of lead present in the soil or dust, which, is considered by the Center for Disease Control to be the primary source for lead contamination exposure. EE&G recommends that the damaged areas be repaired and re -sealed. The contractor conducting the work must comply with 29 CFR 1926.62 (OSHA Construction Industry Standard for Lead Exposure). It is the opinion of EE&G that once the damaged leaded coatings are repaired and re- sealed, they will no longer pose a significant health risk based on- the buildings intended utilization (non-residential). EE&G recommends that renovation work that will cause airborne emissions of lead particulates (eg. sanding, scraping) of any components that contain lead -based paint be done by someone trained in handling lead -based paint. EE&G also recommends that renovation work of any components that contain lead in low levels (between 0.01 and 0. 8 mg/cm'). and .that involves the disturbance of these surfaces in such a way as to cause airborne emissions of lead particulate (eg. sanding, scraping) should be performed using personal protective equipment as described in 29 CFR 1926.62 Construction Industry Standard For Protection of Workers from Lead., Items should be referenced for lead content in the XRF RESULTS section of this report before any renovation or disturbance of surfaces 's undertaken so that the proper protection may be provided for personnel. If you have any questions or comments on the above material, please do not hesitate to contact Rich Grupenhoff directly at (305)374-8300. Submitted by: Reviewed by: 4A.adgett Rat Richard Grupenhoff Project Manager Senior Project Manager 3 XRF RESULTS c9 N U E E O U �(D rn ca rn Z a� c0 E N O U_ O VJ O I- to .- 1- r 1� p M p to r "d, r r 0 t7' CD Iq M to Cl r- r r N EN N r to tor- r N N r CO � N r r N C O c�0 r-cDCnO0000ONO rNNNNNmCN NrrNN�fsp�— CN NNNNNNm04NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN C �-C> . ..r.. r rNNrMNN co M 7 O M —a O r CO to r r M (- 0 0 O O O O r r r r CO CO r (y I-N M O O O O OO Q q (j O O O O O O r O O O O O O O O Or Orf O O O O O O a) Q) Q) O a) ca L O a) W d O O 0 N a) O Q) a) Q) aJ d a) O Q) O N O O O D U U U U U U U U U U U U U d N N O L O L O L O L .7 0 O o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C C C C C wQ 0 O O o l U U U U U U U U U U U U U U C U U U U U U U 0 O •''O^^ .'�O .'�O^/� •'z^ .'z^ •z'^ •//0^^ •''0^^ .''0^^ /-6� '�O^/� �-6/� 'z^ '-6^ /-6� z'n zr^ '-6^ z,^ ''0^^''0^^ //0^� .'�0^/� •''0^^ .''0^^ .''0^^ •''0^^ ''0^^ •''0^^ ''0^^ 0 •''0^^ a> L Q L Q L a) a) a) N C y C O C n n W W W CL Q m E. E. E ca � o -a> a) '0 �- .-0 _, �. ? E E E �- » i.� LL U� � � o o co co co X X X m m m L L L L � 0 tf 0 0 O) O) cU U c9 U CO U O. O O O CU CU CU CB cII O O O M m mO- === O O O U C _C CD�DoC) 3: ��LLLL U)wC) c0 N O U 'C I UDUC) W WUUUd u i 3 QQQQQQQQQQQUDOmm QQQQQQppmmUCiUUU0U IQ I — r-— I ' — r `-' -- — N N N N N N N N N N N N I N Q) 0 Q) c Ca (O C9 E E E E E E E E E E E E E - 0 0 0 0 0 0 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E ca cu io 70 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E E 0 0 0 0 U UU��C�LL'C�CL' [Ycl� 0-1 i ' j 0 0�Of[If 0 0 0 ll�aflfQ 0 0 0 0 ofofx 0 0 xfYwCr_,Ct�fY(If 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 G� 0 0 Q�Cr 0 0 0 0 r II N ch 'C to cD tom. M Cn O r N Cl) 'ci' CD f` co CD O r N Cl) 'cf to CD i N N N N 1- N N CO N N Cn N O c') r M N m f") Cl) CY to to 1� Cl) c') m m I Lf) r M I� O N fV st �t sf r aJ r r N r vt r CD r r N 1- N r O O O r M •c}• Cl) r r �--• n O q CO r r N r r `ct to r O N co Cp N Cl) 00 CD M O nj r r CO r M r r N M N •d' N N M r 0M N N �t N C) M N N M N N N N N r r N N M N r N CN M r N N N N N N N CM r r r r M r M r N N __ N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N r C) r r 00 N 00 M r (D O N O r O O 'V' O t!) O 1- 777 O r 'ct' N 1� r (D 7 D9 0 M 0 Q) 0 O r O r O M t7 �Y r M r t� r 1� O •ct O O O O r —IN r N N r N 0 O O O r 0 0 0 C) 0 0 0 0 O O O O O tq tp t[) O O . O O O O O M O 0 0 O O r 0 0 O IC) O O O O O y a) () a) a) v-0'O 0 o 0 0(D 0 a)C 0 cu o 0 oco030 UUUUU 0 0 0 00 033U U U-070a� kl� 0000000000 oa 0'0-o'--�'-n fn (n Cn (n (n (A (CA 0 0 0 0 o o o o 0 0 0 Cn fn In Cn C7 Cn co (n Cn (n (A C/) CQ (A C7 (A 0 (Q 0 0 0 Cn In Cn 0 (n 0 co 0 Cn 0 0 C4 (n 0 Cf) J J J L L L L L L J 3! J J J J J J J J J J C N N NO O G� iL � -a - o C E .0 E E CMrRo�,3 c'' E E E s�o=�UUUU gim O O O cQ N NUUU o 0 0 a) 0 w L � ca 0 m is m m iv m 0 L 0 l� 0 L 0 l� 00 1. L 0 000 n n n n n n L o 0 OOM C =_ C C _- L00 0 0 00@���ttCnnj0 I Q O O O O O O Q Q Q Q Q Q pm a s N N t1) tf) l7 (D (D (✓ ! C� CO (D Il- ti ti rl- r-- ti r-- r r- c0 00 00 00 I'- I` i i co 00 O 0) (7) 0) (D 0) 0) r- rl- r r E E E E E E E E'z E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E 0 (r 0 Cr 0 � 0 Cr 0 0 0 cl^ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cr re C" Cr Cr Cr ll�Cr I Cr Cl:� Cr Cr Cr Crw Cr w Cr Q� CrCr .-- r--- r r r r— CO Q) M O 'Cf 'd e-- N 'c!• M V •ct LC] I CD I� 1 C a0 d' �t O')I-- 'ctLn r N M r}' Ln lA Ln CD 1` to (() 00 Cn O Ln O r NL(') CDtD 00Q)OC") CD (D CD C.O CD CD CD tD CD CD L� 1` t- 1-- 1` 1- !-- t` Il- r lr it it lr lr Ir it I� IM Ir IN CO l I- Ir m M� N N N N N N N N N N N M N N N N N N O O O O O O O N M CD O N tt N r r 0 r r O O O O O O O O O O O O CCD 0 0 cD 0 0 O O IrIrIrlrI^IrlrIrIN Ir I`-Ir-Ir IN I`_. �`"'I— —IN CR IM IM IV r r r r '�f r "t"Zi co N N 40�.,�.; co N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N "I'O 0 0 0 0 0 0 1� fD cD rOO r e- r 0 (U fU cU cU cU Co cU .0 -0-0 cU cU c4 Q7 cU (U CU cU cU (U (U cU .D 0 N 0 0 N 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 3 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 o 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 2 0 0 o 0 o o o 0 o 000000o�0opo0 0 0 0 0�000000000���l I - ��������c�c� 00000000000000000000000000 0 0 00'000'0'000'o'000 U) U) lu) co U) U) J J J J J J J J J J J J �1--fUIU�ca � — ��>>Rl o 0 o ca cv C C C .a 1] E E E o u cEo E o 0 o a�i o a�i c_Vv c—oU mmm� _ 0 <v ca co cu cv co 0 0 0 �II cn o 0 0 0 0 0 �II cu m co c4 0 0 0 a s ti is ppp���pppppp��>��opprn�n�������� m m m m m m m Q 1<1< p p p U U U Q Q Q m m m m m m m m m Q Q Q Q Q Q U U U U U U U V V �Y cD (D cD cD cD D CD COcD cD (D (D o 0 0 0 0 0 �--- — �--� �--- c- r- r — c.-- c- c- (D ............... O f� h. 00 O CO CO CO 00 coI q co 00 0, to � r r �t M r rN (O r N M r r 0) r `- O r T N f` M M 0) •cY T � LO r T r •� N r r r T T r� r� _ M s r r r M M N M N M N Ch N N N N N N N N N M N M r N N r r N N r N r N (V N �• N N tt7 to (D N r M M N N r M N M r CV 04 N N N M N N N CIN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N M r O CWOM O— U.t!") O O O t[� O to O CD N O p N N 0 0 r 0 r 0 C) r r 0 M Cb r r M to T O N p r �- N �--. (O p tD �. r M r 0 0 0 0 0 M M a0 O O O O O O O O 0 0 O O O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 r N N O O O O O O O O O r C) C) N O N 0 0 0 O O O O O O N tv O Cll Cll O O O O N O U U L L 0 0 L 0 L 0 L L U U L L 0 U L U O L U Q) L U 0 0 L L U U 0 L L U U 0 L L U U 0 L 0 L 0 L L M CQ CB _— 0 U 0 U 0 0 0 0 0 U U 0 U 0 U 0 0 U U 0 0 U U 0 U 0 U 0 U 0 0 U U 0 0 U U o o U U U o U U o U 0 o U U o U 2 2G C' 0 0 0 0 0 2f` 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 cu D D p p 0 0 0 (� U1 C C 0— 0— C () () 0 (o 0 () 0 0 f) () 0 0 w (o 0 U) () 0 l) 0 0 0 0 () 0 0 0 C) (� 0 0 (� 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o (� (� l� (� (� l� (� C� (� UJ (� � C0 (0 (0 U) TFM t... Q L C")- L L L J J J •= L O O O N� 000 C4 (4 O CD N c L 0 L 0 L 0 3:3, SLY ��� SEE m ca m o 0 0 0 Q 0 CD) 0) 0) r>J CO 0 0 0 0 0 0----_— ci3 O ca O co 0 O 0 0-- Co c0 __ C CII '- C - C _ L •0 •L cB •L CD __ CII __ CII m L O L O �. O L O L O L O = _ 0 0 LL LL LL ������������UUUU)U) _O _O 3n �, o: oo'S� �) U U U U U U U U UIU U U U U U U U Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q c Q Q M M CO M M M C•M M M T co O T 00 Cb M r Cb co co co T m O i T E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E O O O N O (U O N O E E E E (U 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o CIO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0——— _� o 0 0 0 E 0 E 0 E E E E E .9 o 7 E QrwUrwwww�Icwwwar� 0 0 o C o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o �u)u)Una6inainuwowo��Uoc0U0 cO c° cn m ca c� 0 0 0c0tf 0 0 0-�cu-cu 0__ •— 0 0 i i N N N N N N N N N N N N O N T N N CV m N �t N U') CD N fl co N N N Ol N C`7 C) T M N C7 M M C`•) Uj C`, CD C') f` C`•) CO(�, M T N C`•) U') CD Lo pp O O T T T T T I T T r T T T r T T T T M �f T �} T �• •a T T T T c}' •� T T to T U) � T � T co T Lo cD T T r' r O Ub N CR r r r r r r r � 'q!'c-t rr rr rr rr rN r ra0 N r tNo Nr rN M� •it• O rr r Nlc'l CV r-o irN 1-1-� r1-: M.aN tr fNLOM N N N N r r r r r r C7 Cl) M M cf �t V. rrr r __ N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N C-) N N N N N N N N N N N N N N h N N N r r r r (y M N N d V r 0 r r UT tY N O t- 'It N � Op f� O. O O O O O O O O r O O O O r N N O O";; po i-0 0 0 0 0 CV IV- 04 to COO O O O O O O O O O O O O N N O OO O O tq tq to O O O O O O O O O O — Ull N UU Ull PJ O O O O O N N O O N N N N � _ _ _ O N O O Q) Ull O tll tll tll ty CO L L L O U N d O N d U _ O O U Ill O O U U U '0 L L L L L L L L t_ L L L 0 3 0 0 0 U 0 0 %) 0 0 0 U U 0 <i L L L L L` L` L% `% C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C O O O U U U U U U75 C) Co-)����0�����UC) O O O O O O UU I c c _cC)0)ma,a�ma>0>a�a�a�ma,o�a�cs0)0)v � .O � D ,i'i 'O � .- .- C C .0 .0 •C •C •C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C O O O O O O O O O N O 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O cnc�cnv�v�cnc�cL�acncnc�cnv�cnaaa�cLa a �a n cLa �a an �aaa ��a cis I , O O O C C C C C C h Un N EEE L cc.C.—'.—'-� _ E E E a cu�� �Un� c>> L 0 0 0 0 0 .� cc� - U U U U U U U U}} W (1) (L) --- cc is cc is cc m o o o m I +I 0 0 0 I O r Q Q Q L L L cu 0 O O O 0 0 0 L L L L L L L L o 0 0 cu n� — cQcn.cz I � I ti��u Z) D D mlmlmlml¢I¢��IUIUIUIUI�IUIUIUIUI�I¢I¢I�IUI�IUI�I�IUI�I�IUIUIUIQIQIQIQIQIQIQIQIQIQ I a'a'rna�rnrnrnolc CD ___ I N N N N (V N T .-- .-- N N (N N N N i N N N N N N N N N N (V (N N N N N" (V N N N N N N N N N E E E E E E E CI= E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E ------ O O O O O O O C i 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Of CIS i N N N N N N N N i N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N r r N M V 11] to ^ co ' m O (D (D cD c.0 CD tD cD Cl) f\ t` ti ti f` Up T O (D f` Ub !r O r N �-- '- •- •-- r r r r r I� f` Up W W W GO Ub c0 UXj W c0 O O UT UJ'1 � O� m O r 0 r r r r r r r r r �--• �- t- N N N M M M Q1 r r N M t- CO W M CD CO N �-- r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r N co `(t N r CD r r r M N N r M vN N r r e•- rrr N N N M M In N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N M N N ti C!) CA M CD CO t7 N O C) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C) to N O M r r p CA co N N r r r 0 O r r p r �t �t :� Cp O O O r M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tt et et C)O C)O O r r Cj O CU QJ (ll U O N N N (tf (o U U U U U U TJ t7 U U U — 77 a O O O 0 0 0 00 O (II Ct7 (o C C C C C C C C C w, O O O o i� o Z Z Z O o o O O O t' >> o Cl) 11) C (_rET • O V^^ rr^^ v^^ • oOOOO QC�LLa QaLLQ^^QQ)O• ,,V^^J ,,v^^/ ^^LLQl (U lV^J ''vO^^I ''vO^^J ^^LLUC v^ V,,^^J V//^^J ^^LLOC LL^^[V (Z CL LL LL LL (Q (9 cB •� cD cO CII 0 0 0 0 O- O O O O O O O 000 c00000 Y Y Y U U U I-E coo (T CT CT (n U) (n (n ` ` (n v) C C_ C cy co co ca (a czr L r 0 L 0 L o _ Rr - (a -0 � O L t... O L o L 0 L o - O cn cn cn (n (n 6 (n (n 0 0 0 cu 3: J M J M J 0 0 0 c 0 <<<<<<<Q <<<<< UUC�UUUUUUU U N CV N N CV N N (V 0 0 0 0 0(D(D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- N 2 C (U 22 = (ll 2 _ (U 2 = (U 22 _ (U (U 22 _-I U 22 J I �_ (U (U 'L7 (U 'D (U U •O U •D (U N 'O (D U N N N 'D N N N 0 o 'O U co CU (o (II C C C C C C .n �2 -�2 12 12 E 1212 � N !2 .(n (n w 0 0 w .Q .n cncncncncnc 00,1000000000000000000000 T ---------- N C) M C:) d' C. LO O (D O t` O coO C) I C)r C I r r CV r C') r (D f` 00 (n C:) c- NC-7 'IT U) (D f-- 00 (n O N N N N N CV (V (V I (V N N N r r �--- N N r- N N" r- r N- 04 N N- N CV N N- N (V N 04 (V 04 CV N N Cl) N (V SECTION 00500 FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR THIS AGREEMENT is made by and between Monroe County, 5100 College Road, Stock Island, Key West, Florida 33040 (hereinafter referred to as "owner") and (hereinafter referred to as "contractor') for construction of the specifications and architectural and engineering drawings for which are attached and incorporated into this contract as Exhibit A (hereinafter referred to as the "Project"), the owner and the contractor hereby agreeing as follows: ARTICLE I THE CONTRACT AND THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1 The Contract 1.1.1 The contract between the owner and the contractor, of which this agreement is a part, consists of the contract documents. It shall be effective on the date this agreement is executed by the last party to execute it. 1.2 The Contract Documents 1.2.1 The contract documents consist of this agreement, the specifications, the drawings, all change orders, any addenda and field orders issued hereafter, any other amendments hereto executed by the parties hereafter, together with the following: Exhibit A; Exhibit B. Documents not enumerated in this paragraph 1.2.1 are not contract documents and do not form part of this contract. 1.3 Entire Agreement 1.3.1 This contract, together with the contractor's public construction bond for the Project, constitute the entire and exclusive agreement between the owner and the contractor with reference to the Project. Specifically, but without limitation, this contract supersedes any bid documents and all prior written or oral communications, representations and negotiations, if any, between the owner and contractor. 1.4 No Privity with Others 1.4.1 Nothing contained in this contract shall create, or be interpreted to create, privity or any other contractual agreement between the owner and any person or entity other than the contractor. 1.5 Intent and Interpretation 1.5.1 The intent of this contract is to require complete, correct and timely execution of the work. Any work that may be required, implied or inferred by the contract documents, or any one or more of them, as necessary to produce the intended result shall be provided by the contractor for the contract price. FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 1 1.5.2 This contract is intended to be an integral whole and shall be interpreted as internally consistent. What is required by any one contract document shall be considered as required by the county commissioners. 1.5.3 When a word, term or phrase is used in this contract, it shall be interpreted or construed, first, as defined herein, second, if not defined, according to its generally accepted -- meaning in the construction industry; and third, if there is no generally accepted meaning in the construction industry, according to its common and customary usage. 1.5.4 The words "include," "includes," or "including," as used in this contract, shall be deemed to be followed by the phrase, "without limitation." 1.5.5 The specification herein of any act, failure, refusal, omission, event, occurrence or condition as constituting a material breach of this contract shall not imply that any other, nonspecific act, failure, refusal, omission, event, occurrence or condition shall be deemed not to constitute a material breach of this contract. 1.5.6 Words or terms used as nouns in this contract shall be inclusive of their singular and plural forms, unless the context of their usage clearly requires a contrary meaning. 1.5.7 The contractor shall have a continuing duty to read, carefully study and compare each of the contract documents, the shop drawings and the product data and shall give written notice to the owner of any inconsistency, ambiguity, error or omission which the contractor may discover with respect to these documents before proceeding with the affected work. The issuance, or the express or implied approval by the owner or the architect of the contract documents, shop drawings or product data shall not relieve the contractor of the continuing duties imposed hereby, nor shall any such approval be evidence of the contractor's compliance with this contract. The owner has requested the architect to only prepare documents for the project, including the drawings and specifications for the project, which are accurate, adequate, consistent, coordinated and sufficient for construction. HOWEVER, THE OWNER MAKES NO REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER TO THE CONTRACTOR CONCERNING SUCH DOCUMENTS. By the execution hereof, the contractor acknowledges and represents that it has received, reviewed and carefully examined such documents, has found them to be complete, accurate, adequate, consistent, coordinated and - sufficient for construction and that the contractor has not, does not, and will not rely upon any representation or warranties by the owner concerning such contract documents as no such representation or warranties have been or are hereby made. 1.5.8 As between numbers and scaled measurements on the drawings and in the design, the numbers shall govern; as between larger scale and smaller scale drawings, the larger scale shall govern. 1.5.9 Neither the organization of any of the contract document into divisions, sections, - paragraphs, articles (or other categories), nor the organization or arrangement of the design, shall control the contractor in dividing the work or in establishing the extent or scope of the work to be performed by subcontractors. — FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 2 1.6 Ownership of Contract Documents 1.6.1 The contract documents, and each of them, shall remain the property of the owner. The contractor shall have the right to keep one record set of the contract documents upon completion of the project; provided, however, that in no event shall contractor use, or permit to be used, any or all of such contract documents on other projects without the owner's prior written authorization. ARTICLE II THE WORK 2.1 The contractor shall perform all of the work required, implied or reasonably inferable from, this contract. 2.2 The term "work" shall mean whatever is done by or required of the contractor to perform and complete its duties under this contract, including the following: construction of the whole or a designated part of the project; furnishing of any required surety bonds and insurance; and the provision or furnishing of labor, supervision, services, materials, supplies, equipment, fixtures, appliances, facilities, tools, transportation, storage, power, the payment of any applicable sales and use taxes; royalties and product license fees; permits and licenses required of the contractor, fuel, heat, light, cooling and all other utilities as required by this contract. The work to be performed by the contractor is generally described as follows: ARTICLE III CONTRACT TIME 3.1 Time and Liquidated Damages 3.1.1 The contractor shall commence the work on achieve substantial completion of the work no later than and shall 3.1.2 The contractor shall pay the owner a sum equal to the amount of dollars as computed in Section 00350-1 "Liquidated Damages" of the Specifications per day for each and every calendar day of unexcused delay in achieving substantial completion beyond the date set forth herein for substantial completion of the work. Any sums due and payable hereunder by the contractor shall be payable, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages representing an estimate of delay damages likely to be sustained by the owner, estimated at or before the time of executing this contract. When the owner reasonably believes that substantial completion will be inexcusably delayed, the owner shall be entitled, but not required, to withhold from any amounts otherwise due the contractor an amount then believed by the owner to be adequate to recover liquidated damages applicable to such delays. If and when the contractor overcomes the delay in achieving substantial completion, or any part thereof, for which the owner has withheld payment, the owner shall promptly release to the contractor those funds withheld, but no longer applicable, as liquidated damages. 3.2 Substantial Completion 3.2.1 "Substantial Completion" shall mean that stage in the progression of the work when the work is sufficiently complete in accordance with this contract that the owner can enjoy beneficial use or occupancy of the work and can utilize the work for its intended purpose. The date of FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 3 substantial completion is the date set forth by the Construction Manager on the substantial completion form. 3.3 Time is of the Essence 3.3.1 All limitation of time set forth in the contract documents are of the essence of this contract. ARTICLE IV CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 The Contract Price 4.1.1 The owner shall pay, and the contractor shall accept, as full and complete payment for all of the work required herein, the fixed sum of $ . The sum set forth in this paragraph 4.1 shall constitute the contract price which shall not be modified except by change order as provided in this contract. ARTICLE V PAYMENT OF THE CONTRACT PRICE 5.1 Schedule of Values 5.1.1 Within ten (10) calendar days of the effective date hereof, the contractor shall submit to the owner and to the architect a schedule of values allocating the contract price to the various portions of the work. The contractor's schedule of values shall be prepared in such form, with such detail, and supported by such data as the architect or owner may require to substantiate its accuracy. The contractor shall not imbalance its schedule of values nor artificially inflate any element thereof. The violation of this provision by the contractor shall constitute a material breach of this contract. The schedule of values shall be used only as a basis for the contractor's applications for payment and shall only constitute such basis after it has been acknowledged in writing by the architect and the owner. 5.2 Payment Procedure 5.2.1 The owner shall pay the contract price to the contractor as provided below. 5.2.2 Progress Payments —Based upon the contractor's applications for payment submitted to the architect and upon certificates for payment subsequently issued to the owner by the architect, the owner shall make progress payments to the contractor on account of the contract price. 5.2.3 On or before the day of each month after commencement of the work, the contractor shall submit an application for payment for the period ending the day of the month to the architect in such form and manner, and with such supporting data and content, as the owner or the architect may require. Therein, the contractor may request payment for ninety percent (90%) of that portion of the contract price properly allocable to contract requirements properly provided, labor, materials and equipment properly incorporated in the work plus ninety percent (90%) of that portion of the contract price properly allocable to materials or equipment properly stored onsite (or elsewhere if approved in advance in writing by the owner) for subsequent incorporation in the work, less the total amount of previous payments received from the owner. Payment for stored materials and equipment shall be FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 4 conditioned upon the contractor's proof satisfactory to the owner, that the owner has title to such materials and equipment and shall include proof of required insurance. Such application for payment shall be signed by the contractor and shall constitute the contractor's representation that the work has progressed to the level for which payment is requested in accordance with the schedule of values, that the work has been properly installed or performed in full accordance with this contract, and that the contractor knows of no reason why payment should not be made as requested. Thereafter, the architect will review the application for payment and may also review the work at the project site or elsewhere to determine whether the quantity and quality of the work is as represented in the application for payment and is as required by this contract. The architect shall determine and certify to the owner the amount properly owing to the contractor. The owner shall make partial payments on account of the contract price to the contractor within twenty (20) days following the receipt by Monroe County Construction Manager, of each application for payment, from the Architect. The amount of each partial payment shall be the amount certified for payment by the architect less such amounts, if any, otherwise owing by the contractor to the owner or which the owner shall have the right to withhold as authorized by this contract. The architect's certification of the contractor's application for payment shall not preclude the owner from the exercise of any of its rights as set forth in paragraph 5.3 hereinbelow. 5.2.4 The contractor warrants that all payments to subcontractors have been made as certified on the application for payment and that title to all work covered by an application for payment will pass to the owner no later than the time of payment. The contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an application for payment, all work for which payments have been received from the owner shall be free and clear of liens, claims, security interest or other encumbrances in favor of the contractor or any other person or entity whatsoever. 5.2.5 The contractor shall promptly pay each subcontractor, out of the amount paid to the contractor on account of such subcontractor's work, the amount to which such subcontractor is entitled. If the contractor does not pay the subcontractor the amount due, the subcontractor may only seek payment from the contractor's public construction bond surety. In no event is the owner obligated to pay any subcontractor an amount owed to it by the contractor. Language similar to this paragraph 5.2.5 must appear in all contracts between the contractor and its subcontractors. 5.2.6 No progress payment, nor any use or occupancy of the project by the owner, shall be interpreted to constitute an acceptance of any work not in strict accordance with this contract. 5.3 Withheld Payment 5.3.1 The owner may decline to make payment, may withhold funds, and, if necessary, may demand the return of some or all of the amounts previously paid to the contractor, to protect the owner from loss because of: (a) defective work not remedied by the contractor nor, in the opinion of the owner, likely to be remedied by the contractor; (b) claims of third parties against the owner or the owner's property; FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 5 (c) failure by the contractor to pay subcontractors or others in a prompt and proper fashion; (d) evidence that the balance of the work cannot be completed in accordance with the contract for the unpaid balance of the contract price; (e) evidence that the work will not be completed in the time required for substantial or final completion; (f) persistent failure to carry out the work in accordance with the contract; (g) damage to the owner or a third party to whom the owner is, or may be, liable. In the event that the owner makes written demand upon the contractor for amounts previously paid by the owner as contemplated in this subparagraph 5.3.1, the contractor shall promptly comply with such demand. 5.4 Unexcused Failure to Pay 5.4.1 If within twenty (20) days after the date established herein for payment to the contractor by the owner, the owner, without cause or basis hereunder, fails to pay the contractor any amount then due and payable to the contractor, then the contractor may after seven (7) additional days' written.notice to the owner and the architect, and without prejudice to any other available rights or remedies it may have, stop the work until payment of those amounts due from the owner have been received. 5.5 Substantial Completion 5.5.1 When the contractor believes that the work is substantially complete, the contractor shall submit written notice that the project is ready for substantial completion inspection. The architect, on the basis of contractor's notice, shall determine that the work is in fact substantially complete, and report findings to the Construction Manager. The Construction Manager will inspect the work and will be the final judge as to whether substantial completion has been achieved. The Architect will prepare a certificate of substantial completion which shall establish the date of substantial completion, shall state the responsibilities of the contractor for project security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the work, and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the contractor shall complete the items listed therein. The certificate of substantial completion shall be submitted to the contractor for written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in such certificate. Upon substantial completion of the work and execution by both the owner and the contractor of the certificate of substantial completion, the owner shall pay the contractor an amount sufficient to increase total payments to the contractor to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price less five percent (5%) retention and less three hundred percent (300%) of the reasonable cost as determined by the owner and the architect for completing all incomplete work, correcting and bringing into conformance all defective and nonconforming work, and handling all unsettled claims. The certificate of substantial - completion shall not be signed by the Construction Manager unless accompanied by a signed certificate of occupancy from all governing authorities. FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 6 5.6 Completion and Final Payment 5.6.1 When all of the work is finally complete and the contractor is ready for a final inspection, it shall notify the owner and the architect thereof in writing. Thereupon, the architect will make final inspection of the work and, if work is complete in full accordance with this contract and this contract has been fully performed, the architect will promptly issue a final certificate for payment certifying to the owner that the project is complete and the contractor is entitled to the remainder of the unpaid contract price, less any amount withheld pursuant to this contract. Guarantees required by the contract shall commence on the date of final completion of the work. If the architect is unable to issue its final certificate for payment and is required to repeat its final inspection of the work, the contractor shall bear the cost of such repeat final inspection(s) which cost may be deducted by the owner from the contractor's final payment. 5.6.1.1 If the contractor fails to achieve final completion within the time fixed therefor by the architect in its certificate of substantial completion, the contractor shall pay the owner the sum of per day for the first 15 days, per day for the second 15 days, and per day thereafter for each and every calendar day of unexcused delay in achieving final completion beyond the date set forth herein for final completion of the work. Any sums due and payable hereunder by the contractor shall be payable, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages representing an estimate of delay damages likely to be sustained by the owner, estimated at or before the time of executing this contract. When the owner reasonably believes that final completion will be inexcusably delayed, the owner shall be entitled, but not required, to withhold from any amounts otherwise due the contractor an amount then believed by the owner to be adequate to recover liquidated damages applicable to such delays. If and when the contractor overcomes the delay in achieving final completion, or any part thereof, for which the owner has withheld payment, the owner shall promptly release to the contractor those funds withheld, but no longer applicable, as liquidated damages. 5.6.2 The contractor shall not be entitled to final payment unless and until it submits to the architect its affidavit that all payrolls, invoices for materials and equipment, and other liabilities connected with the work for which the owner, or the owner's property might be responsible, have been fully paid or otherwise satisfied; releases and waivers of lien from all subcontractors of the contractor and of any and all parties required by the architect or the owner; and the consent of surety to final payment. The affidavits, releases and waivers required from subcontractors and materialmen are for the administrative convenience of the owner only. They do not create an obligation on the part of the owner to assure that any subcontractor or materialmen is paid. If unpaid, subcontractors and materialmen must seek payment from the contractor's public construction bond surety. 5.6.3 The owner shall make final payment of all sums due the contractor per Section 01027 of the Technical Specifications Project Manual. 5.6.4 Acceptance of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims against the owner by the contractor except for those claims previously made in writing against the owner by the contractor, pending at the time of final payment, and identified in writing by the contractor as unsettled at the time of its request for final payment. FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 7 ARTICLE VI THE OWNER 6.1 Information and Services Required from Owner 6.1.1 The owner shall furnish to the contractor, at the time of executing this contract, any and all written and tangible material in its possession concerning conditions below ground at the site _ of the project. Such written and tangible material is furnished to the contractor only in order to make complete disclosure of such material and for no other purpose. By furnishing such material, the owner does not represent, warrant, or guarantee its accuracy either in whole, in _ part, implicitly or explicitly, or at all, and shall have no liability therefor. The owner shall also furnish surveys, legal limitations and utility locations (if known), and a legal description of the project site. 6.1.2 Excluding permits and fees normally the responsibility of the contractor, the owner shall obtain all approvals, easements, and the like required for construction and shall pay for necessary assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 6.1.3 The owner shall furnish the contractor, free of charge, copies of the contract documents for execution of the work. The contractor will be charged, and shall pay the owner, $ per additional set of contract documents which it may require. 6.2 Right to Stop Work 6.2.1 If the contractor persistently fails or refuses to perform the work in accordance with this contract, the owner may order the contractor to stop the work, or any described portion thereof, until the cause for stoppage has been corrected, no longer exists, or the owner orders that work be resumed, in such event, the contractor shall immediately obey such order. 6.3 Owner's Right to Perform Work 6.3.1 If the contractor's work is stopped by the owner under paragraph 6.2, and the contractor fails within three (3) days of such stoppage to provide adequate assurance to the owner that - the cause of such stoppage will be eliminated or corrected, then the owner may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies the owner may have against the contractor, proceed to carry out the subject work. In such a situation, an appropriate change order shall be issued deducting from the contract price the cost of correcting the subject deficiencies, plus compensation for the architect's additional services and expenses necessitated thereby, if any. If the unpaid portion of the contract price is insufficient to cover the amount due the owner, the -- contractor shall pay the difference to the owner. ARTICLE VII THE CONTRACTOR 7.1 The contractor is again reminded of its continuing duty set forth in subparagraph 1.5.7. The contractor shall perform no part of the work at any time without adequate contract documents or, as appropriate, approved shop drawings, product data or samples for such portion of the work. If the contractor performs any of the work knowing it involves a recognized — error, inconsistency or omission in the contract documents without such notice to the architect, FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 8 the contractor shall bear responsibility for such performance and shall bear the cost of correction. 7.2 The contractor shall perform the work strictly in accordance with this contract. 7.3 The contractor shall supervise and direct the work using the contractor's best skill, effort and attention. The contractor shall be responsible to the owner for any and all acts or omissions of the contractor, its employees and others engaged in the work on behalf of the contractor. 7.4 Warranty 7.4.1 The contractor warrants to the owner that all labor furnished to progress the work under this contract will be competent to perform the tasks undertaken, that the product of such labor will yield only first-class results, that materials and equipment furnished will be of good quality and new unless otherwise permitted by this contract, and that the work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects and in strict conformance with this contract. All work not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. 7.5 The contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, impact fees, fees and licenses necessary and ordinary for the work. The contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, governmental fees, licenses, inspections and surveys required by Federal, State, or Municipal bodies having jurisdiction over the project for the proper execution and completion of the work which are customarily secured after execution of the contract and which are legally required at the time bids are received. The owner will not assess any County permit or County impact fees for the building permit issued by the County Building Department. The contractor is responsible for permit and impact fees issued by City Building Departments and any jurisdiction other than the County of Monroe. The contractor shall comply with all lawful requirements applicable to the work and shall give and maintain any and all notices required by applicable law pertaining to the work. 7.6 Supervision 7.6.1 The contractor shall employ and maintain at the project site only competent supervisory personnel. Absent written instruction from the contractor to the contrary, the superintendent shall be deemed the contractor's authorized representative at the site and shall be authorized to receive and accept any and all communications from the owner or the architect. 7.6.2 Key supervisory personnel assigned by the contractor to this project are as follows: Name Function So long as the individuals named above remain actively employed or retained by the contractor, they shall perform the functions indicated next to their names unless the owner agrees to the contrary in writing. In the event one or more individuals not listed above subsequently assumes one or more of those functions listed above, the contractor shall be bound by the provisions of this subparagraph 7.6.2 as though such individuals had been listed above. FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 9 7.7 The contractor, within fifteen (15) days of commencing the work, shall submit to the owner and the architect for their information, the contractor's schedule for completing the work. The contractor's schedule shall be revised no less frequently than monthly (unless the parties otherwise agree in writing) and shall be revised to reflect conditions encountered from time to time and shall be related to the entire project. Each such revision shall be furnished to the owner and the architect. Failure by the contractor to strictly comply with the provisions of this paragraph 7.7 shall constitute a material breach of this contract. 7.8 The contractor shall continuously maintain at the site, for the benefit of the owner and the architect, one record copy of this contract marked to record on a current basis changes, selections and modifications made during construction. Additionally, the contractor shall — maintain at the site for the owner and the architect the approved shop drawings, product data, samples, other similar required submittals and an office for their use. Upon final completion of the work, all of these record documents shall be delivered to the owner. 7.9 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 7.9.1 Shop drawings, product data, samples and other submittals from the contractor do not constitute contract documents. Their purpose is merely to demonstrate the manner in which the contractor intends to implement the work in conformance with information received from the contract documents. 7.9.2 The contractor shall not perform any portion of the work requiring submittal and review of shop drawings, product data or samples unless and until such submittal shall have been approved by the architect. Approval by the architect, however, shall not be evidence that work installed pursuant thereto conforms with the requirements of this contract. 7.10 Cleaning the Site and the Project 7.10.1 The contractor shall keep the site reasonably clean during performance of the work. Upon final completion of the work, the contractor shall clean the site and the project and remove all waste, together with all of the contractor's property therefrom. 7.11 Access to Work 7.11.1 The owner and the architect shall have access to the work at all times from commencement of the work through final completion. The contractor shall take whatever steps necessary to provide access when requested. 7.12 Indemnification and Hold Harmless 7.12.1 The Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Monroe County Board of County Commissioners from any and all claims for bodily injury (including death), — personal injury, and property damage (including property owned by Monroe County) and any other losses, damages, and expenses (including attorney's fees) which arise out of, in connection with, or by reason of services provided by the contractor or any of its - Subcontractor(s) in any tier, occasioned by the negligence, errors, or other wrongful act or omission of the Contractor or its Subcontractor(s) in any tier, their employees, or agents. In the event the completion of the project (to include the work of others) is delayed or suspended as a — result of the Contractor's failure to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the Contractor shall indemnify the County from any and all increased expenses resulting from such delay. The FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 10 first ten dollars ($10.00) of remuneration paid to the Contractor is for the indemnification provided for above. The extent of liability is in no way limited to, reduced, or lessened by the insurance requirements contained elsewhere within this agreement. 7.12.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this paragraph 7.12 by an employee of the contractor, a subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph 7.12 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damage, compensation or benefits payable by or for the contractor or a subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 7.12.3 The contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and shall hold the owner and architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the contract. However, if the contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a patent, the contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the architect. ARTICLE VIII CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION 8.1 The Architect 8.1.1 The architect for this project is In the event the owner should find it necessary or convenient to replace the architect, the owner shall retain a replacement architect and the status of the replacement architect shall be that of the former architect. 8.2 Architect's Administration 8.2.1 The architect, unless otherwise directed by the owner in writing, will perform those duties and discharge those responsibilities allocated to the architect as set forth in this contract. The architect shall be the owner's representative from the effective date of this contract until final payment has been made.. 8.2.2 The owner and the contractor shall communicate with each other in the first instance with consultation from the architect. 8.2.3 The architect shall be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the drawings and specifications and the judge of the performance thereunder by the contractor. The architect shall render written or graphic interpretations necessary for the proper execution or progress of the work with reasonable promptness on request of the contractor. 8.2.4 The architect will review the contractor's applications for payment and will certify to the owner for payment to the contractor, those amounts then due the contractor as provided in this contract. 8.2.5 The architect shall have authority to reject work which is defective or does not conform to the requirements of this contract. If the architect deems it necessary or advisable, the FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 11 architect shall have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the work for compliance with contract requirements. 8.2.6 The architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action as necessary, concerning the contractor's submittals including shop drawings, product data and samples. Such review, approval or other action shall be for the sole purpose of determining conformance with the design concept and information given through the contract documents. 8.2.7 The architect will prepare change orders and may authorize minor changes in the work by field order upon approval of the owner, as provided elsewhere herein, as long as there is no change in contract price. 8.2.8 The architect shall, upon written request from the contractor, and in line with article 5, conduct inspections to determine the date of substantial completion and the date of final completion, will receive and forward to the owner for the owner's review and records, written warranties and related documents required by this contract and will issue a final certificate for payment upon compliance with the requirements of this contract. 8.3 Claims by the Contractor 8.3.1 All contractor claims shall be initiated by written notice and claim to the owner and the architect. Such written notice and claim must be furnished within three (3) days after occurrence of the event, or the first appearance of the condition, giving rise to the claim. 8.3.2 Pending final resolution of any claim of the contractor, the contractor shall diligently proceed with performance of this contract and the owner shall continue to make payments to the contractor in accordance with this contract. The resolution of any claim under this paragraph 8.3 shall be reflected by a change order executed by the owner, the architect and the contractor. 8.3.3 Claims for Additional Costs —If the contractor wishes to make a claim for an increase in the contract price, as a condition precedent to any liability of the owner therefor, the contractor shall give the architect written notice of such claim within three (3) days after the occurrence of the event, or the first appearance of the condition, giving rise to such claim. Such notice shall be given by the contractor before proceeding to execute any additional or changed work. The failure by the contractor to give such notice and to give such notice prior to executing the work shall constitute a waiver of any claim for additional compensation. 8.3.3.1 In connection with any claim by the contractor against the owner for compensation in excess of the contract price, any liability of the owner for the contractor's costs shall be strictly limited to direct costs incurred by the contractor and shall in no event include indirect costs or consequential damages to the contractor. The owner shall not be liable to the contractor for claims of third parties, including subcontractors, unless and until liability of the contractor has been established therefor in a court of competent jurisdiction. -- 8.3.4 Claims for Additional Time —If the contractor is delayed in progressing any task which at the time of the delay is then critical or which during the delay becomes critical, as the sole result of any act or neglect to act by the owner or someone acting on the owner's behalf, or by changes ordered in the work, unusual delay in transportation, unusually adverse weather FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 12 conditions not reasonably anticipatable, fire or any causes beyond the contractor's control, then the date for achieving substantial completion of the work shall be extended upon the written notice and claim of the contractor to the owner and the architect, for such reasonable time as the architect may determine. Any notice and claim for an extension of time by the contractor shall be made not more than three (3) days after the occurrence of the event or the first appearance of the condition giving rise to the claim and shall set forth in detail the contractor's basis for requiring additional time in which to complete the project. In the event the delay to the contractor is a continuing one, only one notice and claim for additional time shall be necessary. If the contractor fails to make such claim as required in this subparagraph, any claim for an extension of time shall be waived. In no event is the contractor entitled to additional compensation for any delay described in this paragraph 8.3.4 or other paragraphs. 8.4 Field Orders 8.4.1 The architect shall have authority to order minor changes in the work not involving a change in the contract price or in contract time and not inconsistent with the intent of the contract. Such changes shall be effected by field order and shall be binding upon the contractor. The contractor shall carry out such field orders promptly. ARTICLE IX SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1 Definition 9.1.1 A subcontractor is an entity that has a direct contract with the contractor to perform a portion of the work. 9.2 Award of Subcontracts 9.2.1 Upon execution of the contract, the contractor shall furnish the owner in writing, the names of persons or entities proposed by the contractor to act as a subcontractor on the project. The owner shall promptly reply to the contractor, in writing, stating any objections the owner may have to such proposed subcontractor. The contractor shall not enter into a subcontract with a proposed subcontractor with reference to whom the owner has made timely objection. The contractor shall not be required to subcontract with any party to whom the contractor has objection. 9.2.2 All subcontracts shall afford the contractor rights against the subcontractor which correspond to those rights afforded to the owner against the contractor herein, including those rights afforded to the owner by subparagraph 12.2.1 below. ARTICLE X CHANGES IN THE WORK 10.1 Changes Permitted 10.1.1 Changes in the work within the general scope of this contract, consisting of additions, deletions, revisions, or any combination thereof, may be ordered without invalidating this contract, by change order or by field order. 10.1.2 Changes in the work shall be performed under applicable provisions of this contract and the contractor shall proceed promptly with such changes. FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 13 10.2 Change Order Defined 10.2.1 Change order shall mean a written order to the contractor executed by the owner and the architect, issued after execution of this contract, authorizing and directing a change in the work or an adjustment in the contract price or the contract time, or any combination thereof. The contract price and the contract time may be changed only by change order. 10.3 Changes in the Contract Price 10.3.1 Any change in the contract price resulting from a change order shall be determined as -- follows: (a) by mutual agreement between the owner and the contractor as evidenced by (1) the change in the contract price being set forth in the change order, (2) such change in the contract price, together with any conditions or requirements related thereof, being initialed by both parties and (3) the contractor's execution of the change order; or (b) if no mutual agreement occurs between the owner and the contractor, then, as provided in subparagraph 10.3.2 below. 10.3.2 If no mutual agreement occurs between the owner and the contractor as contemplated in subparagraph 10.3.1 above, the change in the contract price, if any, shall then be determined by the architect on the basis of the reasonable expenditures or savings of those performing, deleting or revising the work attributable to the change, including, in the case of an increase or decrease in the contract price, an allowance for direct job site overhead of 5%, and profit 5%. 10.3.3 If unit prices are provided in the contract, and if the quantities contemplated are so changed in a proposed change order that application of such unit prices to the quantities of work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the owner or to the contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 10.4 Minor Changes 10.4.1 The architect shall have authority to order minor changes in the work not involving a change in the contract price or an extension of the contract time and not inconsistent with the intent of this contract. Such minor changes shall be made by written field order, and shall be binding upon the owner and the contractor. The contractor shall promptly carry out such written field orders. 10.5 Effect of Executed Change Order 10.5.1 The execution of a change order by the contractor shall constitute conclusive evidence of the contractor's agreement to the ordered changes in the work, this contract as thus amended, the contract price and the contract time. The contractor, by executing the change order, waives and forever releases any claim against the owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the work included within or affected by the executed change order. 10.6 Notice to Surety; Consent 10.6.1 The contractor shall notify and obtain the consent and approval of the contractor's surety with reference to all change orders if such notice, consent or approval is required by the contractor's surety or by law. The contractor's execution of the change order shall constitute the contractor's warranty to the owner that the surety has been notified of, and consents to, FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 14 such change order and the surety shall be conclusively deemed to have been notified of such change order and to have expressly consented thereto. ARTICLE XI UNCOVERING AND CORRECTING WORK 11.1 Uncovering Work 11.1.1 If any of the work is covered contrary to the architect's request or to any provisions of this contract, it shall, if required by the architect or the owner, be uncovered for the architect's inspection and shall be properly replaced at the contractor's expense without change in the contract time. 11.1.2 If any of the work is covered in a manner not inconsistent with subparagraph 11.1.1 above, ,it shall, if required by the architect or owner, be uncovered for the architect's inspection. If such work conforms strictly with this contract, costs of uncovering and property replacement shall by change order be charged to the owner. If such work does not strictly conform with this contract, the contractor shall pay the costs of uncovering and proper replacement. 11.2 Correcting Work 11.2.1 The contractor shall immediately proceed to correct work rejected by the architect as defective or failing to conform to this contract. The contractor shall pay all costs and expenses associated with correcting such rejected work, including any additional testing and inspections, and reimbursement to the owner for the architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby. 11.2.2 If within one (1) year after final completion of the work any of the work is found to be defective or not in accordance with this contract, the contractor shall correct it promptly upon receipt of written notice from the owner. This obligation shall survive final payment by the owner and termination of this contract. With respect to work first performed and completed after substantial completion, this one-year obligation to specifically correct defective and nonconforming work shall be extended by the period of time which elapses between substantial completion and completion of the subject work. 11.2.3 Nothing contained in this paragraph 11.2 shall establish any period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the contractor has either under this contract or under the laws of the State of Florida. Establishment of the one-year time period in subparagraph 11.2.2 relates only to the duty of the contractor to specifically correct the work. 11.3 Owner May Accept Defective or Nonconforming Work 11.3.1 If the owner chooses to accept defective or nonconforming work, the owner may do so. In such event, the contract price shall be reduced by the greater of (a) the reasonable cost of removing and correcting the defective or nonconforming work and (b) the difference between the fair market value of the project as constructed and the fair market value of the project had it not been constructed in such a manner as to include defective or nonconforming work. If the remaining portion of the unpaid contract price, if any, is insufficient to compensate the owner for its acceptance of defective or nonconforming work, the contractor shall, upon written demand from the owner, pay the owner such remaining compensation for accepting defective or nonconforming work. FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 15 ARTICLE XII CONTRACT TERMINATION 12.1 Termination by the Contractor 12.1.1 If the work is stopped for a period of ninety (90) days by an order of any court or other public authority, or as a result of an act of the Government, through no fault of the contractor or any person or entity working directly or indirectly for the contractor, the contractor may, upon ten (10) days' written notice to the owner and the architect, terminate performance under this contract and recover from the owner payment for the actual reasonable expenditures of the contractor (as limited in Subparagraph 10.3.2 above) for all work executed and for materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery actually purchased or rented solely for the work, less any salvage value of any such items. 12.1.2 If the owner shall persistently or repeatedly fail to perform any material obligation to the contractor for a period of fifteen (15) days after receiving written notice from the contractor of its intent to terminate hereunder, the contractor may terminate performance under this contract by written notice to the architect and the owner. In such event, the contractor shall be entitled to recover from the owner as though the owner had terminated the contractor's performance under this contract for convenience pursuant to subparagraph 12.2.1 hereunder. 12.2 Termination by the Owner 12.2.1 For Convenience: 12.2.1.1 The owner may for any reason whatsoever terminate performance under this contract by the contractor for convenience. The owner shall give written notice of such termination to the contractor specifying when termination becomes effective. 12.2.1.2 The contractor shall incur no further obligations in connection with the work and the contractor shall stop work when such termination becomes effective. The contractor shall also terminate outstanding orders and subcontracts. The contractor shall settle the liabilities and claims arising out of the termination of subcontracts and orders. The owner may direct the contractor to assign the contractor's rights, title and interest under terminated orders or subcontracts to the owner or its designee. 12.2.1.3 The contractor shall transfer title and deliver to the owner such completed or partially completed work and materials, equipment, parts, fixtures, information and contract rights as the contractor has. 12.2.1.4 (a) The contractor shall submit termination claim to the owner and the architect specifying the amounts due because of the termination for convenience together with costs, pricing or other data required by the architect. If the contractor fails to file a termination claim within one (1) year from the effective date of termination, the owner shall pay the contractor, an amount derived in accordance with subparagraph (c) below. (b) The owner and the contractor may agree to the compensation, if any, due to the contractor hereunder. FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 16 (c) Absent agreement to the amount due to the contractor, the owner shall pay the contractor the following amounts: (i) Contract prices for labor, materials, equipment and other services accepted under this contract; (ii) Reasonable costs incurred in preparing to perform and in performing the terminated portion of the work, and in terminating the contractor's performance, plus a fair and reasonable allowance for overhead and profit thereon (such profit shall not include anticipated profit or consequential damages); provided however, that if it appears that the contractor would have not profited or would have sustained a loss if the entire contract would have been completed, no profit shall be allowed or included and the amount of compensation shall be reduced to reflect the anticipated rate of loss, if any; (iii) Reasonable costs of settling and paying claims arising out of the termination of subcontracts or orders pursuant to subparagraph 12.2.1.2 of this paragraph. These costs shall not include amounts paid in accordance with other provisions hereof. The total sum to be paid the contractor under this subparagraph 12.2.1 shall not exceed the total contract price as properly adjusted, shall be reduced by the amount of payments otherwise made, and shall in no event include duplication of payment. 12.2.2 For Cause: 12.2.2.1 If the contractor persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to prosecute the work in a timely manner, supply enough properly skilled workers, supervisory personnel or proper equipment or materials, or if it fails to make prompt payment to subcontractors or for materials or labor, or persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of a material provision of this contract, then the owner may by written notice to the contractor, without prejudice to any other right or remedy, terminate the employment of the contractor and take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the contractor and may finish the work by whatever methods it may deem expedient. In such case, the contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. 12.2.2.2 If the unpaid balance of the contract price exceeds the cost of finishing the work, including compensation for the architect's additional services and expenses made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the contractor. If such cost exceeds the unpaid balance, the contractor shall pay the difference to the owner. This obligation for payment shall survive the termination of the contract. 12.2.2.3 In the event the employment of the contractor is terminated by the owner for cause pursuant to subparagraph 12.2.2 and it is subsequently determined by a Court of competent jurisdiction that such termination was without cause, such termination shall thereupon be deemed a termination for convenience under subparagraph 12.2.1 and the provisions of subparagraph 12.2.1 shall apply. ARTICLE XIII FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 17 INSURANCE 13.1 The insurance required under this contract is set forth in Exhibit B. Exhibit B is attached and incorporated into this contract. ARTICLE XIV MISCELLANEOUS 14.1 Governing Law 14.1.1 This contract is governed by the laws of the State of Florida. Venue for any litigation arising under this contract must be in Monroe County, Florida. 14.2 Successors and Assigns 14.2.1 The owner and contractor bind themselves, their successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreement and obligations contained in this contract. The contractor shall not assign this contract without written consent of the owner. 14.3 Surety Bonds 14.3.1 The contractor shall furnish the public construction bond in the amount and form set forth in Section 255.05, Florida Statutes. 14.4 Ethics Clause 14.4.1 The contractor warrants that it has not employed, retained or otherwise had act on its behalf any former County officer or employee subject to the prohibition of Section 2 of Ordinance No. 010-1990 or any County officer or employee in violation of Section 3 of Ordinance No. 020-1990. For breach or violation of this provision, the owner may, in its discretion, terminate this contract without liability and may also, in its discretion, deduct from the contract or purchase price, or otherwise recover the full amount of any fee, commission, percentage, gift, or consideration paid to the former County officer or employee. 14.5 Public Entity Crime Statement 14.5.1 A person or affiliate who has been placed on the convicted vendor list following a conviction for public entity crime may not submit a bid on a contract to provide any goods or services to a public entity, may not submit a bid on a contract with a public entity for the construction or repair of a public building or public work, may not submit bids on leases of real property to public entity, may not be awarded or perform work as a contractor, supplier, subcontractor, or consultant under a contract with any public entity, and may not transact business with any public entity in excess of the threshold amount provided in Section 287.017 of the Florida Statutes, for CATEGORY TWO for a period of 36 months from the date of being placed on the convicted vendor list. 14.6 Assignment of the Architect's Duties 14.6.1 The duties of the architect under this contract may be assigned by the owner, at his discretion, to a construction manager selected by the owner. 14.7 Trench Safety FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 18 14.7.1 If applicable to the project, the contractor shall comply with all relevant provisions of the Trench Safety Act (Secs. 553.60-553.64, Fla. Stat.). 14.8 Contingency 14.8.1 Monroe County's performance and obligation to pay under this contract is contingent upon an annual appropriation by the Board of County Commissioners. 14.9 Effective Date 14.9.1 This contract will take effect on the date of the signature of the last party to sign. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, each party has caused this Agreement to be executed by its duly authorized representative this day of , 1998. (SEAL) , Attest: DANNY L. KOLHAGE, Clerk CA Deputy Clerk BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS OF MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA By Mayor/Chairman Date (SEAL) CONTRACTOR Attest: By: By: Title: Title: FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 19 EXHIBIT A CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Document FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 20 EXHIBIT B INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FIXED PRICE CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 00500 - 21 1996 Edition MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA RISK MANAGEMENT POLICY AND PROCEDURES CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION MANUAL General Insurance Requirements for Construction Contractors and Subcontractors Prior to the commencement of work governed by this contract (including the pre -staging of personnel and material), the contractor shall obtain, at his/her own expense, insurance as specified in the attached schedules, which are made part of this contract. The Contractors will ensure that the insurance obtained will extend protection to all Sub - Contractors engaged by the Contractor. As an alternative the Contractor may require all Subcontractors to obtain insurance consistent with the attached schedules. The Contractor will not be permitted to commence work governed by this contract (including pre -staging of personnel and material) until satisfactory evidence of the required insurance has been furnished to the county as specified below. Delays in the commencement of work, resulting from the failure of the Contractor to provide this contract and any penalties and failure to perform assessments shall be imposed as if the work commenced on the specified date and time, except for the Contractor's failure to prove satisfactory evidence. The Contractor shall maintain the required insurance throughout the entire term of this contract and any extensions specified in any attached schedules. Failure to comply with this provision may result in the immediate suspension of all work until the required insurance has been reinstated or replaced. Delays in the completion of work resulting from the failure of the Contractor to maintain the required insurance shall not extend deadlines specified in the contract and any penalties and failure to perform assessments shall be imposed as if the work had not been suspended, except for the Contractor's failure to maintain the required insurance. The Contractor shall provide, to the County, as satisfactory evidence of the required insurance, either: • Certificate of Insurance or • A Certified copy of the actual insurance policy. Administration Instruction #4709.2 1996 Edition The County, at is sole option, has the right to request a certified copy of any or all insurance policies required by this contract. All insurance policies must specify that they are not subject to cancellation, non -renewal, material change, or reduction in coverage unless a minimum of thirty (30) days prior notification is given to the County by the insurer. The acceptance and/or approval of the Contractor's insurance shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from any liability or obligation assumed under this contract or imposed by law. The Monroe County Board of County Commissioners, its employees and officials will be included as "Additional Insured" on all policies, except for Workers' Compensation. In addition, the County will be named as an Additional Insured and Loss Payee on all policies covering County -owned property. Any deviations from these General Insurance Requirements must be requested in writing on the County prepared form entitled "Request for Waiver of Insurance Requirements" and approved by Monroe County Risk Management. Administration Instruction #4709.2 1996 Edition MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA INSURANCE CHECKLIST FOR VENDORS SUBMITTING PROPOSALS FOR WORK To assist in the development of your proposal, the insurance coverages marked with an "X" will be required in the event an award is made to your firm. Please review this form with your insurance agent and have him/her sign it in the place provided. It is also required that the bidder sign the form and submit it with each proposal. WC1 WC2 WC3 WCUSLH WCJA WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY X Workers' Compensation Employers Liability X Employers Liability Employers Liability US Longshoremen & Harbor Workers Act Federal Jones Act Statutory Limits $100,000/$500,000/$100,000 $ 5 00, 0 00/$ 5 00, 000/$ 5 00, 00 0 $1,000,000/$1,000,000/$1,000,000 Same as Employers' Liability Same as Employers' Liability INSCKLST 1996 Edition As a minimum, the required general liability coverages will include: • Premises Operations • Blanket Contractual • Expanded Definition of Property Damage Required Limits: • Products and Completed Operations • Personal Injury GL 1 $100,000 per Person; $300,000 per Occurrence $50,000 Property Damage or $300,000 Combined Single Limit GI-2 �_ $250,000 per Person; $500,000 per Occurrence $50,000 Property Damage or $500,000 Combined Single Limit GL3 $500,000 per Person; $1,000,000 per Occurrence $100,000 Property Damage or $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit GI-4 $5,000,000 Combined Single Limit Required Endorsement: GLXCU Underground, Explosion and Collapse (XCU) GLLIQ Liquor Liability GLS Security Services All endorsements are required to have the same limits as the basic policy. rNSCKLST 1996 Edition As a minimum, coverage should extend to liability for: 0 Owned; Non -owned; and Hired Vehicles Required Limits: VL 1 $50,000 per Person; $100,000 per Occurrence $25,000 Property Damage or $100,000 Combined Single Limit VL2 X $100,000 per Person; $300,000 per Occurrence $50,000 Property Damage or $300,000 Combined Single Limit VL3 $500,000 per Person; $1,000,000 per Occurrence $100,000 Property Damage or $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit VL4 $5,000,000 Combined Single Limit MISCELLANEOUS COVERAGES BR 2 X Builders' Limits equal to the Risk completed project. MVC Motor Truck Limits equal to the maximum cargo value of any one shipment. PRO 1 Professional $ 250,000 per Occurrence/$ 500,000 Agg. PR02 Liability $ 500,000 per Occurrence/$1,000,000 Agg. PR03 $1,000,000 per Occurrence/$2,000,000 Agg. POL 1 Pollution $ 500,000 per Occurrence/$1,000,000 Agg. POL2 Liability $1,000,000 per Occurrence/$2,000,000 Agg. POL3 $5,000,000 per Occurrence/$10,000,000 Agg. ED I Employee $ 10,000 ED2 Dishonesty $100,000 INSCKLST 1996 Edition GK1 Garage $ 300,000 ($ 25,000 per Veh) GK2 Keepers $ 500,000 ($100,000 per Veh) GK3 $1,000,000 ($250,000 per Veh) MED 1 Medical $ 250,000/$ 750,000 Agg. MED2 Professional $ 500,000/$ 1,000,000 Agg. MED3 $1,000,000/$ 3,000,000 Agg. MED4 $5,000,000510,000,000 Agg. IF Installation Maximum value of Equipment Floater Installed VLP 1 Hazardous $ 300,000 (Requires MCS-90) VLP2 Cargo $ 500,000 (Requires MCS-90) VLP3 Transporter $1,000,000 (Requires MCS-90) BLL Bailee Liab. Maximum Value of Property HKL 1 Hangarkeepers $ 300,000 HKL2 Liability $ 500,000 HKL3 $ 1,000,000 AIR1 Aircraft $ 1,000,000 AIR2 Liability $ 5,000,000 AIR3 $50,000,000 AEO1 Architects Errors $ 250,000 per Occurrence/$ 500,000 Agg. AE02 & Omissions $ 500,000 per Occurrence/$1,000,000 Agg. AE03 $1,000,000 per Occurrence/$3,000,000 Agg. EO 1 Engineers Errors $ 250,000 per Occurrence/$ 500,000 Agg. E02 & Omissions $ 500,000 per Occurrence/$1,000,000 Agg. E03 $1,000,000 per Occurrence/$3,000,000 Agg. INSCKLST 1996 Edition I have reviewed the above requirements with the bidder named below. The following deductibles apply to the corresponding policy. POLICY Liability policies are Occurrence Claims Made DEDUCTIBLES Insurance Agency Signature BIDDERS STATEMENT I understand the insurance that will be mandatory if awarded the contract and will comply in full with all the requirements. Bidder Signature INSCKLST 1996 Edition INSCKLST 1996 Edition BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT: BETWEEN MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA AND The Contractor shall be required to purchase and maintain, throughout the life of the contract, and until the project is accepted by the County, Builder's Risk Insurance on an All Risk of Loss form. coverage shall include: Theft Aircraft Hail Smoke Explosion Fire Riot Collapse Civil Commotion Flood Vehicles The policy limits shall be no less than the amount of the finished project and coverage shall be provided on a completed value basis. Property located on the construction premises, which is intended to become a permanent part of the building, shall be included as property covered. The policy shall be endorsed permitting the County to occupy the building prior to completion without effecting the coverage. The Monroe County Board of County Commissioners shall be named as Additional Insured and Loss Payee. Administrative Instruction BR2 BLD RISK.DOC #4709.2 1996 Edition GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT: BETWEEN MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA AND Prior to the commencement of work governed by this contract, the Contractor shall obtain General Liability Insurance. Coverage shall be maintained throughout the life of the contract and include, as a minimum: • Premises Operation • Products and Completed Operations • Blanket Contractual Liability • Personal Injury Liability • Expanded Definition of Property Damage The minimum limits acceptable shall be: $500,000 Combined Single Limit (CSL) If split limits are provided, the minimum limits acceptable shall be: $250,000 per Person $500,000 per Occurrence $ 50,000 Property Damage An Occurrence Form policy is preferred. If coverage is provided on a Claims Made policy, its provisions should include coverage for claims filed on or after the effective date of this contract. In addition, the period for which claims may be reported should extend for a minimum of twelve (12) months following the acceptance of work by the County. The Monroe County Board of County Commissioners shall be named as Additional Insured on all policies issued to satisfy the above requirements. Administrative Instruction GL2 GEN LIAB.DOC #4709.2 VEHICLE LIABILITY INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT BETWEEN MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA AND Recognizing that the work governed by this contract requires the use of vehicles, the Contractor, prior to the commencement of work, shall obtain Vehicle Liability Insurance. Coverage shall be maintained throughout the life of the contract and include, as a minimum, liability coverage for: • Owned, Non -Owned, and Hired Vehicles The minimum limits acceptable shall be: $300,000 Combined single Limit (CSL) If split limits are provided, the minimum limits acceptable shall be: $100,000 per Person $300,000 per Occurrence $ 50,000 Property Damage The Monroe County Board of County Commissioners shall be named as Additional Insured on all policies issued to satisfy the above requirements. Administrative Instruction VL2 VEH-LIAB.DOC #4709.2 1996 Edition WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT BETWEEN MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA AND Prior to the commencement of work governed by this contract, the Contractor shall obtain Workers' Compensation Insurance with limits sufficient to respond to the applicable state statutes. In addition, the Contractor shall obtain Employers' Liability Insurance with limits of not less than: $500,000 Bodily Injury by Accident $500,000 Bodily Injury by Disease, policy limits $500,000 Bodily Injury by Disease, each employee Coverage shall be maintained throughout the entire term of the contract. Coverage shall be provided by a company or companies authorized to transact business in the State of Florida and the company or companies must maintain a minimum rating of A -VI, as assigned by the A.M. Best Company. If the Contractor has been approved by Florida's Department of Labor, as an authorized self -insurer, the County shall recognize and honor the Contractor's status. The Contractor may be required to submit a Letter of Authorization issued by the Department of Labor and a Certificate of Insurance, providing details on the Contractor's Excess Insurance Program. If the Contractor participates in a self-insurance fund, a Certificate of Insurance will be required. In addition, the contractor may be required to submit updated financial statements from the fund upon request from the County. Administrative Instruction WC2 WRK COMP.DOC #4709.2 April 22, 1993 1st Printing MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA INSURANCE GUIDE TO CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION WAIVER OF INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS There will be times when it will be necessary, or in the best interest of the County, to deviate from the standard insurance requirements specified within this manual. Recognizing this potential, and acting on the advice of the County Attorney, the Board of County Commissioners has granted authorization to Risk Management to waive and modify various insurance provisions. Specifically excluded from this authorization is the right to waive: The County as being named as an Additional Insured —If a letter from the Insurance Company (not the Agent) is presented, stating that they are unable or unwilling to name the County as an Additional Insured, Risk Management has been granted the authority to waive this provision. and • The Indemnification and Hold Harmless provisions Waiving of insurance provisions could expose the County to economic loss. For this reason, every attempt should be made to obtain the standard insurance requirements. If a waiver or a modification is desired, a Request for Waiver of Insurance Requirements form should be completed and routed to Risk Management for consideration and negotiation as soon as possible. The form will be returned, either approved or disapproved, to the County Attorney who will submit the Waiver with the other contract documents for execution by the Clerk of the Courts. Should Risk Management deny the Waiver Request, the other party may file an appeal with the County Administrator or the Board of County Commissioners, who retains the final decision -making authority. Administrative Instruction WAIVER.DOC #4709.1 Resolution #191-1993 MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA Request For Waiver of Insurance Requirements April 22, 1993 1st Printing It is requested that the insurance requirements, as specified in the County's Schedule of Insurance Requirements, be waived or modified on the following contract: Contractor: Contract for: Address of Contractor: Phone: Scope of Work: Reason for Waiver: Signature of Contractor: Approved Not Approved Risk Management: Date: County Administrator appeal: Approved Not Approved Date: Board of County Commissioners appeal: Approved Not Approved Meeting Date: Administrative Instruction wAIV REQ.DOC #4709.1 SECTION 00501 PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND BY THIS BOND, We . as Principal and a corporation, as Surety, are bound to herein called Owner, in the sum of $ for payment of which we bind ourselves, or heirs, personal representatives, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally. THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND is that if Principal: 1. Performs the contract dated 19 between Principal and Owner for construction of the contract being made a part of this bond by reference, at the times and in the manner prescribed in the contract; and 2. Promptly makes payment to all claimants, as defined in Section 255.05(1), Florida Statutes, supplying Principal with labor, materials, or supplies, used directly or indirectly by Principal in the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract and; 3. Pays Owner all losses, damages, including damages for delay, expenses, costs, and attorney's fees, including appellate proceedings, that Owner sustains because of a default by Principal under the contract; and 4. Performs the guarantee of all work and materials furnished under the contract for the time specified in the contract, then this bond is void; otherwise it remains in full force. Any changes in or under the contract documents and compliance with any formalities connected with the contract or the changes does not affect Surety's obligation under this bond. DATED ON 19 BY (NAME OF PRINCIPAL) (AS ATTORNEY -IN -FACT) (NAME OF SURETY) PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND 00501-1 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS A.rA Document A2011CM. CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION General Conditions of the Contract for Construction THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED. 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 2. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 3. OWNER 4. CONTRACTOR 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 6. WORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1980 EDITION TABLE OF ARTICLES 8. TIME 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11. INSURANCE 12. CHANGES IN THE WORK 13. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 7. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14. TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT rrmmrm CAUTION: You should use an original AIA document which has this caution printed in red. U-1i . An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. Copyright 1975, O 1980, by The American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20006. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecution. AIA DOCUMENT A201/CM • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • JUNE 1900 EDITION • AIA• • 9)19W • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201/CM —1980 1 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying vloleess U.S. copyrfyM lam end is Subject Eo NMW prosecution. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 1 INDEX Acceptance of Defective of Non -Conforming Work ..6.2.2, 13.3 Acceptance of Work ..................9.5.5, 9.8.1, 9.9.1, 9.9.3 Access to Work.................................2.3.6, 6.2.1 Accident Prevention...............................2.3.5, 10 Acts and Omissions ..............4.18.3, 7.4, 7.6.2, 8.3.1, 10.5 Addenda, Definition of................................1.1.1 Additional Costs, Claims for ...........................12.3 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT ..............2, 4.3.3 Agreement, Extent of...............................1.1,1.2 All Risk Insurance...................................11.3.1 Allowances...........................................4.8 Applications for Payment, Contractor's .......2.3.8, 9.2.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.3., 95.3, 9.7.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 9.9.3, 9.9.5, 11.3.1, 14.2.2 Applications for Payment, Project .................2.3.8, 2.3.9, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.6.1, 9.7.1 Approvals ......................2.3.18, 3.4, 4.3.3, 4.5, 4.12.4, 4.12.5, 4.12.6, 4.12.8, 4.13.2, 7.7, 9.3.2 Arbitration ........2.3.15, 2.3.23, 6.2.5, 7.9, 8.3.1, 11.3.7, 11.3.8 Architect, Definition of.................................2.1 Architect, Extent of Authority ........2.3, 3.4, 4.12.8, 5.2, 7.7.2, 8.1.3, 8.1.4, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5.3, 9.6, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.9.3, 12.1.1,12.1.4,12.3.1,12.4.1,13.1,13.2.1,13.25,14.2 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility .....2.3.2 through 2.3.5, 2.3.13 through 2.3.18, 2.3.22, 4.12.6, 5.2.1, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.5.5, 12.4 Architect's Additional Services ...3.4, 7.7.2, 13.2.1, 13.2.5, 14.2.2 Architect's Approvals ......2.3.18, 3.4, 4.5, 4.12.6, 4.12.8, 4.18.3 Architect's Authority to Reject Work ....2.3.16, 4.5, 13.1.2, 13.2 Architect's Copyright...................................1.3 Architect's Decisions ..............2.3.10 through 2.3.16, 7.7.2, 7.9.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.6.2, 9.8.1, 12.1.4, 12.3.1 Architect's Inspections .........2.3.16, 2.3.21, 9.4.2, 9.8.1, 9.9.1 Architect's Instructions ..........2.3.16, 2.3.19, 7.7.2, 12.4, 13.1 Architect's Interpretations .........2.3.10 through 2.3.13, 12.3.2 Architect's On -Site Observations .......2.3.4, 23.6, 2.3.9, 7.7.1, 7.7.4, 9.4.2, 9.6.1, 9.9.1 Architect's Relationship with Contractor ......1.1.2, 2.3.5, 2.3.6, 2.3.13, 2.3.16, 4.3.3, 4.5, 4.7.3, 4.12.6, 4.18, 11.3.6 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors ..................1.1.2, 2.3.16, 9.5.3, 9.5.4 Architect's Representations .................9.4.2, 9.6.1, 9.9.1 Artistic Effect .......................1.2.3, 2.3.14, 2.3.15, 7.9.1 Attorneys' Fees...........................4.18.1, 6.2.5, 9.92 Award of Separate Contracts...........................6.1.1 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work...............................5.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance .......................11.3.2 Bonds, Lien....................................9.3.3, 9.9.2 Bonds, Performance, labor and Material Payment .....7.5, 9.9.3 Building Permit........................................4.7 Certificate of Substantial Completion ....9.8.1, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.8.4 Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval ............7.7.3 Certificates of Insurance ........................9.3.2, 11.1.4 Certificates for Payment, Project ........2.3.9, 2.3.21, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.5.5, 9.6.1,9.7.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1,9.9.3,12.1.4,14.1.1, 14.2.2 Change Orders ...............1.1.1, 2.3.19, 3.4, 4.8.2.3, 4.11.1, 5.23, 7.7.2, 8.3.1, 9.7, 9.9.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 12.1, 12.2.1, 12.3.1, 13.1.2, 13.2.5, 13.3.1 Change Orders, Definition of .........................12.1.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK ..................2.3.19, 4.11.1, 12 Claims for Additional Cost or Time .....8.3.2, 8.3.3, 12.2.1, 12.3 Claims for Damages ...............6.1.1, 6.2.5, 7.4, 8.3, 9.6.1.2 Claims and Disputes Between Contractor and Owner ..............2.3.12, 2.3.15, 2.3.23, 4.18.2, 7.9 Cleaning Up......................................4.15,6.3 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to .3.2.1, 4.2, 4.7.1, 4.10, 5.2.1, 6.2.2, 7.5, 9.2, 11.1, 11.3.4 Communications ......................2.3.2, 3.2.6, 4.9.1, 4.16 Completion, Conditions Relating to ...2.3.21, 4.11, 4.15, 9.4.2, 9.9, 13.2.2 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND ..........................9 Completion of the Project, Substantial .......8.1.4, 9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.4, 9.9.5, 9.9.6, 13.2.1, 13.2.2 Completion of the Work, Substantial ........2.3.21, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.2, 9.8, 9.4.2, 9.9.3, 11.3.9 Compliance with laws ............1.3, 2.1.1, 4.6, 4.7, 4.13, 7.1, 7.6.1, 7.7.1, 10.2.2, 14.2.1 Concealed Conditions.................................12.2 Consent, Written ....................23.22, 4.14.2, 7.2, 7.6.2, 9.8.1, 9.9.2, 9.9.3, 11.3.9 Construction Manager, Definition of .....................22 Construction Manager's Approval ...............4.10.1, 4.13.2 Construction Manager's Additional Services .........3.4, 7.7.2, 13.2.1, 13.2.5, 14.2.2 Construction Managers Authority and Responsibility .....2.3.3, 2.3.5, 2.3.16, 2.3.10, 2.3.22, 4.8.1, 4.17.1, 4.18.3, 7.7.4, 9.2, 10.2.5, 11.3.6, 12.1.4, 14.1.1 Construction Manager's Confirmation ...................9.9.3 Construction Managers Consultation with the Architect .23.12, 2.3.16,2.3.19, 2.3.21, 3.4.1, 9.6.1, 9.8.1, 12.1.4,12.3.1, 14.2.1 Construction Managers Coordination and Scheduling ....2.3.7, 2.3.17, 4.3.1, 4.10.1, 4.12.4 Construction Managers. Decisions ..................6.3, 8.3.1 Construction Managers Determinations ..23.3, 6.3.1, 7.7.2, 8.3.1 Construction Managers Interests ................11.3.1, 11.3.2 Construction Manager's Recommendations ....2.3.8, 2.3.9, 9.3.1, 9.4.1, 9.7.1, 9.9.1, 12.1.1 Construction Manager's Relationship with Architect ...................1.1.2, 2.3.1, 2.3.3, 2.3.21 Construction Manager's Relationship with Contractor .....1.1.2, 2.3.15, 2.3.16, 3.2.6, 4.2.1, 4.3.3, 4.5, 4.7.3, 4.11.1, 4.12.4, 4.12.6, 4.16.1, 4.17.1, 4.18, 5.2, 6.2.1, 6.2.2, 7.6.2, 7.7, 7.9.1, 7.9.2, 8.3.1, 8.3.2, 9.4.1, 9.5.4, 9.8.1, 9.9.1, 10.2.6,11.1.4,11.3.6 Construction Manager's Relationship with Subcontractors ...................1.1.2, 2.3.16, 5.3.1 Construction Manager's Review .............2.3.8, 2.3.17, 5.2.1 Construction Schedule, Contractor's .....................4.10 Contract, Definition of................................1.1.2 Contract Administration ...........................2.3, 4.3.3 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to ......4.7.1, 4.10, 5.2, 7.5,11.1, 11.3.4 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS .......... :.................... 1 Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of .................1.3, 3.2.5, 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of .....................1.1.1 Contract Modifications.............................1.1.1, 12 Contract Sum, Definition of...........................9.9.1 Contract Termination...................................14 Contract Time, Definition of...........................8.1.1 CONTRACTOR.........................................4 Contractor, Definition of ..........................4.1, 6.1.2 Contractor's Construction Schedule .....................4.10 AIA DOCUMENT A201/CM • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • IUNE 19W EDITION • AIAa . CD 19W • THE 2 A201/CM-1980 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 WARNING. Unlicensed photocopytng vkAsbs U.S. copyrtyM lams and is subject to legal prosecution. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 2 Contractor's Employees ......4.3.2, 4.4.2, 4.8.1, 4.9, 4.18, 10.2.1 through 10.2.4, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.1.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance .........................11.1 Contractor's Relationship with Architect ......1.1.2, 2.3.5, 2.3.6, 2.3.13, 2.3.16, 4.3.3, 4.5, 4.7.3, 4.12.6, 4.18, 11.3.6 Contractors Relationship with Construction Manager .....1.1.2, 2.3.15, 2.3.16, 3.2.6, 4.2.1, 4.3.3, 4.5, 4.7.2, 4.11.1, 4.12.4, 4.12.6, 4.16.1, 4.17.1, 4.18, 5.2, 6.2.1, 6.2.2, 7.6.2, 7.7, 7.9.1, 7.9.2, 8.3.1, 8.3.2, 9.4.1, 9.5.4, 9.8.1, 9.9.1, 10.2.6, 11.1.4, 11.3.6 Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner's Forces............................3.2.7, 6 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors ..........1.2.4. 5.2, 5.3, 9.5.2, 11.3.3, 11.3.6 Contractor's Representations ...........1.2.2, 4.5, 4.12.5, 9.3.3 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Work .....................4.3.2, 4.18, 10 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents ....1.2.2, 4.2, 4.7.3 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work .....................9.7 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract .............14.1 Contractor's Submittals ...............2.3.18, 4.10, 4.12, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.8.1, 9.9.2, 9.9.3 Contractor's Superintendent .......................4.9, 10.2.6 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures ..........1.2.4, 2.3.5, 4.3, 4.4, 10 Contractual Liability Insurance ........................11.1.3 Coordination and Correlation .........1.2.2, 1.2.4, 4.3.1, 4.10.1, 4.12.5, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications ..1.3, 3.2.5, 5.3 Correction of Work .....................3.3, 3.4, 10.2.5, 13.2 Cost, Definition of..................................12.1.4 Costs .......3.4, 4.8.2, 4.15.2, 5.2.3, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 6.2.5, 6.3, 7.7.1, 7.7.2, 9.7, 11.3.1, 11.3.5, 12.1.3, 12.1.4, 12.3, 13.1.2, 13.2, 14.2.2 Cutting and Patching of Work ..........................4.14 Damage to the Work ............4.14.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.7, 11.3.1 Damage to Work .............4.14.2, 4.18.1, 6.2.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.15, 10.2.1.3, 10.2.2, 10.2.5, 10.3, 13.2.6 Damages, Claims for ..................6.1.1, 6.2.5, 7.4, 9.6.1.2 Damages for Delay..........................6.1.1, 8.3.4, 9.7 Day, Definition of....................................8.1.5 Decisions of the Architect .........2.3.10 through 2.3.16, 7.7.2, 7.9.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.6.1, 9.8.1, 12.1.4, 12.3.1 Decisions of the Construction Manager ..............6.3, 8.3.1 Defective or Non -Conforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of ......2.3.4, 2.3.16, 3.3, 3.4, 4.5, 6.2.2, 6.2.3, 9.6.1.1, 9.9.4.2, 13 Definitions ...............1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 4.1, 4.12.1 through 4.12.3, 5.1, 6.1.2, 8.1, 9.1.1, 12.1.1, 12.1.4 Delays and Extensions of Time ..........................8.3 Disputes .................2.3.12, 2.3.15, 2.3.23, 6.2.5, 6.3, 7.9.1 Documents and Samples at the Site .....................4.11 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of ................1.3, 3.2.5, 4.11, 5.3 Easements...........................................3.2.3 Emergencies.........................................10.3 Employees, Contractor's ...........4.3.2, 4.4.4, 4.8.1, 4.9, 4.18, 10.2.1 through 10.2.4, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.1.1 Equipment, Labor, Materials and ......1.1.1, 4.4, 4.5, 4.12, 4.13, 4.15.1, 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.6.1.3, 9.9.2, 10.2.1.2, 11.3.1, 12.1.4, 13.2.2, 13.2.5, 14 Execution and Progress of the Work .........1.1.3, 1.2.3, 2.3.4, 2.3.5, 2.3.11, 4.2, 4.4.1, 4.5, 4.7.1, 6.2.2, 7.9.3, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 8.3.2, 9.6.1, 10.2.3, 10.2.4, 14.2 Execution, Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents ......................1.2, 4.7.1 Extensions of Time ........................8.3, 12.1.1, 12.1.2 Failure of Payment by Owner .......................9.7, 14.1 Failure of Payment of Subcontractors ......9.6.1.3, 9.9.2, 14.2.1 Failure to Carry out the Work ..........................2.3.5 Final Completion and Final Payment ...2.3.15, 2.3.21, 9.9, 13.3.1 Financial Arrangements, Owner's .......................3.2.1 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance .................11.3.1 Governing Law........................................7.1 Indemnification ........................4.17, 4.18, 6.2.5, 9.9.2 Identification of Contract Documents ...................1.2.1 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers ............5.2.1 Information and Services Required of the Owner .........................3.2, 6.1, 9, 11.2, 11.3 Inspections ..............2.3.16, 2.3.21, 4.3.3, 7.7, 12.1.2, 9.9.1 Instructions to Bidders................................1.1.1 Instructions to the Contractor ..........2.3.2, 3.2.6, 4.8.1, 7.7.2, 12.1.2, 12.1.4 INSURANCE ........... ......................9.8.1,11 Insurance, Contractor's Liability ........................11.1 Insurance, Loss of Use.................................11.4 Insurance, Owner's Liability ............................11.2 Insurance, Property...................................11.3 Insurance, Boiler and Machinery ......................11.3.2 Insurance, Special Hazards . . .........................11.35 Insurance, Stored Materials ......................9.3.2, 11.3.1 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy .....11.3.9 Insurance Companies, Settlement With .................11.3.8 Intent of the Contract Documents ..............1.2.3, 2.3.10, 2.3.13, 2.3.14, 12.4 Interest..............................................7.8 Interpretations, Written ........1.1.1, 2.3.11, 2.3.12, 2.3.13, 12.4 Labor, Materials and Equipment .......1.1.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.12, 4.13, 4.15.1, 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.6.1.3, 9.2.2, 10.2.1.2, 11.3.1, 12.1.4, 13.2.2, 13.2.5, 14 Labor and Material Payment Bond .......................7.5 Labor Disputes.......................................8.3.1 Laws and Regulations .............1.3, 2.1.1, 4.6, 4.7, 4.13, 7.1, 7.6.1, 7.7.1, 10.2.2, 14 Liens...................................9.3.3, 9.9.2, 9.9.4.1 Limitations of Authority ..................2.3.2, 11.3.8, 12.4.1 Limitations of Liability ...........2.3.13, 2.3.16, 2.3.18, 3.3, 4.2, 4.7.3, 4.12.6, 4.17, 4.18, 6.2.2, 7.6.2, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.9.4, 9.9.5, 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.3.6 Limitations of Time, General ........2.3.11, 2.3.18, 3.2.1, 3.2.4, 4.2, 4.7.1, 4.7.3, 4.12.4, 4.15.1, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 7.4, 7.7, 7.9.2, 8.2, 9.5.2, 9.6.1, 9.8, 9.9, 11.3.1, 11.3.4, 11.3.9,12.1.4,12.4,13.2.1,13.2.2,13.25 Limitations of Time, Specific .........3.4, 4.10, 7.9.2, 8.2, 8.3.2, 8.3.3, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 11.1.4, 11.3.8, 12.2, 12.3.1, 13.2.2, 13.2.7, 14.1, 14.2.1 Limitations, Statutes of ...................7.9.2, 13.2.2, 13.2.7 Loss of Use Insurance.................................11.4 AIA DOCUMENT A201/CM . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • JUNE 1980 EDITION AIA6 . 01980 . THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W. •WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201/CM-1980 3 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 3 Materials, Labor and Equipment .......1.1.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.12, 4.13, 4.15.1, 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.6.1.3, 9.9.2, 10.2.1.2, 11.3.1, 12.1.4, 13.2.2, 13.2.5, 14 Material Suppliers ........................4.12.1, 5.2.1, 9.3.3 Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and and Procedures of Construction .........2.3.5, 4.3.1, 9.4.2 Minor Changes in the Work ................1.1.1, 2.3.19, 12.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ...........................7 Modifications, Definition of...........................1.1.1 Modifications to the Contract ........1.1.1, 1.1.2, 2.3.2, 2.3.22, 4.11.1, 4.7.3, 12 Mutual Responsibility..................................6.2 Non -Conforming Work, Acceptance of Defective or .......13.3 Notice, Written ............2.3.11, 2.3.15, 4.2, 4.7.3, 4.7.4, 4.9, 4.12.6, 4.12.7, 5.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 7.9.2, 8.1.2, 8.3.2, 8.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.6.1, 9.7, 9.9.1, 9.9.5, 10.2.6, 11.1.4, 11.3.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.7,11.3.8, 12.2, 12.3,13.2.2,13.2.5, 14 Notices, Permits, Fees and .............2.3.2, 4.7, 4.13.1, 10.2.2 Notice of Testing and Inspections ........................7.7 Notice to Proceed....................................8.1.2 Observations, Contractor's .......................1.2.2, 4.7.3 Occupancy..........................8.1.3, 8.1.4, 9.5.5, 11.3.9 On -Site Inspections by the Architect ...........2.3.16, 2.3.21, 9.4.2, 9.8.1, 9.9.1 On -Site Observations by the Architect ........2.3.4, 2.3.6, 2.3.9, 7.7.1, 7.7.4, 9.4.2, 9.6.1, 9.9.1 Orders, Written ..................3.3, 4.9, 12.1.4, 12.4.1, 13 1 OWNER............................................ Owner, Definition.....................................3.1 Owner, Information and Services Required of the ..........3.2, 4.7.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9, 11.2, 11.3 Owner's Authority ..................2.3.21, 7.7.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.8.1, 11.3.8, 12.1.2, 12.1.4 Owner's Financial Capability ..........................3.2.1 Owner's Liability Insurance............................11.2 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors ..........1.1.2, 9.5.4 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work ..............3.4, 13.2.4 Owner's Right to Clean Up .......................4.15.2, 6.3 Owner's Right to Perform Work and to Award Separate Contracts ...........................6.1 Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract .................14.2 Owner's Right to Stop the Work .........................3.3 Ownership and Use of Documents ..............1.3, 3.2.5, 5.3 Patching of Work, Cutting and .........................4.14 Patents, Royalties and................................4.17.1 Payment Bond, Labor and Material .......................7.5 Payment, Contractor's Applications for ......2.3.8, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.3, 9.6.1, 9.7.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 9.9.5, 14.2.2 Payment, Project Certificates for ........2.3.9, 2.3.21, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.5.5, 9.6.1, 9.7.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 9.9.3, 12.1.4, 14.1.1, 14.2.2 Payment, Failure of ................9.5.2, 9.6.1.3, 9.7, 9.9.2, 14 Payment, Final .................... 2.3.15, 2.3.21, 9.9, 13.3.1 Payments, Progress ..........7.8, 7.9.3, 9.5.5, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 12.1.4 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION ..........................9 Payments to Subcontractors ..........9.5.2, 9.5.3, 9.5.4, 9.6.1.3, 11.3.3, 14.2.1 Payments Withheld....................................9.6 Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond ...7.5 Permits, Fees and Notices ..............3.2.3, 4.7, 4.13, 10.2.2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF ..............10 Product Data, Definition of..........................14.2.2 Product Data, Shop Drawings, Samples and ...2.3.18, 4.2.1, 4.12 Progress and Completion ....................2.3.4, 7.9.3, 8.2 Progress Payments ..........7.8, 7.9.3, 9.5.5, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 12.1.4 Project, Definition of................................1.1.4 Project Construction Schedule ..........................4.10 Property Insurance....................................11.3 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY ..............10 Record Documents...................................4.11 Regulations and Laws ...............1.3, 2.1.1, 4.6, 4.7, 4.13.1, 7.1, 10.2.2, 14 Rejection of Work ........................2.3.16, 4.5.1, 13.2 Releases of Waivers and Liens ....................9.9.2, 9.9.4 Representations ............1.2.2, 4.5, 4.12.5, 9.4.2, 9.6.1, 9.9.1 Representatives ....2.1, 2.2, 2.3.2, 2.3.22, 3.1, 4.1, 4.9, 5.1, 9.3.3 Responsibility for Those Periorming the Work .. ..2.3.5, 4.3.2, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.8.1 Retainage ......................9.3.1, 9.5.2, 9.8.2, 9.9.2, 9.9.3 Review of Contract Documents by the Contractor .......1.2.2, 4.2, 4.7.3 Reviews of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and Architect ...............2.3.18, 4.10, 4.12, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2 Rights and Remedies .............1.1.2, 2.3.15, 2.3.16, 3.3, 3.4, 5.3, 6.1, 6.3, 7.6, 7.9, 8.3.1, 9.6.1, 9.7, 10.3, 12.1.2, 12.2, 13.2.2, 14 Royalties and Patents.................................4.17 Safety of Persons and Property .........................10.2 Safety Precautions and Programs ..................2.3.5, 10.1 Samples, Definition of...............................4.12.3 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and ......2.3.17, 2.3.18, 4.2, 4.12 Samples at the Site, Documents and ....................4.11 Schedule, Contractor's Construction .....................4.10 Schedule, Project Construction .........................4.10 Schedule of Values....................................9.2 Separate Contracts and Contractors .....4.14.2, 6, 11.3.6, 13.1.2 Shop Drawings, Definition...........................4.12.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples .............2.3.17, 2.3.18, 4.2, 4.12 Site, Use of.....................................4.13, 6.2.1 Site Inspections ............1.2.2, 2.3.4, 2.3.21, 7.7, 9.8.1, 9.9.1 Site Visits, Architect's .................2.3.4, 2.3.6, 2.3.9, 7.7.1, 7.7.4, 9.4.2, 9.6.1, 9.9.1 Special Inspection and Testing ....................2.3.16, 7.7 Special Hazards Insurance............................11.3.5 Specifications...............................1.1.1, 1.2.4, 1.3 Statutes of Limitations ....................7.9.2, 13.2.2, 13.2.7 Stopping the Work ......................3.3, 9.7.1, 10.3, 14.1 Stored Materials ............6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 11.3.1, 13.2.5 SUBCONTRACTORS....................................5 Subcontractors, Definition of ..........................5.1.1 Subcontractors, Work by ..............1.2.4, 2.3.5, 4.3.1, 4.3.2 Subcontractual Relations...............................5.3 Submittals ..................1.3, 2.3.18, 4.10, 4.12, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.8.1, 9.9.1, 9.9.3 AIA DOCUMENT A2011CM • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • IUNE 1980 EDITION • AIA® • © 1980 • THE 4 A201/CM-1980 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. N.W., WASHINGTON, D-C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 4 __ Subrogation, Waiver of..............................11.3.6 Substantial Completion of the Project ........8.1.4, 9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.4, 9.9.5, 9.9.6, 13.2.1, 13.2.2 Substantial Completion of the Project, Definition of ......8.1.4 Substantial Completion of the Work ........2.3.21, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.3, 11.3.9 Substantial Completion of the Work, Definition of ........8.1.3 Substitution of Subcontractors ....................5.2.3, 5.2.4 Substitution of the Architect..........................2.3.23 Substitution of the Construction Manager ..............2.3.23 Substitutions of Materials ........................4.5, 12.1.4 Sub -subcontractors, Definition of .......................5.1.2 Subsurface Conditions...............................12.1.1 Successors and Assigns.................................7.2 Supervision and Construction Procedures ..........1.2.4, 2.3.3, 4.3, 4.4, 10 Superintendent, Contractor's ......................4.9, 10.2.6 Surety, Consent of..............................9.9.2, 9.9.3 Surveys.......................................3.2.2, 4.18.3 Taxes................................................4.6 Termination by the Contractor .........................14.1 Termination by the Owner.............................14.2 Termination of the Architect .........................2.3.23 Termination of the Construction Manager ..............2.3.23 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT ......................14 Tests................................2.3.16, 4.3.3, 7.7, 9.4.2 TIME.. ..........................................8 Time, Definition of....................................8.1 Time, Delays and Extensions of ..........8.3, 12.1, 12.3, 13.2.7 Time Limits, Specific ...............3.4, 4.10, 7.9.2, 8.2, 8.3.2, 8.3.3, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 11.1.4, 11.3.8, 12.2, 12.3.1, 13.2.2, 13.2.7, 14.1, 14.2.1 Title to Work..................................9.3.2, 9.3.3 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK .............13 Uncovering of Work..................................13.1 Unforseen Conditions............................8.3.1, 12.2 Unit Prices.................................12.1.3.2, 12.1.5 Use of Documents............................1.3, 3.2.5, 5.3 Use of Site.....................................4.13, 6.2.1 Values, Schedule of....................................9.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor ....7.6.2, 8.3.2, 9.9.5, 11.3.6 Waiver of Claims by the Owner ......7.6.2, 9.9.4, 11.3.6, 11.4.1 Waiver of Liens......................................9.9.2 Warranty and Warranties ..............2.3.21, 4.5, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.4, 13.2.2, 13.2.7 Weather Delays......................................8.3.1 Words, Recognized Meaning of ........................1.2.3 Work, Definition of..................................1.1.3 WORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS .......6 Written Consent ..........2.3.22, 4.14.2, 7.2, 7.6.2, 9.8.1, 9.9.3 Written Interpretations ...................1.1.1, 2.3.11, 12.3.2 Written Notice .......2.3.11, 2.3.15, 4.2, 4.7.3, 4.7.4, 4.9, 4.12.6, 4.12.7, 5.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 7.7.2, 7.9.2, 8.1.2, 8.3.2, 8.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.6.1, 9.7, 9.9.1, 10.2.6, 11.1.4, 11.3.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 11.3.8, 12.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 13.2.5, 14 Written Orders ...................3.3, 4.9, 12.1.4, 12.4.1, 13.1 AIA DOCUMENT A201/CM • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • JUNE 1980 EDITION • AIA® . pc 1980 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. A201/CM-1980 5 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 5 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ARTICLE 1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1 DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of the Owner -Contractor Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract (General, Sup- plementary and other Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications, and all Addenda issued prior to and all Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a written interpretation issued by the Architect pursuant to Sub- paragraph 2.3.11, or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect pursuant to Paragraph 12.4. The Contract Documents do not include Bidding Documents such as the Advertisement or Invita- tion to Bid, the Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor's Bid or portions of Addenda relating to any of these, or any other documents unless specifically enu- merated in the Owner -Contractor Agreement. 1,1,2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construc- tion. This Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modi- fied only by a Modification as defined in Subparagraph 1.1.1. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create any contractual relationship of any kind between the Architect and the Contractor, between the Construc- tion Manager and the Contractor or between the Archi- tect and the Construction Manager, but the Architect and the Construction Manager shall be entitled to perform- ance of the obligations of the Contractor intended for their benefit and to enforcement thereof. Nothing Con- tained in the Contract Documents shall create any con- tractual relationship between the Owner, the Construc- tion Manager or the Architect and any Subcontractor or Sub -subcontractor. 1.1.3 THE WORK The Work comprises the completed construction required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, and in- cludes all labor necessary to produce such construction, and all materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction. 1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project, as defined in the Owner -Contractor Agree- ment, is the total construction of which the Work per- formed under the Contract Documents is a part. 1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT 1.2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed in not less than quadruplicate by the Owner and the Contractor. If either the Owner or the Contractor or both do not sign the Conditions of the Contract, Drawings, Specifications or any of the other Contract Documents, the Architect shall identify such Documents. 1.2.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, be- come familiar with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and has correlated personal observations with the requirements of the Contract Docu- ments. 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and comple- tion of the Work. The Contract Documents are comple- mentary, and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required by all. Work not covered in the Contract Documents will not be required unless it is con- sistent therewith and is reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to produce the intended results. Words and abbreviations which have well-known technical or trade meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 1.2.4 The organization of the Specifications into divi- sions, sections and articles, and the arrangement of Draw- ings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DOCUMENTS 1.3.1 All Drawings, Specifications and copies thereof furnished by the Architect are and shall remain the prop- erty of the Architect. They are to be used only with re- spect to this Project and are not to be used on any other project. With the exception of one contract set for each party to the Contract, such documents are to be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect on request at the completion of the Work. Submission or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other pur- poses in connection with the Project is not to be con- strued as publication in derogation of the Architect's common law copyright or other reserved rights. ARTICLE 2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 2.1 THE ARCHITECT 2.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture, or an entity lawfully practicing ar- chitecture, identified as such in the Owner -Contractor Agreement. The term Architect means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. 2,2 THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER 2.2.1 The Construction Manager is the person or entity identified as such in the Owner -Contractor Agreement. The term Construction Manager means the Construction Manager or the Construction Manager's authorized representative. 2,3 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 2.3.1 The Architect and the Construction Manager will AIA DOCUMENT A201lCM • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • JUNE 1980 EDITION • AIA® . ©1980 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20000; WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright taws and Is subject to legal prosecution. A201 /CM —1980 6 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 6 provide administration of the Contract as hereinafter described. 2.3.2 The Architect and the Construction Manager will be the Owner's representatives during construction and until final payment to all contractors is due. The Archi- tect and the Construction Manager will advise and con- sult with the Owner. All instructions to the Contractor shall be forwarded through the Construction Manager. The Ar hitect and the Construction Manager will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with Sub- paragraph 2.3.22. 2.3.3 The Construction Manager will determine in gen- eral that the Work of the Contractor is being performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, and will en- deavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficien- cies in the Work of the Contractor. 2.3.4 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appro- priate to the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the Work and to determine in general if the Work is proceeding in accord- ance with the Contract Documents. However, the Archi- tect will not be required to make exhaustive or con- tinuous on -site inspections to check the quality or quan- tity of the Work. On the basis of on -site observations as an architect, the Architect will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the Work, and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the Contractor. 2.3.5 Neither the Architect nor the Construction Man- ager will be responsible for or have control or charge of construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, and neither will be respon- sible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Neither the Architect nor the Construction Manager will be respon- sible for or have control or charge over the acts or omis- sions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or any of their agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work. 2.3.6 The Architect and the Construction Manager shall at all times have access to the Work wherever it is in preparation and progress. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so that the Architect and the Construction Manager may perform their functions under the Contract Documents. 2.3.7 The Construction Manager will schedule and coor- dinate the Work of all contractors on the Project includ- ing their use of the site. The Construction Manager will keep the Contractor informed of the Project Construction Schedule to enable the Contractor to plan and perform the Work properly. 2.3.8 The Construction Manager will review all Applica- tions for Payment by the Contractor, including final pay- ment, and will assemble them with similar applications from other contractors on the Project into a combined Project Application for Payment. The Construction Man- ager will then make recommendations to the Architect for certification for payment. 2.3.9 Based on the Architect's observations, the recom- mendations of the Construction Manager and an evalua- tion of the Project Application for Payment, the Architect will determine the amount owing to the Contractor and will issue a Project Certificate for Payment incorporating such amount, as provided in Paragraph 9.4. 2.3.10 The Architect will be the interpreter of the re- quirements of the Contract Documents and the judge of the performance thereunder by both the Owner and the Contractor. 2.3.11 The Architect will render interpretations neces- sary for the proper execution or progress of the Work, with reasonable promptness and in accordance with agreed upon time limits. Either party to the Contract may make written request to the Architect for such interpreta- tions. 2.3.12 Claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Contractor and the Owner relating to the execution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents shall be referred initially to the Architect for decision. After consultation with the Construction Manager, the Architect will render a deci- sion in writing within a reasonable time. 2.3.13 All interpretations and decisions of the Architect shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably in- ferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writ- ing or in graphic form. In this capacity as interpreter and judge, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful per- formance by both the Owner and the Contractor, will not show partiality to either, and will not be liable for the result of any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. 2.3.14 The Architect's decisions in matters relating to artistic effect will be final if consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. 2.3.15 Any claim, dispute or other matter in question between the Contractor and the Owner referred to the Architect through the Construction Manager, except those relating to artistic effect as provided in Subparagraph 2.3.14 and those which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided in Subpara- graphs 9.9.4 through 9.9.6, inclusive, shall be subject to arbitration upon the written demand of either party. However, no demand for arbitration of any such claim, dispute or other matter may be made until the earlier of (1) the date on which the Architect has rendered a writ- ten decision, or (2) the tenth day after the parties have presented their evidence to the Architect or have been given a reasonable opportunity to do so, if the Architect has not rendered a written decision by that date. When such a Written decision of the Architect states (1) that the decision is final but subject to appeal, and (2) that any demand for arbitration of a claim, dispute or other matter covered by such decision must be made within thirty days after the date on which the party making the demand re- ceives the written decision, failure to demand arbitration within said thirty day period will result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and the Contractor. If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence but will not super- sede any arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. AIA DOCUMENT A201/CM • GENERAL CONDITIONS Of THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • IUNE 1980 EDITION • AIAG • ©1980 • THE 7 A201/CM — 1980 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. N W , WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 7 2.3.16 The Architect will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents, and to require special inspection or testing, but will take such action only after consultation with the Construction Man- ager. Subject to review by the Architect, the Construction Manager will have the authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever, in the Construction Manager's opinion, it is considered necessary or advisable for the implementation of the in- tent of the Contract Documents, the Construction Man- ager will have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraph 7.7.2 whether or not such Work be then fabricated, in- stalled or completed. The foregoing authority of the Con- struction Manager will be subject to the provisions of Subparagraphs 2.3.10 through 2.3.16, inclusive, with re- spect to interpretations and decisions of the Architect. However, neither the Architect's nor the Construction Manager's authority to act under this Subparagraph 2.3.16, nor any decision made by them in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of the Architect or the Con- struction Manager to the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any of their agents or employees, or any other person performing any of the Work. 2.3.17 The Construction Manager will receive from the Contractor and review all Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, coordinate them with information contained in related documents, and transmit to the Architect those recommended for approval. 2.3.18 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and the information given in the Contract Docu- ments. Such action shall be taken with reasonable prompt- ness so as to cause no delay. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 2.3.19 Following consultation with the Construction Manager, the Architect will take appropriate action on Change Orders in accordance with Article 12, and will have authority to order minor changes in the Work as provided in Subparagraph 12.4.1. 2.3.20 The Construction Manager will maintain at the Project site one record copy of all Contracts, Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modi- fications pertaining to the Project, in good order and marked currently to record all changes made during construction, and approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. These shall be available to the Archi- tect and the Contractor, and shall be delivered to the Architect for the Owner upon completion of the Project. 2.3.21 The Construction Manager will assist the Archi- tect in conducting inspections to determine the dates of Substantial Completion and final completion, and will receive and forward to the Owner for the Owner's review written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor. The Architect will issue a final Project Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 9.9. 2.3.22 The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect and the Construction Manager as the Owner's representatives during construction as set forth in the Contract Documents, will not be modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, the Con- tractor, the Architect and the Construction Manager, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. Failure of the Contractor to respond within ten days to a written request shall constitute consent by the Contractor. 2.3.23 In case of the termination of the employment of the Architect or the Construction Manager, the Owner shall appoint an architect or a construction manager against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objec- tion and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former architect or construction man- ager, respectively. Any dispute in connection with such appointments shall be subject to arbitration. ARTICLE 3 OWNER 3.1 DEFINITION 3.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Owner -Contractor Agreement. The term Owner means the Owner o. the Owner's authorized representative. 3.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 3.2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor, at the time of execution of the Owner -Contractor Agree- ment furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished, the Contractor is not required to execute the Owner -Contractor Agreement or to commence the Work. 3.2.2 The Owner shall furnish all surveys describing the physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility loca- tions for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. 3.2.3 Except as provided in Subparagraph 4.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, ease- ments, assessments and charges required for the construc- tion, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 3.2.4 Information or services under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable prompt- ness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work. 3.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- ments, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, all copies of Drawings and Specifications reasonably nec- essary for the execution of the Work. 3.2.6 The Owner shall forward all instructions to the Contractor through the Construction Manager, with simul- taneous notification to the Architect. 3.2.7 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and responsibilities of the Owner enumerated herein and es- pecially those in respect to Work By Owner or By Sepa- rate Contractors, Payments and Completion, and Insur- ance in Articles 6, 9 and 11, respectively. AtA DOCUMENT A201/CM • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • JUNE 1980 EDITION • AIA® • ©1980 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. N W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws end is subject to legal prosecution. A201 /CM —1980 8 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 8 3.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 3.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct defective Work as required by Paragraph 13.2, or persistently fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Docu- ments, the Owner, by a written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Con- tractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. 3.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 3.4.1. If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and fails within seven days after receipt of written notice from the,Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, after seven days following receipt by the Contractor of an additional written notice and without prejudice to any other remedy the Owner may have, make good such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from the pay- ments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for the Architect's and the Construction Manager's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or fail- ure. Such action by the Owner and the amount charged to the Contractor are both subject to the prior approval of the Architect, after consultation with the Construction Manager. If the payments then or thereafter due the Con- tractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Con- tractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 4 CONTRACTOR 4.1 DEFINITION 4.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Owner -Contractor Agreement. The term Con- tractor means the Contractor or the Contractor's author- ized representative. 4.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 4.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and shall at once report to the Architect and the Construction Manager any error, incon- sistency or omission that may be discovered. The Con- tractor shall not be liable to the Owner, the Architect or the Construction Manager for any damage resulting from any such errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Con- tract Documents. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of the Work. 4.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 4.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures; and shall coordinate all portions of the Work under the Contract, subject to the overall coordination of the Con- struction Manager. 4.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and any other persons performing any of the Work under a con- tract with the Contractor. 4.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved from the Contractor's obligations to perform the Work in accord- ance with the Contract Documents either by the activities or duties of the Construction Manager or the Architect in their administration of the Contract, or by inspections, tests or approvals required or performed under Paragraph 7.7 by persons other than the Contractor. 4.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 4.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- ments, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or per- manent and whether or not incorporated or to be incor- porated in the Work. 4.4.2 The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict dis- cipline and good order among the Contractor's em- ployees and shall not employ on the Work any unfit per- son or anyone not skilled in the task assigned them. 4.5 WARRANTY 4.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner, the Archi- tect and the Construction Manager that all materials and equipment furnished under this Contract will be new un- less otherwise specified, and that all Work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not prop- erly approved and authorized, may be considered defec- tive. If required by the Architect or the Construction Man- ager, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. This warranty is not limited by the provisions of Paragraph 13.2. 4.6 TAXES 4.6.1 The Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted at the time bids are received, whether or not yet effective. 4.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 4.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- ments, the Owner shall secure and pay for the building permit and the Contractor shall secure and pay for all other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspec- tions necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execu- tion of the Contract and which are legally required at the time bids are received. 4.7.2 The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the perform- ance of the Work. AIA DOCUMENT A2011CM • GENERAL CONDITIOdS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • JUNE 1980 EDITION • AIA® • © 1980 • THE 9 A201/CM — 1980 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N W WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 9 4.7.3 It is not the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain that the Contract Documents are in accord- ance with applicable laws, statutes, building codes and regulations. If the Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith in any re- spect, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and the Construction Manager in writing, and any neces- sary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. 4.7.4 If the Contractor performs any Work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regula- tions, and without such notice to the Architect and the Construction Manager, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility therefor and shall bear all costs attributable thereto. 4.8 ALLOWANCES 4.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by these allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons as the Construction Man- ager may direct, but the Contractor will not be required to employ persons against whom the Contractor makes a reasonable objection. 4.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- ments: .1 these allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor, less any applicable trade discount, of the materials and equipment required by the allowance, delivered at the site, and all appli- cable taxes; .2 the Contractor's costs for unloading and han- dling on the site, labor, installation costs, over- head, profit and other expenses contemplated for the original allowance shall be included in the Contract Sum and not in the allowance; .3 whenever the cost is more or less than the allowance, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order, the amount of which will recognize changes, if any, in han- dling costs on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses. 4.9 SUPERINTENDENT 4.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superin- tendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attend- ance at the Project site during the progress of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor and all communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important commu- nications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communi- cations shall be So confirmed on written request in each case. 4.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 4.10.1 The Contractor, immediately after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Construc- tion Manager's approval a Contractor's Construction Schedule for the Work which shall provide for expedi- tious and practicable execution of the Work. This sched- ule shall be coordinated by the Construction Manager with the Project Construction Schedule. The Contractor's Construction Schedule shall be revised as required by the conditions of the Work and the Project, subject to the Construction Manager's approval. 4.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 4.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the Project site, on a current basis, one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modi- fications, in good order and marked currently to record all changes made during construction, and approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. These shall be available to the Architect and the Construction Manager. The Contractor shall advise the Construction Manager on a current basis of all changes in the Work made during construction. 4.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 4.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 4.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate a material, product or system for some portion of the Work. 4.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 4.12.4 The Contractor shall prepare, review, approve and submit through the Construction Manager, with reason- able promptness and in such sequence as to cause no de- lay in the Work or in the work of the Owner or any sepa- rate contractor, all Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples required by the Contract Documents. The Con- tractor shall cooperate with the Construction Manager in the Construction Manager's coordination of the Contrac- tor's Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples with those of other separate contractors. 4.12.5 By preparing, approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, the Contractor rep- resents that the Contractor has determined and verified all materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so with reasonable promptness, and has checked and coordinated the infor- mation contained within such submittals with the require- ments of the Work, the Project and the Contract Docu- ments. 4.12.6 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibil- ity for any deviation from the requirements of the Con- tract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples under Subparagraph 2.3,18, unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect and the Construction Manager in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and the Archi- tect has given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples by the Architect's approval of them. 4.12.7 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. AIA DOCUMENT A2011CM • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • IUNE 1980 EDITION • AIA® • ©1980 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1715 NEW YORK AVE.. N W.. WASHINGTON D.C. '0M, A201/CM — 1980 10 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 10 4.12.8 No portion of the Work requiring submission of a Shop Drawing, Product Data or Sample shall be com- menced until the submittal has been approved by the Architect as provided in Subparagraph 2.3.18. All such portions of the Work shall be in accordance with ap- proved submittals. 4.13 USE OF SITE 4.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents, and shall not unreasonably encum- ber the site with any materials or equipment. 4.13.2 The Contractor shall coordinate all of the Contrac- tor's operations with, and secure approval from, the Con- struction Manager before using any portion of the site. 4.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK 4.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting or patching that may be required to complete the Work or to make its several parts fit together properly. 4.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger any portion of the Work or the work of the Owner or any separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering any work, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner or any separate contractor except with the written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or any separate contractor consent to cutting or otherwise alter- ing the'Work. 4.15 CLEANING UP 4.15.1 The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by the Contractor's operations. At the completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove all the Contrac- tor's waste materials and rubbish from and about the Project as well as all the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 4.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up at the comple- tion of the Work, the Owner may do so as provided in Paragraph 3.4 and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. 4.16 COMMUNICATIONS 4.16.1 The Contractor shall forward all communications to the Owner and the Architect through the Construction Manager. 4.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 4.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the Owner and the Con- struction Manager harmless from loss on account thereof, except that the Owner, or the Construction Manager as the case may be, shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, process or the product of a par- ticular manufacturer or manufacturers is selected by such person or such person's agent. If the Contractor, or the Construction Manager as the case may be, has reason to believe that the design, process or product selected is an infringement of a patent, that party shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly given to the others and also to the Architect. 4•18 INDEMNIFICATION 4.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Con- tractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, the Architect, the Construction Manager, and their agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense (1) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, dis- ease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (2) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge or otherwise reduce any other right or obligation of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to any party or person described in this Paragraph 4.18. 4.18.2 In any and all claims against the Owner, the Archi- tect, the Construction Manager or any of their agents or employees by any employee of the Contractor, any Sub- contractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this Para- graph 4.18 shall not be limited in any way by any limita- tion on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any Sub- contractor under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 4.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Para- graph 4.18 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect or the Construction Manager, their agents or employees, arising out of (1) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, de- signs or specifications, or (2) the giving of or the failure to give directions or instructions by the Architect or the Construction Manager, their agents or employees, pro- vided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITION 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform any of the Work at the site. The term Subcontractor means a Sub- contractor or a Subcontractor's authorized representative. The term Subcontractor does not include any separate contractor or any separate contractor's subcontractors. 5.1.2 A Sub -subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to per- form any of the Work at the site. The term Sub -subcon- tractor means a Sub -subcontractor or an authorized rep- resentative thereof. 5.2 AWARDS OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.1 Unless otherwise required by the Contract Docu- AIA DOCUMENT A201/CM • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • JUNE 1980 EDITION AIA® • ©1900 • THE 11 A201/CM —1980 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. N W . WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 11 ments or the Bidding Documents, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after the award of the Contract, shall fur- nish to the Construction Manager in writing for review by the Owner, the Architect and the Construction Man- ager, the names of the persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each of the principal por- tions of the Work. The Construction Manager will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner, the Architect or the Con- struction Manager, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Construction Manager to reply promptly shall con- stitute notice of no reasonable objection. 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with any such proposed person or entity to whom the Owner, the Ar- chitect or the Construction Manager has made reasonable objection under the provisions of Subparagraph 5.2.1. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has a reasonable objection. 5.2.3 If the Owner, the Architect or the Construction Manager has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity, the Contractor shall submit a substitute to whom the Owner, the Architect and the Construction Manager have no reasonable objection, and the Contract Sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued; however, no increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for any such substitu- tion unless the Contractor has acted promptly and re- sponsively in submitting names as required by Subpara- graph 5.2.1. 5.2.4 The Contractor shall make no substitution for any Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner, the Architect or the Construction Manager makes reasonable objection to such substitution. 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By an appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume to- ward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibili- ties which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner, the Architect and the Construction Manager. Said agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner, the Architect and the Construction Manager under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the Contractor -Subcontractor Agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by these Docu- ments, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with their Sub -subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Sub- contractor, prior to the execution of the Subcontract, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcon- tractor will be bound by this Paragraph 5.3, and identify to the Subcontractor any terms and conditions of the pro- posed Subcontract which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Each Subcontractor shall similarly make copies of such Documents available to their Sub - subcontractors. ARTICLE 6 WORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform work re- lated to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other por- tions of the Project or other work on the site under these or similar Conditions of the Contract. If the Contractor claims that delay, damage or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such claim as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other work on the site, the term Contractor in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner - Contractor Agreement. 6.1.3 The Owner will provide for the coordination of the work of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate therewith as provided in Paragraph 6.2. 6,2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner, the Con- struction Manager and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their ma- terials and equipment and the execution of their work, and shall connect and coordinate the Work with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. 6.2.2 If any part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of the Owner or any separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with the Work, promptly report to the Con- struction Manager any apparent discrepancies or defects in such other work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acceptance of the Owner's or separate contractor's work as fit and proper to receive the Work, except as to defects which may subsequently become apparent in such work by others. 6.2.3 Any costs caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible therefor. 6.2.4 Should the Contractor wrongfully cause damage to the work or property of the Owner, or to other work or property on the site, the Contractor shall promptly rem- edy such damage as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. 6.2.5 Should the Contractor wrongfully delay or cause damage to the work or property of any separate contrac- tor, the Contractor shall, upon due notice, promptly at- tempt to settle with such other contractor by agreement, or otherwise to resolve the dispute. If such separate con- tractor sues or initiates an arbitration proceeding against the Owner on account of any delay or damage alleged to have been caused by the Contractor, the Owner shall AIA DOCUMENT A201/CM • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • IUNE 1980 EDITION • AIA® . © 1980 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 2000 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. A201/CM — 1980 12 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 12 notify the Contractor who shall defend such proceedings at the Owner's expense, and if any judgment or award against the Owner arises therefrom, the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and shall reimburse the Owner for all attorneys' fees and court or arbitration costs which the Owner has incurred. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises between the Contractor and separate contractors as to their responsibility for cleaning up as required by Paragraph 4.15, the Owner may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the contractors respon- sible therefor as the Construction Manager shall deter- mine to be just. ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 GOVERNING LAW 7.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. 7.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 7.2.1 The Owner and the Contractor, respectively, bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to the part- ners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party with respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole without the written consent of the other. 7.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 7.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or mem- ber of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corpora- tion for whom it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving the notice. 7.4 CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES 7.4.1 Should either party to the Contract suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any act or omis- sion of the other party or of any of the other party's employees, agents or others for whose acts such party is legally liable, claim shall be made in writing to such other party within a reasonable time after the first observ- ance of such injury or damage. 7.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND 7.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering the faithful perform- ance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder if and as required in the Bidding Doc- uments or the Contract Documents. 7.6 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 7.6.1 The duties and obligations imposed by the Con- tract Documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, anv duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise im- posed or available by law. 7.6.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, the Ar- chitect, the Construction Manager or the Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty afforded any of them under the Contract, nor shall any such action or failure to act constitute an approval of or acquiescence in any breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 7.7 TESTS 7.7.1 If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having juris- diction require any portion of the Work to be inspected, tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Architect and the Construction Manager timely notice of its readi- ness so the Architect and the Construction Manager may observe such inspection, testing or approval. The Con- tractor shall bear all costs of such inspections, tests or approvals conducted by public authorities. Unless other- wise provided, the Owner shall bear all costs of other in- spections, tests or approvals. 7.7.2 If the Architect or the Construction Manager deter- mines that any Work requires special inspection, testing or approval which Subparagraph 7.7.1 does not include, the Construction Manager will, upon written authoriza- tion from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to order such special inspection, testing cr approval, and the Con- tractor shall give notice as provided in Subparagraph 7.7.1. If such special inspection or testing reveals a failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Con- tract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including compensation for the Architect's and the Construction Manager's additional services made nec- essary by such failure; otherwise the Owner shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. 7.7.3 Required certificates of inspection, testing or ap- proval shall be secured by the Contractor and the Con- tractor shall promptly deliver them to the Construction Manager for transmittal to the Architect. 7.7.4 If the Architect or the Construction Manager wishes to observe the inspections, tests or approvals required by the Contract Documents, they will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the source of supply. 7.8 INTEREST 7.8.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Doc- uments shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing at the place of the Project. 7.9 ARBITRATION 7.9.1 All claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Contractor and the Owner arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof, except as provided in Subparagraph 2.3.14 with respect to the Architect's decisions on matters relating to artistic effect, and except for claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided by Subparagraphs 9.9.4 through 9.9.6, inclusive, shall be decided by arbitration in accordance with the Construc- tion Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitra- tion Association then obtaining unless the parties mutually AIA DOCUMENT A201ICM • GENERAL CONDITIONS -OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • IUNE 1980 EDITION • AIA® • © 1980 • THE 13 A201/CM — 1980 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1, 3; NEW YORK AVE N W . WA: HINGTON. D.C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 13 agree otherwise. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall include, by consolida- tion, joinder or in any other manner, the Architect, the Construction Manager, their employees or consultants except by written consent containing a specific reference to the Owner -Contractor Agreement and signed by the Architect, the Construction Manager, the Owner, the Contractor and any other person sought to be joined. No arbitration shall include by consolidation, joinder or in any other manner, parties other than the Owner, the Contractor and any other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law, whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in the arbi- tration. No person other than the Owner or the Contrac- tor shall be included as an original third party or addi- tional third party to an arbitration whose interest or re- sponsibility is insubstantial. Any consent to arbitration involving an additional person or persons shall not con- stitute consent to arbitration of any dispute not described therein or with any person not named or described therein. The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and any other agreement to arbitrate with an additional person or persons duly consented to by the parties to the Owner - Contractor Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under the prevailing arbitration law. The award rendered by the arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be en- tered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 7.9.2 Notice of the demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Owner -Contractor Agreement and with the American Arbitration Associa- tion, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect and the Construction Manager. The demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Subparagraph 2.3.15 where applicable, and in all other cases within a reasonable time after the claim, dispute or other matter in question has arisen; and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable pro- ceedings based on such claim, dispute or other matter in question would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. 7.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed in writing, the Contractor shall carry on the Work and maintain its progress during any arbitration proceedings, and the Owner shall Con- tinue to make payments to the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Contract Time is the period of time allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work as defined in Sub- paragraph 8.1.3, including authorized adjustments thereto. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in a notice to proceed. If there is no no- tice to proceed, it shall be such other date as may be established in the Owner -Contractor Agreement or else- vvhere in the Contract Documents. 8.1.3 The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof is the Date certified by the Architect when construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Owner or separate contractors can occupy or utilize the Work or a designated portion thereof fbr the use for which it is intended. 8.1.4 The Date of Substantial Completion of the Project or designated portion thereof is the Date certified by the Architect when construction is sufficiently complete so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Project or designated portion thereof for the use for which it was intended. 8.1.5 The term day as used in the Contract Documents Shall mean calendar day unless specifically designated otherwise. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. 8.2.2 The Contractor shall begin the Work on the date of commencement as defined in Subparagraph 8.1.2. The Contractor shall carry the Work forward expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Com- pletion of the Work within the Contract Time. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any act or neglect of the Owner, the Architect, the Construction Manager, any of their em- ployees, any separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in transportation, adverse weather condi- tions not reasonably anticipatable, unavoidable casualties, any causes beyond the Contractor's control, delay author- ized by the Owner pending arbitration, or by any other cause which the Construction Manager determines may justify the delay, then the Contract Time shall be ex- tended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Construction Manager may determine. 8.3.2 Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Construction Manager not more than twenty days after the commencement of the delay; other- wise it shall be waived. In the case of a continuing delay only one claim is necessary. The Contractor shall provide an estimate of the probable effect of such delay on the progress of the Work. 8.3.3 If no agreement is made stating the dates upon which interpretations as provided in Subparagraph 2.3.11 shall be furnished, then no claim for delay shall be allowed on account of failure to furnish such interpreta- tions until fifteen days after written request is made for them, and not then unless such claim is reasonable. 8.3.4 This Paragraph 8.3 does not exclude the recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provi- sions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Owner -Contrac- tor Agreement and, including authorized adjustments thereto, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. AIA DOCUMENT A2011CM • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION AtANAGEAIENT EDITION • IUNE 1980 EDITION • AIAD • Qa 1980 • THE VMCRICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1733 NEW YORK AVE.. N.\y.. WASHINGTON D.C. 20006 A201/CM — 1980 14 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 14 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Con- tractor shall submit to the Construction Manager a schedule of values allocated to the various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect and the Con- struction Manager may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Construction Manager or the Architect, shall be used only as a basis for the Contractor's Applica- tions for Payment. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 At least fifteen days before the date for each progress payment established in the Owner -Contractor Agreement, the Contractor shall submit to the Construc- tion Manager an itemized Application for Payment, notar- ized if required, supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner, the Ar- chitect or the Construction Manager may require, and re- flecting retainage, if any, as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Construction Manager will as- semble the Application with similar applications from other contractors on the Project into a combined Project Application for Payment and forward it with recommen- dations to the Architect within seven days. 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- ments, payments will be made on account of materials or equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the site and. if approved in advance by the Owner, payments may similarly be made for mate- rials or equipment suitably 'stored at some other loca- tion agreed upon in writing. Payments for materials or equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale or such other procedures satisfactory to the Owner to estab- lish the Owner's title to such materials or equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, including applica- ble insurance and transportation to the site for those materials and equipment stored off the site. 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by an Application for Pavment will pass to the Owner either by incorporation in the construction or upon receipt of payment by the Contractor, whichever occurs first, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances, herein- after referred to in this Article 9 as "liens"; and that no Work, materials or equipment covered by an Application for Payment will have been acquired by the Contractor, or by any other person performing Work at the site or furnishing materials and equipment for the Project, sub- ject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or oth- erwise imposed by the Contractor or such other person. 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after the re- ceipt of the Project Application for Payment with the rec- ommendations of the Construction Manager, review the Project Application for Payment and either issue a Project Certificate for Payment to the Owner with a copy to the Construction Manager for distribution to the Contractor for such amounts as the Architect determines are prop- erly due, or notify the Construction Manager in writing of the reasons for withholding a Certificate as provided in Subparagraph 9.6.1. Such notification will be forwarded to the Contractor by the Construction Manager. 9.4.2 The issuance of a Project Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner that, based on the Architect's observations at the site as provided in Subparagraph 2.3.4 and the data com- prising the Project Application for Payment, the Work has progressed to the point indicated; that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Docu- ments (subject to an evaluation of the Work for conform- ance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion of the Work, to the results of any subsequent tests required by or performed under the Contract Docu- ments, to minor deviations from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion, and to any specific quali- fications stated in the Certificate); and that the Contrac- tor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. How- ever, by issuing a Project Certificate for Payment, the Ar- chitect shall not thereby be deemed to represent that the Architect has made exhaustive or continuous on -site in- spections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, has reviewed the construction means, methods, tech- niques, sequences or procedures, or has made any exam- ination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contrac- tor has used the monies previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 9.5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.5.1 After the Architect has issued a Project Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the man- ner and within the time provided in the Contract Docu- ments. 9.5.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcon- tractor upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's Work, the amount to which said Subcon- tractor is entitled, reflecting the percentage actually re- tained, if any, from payments to the Contractor on ac- count of such Subcontractor's Work. The Contractor shall, by an appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to their Sub -subcontractors in similar manner. 9.5.3 The Architect may, on request and at the Archi- tect's discretion, furnish to any Subcontractor, if prac- ticable, information regarding the percentages of com- pletion or the amounts applied for by the Contractor and the action taken thereon by the Architect on account of Work done by such Subcontractor. 9.5.4 Neither the Owner, the Architect nor the Construc- tion Manager shall have any obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any monies to any Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. 9.5.5 No certification of a progress payment, any prog- ress payment, or any partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner, shall constitute an accept- ance of any Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.6 PAYMENTS WITHHELD 9.6.1 The Architect, following consultation with the Construction Manager, may decline to certify pavment AIA DOCUMENT A201/CM • GENERAL CONDITIONSOF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION 15 A201/CM — 1980 AMMERICA INSSTI INSTITUTE OFEMENT ARCHI ARCHITECTS. 17735 NEW YORKOAVEEITION . N W • WASHINGTON,D.C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 15 and may withhold the Certificate in whole or in part to the extent necessary to reasonably protect the Owner, if, in the Architect's opinion, the Architect is unable to make representations to the Owner as provided in Subpara- graph 9.4.2. If the Architect is unable to make representa- tions to the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.2, and to certify payment in the amount of the Project Ap- plication, the Architect will notify the Construction Man- ager as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. if the Contractor and the Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Project Certificate for Pay- ment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also decline to certify payment or, because of subse- quently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, the Architect may nullify the whole or any part of any Project Certificate for Payment previously issued to such extent as may be necessary, in the Architect's opinion, to protect the Owner from loss because of: .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence in- dicating probable filing of such claims; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments prop- erly to Subcontractors, or for labor, materials or equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be com- pleted for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time; or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accord- ance with the Contract Documents. 9.6.2 When the grounds in Subparagraph 9.6.1 above are removed, payment shall be made for amounts with- held because of them. 9,7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.7.1 If the Construction Manager should fail to issue recommendations within seven days of receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if, through no fault of the Contractor, the Architect does not issue a Project Certificate for Payment within seven days after the Architect's receipt of the Project Application for Pay- ment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Doc- uments any amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the Contractor may, upon seven addi- tional days' written notice to the Owner, the Architect and the Construction Manager, stop the Work until pay- ment of the amount owing has been received. The Con- tract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Con- tractor's reasonable costs of shut -down, delay and start- up, which shall be effected by appropriate Change Order in accordance with Paragraph 12.3. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a designated portion thereof which is acceptable to the Owner, is substantially complete as defined in Subpara- graph 8.1.3, the Contractor shall prepare for the Construc- tion Manager a list of items to be completed or cor- rected. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect, on the basis of inspection and con- sultation with the Construction Manager, determines that the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Work which shall establish the Date of Substantial Completion of the Work, shall state the responsibilities of the Owner and the Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall complete the items listed therein. The Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Work shall be submitted to the Owner and the Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. 9.8.2 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or desig- nated portion thereof, and upon application by the Con- tractor and certification by the Architect, the Owner shall make payment, reflecting adjustment in retainage, if any, for such Work or portion thereof as provided in the Con- tract Documents. 9.8.3 When the Architect, on the basis of inspections, determines that the Project or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Project which shall establish the Date of Substantial Completion of the Project and fix the time within which the Contrac- tor shall complete any uncompleted items on the Certif- icate of Substantial Completion of the Work. 9.8.4 Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the Date of Substantial Completion of the Project or designated portion thereof unless other- wise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Comple- tion of the Work or designated portion thereof. 9.9 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.9.1 Following the Architect's issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated por- tion thereof, and the Contractor's completion of the Work, the Contractor shall forward to the Construction Manager a written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, and shall also forward to the Construction Manager a final Application for Payment. Upon receipt, the Construction Manager will make the necessary evaluations and forward recommendations to the Architect who will promptly make such inspection. When the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully per- formed, the Architect will issue a Project Certificate for Payment which will approve the final payment due the Contractor. This approval will constitute a representation that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, informa- tion and belief, and on the basis of observations and in- spections, the Work has been completed in accordance with the Terms and Conditions of the Contract Docu- ments and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor, and noted in said Certificate, is due and pay- able. The Architect's approval of said Project Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that the conditions precedent to the Contractor's being en- titled to final payment as set forth in Subparagraph 9.9.2 have been fulfilled. AIA DOCUMENT A201/CM • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • JUNE 1980 EDITION • AIA® • © 19W • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201/CM — 1980 16 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright Imes end Is subject to legal prosecution. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 16 9.9.2 Neither the final payment nor the remaining retain - age shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect, through the Construction Manager, (1) an affi- davit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satis- fied, (2) consent of surety, if any, to final payment, and (3) if required by the Owner, other data establishing pay- ment or satisfaction of all such obligations, such as re- ceipts, releases and waivers of liens arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be desig- nated by the Owner. If any Subcontractor refuses to fur- nish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Con- tractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any such lien. If any such lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all monies that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. 9.9.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by the issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Construction Manager so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipu- lated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished as provided in Paragraph 7.5, the written con- sent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Construction Manager prior to certification of such payment. Such pay- ment shall be made under the Terms and Conditions gov- erning final payments, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. 9.9.4 The making of final payment shall, after the Date of Substantial Completion of the Project, constitute a waiver of all claims by the Owner except those arising from: .1 unsettled liens; .2 faulty or defective Work appearing after Substan- tial Completion of the Work; .3 failure of the Work to comply with the require- ments of the Contract Documents; or .4 terms of any special warranties required by the Contract Documents. -9.9.5 The acceptance of final payment shall, after the Date of Substantial Completion of the Project, constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those previously made in writing and identified by the Contrac- tor as unsettled at the time of the final Application for Payment. 9.9.6 All provisions of this Agreement, including with- out limitation those establishing obligations and proce- dures, shall remain in full force and effect notwithstand- ing the making or acceptance of final payment prior to the Date of Substantial Completion of the Project. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take all reasonable precau- tions for the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: .1 all employees on the Work and all other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 all the Work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under the care, custody or control of the Contractor or any of the Contractor's Subcon- tractors or Sub -subcontractors; .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, in- cluding trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction; and .4 the work of the Owner or other separate contrac- tors. 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as re- quired by existing conditions and the progress of the Work, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent utilities. 10.2.4 When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy all damage or loss (other than damage or loss insured under Para- graph 11.3) to any property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contrac- tor, any Subcontractor, any Sub -subcontractor, anyone di- rectly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by any- one for whose acts any of them may be liable, and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to the acts or omissions of the Owner, the Architect, the Con- struction Manager or anyone directly or indirectly em- ployed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obliga- tions of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 4.18. 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless AIA DOCUMENT A201/CM • GENERAL CONDITIONS'bF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • JUNE 1980 EDITION • AIA® . Oc 1980 • THE 17 A201/CM —1980 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVE . N W . WASHINGTON. D C. 2=)6 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright larva and Is subject to legal prosecution. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 17 otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and the Construction Manager. 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the Work to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. 10.3 EMERGENCIES 10.3.1 In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work shall be determined as provided in Article 12 for Changes in the Work. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insur- ance for protection from the claims set forth below which may atise out of or result from the Contractor's opera- tions under the Contract, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor, or by anyone di- rectly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by any- one for whose acts any of them may be liable: .1 claims under workers' or workmen's compensa- tion, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts; .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occu- pational sickness or disease, or death of the Con- tractor's employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sick- ness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal in- jury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such per- son by the Contractor, or (2) by any other person; .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than any limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever is greater. 11.1.3 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall include contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 4.18. 11.1.4 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be submitted to the Construction Manager for trans- mittal to the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. These Certificates shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled until at least thirty days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. 11,2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining Owner's liability insurance and, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain insurance for protection against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract. 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall pur- chase and maintain property insurance upon the entire Work at the site to the full insurable value thereof. This insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the Construction Manager, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub -subcontractors in the Work, and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and shall include "all risk" insurance for physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, van- dalism and malicious mischief. If the Owner does not intend to purchase such insurance for the full insurable value of the entire Work, the Owner shall inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, the Contrac- tor's Subcontractors and the Sub -subcontractors {n the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is dam- aged by failure of the Owner to purchase or maintain such insurance and to so notify the Contractor, then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributa- ble thereto. If not covered under the all risk insurance or otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall effect and maintain similar property in- surance on portions of the Work stored off the site or in transit when such portions of the Work are to be in- cluded in an Application for Payment under Subpara- graph 9.3.2. 11.3.2 The Owner shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance as may be required by the Contract Documents or by law. This insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the Construction Man- ager, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub -subcontrac- tors in the Work. 11.3.3 Any loss insured under Subparagraph 11.3.1 is to be adjusted with the Owner and made payable to the Owner as trustee for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 11.3.8. The Con- tractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance monies received by the Contractor, and by ap- propriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, shall require each Subcontractor to make pay- ments to their Sub -subcontractors in similar manner. 11.3.4 The Owner shall file a copy of all policies with the Contractor before an exposure to loss may occur. 11.3.5 If the Contractor requests in writing that insur- ance for risks other than those described in Subpara- graphs 11.3.1 and 11.3.2, or other special hazards, be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance. and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. AIA DOCUMENT A201ICM • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • JUNE 1980 EDITION • AIA® • ©1980 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. N W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 A201/CM — 1980 18 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright lawn end Is subject to legal prosecution. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 18 11.3.6 The Owner and the Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and the Subcontractors, Sub -sub- contractors, agents and employees of each other, and (2) the Architect, the Construction Manager and separate con- tractors, if any, and their subcontractors, sub -subcontrac- tors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.3 or any other property in- surance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as trustee. The foregoing waiver afforded the Architect, the Construction Manager, their agents and employees shall not extend to the liability imposed by Subparagraph 4.18.3. The Owner or the Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, the Construc- tion Manager, separate contractors, Subcontractors and Sub -subcontractors by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of all other parties enumerated in this Sub- paragraph 11.3.6. 11.3.7 If required in writing by any party in interest, the Owner as trustee shall, upon the occurrence of an in- sured loss, give bond for the proper performance of the Owner's duties. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account any money so received, and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an award by arbitration in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Para- graph 7.9. If after such loss no other special agreement is made, replacement of damaged Work shall be covered by an appropriate Change Order. 11.3.8 The Owner, as trustee, shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object, in writing within five days after the occurrence of loss, to the Owner's exercise of this power, and if such objection be made, arbitrators shall be chosen as provided in Paragraph 7.9. The Owner as trustee shall, in that case, make settlement with the insurers in accordance with the directions of such arbi- trators. If distribution of the insurance proceeds by arbi- tration is required, the arbitrators will direct such dis- tribution. 11.3.9 If the Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion thereof, such occupancy shall not commence prior to a time mutually agreed to by the Owner and the Contractor and to which the insurance company or com- panies providing the property insurance have consented by endorsement to the policy or policies. This insurance shall not be canceled or lapsed on account of such partial occupancy. Consent of the Contractor and of the insur- ance company or companies to such occupancy or use shall not be unreasonablv withheld. 11.4 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE 11.4.1 The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain insurance for protection against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused, to the extent covered by insurance under this Paragraph 11.4. ARTICLE 12 CHANGES IN THE WORK 12.1 CHANGE ORDERS 12.1.1 A Change Order is a written order to the Con- tractor signed to show the recommendation of the Con- struction Manager, the approval of the Architect and the authorization of the Owner, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work or an adjust- ment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order. A Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor's agreement there- with, including the adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. 12.1.2 The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order, and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Docu- ments. 12.1.3 The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined in one or more of the following ways: 1 by mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 by unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 by cost to be determined in a man.Ter agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or .4 by the method provided in Subparagraph 12.1.4. 12.1.4 If none of the methods set forth in Clauses 12.1.3.1, 12.1.3.2 or 12.1.3.3 is agreed upon, the Contrac- tor, provided a written order signed by the Owner is re- ceived, shall promptly proceed with the Work involved. The cost of such Work shall then be determined by the Architect, after consultation with the Construction Man- ager, on the basis of the reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in the case of an increase in the Con- tract Sum, a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Clauses 12.1.3.3 and 12.1.3.4 above, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Owner, the Architect or the Construc- tion Manager may prescribe, an itemized accounting to- gether with appropriate supporting data for inclusion in a Change Order. Unless otherwise provided in the Con- tract Documents, cost shall be limited to the following: cost of materials, including sales tax and cost of delivery; cost of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, and fringe benefits required by agreement or custom; workers' or workmen's compensa- tion insurance; bond premiums; rental value of equip- ment and machinery; and the additional costs of super- vision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, payments on account shall be made on the Ar- chitect's approval of a Project Certificate for Payment. AIA DOCUMENT A201lCM • GENERAL CONDITIO'.I,S OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • JUNE 1980 EDITION • AIA® • © 1960 • THE 19 A201/CM —1980 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHIIECT5. 1735 NEW YORK AVE...NAV., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright lmvs and Is subject to legal prosecution. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 19 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for any deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum will be the amount of the actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect after consultation with the Construction Manager. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitu- tions are involved in any one change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of the net increase, if any, with respect to that change. 12.1.5 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Docu- ments or subsequently agreed upon, and if the quantities originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order that application of the agreed unit prices to the quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or the Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 12.2 CONCEALED CONDITIONS 12.2.1 Should concealed conditions encountered in the performance of the Work below the surface of the ground or should concealed or unknown conditions in an existing structure be at variance with the conditions indicated by the Contract Documents, or should unknown physical conditions below the surface of the ground or should concealed or unknown conditions in an existing struc- ture of an unusual nature, differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as in- herent in work of the character provided for in this Con- tract, be encountered, the Contract Sum shall be equita- bly adjusted by Change Order upon claim by either party made within twenty days after the first observance of the conditions. 12.3 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST 12.3.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, the Contractor shall give the Architect and the Construction Manager written no- tice thereof within twenty days after the occurrence of the event giving rise to such claim. This notice shall be given by the Contractor before proceeding to execute the Work, except in an emergency endangering life or prop- erty in which case the Contractor shall proceed in ac- cordance with Paragraph 10.3. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. If the Owner and the Contractor cannot agree on the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, it shall be determined by the Architect after consultation with the Construction Manager. Any change in the Contract Sum resulting from such claim shall be authorized by Change Order. 12.3.2 If the Contractor claims that additional cost is in- volved because of, but not limited to, (1) any written in- terpretation pursuant to Subparagraph 2.3.11, (2) any or- der by the Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Para- graph 3.3 where the Contractor was not at fault, or any such order by the Construction Manager as the Owner's agent, (3) any written order for a minor change in the Work issued pursuant to Paragraph 12.4, or (4) failure of payment by the Owner pursuant to Paragraph 9.7, the Contractor shall make such claim as provided in Sub- paragraph 12.3.1. 12.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 12.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order issued through the Construction Manager, and shall be binding on the Owner and the Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. ARTICLE 13 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 13.1.1 If any portion of the Work should be covered contrary to the request of the Architect or the Construc- tion Manager, or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by either, be uncovered for their observation and shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. 13.1.2 If any other portion of the Work has been cov- ered which the Architect or the Construction Manager has not specifically requested to observe prior to its being covered, either may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work be found in accordance with the Contract Documents, the cost of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner. If such Work be found not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs unless it be found that this condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor as provided in Article 6, in which event the Owner shall be responsible for the payment of such costs. 13.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 13.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct all Work rejected by the Architect or the Construction Manager as defective or as failing to conform to the Contract Docu- ments whether observed before or after Substantial Com- pletion of the Project and whether or not fabricated, in- stalled or completed. The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected Work, including compensa- tion for the Architect's and the Construction Manager's additional services made necessary thereby. 13.2.2 If, within one year after the Date of Substantial Completion of the Project or designated portion thereof, or within one year after acceptance by the Owner of designated equipment, or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Docu- ments, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previ- ously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. This obligation shall survive both final payment for the Work or designated portion thereof and termina- tion of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. 13.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site all portions of the Work which are defective or nonconform- ng and which have not been corrected under Subpara- graphs 4.5.1, 13.2.1 and 13.2.2, unless removal is waived by the Owner. 13.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct defective or non- conforming Work as provided in Subparagraphs 4.5.1, AIA DOCUMENT A201ICM • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • IUNE 1960 EDITION • AIA® . c) 1980 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. N.W.. WASHI.NGTON, O.C. 20006 A201 /CM —1980 20 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 20 13.2.1 and 13.2.2, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 3.4, 13.2.5 If the Contractor does not proceed with the cor- rection of such defective or nonconforming Work within a reasonable time fixed by written notice from the Archi- tect issued through the Construction Manager, the Owner may remove it and may store the materials or equipment at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within ten days thereafter, the Owner may, upon ten additional days' written notice, sell such Work at auction or at pri- vate sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs that should have been borne by the Contractor, including compensation for the Archi- tect's and the Construction Manager's additional services made necessary thereby. If such proceeds of sale do not cover all costs which the Contractor should have borne, the difference shall be charged to the Contractor and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the differ- ence to the Owner. 13.2.6 The Contractor shall bear the cost of making good all work of the Owner or separate contractors de- stroyed or damaged by such correction or removal. 13.2.7 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 13.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to any other obligation which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents, including Paragraph 4.5 hereof. The establishment of the time periods noted in Subparagraph 13.2.2, or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any warranty required by the Contract Documents, relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the Contractor's obligation to comply with the Contract Doc- uments may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to estab- lish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contrac- tor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 13.3 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE OR NONCONFORMING WORK 13.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept defective or non- conforming Work, the Owner may do so instead of requir- ing its removal and correction, in which case a Change Order will be issued to reflect a reduction in the Contract Sum where appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1 If the Work is stopped for a period of thirty days under an order of any court or other public authority having jurisdiction, or as a result of an act of government such as a declaration of a national emergency making materials unavailable, through no act or fault of the Con- tractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with the Contractor, or if the Work should be stopped for a period of thirty days by the Contractor be- cause of the Construction Manager's failure to recom- mend or the Architect's failure to issue a Project Certifi- cate for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.7 or because the Owner has not made payment thereon as provided in Paragraph 9.7, then the Contractor may, upon seven addi- tional days' written notice to the Owner, the Architect and the Construction Manager, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for all Work executed and for any proven loss sustained upon any materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable profit and damages. 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER 14.2.1 If the Contractor is adjudged a bankrupt, or makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of the Contrac- tor's insolvency, or if the Contractor persistently or re- peatedly refuses or fails, except in cases for which exten- sion of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials, or fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor, or persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having juris- tion, or otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the Contract Documents, and fails within seven days after receipt of written notice to commence and continue correction of such default, neglect or viola- tion with diligence and promptness, the Owner, upon certification by the Architect after consultation with the Construction Manager that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, after seven days following receipt by the Contractor of an additional written notice and with- out prejudice to any other remedy the Owner may have, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools. construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish the Work by whatever methods the Owner may deem expedient. In such case the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. 14.2.2 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum ex- ceeds the costs of finishing the Work, including compen- sation for the Architect's and the Construction Manager's additional services made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance. the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or to the Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, in the manner provided in Paragraph 9.4, and this obligation for payment shall survive the termination of the Contract. AIA DOCUMENT A2011CM • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT EDITION • JUNE T980 EDITION • AIA9 • ©1980 • THE 21 A201/CM —1980 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVE.. N.W . WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. GENERAL CONDITIONS 00750 - 21 SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Information contained in this Supplementary Conditions amends, supplements or clarifies the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Construction Management Edition, AIA Document A201/CM dated June 1980 Edition. In cases of conflict between the General Conditions and these Supplementary Conditions, wording of this Section shall govern. ARTICLE 1 1. Subparagraph 1.1.3—third line -after the word "construction," delete the remaining words and insert the following: "and all supplies, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities, services, and incidentals necessary for the proper execution and completion of such construction; except as expressly noted in the Scope of Work or the General Requirements of the Contract." 2. Subparagraph 1.2.1—delete in its entirety. 3. Add new subparagraph 1.2.5 as follows: "Where on any of the drawings a portion of the Work is drawn out and the remainder is indicated in outline, the parts drawn out shall also apply to all other like portions of the Work." 4. Add new subparagraph 1.3.2 as follows: "Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, all copies of Drawings and Specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work." ARTICLE 2 Subparagraph 2.2.1—after the word "representative", add: "The term Construction Manager means the Construction Manager acting through his authorized representative." 2. Subparagraph 2.3.4—first sentence after the word "Architect," add "along with the Construction Manager." 3. Subparagraph 2.3.7—delete in its entirety. SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800 - 1 4. Subparagraph 2.3.15—delete in its entirety. 5. Subparagraph 2.3.18—delete the word "reasonable" in the sixth (6th) line. After the word "promptness", add "consistent with the constraints of the project schedule so as to cause no delay." 6. Subparagraph 2.3.21—first line —delete the words "The Construction Manager will assist the Architect", and substitute, "The Architect will assist the Construction Manager." 7. Subparagraph 2.3.23—delete the phrase "against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objection and." Also, delete the last sentence in the subparagraph in its entirety. ARTICLE 3 1. Subparagraph 3.2.1—delete in its entirety. 2. Subparagraph 3.3.1--delete from the last sentence the phrase, "..., except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3". 3. Subparagraph 3.4. 1 —substitute three (3) days notice in each case for the seven (7) day notices stipulated. Add at end of subparagraph the following: "In the event of clean-up issues, Owner has right to provide a minimum of 24 hours notice. In the event of safety issues determined to be of a serious nature, as determined by the Construction Manager, notice will given, and contractor is required to rectify deficiency immediately." ARTICLE 4 1. Add new subparagraph 4.4.3 as follows: "The Contractor is responsible for the conduct of his employees at all times. Misconduct, destruction of property, unsafe practices, or violation of any Federal or State regulations including abuse of alcohol or drugs, will be cause for permanent dismissal from the project. If any Contractor employee is determined to be detrimental to the Project, as deemed by the Construction Manager, the Contractor will remove and/or replace the employee at the request of the Construction Manager. Employees dismissed from the project will be transported from the jobsite at the Contractor's expense." 2. Add new subparagraph 4.4.4 as follows: "The Contractor shall be totally responsible for the security of his work, materials, equipment, supplies, tools, machinery, and construction equipment." 3. Add new subparagraph 4.4.5 as follows: SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800 - 2 "The Contractor shall be responsible for complete, timely and accurate field measurements as necessary for proper coordination, fabrication and installation of his materials and equipment. The Contractor agrees to cooperate with the Construction Manager, if required, to accommodate any discovered variations or deviations from the Drawings and Specifications so that the progress of the Work is not adversely affected." 4. Subparagraph 4.7.1—delete in its entirety and replace with: "The Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, impact fees, governmental fees, licenses, inspections and surveys required by Federal, State, or Municipal bodies having jurisdiction over the project for the proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required at the time bids are received. The Owner will not assess any County building permit or County impact fees. The Contractor will be responsible for any other building permit costs or impact fees required for this project. The Contractor shall secure and pay for all building and specialty permits including plumbing, electrical, HVAC, etc." 5. Subparagraph 4.8—delete in its entirety. 6. Subparagraph 4.9.1—add the following sentence: "The superintendent shall be satisfactory to the Construction Manager and shall not be changed except with the consent of the Construction Manager, unless the superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor or ceases to be in his employ." 7. Subparagraph 4.10.1—add the following sentence: "This schedule, to be submitted within seven (7) days after Contract Award, shall indicate the dates for the starting and completion of the various stages of construction, shall be revised as required by the conditions of the Work, and shall be subject to the Construction Manager's approval." 8. Add new subparagraph 4.10.2: "The Construction Manager will conduct a weekly scheduling meeting which the Contractor shall attend. At this meeting, the parties can discuss jointly such matters as progress, scheduling, and problems." 9. Add new subparagraph 4.12.9: "If materials specified in the Contract Documents are not available on the present market, the Contractor may submit data on substitute materials through the Architect to the Construction Manager for approval by the Owner." 10. Subparagraph 4.14.1—add at line 3 after "properly": "He shall also provide protection of existing work as required." SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800 - 3 11. Subparagraph 4.14.2—at end of paragraph, add: When structural members are involved, the written consent of the Architect/Engineer shall also be required. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Construction Manager or any separate contractor his consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work." 12. Add new subparagraph 4.14.3: "The Contractor shall arrange for any blockouts, cutouts, or opening required for the installation of his materials and equipment and the execution of his work, whether or not shown or indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall be further responsible for sealing and/or finishing, in an acceptable fashion and meeting any applicable code requirements, any such block -out, cutout opening, or other hole in any fire -rated floor, ceiling, wall, security wall, or any other finished surface". 13. Subparagraph 4.15.1—at end of paragraph, add: "Clean up shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Owner or Construction Manager." 14. Add new subparagraph 4.16.2: -- "The Contractor shall promptly return telephone calls or respond to any other form of communication initiated by the Construction Manager. Failure to promptly do so shall be considered a lack of performance on the part of the Contractor, and may be considered grounds for replacement of site personnel." 15. Add new Subparagraph 4.16.3: "All written correspondence to the Construction Manager shall be serialized, dated, and signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor. The correspondence shall be directed to: Mr. Stephen W. Piazza, NCARB, AIA Monroe County Construction Manager 5100 College Road Key West, Florida 33040 or hand delivered to the Construction Manager's office. 16. Subparagraph 4.18—delete in its entirety and insert "Indemnification and Hold Harmless" and the following: "The Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Monroe County and Monroe County Board of County Commissioners from any and all claims for bodily injury (including death), personal injury, and property damage (including property owned by Monroe County) and any other losses, damages, and expenses (including attorney's fees) which arise out of, in connection with, or by reason of services provided by the SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800 - 4 -� Contractor or any of its subcontractors in any tier, occasioned by the negligence or other wrongful act or omission of the Contractor or its subcontractors in any tier, their employees, or agents. The first ten dollars ($10.00) of remuneration paid to the Contractor is for the indemnification provided for the above. The extent of liability is in no way limited to, reduced, or lessened by the insurance requirements contained elsewhere within this agreement." ARTICLE 5 1. Subparagraph 5.2.3—delete in its entirety and insert the following: If the Owner or Construction Manager refuses to accept any person or entity on a list submitted by the Contractor in response to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall submit an acceptable substitute; however, no increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for any such substitution." ARTICLE 6 1. Subparagraph 6.1.1—delete the last sentence. 2. Subparagraph 6.1.3—delete in its entirety, and insert the following: "It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate his work with the work of other contractors on the site. The Owner and Construction Manager shall be held harmless of any and all costs associated with improper coordination." 3. Subparagraph 6.2.5—sixth (6th) line, after the word "initiates," delete the words "an arbitration proceeding" and substitute "a claim;" tenth line, delete the words "at the Owner's expense, and"; thirteenth line, after the words "and court or," delete the word "arbitration" and substitute "claim." 4. Add new subparagraph 6.2.6: "Should the Contractor contend that he is entitled to an extension of time for completion of any portion or portions of the work, he shall, within (72) hours of the occurrence of the cause of the delay, notify the Construction Manager in writing, of his contention: setting forth (A) the cause for the delay, (B) a description of the portion or portions of work affected thereby, and (C) all details pertinent thereto. A subsequent written application for the specific number of days of extension of time requested shall be made by the Contractor to the Construction Manager with (72) hours after the delay has ceased to exist. It is a condition precedent to the consideration or prosecution of any claim for an extension of time that the foregoing provisions be strictly adhered to in each instance and, if the Contractor fails to comply, he shall be deemed to have waived the claim. SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800 - 5 The Contractor agrees that whether or not any delay, regardless of cause, shall be the basis for an extension of time he shall have no claim against the Owner or Construction Manager for an increase in the contract price, nor a claim against the Owner or Construction Manger for a payment or allowance of any kind for damage, loss or expense resulting from delays: nor shall the Contractor have any claim for damage, loss or expense resulting from interruptions to, or suspension of, his work to enable other contractors to perform their work. The only remedy available to the Contractor shall be an extension of time." ARTICLE 7 1. Subparagraph 7.1.1—delete in its entirety and insert the following: "The contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Florida. Venue for any claims or disputes arising under this contract shall be in the Circuit Court of the 16th Judicial Circuit of the State of Florida." 2. Subparagraph 7.2.1—delete in its entirety and insert the following: "The Owner or Construction Manager (as the case may be) and the Contractor each binds himself, his partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives of such other party in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole without the written consent of the other." 3. Add new Subparagraph 7.2.2: "The Contractor shall not assign any monies due or to become due under this Contract without prior written consent of the Owner or Construction Manager." 4. Paragraph 7.5—delete in its entirety and insert: "The Owner shall require the Contractor to furnish a Public Construction Bond in accordance with paragraph 11.1.9." 5. Subparagraph 7.8.1—delete in its entirety. 6. Paragraph 7.9 'Arbitration' and all associated subparagraphs 7.9.1, 7.9.2, & 7.9.3— delete in their entirety. ARTICLE 8 1. Add new Subparagraph 8.1.6: "The Owner/Construction Manager shall be the final judge as to whether substantial completion has been achieved and certifies the date to the Contractor and Architect." SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800 - 6 -' 2. Subparagraph 8.3.1—delete in its entirety and insert the following: "If the Contractor is delayed, at any time, in the progress of the Work by any act or neglect of the Owner, Construction Manager, or the Architect/Engineer, or by any employee of either, or by any separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by fire, unusual delay in transportation, adverse weather conditions not reasonably anticipatable, unavoidable casualties or any causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay authorized by the Owner, Construction Manager, or by any other cause which the Construction Manager determines may justify the delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by no cost Change Order for such reasonable time as the Construction Manager may determine, in accordance with subparagraph 6.2.6." 3. Subparagraph 8.3.2—delete in its entirety and insert: "Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Construction Manager not more than seventy-two (72) hours after the commencement of the delay in accordance with paragraph 6.2.6; otherwise it shall be waived. Any claim for extension of time shall state the cause of the delay and the number of days of extension requested. If the cause of the delay is continuing, only one claim is necessary, but the Contractor shall report the termination of the cause for the delay within seventy-two (72) hours after such termination in accordance with paragraph 6.2.6; otherwise, any claim for extension of time based upon that cause shall be waived." 4. Subparagraph 8.3.4—delete in its entirety and insert the following: "No claim for an increase in the Contract Sum for either acceleration or delay will be allowed for extensions of time pursuant to this Paragraph 8.3 or for other changes in the Construction Schedules." 5. Add new subparagraph 8.3.5: If the Project is delayed as a result of the Contractor's refusal or failure to begin the Work on the date of commencement as defined in paragraph 8.1.2, or his refusal or failure to carry the Work forward expeditiously with adequate forces, the Contractor causing the delay shall be liable, but not limited to, delay claims from other Contractors which are affected." ARTICLE 9 1. Subparagraph 9.3.3—add at line 14 after the word "person": All Subcontractors and Sub -subcontractors shall execute an agreement stating that title will so pass, upon their receipt of payment from the Contractor." 2. Subparagraph 9.5.1—add: From the total of the amount determined to be payable on a progress payment, 10 percent of such total amount will be deducted and retained by the Owner until final SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800 - 7 payment is made. The balance (90 percent) of the amount payable, less all previous payments, shall be certified for payment. It is understood and agreed that the Contractor shall not be entitled to demand or receive progress payment based on quantities of work in excess of those provided in the proposal or covered by approved change orders, except when such excess quantities have been determined by the Construction Manager to be a part of the final quantity for the item of work in question. No progress payment shall bind the Owner to the acceptance of any materials or work in place, as to quality or quantity. All progress payments are subject to correction at the time of final payments. 3. Add new subparagraph 9.5.6: "All material and work covered by partial payments made shall thereupon become the sole property of the Owner, and by this provision shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from the sole responsibility for the materials and work upon which payments ^- have been made or the restoration for any damaged material, or as a waiver to the right of the Owner or Construction Manager to require the fulfillment of all the terms of the Contract." 4. Add new subparagraph 9.5.7: "Except in case of bona fide disputes, or where the Contractor has some other justifiable reason for delay, the Contractor shall pay for all transportation and utility services not later than the end of the calendar month following that in which services are rendered and for all materials, tools, and other expendable equipment which are delivered at the site of the Project. The Contractor shall pay, to each of his Subcontractors, not later than the end of the calendar month in which each payment is made to the Contractor, the representative amount allowed the Contractor on account of the work performed by his Subcontractor interest therein. The Contractor shall, by an appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, also require each Subcontractor to make payments to his suppliers and Sub -subcontractors in a similar manner." 5. Subparagraph 9.6.1—delete in its entirety and insert the following: "The Construction Manager/Architect may decline to approve an Application for Payment if, in his opinion, the application is not adequately supported. If the Contractor _ and Construction Manager cannot agree on a revised amount, the Construction Manager shall process the Application for the amount he deems appropriate. The Construction Manager may also decline to approve any Applications for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent inspections, he may nullify, in whole or part, any approval previously made to such extent as may be necessary in his opinion because of: (1) defective work not remedied; (2) third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims; (3) failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials, or equipment; (4) reasonable evidence that the work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; (5) damage to the Construction Manager, the Owner, or SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800 - 8 another contractor working at the project; (6) reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the contract time; (7) persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.6.1.1 No payment shall be made to the Contractor until certificates of insurance or other evidence of compliance by the Contractor, within all the requirements of Article 11, have been filed with the Owner and Construction Manager. Further, no payments on the basis of work performed by a Subcontractor shall be paid until copies of all bonds required by Paragraph 7.5 and any certificates of insurance required of the Subcontractors under Article 11 have been filed with the Owner." 6. Paragraph 9.7—delete in its entirety. 7. Add paragraph 9.10: Any requirement of this Article 9 that the Contractor furnish proof to the Owner, Architect or Construction Manager that the subcontractors and materialmen have been paid is for the protection and convenience of the Owner only. Unpaid subcontractors and materialmen may only seek payment from the Contractor and the surety that provided the Contractor's Public Construction Bond. The Contractor must insert this paragraph 9.10.in all its contracts with subcontractors and materialmen." ARTICLE 10 1. Paragraph 10.2.5—second line —delete "(other than damage or loss insured under Paragraph 11.3)". ARTICLE 11 Delete Article 11 in its entirety and insert Article 11; "Insurance and Bonds" and the following subparagraphs: Prior to commencement of work governed by this contract (including the pre -staging of personnel and material), the Contractor shall obtain, at their own expense, insurance as specified in the attached schedules, which are made part of this Agreement. The Contractor will ensure that the insurance obtained will extend protection to all subcontractors engaged by the Contractor. As an alternative the Contractor may require all subcontractors to obtain insurance consistent with the attached schedules. The Contractor will not be permitted to commence work governed by the Agreement (including pre -staging of personnel and material) until satisfactory evidence of the required insurance has been furnished to the County as specified below. Delays in the commencement of work resulting from the failure of the Contractor to provide satisfactory evidence of the required insurance shall not extend deadlines specified in this Agreement and any penalties and failure to perform assessments shall be imposed as if the work commenced on the specified date and time, except for the Contractor's failure to provide satisfactory evidence. SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800 - 9 The Contractor shall maintain the required insurance throughout the entire term of this contract and any extensions specified in any attached schedules. Failure to comply with this provision may result in the immediate suspension of all work until the required insurance has been reinstated or replaced. Delays in the completion of work resulting from the failure of the Contractor to maintain the required insurance shall not extend deadlines specified in this Agreement and any penalties and failure to perform assessments shall be imposed as if the work commenced on the specified date and time, except for the Contractor's failure to provide satisfactory evidence. The Contractor shall provide, to the County in care of the Construction Manager, as satisfactory evidence of the required insurance, either: m Certificate of Insurance or m A certified copy of the actual insurance policy The County, at its sole option, has the right to request a certified copy of any or all insurance policies required by this Contract. All insurance policies must specify that they are not subject to cancellation, non -renewal, material change, or reduction in coverage unless a minimum of thirty (30) days prior notification is given to the County by the insurer. The acceptance and/or approval of the Contractor's insurance shall not be construed as -- relieving the Contractor from any liability or obligation assumed under this contract or imposed by law. The Monroe County Board of County Commissioners, it's employees and officials will be included as "Additional Insured" on all policies, except for Worker's Compensation. In addition, the County will be named as an additional insured and loss payee on all policies covering County -owned property. Any deviations from these General Insurance Requirements must be requested in writing on the County prepared form entitled "Request for Waiver of Insurance Requirements" and approved by the Monroe County's Risk Manager. 11.1.8 Throughout the term of the contract, the Contractor shall purchase and maintain Builder's Risk Insurance on an All Risk Loss Form. Coverage shall include: Theft, ^ Windstorm, Hail, Explosion, Riot, Civil Commotion, Aircraft, Vehicles, Smoke, Fire, Collapse and Floods. The policy limits shall be no less than the amount of the finished project and coverage shall be provided on a completed value basis. The completed value is defined as all material, labor, supplies, and equipment intended to be incorporated in and to become a permanent part of the completed facility. The facility as defined for this paragraph includes structures as defined in the contract drawings and _ specifications. Property located on the construction premises, which is intended to become a permanent part of the building, shall be included as property covered. The policy shall be endorsed permitting the County to occupy the building prior to completion without effecting the coverage. SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800 - 10 11.1.9 Public Construction Bond The Owner shall require the Contractor to furnish a Public Construction Bond in the form provided by the Owner in this section as a guarantee for the faithful performance of the Contract (including guarantee and maintenance provisions) and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder. The Public Construction Bond shall be in an amount at least equal to the contract price. This contract is subject to the provisions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, which are incorporated herein. ARTICLE 12 1. Subparagraph 12.1.2—Add to end of paragraph, "The Architect will prepare each Change Order in the format of the AIA Document G701/CM." 2. Subparagraph 12.1.3—under item .1, add the following at the end of the sentence, ", as set forth in subparagraph 12.1.6" 3. Subparagraph 12.1.4—delete in its entirety and insert the following: "If none of the methods set forth in Clauses 12.1.3.1, 12.1.3.2 or 12.1.3.3 is agreed upon, the Contractor, provided a written order signed by the Owner or Construction Manager is received, shall promptly proceed with the Work involved. The cost of such work shall then be determined by daily force accounts in a form acceptable to the Owner and Construction Manager. The daily force account forms shall identify contractor and/or subcontractor personnel by name, total hours for each man, each piece of equipment and total hours for equipment and all material(s) by type for each extra work activity claim. Each daily force account form shall be signed by the designated Construction Manager's representative no later than the close of business on the day the work is performed to verify the items and hours listed. Extended pricing of these forms shall be submitted to the Construction Manager with all supporting documentation required by the Construction Manager for inclusion into a change order. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, cost shall be limited to the following: cost of materials, including sales tax and cost of delivery; cost of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, and fringe benefits required by agreement or custom; workers' or workmen's compensation insurance; and the rental value of equipment and machinery. Mark-ups for overhead and profit will be in accordance with subparagraph 12.1.6. Pending final determination of cost, payments on account shall be made as determined by the Construction Manager. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor for any deletion or change, which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum, will be the amount of the actual net cost as confirmed by the Construction Manager. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in any one change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of the net increase, if any, with respect to that change." 4. Add new subparagraph 12.1.6: "The actual cost of Changes in the Work may include all items of labor or material, power tools, and equipment actually used, utilities, pro rata charges for foreman, and all SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800 - 11 payroll charges such as Public Liability and Workmen's Compensation Insurance. No percentage for overhead and profit shall be allowed on items of Social Security and Sales Tax. If deductions are ordered, the credit shall be the net cost. Items considered as overhead shall include insurance other than that mentioned above, bond or bonds, superintendent, timekeeper, clerks, watchmen, use of small tools, miscellaneous supplies, incidental job costs, warranties, and all general home/field office expenses. The actual cost of Changes in the Work (other than those covered by unit prices set forth in the Contract Documents) shall be computed as follows: 12.1.6.1 If the Contractor performs the actual Work, the maximum percentage mark-up for overhead shall be five percent (5%) and the maximum percentage for profit shall be five percent (5%). 12.1.6.2 If the Subcontractor performs the actual Work, the percentage mark-up for overhead and profit shall be a maximum addition of ten percent (10%). If the Contractor does not enter into the Work, the maximum mark up for managing this work will be five percent (5%). 12.1.6.3 If the Subcontractor performs part of the actual work, his percentage mark-up for overhead and profit shall be a maximum addition of ten percent (10%) on his direct work only. If the Contractor performs part of the actual work, his percentage mark-up for overhead and profit shall be a maximum addition of ten percent (10%) on his direct work only. 5. Add new subparagraph 12.1.7: "The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner through the Construction Manager, an itemized breakdown of the quantities and prices used in computing the value of any change that might be ordered. Any additional supporting documentation requested by the Construction Manager such as certified quotations or invoices shall be provided by the Contractor to the Construction Manager at no additional cost to the Owner." 6. Subparagraph 12.3.1—delete in its entirety and insert the following: "If the Contractor claims that any instructions given to him by the Construction Manager, by drawings or otherwise, involve extra work not covered by the Contract, he shall give the Construction Manager written notice thereof within five (5) days after the receipt of such instructions and before proceeding to execute the work, except in emergencies endangering life or property, in which case the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with Paragraph 10.3. The written notice to the Construction Manager for the extra work shall include a complete description of the extra work, the total cost and a detailed cost breakdown by labor, material and equipment for each additional activity required to be performed. Mark-ups shall be limited as specified elsewhere in this Article. Except as otherwise specifically provided, no claim for additional cost shall be allowed unless the complete notice specified by this subparagraph is given by the Contractor." SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800 - 12 - 7. Subparagraph 12.3.2—change the word 'agent' in the seventh (7th) line, to 'representative', and revise the remainder of the paragraph to read: "or (3) any written order for a minor change in the Work issued pursuant to Paragraph 12.4, the Contractor shall make such claim as provided in Subparagraph 12.3.1." 8. Add new subparagraph 12.3.3: "Unless otherwise agreed in writing, the Contractor shall carry on the Work and maintain its progress during any dispute or claim proceeding, and Owner shall continue to make payments to the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. Disputes unresolved shall be settled in accordance with subparagraph 7.1.1. The Contractor shall maintain completed daily force account forms in accordance with subparagraph 12.1.4 for any dispute or claim item." ARTICLE 14 1. Subparagraph 14.1.1—starting at the eighth (8th) line, delete the phrase, "..., or if the Work should be stopped for a period of thirty (30) days by the CONTRACTOR because of the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S failure to recommend or the ARCHITECT'S failure to issue a Project Certificate for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.7 or because the OWNER has not made payment thereon as provided in Paragraph 9.7". 2. Subparagraph 14.1.1—add to the last sentence: "excluding home office overhead." 3. Subparagraph 14.2.1—change the words 'seven days' in the 13th and 18th line, to '72 hours'. ******END OF SECTION 00800****** SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800 - 13 SECTION 00970 PROJECT SAFETY AND HEALTH PLAN 1.1 REGULATIONS AND POLICIES A. Every Contractor and Subcontractor employed on the Project shall comply with all applicable local, State, and Federal safety and health regulations and with Monroe County safety and health policies as described herein. 1.2 PROJECT SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUIREMENTS A. It is recognized that it is good business and evidence of competent leadership to prevent the occurrence of incidents that lead to occupational injuries or illnesses. Safety and health requirements on this project include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. In general, this accident prevention policy is based on a sincere desire to eliminate personal injuries, occupational illnesses, and equipment and property damage; and to protect the general public exposed to or associated with the work. 2. The importance of the safety of all workers on the project shall be recognized and accident prevention shall be an integral part of all operations. 3. Each Contractor and Subcontractor shall conduct work in a safe and practical manner in conformance with the OSHA Safety and Health Regulations and the latest edition of the Manual of Accident Prevention, Associated General Contractors of America. 4. Each Contractor and Subcontractor shall observe all applicable Federal, State, local and project laws and regulations pertaining to safety and health, pollution control, water supply, fire protection, sanitation facilities, waste disposal and other related items. 5. The Mandatory Safety and Health Rules shall be posted in a conspicuous location along with the OSHA and Emergency Phone Number posters. 6. A record of all occupational injuries and illnesses shall be maintained. Medical and lost time cases shall be properly recorded on the OSHA log, and reported to Monroe County. A copy of the insurance report for workmen compensation cases shall be provided to Monroe County. 7. Each Contractor and Subcontractor shall provide or arrange for adequate first aid facilities, emergency transportation and persons qualified in first aid. PROJECT SAFETY & HEALTH PLAN 00970 - 1 8. Each Contractor and Subcontractor shall cooperate fully with all other contractors in their respective safety and health programs. 9. Good housekeeping shall be observed at all times. Waste, debris, and garbage shall be removed daily or placed in appropriate waste containers. All materials, tools, and equipment shall be stored in a safe and orderly fashion. Each contractor shall donate 10% of their staff to a crew that will convene every Friday at 1:00 pm for a joint site clean-up effort not to exceed a duration of three hours. In summary, there will be a three-part clean-up plan. The first part consists of the contractor cleaning up on a daily basis, his workstations, and his trade work. The second part consists of the general clean-up, the concerted effort by all trade contractors working on the project. A minimum of one (1) crew is to be utilized by each contractor, or 10%, whichever is more. The third part consists of the Owner cleaning up for a particular trade contractor should adequate notice not compel him to clean up his work. In this case, the appropriate contractors will be backcharged. 10. This project shall be a Hard Hat job and all supervisors, employees and visitors shall be required to wear a suitable hard hat while on the project site. 11. Other appropriate personal protective equipment shall be provided and worn as required including but not limited to long pants, shirts with sleeves and appropriate leather work boots. 12. Temporary construction aids such as ladders, scaffolds, stairs, railings, etc., shall be provided to facilitate access or working conditions in a manner that shall conform to the safety standards specified by Federal, State, Local or manufacturer's recommendations or stipulations. 13. Each Contractor and Subcontractor shall be expected to indoctrinate his employees as to the safety and health requirements of this project and to enforce adherence to safe work procedures. 14. If Monroe County notifies any Contractor of any noncompliance with the provisions of this program, the Contractor shall make all reasonable efforts to immediately correct the unsafe conditions or acts. Satisfactory corrective action shall be taken within the specified time. If the Contractor or Subcontractor refuses to correct unsafe or unhealthy conditions or acts, Monroe County shall take one or more of the following steps: a. Cease the operation or a portion thereof. b. Stop payment for the work being performed. PROJECT SAFETY & HEALTH PLAN 00970 - 2 - C. Correct the situation using other forces and back charge the Contractor expenses incurred. d. Increase withholding in proportional increments for that given pay period. 15. All Contractor's Superintendents shall be required to attend and participate in all general project safety meetings. These meetings will be included in the weekly coordination meetings as previously specified or on an as needed basis. 16. All Contractors shall conduct Weekly Tool Box Safety Training Meetings, and shall document the minutes on the forms provided. These forms are to be transmitted to Monroe County on a weekly basis. All employees working at the project site shall be required to attend and participate in the meetings. 17. Shortly after the award of the contract and prior to the beginning of work, an Activity Hazard Analysis (phase plan) shall be prepared by the contractor and submitted to Monroe County for approval. The analysis Will address the hazards for each activity to be performed in that phase and will present the procedures and safeguards necessary to eliminate the hazards or reduce the risk to an acceptable level. A phase is defined as an operation involving a type of work presenting hazards not experienced in previous operations or where a new subcontractor or work crew is to perform work. The analysis will be discussed by the contractor and Monroe County on -site representatives at the Preparatory Inspection Meeting. Work will not proceed on that phase until the Activity Hazard Analysis (phase plan) has been accepted by Monroe County. 18. No personal radios or stereos will be allowed on the job -site. 1.3 FIRE PROTECTION A. Every Contractor and Subcontractor employed on the Project shall exercise good construction practices to prevent fire. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to insure that general fire protection facilities are adequate for his work and to provide additional fire protection facilities and devices, including fire extinguishers as required by their scope of work. 1.4 WORK NEAR ENERGIZED ELECTRICAL LINES OR OTHER UTILITIES A. It shall be the Contractor's sole and exclusive responsibility (a) to provide personnel capable of working adjacent to energized electrical lines or other utilities; (b) to provide adequate, safe and properly maintained equipment; (c) to conduct all of his work in accordance with the safety rules and regulations prescribed by the National Electric Code, National Electric Safety Code, H30, and Safety Rules for Installation and Maintenance of Electrical Supply and PROJECT SAFETY & HEALTH PLAN 00970 - 3 Communication Lines Hand Book 81, Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, as well as other safety codes in effect at the site of construction and as specified elsewhere herein, or as are generally applicable to the type of work being performed; and (d) to continuously supervise and inspect the work being - performed to assure that the requirements of (a), (b), and (c) above are complied with, and nothing in these Contract Documents shall be held to mean that any such responsibility is the obligation of the Owner or the Architect or the - Construction Manager. 1.5 BARRICADES, WARNING DEVICES AND LIGHTING A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing temporary ladders, guard rails, warning signs, barricades, night guard lights, and deck or floor closures required in connection with his work to comply with Federal, State and local safety requirements. The Contractor shall be solely and exclusively responsible for the design, construction, inspection and maintenance of such facilities at all times. B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide additional temporary lighting, if needed to maintain safe conditions. C. It shall be the sole and exclusive responsibility of the Contractor to provide a safe _ place to -work for all laborers and mechanics and other persons employed on or in connection with the project, and nothing in these Contract Documents shall be construed to give any of such responsibility to the Owner, the Architect, or the _ Construction Manager. END OF SECTION 00970 PROJECT SAFETY & HEALTH PLAN 00970 - 4 SECTION 00980 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PLAN 1.1 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT'S DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Construction Management Superintendent will monitor all work performed by the Contractor and assist the Contractor with his conformance of the work to the Contract Drawings and Specifications. 1.2 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor is responsible for the quality of the work performed by his work force on this project as well as the quality of the material, equipment and supplies furnished by him to be incorporated into the work. B. The Contractor will designate a Quality Control Representative who will be on site at all times while the respective Contractor's work is in progress and will have the authority and responsibility to accept or reject items of work. The Contractor's Quality Control Representative may delegate his duties but the primary responsibility and authority will rest on him. C. The Contractor's Quality Control Representative will coordinate the submittal of all shop drawings, product data and samples to the Architect/Engineer. Any submittal that is at variance to the contract requirements must be identified as such and transmitted to the Construction Manager for submittal and approval by the Architect/Engineer or Owner. No work requiring submittal of a shop drawing, product data or sample shall commence until the submittal has been reviewed and approved by the Architect/Engineer. D. The Contractor will bear the responsibility of scheduling all required testing and inspections by the designated material -testing laboratory, in a timely fashion, to prevent needless cancellations and delays of work activities. Any costs caused by untimely notification shall be borne by the Contractor. E. The Contractor's Quality Control Representative will review his drawings, procurement documents and contracts to insure that the technical information provided and all work performed is in accordance with the latest revisions of the Contract Drawings and Specifications. F. The Contractor's Quality Control Representative will perform an inspection upon receipt at the site of the work of all materials, equipment and supplies including those furnished to him by the Owner. Notes from this inspection will be filled out on the appropriate form and included with the Contractor Daily Quality Control Report. Items which are damaged or not in conformance with the respective submittals, quality standards, contract drawings and specifications shall be brought to the attention of Monroe County representative on site and then will be CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PLAN 00980 - 1 1.3 identified and segregated from accepted items. Items thus identified will not be incorporated into the work until corrective action acceptable to Construction Management is completed. Items determined unsalvageable will be removed from the job site. These items shall be noted as deficient in the applicable section of the Contractor Daily Quality Control Report. INSPECTION AND TESTING A. INSPECTION PLAN Construction Management utilizes a multi -point inspection plan for each separate feature of work to be performed under this Contract, i.e., work described by each division of the technical provision section of the contract specifications. This plan consists of the following: Preparatory Inspection —Prior to commencing the work, the Contractor's Quality Control Representative will meet with the Construction Management Superintendent and the Architect's representative if he so desires to attend and check the following items at a minimum for conformance: (a) Approval of shop drawings and submittals. (b) Approval of inspection and test reports of materials and equipment to be utilized. (c) Completion of previous operations of preliminary work. (d) Availability of materials and equipment required. (e) Potential utility outages. (f) Any other preparatory steps dependent upon the particular operation. (g) Quality standards. (h) Safety or environmental precautions to be observed. (Phase Hazard) Note: Construction Management will record the minutes to this inspection meeting and distribute accordingly. 2. Initial Inspection —Upon completion of a representative sample of a given feature of the work, the Contractor's Quality Control Representative will meet with the Construction Management Superintendent and the Architect's representative if he so desires to attend and check the following items at a minimum for conformance: (a) Workmanship to established quality standards. (b) Configuration to contract drawings and specifications. (c) Construction methods, equipment and tools utilized. (d) Materials and articles utilized. (e) Adequacy of testing methods. (f) Adequacy of shop drawings. (g) Adequacy of safety or environmental precautions. CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PLAN 00980 - 2 Note: Construction Management will record the minutes to this inspection meeting and distribute accordingly. 3. Follow-up Inspections —The Contractor's Quality Control Representative will inspect the work daily to assure the continuing conformance of the work to the workmanship standards established during the preparatory and initial inspections. Additionally, as a part of the follow-up inspection, sign -off sheets will be utilized as often as possible. The intent of these sheets is to achieve concurrence from other trade contractors and responsible parties that ensuing work can indeed commence over underlying work. This will prevent oversights and omissions which could elevate costs. Sign -off sheets shall be used for, but not be limited to, concrete, drywall, ceilings, painting, roofing substrates and flooring. These reports are to be generated by the Contractor and submitted to the Construction Management Superintendent for approval prior to the start-up of work. Failure to generate a sign -off sheet or to attain proper signatures prior to covering up underlying work may affect payment for that piece of work if ensuing problems are detected or not. This disciplinary action shall be carried out via the Nonconformance Report. (See Section 1.4.13 of this plan.) Note: The Contractor shall be responsible to record these inspections and all other project related activities encountered throughout the day on the Contractor Daily Quality Control Report. 4. Completion Inspections —Upon completion of a given feature of the work, the Contractor's Quality Control Representative will meet with the Construction Management Superintendent, if he so desires to attend, to perform an inspection of the completed work. Nonconforming items will be identified and corrected prior to commencement of the next operation. Note: The Contractor shall conduct and report corrections of this inspection which shall be a required submittal. 5. Follow -On Inspections —Upon execution of the contractor's completion inspection in elements of the work which result in concealment; such as, ceiling and drywall installations, the Contractor shall schedule and conduct multi -trade or singular inspections prior to covering installation. Note: Construction Management will record the minutes to this inspection meeting. 6. Pre -Final Inspection —Upon substantial completion of the project work Construction Management shall coordinate and conduct a universal inspection of all areas and elements of the work. The Architect/Engineer CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PLAN 00980 - 3 may be represented if he so desires. This inspection shall be completed at least (15) days prior to the final substantial completion inspection which shall be conducted by the Arch itect/Engineer. All deficiencies and incomplete work should be completed prior to the final substantial completion inspection. B. OPERATION AND CHECK OUT TESTING The Contractor will provide personnel and equipment to perform the operational tests and check-out of the equipment, facilities or equipment constructed, fabricated or installed under this Contract. The Construction Management Superintendent will coordinate and witness all such tests. Notification should be given at least ten (10) days in advance of the scheduled tests. C. FINAL INSPECTION Construction Management will coordinate and attend all final inspections of the work by the Architect/Engineer. Prior to requesting a final inspection, all tests for the equipment and systems must be completed. See Section 01700 for contract closeout. 1.4 REPORTING Maintaining accurate and retrievable records is extremely important in the Quality Assurance Program. These records will act as a main source of information in the present and in the future for the entire project management team. The main report that _ will be utilized to provide this information is the Daily Quality Control Report. Nonconformance Reports may also be issued. A. DAILY QUALITY CONTROL REPORT The Daily Quality Control Report shall be used to document the summary of daily inspection activities performed by the Contractor's designated Quality Control Representative. It shall include any of the steps of inspection that are performed that day, all test monitoring and any rework of nonconforming items. The daily Quality Control Report section of the Daily Superintendent's Report will be routinely used for daily reporting requirements. When the magnitude or complexity necessitates such, a more separate and comprehensive form will be used. Reference Contractor's Daily Report, and as needed Contractor Daily Quality Control Report, Section 01385. B. NONCONFORMANCE REPORT Nonconformance Reports will be issued for work that is found to be in nonconformance with the contract documents or the referenced quality standards. The report will be issued by Construction Management. CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PLAN 00980 - 4 It is not the intent to routinely and repeatedly issue nonconformance reports, but to issue them only after normal enforcement standards have been exhausted, or if the work performed is a detriment to the project. A copy of the Nonconformance Report will be forwarded to the Site Project Manager for his information and/or action. It should also be included in the Contractor's Daily Quality Report package for general review. Nonconformance Reports will be signed off once the deficient item or items have adequately been corrected. This will be done by the issuing Superintendent and Project Manager. These sign -offs will be included with a corresponding corrective action taken. Significant nonconformances need to be addressed to prevent recurrence. The signed -off report will also be submitted for review. Work activities affected by a Nonconformance Report will proportionally counter - affect payments. Whether that be partial or full retainage will be left up to the discretion of Construction Management. 1.5 AUDITS A. Construction Management may choose at its option to perform Contractor audits of their .Contractor Quality Control Plan at any time. Reports of these audit results will be forwarded to the Project Manager for his action. Any action items noted during an audit for the Contractor will be followed up and documented to insure compliance and avoid recurrence. 1.6 SUMMARY The intention of this plan is to create a system of checks and balances that will minimize delays caused by rework and a lack of planning and maximize production and insure that the finished product is one that the entire construction team can pride themselves in. These goals can be achieved by giving the Owner exactly what he has bought. The Owner will expect no more and through Quality Assurance, the construction team will provide no less. END OF SECTION 00980 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PLAN 00980 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. The Project consists of a Generator Room, addition, renovations, and alterations to the Gato Cigar Factory into offices for Monroe County at the corner of Simonton and Virginia Streets in Key West, Florida, as shown on Contract Documents prepared by Bender & Associates, Architects, and dated June 1, 1999. 1. The Work includes concrete, concrete repairs ,sheet metal, hollow metal doors, and solid core wood doors with aluminum and steel frames and transoms, rehabilitation of the existing exterior steel windows, and construction of replacement window units that are missing, hardware, glazing, interior finishes and furnishings, plumbing, heating -ventilating -air conditioning, electrical systems, lighting, and communication -alarm -signal systems. 2. Coordinate with a separate contractor constructing interior build - out for the Florida Department of Health concurrently with this contract. 3. Protection of Historic Fabric during all construction activities will be required. 1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. General: During the construction period the Contractor shall have full use of the premises for construction operations, including use of the site. The Contractor's use of the premises is limited only by the Owner's right to perform construction operations with its own forces or to employ separate contractors on portions of the project. B. Use of the Existing Building: Maintain the existing building in a weathertight condition throughout the construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Take all precautions necessary to protect the building during the construction period. 1.4 OWNER -FURNISHED ITEMS A. The Owner will provide furniture for office areas. SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. The Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner -furnished _ items in accordance with the Contractor's Construction Schedule, and will inspect deliveries for damage. 2. If Owner -furnished items are damaged, defective or missing, the Owner will arrange for replacement. The Owner will also arrange for manufacturer's field services, and the delivery of manufacturer's warranties and bonds to the Contractor. 3. The Contractor is responsible for designating the delivery dates of Owner -furnished items in the Contractor's Construction Schedule and for receiving, unloading and handling Owner- furnished items at the site. The Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner -furnished items from damage, including damage from exposure to the elements, and to repair or replace items damaged as a result of his operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable). END OF SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 01020 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing handling and processing allowances. 1. Selected materials and equipment, and in some cases, their installation are shown and specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. Additional requirements, if necessary, will be issued by Change Order. B. Types of allowances required include the following: 1. Lump sum allowances. 2. Unit -cost allowances. C. Procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders are included in Section "Change Order Procedures." D. Use of allowances for inspection and testing agencies is included in Section "Quality Control Services." 1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest feasible date after Contract award, advise the Architect of the date when the final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed in order to avoid delay in performance of the Work. 1. When requested by the Architect, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections; include recommendations that are relevant to performance of the Work. 2. Purchase products and systems as selected by the Architect from the designated supplier. 1.4 SUBMITTALS ALLOWANCES 01020 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to indicate actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. 1.5 UNUSED MATERIALS A. Return unused materials to the manufacturer or supplier for credit to the Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. B. Where it is not economically feasible to return unused material for credit and when requested by the Architect, prepare unused material for the Owner's storage, and deliver to the Owner's storage space as directed. Otherwise, disposal of excess material is the Contractor's responsibility. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect products covered by an allowance promptly upon delivery for damage or defects. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related construction activities. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance No. 1: Include a lump sum in your Base Bid, of $30,000.00 to cover the cost of unknown and unforseen concrete repairs. Concrete repairs identified on the bid documents shall be part of your base bid. Concrete repair costs will be established by quantifying repairs and applying the unit costs which are to be submitted with your bid. Verified and approved amounts in excess of the allowance will be paid to the contractor. Unused funds from this allowance will be returned to the Owner by deductive Change Order. END OF SECTION 01020 ALLOWANCES 01020 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 01030 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Alternates. B. Definition: An Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain construction activities defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods described in Contract Documents. C. Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted Alternate is complete and fully integrated into the project. D. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, prepare and distribute to each party involved, notification of the status of each Alternate. Indicate whether Alternates have been accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to Alternates. E. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the Work described under each Alternate. 1. Include as part of each Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. 2. Each Alternate Bid must interface with the work being constructed under a separate contract with Florida Department of Health. Coordinate with the Florida Department of Health Contractor to provide a complete project. Each Alternate Bid item is also applicable to the Florida Department of Health work. An Alternate which is deducted from one project will be added to the other. If bidding both projects, the Deductive Alternate price for one project must match the Add Alternate price for the other project. ALTERNATES 01030 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1: The Base Bid on the first floor, includes wood flooring, glued to a DURA-CAP substrate. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to eliminate the wood flooring system, and substitute thin set 6" x 12" quarry tile over the DURA-CAP substrate. Under this alternate, wood base will be changed to quarry tile to match the floor. B. Alternate No. 2: The Base Bid includes fire resistant, FIRE LITE PLUS, glazing in interior fire rated transoms, fire rated glass wall systems, fire rated sidelights and fire rated glazed doors. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to omit the fire resistant, FIRE LITE PLUS, glazing and substitute wire glazing, diamond pattern, installed as required by code for a fire rated assembly. C. Alternate No. 3: The Base Bid includes aluminum fencing with concrete masonry unit piers on auger cast piles 4'-0" into grade, along the west, south and east property lines. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to omit all the aluminum fencing, auger cast piles, and piers, and leave the existing chain link fence along the west property line. D. Alternate No. 4: State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to omit the aluminum fencing, auger cast piles, and piers, from the south and east property lines only. Under this alternative, new fencing will be installed at the west property line only. E. Alternate No. 5: The Base Bid includes 3/4" BC PT plywood, installed horizontally, at partition types 12 and 14. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to omit the horizontal 3/4" BC PT at partition types 12 And 14. F. Alternate No. 6: The Base Bid includes one rotary screw chiller. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid by deleting this rotary screw chiller. G. Alternate No. 7: The Base Bid includes payment of construction permit fees required by the City of Key West. State the amount to be deducted from the base bid should the City waive these fees. H. Alternate No. 8: The Base Bid on the second floor, includes wood flooring on a plywood subfloor. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to delete the wood flooring and substitute the specified carpet over pad. Under this alternate the wood base will be changed to 4 inch rubber cove base. END OF SECTION 01030 ALTERNATES 01030 - 2 GATO BUILDING MONROE COUNTY SECTION 01040 - PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for Project coordination including, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Coordination. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. General installation provisions. 4. Cleaning and protection. B. Field engineering is included in Section "Field Engineering". C. Progress meetings, coordination meetings and pre -installation conferences are included in Section "Project Meetings". D. Requirements for the Contractors Construction Schedule are included in Section "Submittals". 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate all construction activities with a separate Contractor for the Department of Health portion of the work. Coordinate construction activities included under various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections of the Specifications that are dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on installation of other components, either before or after its own installation, schedule construction activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results. 2. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at PROJECT COORDINATION 01040 - 1 GATO BUILDING MONROE COUNTY meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate Contractors where coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project Close-out activities. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in, the w Work. Refer to other sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. E. Coordination of construction of two general contractors: 1. Attend weekly project coordination meetings. Representatives of the Architect, the Monroe County Contractor, the Department of Health Contractor, and the Owners will be in attendance. Monroe County Construction Management will serve as the Owner's representative for Monroe County. Cris Smith or his designee will serve as the Owner's representative for the Department of Health. Each Contractor will be required to provide a bar chart CPM schedule, reflecting general time line interface with the other Contractor. Interface of work activities will be reviewed weekly and schedules will be reviewed and up dated monthly. Initial coordination and interface of discussions will take place at a joint pre -construction conference. Minutes of these coordination meetings will be kept by the Architect and distributed to all parties. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare and submit coordination Drawings where close and careful coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated off -site by separate entities, and where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. 1. Show the interrelationship of components shown on separate Shop — Drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Comply with requirements contained in Section "Submittals." PROJECT COORDINATION 01040 - 2 GATO BUILDING MONROE COUNTY 4. Refer to Division-15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements," and Division-16 Section "Basic Electrical Requirements" for specific coordination Drawing requirements for mechanical and electrical installations. B. Staff Names: Within 15 days of Notice to Proceed, submit a list of the Contractor's principal staff assignments, including the Superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the site; identify individuals, their duties and responsibilities; list their addresses and telephone numbers. 1. Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office, and each temporary telephone. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents. C. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items. D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement. E. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in exposed Work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision. F. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation. G. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure the best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration. H. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. PROJECT COORDINATION 01040 - 3 GATO BUILDING MONROE COUNTY I. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install _ individual components at standard mounting heights recognized within the industry for the particular application indicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to the Architect for final decision. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. B. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Excessive static or dynamic loading. 2. Excessive internal or external pressures. 3. Excessively high or low temperatures. 4. Thermal shock. 5. Excessively high or low humidity. 6. Air contamination or pollution. 7. Water or ice. 8. Solvents. 9. Chemicals. 10. Light. 11. Radiation. 12. Puncture. 13. Abrasion. 14. Heavy traffic. 15. Soiling, staining and corrosion. 16. Bacteria. 17. Rodent and insect infestation. 18. Combustion. 19. Electrical current. 20. High speed operation, 21. Improper lubrication, 22. Unusual wear or other misuse. 23. Contact between incompatible materials. 24. Destructive testing. 25. Misalignment. 26. Excessive weathering. 27. Unprotected storage. 28. Improper shipping or handling. 29. Theft. 30. Vandalism. END OF SECTION 01040 PROJECT COORDINATION 01040 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products for use in the Project. B. The Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals are included under Section "Submittals." C. Standards: Refer to Section "Definitions and Standards" for applicability of industry standards to products specified. D. Administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract are included under Section "Product Substitutions." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," and similar terms. Such terms such are self-explanatory and have well recognized meanings in the construction industry. 1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. a. "Named Products" are items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents. b. "Foreign Products", as distinguished from "domestic products," are items substantially manufactured (50 percent or more of value) outside of the United States and its possessions; or produced or supplied by entities substantially owned (more than 50 percent) by persons who are not citizens of nor living within the United States and its possessions. 2. "Materials" are products that are substantially shaped, cut, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work. 3. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product List Schedule: Prepare a schedule showing products specified in a tabular form acceptable to the Architect. Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each item listed. 1. Coordinate the product list schedule with the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals. 2. Form: Prepare the product listing schedule with information on each item tabulated under the following column headings: a. Related Specification Section number. b. Generic name used in Contract Documents. C. Proprietary name, model number and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's and name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date, or time span of delivery period. 3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of an initial product list schedule. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for known variations from Contract requirements. a. At the Contractor's option, the initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in the Contract period. 4. Completed Schedule: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of the completed product list schedule. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for known variations from Contract requirements. 5. Architect's Action: The Architect will respond in writing to the Contractor within 2 weeks of receipt of the completed product list schedule. No response within this time period constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or products, but does not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with Contract Documents. The Architect's response will include the following: a. A list of unacceptable product selections, containing a brief - explanation of reasons for this action. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY of the same kind, from a single source. 1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not or cannot produce a quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timely manner, consult with the Architect for a determination of the most important product qualities before proceeding. Qualities may include attributes relating to visual appearance, strength, durability, or compatibility. When a determination has been made, select products from sources that produce products that possess these qualities, to the fullest extent possible. B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each prime Contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods that are compatible with products and construction methods of other prime or separate Contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between prime Contractors over concurrently selectable, but incompatible products, the Architect will determine which products shall be retained and which are incompatible and must be replaced. C. Foreign Product Limitations: Except under one or more of the following conditions, provide domestic products, not foreign products, for inclusion in the Work: 1. No available domestic product complies with the Contract Documents. 2. Domestic products that comply with Contract Document are only available at prices or terms that are substantially higher than foreign products that also comply with the Contract Documents. D. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service -connected or power -operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. C. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING — A. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other losses. 3. Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing. 4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents, and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 5. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 6. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction. 7. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION - A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. 2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. B. Product Selection Procedures: Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents and governing regulations, not by previous Project experience. Procedures governing product selection include the following: 1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. 2. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products or manufacturers are named, provide one of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY a. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal" comply with the Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 3. Non -Proprietary Specifications: When the Specifications list products or manufacturers that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor to use of these products only, the Contractor may propose any available product that complies with Contract requirements. Comply with Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 4. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. 5. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. General overall performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for a specific application. a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature, or by the manufacturer's certification of performance. 6. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where the Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes or regulations specified. 7. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. a. Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and also complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching product in another product category, or for noncompliance with specified requirements. 8. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "...as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern and texture from the product line selected. 9. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions in Division-1 for allowances that control product selection, and for procedures required for processing such selections. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS: A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each — product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. 1. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 01631 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract. B. The Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals are included under Section "Submittals." C. Standards: Refer to Section "Definitions and Standards" for applicability of industry standards to products specified. D. Procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products and product options are included under Section "Materials and Equipment." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents. B. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not considered substitutions: 1. Substitutions requested by Bidders during the bidding period, and accepted prior to award of Contract, are considered as included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions. 2. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents. 4. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution will be considered if received within 60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received more than 60 days after commencement of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect. 1. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in the form and in accordance with procedures - required for Change Order proposals. 2. Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate: a. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and installation procedures. b. Samples, where applicable or requested. C. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect. d. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate Contractors, — that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the _ Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time. f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum. g. Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal -to or better in every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time, that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure - of the substitution to perform adequately. 3. Architect's Action: Within one week of receipt of the request for substitution, the Architect will request additional information or documentation necessary for evaluation of the request. Within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of the additional information or documentation, which ever is later, the Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use the product specified by name. Acceptance will be in the form of a Change Order. PART 2 - PRODUCTS PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the Architect when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required. 2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents. 3. The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted. 4. The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. 5. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 6. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved. 7. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate Contractors, and similar considerations. 8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility. 9. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated. 10. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provide the required warranty. 11. Where a proposed substitution involves more than one prime Contractor, each Contractor shall cooperate with the other Contractors involved to coordinate the Work, provide uniformity and consistency, and to assure compatibility of products. B. The Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01631 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 02070 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section requires the selective removal and subsequent offsite disposal of the following: 1. Portions of existing building indicated on drawings and as required to accommodate new construction. B. Removal work specified elsewhere: 1. Roofing and roof insulation removal is specified in Division 7. 2. Cutting nonstructural concrete floors and masonry walls for piping, ducts, and conduits is included with the work of the respective mechanical and electrical specification sections in Divisions 15 and 16. 3. Cutting holes in roof deck for installation of new rooftop mechanical equipment is specified in Division 15. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Remodeling construction work and patching are included within the respective sections of specifications, including removal of materials for reuse and incorporation into remodeling or new construction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Schedule indicating proposed sequence of operations for selective demolition work to Owner's Representative for review prior to start of work. Include coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for dust and noise control protection. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual _ condition of items or structures to be demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. However, minor variations within structure may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work. B. Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed. 1. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted. C. Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection to protect general public from injury due to selective demolition work. 1. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities -- having jurisdiction. 2. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities or work to remain. 3. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during demolition operations. 4. Protect floors with suitable coverings when necessary. - 5. Construct temporary insulated dustproof partitions where required to separate areas where noisy or extensive dirt or dust operations are performed. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. 6. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building. 7. Remove protections at completion of work. D. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work. E. Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close, block, or otherwise obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. F. Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY G. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other methods to limit dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General: Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of areas to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. 1. Cease operations and notify Owner's Representative immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations. 2. Cover and protect furniture, equipment, and fixtures from soilage or damage when demolition work is performed in areas where such items have not been removed. 3. Erect and maintain dust -proof partitions and closures as required to prevent spread of dust or fumes to occupied portions of the building. a. Provide weatherproof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition work. 4. Locate, identify, stub off, and disconnect utility services that are not indicated to remain. a. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover. 3.2 DEMOLITION A. General: Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations. 1. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain using power -driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power -driven impact tools. 2. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 3. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Break up and remove below -grade concrete slabs. 5. For interior slabs on grade, use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb adjacent slabs or partitions. Use power saw where possible. 6. Completely fill below -grade areas and voids resulting from demolition work. Provide fill consisting of approved earth, -- gravel, or sand, free of trash and debris, stones over 6 inches in diameter, roots, or other organic matter. B. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Owner's Representative in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner's Representative, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay. 3.3 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove from building site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Transport and legally dispose off site. 1. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. 2. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site. 3.4 CLEANUP AND REPAIR A. General: Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials from site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean. 1. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work. END OF SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 02110 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protection of existing trees. 2. Removal of trees and other vegetation. 3. Topsoil stripping. 4. Clearing and grubbing. 5. Removing above -grade improvements. 6. Removing below -grade improvements. 7. Protection of areas on the Site designated "Archeological Site." 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. B. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place. 1. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property. 2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to property owners. C. Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation: Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place, against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning or bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing. 1. Water trees and other vegetation to remain within limits of contract work as required to maintain their health during course of construction operations. 2. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch diameter that are cut SITE CLEARING 02110 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY during construction operations. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt, or other acceptable coating, formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out; cover with earth as soon as possible. 3. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain which are damaged by construction operations, in a manner acceptable to Architect. Employ a licensed arborist to repair damages to trees and shrubs. 4. Replace trees which cannot be repaired and restored to full -growth status, as determined by arborist. 5. Extent of work on adjacent property is indicated on Drawings. D. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged, and store on Owner's premises where indicated or directed. E. Archeological Site: In the areas designated "Archeological Site" on the plans, coordinate all protective operations with the Owner's selected Archeologist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SITE CLEARING A. General: Remove trees, shrubs, grass and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions as required to permit installation of new construction. Remove similar items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. "Removal" includes digging out and off -site disposing of stumps and roots. 1. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner, where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. B. Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material. 1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. a. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. b. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place within drip lines to prevent damage to root system. 2. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or directed. SITE CLEARING 02110 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY Construct storage piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if required, to prevent wind erosion. 3. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil same as specified for disposal of waste material. C. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be left standing. 1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground surface. 2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain. 3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. a. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth, and thoroughly compact to a density equal to adjacent original ground. D. Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above -grade and below -grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. 1. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated on mechanical or electrical drawings, and is included under work of related Division 15 and 16 sections. Removal of abandoned underground piping or conduit interfering with construction is included under this Section. 2. Removal of an existing concrete slab, the extent of which is shown on the drawings, is part of this contract. 3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS A. Burning on Owner's Property: Burning is not permitted on Owner's property. B. Removal to Owner's Spoil Area: Transport non-combustible waste materials and unsuitable topsoil materials to designated spoil areas on Owner's property and dispose of as directed. C. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials and unsuitable or excess topsoil from Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02110 SITE CLEARING 02110 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and pavements. 2. Drainage fill course for support of building slabs is included as part of this work. 3. Excavating and backfilling of trenches within building lines. 4. Excavating and backfilling for underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical appurtenances. B. Excavating and Backfilling for Mechanical/Electrical Work: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 sections for excavation and backfill required in conjunction with underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical appurtenances. C. Final Grading, together with placement and preparation of topsoil for lawns and planting, is specified in Division 2 Section, "Landscape Work." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Excavation consists of removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations indicated and subsequent disposal of materials removed. B. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be at Contractor's expense. 1. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to Architect. 2. In locations other than those above, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect. EARTHWORK 02200 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY C. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade _ elevations, notify Architect, who will make an inspection of conditions. If Architect determines that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are unsuitable, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are encountered and replace excavated material as directed by Architect. The Contract Sum may be adjusted by an appropriate Contract Modification. 1. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of Conditions of the Contract relative to changes in work. D. Subgrade: The undisturbed earth or the compacted soil layer immediately below granular subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. E. Structure: Buildings, foundations, slabs, tanks, curbs, or other man-made stationary features occurring above or below ground surface. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to Architect from the testing services, with copy to Contractor: 1. Test reports on borrow material. 2. verification of suitability of each footing subgrade material, in accordance with specified requirements. 3. Field reports; in -place soil density tests. 4. One optimum moisture -maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered. 5. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of each strata tested. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner will employ and pay for a qualified independent geotechnical testing and inspection laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service during earthwork operations. C. Testing Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, the geotechnical testing laboratory must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory -submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct required field and laboratory geo-technical testing without delaying the progress of the Work. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of EARTHWORK 02200 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY excavation work. If utilities are indicated to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations. 1. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. 2. Do not interrupt existing utilities, except when permitted in writing by Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. a. Provide minimum of 48-hour notice to Architect, and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility. 3. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shutoff of services if lines are active. B. Use of Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. C. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. 1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 3. Perform excavation by hand within dripline of large trees to remain. Protect root systems from damage or dryout to the greatest extent possible. Maintain moist condition for root system and cover exposed roots with moistened burlap. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, and SP. B. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT. C. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, and natural or crushed sand. D. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. EARTHWORK 02200 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY E. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, _ rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade _ elevations indicated, regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered. 3.2 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS A. General: Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of --- agencies having jurisdiction. B. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. -- 3.3 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. , 1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. _ Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other -� diversions outside excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collecting or runoff areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. 3.4 STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill where directed. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of trees indicated to remain. 2. Dispose of excess excavated soil material and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill. EARTHWORK 02200 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, and other construction and for inspection. 1. Excavations for footings and foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 2. For pile foundations, stop excavations from 6 inches to 12 inches above bottom of footing before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps. 3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot; plus a sufficient distance to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, and other construction and for inspection. Do not disturb bottom of excavations, intended for bearing surface. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR PAVEMENTS A. Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross -sections, elevations and grades as indicated. 3.7 TRENCH EXCAVATION FOR PIPES AND CONDUIT A. Excavate trenches to uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a minimum of 6 to 9 inches of clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit. B. Excavate trenches and conduit to depth indicated or required to establish indicated slope and invert elevations and to support bottom of pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. 1. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6 inches below required elevation and backfill with a 6-inch layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. 2. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal size, and for flat-bottomed, multiple -duct conduit units, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand -excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil. 3. For pipes and equipment 6 inches or larger in nominal size, shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe for 90 degrees (bottom 1/4 of the circumference). Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint, dig bell holes to relieve pipe bell of loads ensure continuous bearing of pipe barrel on bearing surface. EARTHWORK 02200 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 3.8 BACKFILL AND FILL A. General: Place soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each area classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section. 1. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use subbase material, satisfactory excavated or borrow material, or a combination. 3. Under steps, use subbase material. 4. Under building slabs, use drainage fill material. 5. Under piping and conduit and equipment, use subbase materials where required over rock bearing surface and for correction of unauthorized excavation. Shape excavation bottom to fit bottom 90 degrees of cylinder. 6. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18 inches of column or wall footings and that are carried below bottom of such footings or that pass under wall footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footing. a. Concrete is specified in Division 3. b. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling is authorized by Architect. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems. 7. Provide 4-inch-thick concrete base slab support for piping or conduit less than 2'-6" below surface of roadways. After installation and testing of piping or conduit, provide minimum 4-inch-thick encasement (sides and top) of concrete prior to backfilling or placement of roadway subbase. B. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities have been performed and recorded. 3. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. Cut off temporary sheet piling driven below bottom of structures and remove in manner to prevent settlement of the structure or utilities, or leave in place if required. _ 5. Removal of trash and debris from excavation. 6. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls. 3.9 PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow strip, or break up sloped EARTHWORK 02200 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface. 1. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. B. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. C. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. D. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, or conduit to required elevations. Prevent wedging action of backfill against structures or displacement of piping or conduit by carrying material uniformly around structure, piping, or conduit to approximately same elevation in each lift. E. Control soil and fill compaction, providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below. Correct improperly compacted areas or lifts as directed by Architect if soil density tests indicate inadequate compaction. 1. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density, in accordance with ASTM D 1557: a. Under structures, building slabs and steps, and pavements, compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum density. b. Under lawn or unpaved areas, compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent maximum density. C. Under walkways, compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum density. 2. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material. Apply water in minimum quantity as necessary to prevent free water from appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. a. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. b. Stockpile or spread soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction. Assist drying by EARTHWORK 02200 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. 3.10 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated or between such points and existing grades. B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes and as follows: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade -- elevations. 2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade, and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevation. — 3. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade, and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 1/2 inch above or below required subgrade elevation. - C. Grading Surface of Fill under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. D. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and indicated percentage of maximum or relative density for each area classification. 3.11 PAVEMENT SUBBASE COURSE A. General: Subbase course consists of placing subbase material, in layers of specified thickness, over subgrade surface to support a pavement base course. 1. Refer to other Division 2 sections for paving specifications. B. Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross -slope of subbase course. C. Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders of acceptable soil materials, placed in such quantity to compact to thickness of each subbase course layer. Compact and roll at least a 12-inch width of shoulder simultaneous with the compaction and rolling of each layer of subbase course. D. Placing: Place subbase course material on prepared subgrade in layers EARTHWORK 02200 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting subbase material during placement operations. 1. When a compacted subbase course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or less, place material in a single layer. When indicated to be more than 6 inches thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6 inches or less than 3 inches in thickness when compacted. 3.12 BUILDING SLAB DRAINAGE COURSE A. General: Drainage course consists of placement of drainage fill material, in layers of indicated thickness, over subgrade surface to support concrete building slabs. B. Placing: Place drainage fill material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting material during placement operations. 1. When a compacted drainage course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or less, place material in a single layer. When indicated to be more than 6 inches thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6 inches or less than 3 inches in thickness when compacted. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and approve each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is performed. 1. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method) or ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), as applicable. a. Field density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D 2922, providing that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1556. In conjunction with each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages in accordance with ASTM D 3017. b. If field tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Architect. 2. Footing Subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, perform at least one test to verify required design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of each footing subgrade may be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata when acceptable to Architect. EARTHWORK 02200 - 9 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 3. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: Perform at least one field _ density test of subgrade for every 2,000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. In each compacted fill layer, perform one field density test for every 2,000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case fewer than three tests. 4. Foundation Wall Backfill: Perform at least two field density tests at locations and elevations as directed. 5. If in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills that have been placed are below specified density, perform additional compaction and testing until _ specified density is obtained. 3.14 EROSION CONTROL A. Provide erosion control methods in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.15 MAINTENANCE A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances. C. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. D. Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.16 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Removal to Designated Areas on Owner's Property: Transport acceptable excess excavated material to designated soil storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile soil or spread as directed by Architect. 1. Transport waste material, including unacceptable excavated material, trash, and debris to designated spoil areas on Owner's property and dispose of as directed. B. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material, trash, and debris, and dispose of it off Owner's property. EARTHWORK 02200 - 10 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. Remove excess excavated material, trash, debris, and waste materials and dispose of it off Owners property. END OF SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK 02200 - 11 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 02511 - HOT -MIXED ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes provisions for hot -mixed asphalt paving over prepared subbase. B. Prepared subbase is specified in another Division 2 section. C. Proof rolling of prepared subbase is included in this Section. D. Saw -cutting of edges of existing pavement is specified in site -clearing section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Material Certificates signed by material producer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. C. Pavement marking plan indicating lane separations and defined parking spaces. Note dedicated handicapped spaces with international graphics symbol. 1.4 SITE CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Apply prime and tack coats when ambient temperature is above 50 deg F (10 deg C) and when temperature has not been below 35 deg F (1 deg C) for 12 hours immediately prior to application. Do not apply when base is wet or contains an excess of moisture. B. Construct hot -mixed asphalt surface course when atmospheric temperature is above 40 deg F (4 deg C) and when base is dry. Base course may be placed when air temperature is above 30 deg F (minus 1 deg C) and rising. C. Grade Control: Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. HOT -MIXED ASPHALT PAVING 02511 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Use locally available materials and gradations that exhibit a satisfactory record of previous installations. B. Coarse Aggregate: Sound, angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or properly cured crushed blast furnace slag, complying with ASTM D 692-88. C. Fine Aggregate: Sharp -edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, properly cured blast furnace slag, gravel, or combinations thereof, complying with ASTM D 1073. D. Mineral Filler: Rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material complying with ASTM D 242. E. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity -graded material; ASTM D 946 for penetration -graded material. F. Prime Coat: Cut -back asphalt type, ASTM D 2027; MC-30, MC-70 or MC-250. G. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt; ASTM D 977. H. Herbicide Treatment: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by Environmental Protection Agency. Provide granular, liquid, or wettable powder form. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: a. Ciba-Geigy Corp. b. Dow Chemical U.S.A. C. E.I. Du Pont de Nemours & Co., Inc. d. FMC Corp. e. Thompson -Hayward Chemical Co. f. U.S. Borax and Chemical Corp. I. Lane Marking Paint: Alkyd -resin type, ready -mixed complying with AASHTO M 248, Type I. 1. Color: White. J. Wheel Stops: 2,500-psi compressive strength precast, air -entrained concrete, approximately 6 inches high, 9 inches wide, and 7 feet long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside. 2.2 ASPHALT -AGGREGATE MIXTURE A. Provide plant -mixed, hot -laid asphalt -aggregate mixture complying with ASTM D 3515 and as recommended by local paving authorities to suit project conditions. HOT -MIXED ASPHALT PAVING 02511 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before applying herbicide treatment or prime coat. B. Proof -roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction. C. Notify Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving work until deficient subbase areas have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. D. Herbicide Treatment: Apply chemical weed control agent in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommended dosages and application instructions. Apply to compacted, dry subbase prior to application of prime coat. E. Prime Coat: Apply at rate of 0.20 to 0.50 gal. per sq. yd., over compacted subgrade. Apply material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Cure and dry as long as necessary to attain penetration and evaporation of volatile. F. Tack Coat: Apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or Portland cement concrete and surfaces abutting or projecting into hot -mixed asphalt pavement. Distribute at rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. per sq. yd. of surface. G. Allow to dry until at proper condition to receive paving. H. Exercise care in applying bituminous materials to avoid smearing of adjoining concrete surfaces. Remove and clean damaged surfaces. 3.2 PLACING MIX A. General: Place hot -mixed asphalt mixture on prepared surface, spread, and strike off. Spread mixture at minimum temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg C). Place areas inaccessible to equipment by hand. Place each course to required grade, cross-section, and compacted thickness. B. Paver Placing: Place in strips not less than 10 feet wide, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete base course for a section before placing surface course. C. Immediately correct surface irregularities in finish course behind paver. Remove excess material forming high spots with shovel or lute. D. Joints: Make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive days' work, to ensure continuous bond between adjoining work. HOT -MIXED ASPHALT PAVING 02511 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY Construct joints to have same texture, density, and smoothness as other _ sections of hot -mixed asphalt course. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat. E. Curbs: Construct curbs over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a light tack coat unless pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust. F. Place curb materials to cross-section indicated or, if not indicated, to local standard shapes, by machine or by hand in wood or metal forms. Tamp hand -placed materials and screed to smooth finish. Remove forms as soon as material has cooled. 3.3 ROLLING A. General: Begin rolling when mixture will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. B. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. C. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of joints and outside edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling and repair displaced areas by loosening and filling, if required, with hot material. D. Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot. Continue second rolling until mixture has been evenly compacted. E. Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained 95 percent laboratory density. F. Patching: Remove and replace paving areas mixed with foreign materials and defective areas. Cut out such areas and fill with fresh, hot hot -mixed asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified surface density and smoothness. G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. 3.4 TRAFFIC AND LANE MARKINGS A. Cleaning: Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. B. Striping: Use chlorinated -rubber base traffic lane -marking paint, factory -mixed, quick -drying, and nonbleeding. C. Do not apply traffic and lane marking paint until layout and placement have been verified with Architect. HOT -MIXED ASPHALT PAVING 02511 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide minimum 12 to 15 mils dry thickness. 3.5 WHEEL STOPS A. General: Secure wheel stops to hot -mixed asphalt surface with not less than two 3/4-inch-diameter galvanized steel dowels embedded in precast concrete at 1/3 points. Size length of dowel to penetrate at least 1/2 hot -mixed asphalt depth. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Testing in -place hot -mixed asphalt courses for compliance with requirements for thickness and surface smoothness will be done by Owner's testing laboratory. Repair or remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by Architect. B. Thickness: In -place compacted thickness tested in accordance with ASTM D 3549 will not be acceptable if exceeding following allowable variations: 1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. C. Surface Smoothness: Test finished surface of each hot -mixed asphalt course for smoothness, using 10-foot straightedge applied parallel with and at right angles to centerline of paved area. Surfaces will not be acceptable if exceeding the following tolerances for smoothness: 1. Base Course Surface: 1/4 inch. 2. wearing Course Surface: 3/16 inch. 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch. D. Check surface areas at intervals as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION 02511 HOT -MIXED ASPHALT PAVING 02511 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 02515 - UNIT PAVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Pavers set in latex -modified portland cement mortar by tilesetter's method. 2. Edge restraints for unit pavers. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for compacted subgrade under unit pavers. 2. Division 2 Section "Portland Cement Concrete Paving" for cast - in -place concrete curbs and gutters serving as edge restraint for unit pavers. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for sealing control and expansion joints in brick paving with elastomeric sealants. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for the following products: 1. Concrete pavers. 2. Plastic edge restraints. C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of actual units or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of unit paver indicated. 1. Include similar samples of material for joints and accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for verification purposes in full-size units of each type of UNIT PAVERS 02515 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY unit paver indicated, in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 1. Provide samples with joints grouted and cured indicating full range of color to be expected in the completed work. E. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from latex additive manufacturer indicating that brick pavers have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with mortar and grout containing latex additives. Include latex additive manufacturers' interpretation of test results relative to mortar and grout performance and recommendations for installation practices needed to obtain adhesion. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed unit paver installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project. B. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain each color, type, and variety of unit pavers, joint materials, and setting materials from a single source with resources to provide products and materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of flooring materials contacting or affecting mortar and grout containing latex additives to manufacturer of latex additives for compatibility and adhesion testing as indicated below. - 1. Use test methods standard with manufacturer to determine if mortar and grout materials will obtain optimum adhesion with, and will be --- nonstaining to, installed brick pavers and other materials constituting the brick paving installation. 2. Submit sufficient number of bricks and other materials involved in installation to allow comprehensive testing. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysis of results to prevent delay in the progress of the Work. 4. Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and obtain mortar and grout manufacturer's written recommendations for the use of materials to obtain optimum bond and prevent staining. D. Field -Constructed Mock -Up: Prior to installation of unit pavers, erect mock-ups for each form and pattern of unit pavers required to verify selections made under sample submittals. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials and same base construction including special features for expansion joints and contiguous work as indicated for final unit of Work. 1. Locate mock-ups on site in location and size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when UNIT PAVERS 02515 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY mock-ups will be erected. 3. Demonstrate quality of workmanship that will be produced in final unit of Work. 4. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-ups before start of final unit of Work. S. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed unit of Work. a. Accepted mock-ups in undisturbed condition at time of Substantial Completion may become part of completed unit of Work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect unit pavers and aggregate during storage and construction against wetting by rain, snow, or ground water and against soilage or contamination from earth and other materials. B. Protect grout and mortar materials from deterioration by moisture and temperature. Store in a dry location or in waterproof container. Keep containers tightly closed and away from open flame. Protect liquid components from freezing. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Hot -Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of setting beds and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and above. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Concrete Pavers: a. Jericho Stone, color: charcoal, as manufactured by PaverModule 1590 North Andrews Avenue Extension Pompano Beach, Florida 33069, 1-800-273-7084. 2. Edge Restraints: a. Pave Tech, Inc. b. J.T. Ryerson & Son, Inc. UNIT PAVERS 02515 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 3. Latex -Portland Cement Mortars and Grouts: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Boardi Products Corp. C. Bostik Construction Products Div., Emhart Chemical Group. d. C-Cure Chemical Co., Inc. e. Custom Building Products. f. DAP Inc., Subsidiary of USG Corp. g. Jamo, Inc. h. Laticrete International, Inc. i. L & M Mfg. Inc. j. Mapei Corp. k. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 1. Summitville Tiles, Inc. M. Syracuse Adhesives Company. 2.2 COLORS AND TEXTURES A. Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed unit paver surfaces and joints complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide selections made by Architect from full range of standard colors and textures for materials and products of type indicated. 2.3 UNIT PAVERS A. Concrete Pavers: Solid concrete paving units, ASTM C 936, made from normal weight aggregates in sizes and shapes indicated. 2.4 EDGE RESTRAINTS A. Plastic Edge Restraints: Manufacturer's standard triangular polyvinyl chloride extrusions, 1-3/4 inches high by 3-1/2 inches long by 15 feet long, rigid type for straight edges and flexible type for curved edges; with pipe connectors and 3/8 inch diameter by 12 inch long steel spikes, designed to serve as edge restraints for unit pavers. B. Concrete for Job -Built Edge Restraints: Comply with requirements of Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for normal -weight, ready -mix concrete with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,500 psi, minimum cement content of 440 lb cement per cu. ft. of concrete; and maximum water/cement ratio of 0.65. 2.5 PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR SETTING BED MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. UNIT PAVERS 02515 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 with a fineness module of 2.25 plus or minus 0.10. D. Latex additive (water emulsion) described below, serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, of type specifically recommended by latex additive manufacturer for use with job -mixed portland cement and aggregate and not containing a retarder. 1. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber. 2. Latex Additive: Acrylic resin. E. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized welded wire fabric, 2 inches by 2 inches - W0.3 by W0.3 (16 ASW gage or 0.0625 inch diameter); comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size. F. Water: Clean, free of materials detrimental to strength or bond of mortars. 2.6 GROUT MATERIALS A. Latex -Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, composition as follows: 1. Prepackaged dry mortar mix composed of portland cement, graded aggregate, and ethylene vinyl acetate in the form of a re - emulsifiable powder to which only water is added at job site. a. Dry Grout Mixture: Dry -set grout complying with ANSI A118.6 and specified or supplied by latex manufacturer, in color indicated. Use latex additive without retarder with dry -set grout. B. Water: Clean, free of materials detrimental to strength or bond of grout. 2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' instructions relative to mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce setting -bed and joint materials of uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics. Discard mortars and grout when they have reached their initial set. B. Cement Paste Slush Coat: Mix slush coat to a consistency similar to that of thick cream and consisting of either neat cement and water or cement, sand, and water. 1. For latex -modified portland cement setting -bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for part or all of water per directions of latex additive manufacturer. UNIT PAVERS 02515 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY C. Portland Cement/Lime Setting -bed Mortar: Type M complying with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification: D. Latex -Modified Portland Cement Setting -bed Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate, and latex additive for setting bed to comply with directions of latex additive manufacturer and as necessary to produce stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready to receive brick pavers. E. Latex -Modified Portland Cement Slurry Bond Coat: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate, and latex additive for slurry bond coat to comply with directions of latex additive manufacturer. F. Latex -Modified Portland Cement Grout: Add latex additive to dry grout mix in proportion and concentration recommended by latex additive manufacturer. 1. Job -Mixed Colored Pigmented Grout: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not exceed pigment -to -cement ratio of 1 to 10, by weight. Proportion cement and aggregate to comply with directions of latex additive manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other -- conditions affecting performance of unit pavers. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles. B. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair bond of mortar, including curing and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance. C. Proof roll prepared subgrade surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction. Do not proceed with installation of unit pavers until deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive subbase for unit pavers. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be visible or cause staining in finished work. UNIT PAVERS 02515 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY B. Cut unit pavers with motor -driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable. 1. For concrete pavers, a mortar -driven masonry saw or block splitter may be used. C. Joint Pattern: As indicated below: 1. Match joint pattern of field -constructed mock-up. D. Handtight Joints: Where unit pavers are indicated without spaced joints, set unit pavers with hand -tight joints. E. Spaced Joint Widths: Where brick flooring is indicated with spaced joints filled with grout, comply with the following requirement: 1. Provide nominal joint width of 3/8 inch with variations not exceeding plus or minus 1/16 inch. F. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/32-inch unit -to -unit offset from flush (lippage) and a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet from level or slope as indicated for finished surface of paving. G. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant -filled joints at locations and of widths indicated. Sealant materials and installation are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." H. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints prior to placing unit pavers. 1. Install edge restraints to comply with manufacturer's directions. Place stakes at intervals required to hold edge restraints in place during and after installation of unit pavers. 3.4 MORTARED APPLICATIONS A. Saturate -concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting -bed. Remove surface water about 1 hour before placing setting -bed. B. Apply cement paste slush coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes prior to placing setting -bed. Limit area of slush coat to avoid its drying out prior to placing setting -bed. Do not exceed 1/16-inch thickness for cement slush coat. C. Apply mortar setting -bed over cement paste slush coat immediately after latter has been applied. Spread and screed setting bed to uniform thickness at subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of brick to finished grades indicated. D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar setting bed that can be covered UNIT PAVERS 02515 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY with brick prior to initial set. Cut back, bevel edge, remove, and discard setting bed material that has reached initial set prior to placing brick. 1. Place reinforcing wire fabric over membrane, lapped at joints by at least one full mesh at joints and supported so that it becomes embedded in the middle of setting bed. Do not butt edges against vertical surfaces. E. Wet pavers several hours before laying unless their initial rate of _ absorption (suction) when subjected to testing by method described in Section 9 of ASTM C 67 is less than 3/4 oz. per 30 sq. inches of immersed area. Do not lay pavers with free moisture on the surface. F. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately prior to placing pavers on green or wet setting bed, apply uniform 1/16-inch thick slurry bond coat to bed or to back of each paver with a flat trowel just prior to placing it on bed. G. Tamp and beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in single operation prior to initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set and disturb pavers for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints. - H. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. Force grout into joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining paver and other surfaces. After initial set of grout, finish joints by tooling to produce a very slightly concave polished joint, free from drying cracks. I. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for 7 days except as otherwise recommended by latex additive manufacturer. 3.5 REPAIR, POINTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with mortar or grout. Point -up joints at sealant- type joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of sealant. C. Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces, wash, and scrub clean. D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer, which ensures unit paver work being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. UNIT PAVERS 02515 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY END OF SECTION 02515 UNIT PAVERS 02515 - 9 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 02520 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent of portland cement concrete paving is shown on drawings, including curbs, gutters, walkways, and pavement. B. Prepared subbase is specified in "Earthwork" section. C. Concrete and related materials are specified in Division 3. D. Joint fillers and sealers are specified in Division 7. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide samples, manufacturer's product data, test reports, and materials' certifications as required in referenced sections for concrete and joint fillers and sealers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with local governing regulations if more stringent than herein specified. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. 1. Coordinate with requirements for "Temporary Facilities" specified in Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Forms: Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY vertical alignment until removal. Use straight forms, free of — distortion and defects. 1. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. B. Coat forms with a nonstaining form release agent that will not discolor or deface surface of concrete. C. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold -drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185. 1. Furnish in flat sheets, not rolls, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. D. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. E. Fabricated Bar Mats: Welded or clip -assembled steel bar or rod mats, ASTM A 184. Use ASTM A 615, Grade 60 steel bars, unless otherwise indicated. F. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. G. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A bolts, internally and externally threaded. Design hook bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt. H. Concrete Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete materials, admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and others as required. I. Expansion Joint Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 7 sections for preformed expansion joint fillers and sealers. J. Antispalling Compound: Combination of boiled linseed oil and mineral spirits, complying with AASHTO M-233. K. Liquid -Membrane Forming and Sealing Curing Compound: Comply with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A unless other type acceptable to Architect. Moisture loss no more than 0.055 gr./sq. cm. when applied at 200 sq. ft. / gal. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Masterseal"; Master Builders. b. "A-H 3 Way Sealer"; Anti -Hydro Waterproofing Co. C. "Ecocure"; Euclid Chemical Co. d. "Clear Seal"; A. C. Horn. e. "1-20 Acrylic Cure"; Dayton Superior. f. "Sure Cure"; Kaufman Products Inc. g. "AR -30" W.R. Meadows. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY h. "Spartan -Cote"; The Burke Co. i. "Sealkure"; Toch Div. - Carboline. j. "Kure-N-Seal"; Sonneborn-Contech. k. "Polyclear"; Upco Chemical/USM Corp. 1. "L&M Cure"; L & M Construction Chemicals. M. "Klearseal"; Setcon Industries. n. 11LR-15211; Protex Industries. o. "Hardtop"; Gifford - Hill. L. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base, rewettable type. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. 11J-40 Bonding Agent"; Dayton Superior Corp. b. "Weldcrete"; Larsen Products. C. "Intralok"; W.R. Meadows. d. "Everbond"; L & M Construction Chemicals. e. "EucoWeld"; Euclid Chemical Co. f. "Hornweld"; A. C. Horn. g. "Sonocrete"; Sonneborn-Contech. h. "Acrylic Bondcrete"; The Burke Co. M. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, 2-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material "Type", "Grade", and "Class" to suit project requirements. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: a. "Epoxtite"; A. C. Horn. b. "Edoco 2118 Epoxy Adhesive"; Edoco Technical Prod. C. "Sikadur Hi -Mod"; Sika Chemical Corp. d. "Euco Epoxy 463 or 615"; Euclid Chemical Co. e. "Patch and Bond Epoxy"; The Burke Co. f. "Sure-Poxy"; Kaufman Products Inc. 2.2 CONCRETE MIX, DESIGN, AND TESTING A. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete mix design, sampling and testing, and quality control and as herein specified. B. Design mix to produce normal -weight concrete consisting of portland cement, aggregate, water -reducing or high -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer), air -entraining admixture, and water to produce the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum at 28 days, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Slump Limits: 8 inches minimum for concrete containing high- range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer); 3 inches for other PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY concrete. 3. Air Content: 5 to 8 percent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. B. Proof -roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and need for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. 3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Set forms to required grades and lines, braced and secured. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: 1. Top of forms not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet. C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. D. Slope step treads at 1/4 inch per foot to drain. 3.3 REINFORCEMENT A. Locate, place and support reinforcement as specified in Division 3 sections, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: Comply with requirements of Division 3 sections for mixing and placing concrete, and as herein specified. B. Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten subbase if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. C. Place concrete by methods that prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square -faced shovels for hand -spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. D. Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint. F. When adjacent pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained sufficient strength to carry loads without injury. G. Fabricated Bar Mats: Keep mats clean and free from excessive rust, and handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap to adjacent mats. 1. Place concrete in 2 operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the required depth below finish surface. Lay fabricated bar mats immediately in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed. 2. Remove and replace portions of bottom layer of concrete that have been placed more than 15 minutes without being covered by top layer or use bonding agent if acceptable to Architect. H. Curbs and Gutters: Automatic machine may be used for curb and gutter placement at Contractor's option. If machine placement is to be used, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed minimums specified. Machine placement must produce curbs and gutters to required cross-section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete as specified. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Construct expansion, weakened -plane (contraction), and construction joints true to line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated. B. When joining existing structures, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Weakened -Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened -plane (contraction) joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on drawings. Construct weakened -plane joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Tooled Joints: Form weakened -plane joints in fresh concrete by PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY grooving top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer. 2. Sawed Joints: Form weakened -plane joints with powered saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut joints into hardened concrete as soon as surface will not be torn, abraded, or otherwise damaged by cutting action. 3. Inserts: Use embedded strips of metal or sealed wood to form weakened -plane joints. Set strips into plastic concrete and -- carefully remove strips after concrete has hardened. D. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations where placement operations are stopped for more than 1/2 hour, except where such placements terminate at expansion joints. 1. Construct joints as shown or, if not shown, use standard metal keyway -section forms. 2. Where load transfer -slip dowel devices are used, install so that one end of each dowel bar is free to move. E. Expansion Joints: Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, and other fixed objects, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints at 50 feet o.c. for each pavement lane unless otherwise indicated. F. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. If no joint sealer, place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface. G. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. H. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary material. Remove protection after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. I. Fillers and Sealants: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 7 sections for preparation of joints, materials, installation, and performance. 3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING A. After striking -off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture. B. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10-ft. straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous smooth finish. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY C. Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to 1/2-inch radius, unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface. D. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete troweling and finish surface as follows: 1. Broom finish by drawing a fine -hair broom across concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to Architect. a. On inclined slab surfaces, provide a coarse, non -slip finish by scoring surface with a stiff -bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic. E. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, clean ends of joints and point -up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Architect. 3.7 CURING A. Protect and cure finished concrete paving in compliance with applicable requirements of Division 3 sections. Use membrane -forming curing and sealing compound or approved moist -curing methods. B. Antispalling Treatment: Apply treatment to concrete surfaces no sooner than 28 days after placement, to clean, dry concrete free of oil, dirt, and other foreign material. Apply curing and sealing compound at a maximum coverage rate of 300 s.f. per gallon. Apply antispalling compound in 2 sprayed applications. First application at rate of 40 sq. yds. per gal.; second application, 60 sq. yds. per gallon. Allow complete drying between applications. 3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect. B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign material just before final inspection. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY END OF SECTION 02520 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 02668 - WATER SERVICE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes water service piping and appurtenances from the source of potable water to a point 5 feet outside the building. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation and backfill required for water service piping and structures. 2. Division 2 Section "Storm Sewerage" for storm drainage connections to pit drains. 3. Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for supports and structures. 4. Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Piping" for interior building water piping systems and equipment. C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include water meters provided by the utility company to the site, ready for installation. The following is the name and address of the utility company: 1. Florida Keys Aqueduct Authority 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for valves, water meter, and identification devices. C. Shop drawings for cast -in -place concrete valve pits and meter pit, including frames and covers. D. Coordination drawings showing pipe sizes, and valves and meter locations and elevations. Include details of underground structures, connections, anchors, and reaction backing. Show other piping in the same trench and clearances from water service piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate structures. WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY E. Coordination profile drawings showing water service piping in elevation. Draw profiles at a horizontal scale of not less than 1 inch equals 50 feet and a vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet. Indicate pipe, valves, structures, meter, anchors, and reaction backing. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing water service piping. F. Record drawings at project closeout of installed water service piping and products in accordance with requirements of Division 1. G. Maintenance data for valves and water meter, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 1 Section "Project Closeout." 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of utility supplying water to the project. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends, flange faces, and weld ends. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set gate valves closed to prevent rattling. B. Storage: Use the following precautions for valves during storage: "- 1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors. Maintain valve temperature higher than the ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, support valves off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures. C. Handling: Use a sling to handle valves whose size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Verify that water service piping may be installed in compliance with the original design and referenced standards. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Coordinate connection to public water main with utility company. B. Coordinate with interior water distribution piping. C. Coordinate with other utility work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Gate Valves: a. American Darling Valve; Div. of American Cast Iron Pipe Co. b. Clow Valve Co.; Div. of McWane, Inc. C. Hammond Valve Corp. d. Jenkins Bros. e. Kennedy Valve; Div. of McWane, Inc. f. Milwaukee Valve Co. g. Mueller -Hersey; A Grinnell Co. h. Nibco, Inc. i. Stockham Valve & Fittings, Inc. j. U.S. Pipe & Foundry Co. k. Waterous Co. 2. Bronze Corporation Stops and Valves: a. Ford Meter Box Co., Inc. b. Hays Div.; Romac Industries. C. McDonald, A.Y., Mfg. Co. d. Mueller -Hersey; A Grinnell Co. 3. Drilling Machine Corporation Stops: a. Ford Meter Box Co., Inc. b. Hays Div.; Romac Industries. C. Mueller -Hersey; A Grinnell Co. 4. Tapping Valves: a. Clow Valve Co.; Div. of McWane, Inc. b. Kennedy Valve; Div. of McWane, Inc. C. Mueller -Hersey; A Grinnell Co. d. U.S. Pipe & Foundry Co. 5. Yard Hydrants, Post Type: a. Ancon, Inc. b. Josam Co. C. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY e. Woodford Mfg. Co. _ f. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. 6. Yard Hydrants, Sanitary Type: a. Murdock, Inc. 7. Water Meters: -- a. Badger Meter, Inc. b. Hays Div.; Romac Industries. C. Kent Meters, Inc. d. Mueller -Hersey; A Grinnell Co. e. Rockwell Intl.; Measurement & Flow Control Div. f. Schlumberger Industries; Neptune Water Div. 8. Drains: a. Ancon, Inc. b. Josam Co. C. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. e. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. 9. Underground Warning Tapes: -- a. Allen Systems, Inc.; Reef Industries, Inc. b. Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div. C. Calpico, Inc. d. Carlton Industries, Inc. e. EMED Co., Inc. f. Seton Name Plate Co. S 2.2 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS, GENERAL _ A. Pipe and pipe fitting materials shall be compatible with each other. Where more than one type of material or product is indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Copper Water Tube 2 Inches and Smaller: ASTM B 88; Type K, seamless, annealed temper. 1. Copper Fittings: ANSI B16.22, wrought -copper, solder -joint pressure type. a. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32, Alloy HB; tin -antimony -copper -nickel composition, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content. C. Copper Water Tube 2 Inches and Smaller: ASTM B 88; Type L, seamless, annealed temper. — 1. Copper Fittings: ANSI B16.22, wrought -copper, solder -joint pressure type. WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY a. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32, Alloy HB; tin -antimony -copper -nickel composition, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content. 2.3 VALVES A. Nonrising Stem Gate Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; body and screw bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with Class 125 threaded ends, solid wedge, nonrising copper -silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, Teflon -impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. B. Valve Boxes: Cast-iron box having top section and cover with lettering "WATER," bottom section with base of size to fit over valve and barrel approximately 5 inches in diameter, and adjustable cast-iron extension of length required for depth of bury of valve. 1. Provide a steel tee -handle operating wrench with each valve box. Wrench shall have tee handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate valve, and socket fitting valve operating nut. C. Curb Stops: Bronze body, ground key plug or ball, and wide tee head, with inlet and outlet to match service piping material. D. Service Boxes for Curb Stops: Cast-iron box having telescoping top section of length required for depth of bury of valve and cover having lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base of size to fit over curb stop and barrel approximately 3 inches in diameter. 1. Provide steel tee -handle shut-off rod with each service box. Shut-off rod shall have tee handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate curb stop, and slotted end fitting curb stop head. E. Tapping Sleeve and Tapping Valve: Provide a complete assembly, including tapping sleeve, tapping valve, and bolts and nuts. The sleeve and the valve shall be compatible with the tapping machine to be used. 1. Tapping Sleeve: Cast-iron or ductile -iron 2-piece bolted sleeve with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Sleeve may have mechanical joint ends with rubber gaskets or have sealing rings in the sleeve body. Sleeve shall mate with the size and type pipe material being tapped. Outlet flange shall be size required for branch connection. F. Service Clamps and Corporation Stops: Provide a complete assembly, including service clamp, corporation stop, and bolts and nuts. The clamp and stop shall be compatible with the drilling machine to be used. 1. Service Clamp: Cast iron or ductile iron with gasket and AWWA C800 threaded outlet for corporation stop, and threaded end straps. 2. Corporation Stops: Bronze body and ground key plug, with AWWA C800 threaded inlet and outlet to match service piping material. 3. Manifold: Copper with two to four inlets, as required, with ends matching corporation stops, and outlet matching service piping. WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2.4 ANCHORAGES A. Clamps, Straps, and Washers: ASTM A 506, steel. B. Rods: ASTM A 575, steel. C. Rod Couplings: ASTM A 197, malleable iron. D. Bolts: ASTM A 307, steel. E. Cast -Iron Washers: ASTM A 126, gray iron. F. Concrete Reaction Backing: Portland cement concrete mix, 3000 psi. 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. - 4. Water: Potable. 2.5 YARD HYDRANTS A. Yard Hydrants, Sanitary Type: Nonfreeze, post type, having non -draining chamber for storing water trapped downstream of inlet valve. Hydrants shall have 1-inch inlet, integral or field -installed vacuum breaker with outlet conforming to ASME B1.20.7 for garden hose thread, brass or bronze casing and other parts in contact with water, and shall be handle or key operated. Body of the hydrant shall be of length required for installation of storage chamber below frost line. Furnish 2 keys for each key -operated hydrant. 2.6 WATER METER A. Water meter will be furnished by the utility company. B. General: Provide water meter with registration in gallons. C. Water Meter - 2 Inches and Smaller: AWWA C700, disc type, bronze case. D. Water Meter - 3 Inches and Larger: AWWA C702, compound type, bronze case. E. Remote Registration System: Utility company standards. F. Meter Box: Cast-iron body, cast-iron cover having lettering "WATER METER," and base section, of length to fit over service piping. The base section shall be open at the bottom, slotted, and may be cast iron, PVC, or a piece of clay or other pipe. 2.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape, 6 inches WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY wide by 4 mils thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - WATER LINE BURIED BELOW." B. Metallic -Lined Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape with metallic core, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - WATER LINE BURIED BELOW." C. Nonmetallic Piping Label: Engraved plastic laminate label, for installation on the main electrical meter panel; not less than 1 inch by 3 inches, with caption "CAUTION - THIS STRUCTURE HAS A NONMETALLIC WATER SERVICE." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION OF BURIED PIPE FOUNDATION A. Grade trench bottom to provide a smooth, firm, stable, and rock -free foundation throughout the length of the piping. B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be laid and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level. C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of piping. Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill. Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve the bells of all loads and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Copper Tube: Install with wrought copper, solder joint, pressure fittings, and Sn95 Tin -Antimony solder in accordance with CDA "Copper Tube" handbook. B. Depth of Cover: Provide minimum cover over piping of 12 inches below average local frost depth or 36 inches below finished grade, whichever is greater. C. Water Main Connection: Arrange and pay for tap in water main, of size and in location as indicated, from water utility. D. Water Main Connection: Tap water main with size and in location as indicated, in accordance with requirements of water utility. 1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with AWWA C600. Install valve with stem pointing up and with cast-iron valve box. 3. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main. Remove tapping machine and connect water service piping. WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 4. Install service clamps and corporation stops in size, quantity, and arrangement required by the utility company standards, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Water Service Termination: Terminate water service piping 5'-0" from building foundation in location and invert as indicated. Provide temporary pipe plug for piping extension into building. F. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, by tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF VALVES A. General Application: Use mechanical joint end valves for 3-inch and larger buried installation. Use threaded and flanged end valves for installation in pits and inside building. Use bronze corporation stops and valves, with ends compatible to piping, for 2-inch and smaller installation. B. AWWA-Type Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried valves with stem pointing up and with cast-iron valve box. C. Bronze Corporation Stops and Curb Stops: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install buried curb stops with head pointed up and with cast-iron curb box. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORAGES A. Anchorages: Provide anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. 3.5 APPLICATION OF PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion -retarding material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF HYDRANTS A. Install post -type yard hydrants in pavement or with concrete anchor, and provision for drainage into drywell, as indicated. B. Install sanitary -type yard hydrants in pavement or with concrete anchor, as indicated. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF VALVE PITS AND WATER METER PIT A. Construct of poured -in -place or precast concrete of dimensions indicated, with manhole frame and cover, ladder, and drain. Provide sleeves with waterproof sleeve seals for pipe entry and exit. WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY B. Water Meter: Install water meter in accordance with AWWA M6, in meter pit, in location and with support as indicated. Provide 3-valve bypass around meter, full size of water service piping. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFICATION A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tape during back -filling of trench for underground water service piping. Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly over piping. B. Attach nonmetallic piping label permanently to main electrical meter panel. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have sufficiently hardened. Fill pipeline 24 hours prior to testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water. B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure for 2 hours. 1. Increase pressure in 50-psi increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for one hour; decrease to 0 psi. Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for one more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within above limits. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows: 1. Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, prior to use. 2. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by the authority having jurisdiction or, in case a method is not prescribed by that authority, use the procedure described in AWWA C651, or as described below: a. Fill the system or part thereof with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system or part thereof and allow to stand for 24 hours. b. Drain the system or part thereof of the previous solution and refill with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. C. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean, potable water until chlorine does not remain in the WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 9 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 02668 - WATER SERVICE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes water service piping and appurtenances from the source of potable water to a point 5 feet outside the building. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation and backfill required for water service piping and structures. 2. Division 2 Section "Storm Sewerage" for storm drainage connections to pit drains. 3. Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for supports and structures. 4. Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Piping" for interior building water piping systems and equipment. C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include water meters provided by the utility company to the site, ready for installation. The following is the name and address of the utility company: 1. Florida Keys Aqueduct Authority 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for valves, water meter, and identification devices. C. Shop drawings for cast -in -place concrete valve pits and meter pit, including frames and covers. D. Coordination drawings showing pipe sizes, and valves and meter locations and elevations. Include details of underground structures, connections, anchors, and reaction backing. Show other piping in the same trench and clearances from water service piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate structures. WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY E. Coordination profile drawings showing water service piping in elevation. _ Draw profiles at a horizontal scale of not less than 1 inch equals 50 feet and a vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet. Indicate pipe, valves, structures, meter, anchors, and reaction backing. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing water service piping. F. Record drawings at project closeout of installed water service piping and products in accordance with requirements of Division 1. G. Maintenance data for valves and water meter, for inclusion in Operating _ and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 1 Section "Project Closeout." 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of utility supplying water to the project. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends, flange faces, and weld ends. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set gate valves closed to prevent rattling. B. Storage: Use the following precautions for valves during storage: 1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors. Maintain valve temperature higher than the ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, support valves off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures. C. Handling: Use a sling to handle valves whose size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Verify that water service piping may be installed in compliance with the original design and referenced standards. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Coordinate connection to public water main with utility company. B. Coordinate with interior water distribution piping. C. Coordinate with other utility work. D. Coordinate with Department of Health ,General and Plumbing Contractors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Gate Valves: a. American Darling Valve; Div. of American Cast Iron Pipe Co. b. Clow Valve Co.; Div. of McWane, Inc. C. Hammond Valve Corp. d. Jenkins Bros. e. Kennedy Valve; Div. of McWane, Inc. f. Milwaukee Valve Co. g. Mueller -Hersey; A Grinnell Co. h. Nibco, Inc. i. Stockham Valve & Fittings, Inc. j. U.S. Pipe & Foundry Co. k. Waterous Co. 2. Bronze Corporation Stops and Valves: a. Ford Meter Box Co., Inc. b. Hays Div.; Romac Industries. C. McDonald, A.Y., Mfg. Co. d. Mueller -Hersey; A Grinnell Co. 3. Drilling Machine Corporation Stops: a. Ford Meter Box Co., Inc. b. Hays Div.; Romac Industries. C. Mueller -Hersey; A Grinnell Co. 4. Tapping Valves: a. Clow Valve Co.; Div. of McWane, Inc. b. Kennedy Valve; Div. of McWane, Inc. C. Mueller -Hersey; A Grinnell Co. d. U.S. Pipe & Foundry Co. 5. Yard Hydrants, Post Type: a. Ancon, Inc. b. Josam Co. C. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. _ e. Woodford Mfg. Co. f. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. 6. Yard Hydrants, Sanitary Type: _ a. Murdock, Inc. 7. Water Meters: a. Badger Meter, Inc. b. Hays Div.; Romac Industries. C. Kent Meters, Inc. d. Mueller -Hersey; A Grinnell Co. e. Rockwell Intl.; Measurement & Flow Control Div. -- f. Schlumberger Industries; Neptune Water Div. 8. Drains: a. Ancon, Inc. b. Josam Co. C. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. - d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. e. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. 9. Underground Warning Tapes: a. Allen Systems, Inc.; Reef Industries, Inc. b. Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div. C. Calpico, Inc. d. Carlton Industries, Inc. e. EMED Co., Inc. f. Seton Name Plate Co. 2.2 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS, GENERAL A. Pipe and pipe fitting materials shall be compatible with each other. Where more than one type of material or product is indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Copper Water Tube 2 Inches and Smaller: ASTM B 88; Type K, seamless, annealed temper. 1. Copper Fittings: ANSI B16.22, wrought -copper, solder -joint pressure type. a. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32, Alloy HB; tin -antimony -copper -nickel composition, with 0.10 percent -- maximum lead content. 2.3 VALVES A. Nonrising Stem Gate Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; body and WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY screw bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with Class 125 threaded ends, solid wedge, nonrising copper -silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, Teflon -impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. B. Valve Boxes: Cast-iron box having top section and cover with lettering "WATER," bottom section with base of size to fit over valve and barrel approximately 5 inches in diameter, and adjustable cast-iron extension of length required for depth of bury of valve. 1. Provide a steel tee -handle operating wrench with each valve box. Wrench shall have tee handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate valve, and socket fitting valve operating nut. C. Curb Stops: Bronze body, ground key plug or ball, and wide tee head, with inlet and outlet to match service piping material. D. Service Boxes for Curb Stops: Cast-iron box having telescoping top section of length required for depth of bury of valve and cover having lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base of size to fit over curb stop and barrel approximately 3 inches in diameter. 1. Provide steel tee -handle shut-off rod with each service box. Shut-off rod shall have tee handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate curb stop, and slotted end fitting curb stop head. E. Tapping Sleeve and Tapping Valve: Provide a complete assembly, including tapping sleeve, tapping valve, and bolts and nuts. The sleeve and the valve shall be compatible with the tapping machine to be used. 1. Tapping Sleeve: Cast-iron or ductile -iron 2-piece bolted sleeve with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Sleeve may have mechanical joint ends with rubber gaskets or have sealing rings in the sleeve body. Sleeve shall mate with the size and type pipe material being tapped. Outlet flange shall be size required for branch connection. F. Service Clamps and Corporation Stops: Provide a complete assembly, including service clamp, corporation stop, and bolts and nuts. The clamp and stop shall be compatible with the drilling machine to be used. 1. Service Clamp: Cast iron or ductile iron with gasket and AWWA C800 threaded outlet for corporation stop, and threaded end straps. 2. Corporation Stops: Bronze body and ground key plug, with AWWA C800 threaded inlet and outlet to match service piping material. 3. Manifold: Copper with two to four inlets, as required, with ends matching corporation stops, and outlet matching service piping. 2.4 ANCHORAGES A. Clamps, Straps, and Washers: ASTM A 506, steel. B. Rods: ASTM A 575, steel. WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY C. Rod Couplings: ASTM A 197, malleable iron. D. Bolts: ASTM A 307, steel. E. Cast -Iron Washers: ASTM A 126, gray iron. F. Concrete Reaction Backing: Portland cement concrete mix, 3000 psi. 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. 2.5 YARD HYDRANTS A. Yard Hydrants, Sanitary Type: Nonfreeze, post type, having non -draining chamber for storing water trapped downstream of inlet valve. Hydrants shall have 1-inch inlet, integral or field -installed vacuum breaker with outlet conforming to ASME B1.20.7 for garden hose thread, brass or bronze casing and other parts in contact with water, and shall be handle or key operated. Body of the hydrant shall be of length required for installation of storage chamber below frost line. Furnish 2 keys for each key -operated hydrant. 2.6 WATER METER A. Water meter will be furnished by the utility company. B. General: Provide water meter with registration in gallons. C. Water Meter - 2 Inches and Smaller: AWWA C700, disc type, bronze case. D. Water Meter - 3 Inches and Larger: AWWA C702, compound type, bronze case. E. Remote Registration System: Utility company standards. F. Meter Box: Cast-iron body, cast-iron cover having lettering "WATER METER," and base section, of length to fit over service piping. The base section shall be open at the bottom, slotted, and may be cast iron, PVC, or a piece of clay or other pipe. 2.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed — caption in black letters "CAUTION - WATER LINE BURIED BELOW." B. Metallic -Lined Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape with metallic core, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - WATER LINE BURIED BELOW." WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY C. Nonmetallic Piping Label: Engraved plastic laminate label, for installation on the main electrical meter panel; not less than 1 inch by 3 inches, with caption "CAUTION - THIS STRUCTURE HAS A NONMETALLIC WATER SERVICE." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION OF BURIED PIPE FOUNDATION A. Grade trench bottom to provide a smooth, firm, stable, and rock -free foundation throughout the length of the piping. B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be laid and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level. C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of piping. Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill. Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve the bells of all loads and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Copper Tube: Install with wrought copper, solder joint, pressure fittings, and Sn95 Tin -Antimony solder in accordance with CDA "Copper Tube" handbook. B. Depth of Cover: Provide minimum cover over piping of 12 inches below average local frost depth or 36 inches below finished grade, whichever is greater. C. Water Main Connection: Arrange and pay for tap in water main, of size and in location as indicated, from water utility. D. Water Service Termination: Terminate water service piping 5'-0" from building foundation in location and invert as indicated. Provide temporary pipe plug for piping extension into building. E. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, by tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF VALVES A. General Application: Use mechanical joint end valves for 3-inch and larger buried installation. Use threaded and flanged end valves for installation in pits and inside building. Use bronze corporation stops and valves, with ends compatible to piping, for 2-inch and smaller installation. B. AWWA-Type Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried valves WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY with stem pointing up and with cast-iron valve box. _ C. Bronze Corporation Stops and Curb Stops: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install buried curb stops with head pointed up and with cast-iron curb box. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORAGES A. Anchorages: Provide anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. 3.5 APPLICATION OF PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion -retarding material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF HYDRANTS A. Install post -type yard hydrants in pavement or with concrete anchor, and provision for drainage into drywell, as indicated. B. Install sanitary -type yard hydrants in pavement or with concrete anchor, as indicated. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF VALVE PITS AND WATER METER PIT A. Construct of poured -in -place or precast concrete of dimensions indicated, with manhole frame and cover, ladder, and drain. Provide sleeves with waterproof sleeve seals for pipe entry and exit. B. Water Meter: Install water meter in accordance with AWWA M6, in meter pit, in location and with support as indicated. Provide 3-valve bypass around meter, full size of water service piping. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFICATION A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tape during back -filling of trench for underground water service piping. Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly over piping. B. Attach nonmetallic piping label permanently to main electrical meter panel. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have sufficiently hardened. Fill pipeline 24 hours prior to testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water. WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure for 2 hours. 1. Increase pressure in 50-psi increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for one hour; decrease to 0 psi. Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for one more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within above limits. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows: 1. Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, prior to use. 2. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by the authority having jurisdiction or, in case a method is not prescribed by that authority, use the procedure described in AWWA C651, or as described below: a. Fill the system or part thereof with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system or part thereof and allow to stand for 24 hours. b. Drain the system or part thereof of the previous solution and refill with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. C. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean, potable water until chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the authority having jurisdiction. Repeat the procedure if the biological examination made by the authority shows evidence of contamination. B. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities. 3.11 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Nonrising Stem Gate Valves - 2 Inches and Smaller: Hammond Valve Corp. Jenkins Bros. Milwaukee Valve Co. Nibco Stockham Valve IB645 370 1105M T-113 w/iron HW B-103 WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 9 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY B. Tapping Valves: MANUFACTURER American Darling 565 or 865 Clow Valve F-5093 Kennedy Valve 950X Mueller -Hersey H-667 U.S. Pipe 3860 C. Yard Hydrants, Post Type: MANUFACTURER Ancon HY-600-VB Josam 71700 Series w/VB Smith, Jay R. 5910 w/VB Wade W-8610 w/VB Zurn Z-1385-5 Woodford W 34 w/VB 3.12 WATER METER SCHEDULE A. Disc -Type Water Meter: MANUFACTURER AWWA C700 Badger Meter Recordall, bronze Kent Meters C-700 BP, C-700 TP Mueller -Hersey 400, 500 Series Rockwell Intl. SR Neptune T-10 B. Compound -Type Water Meter: MANUFACTURER AWWA C702 Badger Meter Compound Recordall Kent Meters C-3000 Combo Mueller -Hersey MCT II Rockwell Intl. SRH Neptune Tru/Flo END OF SECTION 02668 WATER SERVICE PIPING 02668 - 10 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 02720 - STORM SEWERAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes storm sewerage system piping and appurtenances from a point 5 feet outside the building to the point of disposal. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation and backfill required for storm sewerage system piping and structures. 2. Division 2 Section "Water Service Piping" for valve pit and meter pit drains. 3. Division 2 Section "Sanitary Sewerage" for sanitary sewer connecting to storm sewerage system. 4. Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for cast -in -place concrete drainage structures. 5. Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Systems" for building storm drains. 6. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Systems" for building storm drains. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for drainage piping specialties. C. Shop drawings for precast concrete storm drainage manholes and catch basins, including frames, covers, and grates. D. Shop drawings for cast -in -place concrete or field -erected masonry storm drainage manholes and catch basins, including frames and covers. E. Coordination drawings showing pipe sizes, manholes and catch basins locations and elevations. Include details of underground structures and connections. Show other piping in the same trench and •clearances from storm sewerage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate structures. STORM SEWERAGE 02720 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY F. Coordination profile drawings showing storm sewerage system piping in _ elevation. Draw profiles at a horizontal scale of not less than l inch equals 50 feet and a vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet. Indicate pipe and underground structures. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing sewerage system piping. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Environmental Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of local environmental agency regulations pertaining to storm sewerage systems. B. Utility Compliance: Comply with local utility regulations and standards pertaining to storm sewerage systems. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Verify that storm sewerage _ system piping may be installed in compliance with original design and referenced standards. 1. Locate existing storm sewerage system piping and structures that are to be abandoned and closed. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate connection to public sewer with utility company. B. Coordinate with interior building storm drainage piping. C. Coordinate with other utility work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cleanouts: a. Ancon, Inc. b. Josam Co. C. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. e. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. 2. Trench Drain System: STORM SEWERAGE 02720 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY a. ACO Polymer Products, Inc. b. Innovative Plastic Products, Inc. C. PolyDrain, Inc. 3. Underground Warning Tapes: a. Allen Systems, Inc.; Reef Industries, Inc. b. Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div. C. Calpico, Inc. d. Carlton Industries, Inc. e. EMED Co., Inc. f. Seton Name Plate Co. 2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General: Provide pipe and pipe fitting materials compatible with each other. Where more than one type of materials or products is indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 679, T-1 wall thickness, bell and spigot, for elastomeric gasket joints. 1. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. C. Couplings: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and stainless steel band assembly fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes to be joined. 1. Sleeves: ASTM C 425, rubber for vitrified clay pipe; ASTM C 443, rubber for concrete pipe; ASTM C 564, rubber for cast-iron soil pipe; and ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal for plastic pipe. Sleeves for dissimilar or other pipe materials shall be compatible with pipe materials being joined. 2. Bands: Stainless steel, one at each pipe insert. 2.3 MANHOLES A. Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast reinforced concrete, of depth indicated with provision for rubber gasket joints. 1. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having a separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 2. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, 48-inch diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated. 3. Top Section: Eccentric cone type, unless concentric cone or flat -slab -top type is indicated. Top of cone to match grade rings. 4. Grade Rings: Provide 2 or 3 reinforced concrete rings, of 6 to 9 inches total thickness and match 24-inch diameter frame and cover. 5. Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber. 6. Steps: Cast into base, riser, and top sections sidewall at 12-to 16-inch intervals. 7. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. STORM SEWERAGE 02720 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 8. Channel and Bench: Concrete. B. Manhole Steps: Wide enough for an adult to place both feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off the step. 1. Material: Ductile iron or cast aluminum. C. Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, heavy-duty, -- ductile iron, 24-inch inside diameter by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch minimum width flange, and 26-inch-diameter cover, indented top design, with lettering "STORM SEWER" cast into cover. 2.4 CLEANOUTS A. General: Provide cast-iron ferrule and countersunk brass cleanout plug, with round cast-iron access frame and heavy-duty, secured, scoriated cast-iron cover. 2.5 CATCH BASINS A. Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478 or ASTM C 858, precast reinforced concrete, of depth indicated. Sections shall have provision for rubber gasket joints. Base section slab shall have minimum -- thickness of 6 inches, riser sections shall have minimum thickness of 4 inches and be 48 inches inside diameter, and top section and grade rings shall match 24-inch frame and grate, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Base Section: Base riser section and separate base slab, or base riser section with integral floor. 2. Riser Sections: Sections shall be of lengths to provide depth indicated. 3. Top Section: Flat slab type with opening to match grade rings. 4. Grade Rings: Provide 2 or 3 reinforced concrete rings, of 6 to 9 inches total thickness. 5. Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber. 6. Steps: Cast into riser sidewall at 12- to 16-inch intervals. 7. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. 8. Channel and Bench: Concrete. 9. Material: Ductile iron or cast aluminum. - B. Catch Basin Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536 Grade 60-40-18, heavy-duty, ductile iron, 24-inch inside diameter by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch minimum width flange, and 26-inch-diameter flat grate having small square or short slotted drainage openings. C. Curb Inlets: Precast concrete, brick, or other materials, of dimensions conforming to utility standards. 2.6 DRY WELLS A. General: ASTM C 858, precast reinforced perforated concrete rings, with STORM SEWERAGE 02720 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY cast -in -place concrete floor and lift -off -type concrete cover having cast -in lift rings, as indicated. Wall thickness shall be 4 inches minimum with 1-inch diameter or 1- by up to 3-inch slotted perforations arranged in rows parallel to axis of the ring. Total free area of perforations shall be approximately 15 percent of ring interior surface. Ring construction shall be designed to be self -aligning. B. General: Provide aggregate -filled dry wells as indicated. 1. Aggregate: ASTM C 33, gravel, crushed gravel, or crushed stone. 2. Film: Polyethylene sheet not less than 8 mils thick or other equivalent impervious material. 2.7 TRENCH DRAIN SYSTEM A. General: Provide modular channel trench drain system of channels, grates, and accessories, as indicated. B. Channels: Interlocking precast polymer concrete modular units, 6 inches wide, with built-in slope of 0.6 percent, and rounded inside bottom surface. C. Grates: Cast iron, heavy duty, designed to set in channel top recess without rocking or rattling. D. Accessories: Catch basins, channel caps, and other accessories of same material as channels, as indicated. 2.8 CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT A. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3,000 psi. 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. B. Reinforcement: Steel conforming to the following: 1. Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. 2.9 IDENTIFICATION A. Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid green in color with continuously printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - SEWER LINE BURIED BELOW." PART 3 - EXECUTION STORM SEWERAGE 02720 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 3.1 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR BURIED STORM SEWERAGE SYSTEMS 3.2 3.3 A. Grade trench bottom to provide a smooth, firm, stable, and rock -free foundation, throughout the length of the pipe. B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be laid, and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level. C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe. Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill. Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve the bells of all loads and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation. PIPE APPLICATIONS FOR UNDERGROUND STORM SEWERS A. Pipe Sizes 18 to 36 Inches: PVC sewer pipe. B. Pipe Sizes 15 Inches and Smaller: fittings. INSTALLATION, GENERAL PVC gasket joint sewer pipe and A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans and details) indicate the general location and arrangement of the underground storm sewerage system piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. Install the piping as indicated, to the extent practical. B. Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. C. Use manholes or catch basins for changes in direction, except where a fitting is indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, except where direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings, where different size or material of pipes and fittings are connected. Reduction of the size of piping in the direction of flow is prohibited. E. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, except where indicated otherwise. F. Extend storm sewerage system piping to connect to building storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. G. Install 1-inch-thick extruded polystyrene over underground building drain piping not under building. Width of insulation shall extend minimum of 12 inches beyond each side of pipe. Install directly over STORM SEWERAGE 02720 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY and center on pipe center line. H. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, by tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both. 3.4 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION A. Join and install PVC pipe as follows: 1. Pipe and gasketed fittings, joining with elastomeric seals in accordance with ASTM D 3212. B. Join different types of pipe with standard manufactured couplings and fittings intended for that purpose. 3.5 MANHOLES A. General: Install manholes complete with accessories as indicated. Form continuous concrete or split pipe section channel and benches between inlets and outlet. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finish surface where manholes occur in pavements. Elsewhere, set tops 3 inches above finish surface, unless otherwise indicated. B. Place precast concrete manhole sections as indicated, and install in accordance with ASTM C 891. C. Provide rubber joint gasket complying with ASTM C 443 at joints of sections. D. Apply bituminous mastic coating at joints of sections. 3.6 CLEANOUTS A. Install cleanouts and extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade as indicated. Set cleanout frame and cover in concrete block 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep, except where location is in concrete paving. Set top of cleanout 1 inch above surrounding earth grade or flush with grade when installed in paving. 3.7 CATCH BASINS A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated. B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated. 3.8 DRY WELLS A. Install as indicated, set on undisturbed native soil. B. Fill: Pack around dry well with 1- to 2-inch-size crushed rock or STORM SEWERAGE 02720 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY gravel, to minimum of 12 inches beyond dry well perimeter and full depth of dry well. 3.9 TRENCH DRAIN SYSTEM A. Install trench drains as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Embed channels in minimum of 4 inches depth of concrete around bottom and sides. 3.10 TAP CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so that finished work will conform as nearly as practicable to the requirements specified for new work. B. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye fitting plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of 3000-psi 28-day compressive -strength concrete. C. Make branch connections from side into existing 4- to 21-inch piping by removing section of existing pipe and installing wye fitting into existing piping. Encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches of 3000-psi 28-day compressive -strength concrete. D. Make branch connections from side into existing 24-inch or larger piping or to underground structures by cutting opening into existing unit sufficiently large to allow 3 inches of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall, unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground. 1. Provide concrete that will attain minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use epoxy bonding compound as interface between new and existing -- concrete and piping materials. E. Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris, concrete, or other extraneous material that may accumulate. 3.11 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM SEWERAGE SYSTEM A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping that is indicated to remain in place. Provide sufficiently strong closures to withstand hydrostatic or earth pressure that may result after ends of abandoned utilities have been closed. STORM SEWERAGE 02720 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. Close open ends of concrete or masonry utilities with not less than 8-inch-thick brick masonry bulkheads. 2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Wood plugs are not acceptable. B. Abandoned Structures: Remove structure and close open ends of the remaining piping or remove top of structure down to not less than 3 feet below final grade; fill structure with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt, to within 1 foot of top of structure remaining, and fill with concrete. 3.12 INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFICATION A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tape during back -filling of trench for underground water service piping. Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly over piping. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Perform testing of completed piping in accordance with local authorities having jurisdiction. B. Cleaning: Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. 1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. 2. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of day or whenever work stops. 3. Flush piping between manholes, if required by local authority, to remove collected debris. C. Interior Inspection: Inspect piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. 1. Make inspections after pipe between manholes and manhole locations has been installed and approximately 2 feet of backfill is in place, and again at completion of project. 2. If inspection indicates poor alignment, debris, displaced pipe, infiltration, or other defects, correct such defects and reinspect. END OF SECTION 02720 STORM SEWERAGE 02720 - 9 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 02730 - SANITARY SEWERAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sanitary sewerage system piping and appurtenances from a point 5 feet outside the building to the point of disposal. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation and backfill required for sanitary sewerage system piping and structures. 2. Division 2 Section "Storm Sewerage" for storm sewer connecting to sanitary sewerage system. 3. Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for cast -in -place concrete manholes. 4. Division 15 Section "Sanitary Drainage and Vent Systems" for building sanitary drains. S. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Systems" for building sanitary drains. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for drainage piping specialties. C. Shop drawings for precast concrete sanitary manholes, including frames and covers. D. Shop drawings for cast -in -place concrete or field -erected masonry sanitary manholes, including frames and covers. E. Coordination drawings showing pipe sizes and manholes, locations, and elevations. Include details of underground structures and connections. Show other piping in the same trench and clearances from sanitary sewerage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate structures. F. Coordination profile drawings showing sanitary sewerage system piping in elevation. Draw profiles at a horizontal scale of not less than 1 SANITARY SEWERAGE 02730 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY inch equals 50 feet and a vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet. Indicate pipe and underground structures. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing sewerage system piping. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Environmental Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of local environmental agency regulations pertaining to sanitary sewerage systems. B. Utility Compliance: Comply with local utility regulations and standards pertaining to sanitary sewerage systems. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. verify that storm sewerage system piping may be installed in compliance with original design and referenced standards. 1. Locate existing sanitary sewerage system piping and structures that are to be abandoned and closed. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate connection to public sewer with utility company. B. Coordinate with interior building sanitary drainage piping. C. Coordinate with other utility work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cleanouts: a. Ancon, Inc. b. Josam Co. C. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. e. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. 2. Underground Warning Tapes: a. Allen Systems, Inc.; Reef Industries, Inc. SANITARY SEWERAGE 02730 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY b. Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div. C. Calpico, Inc. d. Carlton Industries, Inc. e. EMED Co., Inc. f. Seton Name Plate Co. 2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General: Provide pipe and pipe fitting materials compatible with each other. Where more than one type of materials or products is indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, for solvent cement or elastomeric gasket joints. 1. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 2. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 2.3 CLEANOUTS A. General: Provide cast-iron ferrule and countersunk brass cleanout plug, with round cast-iron access frame and heavy-duty, secured, scoriated cast-iron cover. 2.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid green in color with continuously printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - SEWER LINE BURIED BELOW." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR BURIED SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS A. Grade trench bottom to provide a smooth, firm, stable, and rock -free foundation, throughout the length of the pipe. B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be laid, and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level. C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe. Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill. Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve the bells of all loads and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation. 3.2 PIPE APPLICATIONS FOR UNDERGROUND SANITARY SEWERS SANITARY SEWERAGE 02730 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Pipe Sizes 15 Inches and Smaller: PVC solvent cement joint sewer pipe and fittings. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans and details) indicate the general location and arrangement of the underground -- sanitary sewerage system piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. Install the piping as indicated, to the extent practical. B. Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. C. Use manholes for changes in direction, except where a fitting is indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, except where direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings, where different size or material of pipes and fittings are connected. Reduction of the - size of piping in the direction of flow is prohibited. E. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent, except where indicated otherwise. F. Extend sanitary sewerage system piping to connect to building sanitary drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. G. Install 1-inch-thick extruded polystyrene over underground building drain piping not under building. Width of insulation shall extend minimum of 12 inches beyond each side of pipe. Install directly over and center on pipe center line. H. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, by tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both. 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION A. Join and install PVC pipe as follows: 1. Solvent cement joint pipe and fittings, joining with solvent cement in accordance with ASTM D 2855 and ASTM F 402. 2. Installation in accordance with ASTM D 2321. B. Join different types of pipe with standard manufactured couplings and fittings intended for that purpose. 3.5 CLEANOUTS SANITARY SEWERAGE 02730 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Install cleanouts and extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade as indicated. Set cleanout frame and cover in concrete block 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep, except where location is in concrete paving. Set top of cleanout 1 inch above surrounding earth grade or flush with grade when installed in paving. 3.6 TAP CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so that finished work will conform as nearly as practicable to the requirements specified for new work. B. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye fitting plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of 3000-psi 28-day compressive -strength concrete. C. Make branch connections from side into existing 4- to 21-inch piping by removing section of existing pipe and installing wye fitting, into existing piping. Encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches of 3000-psi 28-day compressive -strength concrete. D. Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris, concrete, or other extraneous material that may accumulate. 3.7 CLOSING ABANDONED SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEM A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping that is indicated to remain in place. Provide sufficiently strong closures to withstand hydrostatic or earth pressure that may result after ends of abandoned utilities have been closed. 1. Close open ends of concrete or masonry utilities with not less than 8-inch-thick brick masonry bulkheads. 2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Wood plugs are not acceptable. B. Abandoned Structures: Remove structure and close open ends of the remaining piping, or remove top of structure down to not less than 3 feet below final grade; fill structure with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt, to within 1 foot of top of structure remaining, and fill with concrete. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFICATION A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tape during back -filling of trench for underground water service piping. Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly over piping. SANITARY SEWERAGE 02730 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Perform testing of completed piping in accordance with local authorities having jurisdiction. B. Cleaning: Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. - 1. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of day or whenever work stops. 2. Flush piping between manholes, if required by local authority, to remove collected debris. C. Interior Inspection: Inspect piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. 1. Make inspections after pipe between manholes and manhole locations has been installed and approximately 2 feet of backfill is in place, and again at completion of project. 2. If inspection indicates poor alignment, debris, displaced pipe, infiltration or other defects correct such defects, and reinspect. END OF SECTION 02730 SANITARY SEWERAGE 02730 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 02831 - FENCES AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Aluminum pickets, with concrete masonry unit piers. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for filling and grading work. 2. Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for concrete for post footings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product data in the form of manufacturer's technical data, specifications, and installation instructions for fence and accessories. 2. Shop drawings showing location of fence, piers, and accessories. 3. Samples for initial selection of color in form of manufacturer's color charts. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain fencing as complete units, including necessary erection accessories, fittings, and fastenings from a single source or manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: FENCES AND GATES 02831 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. Aluminum Fencing: a. Anchor Fence, Inc. b. BWF Fence Systems C. Security Fabricators, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Pickets: 1 inch square aluminum 6" on center. B. Aluminum grade: alloy 6005-T5, minimum yield strength of 35000 psi. _ C. Piers: 16" x 16" concrete masonry units with skim coat of stucco. 2.3 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Material: Comply with ASTM F 626, and meet or exceed specification 603.8 of the Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association Baked enameled finished aluminum to suit manufacturer's standards. Polycron III by PPG Industries of approved equal. Color: black. B. Concrete: Provide concrete consisting of Portland cement, ASTM C 150, aggregates ASTM C 33, and clean water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi. Use at least 4 sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch maximum size aggregate, maximum 3-inch slump, and 2 to 4 percent entrained air. '- PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fence in compliance with ASTM F 567. Do not begin installation and erection before final grading is completed, unless otherwise permitted. B. Excavation: Drill or hand -excavate (using post -hole digger) holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. 1. Excavate holes for each CMU pier to a minimum of 12 inches beyond each face. Place 12 inch deep, minimum, concrete footing forms on cap rock. Lay pier blocks plumb and level to the height indicated. D. Fencing: 1. Install plumb and level, with intermediate supports 5'-0" on centers. 2. Use aluminum fasteners. END OF SECTION 02831 FENCES AND GATES 02831 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 02900 - LANDSCAPE WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes provisions for the following items: 1. Trees. 2. Shrubs. 3. Plants. 4. Ground cover. 5. Lawns. 6. Soil amendments. 7. Initial maintenance of landscape materials. 8. Outdoor benches. 9. Ashtray/Trash receptacles. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1. Excavation, filling, and rough grading required to establish elevations shown on drawings is specified in Division 2 Section, "Earthwork." 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Subcontract landscape work to a single firm specializing in landscape work. B. Source Quality Control: 1. General: Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by governing authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials. 2. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not obtainable, submit proof of non -availability to Architect, together with proposal for use of equivalent material. 3. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer's certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable. 4. Topsoil: Before delivery of topsoil, furnish Architect with written statement giving location of properties from which topsoil is to LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY be obtained, names and addresses of owners, depth to be stripped, and crops grown during past 2 years. 5. Trees, Shrubs and Plants: Provide trees, shrubs, and plants of quantity, size, genus, species, and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock". Provide healthy, vigorous stock, grown in recognized nursery in accordance with good horticultural practice and free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun -scald, injuries, abrasions, or disfigurement. 6. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. a. Where formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs are shown, select stock for uniform height and spread, and label with number to assure symmetry in planting. 7. Inspection: The Architect may inspect trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site before planting, for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality. Architect retains right to further inspect trees and shrubs for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects, and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from project site. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Plant and Material Certifications: 1. Certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. — 2. Manufacturer's or vendor's certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials. 3. Label data substantiating that plants, trees, shrubs and planting materials comply with specified requirements. 4. Seed vendor's certified statement for each grass seed mixture required, stating botanical and common name, percentages by weight, and percentages of purity, germination, and weed seed for each grass seed species. C. Maintenance Instructions: Typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of landscape work for one full year. Submit prior to expiration of required maintenance period(s). 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site. LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY B. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within 24 hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking of rolled strips. C. Trees and Shrubs: Provide freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery unless otherwise approved by Architect. Do not bend or bind -tie trees or shrubs in such manner as to damage bark, break branches, or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. Do not drop balled and burlapped stock during delivery. D. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist by covering with mulch, burlap or other acceptable means of retaining moisture. E. Do not remove container -grown stock from containers until planting time. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned. B. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Architect before planting. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Planting Time: Proceed with, and complete landscape work as rapidly as portions of site become available, working within seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required. 1. Plant or install materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant material required. 2. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of substantial completion. B. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to planting of lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. If planting of trees and shrubs occurs after lawn work, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from planting operations. 1.8 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY A. Warranty lawns through specified lawn maintenance period, and until final acceptance. B. Warranty trees and shrubs, for a period of one year after date of LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY substantial completion, against defects including death and _ unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from neglect by Owner, abuse or damage by others, or unusual phenomena or incidents which are beyond Landscape Installers control. C. Remove and replace trees, shrubs, or other plants found to be dead or in unhealthy condition during warranty period. Make replacements during growth season following end of warranty period. Replace trees and shrubs which are in doubtful condition at end of warranty period; unless, in opinion of Architect, it is advisable to extend warranty period for a full growing season. 1. Another warranty inspection will be conducted at end of extended warranty period, if any, to determine acceptance or rejection. Only one replacement (per tree, shrub or plant) will be required at end of warranty period, except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with specified requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil for landscape work is not available at site and must be furnished as specified. B. Provide new topsoil that is fertile, friable, natural loam, surface soil, reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush, weeds and other litter, and free of roots, stumps, stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth. 1. Obtain topsoil from local sources or from areas having similar soil characteristics to that found at project site. Obtain topsoil only from naturally, well -drained sites where topsoil occurs in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Do not obtain from bogs or marshes. 2.2 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: Natural dolomitic limestone containing not less than 85 percent of total carbonates with a minimum of 30 percent magnesium carbonates, ground so that not less than 90 percent passes a 10-mesh sieve and not less than 50 percent passes a 100-mesh sieve. B. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade. C. Peat Humus: Finely divided peat, so completely decomposed and free of fibers that its biological identity is lost. Provide in granular form, free of hard lumps and with pH range suitable for intended use. D. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw, finely ground; 4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric acid. E. Superphosphate: Soluble mixture of treated minerals; 20 percent LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY available phosphoric acid. F. Sand: Clean, washed sand, free of toxic materials. G. Perlite: Conforming to National Bureau of Standards PS 23. H. Vermiculite: Horticultural grade, free of toxic substances. I. Sawdust: Rotted sawdust, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic substances and with 7.5 pounds of nitrogen uniformly mixed into each cubic yard of sawdust. J. Manure: Well rotted, unleached stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials and containing no chemicals or ingredients harmful to plants. K. Mulch: Organic mulch free from deleterious materials and suitable for top dressing of trees, shrubs, or plants and consisting of one of the following: 1. Shredded hardwood 2. Ground or shredded bark 3. Wood chips 4. Pine needles 5. Peanut, pecan and cocoabean shells L. Commercial Fertilizer: Complete fertilizer of neutral character, with some elements derived from organic sources and containing following percentages of available plant nutrients: 1. For trees and shrubs, provide fertilizer with not less than 5 percent total nitrogen, 10 percent available phosphoric acid and 5 percent soluble potash. 2. For lawns, provide fertilizer with percentage of nitrogen required to provide not less than 1 pound of actual nitrogen per 1,000 sq. ft. of lawn area and not less than 4 percent phosphoric acid and 2 percent potassium. Provide nitrogen in a form that will be available to lawn during initial period of growth; at least 50 percent of nitrogen to be organic form. 2.3 PLANT MATERIALS A. Quality: Provide trees, shrubs, and other plants of size, genus, species, and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock". B. Deciduous Trees: Provide trees of height and caliper scheduled or shown and with branching configuration recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and species required. Provide single stem trees except where special forms are shown or listed. 1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) deciduous trees. 2. Container grown deciduous trees will be acceptable in lieu of LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY balled and burlapped deciduous trees subject to specified limitations of ANSI Z60.1 for container stock. C. Deciduous Shrubs: Provide shrubs of the height shown or listed and with not less than minimum number of canes required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and height of shrub required. 1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) deciduous shrubs. 2. Container grown deciduous shrubs will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped deciduous shrubs subject to specified limitations for container grown stock. D. Coniferous and Broadleafed Evergreens: Provide evergreens of sizes shown or listed. Dimensions indicate minimum spread for spreading and semi -spreading type evergreens and height for other types, such as globe, dwarf, cone, pyramidal, broad upright, and columnar. Provide normal quality evergreens with well balanced form complying with requirements for other size relationships to the primary dimension shown. 1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) evergreens. 2. Container grown evergreens will be acceptable, subject to specified limitations for container grown stock. 2.4 GRASS MATERIALS A. Grass Seed: Provide fresh, clean, new -crop seed complying with tolerance for purity and germination established by Official Seed Analysts of North America. Provide seed mixture composed of grass species, proportions and minimum percentages of purity, germination, and maximum 5 percentage of weed seed, as specified. -' B. Sod: Provide strongly rooted sod, not less than 2 years old, free of weeds and undesirable native grasses, and machine cut to pad thickness of 3/4 inch (plus or minus 1/4 inch), excluding top growth and thatch. Provide only sod capable of vigorous growth and development when planted (viable, not dormant). 1. Provide sod of uniform pad sizes with maximum 5 percent deviation in either length or width. Broken pads or pads with uneven ends will not be acceptable. Sod pads incapable of supporting their own weight when suspended vertically with a firm grasp on upper 10 percent of pad will be rejected. 2. Provide sod composed principally of following: a. St. Augustinegrass (Stenotaphrum secundatum). C. Sod Sprigs: Provide healthy living stems with attached roots of following grasses: 1. St. Augustinegrass (stenotaphrum secundatum). LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2.5 GROUND COVER A. Provide plants established and well rooted in removable containers or integral peat pots and with not less than minimum number and length of runners required by ANSI Z60.1 for the pot size shown or listed. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS A. Wood Headers and Edging: Of sizes shown and following wood species. 1. Southern Pine, pressure treated with water -borne preservative for ground contact use complying with AWPB LP-22. 2. Provide wood stakes of the same species, 2" by 2" by 24" long and with galvanized nails for anchoring headers and edging. B. Steel Edging: Commercial steel edging of size shown on drawings fabricated in sections with loops pressed from or welded to face of sections at 21- 6" o.c. to receive stakes. Provide tapered steel stakes 16 inches long. Finish edging sections and stakes with manufacturer's standard green -black paint. C. Gravel: Water -worn, hard, durable gravel, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign substances, and of following size range and color: 1. Size Range: 3 inches maximum, 1-1/2 inches minimum. 2. Size Range: 1-1/2 inches maximum, 3/4 inch minimum. 3. Size Range: 3/8 inch maximum, 1/8 inch minimum (pea gravel). 4. Color: Uniform tan -beige color range acceptable to Architect. 5. Color: Readily -available natural gravel color range. D. Anti -Erosion Mulch: Provide clean, seed -free salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley. E. Anti -Desiccant: Emulsion type, film -forming agent designed to permit transpiration, but retard excessive loss of moisture from plants. Deliver in manufacturer's fully identified containers and mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Plastic Sheet: Black, weather -resistant polyethylene sheeting, 0.008 inch (8-mils) thick. G. Filtration/Separation Fabric: Water permeable filtration fabric of fiberglass or polypropylene fabric. H. Wrapping: Tree -wrap tape not less than 4 inches wide, designed to prevent borer damage and winter freezing. I. Stakes and Guys: Provide stakes and deadmen of sound new hardwood, treated softwood, or redwood, free of knot holes and other defects. Provide wire ties and guys of 2-strand, twisted, pliable galvanized iron wire, not lighter than 12 ga. with zinc -coated turnbuckles. Provide not less than 1/2 inch diameter rubber or plastic hose, cut to required lengths and of uniform color, material, and size to protect tree trunks LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY from damage by wires. J. EAST ENTRY PORTICO: 1. (2) 6 foot Benches - Model C-10 (Classic Series), as manufactured by Victor Stanley, Inc. 2. (2) Ashtray/Trash receptacles - #ST/Open/AUST Cast Stone, Color #S1 Slate Grey. K. COURTYARD: 1. (6) 6 foot Benches - Model C-10 (Classic Series), as manufactured by Victor Stanley, Inc. 2. (2) 8 foot Table - Model C-9 (Classic Series), as manufactured by Victor Stanley, Inc. 3. (4) 8 foot Benches - Model C-7 as manufactured by Victor Stanley, Inc. 4. (8) Ashtray/Trash receptacles - #ST/Open/AUST Cast Stone, Color #S1 Slate Grey. K. MINI PARK @ SOUTHWEST CORNER: 1. (2) 6 foot Benches - Model 2 (Homestead Series), as manufactured by Victor Stanley, Inc. 2. (1) Wood Builders Swing - Model #11-01 (Little Tykes Commercial Play System. 3. (1) Wood Builders Swing - Model #11-02 (Little Tykes Commercial Play System. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION - GENERAL A. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations and outline areas and secure Architect's acceptance before start of planting work. Make minor adjustments as may be required. 3.2 PREPARATION OF PLANTING SOIL A. Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth. B. Mix specified soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates specified. Delay mixing of fertilizer if planting will not follow placing of planting soil within a few days. 1. "Schedule of Planting Soil Mixture Requirements" is attached at end of this section. _ C. For pit and trench type backfill, mix planting soil prior to backfilling, and stockpile at site. LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY D. For planting beds and lawns, mix planting soil either prior to planting or apply on surface of topsoil and mix thoroughly before planting. 1. Mix lime with dry soil prior to mixing of fertilizer. 2. Prevent lime from contacting roots of acid -loving plants. 3. Apply phosphoric acid fertilizer (other than that constituting a portion of complete fertilizers) directly to subgrade before applying planting soil and tilling. 3.3 PREPARATION FOR PLANTING LAWNS A. Loosen subgrade of lawn areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones measuring over 1-1/2 inches in any dimension. Remove sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. 1. Spread top soil to minimum depth required to meet lines, grades, and elevations shown, after light rolling and natural settlement. Add specified soil amendments and mix thoroughly into upper 4 inches of topsoil. 2. Place approximately 1/2 of total amount of top soil required. Work into top of loosened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place remainder of planting soil. Add specified soil amendments and mix thoroughly into upper 4 inches of topsoil. B. Preparation of Unchanged Grades: Where lawns are to be planted in areas that have not been altered or disturbed by excavating, grading, or stripping operations, prepare soil for lawn planting as follows: Till to a depth of not less than 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers as specified. Remove high areas and fill in depressions. Till soil to a homogenous mixture of fine texture, free of lumps, clods, stones, roots and other extraneous matter. 1. Prior to preparation of unchanged areas, remove existing grass, vegetation and turf. Dispose of such material outside of Owner's property. Do not turn existing vegetation over into soil being prepare for lawns. 2. Allow for sod thickness in areas to be sodded. 3. Apply specified commercial fertilizer at rates specified and thoroughly mix into upper 2 inches of topsoil. Delay application of fertilizer if lawn planting will not follow within a few days. a. "Schedule of Planting Soil Mixture Requirements" indicating required rate of fertilizer application, is attached at end of this section. C. Fine grade lawn areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll, rake, and drag lawn areas, remove ridges and fill depressions, as required to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas which can be planted immediately after grading. D. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 9 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY not create a muddy soil condition. E. Restore lawn areas to specified condition, if eroded or otherwise disturbed, after fine grading and prior to planting. 3.4 PREPARATION OF PLANTING BEDS A. Loosen subgrade of planting bed areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches using a culti-mulcher or similar equipment. Remove stones measuring over 1 1/2 inches in any dimension. Remove sticks, stones, rubbish, and other extraneous matter. B. Spread planting soil mixture to minimum depth required to meet lines, grades, and elevations shown, after light rolling and natural settlement. Place approximately 1/2 of total amount of planting soil required. Work into top of loosened subgrade to create a transition layer, then place remainder of the planting soil. C. Dig beds not less than 8 inches deep and mix with specified soil amendments and fertilizers. D. Remove 8 inches to 10 inches of soil and replace with prepared planting soil mixture. E. Planters: Place not less than 4 inch layer of gravel in bottom of planters, install filtration/separation fabric and fill with planting soil mixture consisting of 1 part topsoil, 1 part course sand, 1 part peat humus, and 3 lbs. dolomitic limestone per cubic yard of mix. Place soil in lightly compacted layers to an elevation 1-1/2 inches below top of planter allowing for natural settlement. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS A. Excavate pits, beds, and trenches with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to provide proper drainage. Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of excavation. 1. For balled and burlapped (B&B trees and shrubs), make excavations at least half again as wide as the ball diameter and equal to the ball depth, plus following allowance for setting of ball on a layer of compacted backfill: a. Allow for 3 inch thick setting layer of planting soil mixture. 2. For container grown stock, excavate as specified for balled and burlapped stock, adjusted to size of container width and depth. B. Dispose of subsoil removed from planting excavations. Do not mix with planting soil or use as backfill. C. Fill excavations for trees and shrubs with water and allow water to percolate out prior to planting. LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 10 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 3.6 PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS A. Set balled and burlapped (B&B) stock on layer of compacted planting soil mixture, plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball at same elevation as adjacent finished landscape grades. Remove burlap from sides of balls; retain on bottoms. When set, place additional backfill around base and sides of ball, and work each layer to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. When excavation is approximately 2/3 full, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing final layer of backfill. B. Set container grown stock, as specified, for balled burlapped stock, except cut cans on 2 sides with an approved can cutter; remove bottoms of wooden boxes after partial backfilling so as not to damage root balls. C. Dish top of backfill to allow for mulching. D. Mulch pits, trenches, and planted areas. Provide not less than following thickness of mulch, and work into top of backfill and finish level with adjacent finish grades. 1. Provide 4 inches thickness of mulch. E. Apply anti -desiccant, using power spray, to provide an adequate film over trunks, branches, stems, twigs and foliage. 1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved when in full -leaf, spray with anti -desiccant at nursery before moving and spray again 2 weeks after planting. F. Prune, thin out, and shape trees and shrubs in accordance with standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise directed by Architect, do not cut tree leaders, and remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees, if any. Prune shrubs to retain natural character. G. Remove and replace excessively pruned or misformed stock resulting from improper pruning. H. Wrap tree trunks of 2 inches caliper and larger. Start at ground and cover trunk to height of first branches and securely attach. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning and insect infestation and take corrective measures before wrapping. I. Guy and stake trees immediately after planting, as indicated. 3.7 SODDING NEW LAWNS A. Lay sod within 24 hours from time of stripping. Do not plant dormant sod or if ground is frozen. B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 11 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY sides of sod strips; do not overlap. Stagger strips to offset joints — in adjacent courses. Work from boards to avoid damage to subgrade or sod. Tamp or roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade. Work sifted soil into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering of adjacent grass. 1. Anchor sod on slopes with wood pegs to prevent slippage. C. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after planting. 3.8 PLANTING GROUND COVER A. Space ground cover plants as indicated or scheduled. B. Space ground cover plants not more than 24 inches o.c. C. Dig holes large enough to allow for spreading of roots and backfill with planting soil. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover crowns of plants with wet soils. D. Mulch areas between ground cover plants; place not less than 2 inches thick. 3.9 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE WORK A. Install wood headers and edgings where indicated. Anchor with wood stakes spaced not more than 3 feet o.c., and driven at least 1 inch below top elevation of header or edging. Use 2 galvanized nails per stake to fasten headers and edging, and clinch point of each nail. B. Install steel edging where indicated. Anchor with steel stakes spaced not more than 3 feet o.c., and driven at least 1 inch below top elevation of edging. C. Place gravel beds where indicated. Compact soil subgrades before placing gravel. 1. Lay 8-mil polyethylene plastic film continuously over compacted subgrade prior to placing gravel. Overlap edges 4 inches at joints between sheets. 3.10 MAINTENANCE A. Begin maintenance immediately after planting. B. Maintain trees, shrubs, and other plants by pruning, cultivating, and weeding as required for healthy growth. Restore planting saucers. Tighten and repair stake and guy supports and reset trees and shrubs to proper grades or vertical position as required. Restore or replace damaged wrappings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 12 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY insects and disease. C. Maintain lawns for not less than the period stated below, and longer as required to establish an acceptable lawn. 1. Sodded lawns, not less than 30 days after substantial completion. D. Maintain lawns by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, and other operations such as rolling, regrading and replanting as required to establish a smooth, acceptable lawn, free of eroded or bare areas. 3.11 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During landscape work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed. 3.12 INSTALLATION OF SWINGS, BENCHES, TABLES AND ASHTRAYS A. Install all moveable equipment after Landscape Work is complete. 3.13 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. When landscape work is completed, including maintenance, Architect will, upon request, make an inspection to determine acceptability. 1. Landscape work may be inspected for acceptance in portions as agreeable to Architect, provided each portion of work offered for inspection is complete, including maintenance. B. When inspected landscape work does not comply with requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until reinspected by Architect and found to be acceptable. Remove rejected plants and materials promptly from project site. 3.14 SCHEDULE OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Schedule of plant materials and planting diagrams are on the following five pages. B. Furnish and install the following plants: Quantity Type Size 40 Potterweed 30 gallon 50 Croton (mixed colors) 7 gallon 50 Key Lilies 3 gallon LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 13 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY LANDSCAPING PROVIDED EXTERIOR SITE Key: wd.=grey wood TREES o.a.=overall NO. DESCRIPTION 2 ROYAL PALMS 16-20' wd. min. 6 SILVER BUTTONWOOD 6-8' o.a. 15 WHITE GEIGER 4-6' o.a. 5 GUMBO LIMBO 8/10' o.a. 2 LIGNUM VITAE 7 gallon 3 BLOLLY 7 gallon 28 SATIN LEAF 10 o.a. 6 THATCH PALM 6-10' o.a. 1 WILD CINNAMON 7 gallon 2 BLACK IRONWOOD 6-8' o.a. 2 RED STOPPER 7 gallon 9 SABAL PALMS varying heights, 3 @ 10' c.t. 3 @ 14' c.t. 3@16'c.t. 12 TRAVELER PALMS 7 gallon, full 92 SUBTOTAL PLANT UNITS 92 X 10 = 920 UNITS SHRUBS/GROUND COVER 60 WILD COFFEE 3 gallon 25 SILVER PALMETTO 3 gallon 45 JAMAICAN CAPERS 4' o.a., full 12 ZAMIA PALM 2' x 2' minimum 132 SUBTOTAL PLANT UNITS 132 X 3 = 396 UNITS LANTANA 1 gallon (as shown on Drawings) TOTAL PLANT UNITS (SITE) 1316 UNITS INTERIOR (COURTYARD) TREES - - NO. DESCRIPTION 1 PIGEON PLUM 8-10' o.a. 1 BLACK IRONWOOD 12' o.a. 1 BUCCANEER PALM T c.t. minimum 5 THRINAX RADIATA 6-8' o.a. 1 THRINAX MORISII 6-8' o.a. 1 TRAVELER PALM 10 SUBTOTAL PLANT UNIT 10 X 10 = 100 UNITS SHRUBS/GROUND COVER - 26 MONSTERA 1 gallon or well rooted cuttings 3 ANTHERIUM "HOOKERI" 3 or 7 gallon 3 CROTON STOPLIGHT 7 gallon 3 CORDYLINE 7 gallon 2 PHILODENDRON WILSONII 3 gallon MONDO GRASS 6" pot, full (as shown on Drawings) WART FERN 1 gallon (as shown on Drawings) --- _ 37 SUBTOTAL PANT UNITS 37 X 3 = 111 UNITS LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 14 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY TOTAL PLANT UNITS (COURTYARD) 211 UNITS TOTAL PR TOTAL PROJECT PLANT UNITS 1527 NOTE: ALL MATERIAL TO BE FLORIDA NO. 1 STOCK (ON SINGLE STEM - SINGLE LEADER) LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS Interior Courtyard Provide irrigation and landscape sighting throughout courtyard. Exterior Provide irrigation throughout entire site. Also provide required irrigation system for off site landscaping [parking strip islands (Simonton Street(]. General Plumbing subcontractor to coordinate water supply for proposed irrigation as noted above. LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 15 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY LANDSCAPE CONSTRUCTION NOTES: CICISTINC TRCCS TO RCMAIN (AS OCSICNATCO ON PLANS) SHALL BC PROTCCTCO IN ACCOROANCC WITH MONROC COUNTY COOLS ANO THC fLOR10A DIVISION OF fORCSTRY Taff ►R_ OT_CC710H uw HUAI fpR A 111 of R< � nrY 1 OPI_R-. PRIOR TO TNC COu4CNCC"CNT Of ANY CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY, --- APPROY[O TRC[ PROTECTION eARRI[RS SHALL BC PLACCO ALONG TNC ORIPLINC Of PROTCCTCO ARCAS.VCCCTATON WITHiN PROTCCTCO ARCAS SMALL OC PROPCRLY PRUNNCO, WCCOCO (INCLUO/NC CKOIRC TRCATMCNT), fCRTILLIZCO ANO HULCHCO. PROTCCTCO ARCAS. BUrrcRYAROS AND ARCAS WITHOUT IRRIGATION SMALL BC WATCRCO PCRI00ICALLY AMC OURINC OROVGHT THROUGHOUT THC CONTRACT PCRI00. THC CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT A TIME/ AMOUNT WATCRINC SCHCOVLC FOR THC CHTIRC CONTRACT P[RI00. THC AOOVC RFOUIRCO TASKS SHALL BC ITCMIZCO AND INCLUOCD WITHIN TM[ OVCRALL LANOSCAPC BUOOCT. ALL CONTRACTORS ARC RCSPOMSIBLC fOR ANY OAMAOC TO PROTCCTCO VCCCTATION, CAVSCO Br TN[IR NCGLICCNf OURINC THC CONTRACT PCRI00. PRIOR TO PLANT MATCR/AL/IRRIGATION INSTALLATION, THC CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THC SITC PRIMC CONTRACTOR, THC OWNCR'S R[PRCSCNTATIVC FOR AN ON-SITC OCTCRMIMATION Of LANDSCAPE ITCM/VTIUTY CONEUCTS. THC LANOSCAPC ARCHITCCT SMALL ASSIST THC CONTRACTOR IN THC RCSOLVTION OF ALL VNOCRCROUNO/OVCRIICAO L.AHOSCAPC ITCM VTIUTY COHrUCTS. THC LJ MOSCA►C AND IRRIGATION CONTRACTORS SHALL BC FULLY RCSPONSIBLC FOR TMCIR WORK ANO ACCOUNTABLC FOR ALL OAMACC OR DISRUPTION Of SAID UTILITIES OR OTHCR SITC WORK OUC TO THCIR NCCUCCNCC. ALL PROPOSCO PLANT MATCRIAL SHALL BC TRUC TO SPCCICS/VARICTY IN ACCORDANCC WITH HORTUS TNIRO (BAILCY. t-M.. MCMILLAN, IC- YORK. LA.TCST COITION). ALL PROPOSCp PLANT MATCRIAL SHALL IACCT OR CXCCCO THC SPECIFICATIONS SC FOR H IN THC CVRRCHT rLOR10A OCPARTMCNT OF AGRICULTURC. DIVISION OF PLANT INDUSTRY RY P1 AMT(LATCST COITION). ALL PROPOSCO AL PLANT MATCRIAL .SHALL BC Or CRAOC rLOR10A NO. I- OR BCTTC R. ALL PROPOSCO PLANT MATCRIAL IS SUeJCCT TO APPROVAL BY THC OWNER ANO THC LAHCRIAPC ARCHITCCT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION ON SITC. ANY PLANT MATCRIAL NOT MCCTtMC MINIMAL CRAOCS OR STANDARDS SHALL BC SUITABLY RCPLACCO DURING THC CSTABLISHMCNT PCRIOO,ANO AT TMC CONTRACTOR'S CXPCNSC. COPICS Or ALL L—OSCAPC RCLATCO SHIPPINC MAHIf CSTS. NVRSCRY IT R CCEIPTS AND CHEMICAL CERTIFICATIONS/APPLtCAT10N RATES SHALL OC TRANSMITTCD TO THC OWNER AND THC LANOSCAPC ARCHITCCT. CHEMICALS (IN THCIR ORIGINAL CONTAINCRS) SHALL BC STORCO IN APPROVCD ARCAS AND BY APPROVCO MCTHOOS. ALL CHCUICALS SHALL BC APPLICO I STRA ICT ACCOROANCC WITH STATC/COUNTY RCCULTIONS AND THC MANUrACTURCR'S RCCOMMCNOATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OC FULLY LIAOLC ANO RCSPONSIOLC FOR ANY CNVIRONUCNTAL RCUCOIAT10N RCOUIRCO BY HIS NCCLIGCNT HANOUNc Or SAID AGRICULTURAL CHCMICALS. PLANTING PLAN NOTATIONS OCSICNATC THC KEY NUMBCR FOR CCNVS/SPCCICS CLASSIFICATION, AS SHOWN IN THC SUMMARY Or PLA HT MATERIALS. THC SCCOND (TOP LINO) NOTATION STATCS THE QUANTITY OF A PARTICULAR PUNT MATCRIAL AT TH[ LOCATION SHOWN. LOWCR NOTATIONS OCNOTC THC PLANT SPACING ON—CCNTCR (OC) OR FIELD ADJUST (rA) TO OPTIMUM SITC CONDITIONS. THC OWNER AND LANDSCAPE ARCHITCCT SHALL BE OTIr ICO FOR THC APPROVAL Or ANY RCOUCSTCO SUBSTITUTION/RELOCATION Of PLANT MATCRIAL THE CONTRACTOR IS RCSPONSISLC FOR SOIL TESTING ANO THC APPLICATION Or SOIL AMCNDMCNTS RECOMUCNOCD BY THC LAO A 0 THC LAND— ARCHITCCT, 501LS TCSTCD SHALL INCLUOC BOTH ON—SITC TOPSOIL TO BE HCOR1On ATCO AS SPCc1r1ED AND RCOVIRCD PLANTINC MIKTVRC, COPICS Or RCPORTS SHALL BC TRANSMITTCO TO TNC OWNER AND THC LANOSCAPIC ARCNITCCT. SOIL TCSTIHC SHALL ALSO OC PERrORMCD WITHIN THIRTY (30) DAYS Or PROJCCT COMPLCTION TO CNSURC SUITABILITY. PLANTING UIXMTURE SHALL CONSIST Or NATIVC ORGANIC SOIL ALONC OR A 50/50 MIXTURC Or NATIVC ORGANIC SOIL AND SHARP, CLEAN OUILDCRS ..AND FOR PNT KCY NUMBERS 2. 3. ]. 6. 7, C. O. 10. 2]. 2c. A], INCHES IN ]O, 51, 32 AND ]A, MULCH SHAH OC PLACED AT A U.0 OF FOUR (�) OCPTH ANO SHALL OE COMPOSED OF SNRCOOCD CYPRESS WITH GOOD RCO COLOR. ANY ARCAS NOT PLANTED OR SOODCO SMALL BC MULCHED. NO BARE SPOTS ALLOWCD ON SITE. PRCSCRVCD NATIVC HAMMOCK ARCAS SHALL OC FRCE Or CXOTICS AND CARCFULLY DRCSSCD WITH Two (2) INCHCS Or SHRCDOCD PINC BARK. TRCC rCRTILIZCR SHALL BC 21 CRAM OSMOCOTC ACRA—FORM PCLLCTS OR APPROVCO COUIVALENT. PALMS SHALL OC FERTIL12CD WITH OSMOCOTC PLUS I., FLORIDA. 00 OCCRCC RCLCASE RATC, OR APPROVCO COUIVALCNT. SHRVOS. PLANTINC BEDS. 500 AND ORGANIC SOIL/PLANTING MIXTURC SHALL DC TREATED WITH OSMOCOTC C-6-12 SLOW RCLEASC FCRTILIZCR.OR APPROVCD COUIVALCNT. ALL rCRTILIZCRS SHALL OC APPLI Co IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANVrACTURCR'S RCCOM CHOCO AMOUNTS AND MCTHOOS. rCRTILIZCR SHALL OC APPLIED AT THC TIME Or PLANTING. PLANTING MIXTURC. MULCH AND PLANTING OCDS/AREAMS SHALL BC fRCC Or ROCKS, DEBRIS. CXOTIC'SCCDS/PLANT PARTS NOXIOUS POSTS AND OISCAS[. Soo IN LANOSCAPEO ARCAS SHALL BC ST. AUCUSTINC 'PALMCTTO'. INSTALLED ON PROPERLY PREPARCO BCD AND 1H ALTCRNATINC JOINT ROWS. 04STURGED POND AREAS SHALL BC HYOROSECOCO WITH COMMON OURMUDAGRASS. THC CSTAOLISHMCHT PERIOD FOR THIS PROJECT SHALL OC TWO (2) YCARS FROM THC RATC Or FINAL LANDSCAPE' CONTRACT APPROVAL_ THE O WNCR SHALL RCOUIRC THE POSTING OF A PCRFORMAHCC BOND TO CNSURC THE REPLACCMCHT Or ANY LANDSCAPC CONTRACT ITEMS THAT FAIL TO MCCT THC PLANS/SPCCIrICAT10NS AND/OR THC MONROC COUNTY COOC WITHIN THIS TWO (2) YCAR PERIOD. ALL PLANT MATCRIAL SHALL BC PLACCO IN ITS PROPER LOCATION UPON RECEIPT. THE OWNER AND THC LAHOSCAPC ARCHITCCT SHALL BE NOTIFICr TO APPROVC ANY PROPOSCO PLANT MATCRIAL SUBSTITUTIONS AND nCLO RCVISIONS. ALL PLANT MATCRIAL TRANSPORTATION AND TRANSPLANTATION METHODS SHALL BC IN ACCOROANCC WITH THE FLORIDA OCPARTMCNT OF ACRICULTVRC - DIVISION Or PLANT INDUSTRY RCCVLATIONS. IRRIGATION NOTES Irrigation System shall be installed as required on the. Plan and strictly to the Manufacturer's Specifications. Components, valves and controls shall be NELSON 117ow gallonage" or equivalent as approved by F(onroe County, 'the Owners and the Landscape Architect. All lines shall be Schedule 40 PVC and installed with a minimum cover of one half (0.5) foot. Shrub spray heads are to be placed where required and secured to angle -iron stakes of sufficient length, with two (2) SS clamps. Visible stakes and risers shall be painted flat black. All irrigated trees on -site shall also be equipped with bubbler devices and all risers shall be placed a minimum of one (1) foot in from adjacent paved areas. Jh - .on ra for shal ] submit full Shoo Drawinoz, detailing the proposed specific irrigation system components, upon system water source determination and on -site layout as related to installed post -landscape construction conditions. Installed system shall be adjusted so as to prevent the spray of water on paved surfaces. Plant material in non -irrigated areas shall be watered on a schedule that will ensure survival during the contract period and to guarantee that the material meets the standards for Final Landscape Item Approval. Water source for System shall be determined by the Engineer. The installed Irrigation System shall also be warranted for the two (2) year establishment period. LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 16 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY • SCT TRUNK o PRN. CgpwINC LCVCL NOTE: PLACE POINT OF SUPPORT 0 1/3 TRUNK HCICHT OR SET /�3 REO-D,. TYP. n LAYERS BURLAP WRAP TOE —NAIL [/l6C—CALVE] TIMBERS OHL (— — P[«CTMTC TANK) ALL TRANSPORT FROND CUTS SHALL BC IN ACCORDANCE WITH FLORIDA DIV. OF PLANT INDUSTRY 1 CTNOOS AND SP C CIFICATIONS (SEC NOTCS) TIMBCR PAO CLEATS (cL.... (s.l Tc Tauww .. .a.cc .u. ro.•) 3 [2�".MAS RCO.O.] TIMBER BRACES (• 12P A.—. "... 10 FIT) a' MULCH, TYP. ^3 [Z •a-rl6'] BRACE PROS (IT. •R I.s• •CI.Ov OIIAOC-TY►,) PLANTINO MIXTURE BOTTOM- 6-MIH, SOIL CKIST. SUBCRAOC�-./ SIDCS-6'MIN. SOIL (T,'. FOR AUJ TALL PALM PLANTING DETAIL NTS NOTE: CEf:t-r^IN FIEL_O OESICNA•TEO P,-,L_MS ,A,NCLEO FOR TIL_TEO) OuRING IN STA, L IJaTI ON LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 17 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SCT TRUNK o PRCV. CROMANC LCVCL (Rcvovc ww 1 ♦— Tor' or —A.) RC,". RUUBER HOSC R'10(GAIV.)WIRC TV RNB VGKIC(G ALV.) ' T r.Y N•w000/M.CAR� 4-MULCH (SEC NOTCS) I �--10R.+CO —TER RING I_ /. --ice PREPAR CO SOIL 1.11%TYRE OOTTOM—I2"11MIN. SPOIL CXIST. SUBCRAOC (oMLL —c Ir wcoo.) IOCS—!'YIN. SOIL Cr . 1— —3 TREE PLANTING DETAIL NITS r SET STEM Y PRCv. CROWING LCVCL 1-CIA. BAMBOO PAOI PARED SOIL MIXTURC "MULCH (MCC NOTES). F-ORYCD WATER RING —... ow.oc BOTTOM-6"VAN. :OIL -i CXISRADC�� (swlu NOLc v wco•o.) SIOCS—�" Mln. SOIL (T.r. row Aua SMALL TREE/LARGE SHRUB PLANTING DETAIL NTS OTCI SMALL SHRUS PLANTING AS ASOVC. MIN. SOIL AROUNO I NO STAKC LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 18 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY END OF SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 19 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Concrete paving and walks are specified in Division 2. C. Precast concrete is specified in other Division 3 Sections. D. Mechanical finishes and concrete floor toppings are specified in other Division 3 Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry -shake finish materials, and others as requested by Architect. C. Shop drawings for reinforcement, prepared by registered Professional Engineer for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI SP-66 (88), "ACI Detailing Manual," showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. D. Shop drawings for formwork, prepared by a registered Professional Engineer for fabrication and erection of forms for specific finished concrete surfaces. Show form construction including jointing, special form joint or reveals, location and pattern of form tie placement, and other items that affect exposed concrete visually. 1. Architect's review is for general architectural applications and features only. Design of formwork for structural stability and efficiency is Contractor's responsibility. E. Samples of materials as requested by Architect, including names, CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY sources, and descriptions, as follows: 1. Normal weight aggregates. 2. Fibrous reinforcement. 3. Reglets. 4. Waterstops. 5. Vapor retarder. F. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test. G. Materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect. Materials certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements. H. Minutes of pre -construction conference. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice." B. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a testing laboratory acceptable to Architect to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed work, shall be done at Contractor's expense. D. Pre -Construction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" and the following. E. At least 35 days prior to submittal of design mixes, conduct a meeting to review detailed requirements for preparing concrete design mixes and to determine procedures for satisfactory concrete operations. Review requirements for submittals, status of coordinating work, and availability of materials. Establish preliminary work progress schedule and procedures for materials inspection, testing, and certifications. Request that representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast -in -place concrete attend conference, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Contractor's superintendent. 2. Laboratory responsible for concrete design mixes. 3. Laboratory responsible for field quality control. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 4. Ready -mix concrete producer. 5. Concrete subcontractor. 6. Primary admixture manufacturers. 7. Architect or Owner's representative. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal -framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. 1. Use overlaid plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "A-C or B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form," Class I. 2. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood," Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edge -sealed, with each piece bearing legible inspection trademark. B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. C. Forms for Textured Finish Concrete: Units of face design, size, arrangement, and configuration to match Architect's control sample. Provide solid backing and form supports to ensure stability of textured form liners. D. Forms for Cylindrical Columns and Supports: Metal, fiberglass -reinforced plastic, or paper or fiber tubes. Provide paper or fiber tubes of laminated plies with water-resistant adhesive and wax -impregnated exterior for weather and moisture protection. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist wet concrete loads without deformation. E. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds with a maximum VOC of 350 mg/1 that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. F. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or snap -off metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to exposed surface. 1. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1-inch diameter in concrete surface. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767, Class II (2.0 oz. zinc psf) hot -dip galvanized, after fabrication and bending. C. Epoxy -Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775. D. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold -drawn steel. E. Welded Wire Fabric: Supply in flat sheets) ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric. F. Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497. G. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire -bar -type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 1. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs that are plastic protected (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel protected (CRSI, Class 2) . 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F. C. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. 1. For exterior exposed surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing spalling-causing deleterious substances. 2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 but that special tests or actual service have shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable to Architect. D. Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330. E. Water: Drinkable. F. Admixtures, General: Provide admixtures for concrete that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. G. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Air-Tite," Cormix. b. "Air -Mix" or "Perma-Air," Euclid Chemical Co. C. "Darex AEA" or "Daravair," W.R. Grace & Co. d. "MB-VR" or "Micro -Air," Master Builders, Inc. e. "Sealtight AEA," W.R. Meadows, Inc. f. "Sika AER," Sika Corp. H. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Chemtard," ChemMasters Corp. b. "PSI N," Cormix. C. "Eucon WR-75," Euclid Chemical Co. d. "WRDA," W.R. Grace & Co. e. "Pozzolith Normal" or "Polyheed," Master Builders, Inc. f. "Prokrete-N," Prokrete Industries. g. "Plastocrete 161," Sika Corp. I. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Super P," Anti -Hydro Co., Inc. b. "PSI Super," Cormix. C. "Eucon 37," Euclid Chemical Co. d. "WRDA 19" or "Daracem," W.R. Grace & Co. e. "Rheobuild," Master Builders, Inc. f. "PSP," Prokrete Industries. g. "Sikament 300," Sika Corp. J. Water -Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Q-Set," Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY b. "Gilco Accelerator," Cormix. C. "Accelguard 80," Euclid Chemical Co. d. "Daraset," W.R. Grace & Co. e. "Pozzutec 20," Master Builders, Inc. K. Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "PSI-R Plus," Cormix. b. "Eucon Retarder 75," Euclid Chemical Co. C. "Daratard-17," W.R. Grace & Co. d. "Pozzolith R," Master Builders, Inc. e. "Protard," Prokrete Industries. f. "Plastiment," Sika Corporation. L. Fibrous Reinforcement: Engineered polypropylene fibers designed for secondary reinforcement of concrete slabs. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Fiberstrand 100," Euclid Chemical Co. b. "Fibermesh," Fibermesh, Inc. C. "Forta CR," Forta Corp. d. "Grace Fibers," W.R. Grace & Co. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Reglets: Where resilient or elastomeric sheet flashing or bituminous membranes are terminated in reglets, provide reglets of not less than 0.0217 inch thick (26-gage) galvanized sheet steel. Fill reglet or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. B. Waterstops: Provide flat, dumbbell -type or centerbulb-type waterstops at construction joints and other joints as indicated. Size to suit joints. C. Rubber Waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 513. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: a. The Burke Co. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY b. Progress Unlimited. C. Williams Products, Inc. D. Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 572. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: a. The Burke Co. b. Greenstreak Plastic Products Co. C. W.R. Meadows, Inc. d. Progress Unlimited. e. Schlegel Corp. f. Vinylex Corp. E. Granular Base: Evenly graded mixture of fine and coarse aggregates to provide, when compacted, a smooth and even surface below slabs on grade. F. Sand Cushion: Clean, manufactured or natural sand. G. Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder cover over prepared base material where indicated below slabs on grade. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: 1. Polyethylene sheet not less than 8 mils thick. 2. Water-resistant barrier consisting of heavy Kraft papers laminated together with glass -fiber reinforcement and overcoated with black polyethylene on each side. a. Product: "Moistop," Fortifiber Corp. H. Vapor Barrier: Premoulded membrane, seven -ply construction consisting of reinforced core and carrier sheet with fortified bitumen layers, protective weathercoating, and plastic antistick sheet. Water vapor transmission rate of 0.00 grains/sq. ft./hr. when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Method B. Provide manufacturer's recommended mastics and gusset tape. 1. Product: "Sealtight Premoulded Membrane With Plasmatic Core," W.R. Meadows, Inc. I. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Provide fused aluminum oxide granules or crushed emery as abrasive aggregate for nonslip finish, with emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide. Use material that is factory -graded, packaged, rustproof, and nonglazing and is unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials. J. Colored Wear -Resistant Finish: Packaged, dry, combination of materials consisting of portland cement, graded quartz aggregate, coloring pigments, and plasticizing admixture. Use coloring pigments that are CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY finely ground, nonfading mineral oxides, interground with cement. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturers' standards, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Conshake 600 Colortone," Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co. b. "Floorcron," Cormix. C. "Surflex," Euclid Chemical Co. d. "Colorundum," A.C. Horn, Inc. e. "Quartz Plate," L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. f. "Colorcron," Master Builders, Inc. g. "LITHOCHROME Color Hardener," L.M. Scofield Co. h. "Harcol Redi-Mix," Sonneborn-Rexnord. K. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. L. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene -coated burlap. M. Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: Liquid -type membrane- forming curing compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. Moisture loss not more than 0.055 gr./sq. cm. when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "A-H 3 Way Sealer," Anti -Hydro Co., Inc. b. "Spartan -Cote," The Burke Co. C. "Conspec #1," Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co. d. "Hardtop," Cormix. e. "Day -Chem Cure and Seal," Dayton Superior Corp. f. "Eucocure," Euclid Chemical Co. g. "Horn Clear Seal," A.C. Horn, Inc. h. "L&M Cure," L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. i. "Masterkure," Master Builders, Inc. j. 11CS-309," W.R. Meadows, Inc. k. "LR-151," Prokrete Industries. 1. "Kure-N-Seal," Sonneborn-Rexnord. M. "Stontop CS2," Stonhard, Inc. N. Water -Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Conhard," Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. b. "Safe Cure and Seal," Dayton Superior Corp. C. "Aqua -Cure," Euclid Chemical Co. d. "Dress & Seal #18WB,11 L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. e. "Masterseal W," Master Builders, Inc. f. "Intex,11 W.R. Meadows, Inc. g. "Sika Membrane," Sika Corp. 0. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film -forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Eucobar," Euclid Chemical Co. b. "E-Con," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. C. "Confilm," Master Builders, Inc. P. Underlayment Compound: Free -flowing, self -leveling, pumpable, cement -based compound for applications from one inch thick to feathered edges. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "K-15," Ardex, Inc. b. "Conflow," Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. C. "LevelLayer II," Dayton Superior Corp. d. "Flo -Top," Euclid Chemical Co. e. "Levelex," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. f. "Pourcrete," Master Builders, Inc. g. "Stoncrete UL1," Stonhard, Inc. h. "Thoro Underlayment Self -Leveling," Thoro System Products. Q. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 9 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY a. Polyvinyl Acetate (Interior Only): 1) "Superior Concrete Bonder," Dayton Superior Corp. 2) "Euco Weld," Euclid Chemical Co. 3) "Weld -Crete," Larsen Products Corp. 4) "Everweld," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. b. Acrylic or Styrene Butadiene: 1) "Acrylic Bondcrete," The Burke Co. 2) "Strongbond," Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. 3) "Day -Chem Ad Bond," Dayton Superior Corp. 4) "SBR Latex," Euclid Chemical Co. 5) "Daraweld C," W.R. Grace & Co. 6) "Hornweld," A.C. Horn, Inc. 7) "Everbond," L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 8) "Acryl-Set," Master Builders Inc. 9) "Intralok," W.R. Meadows, Inc. 10) "Sonocrete," Sonneborn-Rexnord. 11) "Stonlock LB2," Stonhard, Inc. R. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two -component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material "Type," "Grade," and "Class" to suit project requirements. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Burke Epoxy M.V.," The Burke Co. b. "Spec -Bond 100," Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. C. "Euco Epoxy System #452 or #620," Euclid Chemical Co. d. "Epoxtite Binder 2390," A.C. Horn, Inc. e. "Epabond," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. f. "Concresive 1001," Master Builders, Inc. g. "Sikadur 32 Hi -Mod," Sika Corp. 2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch method used, use an independent testing facility acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing. 1. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of cement content by weight. B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 10 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY Architect. C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on drawings and schedules: 1. 4000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.56 maximum (non -air -entrained), 0.50 maximum (air -entrained). 2. 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.60 maximum (non -air -entrained), 0.58 maximum (air -entrained). D. Lightweight Concrete: Proportion mix as specified. Design mix to produce strength and modulus of elasticity as noted on drawings, with a splitting tensile strength factor (Fct) of not less than 5.5 for 3000-psi concrete and a dry weight of not less than 95 lbs. or more than 110 lbs. after 28 days. Limit shrinkage to 0.03 percent at 28 days. E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in work. 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Use water -reducing admixture or high -range water -reducing admixture (Superplasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability. B. Use nonchloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg F (10 deg C). C. Use high -range water -reducing admixture (HRWR) in pumped concrete, concrete for industrial slabs, architectural concrete, parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with water/cement ratios below 0.50. D. Use air -entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent within following limits: 1. Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer chemicals, or hydraulic pressure: a. 4.5 percent (moderate exposure); 5.5 percent (severe exposure) 1-1/2-inch max. aggregate. b. 4.5 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure) 1-inch max. aggregate. C. 5.0 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure) 3/4-inch max. aggregate. d. 5.5 percent (moderate exposure); 7.0 percent (severe exposure) 1/2-inch max. aggregate. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 11 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2. Other concrete (not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic pressure) or to receive a surface hardener: 2 percent to 4 percent air. E. Use admixtures for water reduction and set control in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. F. Water -Cement Ratio: Provide concrete for following conditions with maximum water -cement (W/C) ratios as follows: 1. Subjected to freezing and thawing; W/C 0.45. 2. Subjected to deicers/watertight; W/C 0.40. 3. Subjected to brackish water, salt spray, or deicers; W/C 0.40. G. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches. 2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 3 inches. 3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (Superplasticizer): Not more than 8 inches after addition of HRWR to site -verified 2-inch to 3-inch slump concrete. 4. Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Job -Site Mixing: Mix materials for concrete in appropriate drum -type batch machine mixer. For mixers of one cu. yd. or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. For mixers of capacity larger than one cu. yd., increase minimum 1-1/2 minutes of mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional cu. yd. or fraction thereof. B. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in work, indicating project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water introduced. C. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and vapor retarders with CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 12 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY placement of forms and reinforcing steel. 3.2 FORMS A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral, static and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances complying with ACI 347. B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste. C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. D. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms and bracing before concrete placement as required to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.3 VAPOR RETARDER/BARRIER INSTALLATION A. General: Following leveling and tamping of granular base for slabs on grade, place vapor retarder/barrier sheeting with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 13 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY B. Lap joints 6 inches and seal vapor barrier joints with manufacturers' -- recommended mastic and pressure -sensitive tape. C. After placement of vapor retarder/barrier, cover with sand cushion and compact to depth as shown on drawings. 3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as herein specified. 1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder during reinforcement placement and concreting operations. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.5 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated or, if not indicated, locate so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs and between walls and footings. Accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints except as otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements. D. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. E. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated. Install waterstops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Make provisions to support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 14 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY work. Field -fabricate joints in waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. F. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs -on -ground at points of contact between slabs -on -ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Joint filler and sealant materials are specified in Division 7 Sections of these specifications. G. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct contraction joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels of patterns as shown. Use saw cuts 1/8 inch wide by 1/4 slab depth or inserts 1/4 inch wide by 1/4 of slab depth, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard strip into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. Tool slab edges round on each side of insert. After concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris. 2. Contraction joints in unexposed floor slabs may be formed by saw cuts as soon as possible after slab finishing as may be safely done without dislodging aggregate. 3. If joint pattern not shown, provide joints not exceeding 15 feet in either direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column centerlines, half bays, third bays). 4. Joint sealant material is specified in Division 7 Sections of these specifications. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto. B. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to receive thru-wall flashings.in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, relieving angles, and other conditions. C. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. 3.7 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed. B. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in forms or to CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 15 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY come into contact with in -place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust -preventative material. Rust -stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as herein specified. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not -- farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. 1. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement. _ CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 16 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY F. Cold -Weather Placing: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. G. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. H. Hot -Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. 3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before concrete is placed. 4. Use water -reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, when acceptable to Architect. 3.9 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form -facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or other similar system. This is an as -cast concrete surface obtained with selected form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed. C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 17 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment, not - later than one day after form removal. 1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Grout -Cleaned Finish: Provide grout -cleaned finish to scheduled concrete surfaces that have received smooth form finish treatment. 1. Combine one part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand by volume, and a 50:50 mixture of acrylic or styrene butadiene-based bonding admixture and water to consistency of thick paint. Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement, amounts determined by trial patches, so that final color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. 2. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces, apply grout to coat surfaces, and fill small holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing. E. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as otherwise indicated. B. After placing slabs, plane surface to tolerances for floor flatness (Ff) of 15 and floor levelness (F1) of 13. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. C. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo; and as otherwise indicated. 1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand -floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to — tolerances of Ff 18 - F1 15. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. _ CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 18 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY D. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or other thin film finish coating system. 1. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand -troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with surface leveled to tolerances of Ff 20 - F1 17. Grind smooth surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system. E. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin -set mortar, apply trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface by fine brooming. F. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. G. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Apply nonslip aggregate finish to concrete stair treads, platforms, ramps, sloped walks, and elsewhere as indicated. H. After completion of float finishing and before starting trowel finish, uniformly spread 25 lbs. of dampened nonslip aggregate per 100 sq. ft. of surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface. After broadcasting and tamping, apply trowel finishing as herein specified. I. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush, or an abrasive stone, and water to expose nonslip aggregate. J. Colored Wear -Resistant Finish: Provide colored wear -resistant :finish to monolithic slab surface indicated. 1. Apply dry shake materials for colored wear -resistant finish at rate of 100 lbs. per 100 sq. ft., unless greater amount is recommended by material manufacturer. 2. Cast a trial slab approximately 10 feet square to determine actual application rate, color, and finish, as acceptable to Architect. 3. Immediately following first floating operation, uniformly distribute with mechanical spreader approximately 2/3 of required weight of dry shake material over concrete surface, and embed by means of power floating. Follow floating operation with second shake application, uniformly distributing remainder of dry shake material with overlapping applications to ensure uniform color, and embed by power floating. 4. After completion of broadcasting and floating, apply trowel finish as herein specified. Cure slab surface with curing compound CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 19 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY recommended by dry shake hardener manufacturer. Apply curing _ compound immediately after final finishing. 3.11 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation -control material. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling. B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days. C. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing - compound, by moist curing, by moisture -retaining cover curing, and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. D. Provide moisture curing by following methods. 1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. 2. Use continuous water -fog spray. 3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. E. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows: 1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. -- Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. F. Provide curing and sealing compound to exposed interior slabs and to exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as follows: 1. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied directly to concrete. G. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 20 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY above, as applicable. H. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by application of appropriate curing method. I. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 3.12 SHORES AND SUPPORTS A. General: Comply with ACI 347 for shoring and reshoring in multistory construction, and as herein specified. B. Extend shoring from ground to roof for structures 4 stories or less, unless otherwise permitted. C. Extend shoring at least 3 floors under floor or roof being placed for structures over 4 stories. Shore floor directly under floor or roof being placed, so that loads from construction above will transfer directly to these shores. Space shoring in stories below this level in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members where no reinforcing steel is provided. Extend shores beyond minimums to ensure proper distribution of loads throughout structure. D. Remove shores and reshore in a planned sequence to avoid damage to partially cured concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support work without excessive stress or deflection. E. Keep reshores in place a minimum of 15 days after placing upper tier, and longer if required, until concrete has attained its required 28-day strength and heavy loads due to construction operations have been removed. 3.13 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form -removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained at least 75 percent of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of in -place concrete by testing field -cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. C. Form -facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 21 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY of form -facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and — supports. 3.14 REUSE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form -facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form -coating compound as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect. 3.15 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. -- D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads and landings and associated items. Cast -in safety inserts and accessories as shown on drawings. Screed, tamp, and finish concrete surfaces as scheduled. E. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams where indicated on drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during concrete placement. 3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to Architect. 1. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 22 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding compound has dried. 2. For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding surface. B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry -pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete. C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having required slope. 1. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects that affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching compound. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect. 4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. D. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch in CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 23 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY diameter by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Mix dry -pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry -pack before bonding compound has dried. Compact dry -pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. F. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect. 3.17 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. General: The Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform tests and to submit test reports. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by Architect. C. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 1. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. 2. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air -entrained concrete. 3. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and each time a set of compression test specimens is made. 4. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory -cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required. S. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yds. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. more than the first 25 cu. yds. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. 6. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. 7. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., Architect may waive strength test if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. 8. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 24 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY companion laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in -place concrete. 9. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. D. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, Ready -Mix Producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. F. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests when unacceptable concrete is verified. END OF SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 25 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 03310 - CONCRETE REPAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide cast -in -place concrete repairs, including formwork and reinforcement, where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for the proper performance of the work in this Section. B. Comply with the "Specification for Structural Concrete Buildings", ACI 301, except as may be modified herein. C. Do not commence placement of concrete until mix designs have been reviewed and approved by the Architect and all governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit concrete mix designs to the Architect for review and approval. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with product manufacturers printed instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain framework so it will safely support vertical and lateral loads which might be applied until such loads can be supported safely by the concrete structure. B. Construct forms to the exact sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown, and as required to obtain accurate alignment, location, CONCRETE REPAIRS 03310-1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY grades, and level and plumb work in the finished structure. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with the following as minimums: 1. Bars: ASTM A615, grade 60 unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, using deformed bars for number 3 and larger. 2. Welded wire fabric: ASTM A185 3. Bending: ACI 318 B. Fabricate reinforcement to the required shapes and dimensions, within fabrication tolerances stated in the CRSI "Manual of Standard Practices". C. Do not use reinforcement having any of the following defects: 1. Bar lengths, depths, or bends exceeding the specified fabricating tolerances; 2. Bends or kinks not indicated on the Drawings or required for the Work; 3. Bars with cross-section reduced due to excessive rust or other causes. 2.3 CONCRETE A. Comply with the following minimums: 1. Portland cement: ASTM C150, type I or II, low alkali. 2. Aggregate general: a. ASTM C30, uniformly graded and clean; b. Do not use aggregate known to cause excessive shrinkage. 3. Aggregate, coarse: Crushed rock or washed gravel equal to 3/4" and with a maximum size number 4. 4. Aggregate, fine: Natural washed sand of hard and durable particles varying from fine to particles passing a 3/8" screen, of which at least 12% shall pass a 50-mesh screen. 5. Water: clean and potable C. Surface treatment: 1. Where "sealer", "liquid curing agent" or "hardener" is called for on the drawings, or otherwise used, submit product data to the Architect for approval. CONCRETE REPAIRS 03310-2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY D. Concrete repairs for spalled concrete 1. For spalled and deteriorated concrete use "Uniweld", a two component, high solids, structural adhesive for bonding new concrete to old, eroded or spalled concrete surfaces, manufactured by Permgile Industries, Inc. 2. Surfaces of application should be sound and clean. Surface may be dry or damp, but must be free of standing water. During product mixing each component should be stirred separately. Blend 1 part of base to 1 part of reactor volume and mix completely until streak -free gray. Allow 15- 30 minutes after applying so that Uniweld becomes tacky. Fresh concrete should be placed within 2 hours after coating @73 F. 3. The product shall have the following properties: Mix Ratio 1:1 volume Pot Life 1 1/2 - 3 hrs @77 F Cure Time 12-16 hrs @77 F Application Temp. 40 F and above Bond Strength 600 psi minimum Coverage 125 sf per gallon dependent on porosity of concrete Color Gray Chemical Resistance Resistant to mild mineral acids, alkalies, detergents, solvents, skydrol, hydraulic fluids, lubricating oils, salts, etc. Shelf Life Min. 1 yr in unopened cans. 4. Exposed, existing rebar: where exposed, existing rebars are showing, liberally coat with a bonding agent and reinforcement protection agent. Use Sika Armatec 110 or approved equal. E. Liquid bonding agent: 1. Use "ACRYL-6011, manufactured by Thoro, as an admixture for patching and resurfacing of concrete stairs and walls where the new tie beam is located. 2. In all cases prepare a good, clean surface. Remove all loose material and disintegrated concrete. Remove all surfaces of oil, grease, dirt, dust, laitance, efflorescence, form treatments, etc. Sweep or blow out area to be patched with air; dampen area but do not leave standing water. Thoroughly mix the cement and sand first. Sand must be clean and dry. If the ACRYL-60 is to be diluted, mix the ACRYL-60 and water first, before adding the CONCRETE REPAIRS 03310-3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY liquid to the concrete dry mix. Stir the mixing liquid first, place the concrete mix in a clean container, and then slowly add the mixing liquid. In cement sand or concrete mixes, mix for a very short time (1-2 minutes). Over -mixing entrains excessive air. Mix should be placed quickly, as weather conditions may cause setting time to vary. Maximum time for the placement should not exceed 20 minutes. Trowel mix into place but o not over -trowel. The trowel should be cleaned frequently and very little pressure should be used. For light use, allow surface to cure 24 -48 hours; for heavy traffic a 4-day curing period is required. F. Concrete patcher: 1. Use "BONSAL" vinyl concrete patcher for patching and resurfacing of concrete stairs. 2. Surfaces of application should be sound and clean. Surface may be dry or damp, but must be free of standing water. Never use dirty water, container or rusty tools with the material. Never use the mixed material until 5 minutes after mixing. Do not re -temper after 15 minutes of mixing. 3. The product shall have the following properties: cure time application temp. tensile strength compressive strength shear bond shrinkage G. Repairs by "Injection Method": 12 - 24 hrs. 48 hrs for heavy use 50 to 100 degrees F 7 days cured 300ps 24 hrs cured 2000psi 28 days cured 6000 " 28 days cured 300psi 28 days cured, none 1. For all cracked concrete designated to be repaired by "Injection Method", provide Perm -Inject", a low viscosity epoxy for repairs by injection manufactured by Permagile Industries, Inc. or as otherwise specified under Section 04510. 2. Upon installation, the cracks should be clean, sound and free of all debris. The product mix shall be a blend of 2:1 by volume and shall be mixed until uniform, streak -free color is in evidence. The product shall be applied with an automatic metering equipment or use a pressure pot with a capacity of at least 150 psi. CONCRETE REPAIRS 03310-4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 3. The product shall have the following properties: Mix Ratio 2:1 by volume Pot Life 30 minutes (Q77 F) Cure Time 4-6 hrs. (Q77 F) Application Temp. 35 F, and above viscosity 250-450 cps Tensile Strength 5,000 psi minimum Compressive Strength 10,000 psi minimum Chemical Resistance Resistant to mild mineral acids, alkalies, detergents, solvents, hydraulic fluids, lubrication oils, salts,etc. Shelf Life Min. 1 yr. in unopened cans 4. Comply with the manufacturer's printed instructions for all products. 5. Mark-10 Injection Epoxy System, as mfg. by "Poly -Garb" is an approved equal. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. 2.5 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions of other products and methods will be allowed only after review and approval by the Architect. Submit the manufacturer's specifications and technical data to the Architect for approval. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE AND CONDITIONS CONCRETE REPAIRS 03310-5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Set bolts, inserts, and other required item in the concrete, accurately secured so they will not be displaced, and in the precise locations needed. 3.2 REMEDIAL WORK A. Repair or replace deficient work as directed by the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION CONCRETE REPAIRS 03310-6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 03520 - GYPSUM CAST IN PLACE UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cast -in -place gypsum cement and aggregate , placed over existing structural concrete slab. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data describing products and methods of mixing and application instructions. C. Certificates by an independent testing laboratory stating that materials and mix intended to be used meet specified requirements. D. Layout of expansion and/or construction joints at 1/8 inch per foot. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Gypsum Cement Supplier: Regularly engaged in production of gypsum cast in place materials. B. Gypsum Applicator: Regularly engaged and properly equipped for application of cast in place gypsum. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original undamaged packages or acceptable bulk containers. B. Store packaged materials to protect them from elements or physical damage. C. Do not use gypsum that shows indications of moisture damage, caking, or other deterioration. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS GYPSUM CAST IN PLACE UNDERLAYMENT 03520 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Before, during and after installation of gypsum the building interior — shall be enclosed and maintained at a temperature above 50 degrees F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Gypsum Cement: Floor underlayment Dura-Cap gypsum cement as manufactured by Maxxon Corporation, Hamel, MN., or approved equal. B. Sand Aggregate: Sand shall be 1/8 inch (3mm) or less, washed masonry or plaster sand, meeting the requirements of Maxxon Corporation Sand Specification 101.. C. Water: Clean, potable, free from impurities. D. Subfloor Primer: Maxxon Floor Primer E. Sealer: Maxxon Overspray. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition and Cleaning of Subfoor: Subfloor shall be structurally sound. General Contractor shall clean subfloor to remove mud, oil, grease, and other contaminants prior to the arrival of the installer. B. Leak Prevention: Fill cracks and voids with a quick setting patching of caulking material where leakage of gypsum may occur. C. Priming Subfloor: Prime existing, patched concrete subfloor using Maxxon Floor Primer, according to the manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 PLACEMENT A. Do not begin gypsum placement until the building is enclosed, including roof, windows, exterior doors. B. Place Dura-Cap 3/8 inch minimum over concrete. Spread and screed dura- Cap to a smooth surface. Except at authorized joints, place Dura-Cap as continuously as possible until application is complete, so that no Dura-Cap slurry is placed against Dura-Cap products that has obtained its initial set. C. Drying: General Contractor shall provide continuous ventilation to rapidly remove moisture from the area until the Dura-Cap is dry. The GYPSUM CAST IN PLACE UNDERLAYMENT 03520 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY general Contractor shall provide mechanical ventilation if necessary. Under the above conditions, for 3/4 inch thick Dura-Cap five to seven days is usually adequate drying time. To test for dryness, tape a 24 inch by 24 inch section of plastic to the top of the gypsum underlayment. After 48 hours, if no condensation occurs, the underlayment shall be considered dry. Perform this test 5 to 7 days after pour. D. Apply a multi -layered sealer coating to protect the underlayment from foot traffic as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage an independent testing laboratory acceptable to Architect to take samples and conduct tests to evaluate gypsum underlayment. B. Slump Test: Dura-Cap shall be tested for slump as it is being pumped using a 2 inch by 4 inch cylinder resulting in a patty size of 8 inches plus or minus one inch in diameter. C. Field Samples: at least one set of three molded cube samples shall be taken from each days pour during application. Test according to ASTM C 472. D. Report test results to Architect within 24 hours of completion of each test. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect all underlayment from heavy loads. Place 3/4 inch plywood over areas subject to wheeled traffic or concentrated loads. END OF SECTION 03520 GYPSUM CAST IN PLACE UNDERLAYMENT 03520 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete unit masonry. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 2 Section "Unit Pavers" for exterior applications. 2. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for exposed sheet metal flashing installed in masonry. C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels in unit masonry are specified in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications." 2. Wood nailers and blocking built into unit masonry are specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." 3. Reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing are specified in Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal." 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (f'm): 1. For concrete unit masonry: As follows: a. f'm = 1500 psi. b. As indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY manufactured product indicated. C. Shop drawings for reinforcing detailing fabrication, bending, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcing" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry reinforcement. D. Samples for initial selection purposes of the following: 1. Unit masonry samples in small-scale form showing full extent of colors and textures available for each different exposed masonry unit required. 2. Colored masonry mortar samples showing full extent of colors available. E. Samples for verification purposes of the following: 1. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required showing full range of exposed color, texture, and dimensions to be expected in completed construction. 2. Colored masonry mortar samples for each color required showing the full range of colors expected in the finished construction. Label samples to indicate type and amount of colorant used. 3. Stone trim samples not less than 12 inches in length showing full range of colors and textures expected in finished construction. 4. Aluminum weep holes/vents painted in color to match mortar color. 5. Accessories embedded in the masonry. F. Material certificates for the following signed by manufacturer and Contractor certifying that each material complies with requirements. 1. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout including name of manufacturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery. 2. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars. 3. Each type and size of joint reinforcement. 4. Each type and size of anchors, ties, and metal accessories. G. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory employed and paid by Contractor indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of the following proposed masonry materials with requirements indicated: 1. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270. 2. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients. 3. Masonry units. H. Hot -weather construction procedures evidencing compliance with requirements specified in referenced unit masonry standard. I. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY telephone numbers, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. J. Results from tests and inspections performed by Owner's representatives will be reported promptly and in writing to Architect and Contractor. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unit Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 "Specifications for Masonry Structures," except as otherwise indicated. 1. Revise ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 to exclude Sections 1.4 and 1.7; Parts 2.1.2, 3.1.2, and 4.1.2; and Articles 1.5.1.2, 1.5.1.3, 2.1.1.1, 2.1.1.2, and 2.3.3.9 and to modify Article 2.1.1.4 by deleting requirement for installing vent pipes and conduits built into masonry. B. Owner will employ and pay a qualified professional engineer to inspect foundations for compliance with dimensional tolerances specified in referenced unit masonry standard. 1. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer legally authorized to practice surveying in jurisdiction where project is located. C. Inspecting Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for employment in performing tests and inspection specified in this Section, an independent testing laboratory must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory -submitted criteria conforming to ASTM C 1093, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated without delaying the progress of the Work. D. Fire Performance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Single -Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces. F. Single -Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. G. Field -Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of unit masonry, erect sample wall panels to further verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work: UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. Locate mock-ups on site in locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Build mock-ups for the following types of masonry in sizes of approximately 4 feet long by 4 feet high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes as well as accessories. -' a. Each type of exposed unit masonry construction. 3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will be erected. 4. Protect mock-ups from the elements with weather -resistant membrane. 5. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as standard for judging completed unit masonry construction. a. When directed, demolish and remove mock-ups from Project site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition. B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not place until units are in an air-dried condition. C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in dry location. D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately any grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes from mortar droppings. 4. Do not lay masonry units that are wet. D. Hot -Weather Construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements specified in this Section applicable to each material indicated. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Comply with requirements indicated below applicable to each form of concrete masonry unit required. 1. Provide special shapes where indicated and as follows: a. For lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. b. Square -edged units for outside corners, except where indicated as bullnose. 2. Size: Provide concrete masonry units complying with requirements indicated below for size that are manufactured to specified face dimensions within tolerances specified in the applicable referenced ASTM specification for concrete masonry units. a. Concrete Masonry Units: Manufactured to specified dimensions of 3/8 inch less than nominal widths by nominal heights by nominal lengths indicated on drawings. b. Concrete Building Brick: Specified dimensions as follows: 1) Standard Modular: 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long. 3. Provide Type I, moisture -controlled units. 4. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. B. Hollow Load -Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90, Grade N and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net area compressive strength indicated below: a. 1900 psi. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. C. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55 and as follows: - 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net area compressive strength indicated below: a. 3500 psi. b. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete unit masonry construction of compressive strength indicated. 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold -weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce required mortar color. B. Ready -Mixed Mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with requirements specified in this article, combined with set -controlling admixtures to produce a ready -mixed mortar complying with ASTM C 1142. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4 inch use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. - 1. White Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone. E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. F. Water: Clean and potable. 2.4 REINFORCING STEEL A. General: Provide reinforcing steel complying with requirements of referenced unit masonry standard and this article. B. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows: 1. Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615. C. Deformed Reinforcing Wire: ASTM A 496. D. Plain Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185. 2.5 JOINT REINFORCEMENT UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. General: Provide joint reinforcement complying with requirements of referenced unit masonry standard and this article, formed from the following: 1. Galvanized carbon steel wire, coating class as required by referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated. B. Description: Welded -wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below: 1. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch (9 gage). 2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch (9 gage). 3. For single-wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side rods: a. Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide joint reinforcement by one of the following: 1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. 2. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements for metal and size of referenced unit masonry standard and of this article. B. Galvanized Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, coating class as required by referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: As follows: 1. ASTM A 526 (commercial quality), Coating Designation G60, steel sheet zinc -coated by hot -dip process on continuous lines prior to fabrication, for sheet metal ties and anchors completely embedded in mortar. 2. Galvanized Steel Sheet Thickness: For steel sheet hot -dip galvanized by continuous process prior to fabrication: a. 0.0635 inch (16 gage). 3. Thickness of Steel Sheet Galvanized After Fabrication: Uncoated thickness of steel sheet hot -dip galvanized after fabrication: a. 0.0598 inch (16 gage). UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY D. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36, hot -dip galvanized to comply with _ ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153, Class B3, as applicable to size and form indicated. E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow 1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. ing: 2. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Unit Type Masonry Inserts in Concrete: Cast iron or malleable iron inserts of type and size indicated. B. Dovetail Slots: Furnish dovetail slots, with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from 0.0336-inch (22-gage) sheet metal. C. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter and length indicated and in the following configurations: -- 1. Headed bolts. 2. Nonheaded bolts, straight. 3. Nonheaded bolts, bent in manner indicated. 2.8 POSTINSTALLED ANCHORS A. Anchors as described below, with capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by _ testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory. 1. Type: Chemical anchors. 2. Type: Expansion anchors. 3. Corrosion Protection: Stainless steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 alloy 304 or 316 for bolts and _ nuts; alloy 304 or 316 for anchor. 4. For cast -in -place and postinstalled anchors in concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times loads imposed by masonry. 5. For postinstalled anchors in grouted concrete masonry units: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times loads imposed by masonry. -- 2.9 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Sheet Metal Flashing: Fabricate from the following metal complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY and below: 1. Copper: 10-oz. weight (0.0135 inch thick) for fully concealed flashing, 16 oz. (0.0216 inch thick) elsewhere. 2. Fabricate through -wall metal flashings embedded in masonry as follows: a. With ribs formed in dovetail pattern at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide a three-way integral mortar bond and weep -hole drainage. 3. Application: Use where flashing is fully or partly concealed in masonry wall. B. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 7 section "Flashing and Sheet Metal." C. Adhesive for Flashings: Of type recommended by manufacturer of flashing material for use indicated. D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Metal Flashing: a. "Cheney Flashing (Dovetail)," Cheney Flashing Company, Inc. b. "Cheney Flashing (Sawtooth)," Cheney Flashing Company, Inc. C. "Keystone Three -Way Interlocking Thruwall Flashing," Keystone Flashing Co. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Weep Holes: Provide the following: 1. Round Plastic Tubing: Medium -density polyethylene, 3/8-inch outside diameter by 4 inches long. 2. Wicking Material: Material as indicated below, in length required to produce 2 inches exposure on exterior and 18 inches in cavity between wythes: a. Fibrous glass rope. b. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, weep hole/ventilators that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Plastic Weep Hole/Vent: a) "Cell Vent," Dur-O-Wal, Inc. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 9 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate (1/2-cup dry measure) and laundry detergent (1/2-cup dry measure) dissolved in one gallon of water. 2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification for job -mixed mortar and ASTM C 1142 for ready -mixed mortar, of types indicated below: 1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement -lime. 2. For masonry below grade and in contact with earth, and where indicated, use type indicated below: a. Type S. 3. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use type indicated below: a. Type S. 4. For exterior, above -grade loadbearing and nonloadbearing walls and parapet walls; for interior loadbearing walls; for interior — nonloadbearing partitions, and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use type indicated below: a. Type N. 2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type, class, and grade of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested by qualified - independent testing laboratory for strength, absorption, and moisture content per ASTM C 140. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 10 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of unit masonry. B. Examine rough -in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements indicated applicable to each type of installation included in Project. B. Build chases and recesses as shown or required to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. D. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without cutting where possible. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Comply with construction tolerances of referenced unit masonry standard. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less -than -half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. B. Lay up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less that nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2-unit length for one-half running bond or 1/3-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 11 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY units lightly (if required), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. E. Built -In Work: As construction progresses, build -in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with -- mortar, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 3. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24 inches) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells. B. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to be concealed or to be covered by other materials, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 12 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. 3.8 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 11-0" for brick size units and 2'-0" for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide precast or formed -in -place masonry lintels. Cure precast lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed -in -place lintels. 1. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcement bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 FLASHING/WEEP HOLES A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated. B. Prepare masonry surfaces so that they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Place through -wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive/sealant/tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer before covering with mortar. C. Install flashings as follows: 1. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at each end. Extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches, and through the inner wythe to within 1/2 inches of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner wythe and turn up approximately 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 2. At heads and sills, extend flashing as specified above unless otherwise indicated but turn up ends not less than 2 inches to form a pan. 3. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashings by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for application indicated. 4. Turn down sheet metal flashings at exterior face of masonry to form drip. 5. Cut off flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 13 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashings and as follows: 1. Form weep holes with product specified in Part 2 of this Section. 2. Form weep holes by keeping head joints free and clear of mortar. 3. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. 4. In uninsulated cavities/air spaces place pea gravel to a height equal to height of first course but not less than 2 inches immediately above flashing embedded in the wall, as masonry construction progresses, to splatter mortar droppings and to maintain drainage. E. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where shown to be built into masonry. 3.10 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. General: Install reinforced unit masonry to comply with requirements of referenced unit masonry standard. B. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. C. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Frequency: Tests and evaluations listed in this article will be performed during construction for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. 1. Mortar properties will be tested per property specification of ASTM C 270. 2. Mortar composition and properties will be evaluated per ASTM C 780. 3. Grout compressive strength will be sampled and tested per ASTM C 1019. B. Prism Test Method: For each type of wall construction indicated, — masonry prisms will be tested per ASTM E 447, Method B, and as follows: 1. Prepare one set of prisms for testing at 7 days and one set for testing at 28 days. C. Evaluation of Quality Control Tests: In absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, masonry will be considered "- satisfactory if results from construction quality control tests comply with minimum requirements indicated. 3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 14 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units and in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up all joints including corners, openings, and adjacent construction to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants. C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by means of bucket and brush hand -cleaning method described in BIA "Technical Note No. 20 Revised" using the following masonry cleaner: a. Job -mixed detergent solution. G. Clean concrete masonry by means of cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 45 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 15 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 05400 - COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Types of cold -formed metal framing units include the following: 1. C-shaped load -bearing steel studs. 2. C-shaped steel joists. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product data and installation instructions for each item of cold -formed metal framing and accessories. 2. Shop drawings for special components and installations not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. a. Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gage designations, number, type, location, and spacing. Indicate supplemental strapping, bracing, splices, bridging, accessories, and details required for proper installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Component Design: Calculate structural properties of studs and joists in accordance with American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) "Specification for Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members." B. Welding: Use qualified welders and comply with American Welding Society (AWS) D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." C. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated for a fire -resistance rating, including those required for compliance with governing regulations, provide units that have been approved by governing authorities that have jurisdiction. D. Pre -Installation Conference: Prior to start of installation of metal framing systems, meet at project site with installers of other work including door and window frames and mechanical and electrical work. COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY Review areas of potential interference and conflicts, and coordinate layout and support provisions for interfacing work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. 2. Dale Industries, Inc. 3. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 4. Marino Industries, Inc. 5. Superior Steel Studs, Inc. 6. USG Industries 7. United States Steel 8. Wheeling Corrugating Co. 2.2 METAL FRAMING A. System Components: Manufacturers' standard load -bearing steel studs and joists of type, size, shape, and gage as indicated. With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturer's standard, steel runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories for applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal framing system. B. Materials and Finishes: 1. For 16-gage and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 40,000 psi; ASTM A 446, A 570, or A 611. 2. For 18-gage and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi; ASTM A 446, A 570, or A 611. 3. Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM A 525 for minimum G 60 coating. 4. Fasteners: Provide nuts, bolts, washers, screws, and other fasteners with corrosion -resistant plated finish. 5. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code and as recommended by stud manufacturer. 6. Galvanizing Repair: Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and repair in accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A 780. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Framing components may be prefabricated into assemblies before erection. Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line, and braced COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY against racking with joints welded. Perform lifting of prefabricated units to prevent damage or distortion. B. Fabricate units in jig templates to hold members in proper alignment and position and to assure consistent component placement. C. Fastenings: Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by welding, bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer. D. Wire tying of framing components is not permitted. E. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate units to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed or written instructions and recommendations. B. Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24 inches o.c. spacing for nail or power -driven fasteners or 16 inches o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks. C. Installation of Wall Studs: Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by either welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges. D. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. E. Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor ends of stiffeners to supporting structure. F. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in metal framing system wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim and furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading resulting from item supported. G. Frame wall openings larger than 2 feet square with double stud at each jamb of frame except where more than two are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full -height studs of COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY wall. Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated. H. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints with separate studs; do not bridge the joint with components of stud system. I. Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system, for all studs 8'-0' or taller, spaced (vertical distance) at mid point, but not more than 54 inches o.c. Weld, or screw at each intersection. J. Erection Tolerances: Bolt or weld wall panels (at both horizontal and vertical junctures) to produce flush, even, true -to -line joints. 1. Maximum variation in plane and true position between prefabricated assemblies should not exceed 1/16 inch. K. Installation of Joists: Install level, straight, and plumb, complete with bracing and reinforcing as indicated on drawings. Provide not less than 1-1/2-inch end bearing. L. Reinforce ends with end clips, steel hangers, steel angle clips, steel stud section, or as otherwise recommended by joist manufacturer. M. Where required, reinforce joists at interior supports with single short length of joist section located directly over interior support, snap -on shoe, 30 percent side -piece lapped reinforcement, or other method recommended by joist manufacturer. N. Secure joists to interior support systems to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange. 0. Field Painting: Touch-up damaged shop -applied protective coatings. Use galvanizing repair system for galvanized surfaces. END OF SECTION 05400 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes the following metal fabrications: 1. Rough hardware. 2. Nosings. 3. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 4. Miscellaneous framing and supports for the following: a. Applications where framing and supports are not specified in other sections. 5. Cast treads and thresholds. 6. Pipe bollards. 7. Metal Steel Pan Stairs. 8. Circular Metal Stairs. 9. Ladders. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing -related terms apply to this section. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install the following metal fabrications to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each respective component of each metal fabrication. 1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: a. Concentrated load of 300 lbf applied at any point nonconcurrently, vertically downward, or horizontally. b. Uniform load of 100 lbf per linear ft. applied nonconcurrently, vertically downward or horizontally. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY C. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point nonconcurrently, vertically downward or horizontally. b. Uniform load of 50 lbf per linear foot applied nonconcurrently, vertically downward or horizontally. C. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 200 lbf applied to one sq. ft. at any point in the system including panels, intermediate rails balusters, or other elements composing the infill area. a. Above load need not be assumed to act concurrently with uniform horizontal loads on top rails of railing systems in determining stress on guard. 4. Treads of Steel Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 100 lbf per sq. ft. or a concentrated load of 300 lbf on a area of 4 sq. inches located in the center of the tread, whichever produces the greater stress. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications, including paint products and grout. C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other sections. 1. Where installed metal fabrications are indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural computations, material properties, and other information needed for structural analysis that has been signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer who was responsible for their preparation. D. Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by Architect. E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" article. F. Qualification data for firms and persons to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY project name, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work. B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of metal fabrications specified in this section by same firm that fabricated them. C. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel," D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel", and D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. D. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed to practice in jurisdiction where project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the successful installation of metal fabrications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence and coordinate installation of wall handrails as follows: 1. Mount handrails only on completed walls. Do not support handrails temporarily by any means not satisfying structural performance requirements. 2. Mount handrails only on gypsum board assemblies reinforced to receive anchors, and where the location of concealed anchor plates has been clearly marked for benefit of Installer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FERROUS METALS METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher -leveled sheet. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. C. Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A 786. D. Steel Bars for Gratings: ASTM A 569 or ASTM A 36. E. Wire Rod for Grating Cross Bars: ASTM A 510. 1. Hot -Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501. a. For exterior installations and where indicated, provide tubing with hot -dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 53. F. Uncoated Structural Steel Sheet: Product type (manufacturing method), quality, and grade, as follows: 1. Cold -Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611, grade as follows: a. Grade A, unless otherwise indicated or required by design loading. 2. Hot -Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 570, grade as follows: a. Grade 30, unless otherwise indicated or required by design loading. G. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Quality as follows: 1. Structural Quality: ASTM A 446; Grade A, unless another grade required for design loading, and G90 coating designation unless otherwise indicated. 2. Commercial Quality: ASTM A 526, G90 coating designation unless otherwise indicated. H. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. I. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A 47, or cast steel, ASTM A 27. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot -dip galvanized per ASTM A 153. J. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS specifications for the metal alloy to be welded. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2.2 ALUMINUM A. Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B 221, alloys as follows: 1. 6061-T6 or 6063-T6 for bearing bars of gratings and shapes. 2. 6061-Tl for grating cross bars. 2.3 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT A. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD- C 621. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section. B. Interior Anchoring Cement: Factory -prepackaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Use for interior applications only. C. Erosion -Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory -prepackaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site tc create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without need for protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and is recommended for exterior use by manufacturer. D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grouts: a. "Bonsal Construction Grout"; W. R. Bonsal Co. b. "Diamond -Crete Grout"; Concrete Service Materials Co. C. "Euco N-S Grout"; Euclid Chemical Co. d. "Kemset"; Chem -Masters Corp. e. "Crystex"; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. f. "Masterflow 713"; Master Builders. g. "Sealtight 588 Grout"; W. R. Meadows, Inc. h. "Sonogrout"; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc. i. "Stoncrete NM111; Stonhard, Inc. j. "Five Star Grout"; U. S. Grout Corp. k. "Vibropruf #11"; Lambert Corp. 2. Interior Anchoring Cement: a. "Bonsal Anchor Cement"; W. R. Bonsal Co. b. "Por-Rok"; Minwax Construction Products Division. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide zinc -coated fasteners for exterior use or where built METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A. C. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561. D. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92. _. E. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111. F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92. G. Drilled -In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-325, Group VIII (anchors, expansion, (nondrilling]), Type I (internally threaded tubular expansion anchor); and machine bolts complying with FS FF-B-575, Grade 5. H. Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class, and style as required. I. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84. 2.5 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20. C. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 except containing no asbestos fibers. D. Zinc Chromate Primer: FS TT-P-645. 2.6 CONCRETE FILL AND REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements of Division 3 section "Concrete Work" for normal weight, ready -mix concrete with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,500 psi, 440 lb cement per cu. ft. minimum, and W/C ratio of 0.65 maximum, unless higher strengths indicated. B. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Factory -graded, packaged material containing fused aluminum oxide grits or crushed emery as abrasive aggregate; rust -proof and nonglazing; unaffected by freezing, moisture, or cleaning METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY materials. C. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication. B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 100 deg F (55.5 deg C). D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. G. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use. J. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. K. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 2.8 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Division 6 sections. B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Furnish malleable -iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. 2.9 STEEL LADDERS A. General: Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details and anchorages as indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3. B. Siderails: Continuous steel flat bars, 1/2 inch x 2-1/2 inches, with eased edges, spaced 18 inches apart. C. Bar Rungs: Round steel bars, 3/4 inch diameter, spaced 12 inches o.c. D. Bar Rungs: Square steel bars, 3/4 inch, spaced 12 inches o.c. E. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. F. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than 5'-0" o.c. by means of welded or bolted steel brackets. 1. Size brackets to support design dead and live loads indicated and to hold centerline of ladder rungs clear of the wall surface by not less than 7 inches. 2. Extend side rails 42 inches above top rung, and return rails to wall or structure unless other secure handholds are provided. If the adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung, goose -neck the extended rails back to the structure to provide secure ladder access. G. Provide non -slip surface on top of each rung, either by coating the rung with aluminum oxide granules set in epoxy resin adhesive, or by using METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY a type of manufactured rung which is filled with aluminum oxide grout. 2.10 CIRCULAR STEEL STAIRS A. General: Fabricate circular steel stairs for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details and anchorages as indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3. B. Support circular steel stair at top and bottom by means of welded or bolted steel brackets. 1. Size brackets to support design dead and live loads indicated. 2. Extend side rails 42 inches above top rung, and return rails to wall or structure unless other secure handholds are provided. If the adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung, goose -neck the extended rails back to the structure to provide secure stair access. 3. Platforms: steel redial grating. 4. Treads: Steel bar grate. 5. Handrails: 1 % inch round steel. 6. Balusters: M inch square steel at 4 inches on center. C. Provide non -slip surface on top of each tread. 2.11 METAL PAN STEEL STAIRS A. General: Fabricate metal pan steel stairs as shown on the drawings, with dimensions, spacings, details and anchorages as indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3. B. Support the metal pan steel stair at top and bottom by means of welded or bolted steel brackets. 1. Size brackets to support design dead and live loads indicated. 2. Extend 1 % inch hand rails 12 inches beyond the top tread and return rails to stair. At the bottom, extend rails 24 inches and return to the stair. Provide % steel balusters 4 inches on center. C. Install cast in place concrete treads when the metal stair is not the only access to the second floor. Protect concrete treads from foot traffic. 2.12 NOSINGS A. Fabricate curb nosings from structural steel shapes as indicated, of all welded construction with mitered corners and continuously welded joints. Provide anchors welded to nosings for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not more than 6 inches from each curb end, 6 inches from corners and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanize nosings in the following locations: METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 9 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. Exterior locations. 2. Interior locations where indicated. 2.13 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated or which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work. B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive adjacent other construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. a. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches wide x 1/4 inch x 8 inches long. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports in the following locations: 1. Exterior locations. 2. Interior locations where indicated. 2.14 CAST TREADS AND THRESHOLDS A. Fabricate units of material, sizes, and configurations indicated. if not indicated, provide cast-iron units with integral abrasive finish. Furnish in lengths as required to accurately fit each opening or conditions. 1. Cast units with an integral abrasive grit consisting of aluminum oxide, silicone carbide, or a combination of both. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Abrasive Metals Co. 2. American Mason Safety Tread Co. 3. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. 4. Armstrong Products, Inc. C. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with the manufacturer. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 10 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY D. Drill for mechanical anchors with countersunk holes located not more than 4 inches from ends and not more than 12 inches o.c., evenly spaced between ends, unless otherwise indicated. Provide closer spacing if recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Provide 2 rows of holes for units over 5 inches wide, with 2 holes aligned at ends and staggered intermediate holes. E. Apply black asphaltic coating to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of cast-iron units set into concrete. F. Provide a plain surface texture, except where fluted or cross- hatched surfaces are indicated. 2.15 PIPE BOLLARDS A. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe. Cap bollards with 1/4 inch minimum thickness steel base plate. B. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4 inch thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. 2.16 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.17 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc -coating by the hot -dip process compliance with the following requirements: 1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 2. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch thick and heavier. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning: C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finish or to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1" for METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 11 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY shop painting. _ 1. Stripe paint all edges, corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. B. Center nosings on tread widths with noses flush with riser faces and tread surfaces. C. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations; protect sleeves from water and concrete entry. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in -place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set - metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 12 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint or zinc chromate primer. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CAST TREADS AND THRESHOLDS A. Install cast treads and thresholds with anchorage system indicated to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Seal thresholds exposed to exterior with elastomeric sealant complying with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" to provide a watertight installation. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF BOLLARDS A. Anchor bollards in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After bollards have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between bollard and sleeve solid with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touch-up of field painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touch -Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting" of these specifications. C. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 13 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Aluminum pipe and tube handrails and railing systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing -related terms apply to this section. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering handrail and railing systems to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. For aluminum: AA "Specifications for Aluminum Structures." B. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate, and install handrails and railing systems to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials for handrails, railing systems, anchors, and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each of the respective components comprising handrails and railing systems. 1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of 50 lbf per linear ft. applied horizontally and concurrently with uniform load of 100 lbf per linear ft. applied vertically downward. C. Concentrated load need not be assumed to act concurrently with uniform loads. 2. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY following loads applied as indicated: a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of 50 lbf per linear ft. applied in any direction. C. Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to act - concurrently. 3. Inf ill Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 200 lbf applied to one sq. ft. at any point in the system including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, or other elements composing the infill area. a. Above load need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails of railing systems in determining stress on guard. C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of handrails and railings to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, connections and other detrimental effects. Base design calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of handrails and railings including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. 1. Where installed products are indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural computations, material properties, and other information needed for structural analysis that has been signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts showing full range of colors available for those units with factory -applied color finishes. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY E. Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on components indicated below that are of the same thickness and metal indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected. 1. 6-inch-long sections of each distinctly different linear railing member including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters. 2. Fittings and brackets. 3. Welded connections. F. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by qualified independent testing laboratory evidencing compliance of railing components and systems with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products. G. Test reports from independent testing laboratory evidencing compliance of handrails and railing systems with ASTM E 985. H. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence polyvinyl chloride railing systems compliance with building code in effect for Project. I. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that polyvinyl chloride Installer complies with requirements under "Quality Assurance" Article. J. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain handrails and railing systems of each type and material from a single manufacturer. B. Engineering Responsibility: Engineer handrails and railing systems by qualified professional engineer legally authorized to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located. C. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer legally authorized to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated for handrails and railings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance. 1.7 STORAGE PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Store handrails and railing systems in clean, dry location, away from uncured concrete and masonry, protected against damage of any kind. Cover with waterproof paper, tarpaulin, or polyethylene sheeting; allow for air circulation inside the covering. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where handrails and railings are indicated to fit to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements. Coordinate other construction to — ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence and coordinate installation of wall handrails as follows: 1. Mount handrails only on completed walls. Do not support handrails temporarily by any means not satisfying structural performance requirements. 2. Mount handrails only on gypsum board assemblies reinforced to receive anchors and where the location of concealed anchor plates has been clearly marked for benefit of Installer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide handrails and railing systems of one of the following: 1. Aluminum Pipe and Tube Railing Systems: a. Blum: Julius Blum & Co., Inc. b. Braun: J.G. Braun Co. C. CraneVeyor Corp. d. Moultrie Manufacturing Co. e. Newman Bros., Inc. f. Sterling Factories, Inc. g. Superior Aluminum Products, Inc. h. Wagner: R & B Wagner, Inc. 2.2 METALS PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. General: Provide metal forms and types that comply with requirements of referenced standards and that are free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the finished unit. Exposed -to -view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, with not less than the strength and durability properties of the alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required: 1. Extruded Bar and Tube: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063T5/T52. 2. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429, 6063-T5/T52. 3. Drawn Seamless Tube: ASTM B 210, 6063-T832. 4. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, 6061-T6. 5. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247, 6061-T6. 6. Castings: ASTM B 26, A356-T6. 2.3 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C 621. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this Section. B. Interior Anchoring Cement: Factory -prepackaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Use for interior applications only. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grouts: a. "Bonsal Construction Grout"; W. R. Bonsal Co. b. "Kemset"; Chem -Masters Corp. C. "Diamond -Crete Grout"; Concrete Service Materials Co. d. "Sure -Grip High Performance Grout"; Dayton Superior Corp. e. "Crystex"; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. f. I'Vibropruf 411"; Lambert Corp. g. "Masterflow 713"; Master Builders. h. "Sealtight 588 Grout"; W. R. Meadows, Inc. i. "Sonogrout"; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. j. "Stoncrete NM111; Stonhard, Inc. k. "Five Star Grout"; U. S. Grout Corp. 2. Interior Anchoring Cement: a. "Bonsal Anchor Cement"; W. R. Bonsal Co. b. "Ankertite Cement"; Dayton Superior Corp. C. "Por-Rok"; Minwax Construction Products Division. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2.4 PAINT A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20. B. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 except containing no asbestos fibers. C. Zinc Chromate Primer: FS TT-P-645. 2.5 WELDING MATERIALS, FASTENERS, AND ANCHORS A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in _ fabricated items. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of the type, grade, and class required to produce connections that are suitable for anchoring railing to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loadings. 1. For steel railings and fittings use plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating or ASTM B 696, Class 12 for cadmium plating. 2. For aluminum railings provide fasteners fabricated from type 304 stainless steel. 3. For stainless steel railings provide fasteners fabricated from type 304 stainless steel. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Use fasteners of same basic metal as the fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not _ use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined. 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of handrail and railing components and for their attachment to other work, except -- where otherwise indicated. 2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of handrail and railing components and for their attachment to other work except where exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for handrail and railing system indicated. 3. Provide Phillips flat -head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. D. Cast -In -Place and Post -Installed Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. Cast -in -place anchors. 2. Chemical anchors. 3. Expansion anchors. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of hollow members, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than those required to support structural loads. B. Preassemble railing systems in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows: 1. By insertion of prefabricated elbow fittings. D. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross-section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe. E. Nonwelded Connections: Fabricate railing systems and handrails for connection of members by means of railing manufacturer's standard concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using epoxy structural adhesive where this represents manufacturer's standard splicing method. F. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate pipe handrails and railing systems for connection of members by concealed internal welds, which eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings. G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide manufacturer's standard wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnection of handrail and railing members to other construction. H. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railing systems to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loadings imposed by handrails and railing systems. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY I. For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel, not less than 6 inches long and inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with steel plate forming bottom closure. J. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from - exposed cut edges. K. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. L. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. M. For handrails and railing systems that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources, provide weepholes or other means for evacuation of entrapped water in hollow sections of railing members. N. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. 0. Provide wall returns at ends of wall -mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. P. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at the edge of open -sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated for connection to, and centered between, each railing post. Q. Fillers: Provide steel sheet or plate fillers of thickness and size indicated or required to support structural loads of handrails where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses to produce adequate bearing to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, temporary protective covering prior to shipment. C. Appearance of Finished Work: variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are not acceptable if they are within 1/2 of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved samples and they are assembled or PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY installed to minimize contrast. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, nonspecular; Chemical Finish: etched, Medium Matte; Anodic Coating: Class I Architectural, film thicker than 0.7 mil with integral color or electrolytically deposited color) complying with AAMA 606.1 or AAMA 608.1. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from within standard industry colors and color density range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete as masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of handrails and railings. Set handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free from rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrails and railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 12 feet. 3. Align rails so that variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 9 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. D. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint or zinc chromate primer. E. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing handrails and railings to in -place construction. 3.3 ANCHORING POSTS A. Adjust handrails and railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated but not less than that required by design loadings. B. Anchor posts in concrete by core drilling holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch greater than outside diameter of post. Clean holes of all loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions. 1. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement. C. Cover anchorage joint with a round aluminum flange attached to post as follows: - 1. By set screws. D. For installations exposed on exterior or to flow of water, seal anchoring material to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. E. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. For aluminum pipe railings, attach posts as indicated using manufacturer's standard fittings designed and engineered for this purpose. 3.4 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use manufacturer's standard mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws with plastic filler cement colored to match finish of handrails and railing systems. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 10 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not further apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip -joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side; fasten internal sleeve securely to one side; locate joint within 6 inches of post. 3.5 ANCHORING RAIL ENDS A. Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to rail ends and anchored into wall construction with post -installed anchors and bolts. B. Anchor rail ends to metal surfaces with oval or round flanges. 1. Connect flanges to rail ends using nonwelded connections. C. Install removable railing sections where indicated in slip -fit metal sockets cast into concrete. Accurately locate sockets to match post spacing. 3.6 ATTACHMENT OF HANDRAILS TO WALLS A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with not less than 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. C. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as follows: 1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled -in expansion shield and either concealed hanger bolt or exposed lag bolt, as applicable. 3. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts with square heads. 4. For steel -framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed anchors using self -tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material. B. Touch -Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 of these specifications. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 11 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY C. Clean the following metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, following by rinsing with clean water. 1. Aluminum. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railing systems and handrails from damage during construction period by use of temporary protective coverings approved _... by railing manufacturer. Remove protective covering at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units. - END OF SECTION 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 12 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking. 3. Wood furring. 4. Subflooring. 5. Underlayment. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. 2. Division 6 Section "Exterior Architectural Woodwork" for exterior woodwork specially fabricated for this Project. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and generally not exposed, unless otherwise specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for the following products: 1. Underlayment. C. Material certificates for dimensional lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use as well as design values approved by the Board of Review of American Lumber Standards Committee. D. Wood treatment data as follows including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installation, and finishing of treated material: ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. For each type of preservative treated wood product include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. 2. For water -borne treated products include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to project site. 3. For fire -retardant -treated wood products include certification by treating plant that treated material complies with specified standard and other requirements. 4. Material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory _ indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire -retardant -treated wood products with requirements indicated. 5. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility for Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire -retardant -treated wood products from one source for both treatment and fire -retardant formulation. B. Testing Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing laboratory must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory -submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated without delaying the progress of the Work. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. 1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSO) Board of Review. B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them with lumber grades and species include the following: ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service. 2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian). 3. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory -marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece; or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. D. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members. B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. C. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. D. Grade: "Standard" grade light -framing -size lumber of any species or board -size lumber as required. "No. 3 Common" or "Standard" grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or "No. 2 Boards" per SPIB rules. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION PANELS, GENERAL A. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood construction panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with APA PRP-108. B. Trademark: Furnish construction panels that are each factory -marked with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2.4 CONCEALED PERFORMANCE -RATED CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. General: Where construction panels are indicated for the following concealed types of applications, provide APA Performance -Rated Panels complying with requirements designated under each application for grade designation, span rating, exposure durability classification, edge detail (where applicable), and thickness. B. Subflooring: APA RATED SHEATHING. 1. Exposure Durability Classification: EXTERIOR. 2. Span Rating: As required to suit joist spacing indicated. 2.5 CONSTRUCTION PANELS FOR BACKING A. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire -retardant -treated plywood panels with grade designation, -- APA C-D PLUGGED EXPOSURE 1, in thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch. 2.6 CONSTRUCTION PANELS FOR UNDERLAYMENT A. Plywood Underlayment for Resilient Flooring: For underlayment under 19/32 inch in indicated thickness, provide plywood construction panels with fully sanded face complying with the following requirements: 1. Grade Designation: APA UNDERLAYMENT EXT. B. Plywood Underlayment for Carpet: Provide plywood construction panels in thickness indicated and complying with the following requirements: 1. Grade Designation: APA UNDERLAYMENT EXT. 2.7 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative -treated wood or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable _ requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood). Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark Requirements. B. Pressure -treat above -ground items with water -borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 pcf. For interior uses, after treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. 4. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. C. Pressure -treat wood members in contact with the ground or fresh water with water -borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 pcf. D. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated. E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. 3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. C. Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key -bevelled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. _ Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 WOOD FURRING A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finished work. 1. Firestop furred spaces on walls at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story, with wood blocking or noncombustible materials, _ accurately fitted to close furred spaces. B. Furring to Receive Plywood Paneling: Install 1-inch by 3-inch furring at 2 feet o.c., horizontally and vertically. Select furring for freedom from knots capable of producing bent -over nails and resulting damage to paneling. C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Drywall: Install 1-inch by 2-inch furring at 16 inches o.c., vertically. D. Furring to Receive Plaster Lath: Install 1-inch by 2-inch furring at 16 inches o.c., vertically. E. Suspended Furring: Install suspended furring members of size and -- spacing indicated, including hangers and attachment devices. Level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet, except 1/4 inch in 10 feet for thick -coat plaster work. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide - Residential & Commercial," for types of construction panels and applications indicated. _ B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Subflooring: Glue and nail to framing throughout. 2. Underlayment: Nail to subflooring. a. Fill and sand edge joints of underlayment receiving resilient -- flooring. 3. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail to supports. END OF SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Safing insulation. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 9 Section indicated below for thermal insulation and sound attenuation insulation installed as part of metal -framed wall and partition assemblies: a. "Gypsum Drywall." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Thermal Resistivity: Where the thermal resistivity of insulation products are designated by "r-values," they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-values). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of insulation product specified. C. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by qualified independent testing laboratory evidencing compliance of insulation products with requirements including r-values (aged values for plastic foam insulations), fire performance characteristics, perm ratings, water absorption ratings, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY D. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence compliance of plastic foam insulations with building code in effect for Project. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials identical to those whose indicated fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other _ testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. B. Single -Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation products of one of the following: 1. Manufacturers of Semi -Refractory Fiber Insulation: a. Cafco Industries Ltd. b. Fibrex Inc. C. USG: Thermafiber Div., USG Interiors, Inc. 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 2.3 SAFING INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES A. Semi -Refractory Fiber Board Safing Insulation: Semi -rigid boards BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY designed for use as a fire stop at openings between edge of slab and exterior wall panels, produced by combining semi -refractory mineral fiber manufactured from slag with thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 612, Class 1 and 2; nominal density of 4.0 pcf; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; r-value of 4.0 at 75 deg F (23.9 deg C). B. Calking Compound: Material approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for sealing joint between foil backing of safing insulation and edge of concrete floor slab against penetration of smoke. C. Safing Clips: Galvanized steel safing clips approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for holding safing insulation in place. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of the Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removal of projections that might puncture vapor retarders. B. Close off openings in cavities receiving poured -in -place insulation to prevent the escape of insulation. Provide bronze or stainless steel screen (inside) where openings must be maintained for drainage or ventilation. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with installation of insulation. B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SAFING INSULATION A. Install safing insulation to fill gap between edge of concrete floor slab and back of exterior spandrel panels on safing clips spaced as needed to support insulation but not further apart then 24 inches o.c. Cut safing insulation wider than gap to be filled to ensure compression fit and seal joint between insulation and edge of slab with calking approved by safing insulation manufacturer for this purpose. Leave no voids in completed installation. 3.5 PROTECTION A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. - Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below: a. Control and expansion joints in cast -in -place concrete. b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. C. Other joints as indicated. 2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. b. Tile control and expansion joints. C. Joints on underside of precast beams and planks. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. e. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures. f. Other joints as indicated. 3. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. b. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for sealing joints related to flashing and sheet metal for roofing. 2. Division S "Glass and Glazing" for sealants used in glazing. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall" for sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 4. Division 9 Section "Tile" for sealing tile joints. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed _ to establish and to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration of joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required. 1. Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and cleaners required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds. C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. D. Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealant samples in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. E. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. F. Qualification data complying with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" article. Include list of completed projects with project names addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified. G. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. H. Product test reports for each type of joint sealants indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements specified. I. Preconstruction field test reports indicating which products and joint preparation methods demonstrate acceptable adhesion to joint substrates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Testing Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing laboratory must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory -submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated without delaying progress of the Work. C. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. D. Product Testing: Provide comprehensive test data for each type of joint sealant based on tests conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory on current product formulations within a 24-month period preceding date of Contractor's submittal of test results to Architect. 1. Test elastomeric sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920. Include test results for hardness, stain resistance, adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement (per ASTM C 719), low -temperature flexibility, modulus of elasticity at 100 percent strain, effects of heat aging, and effects of accelerated weathering. 2. Include test results performed on joint sealants after they have cured for 1 year. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 3. When joint substrates are wet. JOINT SEALANTS 1 07901 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installation of joint sealants to occur not less than 21 nor more than 30 days after completion of waterproofing, unless otherwise indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: 1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. 2.2 SOLVENT -RELEASE -CURING JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, solvent -release -curing acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3 or FS TT-S-00230 or both, with capability when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the following percentage change in joint width existing at time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates indicated for Project without failing cohesively: 1. 7-1/2 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 15 percent. 2. 12-1/2 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 25 percent. B. Butyl Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, solvent -release -curing, polymerized butyl sealant complying with ASTM C 1085 and formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids to be nonstaining, paintable, and have a tack -free time of 24 hours or less. C. Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, solvent -release -curing, pigmented synthetic rubber sealant complying JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY with AAMA 803.3 and formulated for sealing joints 3/16 inch or smaller in width. D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Acrylic Sealant: a. "60+Unicrylic," Pecora Corp. b. "PTI 738," Protective Treatments, Inc. C. "PTI 767," Protective Treatments, Inc. d. "Mono," Tremco, Inc. 2. Butyl Sealant: a. "BC-158," Pecora Corp. b. "PTI 757," Protective Treatments, Inc. C. "Sonneborn Multi -Purpose Sealant," Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. d. "Tremco Butyl Sealant," Tremco, Inc. 3. Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant: a. "PTI 200," Protective Treatments, Inc. 2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, mildew -resistant, paintable latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively. B. Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 that accommodates joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent. C. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792, with ASTM C 920 that accommodates joint movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent. D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant: a. "AC-20," Pecora Corp. b. "Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. C. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834," Tremco, Inc. 2. Silicone -Emulsion Sealant: a. "Trade Mate Paintable Glazing Sealant," Dow Corning Corp. JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements: 1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90. 2. Product has flame spread and smoke developed ratings of less than 25 per ASTM E 84. B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical joint sealants that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant: a. "SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant," United States Gypsum Co. b. 11AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant," Pecora Corp. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. "BA-98," Pecora Corp. b. "Tremco Acoustical Sealant," Tremco, Inc. 2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Open -cell polyurethane foam. 2. Closed -cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in unruptured state. 3. Proprietary, reticulated, closed -cell polymeric foam, nonoutgassing, with a density of 2.5 pcf and tensile strength of 35 psi per ASTM D 1623, and with water absorption less than -- 0.02 gms/cc per ASTM C 1083. 4. Any material indicated above. JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY C. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to -26 deg F (-32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant -substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Solvent -Release -Curing Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 804 for use of solvent -release -curing sealants. C. Latex Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 90 for use of latex sealants. D. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 19 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. E. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. C. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between sealants and joint fillers or back of joints. F. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed. G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 62, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 5B in ASTM C 962, where indicated. a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. 3. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 962, of recess depth and at locations indicated. H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, and to comply with sealant manufacturer's directions for installation methods, materials, and tools that produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in conformance with sealant manufacturer's recommendations. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 9 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 07901 JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 10 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following products: 1. Doors and frames: Heavy intermediate weatherstripped steel sections manufactured from solid hot rolled steel shapes. 2. Provide factory finished doors and frames. B. Wood doors are specified in another Division 8 Section. C. Door hardware is specified in another Division 8 Section. D. Glass and Glazing are specified in another Division 8 Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes. C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on contract drawings. 2. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts showing full range of colors available for factory -finished doors and frames. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY E. Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish _ required, prepared on samples not less than 3 inches by 5 inches and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide doors and frames manufactured from new billet steel with flanges rolled integrally at the mill. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard -wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory -finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inches high wood blocking. Avoid use of non -vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide _ 1/4-inches spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering standard steel doors and frames which may be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alenco Company. 2. William Bayley Company. 3. Bliss -Cashier Metal Products, Inc. 617 West Manlius Street East Syracuse, NY 13057 (315) 437 3396 4. Coast to Coast Manufacturing Co. 5. Torrance Steel Window Co., Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Heavy intermediate weatherstripped steel sections, manufactured from solid hot rolled steel shaped. 1. Sections made from new billet steel flanges rolled integrally at the mill. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2. Door sections shall have glazing rebates providing an unobstructed glazing surface al at least 1/2" in height. 3. Combined weight of frame and door sections shall have a minimum of 3.91 pounds per lineal foot. 4. The door sections shall have an integral grove for the reception if weatherstripping. B. Shop Applied Paint: Apply after fabrication. 1. Primer: Rust -inhibitive enamel or paint, either air -drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints complying with ANSI A224.1, "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked -on enamel paint. 2.3 DOORS A. Provide metal doors of types and styles or grades and models indicated on drawings or schedules. 2.4 FRAMES A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 26-gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory- assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. B. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware in accordance with final Door Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 Series Specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. C. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -applied hardware may be done at project site. D. Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware on Standard Steel Doors and Frames," published by Door and Hardware Institute. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY E. Shop Painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door _ and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. 1. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint. -- 2. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. 3. Apply finish coat to doors indicated to be prefinished by spraying and baking, to produce a paint thickness of 1.25 mils. F. Glazing Stops: Minimum 20 gage steel. 1. Provide screw applied removable glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions For Steel Frames," unless otherwise indicated. 1. Except for frames located at existing concrete, masonry or drywall installations, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 2. At existing concrete or masonry construction, provide 3 completed opening anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air -drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors. C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. END OF SECTION 08111 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 08111 - STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following products manufactured in accordance with SDI Recommended Standards: 1. Doors: Flush, hollow or composite construction standard steel doors for interior locations. 2. Frames: Pressed steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, mullions, interior glazed panels, and other interior openings of following type: a. Welded unit type. 3. Assemblies: Provide standard steel door and frame assemblies as required for the following: a. Labeled and fire rated. 4. Provide factory primed doors and frames to be field painted. B. Painting primed doors and frames is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." C. Wood doors are specified in another Division 8 Section. D. Door hardware is specified in another Division 8 Section. E. Glass and Glazing are specified in another Division 8 Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes. C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, _ location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on contract drawings. 2. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts showing full range of colors available for factory -finished doors and frames. E. Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples not less than 3 inches by 5 inches and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected. F. Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire -rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit manufacturer's certification that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications Standard Steel Doors and Frames" ANSI/SDI-100 and as herein specified. B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies whose fire resistance characteristics have been determined per ASTM E 152 and which are labeled and listed by UL, Factory Mutual, Warnock Hersey, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard -wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory -finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inches high wood blocking. Avoid use of non -vented plastic _ STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4-inches spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering standard steel doors and frames which may be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to, the following: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: a. Amweld Building Products, Inc. b. Ceco Corp. C. Copco Door Co. d. Curries Company. e. Deansteel Manufacturing Co. f. Fenestra Corp. g. Kewanee Corp. h. Mesker Door Co. i. Pioneer Industries. j. Premier Products, Inc. (Formerly Dittco). k. Republic Builders Products. 1. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568. B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc -coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526, or drawing quality, ASTM A 642, hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 525, with A60 or G60 coating designation, mill phosphatized. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18-gage sheet steel; galvanized where used with galvanized frames. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, hot -dip galvanize in compliance with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. F. Shop Applied Paint: Apply after fabrication. 1. Primer: Rust -inhibitive enamel or paint, either air -drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints complying STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY with ANSI A224.1, "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime — Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked -on enamel paint. 2.3 DOORS A. Provide metal doors of SDI grades and models specified below or as indicated on drawings or schedules: 1. Interior Doors: ANSI/SDI-100, Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 3 or 4, _ minimum 18-gage cold -rolled sheet steel faces. B. Door Louvers: Provide sightproof stationary louvers for interior doors where indicated, constructed of inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades formed of 24-gage cold -rolled steel set into minimum 20-gage steel frame. 2.4 FRAMES A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 18-gage cold -rolled steel. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered, coped, or welded corners. B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single -door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double -door frames. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory- assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI-100 requirements. 1. Internal Construction: Manufacturer's standard honeycomb, polyurethane, polystyrene, unitized steel grid, vertical steel - stiffeners, or rigid mineral fiber core with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets where appropriate in accordance with SDI standards. 2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads except between non -fire -rated pairs of doors not more than 1/4 inch. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. B. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." C. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from either cold -rolled or hot -rolled steel. STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY D. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. E. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware in accordance with final Door Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 Series Specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcing and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable. F. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -applied hardware may be done at project site. G. Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware on Standard Steel Doors and Frames," published by Door and Hardware Institute. H. Shop Painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. 1. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint. 2. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. I. Glazing Stops: Minimum 20 gage steel or .040-inch-thick aluminum. 1. Provide non -removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw applied removable glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A B. INSTALLATION General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions For Steel Frames," unless otherwise indicated. 1. Except for frames located at existing concrete, masonry or drywall installations, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and — spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 2. At existing concrete or masonry construction, provide 3 completed opening anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices. 3. Install fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80. 4. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws. C. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI-100. 1. Install fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air -drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors. C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. END OF SECTION 08111 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent and location of each type of flush wood door is indicated on drawings and in schedules. B. Types of doors required include the following: 1. Solid core flush wood doors with wood veneer faces. C. Factory -finishing of flush wood doors is included in this section. D. Factory premachining for hardware for wood doors is included in this section. E. Louvers for flush wood doors, including furnishing and installation, are specified under this section. F. Aluminum door frames for flush wood doors are specified in another Division-8 section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Door manufacturer's technical data for each type of door, including details of core and edge construction, trim for openings and louvers, and factory -finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for factory finishing and other pertinent data. 1. For factory-premachined doors, indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts for locksets and other cutouts adjacent to light and louver openings. C. Samples: Submit samples, 1-0" square or as indicated, for the following: 1. Doors for Transparent Finish: Door faces with solid wood edging representing typical range of color and grain for each species of FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY veneer and solid lumber required. — 2. Factory -Finished Doors: Each type of factory finish required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards: 1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"; including Section 1300 "Architectural Flush Doors", of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) for grade of door, core construction, finish and other requirements exceeding those of NWWDA quality standard. B. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of NWWDA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors", as well as with manufacturer's instructions. B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used on shop drawings for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary, removable or concealed markings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to project's geographical location: 1. Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100-S-3 "Moisture Content". 2. Referenced WIC quality standard including "Section 1 - General Information - Technical Bulletin". 1.7 WARRANTY: A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards. _- FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. Warranty shall also include reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of Substantial Completion. 3. Solid Core Interior Doors: a. Life of installation. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: Contractor's work contributed manufacturer's warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: Replace or refinish doors where to rejection or to voiding of A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering doors which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Solid Core Doors with Wood Veneer Faces: a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. b. Buell Door Company. C. Cal -Wood Door Div., Timberland Industries, Inc. d. Chappell Door Company. e. Doors, Incorporated. f. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division. g. Gay Doors, Inc. h. Glen -Mar Door Mfg. Co. i. Graham Manufacturing Corp. j. Ipik Door Co., Inc. k. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. 1. Weyerhauser Company. B. Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Faces: Red oak, plain sliced. 2. AWI Grade: Custom. 3. Construction: SLC-5 (Glued block core, 5-ply). on Interior: Comply with the following requirements: 2.2 FABRICATION: A. Fabricate flush wood doors to produce doors complying with following requirements: 1. In sizes indicated for job -site fitting. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2. Factory-prefit and premachine doors to fit frame opening sizes _ indicated with the following uniform clearances and bevels: a. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for prefitting. Comply with final hardware schedules and door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates. b. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory premachining. B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable _ requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of doors required. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. 2.3 FACTORY FINISHING: A. General: Comply with referenced AWI quality standard including Section 1500 "Factory Finishing". B. Prefinish wood doors at factory. C. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, finish system, staining effect and sheen. 1. AWI Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: AWI System #3 alkyd -urea conversion varnish. 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 4. Effect: Filled finish. 5. Sheen: Satin -medium rubbed effect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door: 1. verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION: FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Hardware: For installation see Division-8 "Finish Hardware" section of these specifications. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and of referenced AWI standard and as indicated. 1. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA No. 80. C. Job -Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Fitting Clearances for Non -Rated Doors: Provide 1/8" at jambs and heads; 1/16" per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/8" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4" clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Fitting Clearances for Fire -Rated Doors: Complying with NFPA 80. 3. Bevel non -rated doors 1/8" in 2" at lock and hinge edges. 4. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8" in 2" at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Prefit Doors: Fit to frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Factory -Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation, if fitting or machining is required at the job site. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION: A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 08305 - ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes access doors for installation in the following types of construction: 1. Gypsum drywall. B. Provide fire -rated access doors where indicated or scheduled. C. Provide stainless steel access doors. D. Roof hatches are specified in Division 7. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product data in form of manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of access door assembly, including setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage, devices. a. Include complete schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, wall and ceiling construction details, finishes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. 2. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of customized access doors and frames, including details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, anchorage and accessory items. 3. Samples, 3 inches by 5 inches minimum size, of each panel face material showing factory -finished color and texture. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for entire project from one source from a single manufacturer. ACCESS DOORS 08305 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY B. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Wherever a fire -resistance classification is _ indicated, provide access door assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.'s "Building Materials Directory" for rating shown. 1. Provide UL label on each fire -rated access door. C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. D. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be built _ into other work for installation of access doors. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verification: Obtain specific locations and sizes for required access doors from trades requiring access to concealed equipment, and indicate on submittal schedule. B. Special -Size Access Doors: Use where required or requested; indicate on schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering access doors that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Bar -Co., Inc. 2. Cesco Products 3. J.L. Industries 4. Karp Associates, Inc. 5. Milcor, Inc. 6. Nystrom, Inc. 7. The Williams Brothers Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. General: Furnish each access door assembly manufactured as an integral unit, complete with all parts, and ready for installation. B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Fabricate units of continuous welded steel construction unless otherwise indicated. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of support shown. ACCESS DOORS 08305 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY C. Frames: Fabricate from 16-gage, #4 satin -finished stainless steel. 1. Fabricate frame with exposed flange nominal 1-inch wide around perimeter of frame for units installed in the following construction: a. Drywall finish. b. Ceramic tile finish. C. Wood paneling. 2. For gypsum drywall or gypsum veneer plaster, furnish perforated frames with drywall bead. 3. For full -bed plaster applications, furnish frames with galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame. D. Flush Panel Doors: Fabricate from not less than 14-gage stainless steel sheet, with concealed spring hinges or concealed piano hinge set to open 175 degrees. Buff exposed surfaces to #4 satin finish. 1. For fire -rated units, provide manufacturer's standard insulated flush panel/doors, with continuous piano hinge and self -closing mechanism. E. Locking Devices: Furnish flush, screwdriver -operated cam locks of number required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. Provide one cylinder lock per access door. Furnish 2 keys per lock. Key all locks alike, unless otherwise scheduled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of access doors. B. Coordinate installation with work of other trades. C. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb or level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 08305 ACCESS DOORS 08305 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY ACCESS DOORS 08305 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 08411 - INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of aluminum door frames. 1. Interior door frames. 2. Transoms. 3. Sidelights. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Glazing requirements for aluminum door frames are included in Division 8 Section "Glass and Glazing." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product data for each aluminum door frame system required, including: a. Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods. b. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories. C. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning. 2. Shop drawings for each aluminum door frame system required, including: a. Layout and installation details, including relationship to adjacent work. b. Elevations at 1/4-inch scale. C. Detail sections of typical composite members. d. Anchors and reinforcement. e. Hardware mounting heights. f. Provisions for expansion and contraction. g. Glazing details. 3. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Submit pairs of samples of INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES 08411 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY each specified color and finish on 12-inch-long sections of extrusions or formed shapes. Where normal color variations are anticipated, include 2 or more units in each set of samples indicating extreme limits of color variations. 4. Samples for Verification Purposes: The Architect reserves the right to require additional samples, that show fabrication techniques and workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories. 5. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing that aluminum entrance and storefront systems have been tested in accordance with specified test procedures and comply with performance characteristics indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installations of aluminum storefront and entrances similar in design and extent to those required for the project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum door frame systems produced by a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and that have a record of successful in-service performance. C. Fabricator Qualifications: Provide aluminum door frame systems fabricated by a firm experienced in producing systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project, and that have a record of successful in-service performance. The fabricator shall have sufficient production capacity to produce components required without causing delay in progress of the Work. D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum door frame systems from one source and from a single manufacturer. E. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate the size, profile, and dimensional requirements of aluminum door frame work required and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Aluminum door frames by other manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver aluminum door frames components in the manufacturer's original protective packaging. B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or concrete. Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to permit circulation of air. INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES 08411 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid significant or permanent damage. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Faulty operation. 2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering. B. Warranty Period: 3 years after the date of Substantial Completion. C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering entrance and storefront systems that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amarlite Architectural Products. 2. Atlas Architectural Metals, Inc. 3. CMI-Cronstroms Mfg. Inc. 4. Dawson Metal Company, Inc. 5. EFCO Corporation. 6. Kawneer Company, Inc. 7. Portal, Inc. 8. PPG Industries. 9. Rebco, Inc. 10. Tubelite Division of Indal, Inc. 11. United States Aluminum Corp. 12. Vistawall Architectural Products. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 221 for aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate, and ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars, rods and wire. B. Carbon steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members shall comply with ASTM A 36 for structural shapes, plates and bars, ASTM A 611 for cold INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES 08411 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY rolled sheet and strip, or ASTM A 570 for hot rolled sheet and strip. — C. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of "Glass and Glazing" section of these specifications. D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other components. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw -anchor into aluminum members less than 0.125 inches thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard noncorrosive pressed -in splined grommet nuts. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners. E. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179-inch (26 gage) minimum dead -soft stainless steel, or 0.026-inch-thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type - selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other components. F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high -strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123. G. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide cast iron, malleable iron, or hot -dip galvanized steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123. H. Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable compressible weatherstripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287. 2.3 HARDWARE A. General: Refer to Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware" for requirements for hardware items. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate aluminum door frames to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes and profile requirements are indicated on the drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions required, to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. C. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides. Restore mechanical finish. 1. Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in such a INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES 08411 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY manner as to minimize distortion and discoloration on the finished surface. D. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity. E. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, or a suitable sealant, or a nonabsorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not use coatings containing lead. F. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting members. 1. Uniformity of Metal Finish: Abutting extruded aluminum members shall not have an integral color or texture variation greater than half the range indicated in the sample pair submittal. G. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. H. Weatherstripping: For sound deadened doors, provide compression weatherstripping against fixed stops. At other edges, provide sliding weatherstripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 1. Provide EPDM or vinyl -blade gasket weatherstripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold. 2. At interior doors and other locations without weatherstripping, provide neoprene silencers on stops to prevent wood -to -metal contact. I. Provide finger guards of collapsible neoprene or PVC gasketing securely anchored into frame at hinge -jamb of center -pivoted doors. 2.5 FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Baked Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical conversion coating, acid chromate -fluoride -phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel in compliance with paint manufacturer's specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. 1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting modified acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 603.8 except with minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss. 2. Color: White and as indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard color designations. PART 3 - EXECUTION INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES 08411 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements indicated, installation tolerances, and other conditions that affect installation of aluminum entrances and storefronts. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with the installation. - 1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. Install interior aluminum door frames, sidelight, and transoms, after installation of gypsum board partitions. B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or panels. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. C. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 1. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed fasteners after fabrication. 2. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum. 3. Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete or other masonry with alkali resistant coating. 4. Paint wood and similar absorptive material in contact with aluminum and exposed to the elements or otherwise subject to wetting, with two coats of aluminum house paint. Seal joints between the materials with sealant. D. Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 for sealants, fillers, and gaskets. E. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" Section of Division 8 for installation of glass and other panels indicated to be glazed into doors and framing, and not preglazed by manufacturer. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings. - B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the "Glass and Glazing" Section for cleaning and INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES 08411 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 08411 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES 08411 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 08510 - STEEL WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes restoration or replacement of existing heavy intermediate steel windows. Provide new units at openings which do not have existing steel windows. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Joint sealing between windows and adjacent materials is specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." 2. Glazing requirements, including windows specified to be factory glazed, are specified in Division 8 Section "Glass and Glazing." 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide steel window units that comply with performance requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding stock windows according to test methods indicated. B. Design Requirements: Comply with structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration requirements indicated. 1. Testing: Test each type and size of required window unit through a recognized independent testing laboratory or agency for compliance with specified performance requirements. 2. Structural Performance: Provide window units with no failure or permanent deflection for positive (inward) and negative (outward) test pressure of 30 lbf per sq. ft., when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330. 3. Air Infiltration: Provide units with an air infiltration rate of not more than 0.50 cfm per foot of operable sash joint, for an inward test pressure of 1.56 lbf per sq. ft., when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. 4. Water Penetration: Provide units with no water penetration as defined in the test standard, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 547-85. C. Crack Tolerances: Before leaving the factory, test each type and size STEEL WINDOWS 08510 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY of required window units with ventilators closed and locked, for compliance with the following tolerances specified by the Steel Window Institute (SWI): 1. Projected Units: It shall not be possible to insert freely a steel feeler gage 2 inches wide by 0.031 inch thick between the inside metal to metal contacts between frames and ventilators without forcing, or to insert freely a steel feeler gage 2 inches wide by 0.020 inch thick between more than 40 percent of such contacts between frames and ventilators without forcing. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product data for each type of window are required, including: a. Construction details and fabrication methods. b. Profiles and dimensions of individual components. C. Data on hardware, accessories, and finishes. d. Weight per foot of each steel section. e. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces. 2. Shop drawings for each type of window are required. Include information not fully detailed in manufacturer's standard product data and the following: a. Layout and installation details, including anchors. b. Elevations of continuous work at 1/4-inch scale and typical window unit elevations at 3/4-inch scale. C. Full-size section details of typical composite members, including reinforcement. d. Hardware, including operators. e. Accessories. f. Glazing details. 3. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Submit samples of each specified finish on 12-inch-long sections of window members. 4. Samples for Verification Purposes: The Architect reserves the right to require additional samples that show fabrication techniques and workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories. S. Material Test Reports: Engage a recognized independent testing laboratory or agency to perform tests specified. Provide certified test results showing that each type, grade and size of window unit complies with performance requirements indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed installation of steel window units similar in design and extent to those required. for the project and whose work has resulted in STEEL WINDOWS 08510 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Standards: Comply with applicable recommended specifications of the Steel Window Institute except to the extent more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Single Source Responsibility: Provide steel windows produced by a single manufacturer capable of showing prior production of units similar to those required. D. Design Concept: The drawings indicate the size, profiles and dimensional requirements of the steel window types required and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Steel window units by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations from dimensions and profiles indicated are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual window openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the work. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Steel Window Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the window manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace window units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air infiltration. 2. Faulty operation of ventilators and hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering. B. Warranty Period: 3 years after the date of Substantial Completion. C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies that the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, STEEL WINDOWS 08510 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work -- include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alenco Company. 2. William Bayley Company. 3. Bliss -Cashier Metal Products, Inc. 617 West Manilus Street East Syracuse, NY 13057 (315) 437 3396 4. Coast to Coast Manufacturing Co. 5. Torrance Steel Window Co., Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Window Members: Provide frame and ventilator members formed from hot -rolled new billet steel sections. Size and weight of principal frame and ventilator members shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Heavy Intermediate Windows: Combined weight of frame and ventilator members shall not be less than 3.5 lbs. per lineal foot. Front to back depth of frame or ventilator section shall not be less than 1-5/16 inches. 2. Commercial Projected: Frame and ventilator members shall be nominally 1/8 inch thick by 1-3/8 inches deep, except members nominally 1-1/4 inches deep may be used provided corners are welded and ground. a. Applied weathering members, where indicated, shall be 0.060-inch minimum thickness. B. Trim members, including glazing beads, screen frames, retainers for weatherstripping, flashing and similar items shall be stainless steel. Trim located entirely on the interior face of windows may be of formed steel. C. Fasteners: Provide bronze, brass, stainless steel or other metal fasteners warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with steel window members, trim, hardware, anchors and other components. 1. Exposed Fasteners: If exposed fasteners are used, provide Phillips, flat -head machined screws that match the finish of the member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. D. Anchors, Clips and Window Accessories: Provide units of stainless steel, hot -dip zinc coated steel or iron complying with ASTM A 123, or bronze/brass. Provide units with sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. E. Compression -Type Glazing Strips and Weatherstripping: Provide compressible stripping for glazing and weatherstripping such as molded STEEL WINDOWS 08510 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation 2BC415 to 3BC620, or molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287, or molded expanded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Grade 4. F. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated window units, provide type recommended by the manufacturer for joint size and movement. Sealant shall remain permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" of these specifications for selection and installation of sealants. G. Wire Fabric Insect Screen: Provide 18 by 18, 18 by 16, or 18 by 14 mesh of 0.009-inch-diameter stainless steel wire, complying with FS RR-W-365, Type VI. H. Glass and Glazing Materials of these specifications. 2.3 HARDWARE Refer to the "Glass and Glazing" sections A. Hardware: Provide the manufacturer's standard nonremovable, solid bronze hardware, with steel or brass/bronze operating bars and rods. Hardware shall be of sufficient strength to perform the function for which it is intended. B. Four -bar Friction Hinges: Comply with AAMA 904.1. 1. Friction Shoes: Provide adjustable friction shoes of bronze, brass, nylon or other nonabrasive, nonstaining, noncorrosive, durable material. C. Pivots: Drop -forged steel pivot leaves with brass pins. D. Limit Device: Concealed, friction adjustor/stay bar limit device designed to restrict ventilator opening. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide the manufacturer's standard accessories that comply with indicated standards. B. Weatherstripping: Provide the manufacturer's standard weatherstripping, of materials specified, applied to inside metal contact line of each operating sash or vent. 2.5 AWNING WINDOWS A. Hardware: Provide the following equipment and operating hardware: 1. Operating Device: Chain operated cam handle hardware. 2.6 PROJECTED WINDOWS STEEL WINDOWS 08510 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Hardware: Provide the following operating equipment and hardware: 1. Operating Device: Chain operated cam handle hardware. 2. Hinges: Balance arms with adjustable, nonabrasive friction pivots (2 per ventilator) . 3. Sash Lock: Cam -action sweep lock handle with surface -mounted strike. 4. Sash Lock: Pole -operated spring catch lock. S. Limit Device: Stay bar with an adjustable hold -open device. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabrication steel window units to comply with indicated standards. Include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units. 1. Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling ventilator framing. 2. Prepare window ventilators for glazing except where preglazing at the factory is indicated. B. Provide weepholes and internal water passages to conduct infiltrating water to the exterior. C. Provide water -shed members above side -hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural water penetration. D. Subframes: Provide subframes formed of hot -rolled or cold -rolled steel matching window units of the profile indicated. Provide not less than 2-inch-deep sections fabricated of 1/8-inch-thick steel. Miter or cope corners, weld and dress smooth. Finish to match window units. E. Provide mullions and cover plates formed of hot -rolled or cold -rolled steel matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and for installation of window units. Provide mullions of profile indicated. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, in the manner indicated. F. Glazing Stops: Provide screw -applied or snap -on glazing stops coordinated with glass selection and glazing system as indicated. Finish glazing stops to match window units, if fabricated of steel; _ otherwise provide the manufacturer's standard finish as selected by the Architect. G. Preglazed Fabrication: Preglaze window units at the factory where possible and practical for applications indicated. Comply with glass and glazing requirements of the "Glass and Glazing" sections of these specifications. 2.8 FINISHES STEEL WINDOWS 08510 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. B. Surface Preparation: Before fabrication clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants followed by a zinc -phosphate pretreatment applied in accordance with the window manufacturer's recommendations. C. Galvanized Windows: After fabrication, provide galvanize treatment consisting of chemical cleaning complying with SSPC-SP 1 and pickling treatment complying with SSPC-SP 8, followed by a hot -dip galvanizing complying with ASTM A 123. 1. After galvanizing provide a 1.0-mil dry film thickness, shop -applied finish consisting of a hot -phosphate solution treatment followed by a chromic -acid rinse, drying and a special dip -metal primer coating and oven drying for 30 minutes at 300 deg F (149 deg C). D. Shop Prime Coat Finish: After fabrication provide 1.0-mil dry film thickness shop prime coat finish consisting of a hot alkali solution cleaning, followed by a rinse and hot -phosphate solution treatment, then a chromic -acid rinse, drying and a special -dip metal primer coating, and oven drying for 30 minutes at 300 deg F (149 deg C). E. High Performance Organic Coating: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's instructions. 1. Fluorocarbon 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermo-cured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluorocarbon color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; comply with AAMA 605.2. 2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors and gloss. F. Protect shop finishes from damage due to shipping, handling, and exposures prior to application of field finish or prior to time of substantial completion where shop finish is the final finish. 2.8 RESTORATION A. See Window Schedule for windows to be restored or replaced. B. Restoration process is as follows: 1. Clean window unit in an acid etching emersion. 2. Replace deteriorated steel members. 3. Galvanize window unit. 4. Apply finish. C. Unit prices: 1. Provide a unit price for a window restoration. STEEL WINDOWS 08510 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2. Provide a unit price for a window replacement. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect openings before beginning installation. verify that concrete openings are correct and the sill plate is level. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installation of window units, hardware, operators, and other components of the work. B. Set window units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or ventilators. Provide proper support and anchor securely to surrounding construction with approved fasteners. 1. Separate zinc -coated steel and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion of electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials, by inserting a bituminous coating or plastic sheet materials. C. Set sill members and other members in a bed of compound or with joint _ fillers or gaskets, as shown, to provide weathertight construction. Refer to the "Joint Sealer" Section of Division 7 for compounds, fillers, and gaskets to be installed concurrently with window units. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of the - work. 1. Seal exterior joints between sash, trim and mullions watertight _ with sealant. 2. Compounds, joint fillers, and gaskets to be installed after installation of window units are specified as work in another Section in Division 7. 3. Repair abraded areas of factory applied finishes. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating ventilators and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and weatherstripping, for smooth operation and a weathertight closure. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces promptly after installation of windows. Exercise care to avoid damage to the finish. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. STEEL WINDOWS 08510 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY B. Clean glass of units promptly after installation of windows. Comply with requirements of the "Glass and Glazing" Section for cleaning and maintenance. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Initiate and maintain protection and other precautions required through the remainder of the construction period, to ensure that, except for normal weathering, window units will be free of damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08510 STEEL WINDOWS 08510 - 9 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed. B. This Section includes the following: 1. Hinges. 2. Spring hinges. 3. Key control system. 4. Lock cylinders and keys. 5. Lock and latch sets. 6. Bolts. 7. Exit devices. 8. Push/pull units. 9. Closers. 10. Miscellaneous door control devices. 11. Protection plates. 12. Weatherstripping for exterior doors. 13. Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors. 14. Thresholds. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for factory prefitting and factory premachining of doors for door hardware. D. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include: 1. Final replacement cores and keys to be installed by Owner. E. Door hardware supplier's responsibilities shall be as follows: 1. Submittals: Submit through Contractor required product data, final hardware schedule, separate keying schedule, and samples as specified in this Section, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Construction Schedule: Inform Contractor promptly of estimated DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY times and dates that will be required to process submittals, to furnish templates, to deliver hardware, and to perform other work associated with furnishing door hardware for purposes of including this data in construction schedule. Comply with this schedule. 3. Coordination and Templates: Assist Contractor as required to coordinate hardware with other work in respect to both fabrication and installation. Furnish Contractor with templates and deliver hardware to proper locations. 4. Product Handling: Package, identify, deliver, and inventory door hardware specified in this Section. 5. Discrepancies: Based on requirements indicated in Contract Documents in effect at time of door hardware selection, furnish types, finishes, and quantities of door hardware, including fasteners, and Owner's maintenance tools required to comply with specified requirements and as needed to install and maintain hardware. Furnish or replace any items of door hardware resulting from shortages and incorrect items at no cost to the Owner or Contractor. Obtain signed receipts from Contractor for all delivered materials. F. Contractor's responsibilities shall be as follows: 1. Submittals: Coordinate and process submittals for door hardware in same manner as submittals for other work. 2. Construction Schedule: Cooperate with door hardware supplier in establishing scheduled dates for submittals and delivery of templates and door hardware. Incorporate in construction schedule the times and dates related to furnishing hardware by door hardware supplier. 3. Coordination: Coordinate door hardware with other Work. Furnish hardware supplier or manufacturer with shop drawings of other work where required or requested. verify completeness and suitability of hardware with supplier. 4. Product Handling: Provide secure lock -up for hardware delivered to the site. Inventory hardware jointly with representative of hardware supplier and issue signed receipts for all delivered materials. 5. Installation Information: The general types and approximate quantities of hardware required for this Project are indicated at the end of this Section in order to establish Contractor's costs for installation and other work not included in allowance. 6. No adjustments in Contract sum will be made for costs other than those covered by the allowances for subsequent increases or decreases in quantity of one or more hardware types that do not exceed 5 percent. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A B General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification sections. Product data including manufacturers' item of door hardware, installation operating parts and finish, and other DOOR HARDWARE technical product data for each instructions, maintenance of information necessary to show 08710 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY compliance with requirements. C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Keying information. 2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule. 3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. D. Samples of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. Submit samples prior to submission of final hardware schedule. 1. Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated in the Work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements. E. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer. B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that _ has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. 1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing. C. Fire -Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire -rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire -rated door and door frame labels. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container. C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site). E. Provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door -- hardware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Butts and Hinges: a. Hager Hinge Co. b. H. Soss & Company. C. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works. 2. Key Control System: a. Key Control Systems, Inc. b. Telkee Inc. 3. Cylinders and Locks: a. Best Lock Corp. b. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. C. Falcon Lock Co. d. Sargent Manufacturing Company. e. Schlage Lock, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. f. Yale Security Inc. 4. Bolts: a. Glynn -Johnson Corp. b. Hager Hinge Co. C. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company. d. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works. 5. Exit/Panic Devices: a. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. b. Sargent Manufacturing Company. C. Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. d. Yale Security Inc. 6. Push/Pull Units: a. Baldwin Hardware Corp. b. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. C. Hager Hinge Co. d. Hiawatha, Inc. e. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company. 7. Overhead Closers: a. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY b. International Door Closers, Inc. C. LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. d. Sargent Manufacturing Company. e. Yale Security Inc. 8. Kick, Mop, and Armor Plates: a. Baldwin Hardware Corp. - b. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. C. Hager Hinge Co. d. Hiawatha, Inc. e. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company. 9. Thresholds: a. Hager Hinge Co. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. C. Zero International, Inc. 2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following: 1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements. 2. ANSI/BHMA designations used elsewhere in this Section or in schedules to describe hardware items or to define quality or function are derived from the following standards. Provide products complying with these standards and requirements specified elsewhere in this Section. a. Butts and Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1. b. Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.2. C. Exit Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.3. d. Door Controls - Closers: ANSI/BHMA A156.4. e. Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products: ANSI/BHMA A156.5. f. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI/BHMA A156.7. g. Mortise Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.13. h. Closer Holder Release Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.15. i. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.16. j. Materials and Finishes: ANSI/BHMA A156.18. 2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire -rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self -tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. D. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish. E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 2.4 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template -produced units. B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat -head screws complying with the following requirements: 1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. 2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws. 3. For fire -rated wood doors install #12 x 1-1/4-inch, threaded -to -the -head steel wood screws. 4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as _ follows: 1. Out -Swing Exterior Doors: Nonremovable pins. 2. Out -Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Nonremovable pins. 3. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins. 4. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where hospital tip (HT) indicated. D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height. 1. Fire -Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches or less in height with same rule for additional hinges. 2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required (master, grandmaster or great -grandmaster), either new or integrated with Owner's existing system. B. Equip locks with cylinders for interchangeable -core pin tumbler inserts. Furnish only temporary inserts for the construction period, and remove these when directed. 1. Furnish final cores and keys for installation by Owner. C. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. D. Provide two masterkey systems and provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. 1. Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer's key symbol, and notation, "DO NOT DUPLICATE." E. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only. F. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system, and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system. 1. Furnish one extra blank for each lock. 2. Deliver keys to Owners. 2.6 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM A. Provide two key control systems including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150 percent of DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY the number of locks required for the Project. 1. Provide complete cross index system set up by key control manufacturer, and place keys on markers and hooks in the cabinet as determined by the final key schedule. 2. Provide hinged -panel type cabinet for wall mounting. 2.7 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide flat lip strikes for locks with 3-piece, antifriction latchbolts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Provide recess type top strikes for bolts locking into head frames, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide dust -proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold construction provides nonrecessed strike for bolt. 4. Provide roller type strikes where recommended by manufacturer of the latch and lock units. B. Lock Throw: Provide 5/8-inch minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. 1. Provide 1/2-inch minimum throw of latch for other bored and preassembled types of locks and 3/4-inch minimum throw of latch for mortise locks. Provide 1-inch minimum throw for all dead bolts. C. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2-inch-diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with minimum 12-inch-long rod for doors up to 7'-01, in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 7'-0" in height. D. Exit Device Dogging: Except on fire -rated doors where closers are provided on doors equipped with exit devices, equip the units with keyed dogging device to keep the latch bolt retracted, when engaged. E. Rabbeted Doors: Where rabbeted door stiles are indicated, provide special rabbeted front on lock and latch units and bolts. 2.8 PUSH/PULL UNITS A. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installation, thru-bolted for matched pairs but not for single units. B. Concealed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's special concealed fastener system for installation, thru-bolted for matched pairs but not for single units. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 9 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2.9 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. 1. Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer unit one size larger than recommended for use with standard arms. 2. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as otherwise indicated. B. Access -Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. C. Combination Door Closers and Holders: Provide units designed to hold door in open position under normal usage and to release and close door automatically under fire conditions. Incorporate an integral electromagnetic holder mechanism designed for use with UL listed fire detectors, provided with normally closed switching contacts. 1. Provide integral smoke detector device in combination door closers and holders complying with UL 228. D. Flush Floor Plates: Provide finished metal flush floor plates for floor closers except where thresholds are indicated and cover plate is specified to be an integral part of threshold. Finish floor plate to match hardware sets, unless otherwise indicated. E. Recessed Floor Plates: Provide recessed floor plates where no thresholds are indicated and floor closers are located in an area of resilient flooring, stone flooring, or terrazzo. Recess plates to receive an insert of the floor finish material of the normal thickness as indicated. Provide extended spindle on closer as may be necessary to accommodate thickness of floor finish. 1. Where terrazzo floor finish includes metal divider or expansion strips, match exposed ring of recessed floor plate on closer with metal of floor strips. F. Provide grey resilient parts for exposed bumpers. G. Provide black resilient parts for exposed bumpers. 2.10 DOOR TRIM UNITS A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine screws or self -tapping screws. B. Fabricate edge trim of stainless steel to fit door thickness in standard lengths or to match height of protection plates. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 10 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY C. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1-1/2 inches less than door width on hinge side and not more than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side by height indicated. 1. Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch (U.S. 18 gage). 2.11 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS A. General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. C. Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper -type resilient insert and metal retainer strips, surface applied unless shown as mortised or semimortised, and of following metal, finish, and resilient bumper material: 1. Extruded aluminum with color anodized finish as selected from manufacturer's standard color range, 0.062-inch minimum thickness of main walls and flanges. 2. Expanded neoprene: Cellular rubber conforming to ASTM D 1056 Type 2 (closed -cell); Class B (low -swell, oil -resistant); Grade 2 (compression -deflection of 5 - 9 psi); and self -extinguishing in following size: a. 3/16 inch x 5/8 inch. D. Weatherstripping at Door Bottoms: Provide threshold consisting of contact -type resilient insert and metal housing of design and size shown and of following metal, finish, and resilient seal strip: 1. Extruded aluminum with color anodized finish as selected from manufacturer's standard color range, 0.062-inch minimum thickness of main walls and flanges. 2. Brush pile insert of polypropylene or nylon woven pile and aluminum strip backing complying with AAMA 701.2. 2.12 THRESHOLDS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and profile as shown or scheduled. B. Exterior Hinged or Pivoted Doors: Provide units not less than 4 inches wide, formed to accommodate change in floor elevation where indicated, fabricated to accommodate door hardware and to fit door frames, and as follows: DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 11 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. For in -swinging doors provide units with interlocking lip and — interior drain channel; include hook on bottom edge of door and drain pan. 2. For out -swinging doors provide units with interlocking lip and with hook on bottom edge of door to act as weather bar. 3. For out -swinging doors provide rabbeted type units with replaceable weatherstrip insert in stop. 2.13 HARDWARE FINISHES A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets (or push-pull units if no latch or lock sets). B. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the Architect's sample. C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze, and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicate "no lacquer." E. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products. F. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry -recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted. 1. Rust -Resistant Finish: For iron and steel base metal required for exterior work and in areas shown as "High Humidity" areas (and also when designed with the suffix -RR), provide 0.2-mil-thick copper coating on base metal before applying brass, bronze, nickel, or chromium plated finishes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect. 1. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors." DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 12 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl -rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." F. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated. 3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. D. Six -Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after the date of Substantial Completion, the Installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of latchsets and locksets and of door control devices, and of other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the Project to perform the following work: 1. Examine and re -adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 13 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended _. additions to the maintenance procedures. 3. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of hardware units. 4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware. 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware," hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets. 1. Hardware sets indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and product designation, size, and finish or color, as applicable. 2. Lockset Designs: Provide the lockset designs designated below [or, if by another manufacturer, one that matches those designated]: B. Hardware Set No. [0]: (For each door, 100.) [1 1/21 pair Butts Hager AB852 (1] Lockset Von Duprin lever Handle # 17 626 [1] Closer LCN 4020 [1] Panic Hardware Von Duprin, 8827L-F Surface Mounted. [1] Set Weatherstripping [1] Sill Sweep [1] Threshold ADA Accessible C. Hardware Set No. [1]: (For each door, 101A, 101B.) [1 1/21 pair Butts Hager AB852 (1] Lockset Schlage AL10S, Neptune, 626 [1) Closer LCN 4020 - [1] Set Weatherstripping [1] Sill Sweep [1] Threshold ADA Accessible D. Hardware Set No. [2]: (For each door, 1-216.) [1 1/2] pair Butts Hager AB852 [1] Lockset Schlage AL170PD, Neptune, 626 [1) Closer LCN 4020 [1] Kickplate [8]" high x (32]" x .050, 626 [1) Wall Stop Ives 407/436-438, 626 [3] Silencers Black E. Hardware Set No. [3]: (For each Door 175.) [1 1/2] pair Butts Hager ABB50 [1] Lockset Von Duprin, Lever Handle # 17,626 —. [2] Closer LCN 4020 [2] Panic Hardware Von Duprin, 8827L-F Surface Mounted (2] Set Weatherstripping DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 14 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY (2] Sill Sweep (1] Threshold ADA Accessible F. Hardware Set No. [4]: (For each Door 185, 201, 201A.) [1 1/21 pair Butts Hager AB850 [i] Lockset Schlage A1L10S, Neptune, 626 (2] Closers LCN 4010 [2) Wall Stop Ives 407/436-438, 626 [6] Silencers Black G. Hardware Set No. [5]: (For each Door 255.) [1 1/21 pair Butts Hager AB850 [1] Lockset Schlage AL10S, Neptune, 626 (1] Closers LCN 4010 (1] Wall Stop Ives 407/436-438, 626 (3] Silencers Black H. Hardware Set No. [6]: (For each Door 171, 176, 1-200, 1-212, 1-213, 203, 203A, 205, 213, 215, 231, 257, 260, 263, 268, 284.) (1 1/21 pair Butts Hager AB850 (1] Lockset Schlage AL10S, Neptune, 626 (1] Closer LCN 4010 [1] Wall Stop Ives 407/436-438, 626 [3] Silencers Black I. Hardware Set No. [7]: (For each Door 157, 172, 174, 178, 180, 1811, 183, 184, 186, 187, 188, 189, 190, 191, 192, 194, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 1-201,1-202, 1-203, 1-204, 1-205, 1-206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 212, 221, 225, 232, 233, 253, 256, 258, 262, 264, 265, 269, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 277, 283, 285.) [1 1/21 pair Butts Hager AB850 (1] Lockset Schlage AL50PD, Neptune, 626 [1] Wall Stop Ives 407/436-438, 626 [3] Silencers Black J. Hardware Set No. [8]: (For each Door 173, 229, 230, 232A, 1-207, 281.) [1 1/21 pair Butts Hager AB850 [1] Lockset Schlage AL10S, Neptune, 626 [1] Floor Stop Ives, 626 (3] Silencers Black J. Hardware Set No. [91:(For each Door 200A, 200B, 279, 280, 288, 289*.) [1 1/21 pair Butts [1] Lockset (1] Closer [1) Wall Stop [3] Silencers Hager AB850 Schlage AL10S, Neptune, 626 LCN 4020 Ives 407/436-438, 626 Black DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 15 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY K. Hardware Set No. [10]: (For each Door 177, 239, 252, 259, 270, 286, 287.) [3] pair Butts Hager AB850 [1] Lockset Schlage AL80PD, Neptune, 626 [1] Floor Stop Ives, 626 [3] Silencers Black L. Hardware Set No. [11]: (For each Door 001*, 301, 302.) [1 1/2] pair Butts Hager AB850 [1] Lockset Schlage AL80PD, Neptune, 626 [1] Closer LCN 4020 [1] Set Weatherstripping [1] Sill Sweep [1] Threshold [1] Wall Stop Ives 407/436-438, 626 [3] Silencers Black M. Hardware Set No. [12]: (For Door 302.) [1] Pair Surface mounted throw bolts top and bottom each leaf. END OF SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 16 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of glass and glazing work is indicated on drawings and schedules. B. Types of work in this section include glass and glazing for: 1. window units. 2. Transom units. 3. Entrances and other doors. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: A. Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials and other defects in the work. 1. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from an ambient temperature range of 120 deg. F (67 deg. C) and from a consequent temperature range within glass and glass framing members of 180 deg. F (100 deg. C). 2. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as the development of manufacturing defects including edge separation or delamination which materially obstructs vision through glass. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each glazing material and fabricated glass product required, including installation and maintenance instructions. B. Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, 12" square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear single pane units, and 12" long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative of adjoining framing system in color. GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY C. Certificate: Submit certificates from respective manufacturers _ attesting that glass and glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements. 1. Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: Submit statement from sealant manufacturer indicating that glass and glazing materials have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants and interpreting test results relative to material performance, including recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing _ Association (FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards. - B. Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide type of products indicated which comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Fire Resistance Rated Glass: Provide glass products that are labeled and listed by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Fire Resistance Rated Wire Glass: Provide wire glass products that are identical to those tested per ASTM E 163 (UL 9) and are labeled and listed by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Single Source Responsibility for Glass: To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source for each type and class required. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with manufacturer's directions and as required to GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, of temperature changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other causes. 1. Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 40 deg. F (4.4 deg. C). 1.8 WARRANTY: A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Special Project Warranty on Laminated Glass: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer of laminated glass agreeing to furnish f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed project site, within specified warranty period indicated below, replacements for those laminated glass units which develop manufacturing defects. Manufacturing defects are defined as edge separation or delamination which materially obstructs vision through glass. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 4 years after date of substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to, the following: 1. Manufacturers of Clear and Tinted Float Glass: a. PPG Industries, Inc. 2. Manufacturers of Fire Rated Glazing: a. Technical Glass Products. 3. Manufacturers of Laminated Glass: a. LOF Glass Company. GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 4. Manufacturers of Wire Glass: a. AFG Industries, Inc. b. Guardian Industries Corp. C. Hordis Brothers, Inc. d. Pilkington Sales (North America) Limited. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL: A. Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer. Provide thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by glass manufacturer for application indicated. -- 2.3 PRIMARY GLASS PRODUCTS: A. Clear Float Glass:(Interior Glass), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select). B. Tinted Float Glass:(Exterior Glass), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing and light reducing), Quality q3 (glazing select), and as follows: 1. EverGreen High Performance Tint: Manufacturer's standard tint, with visible light transmittance of 76 percent and shading coefficient of 0.72 for 1/8" thick glass, or 2. Solar Green: Manufacturer's standard tint, with visible light transmittance of 76 percent and shading coefficient of 0.72 for 1/8" thick glass, for outer ply only. C. Fire Rated Glass: FireLite Plus, a laminated, impact safety -rated glazing, complying with ANSI Z97.1. D. Wired Glass: Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1 (translucent), Quality q8 (glazing); complying with ANSI Z97.1; 1/4" thick; of form and mesh pattern indicated below: 1. Polished Wire Glass: Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), Mesh ml (diamond). 2.4 HEAT -TREATED GLASS PRODUCTS: A. Manufacturing Process: Manufacture heat -treated glass as follows: 1. By horizontal (roller hearth) process with roll wave distortion parallel with bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Uncoated Tinted Heat -Treated Float Glass: Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing and light reducing), Quality q3 (glazing select), with tint GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY color and performance characteristics for 1/8" thick glass matching those indicated for non -heat -treated tinted float glass; kind as indicated below: 1. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated. 2.5 LAMINATED GLASS PRODUCTS: A. General: Refer to primary and heat -treated glass requirements relating to properties of uncoated glasses making up laminated glass products. B. Plastic Interlayer: Provide glass fabricator's standard polyvinyl butyral interlayer for laminating panes of glass, with a proven record of showing no tendency to bubble, discolor or lose physical or mechanical properties after laminating and installation, in clear or colors and of thickness indicated. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Saflex"; Monsanto Co. b. "Safety - Plus, Hurricane Resistant Glass". C. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass using laminator's standard heat -plus -pressure process to produce glass free from foreign substances and air/glass pockets. D. Laminated Safety Glass: Two panes of glass of equal thickness, laminated together with not less than 0.090" thick plastic interlayer and complying with requirements indicated below: 1. Glass Characteristics: Float glass, complying with requirements for class, tint, kind and thickness of each pane (ply) indicated below: a. EverGreen High Performance Tint: Manufacturer's standard tint, with visible light transmittance of 76 percent and shading coefficient of 0.72 for 1/8" thick glass, or Solar Green: Manufacturer's standard tint, with visible light transmittance of 76 percent and shading coefficient of 0.72 for 1/8" thick glass, for outer ply only. b. Kind FT (fully -tempered). C. Maximum Thickness: 3/8 inch (.375). Tinted outer ply 1/8 inch = 0.125 Plastic interlayer = 0.090 Clear inner ply 1/8 inch = 0.125 Total = 0.340 2. Color of Plastic Interlayer: Clear. 2.6 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS AND PREFORMED GLAZING TAPES: GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2.7 A. B. General: Provide products of type indicated and complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials with which they will come into contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers for selection of glazing sealants and tapes which have performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated and conditions at time of installation. 3. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those for Type, Grade, Class and Uses. 4. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. One -Part Acid -Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to uses indicated, 0. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, glazing sealants which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. One -Part Acid -Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: a. "Chem -Calk 1200"; Bostik Construction Products Div. b. "Dow Corning 999"; Dow Corning Corp. C. "SCS 1200"; General Electric Corp. d. 11863"; Pecora Corp. e. "Rhodorsil 3B11; Rhone-Poulenc Inc. f. "Omniglaze"; Sonneborn Building Products Div.; g. "Proglaze"; Tremco, MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS: A. Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealants, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness. D. Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks, or continuous extrusions, as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size, shape and hardness recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers for application indicated. GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY E. Edge Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size and hardness required to limit lateral movement (side -walking) of glass. F. Compressible Filler Rods: Closed -cell or waterproof -jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, flexible and resilient, with 5-10 psi compression strength for 25 percent deflection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Require Glazier to inspect work of glass framing erector for compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners; for presence and functioning of weep system; for existence of minimum required face or edge clearances; and for effective sealing of joinery. Obtain Glazier's written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of glazing work. Do not allow glazing work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Pre -Installation Meeting: At Contractor's direction, Glazier, sealant and gasket manufacturers' technical representatives, glass framing erector and other trades whose work affects glass and glazing shall meet at project site to review procedures and time schedule proposed for glazing and coordination with other work. B. Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL: A. Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufacturers of sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards. B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are intended tc provide for necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation. C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass with flares or bevels along one horizontal edge GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY which would occur in vicinity of setting blocks so that these are _ located at top of opening. Remove from project and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other imperfections of kind that, when installed, weakens glass and impairs performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by proconstruction sealant -substrate testing. 3.4 GLAZING: A. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width from each corner, but with edge nearest corner not closer than 6" from corner, unless otherwise required. Set blocks in thin course of sealant which is acceptable for heel bead use. B. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height), except where gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing. Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. C. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing -- standard, except where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer. D. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics. E. Provide compressible filler rods or equivalent back-up material, as recommended by sealant and glass manufacturers, to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems and from adhering to joints back surface as well as to control depth of sealant for optimum performance, unless otherwise indicated. F. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. G. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial "wash" away from glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. H. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not "walk" out when installation is subjected to movement. I. Miter cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in manner — recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent pull away at corners; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. -_ 3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING: GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed streamers attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less often than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits or staining. When examination reveals presence of these forms of residue, remove by method recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. E. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Wash glass by method recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 9 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of each type of gypsum drywall construction required is indicated on Drawings. B. This Section includes the following types of gypsum board construction: 1. Gypsum board screw -attached to steel framing and furring members. C. Load -bearing steel studs and "C" shaped steel joists for structural framing are specified in Division-5 Section "Cold -Formed Metal Framing." D. Glass mesh mortar units for application of tile are specified in Division-9 Section "Tile." 1.3 DEFINITIONS: A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA 505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board construction not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product data from manufacturers for each type of product specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire -resistance -rated assemblies identical to those indicated by reference to GA File No's. in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing and agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment materials from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. B. Minimum Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete. C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials form drying too rapidly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Grid Suspension Systems: a. Chicago Metallic Corp. b. National Rolling Mills Co. 2. Gypsum Boards and Related Products: a. Centex American Gypsum Co. — b. Domtar Gypsum Co. C. Georgia-Pacific Corp. d. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY e. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS: A. General: Provide components which comply with ASTM C 754 for materials and sizes, unless otherwise indicated. B. Concrete Inserts: Inserts designed for attachment to concrete forms and for embedment in concrete, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with holes or loops for attachment of hanger wires and capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 3 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined from testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by an independent testing laboratory. C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust -inhibitive paint. E. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust -inhibitive paint. F. Angle -Type Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide, formed from 0.0635 inch thick galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 446, Coating Designation G90, with bolted connections and 5/16 inch diameter bolts. G. Channels: Cold -rolled steel, 0.0598 inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16 inch wide flanges, protected with rust -inhibitive paint, and as follows: 1. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inch deep, 475 lbs per 1000 ft., unless otherwise indicated. 2. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep, 300 lbs per 1000 ft., unless otherwise indicated. H. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16 inch minimum lip (return), minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and minimum depth as follows: 1. Thickness: 0.0329 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth: 1-5/8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. I. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat -shaped, depth of 7/8 inch, and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows: 1. Thickness: 0.0329 inch, unless otherwise indicated. J. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturers standard product designed to reduce sound transmission, complying with ASTM C 645 for material, finish and widths of face and fastening flange, fabricated to GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY form 1/2 inch deep channel of the following configuration: 1. Single -Leg Configuration: Assymetric-shaped channel with face connected to a single flange by a single slotted leg (web). 2. Double -Leg Configuration: Hat -shaped channel, with 1-1/2 inch wide face connected to flanges by double slotted or expanded metal legs (webs). 3. Configuration: Either one indicated above. K. Grid Suspension System: ASTM C 645, manufacturer's standard grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members which interlock to form a modular supporting network. 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD: A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end -to -end joints. 1. Thickness: Provide gypsum board in thicknesses indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, 5/8 inch thicknesses to comply with ASTM C 840 for application system and support spacing indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, and as follows: 1. Type: Type X for fire -resistance -rated assemblies. 2. Edges: Tapered. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 4. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the Work where Type X gypsum wallboard is indicated include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Gyprock Fireguard 'C' Gypsum Board"; Domtar Gypsum Co. b. "Fire -Shield G"; Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. C. "SHEETROCK Brand FIRECODE 'C' Gypsum Panels"; United States Gypsum Co. C. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630, and as follows: 1. Type: Type X for fire -resistance -rated assemblies. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 GLASS MESH MORTAR UNITS: A. Proprietary backing units with glass mesh fiber mesh reinforcing and water resistant coating on both faces, complying with the following requirements: 1. Cement -Coated Portland Cement Panels: High density portland cement surface coating on both faces and lightweight concrete core composed of portland cement and expanded ceramic aggregate; GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY fabricated in panels 7/16 inch thick by 36 inches wide by 36, 48, or 60, 64, or 72 inches long; and weighing 3.2 - 3.8 lbs per sq. ft. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, glass mesh mortar units which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. "Dens -Shield"; Georgia Pacific Corp. 2. "Wonder -Board"; Modulars Inc. 3. "Durock Tile Backer Board"; Durabond Div., USG Industries, Inc. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES: A. Cornerbead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide corner beads, edge trim and control joints which comply with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: 1. Material: Formed metal, plastic or metal combined with paper, with metal complying with the following requirement: a. Sheet steel zinc -coated by hot -dip process. b. MM SYSTEMS CORPORATION style "R" 2 inch outside corner molding, number DRMRO 90-200. 2. Edge trim shapes indicated below by reference to designations of Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047: a. "LC" Bead, unless otherwise indicated. b. 'ILK" Bead with square nose for use with kerfed jambs. C. "L" Bead where indicated. d. "U" Bead where indicated. 3. One -Piece Control Joint: Formed with vee-shaped slot per Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047, with slot opening covered with removable strip. 2.6 GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS: A. General: Provide materials complying with ASTM C 475, ASTM C 840, and recommendations of manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint treatment materials for the application indicated. B. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use pressure sensitive or staple -attached open -weave glass fiber reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated. C. Setting -Type Joint Compounds: Factory -prepackaged, job -mixed, chemical -hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. 1. Where setting -type joint compounds are indicated for use as taping and topping compounds, use formulation for each which develops GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY greatest bond strength and crack resistance and is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it. 2. For prefilling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for this purpose. 3. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing board behind base for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for this purpose. D. Drying -Type Joint Compounds: Factory -prepackaged vinyl -based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1. Ready -Mix Formulation: Factory -premixed product. 2. Job -Mixed Formulation: Powder product for mixing with water at Project site. 3. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and flanges of corner beads and edge trim. 4. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. 5. All-purpose compound formulated for use as both taping and topping compound. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction which comply with referenced standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum board. B. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating gypsum boards. C. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting -type joint compound of type recommended for spot grouting hollow metal door frames. D. Fastening Adhesive for Wood: ASTM C 557. E. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum boards to steel framing. F. Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C 1002. G. Asphalt Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15). H. Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, nonbleeding, gunnable sealant complying with requirement specified in Division-7 section "Joint Sealers." I. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral fiber blanket insulation '- produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing); and as follows: 1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass. GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts, preset hollow metal frames, cast -in -anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of drywall construction. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension system with installation of overhead structural systems to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling anchors in a manner that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceiling. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated, to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination with other construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS: A. Screw furring members to wood framing. B. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible, otherwise connect to cast -in concrete inserts or other anchorage devices or fasteners as indicated. 1. Do not attach hangers to underside of concrete slabs with powder -actuated fasteners. C. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit. D. Keep hangers and braces 2 inches clear of ducts, pipes and conduits. E. Sway -brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. F. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard. 1. Wire Hangers: 0.1620 inch diameter (8 gage), 4 ft. on center. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 1-1/2 inch, 4 ft. on center. 3. Rigid Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches on center. G. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross furring members or grid suspension members are GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY level to within 1/8 inch in 12 ft. as measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. H. Wire -tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated. I. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. J. For exterior soffits provide cross -bracing and additional framing indicated or required to resist wind uplift. 3.4 APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL: A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Install and finish _ gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated, prior to gypsum board unless readily installed after board has been installed. C. Locate exposed end -butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger not less than 24 inches in alternate courses --- of board. D. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes the number of end -butt joints, and which avoids end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 24 inches. E. Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes the number of end -butt joints or avoids them entirely where possible. At stairwells and similar high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs. F. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch open space between boards. Do not force into place. G. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill -cut or field -cut ends w against mill -cut or field -cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. H. Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that leading edge or end of each board is attached to open (unsupported) edge of stud flange first. I. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cutouts. GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY J. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid core wood doors, hollow metal doors and doors over 32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip just before inserting board into frame. K. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated, with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories. L. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls which are braced internally. 1. Fit gypsum board around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 2. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, cut gypsum board to fit profile of coffers and allow 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide joint for sealant. M. Isolate perimeter of non -load -bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. N. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer, install gypsum board over wood framing, with "floating" internal corner construction. O. Where sound -rated drywall construction is indicated, seal construction at perimeters, control and expansion joints, openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim, and close off sound -flanking paths around or through construction, including sealing of partitions above acoustical ceilings. P. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 3.5 METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION: A. Single -Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows: 1. On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible. 2. On partitions/walls apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints. 3. On partitions/walls 8'-1" or less in height apply gypsum board horizontally (perpendicular to framing); use maximum length sheets possible to minimize end joints. 4. On Z-furring members apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. B. Wall Tile Base: Where drywall is base for thin -set ceramic tile and similar rigid applied wall finishes, install gypsum backing board. GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 9 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. In "dry" areas install gypsum backing board or wallboard with _ tapered edges taped and finished to produce a flat surface. C. At showers, tubs and similar "wet areas" install glass mesh mortar units and treat joints to comply with manufacturer's recommendations for type - of application indicated. D. Acoustical Tile Base: Where drywall is base for adhesively applied - acoustical tile, install gypsum backing board. 1. Provide either V-joint type backing board or tape and finish joints to produce a flat surface. E. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum boards to supports as follows: 1. Fasten with screws. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES: A. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install corner beads at external corners. - C. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi -exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound except where "U" bead (semi -finishing type) is indicated. 1. Install "LC" bead where drywall construction is tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. 2. Install 'ILK" bead where substrate is kerfed to receive long flange of trim. 3. Install "L" bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum board is installed. 4. Install U-type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant -filled (including expansion joints). D. Install outside corner molding where indicated. E. Install plastic edge trim where indicated on wall panels at juncture with ceilings. F. Install control joints at locations indicated, or if not indicated, at spacings and locations required by referenced gypsum board application and finish standard, and approved by the Architect for visual effect. 3.7 FINISHING OF DRYWALL: A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints; GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 10 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. B. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using setting -type joint compound. C. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are indicated. D. Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following joint compounds in 3 coats (not including prefill of openings in base), and sand between coats and after last coat: 1. Embedding and First Coat: Setting -Type Joint Compound. 2. Fill (Second) Coat: Setting -type joint compound. 3. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready -mix drying -type all-purpose or topping compound. 3.8 PROTECTION: A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, which ensures gypsum drywall construction being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09250 GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 11 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 09300 - TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Glazed ceramic mosaic tile. 3. Stone thresholds. 4. Cementitious backer units. 5. Unglazed quarry tile. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile substrates. 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. C. Shop drawings indicating tile patterns and locations and widths of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. 1. Locate precisely each joint and crack in tile substrates by measuring, record measurements on shop drawings, and coordinate them with tile joint locations, in consultation with Architect. D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tile showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of tile indicated. Include samples of grout and accessories involving color selection. TILE 09300 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY E. Samples for verification purposes of each item listed below, prepared on samples of size and construction indicated, products involve color and texture variations, in sets showing full range of variations expected. 1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least 12 inches square, mounted on plywood or hardboard backing and grouted. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required. 3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. 4. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths. 5. Match Architect's quarry tile sample for color. F. Master grade certificates for each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. G. Material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of tile and tile setting and grouting products with requirements indicated. H. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Single -Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project. D. Field -Constructed Mock -Up: Before installing tile, erect mock-ups for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 2. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-ups before start of final unit of Work. TILE 09300 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 3. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed unit of Work. a. Accepted mock-ups in undisturbed condition at time of Substantial Completion may become part of completed unit of Work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, foreign matter, and other causes. C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If despite these precautions coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: TILE 09300 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Dal -Tile Corp. 2. Glazed Wall Tile: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Dal -Tile Corp. 3. Un-Glazed quarry Tile: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Dal -Tile Corp. 4. Dry -Set Mortars and Grouts: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp. 5. Commercial Portland Cement Grouts: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated. 1. Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwise indicated. _ B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced with products and materials indicated for setting and grouting. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials compling with the following requirements: 1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors, textures, and patterns for products of type indicated. 2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match -- TILE 09300 - 4 _ GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY approved samples. E. Mounting: Where factory -mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge -mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless another mounting method is indicated. 1. Where tile is indicated for installation in swimming pools, on exteriors or in wet areas, do not use back- or edge -mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies that this type of mounting is suitable for these kinds of uses and has been successfully used on other projects. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Provide factory -mounted flat tile complying with the following requirements: 1. Composition: Porcelain with abrasive admixture. 2. Nominal Facial Dimensions: 1 inch by 1 inch. 3. Nominal Thickness: 1/4 inch. 4. Face: Plain with cushion edges. B. Glazed Wall Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements: 1. Nominal Facial Dimensions: 4-1/4 inches by 4-1/4 inches. 2. Nominal Thickness: 5/16 inch. 3. Face: Plain with cushion edge. 4. Mounting: Factory back -mounted. C. Unglazed Quarry Tile: Provide square -edged flat tile complying with the following requirements: 1. Wearing Surface: Nonabrasive. 2. Nominal Facial Dimensions: 6 inches by 12 inches. 3. Nominal Thickness: 1/2 inch. 4. Face: Plain. D. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with following requirements: 1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. 2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tile wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above. b. Internal Corners: Field -butted square corners, except use coved base and cap angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes. C. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of tile floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to provide a reduction in TILE 09300 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY thickness from 1/2 inch to 1/4 inch across nominal 4 INCH dimension. 2.4 STONE THRESHOLDS A. General: Provide stone that is uniform in color and finish, fabricated to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between tile surfaces and adjoining finished floor surfaces. B. Marble Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C 503 requirements for exterior use and for abrasion resistance where exposed to foot traffic, a minimum hardness of 10 per ASTM C 241. 1. Provide white, honed marble complying with MIA Group "A" requirements for soundness. 2.5 SETTING MATERIALS A. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composition as follows: 1. Prepackaged dry mortar mix composed of portland cement, graded aggregate, and the following dry polymer additive in the form of a reemulsifiable powder to which only water is added at job site. a. Dry Polymer Additive: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Latex additive (water emulsion) of type described below, serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, combined at job site with prepackaged dry mortar mix supplied or specified by latex additive manufacturer. a. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard. -- 2.6 GROUTING MATERIALS A. Latex -Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated, composition as follows: 1. Prepackaged dry grout mix composed of portland cement, graded aggregate, and the following dry polymer additive in the form of a reemulsifiable powder to which only water is added at job site. a. Dry Polymer Additive: Polyvinyl acetate or ethylene vinyl acetate. 2. Latex additive (water emulsion) serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, added at job site with dry grout mixture, with type of latex and dry grout mix as follows: — a. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard. b. Dry Grout Mixture: Commercial portland cement specified or supplied by latex additive manufacturer. TILE 09300 - 6 -. GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1) Application: Use commercial portland cement grout combined with latex additive for grouting joints in floor tile unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. General: Provide manufacturers standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers," including ASTM C 920 as referenced by Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated. C. One -Part Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, 0; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes. D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. One -Part Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant: a. "Dow Corning 786"; Dow Corning Corp. b. 11863 #345 White"; Pecora Corp. 2.8 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS (GLASS MESH MORTAR UNITS) A. Proprietary backing units with glass fiber mesh reinforcing and water-resistant coating on both faces, complying with the following requirements: 1. Cement -Coated Portland Cement Panels: High -density portland cement surface coating on both faces and lightweight concrete core composed of portland cement and expanded ceramic aggregate; fabricated in panels 7/16-inch thick by 36 inches wide by 36, 48, 60, 64, or 72 inches long and weighing 3.2 to 3.8 psf. B. Mortar Unit Finishing Materials: Tape and joint compounds as recommended by manufacturer of cementitious backer units. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cementitious backer units which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. "Wonder -Board"; Modulars Inc. 2. "Durock Tile Backer Board"; Durabond Div., USG Industries, Inc. TILE 09300 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Metal Edge Strips: Zinc alloy or stainless steel terrazzo strips, 1/8-inch wide at top edge with integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate unless otherwise indicated. 2.10 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additive content; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation -- tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series of tile installation standards included under "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to type of setting and grouting materials and methods indicated. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated. TILE 09300 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so that extent of each sheet is not apparent in finished work. F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant -filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles. 1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." H. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following installation standards: 1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry -set, commercial portland cement, and latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10. I. At showers, tubs and similar wet areas, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with manufacturer's instructions for type of application indicated. 3.4 FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS A. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below for setting bed methods, TCA installation methods related to types of subfloor construction, and grout types: 1. Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1 a. Bond Coat: Portland cement paste or dust coat on plastic bed. b. Wood Subfloors, Interior: TCA F141. C. Grout: Commercial portland cement. TILE 09300 - 9 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 3.5 3.6 B. C A A. B Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHODS Install types of tile designated for wall application to comply with requirements indicated below for setting -bed methods, TCA installation methods related to subsurface wall conditions, and grout types: 1. Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1. a. Metal Studs, Interior: TCA W241. b. Grout: Commercial portland cement. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures that tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. TILE 09300 - 10 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. END OF SECTION 09300 TILE 09300 - 11 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 09521 - ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Back -mounted, acoustical wall panels. 2. Acoustical wall panels. B. Provide 1500 SF of back mounted acoustic wall panels to be installed, as directed, by the Architect. Provide a unit price, per square foot, for add to, or, deduct from this square foot amount. C. Install acoustic wall panels on all concrete walls and ceiling of the generator building. 2.1 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of acoustical wall panel specified. C. Samples for initial selection purposes in 12-inch-square units of each type of acoustical wall panel required and in each color, texture, and pattern indicated or selected for facing materials. Include representative samples of installation devices and accessories. D. Samples for verification purposes 12-inch-square units of each type of acoustical wall panel required and in each color, texture, and pattern indicated or selected for facing materials. Include representative samples of installation devices and accessories. E. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by qualified independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, evidencing that acoustical wall panels comply with requirements specified for fire performance characteristics and sound absorption performance. F. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of acoustical wall panels certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09521 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing laboratory must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory -submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated without delaying the progress of the Work. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical wall panels with surface -burning characteristics as indicated below, as determined by testing assembled materials composed of facings and backings identical to those required in this Section, per ASTM E 84, by a testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. C. Single Source Responsibility for Acoustical Wall Panels: Obtain each type of acoustical wall panel from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the progress of the Work. 2.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect acoustical wall panels from excessive moisture in shipment, storage, and handling. Deliver in unopened bundles and store in a dry place with adequate air circulation. Do not deliver material to building until "wet work" such as concrete and plaster have been completed and cured to a condition of equilibrium. 2.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not begin installation until spaces to receive acoustical wall panels have been enclosed and maintained at approximately the same humidity and temperature conditions as planned for occupancy. Maintain temperature and humidity as recommended by panel manufacturer. B. Field Measurements: Check actual wall surfaces by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 2.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels: 1. Acoustical Wall Panels: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 2.0 percent of the amount installed. ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09521 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY PART 3 - PRODUCTS 3.1 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS, GENERAL A. Fabricate panels to sizes and configurations indicated; attach facing materials to cores to produce installed panels with visible surfaces fully covered and free from wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive or other foreign matter. B. Sound Absorption Performance: Provide acoustical wall panels with minimum noise reduction coefficients (NRC) indicated as determined by testing per ASTM C 423 for mounting type specified under individual product requirements. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard material is indicated, provide acoustical wall panels faced with manufacturer's material complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors, textures, and patterns for products of type indicated. 3.2 BACK -MOUNTED ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS A. Back -Mounted, Edge -Reinforced Acoustical Wall Panels: Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material laminated to front, edges, and back border of molded glass fiber board core, with edges chemically hardened to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage, and complying with the following requirements: 1. Thickness/NRC: Nominal overall thickness of 1 inch/NRC of 0.80. 2. Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard woven polyester fabric. 3. Panel Size: As indicated. 4. Edge Detail: Square. 5. Corner Detail: Square. B. Back -Mounting Accessories: Manufacturer's standard or recommended accessories for securely mounting panels of type and size indicated to substrates provided and complying with the following requirements: 1. Mechanically Mounted Edge -Reinforced Panels: Metal panel clip and base support bracket system and consisting of 2-part panel clips, with one part of each clip mechanically attached to back of panel and the other to wall substrate, designed to support panels laterally; and base support brackets designed to support full weight of panels; with both designed to allow panel removal. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09521 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. Back -Mounted, Acoustical Wall Panels: a. "Silent Touches Appliques", USG Interiors,Inc. b. Approved equal. 3.3 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS A. Bevel Edged, Tectum Wall Panels: Manufacturer's standard wall panels complying with the following requirements: 1. Thickness: 1 1/2 inch thick. 2. Facing material: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Panel size: 47 inches wide. 4. Edge detail: Tongue and groove. 5. Length: Full height. 6. Mounting: 1 1/2" x 2 furring strips, 24" o.c. with 1 1/2" acoustic blankets. B Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acoustical Wall Panels: a. "Standard Tectum Panel", Tectum Inc. b. Approved equal. PART 4 - EXECUTION 4.1 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical wall panels in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level, and in alignment with other panels, scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations. Comply with panel manufacturer's printed instructions for installation of panels using type of mounting accessories indicated or, if none indicated, as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Cut units to be at least 50 percent of unit width, with facing material extended over cut edge to match uncut edge. Scribe acoustical wall panels to fit adjacent work. Butt joints tightly. B. Remove and replace panels which are damaged and are unacceptable to Architect. 4.2 CLEANING A. Clean panels with fabric facing, upon completion of installation, to remove dust and other foreign materials from the facing, using a dry brush or a vacuum or both. ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09521 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from acoustical wall panel installation upon completion of work, and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition. END OF SECTION 09521 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09521 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 09550 - WOOD FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of wood flooring is indicated on drawings and in schedules. B. Types of wood flooring required include the following: 1. Wood strip flooring, IPE,(Brazilian Walnut), 3/4" x 71/411, end matched, Kiln Dried, and manufactured in the United States. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical product data and installation instructions for each type of wood flooring. Include instructions for handling, storage, installation, finishing, protection and maintenance. B. Samples: Submit sets of range samples for each type of wood flooring. Include finish where factory -finished flooring is required. 1. Include samples of border units where borders of different color, texture or pattern are indicated. C. Include minimum 6" long samples of each type of required accessory item such as wood or metal feature strips, reducer strips, baseboard, trim molding and nosings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer Qualifications: Specialized wood flooring firm with not less than 3 years successful experience in installation of flooring types specified. B. General Standard: Comply with recommendations of "Hardwood Flooring Installation Manual" by National Oak Flooring Manufacturer's Association (NOFMA). C. Source Quality Control: Obtain flooring of each type from single manufacturer or source, to ensure match of quality, color, pattern and WOOD FLOORING 09550 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY texture. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Moisture Content: At time of delivery, limit average moisture content of wood flooring to 12°s, with 149.1- max. for any piece. B. Protect wood flooring from excessive moisture in shipment, storage, and handling. Deliver in unopened cartons or bundles and store in a dry place, with adequate air circulation. Do not deliver material to building until "wet work" such as concrete and plaster have been completed and cured to a condition of equilibrium. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Conditioning: Do not proceed with installation of wood flooring until spaces have been enclosed and are at approximate humidity condition planned for occupancy. Condition wood for 5 days prior to start of installation by placing in spaces to receive flooring and maintaining ambient temperature between 65 deg. F and 70 deg. F (18 deg. C and 21 deg. C) before, during, and after installation. Open packages of wood flooring which are sealed (if any) to permit natural adjustment of moisture content. 1.7 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY: A. Submit 3-year warranty signed by Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace wood flooring which shrinks, warps, cracks, or otherwise deteriorates excessively, or which breaks its anchorage or bond with substrate or otherwise fails to perform as required, due to failures of materials and/or workmanship and not due to unusual exposure to moisture or other abusive forces or elements not anticipated for application. 1.8 EXTRA STOCK/REPLACEMENT MATERIAL: A. After completion of wood flooring work, deliver to project site not less than 1.0% of quantity of each type wood flooring installed on the project. Provide in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons or bundles. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD STRIP FLOORING: A. Lengths: Provide standard random length strips, complying with applicable grading rules. WOOD FLOORING 09550 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY B. Seasoning: Manufacture wood strip flooring from kiln -dried lumber. C. Factory -Finish: Prefinish wood strip flooring at factory to match Architect's sample, using manufacturer's standard penetrating floor sealer treatment. D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wood strip flooring by: 1. Universal Building Specialties P.O. Box 1722 Lakeland, Florida 33802 1 (800) 282-9583 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS FOR WOOD FLOORING: A. Asphalt Saturated Felt: 15 lb. type, ASTM D 226. B. Adhesive/Mastic: Polyvinyl acetate or special mastic of type recommended by manufacturer of flooring, and complying with flammability and environmental control restrictions. C. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than recommended by NOFMA in "Installation Manual." D. Floor Wax: Liquid, solvent -type, slip -resistant, FS P-W-158, Type I, Class 2. E. Wood Trim: Where indicated to match wood flooring, provide wood base board molding, base shoe molding and stair risers (if any) of same species and grade as wood flooring. Except as otherwise indicated, provide wood stripping, reducer strips, nosings, saddles and thresholds, as indicated in or adjacent to wood flooring, of same species, grade, and cut as wood flooring. F. Wood Base: 5/8" thick x 4" high "colonial" base molding in species and finish to match wood flooring. G. Quarter Round Molding: 3/4" x 3/4" wood quarter round molding in species and finish to match wood flooring. H. Threshold: 2" wide wood threshold molding, tapered each side and routed at bottom of one side to accommodate finish wood flooring. Provide in species and finish to match wood flooring. I. Reducer Strip: 2" wide tapered reducer strip in thickness, species and finish to match wood flooring. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: WOOD FLOORING 09550 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Examine substrates on which wood flooring will be installed and conditions under which work will be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. General: Comply with flooring manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, but not less than recommended by NOFMA in "Hardwood Flooring Installation Material". B. Pattern: Comply with pattern or direction of pattern for laying wood flooring as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. C. Expansion Space: Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring, not less than 1/2" unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Unless fully concealed by trim, fill expansion space with flush cork expansion strip. Nail shoe molding or other trim to baseboard, rather than to flooring. D. Wood Strip Flooring Installation: 1. Blind nail flooring to substrate in accordance with NOFMA recommendations. a. Use only screw type flooring nails. 2. Felt Underlayment: Where strip flooring nailed directly to sub - flooring, install flooring over layer of asphalt saturated felt. 3.3 PROTECTION: A. Protect completed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with heavy Kraft paper or other suitable covering, so that flooring and finish will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 09550 WOOD FLOORING 09550 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 09660 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specifications sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of resilient tile flooring, including locations and details, is indicated on drawings and in schedules. B. Resilient sheet flooring is specified elsewhere in a Division-9 Section. C. Resilient base and accessories are specified elsewhere in a Division-9 Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each type of resilient tile product and installation accessory required. Include methods of installation for each type of substrate. 1. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading and flame resistance characteristics. B. Maintenance Data: Include data in Maintenance Manual specified in Division-1. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location and extent of resilient tile, clearly indicating directions, locations, types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in cabinets and locations where cut-outs are required in resilient tile. Show installation details at special conditions. D. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer's standard sample sets in form of pieces cut from actual tiles and showing full range of standard colors and patterns available for each type of resilient tile indicated. E. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following: 1. Full size tiles of each type of resilient tile required. F. Prepare samples from the same material to be used for the work. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm (material producer) with not less than 3 years of production experience, whose published literature clearly indicates general compliance of products with requirements of this section. B. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in resilient tile installation with not less than 2 years of experience in installation of resilient tile similar to that required for this project. C. Single Source Responsibility: Provide resilient tile produced by a single manufacturer for each type required, including adhesives. 1.5 TESTING: A. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports evidencing compliance with requirements for the following: 1. Fire performance characteristics. 2. Physical properties indicated. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient tile that is identical to that tested for the following fire performance requirements, according to test method indicated, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows: a. Flame Spread: Not more than 25. b. Smoke Developed: Not more than 50. 2. Smoke Density from Burning or Decomposition of Plastic: As follows: a. Rating: Not more than 62.5 percent. b. Test Method: ASTM D 2843. 3. Optical Smoke Density: As follows: a. Rating: Not more than 450. C. Physical Properties: Provide resilient tiles that are identical to those tested for the following physical properties, according to the test method indicated. D. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certificate stating that materials furnished comply with specified requirements. E. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification stating that resilient tiles comply with "Use of Materials Bulletin UM-44C" published by U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD); is currently listed in HUD "Certified Products Directory" and so identified by imprint on back. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, pattern name, quality or grade, fire hazard classification, and lot number. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well -ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling; laid flat, blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping. B. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery, storage, and handling requirements. C. Maintain storage area at 55 deg F (13 deg C) and under 50 percent relative humidity. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Maintain minimum temperature of 55 deg F (13 deg C) and maximum 85 deg F (30 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient tile for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Maintain minimum temperature of 55 deg F (13 deg C) where work is complete. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: A. Sequence resilient tile installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. 1.9 WARRANTY: A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Contractor, Installer and the Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units which fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 1. Warranty period is 2 years after the date of substantial completion. 1.10 MAINTENANCE: A. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY B. Replacement Materials: After completion of work, deliver not less than -- 2% of each type, color, and pattern of resilient tile, exclusive of material required to properly complete installation. Furnish accessory components as required. Furnish replacement materials from same production run as materials installed. Package replacement materials with protective covering, identified with appropriate labels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated into the work include: 1. Manufacturers of Vinyl Composition Tile: a. Amtico Flooring, Div. of American Biltrite Inc. b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. C. Azrock Floor Products Division, Azrock Industries, Inc. d. Kentile Floors, Inc. e. Tarkett, Inc. 2. Quality: Armstrong premium, through pattern, Excelon or, equal. 2.2 MATERIALS: A. General: Provide tile with all vertical edges cut perpendicular to tile surface; +/- .002" manufacturing tolerances. B. Material Composition: 1. Vinyl Composition Tile: Combination of vinyl, resins, plasticizers, stabilizers, fillers and pigments, through -grained, resistant to alkali, grease and oils, uniform disbursement of color and texture throughout thickness of tile; asbestos free. 2.3 FINISHES: A. Color and Pattern: 1. Provide color and pattern selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Size: 12" x 12". 3. Gauge: 1/811. 2.4 ACCESSORIES: A. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY B. Concrete Slab Primer: Non -staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. C. Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex types as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Extensive areas of the floors will require patching and leveling. See the finish schedule. D. Metal Edge Strips: Of width shown and of required thickness to protect exposed edge of resilient flooring. Provide units of maximum available length, to minimize number of joints. 1. Material: Extruded aluminum with mill finish, unless otherwise shown. 2. Type: Butt type metal edge strips for concealed anchorage. 3. Type: Overlap type metal edge strips for exposed anchorage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Inspect subfloor surfaces to determine satisfactory condition; free from cracks, holes, ridges, coatings preventing adhesive bond, and other defects impairing performance or appearance. B. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete subfloors to determine sufficient curing and drying, and to ascertain presence of curing compounds. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Repair minor holes, cracks, depressions, and rough areas, using leveling and patching compounds as recommended by resilient floor tile manufacturer. B. Clear away debris, scrape up cementitious deposits from surfaces that would prevent adhesive bond, including curing compounds incompatible with resilient floor tile adhesives, paint, oils, waxes, and sealers. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered immediately before installation. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by floor tile manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive, in compliance with manufacturer's directions. 3.3 INSTALLATION: A. Install resilient floor tile and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. B. Maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F (18 degrees C) in spaces to receive resilient tile flooring for at least 48 hours prior to RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after _ installation. Maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) where work is complete. C. Install resilient tile using method indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Extend resilient tile into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and similar openings. D. Scribe, cut, and fit resilient tile to permanent fixtures, built-in furniture and cabinets, pipes, outlets, and permanent columns, walls, and partitions. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating markings on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other non -permanent marking device. F. Install resilient tile on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items occurring within finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Tightly cement edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers. G. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that tiles at opposite edges of room area are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 1/2 tile at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis, unless otherwise shown. H. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles are not acceptable. 1. Lay tile with grain running in one direction. 2. Lay tile in "checkerboard" fashion with grain reversed in adjacent tiles. I. Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance with flooring manufacturer's directions. 1. Apply overlap metal edge strips where shown on drawings after tile - installation. Secure units to substrate with countersunk stainless steel anchors, complying with edge strip manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Apply butt type metal edge strips where shown on drawings before installation of tile flooring. Secure units to substrate with countersunk stainless steel anchors, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. J. Apply other resilient accessories as specified in Section 09678 and as shown on drawings. 3.4 CLEANING: RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Immediately upon completion of resilient tile installation, sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly; remove any excess adhesive or other blemishes using cleaner recommended by tile manufacturer. 1. Damp -mop floor being careful to remove black marks and excessive soil. 2. Do not wash floor until time period recommended by tile manufacturer has elapsed to allow tile to become well -sealed in adhesive. B. Clean tile flooring not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Clean flooring by method recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 PROTECTION: A. Protect flooring against damage during construction period to comply with tile manufacturer's directions. 1. Apply protective floor polish to tile flooring surfaces free from soil, excess adhesive, or surface blemishes. Use commercially available product acceptable to tile flooring manufacturer. 2. Protect tile flooring against damage from rolling loads for initial period following installation by covering with plywood or hardboard. Use dollies to move stationary equipment or furnishings across floors. 3. Cover tile flooring with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for substantial completion. 3.6 FINAL CLEANING: A. Clean resilient flooring not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Clean resilient flooring by method recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. 1. Strip protective floor polish, which was applied after completion of installation, prior to cleaning. 2. Reapply floor polish after cleaning. B. Advise contractor of protection methods and materials needed to ensure that resilient floor tile will be without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 09665 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specifications sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of resilient tile flooring, including locations and details, is indicated on drawings and in schedules. B. Resilient tile flooring is specified elsewhere in a Division-9 Section. C. Resilient base and accessories are specified elsewhere in a Division-9 Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each type of resilient sheet flooring and installation accessory required. Include methods of installation for each type of substrate. 1. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading and flame resistance characteristics. B. Maintenance Data: Include data in Maintenance Manual specified in Division-1. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location and extent of seams and edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in cabinets and locations where cut-outs are required in flooring. Show installation details at special conditions. D. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer's standard sample sets in form of pieces cut from actual sheet goods and showing full range of standard colors and patterns available for each type of resilient sheet flooring indicated. E. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following: 1. 12" X 12" square samples of each type of resilient sheet flooring required. F. Prepare samples from same material to be used for the work. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 09665 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: — A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm (material producer) with not less than 3 years of production experience, whose published literature clearly indicates general compliance of products with requirements of this section. B. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in resilient flooring installation with not less than 2 years of experience in installation of sheet flooring products similar to those required for this project. C. Single Source Responsibility: Provide resilient sheet flooring produced by a single manufacturer for each type required, including adhesives. 1.5 TESTING: A. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports evidencing compliance with requirements for the following: 1. Fire performance characteristics. 2. Physical properties indicated. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient sheet flooring that is identical to that tested for the following fire performance requirements, according to test method indicated, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows: a. Flame Spread: Not more than 25. b. Smoke Developed: Not more than 50. 2. Critical Radiant Flux: As follows: a. Rating: Not less than 0.45 watts per sq. centimeter. 3. Smoke Density from Burning or Decomposition of Plastic: As follows: a. Rating: Not more than 62.5 percent. 4. Optical Smoke Density: As follows: -- a. Rating: Not more than 450. C. Physical Properties: Provide resilient sheet flooring that is identical to that tested for the following physical properties, according to the test method indicated. D. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certificate stating that resilient sheet flooring furnished complies with specified requirements. E. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification stating that resilient sheet flooring complies with "Use of Materials Bulletin RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 09665 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY UM-44C" published by U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD); is currently listed in HUD "Certified Products Directory" and so identified by imprint on back. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, pattern name, quality or grade, fire hazard classification, and lot number. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well -ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling; laid flat, blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping. B. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery, storage, and handling requirements. C. Maintain storage area at 55 deg F (13 deg C) and under 50 percent relative humidity. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Maintain minimum temperature of 55 deg F (13 deg C) and maximum 85 deg F (30 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient sheet flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Maintain minimum temperature of 55 deg F (13 deg C) where work is complete. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: A. Sequence resilient sheet flooring installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. 1.9 WARRANTY: A. Special Project Warranty: Submit written warranties, executed by the Contractor, Installer and the Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units which fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 1. Warranty period is 2 years after the date of substantial completion. 1.10 MAINTENANCE: A. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 09665 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated traffic — and use conditions. Include precautions against materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance. B. Replacement Materials: After completion of work, deliver not less than 2% of each type, color, and pattern of resilient sheet flooring exclusive of material required to properly complete installation. Furnish accessory components as required. Furnish replacement materials from same production run as materials installed. Package replacement materials with protective covering, identified with appropriate labels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated into the work include: 1. Manufacturers of Unfilled Vinyl Sheet Flooring (various backings): a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Congoleum Corp., Resilient Flooring Division C. Forbo North America, Inc. d. Lonseal, Inc. e. Mannington Mills, Inc. f. Tarkett, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS: A. Filled Vinyl Sheet Material: Vinyl sheet with filled vinyl plastic wearlayer, complying with FS L-F 475A(3), Type II, Grade A, capable of — withstanding static load of 125 psi. Sheet width 6 feet. 1. Filled Vinyl Sheet with Backing: Filled vinyl plastic wearlayer, fibrous backing. Thickness minimum 68 mils. a. Overall thickness; minimum 82 mils b. Average weight : 5.6 lbs per square yard. 2.3 ACCESSORIES: A. Welding Thread: Provide vinyl thread or rod, produced by manufacturer of vinyl flooring, for heat welding joints. 1. Color: As selected by Architect to contrast with field color of flooring. B. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions. C. Concrete Slab Primer: Non -staining type as recommended by flooring RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 09665 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY manufacturer. D. Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex types as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Major portions of both floors will require patching and filling. E. Metal Edge Strips: Of width shown and of required thickness to protect exposed edge of resilient flooring. Provide units of maximum available length, to minimize number of joints. 1. Material: Extruded aluminum with mill finish. a. Type: Butt type metal edge strips for concealed anchorage. 2.4 FINISHES: A. Provide materials in colors and patterns as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors and patterns. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Examine subfloor surfaces to determine that they are free from cracks, holes, ridges, coatings which would prevent adhesive bond, and other defects impairing performance or appearance. B. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete subfloors prior to installation to determine if surfaces are sufficiently aired and dried and to ascertain presence of curing compounds. Do not install tile on concrete cured for less than 30 days nor with a moisture content of 30 or more. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Repair minor holes, cracks, depressions, and rough areas, using leveling and patching compounds as recommended by resilient floor sheet manufacturer. B. Clear away debris, scrape up cementitious deposits from surfaces that would prevent adhesive bond, including curing compounds incompatible with resilient sheet flooring adhesives, paint, oils, waxes, and sealers. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered immediately before installation. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive, in compliance with manufacturer's directions. 3.3 INSTALLATION: A. Install resilient sheet flooring and accessories after other finishing RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 09665 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY operations, including painting, have been completed. B. Maintain minimum temperature of 65 deg (18 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient tile flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F (13 deg C) where work is complete. C. Install resilient sheet using method indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Extend resilient sheet into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and similar openings. D. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for seam locations and direction of resilient sheet flooring; maintain uniformity of sheet flooring direction. Follow seaming diagram as submitted and approved. At doors, center seams under doors; do not place seams in traffic direction at doorway. E. Lay sheet flooring to provide as few seams as possible with economical use of materials. Match edges for color shading and pattern at seams. F. Adhere sheet flooring to substrates using method approved by flooring manufacturer for type of sheet flooring and substrate condition indicated. 1. Use conventional full spread adhesive method. G. Complete seaming method as recommended by manufacturer for particular substrate and conditions. 1. Prepare seams in vinyl sheet flooring in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for most inconspicuous appearance, sealing continuously with fluid -applied sealant or adhesive as standard with manufacturer. H. Provide integral flash cove base where shown on drawings, including cove support strip and metal top edge strip. Construct coved base in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular vertical substrates, fill voids between metal top edge strip cove cap and vertical surface with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. I. Scribe, cut, and fit resilient flooring to permanent fixtures, built-in furniture and cabinets, pipes, outlets, and permanent columns, walls and partitions. J. Maintain reference markers, holes or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other non -permanent marking device. K. Install resilient flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items occurring within finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Tightly cement edges to perimeter of floor RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 09665 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY around covers and to covers. L. Tightly cement sheet flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or surface imperfections. Hand roll sheet flooring at perimeter of each covered area to assure adhesion. M. Apply overlap metal edge strips where shown on drawings, and after flooring installation. Secure units to substrate with countersunk stainless steel anchors, complying with edge strip manufacturer's recommendations. N. Apply butt type metal edge strips where shown on drawings, and before installation of resilient flooring. Secure units to substrate with countersunk stainless steel anchors, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.4 CLEANING: A. Perform following operations immediately upon completion of resilient flooring: 1. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 2. Do not wash floor until time period recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer has elapsed to allow resilient flooring to become well -sealed in adhesive. 3. Damp -mop floor being careful to remove black marks and excessive soil. 4. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using appropriate cleaner recommended by resilient flooring manufacturers. 3.5 PROTECTION: A. Protect flooring against damage during construction period to comply with resilient flooring manufacturer's directions. 1. Apply protective floor polish to resilient flooring surfaces free from soil, excess adhesive, or surface blemishes. Use commercially available metal cross -linked acrylic product acceptable to resilient flooring manufacturer. 2. Protect resilient flooring against damage from rolling loads for initial period following installation by covering with plywood or hardboard. Use dollies to move stationary equipment or furnishings across floors. 3. Cover resilient flooring with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for substantial completion. 3.6 FINAL CLEANING: A. Clean resilient flooring not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 09665 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY each area of project. Clean resilient flooring by method recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. 1. Strip protective floor polish, which was applied after completion of installation, prior to cleaning. 2. Reapply floor polish after cleaning. B. Advise contractor of protection methods and materials needed to ensure that resilient floor tile will be without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 09665 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 09665 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 09678 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL: 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of resilient tile base and accessories, including locations and details, are indicated on drawings and in schedules. B. Resilient tile flooring is specified elsewhere in a Division-9 Section. C. Resilient sheet flooring is specified elsewhere in a Division-9 Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each type of resilient base and installation accessory required. Include methods of installation for each type of substrate. 1. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading and flame resistance characteristics. B. Maintenance Data: Include data in Maintenance Manual specified in Division-1. C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against materials and methods which mat be detrimental to finishes and performance. D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location and extent of resilient base. Indicate columns, doorways, partitions, built-in cabinets, and stairs. Show installation details at special conditions. E. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer's standard sample sets in form of pieces cut from actual resilient base sections and showing full range of standard colors and patterns available for each type of resilient base indicated. F. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following: 1. 12" samples of each type of resilient base specified. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY G. Prepare samples from the same material to be used for the work. _--_ 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm (material producer) with not less than 3 years of production experience, whose published literature clearly indicates general compliance of products with requirements of this section. B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide resilient base produced by a single manufacturer for each type required, including adhesives. 1.5 TESTING: A. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports evidencing compliance with requirements for the following: - 1. Fire performance characteristics. 2. Physical properties indicated. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient base that is identical to that tested for the following fire performance requirements, according to test method indicated, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows: a. Flame Spread: Not more than 25. b. Smoke Developed: Not more than 50. 2. Critical Radiant Flux: As follows: a. Rating: Not less than 0.45 Watts per sq. centimeter. — 3. Smoke Density from Burning or Decomposition of Plastic: As follows: a. Rating: Not more than 62.5 percent. b. Test Method: ASTM D 2843. 4. Optical Smoke Density: As follows: a. Rating: Not more than 450. b. Test Method: ASTM E 662. C. Physical Properties: Provide resilient base that is identical to that tested for the following physical properties, according to the test method indicated. D. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certificate stating that materials _ furnished comply with specified requirements. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, pattern name, quality or grade, fire hazard classification, and lot number. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well -ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling. B. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery, storage, and handling requirements. C. Maintain storage area at 55 deg F (13 deg C) and under 50 percent relative humidity. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Maintain minimum temperature of 65 deg F (18 deg C) and maximum 85 deg F (30 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient base for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Maintain minimum temperature of 55 deg F (13 deg C) where work is complete. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: A. Sequence resilient base installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. 1.9 WARRANTY: 1.10 MAINTENANCE: A. Replacement Materials: After completion of work, deliver not less than 2% of each type, color, and pattern of resilient base, exclusive of material required to properly complete installation. Furnish accessory components as required. Furnish replacement materials from same production run as materials installed. Package replacement materials with protective covering, identified with appropriate labels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS: 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated into the work include: 1. Manufacturers of Vinyl Wall Base: RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. -- b. Azrock Floor Products Division, Azrock Industries, Inc. C. Kentile Floors, Inc. d. Tarkett, Inc. 2. Manufacturers of Carpet and Resilient Floor Accessories: a. Flexco Company b. Johnson Rubber Company C. Roppe Rubber Corp. 2.2 WALL BASE: A. General - Flexible ribbed -back straight and preformed or molded corner units with factory -cut ends. B. Material Composition - Provide wall base which complies with: 1. FS SS-W-40 Type II (vinyl) 2. Height: 411. 3. Style: Cove (standard 5/8" toe). 4. Thickness: 1/811. 5. Finish: Standard. 6. Provide continuous roll material. C. Cove Caps: 1. Carpet Cove Cap: Provide trim for coved carpets. 2.3 FINISHES: A. Provide materials in colors and patterns (if applicable) as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors and patterns. B. Provide materials in colors and patterns (if applicable) as specified by Architect for custom ground, color and pattern imprint materials. C. Installation Accessories: 1. Wall Base Adhesive: Waterproof bonding, quick setting to permit positioning before full bond; to suit material and substrate conditions. 2. Stair Tread Adhesive: Waterproof permanent bonding; to suit material and substrate conditions. 3. Corner Guard Adhesive: Heavy boiled latex adhesive; permanent bonding under heavy use conditions. 4. Stair Tread Nose Filler: Two-part compound to fill section of stairs not conforming to contour of treads. PART 3 - EXECUTION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Examine substrates for resilient base and accessories to determine if they are free from cracks, holes, ridges, coatings preventing adhesive bond, and other defects impairing performance or appearance. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Notify Architect/Designer in writing of all conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. Install resilient accessories after other finishing operations, including painting and installation of flooring materials, have been completed. B. Install resilient accessories using methods indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not place seam joints in traffic areas. C. Tightly cement resilient accessories to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising or puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive or other surface imperfections. D. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed corner units, or fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. F. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install edging strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed. G. Apply resilient accessories to stairs as indicated and in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.3 CLEANING: A. Remove any excess adhesive or other blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient accessory manufacturer. B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from resilient accessory installation upon completion of the work; leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 3.4 PROTECTION: A. Advise contractor of protection needed to ensure that resilient accessories will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 09678 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes carpet, installation, accessories, and cushion. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of carpet material and installation accessory required. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and flame resistance characteristics. C. Shop drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate pile or pattern direction and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Show installation details at special conditions. D. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer's standard size, showing full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare samples from same material to be used for the Work. Submit the following: 1. 12-inch-square samples of each type of carpet material required. 2. 12-inch-long samples of each type exposed edge stripping and accessory item. 3. 6-inch-square samples of each type of carpet cushion. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Carpet Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet identical to that tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Test Method: DOC FF 1-70. CARPET 09680 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 2. Rating: Pass. B. Cushion Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet cushion identical to that tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet cushion with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Test Method: DOC FF 1-70. 2. Rating: Pass. 3. Test Method: ASTM E 84. 4. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 5. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number. B. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well -ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, blocked off ground. Maintain -- minimum temperature of 68 deg F (20 deg C) at least three days prior to and during installation in area where materials are stored. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Substrate Conditions: No condensation within 48 hours on underside of 4-foot by 4-foot polyethylene sheet, fully taped at perimeter to substrate. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet: Before installation begins, furnish quantity of full width for each type of material equal to 5 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, _- manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: CARPET 09680 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. Carpet: See Data Sheets at the end of this Section. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood in strips, 3/8-inch or 9/32-inch thick, as required to match cushion thickness; 2 rows or 3 rows, as indicated in Part 3 below, of angular pins protruding from top, designed to grip and hold stretched carpet at backing. B. Carpet Edge Guard: Aluminum with fold -down edge and concealed gripper teeth; minimum 1-1/2-inch-wide punched anchorage flange; minimum 5/8-inch-wide fold flange. Anodized aluminum finish, manufacturer's standard colors. 1. Finish: Hammered texture. C. Carpet Edge Guard: Extruded or molded heavy-duty vinyl or rubber of size and profile indicated; minimum 2-inch-wide anchorage flange; manufacturer's standard colors. D. Seaming Cement: Hot -melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. E. Carpet Adhesive: Water resistant and nonstaining as recommended by carpet manufacturer to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet. F. Cushion Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended mildew -resistant adhesive, produced expressly for use with selected carpet cushion on substrate. G. Patching Compound: "Ardex" patching compound under carpet as a transition strip where carpet meets other floor materials. Feather as required for a smooth transition. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from concrete surfaces to receive carpet; apply sealer to prevent dusting. B. Patch holes and level to a smooth surface. If previous finish chemically stripped, reseal concrete. Seal powdery or porous surfaces with sealer recommended by carpet manufacturer. C. Patch holes and cracks. Sand to level. Remove wax. Seal surface with sealer recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Replace missing pieces of existing resilient flooring or patch to level. CARPET 09680 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY Cut out peaked sheet goods seams and fill with latex underlayment. — E. Remove chemical finish on terrazzo; patch grout lines and cracks to level with latex underlayment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position; do not place seams perpendicular to door frame, in direction of traffic through doorway. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet. B. Extend carpet under removable flanges and furnishings and into alcoves and closets of each space. C. Provide cutouts where required, and bind cut edges where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. D. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate. E. Install tackless carpet stripping by nailing. Locate to ensure concealment of carpet edge between stripping and base of wall. Lay strip at entire perimeter of carpeted space, obstructions, and cutouts. Provide narrow stripping with 2 rows of pins where stretched width of carpet is 20 feet or less; stripping with 3 rows of pins where carpet width exceeds 20 feet. F. Install cushion seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams. Place cushion face up as recommended by cushion manufacturer. Apply minimum 2-inch fabric -type adhesive tape on cushion seams. 1. In ramped floor areas, increase anchorage or adhesive. Bond carpet cushion to substrate. G. Install with pattern parallel to walls and borders. H. Install carpet by trimming edges, butting cuts with seaming cement, and taping and/or sewing seams to provide sufficient strength for stretching and continued stresses during life of carpet. I. Stretch carpet to provide smooth, ripple -free, taut, trim edges; secure to stripping and conceal behind edge of stripping. Use power stretcher where carpet length is greater than 20 feet. J. Fit sections of carpet prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butt cuts with seaming cement. K. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's — instructions. Butt edges tight to form seams without gaps. Roll entire area lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond. CARPET 09680 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove adhesive from carpet surface with manufacturer's recommended cleaning agent. B. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum with commercial machine with face -beater element. Remove soil. Replace carpet where soil cannot be removed. Remove protruding face yarn. C. Vacuum carpet. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, to ensure carpet is not damaged or deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 CARPET SCHEDULE A. Provide carpet as scheduled on the following "Data Sheets." Xtra Terrestrial (4375) Pile Fiber 100o J&J Comercialon SDN ULTIMA Yarn Construction Bulked Continuous Filament Dye Method Colorloc Plus Manufacturing Process TechnoWeave II Pile Surface Dense Textured Loop Guage 1/10 (3.94 rows/cm) Tufted Pile Height .250 inch high /.125 inch low Yarn Weight 30 oz./SY Finished Pile Thickness .131 inch (3.33 mm) (ASTM D-418) Density 8,244 Weight 247,320 Special Treatment Fluorochemical Primary Backing Woven Polypropylene Secondary Backing ActionBac Static Generation 3.0 kv or less (AATCC-134) Width 12 ft. END OF SECTION 09680 CARPET 09680 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified under other sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules," except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory -finished components: a. Toilet enclosures. b. Acoustic materials. C. Architectural woodwork and casework. d. Elevator entrance doors and frames. e. Elevator equipment. f. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. g. Light fixtures. h. Switchgear. i. Distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following generally inaccessible areas: a. Furred areas. PAINTING 09900 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY b. Elevator shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. C. Chromium plate. d. Copper. -- e. Bronze. f . Brass. 4. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment such as the following: a. Valve and damper operators. - b. Linkages. C. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. -- 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriter's Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code -required labels or equipment name, _ identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: -- 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. 2. Divisions 15 and 16: Painting mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 15 and 16, respectively. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. "Paint" includes coating systems materials, primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information, label analysis, and -- application instructions for each material proposed for use. 1. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. B. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts. 1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for _ surfaces to be coated. C. Samples for verification purposes: Provide samples of each color and PAINTING 09900 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. Define each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 1. Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to location and application. 2. Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch-square samples for each color and finish. b. Painted Wood: Provide two 12- by 12-inch samples of each color and material on hardboard. C. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4- by 8-inch samples of natural and stained wood finish on actual wood surfaces. d. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch-square samples of flat metal and two 8-inch-long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the materials specified. C. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components, duplicate finishes of prepared samples. Provide full- coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface until required sheen, color and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in -place work. 1. The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. Apply coatings in this room or surface in accordance with the schedule or as specified. After finishes are accepted, this room or surface will be used for evaluation of coating systems of a similar nature. D. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products named are required or to exclude PAINTING 09900 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY equal products of other manufacturers. — 2. Federal Specifications establish a minimum quality level for paint materials, except where other product identification is used. Provide written certification from the manufacturer that materials provided meet or exceed these criteria. 3. Products that comply with qualitative requirements of applicable Federal Specifications, yet differ in quantitative requirements, may be considered for use when acceptable to the Architect. Furnish material data and manufacturer's certificate of performance to Architect for proposed substitutions. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Federal Specification number, if applicable. 4. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 5. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 6. Thinning instructions. 7. Application instructions. 8. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from -- handling, mixing, and application. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying PAINTING 09900 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: 1. Devoe and Raynolds Co. (Devoe). 2. The Glidden Company (Glidden). 3. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore). 4. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (Pittsburgh). 5. Pratt and Lambert (P & L). 6. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W). 2.2 PRIMERS A. Interior Flat Latex -Based Paint: Flat latex paint used as a primer over concrete and masonry under alkyd flat and semigloss enamel: 1. Devoe: 36XX Wonder -Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint. 2. Glidden: 5300 Ultra -Hide Flat Wall Paint. 3. Moore: Moore's Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal #201. 4. Pittsburgh: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. S. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. 6. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Latex Flat B30W200. 2.3 UNDERCOAT MATERIALS A. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready -mixed enamel for use on the interior as an undercoat over a primer on filled concrete masonry under an odorless semigloss enamel finish: 1. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 2. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel. 3. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 4. Pittsburgh: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. S. P & L: Interior Trim Primer. 6. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel B34W200. B. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready -mixed enamel for use as an undercoat over wood and hardboard under an odorless alkyd semigloss enamel or full gloss alkyd enamel: 1. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat, 2. Glidden: 310 Glidden Wood Undercoater. 3. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 4. Pittsburgh: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. PAINTING 09900 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 5. P & L: Interior Trim Primer. 6. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200. C. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready -mixed enamel for use as an undercoat over a primer on ferrous or zinc -coated metal under an interior alkyd semigloss enamel or a full -gloss alkyd enamel: 1. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 2. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel. 3. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 4. Pittsburgh: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. 5. P & L: Interior Trim Primer. 6. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200. 2.4 INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Latex -Based Interior Flat Paint: Ready -mixed, latex -based paint for use as a flat finish over concrete and masonry surfaces, including filled concrete masonry block, mineral -fiber -reinforced cement panels, and plaster and over prime -coated gypsum drywall, ferrous metal, and zinc -coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: 1. Devoe: 36XX Wonder -Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint. 2. Glidden: 3400 Spred Satin Latex Wall Paint. 3. Moore: Regal Wall Satin #215. 4. Pittsburgh: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. 5. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. 6. S-W: Classic 99 Wall and Trim Paint A27W10. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD FINISHING MATERIALS A. Oil -Type Interior Wood Stain: Slow -penetrating oil -type wood stain for - general use on interior wood surfaces under varnishes or wax finishes: 1. Devoe: 96XX Wonder Woodstain Alkyd Stain. 2. Glidden: 1600 Woodmaster Oil Stain. 3. Moore: 241 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Penetrating Stain. 4. Pittsburgh: 77-302 Rez Medium Tint Base. 5. P & L: S-Series Tonetic Wood Stain. 6. S-W: Oil Stain A-48 Series. B. Cut Shellac: Quick -drying, rosin -free, clear, general-purpose shellac varnish for use on the interior over stained and natural- finished woodwork for a clear finish: 1. Devoe: 4900 Wonder Woodsealer Quick -Dry Sealer. 2. Glidden: 5035 Ultra -Hide Sanding Sealer. - 3. Moore: 413 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick -Dry Sanding Sealer. 4. Pittsburgh: 77-30 Quick Drying Sanding Sealer. PAINTING 09900 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 5. S-W: Pro -Mar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3. C. Paste Wood Filler: Solvent -based, air -drying, paste -type wood filler for use on open -grain wood on interior wood surfaces: 1. Devoe: 4800 Wonder Woodstain Interior Paste Wood Filler. 2. Glidden: Glidden Paste Wood Filler. 3. Moore: Benwood Paste Wood Filler. 4. Pittsburgh: (none required) 5. S-W: Sher -Wood Fast -Dry Filler. D. Oil Rubbing Varnish: Clear, oil -type rubbing varnish for use on interior stained or natural -finished woodwork: 1. Devoe: 4600 Wonder Wood Satin Alkyd Satin Varnish. 2. Glidden: 82 Woodmaster Satin Sheen Urethane Varnish. 3. Moore: Benwood Satin Finish Varnish #404. 4. Pittsburgh: 77-7 Rez Satin Varnish. 5. P & L: 38 Clear Finish Gloss. 6. S-W: Oil Base Varnish, Gloss A66V91. E. Paste Wax: Provide paste wax as recommended by the coating manufacturer for use on interior stained and natural -finished woodwork. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements for application of paint. Do not begin paint application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place that are not to be painted, or provide surface -applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. 1. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in PAINTING 09900 - 7 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for each particular - substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing of problems anticipated with using the specified finish -coat material with substrates primed by others. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral -fiber -reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast -cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently -- alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in ^ manufacturer's printed directions. C. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, and -u rinse; allow to dry and vacuum before painting. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances _ with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before application of primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. C. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean nongalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by the paint system manufacturer and in accordance with requirements of SSPC specification SSPC-SP 10. PAINTING 09900 - 8 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. C. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. wire -brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non - petroleum -based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. C. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. D. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in "schedules." 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 4. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. PAINTING 09900 - 9 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment. 7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black paint. 8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field - finished casework to match exterior. 10. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. 11. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 12. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop -primed and touch up painted. C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E F. G. Mechanical and Electrical work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. Mechanical items to be painted include but are not limited to: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Heat exchangers. 3. Tanks. 4. Ductwork. 5. Insulation. 6. Supports. 7. Motors and mechanical equipment. 8. Accessory items. Electrical items to be painted include but are not limited to: 1. Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear. PAINTING 09900 - 10 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. I. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. J. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. K. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. L. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass -smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2. The testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: a. Quantitative materials analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. C. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k. Skinning. PAINTING 09900 - 11 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. Color retention. M. Alkali and mildew resistance. 3. If test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements, the Contractor may be directed to stop painting, remove noncomplying paint, pay for testing, repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint, and remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are noncompatible. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. B. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove — temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates indicated. B. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other than concrete masonry units): 1. Elastomeric Waterproof Coating 2 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 4.8 mils.(The following is a Sherman Williams specification. Similar, specifications from other noted paint manufacturers will be considered.) a. First Coat: Loxon Exterior Masonry Acrylic Primer, 3.1 mils dry. b. Second Coat: Elastomeric Waterproof Coating. C. Third Coat: Elastomeric Waterproof Coating. 2. Crack repair, prior to installation of primer and two finish coats: a. Cracks no greater than 1/32" apply 2 coats elastomeric PAINTING 09900 - 12 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY coating. b. Cracks no greater than 1/8" apply 1 coat VIP 5300/5500 Ter - Polymer Sealant, using a broad knife, allow 12 hours minimum drying time. Top dress to obtain finish to match existing with VIP 5300/5500 Ter -Polymer Sealant. Apply two coats elastomeric coating. C. Cracks no greater than 1/411,using a broad knife, apply one coat of VIP 5300/5500 Ter -Polymer Sealant as a tape bedding compound and apply a single layer of perforated nylon tape. Top dress all exposed tape with VIP 5300/5500 Ter -Polymer Sealant. Apply two coats elastomeric coating. d. Massive repairs: patch with a commercial vinyl latex cement. Apply one coat Loxon Exterior Masonry Primer and apply two coats elastomeric waterproof coating. C. Zinc -Coated Metal: 1. High -Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer (FS TT-P-641). b. First Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel (FS TT-E-489). C. Second Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel (FS TT-E-489). D. Aluminum: 1. High -Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Alkyd -Type Zinc Chromate Primer (FS TT-P-645). b. First Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel (FS TT-E-489, Class A). C. Second Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel (FS TT-E-489, Class A). 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. B. Concrete and Masonry (Other than concrete masonry units): 1. Lusterless (Flat) Latex Finish: 2 coats. a. First Coat: Latex -Based Interior Flat Paint (FS TT-P-29). b. Second Coat: Latex -Based Interior Flat Paint (FS TT-P-29). C. Gypsum Drywall Systems: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Emulsion Finish: 2 coats. a. Primer: Latex -Based Interior white Primer (FS TT-P-650). b. Finish Coat: Latex -Based Interior Flat Paint (FS TT-P-29). 2. Odorless Lusterless (Flat) Latex Finish: 2 coats. a. Primer: Latex -Based Interior Flat Paint (FS TT-P-29). PAINTING 09900 - 13 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY b. Finish Coat: Interior Flat Odorless Alkyd Paint (FS TT-P- 30). _ D. Stained Woodwork: E. Natural -Finish Woodwork: 1. Rubbed Varnish Finish: 2 Finish coats over shellac plus filler on - open -grain wood. a. First Coat: Cut Shellac (FS TT-S-300). b. Filler Coat: Paste Wood Filler (FS TT-F-336). C. Second Coat: Oil Rubbing Varnish (FS TT-V-86). d. Third Coat: Oil Rubbing Varnish (FS TT-V-86). F. Ferrous Metal: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Finish: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry - film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Synthetic Rust -Inhibiting Primer (FS TT-P-664). b. First Coat: Latex -Based Interior Flat Paint (FS TT-P-29). C. Second Coat: Latex -Based Interior Flat Paint (FS TT-P-29). 2. Semigloss Enamel Finish: 2 coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Synthetic Rust -Inhibiting Primer (FS TT-P-664). _ b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543). C. Finish Coat: Interior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). G. Zinc -Coated Metal: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Finish: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer (FS TT-P-641). b. First Coat: Latex -Based Interior Flat Paint (FS TT-P-29). C. Second Coat: Latex -Based Interior Flat Paint (FS TT-P-29). 2. Semigloss Finish: 2 coats over primer, with total dry film -- thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer (FS TT-P- 641). b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543). C. Finish Coat: Interior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). END OF SECTION 09900 PAINTING 09900 - 14 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 10160 - TOILET PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of toilet partitions is indicated on drawings. B. Types of toilet compartments include: 1. Marble. C. Styles of toilet compartments include: 1. Floor -anchored. D. Styles of screens include: 1. Wall -hung. E. Toilet accessories, such as toilet paper holders, grab bars, purse shelves, are specified elsewhere in Division 10. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data for materials, fabrication, and installation, including catalog cuts of anchors, hardware, fastenings, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of toilet partition assemblies not fully described by product drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorage devices built into other work. C. Samples: Submit full range of color samples for each type of unit required. Submit 6" square samples of each color and finish on same substrate to be used in work, for color verification after selections have been made. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where possible, to ensure proper fitting TOILET PARTITIONS 10160 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY of work. However, allow for adjustments within specified tolerances where ever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other work for installation of toilet partitions and related work; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Weis-Robart Partitions, Inc. 2. "Marblestal" as produced by Georgia Marble Company. 2.2 MATERIALS: A. General: Provide materials which have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. 2.3 FABRICATION: A. General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for partition system, unless otherwise indicated. Furnish E units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement to receive partition -mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. B. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 24" wide inswinging doors for ordinary toilet stalls and 32" wide (clear opening) outswinging doors at stalls equipped for use by handicapped. C. Marble Partitions and Screens: 1. Floor -Supported Partitions: Furnish Chrome Plated Brass anchorage devices, complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters, to permit structural connection at floor. Furnish shoe at each pilaster to conceal anchorage. Wall -Hung Screens: Furnish panel units in sizes indicated, of same construction and finish as partition system panels. 2. Hardware: Furnish hardware for each compartment in partition system per manufacturer's recommendations. a. Hinges: Surface mounted L-Type chrome plated brass, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. Provide gravity type, spring -action cam type, or concealed torsion rod type, to suit manufacturer's standards. b. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface -mounted TOILET PARTITIONS 10160 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY latch unit, designed for emergency access, with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. C. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard unit, combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper, sized to prevent door hitting mounted accessories. d. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit for out -swing doors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2" between pilasters and panels, and not more than 1" between panels and walls. Secure panels to walls with not less than two stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall anchorages occur in masonry or tile joints. Secure panels to pilasters with not less than two stirrup brackets located to align with stirrup brackets at wall. Secure panels in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. B. Floor -Supported Partitions: Set pilaster units with anchorages having not less than 2" penetration into structural floor, unless otherwise recommended by partition manufacturer. Level, plumb, and tighten installation with devices furnished. Hang doors and adjust so that tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position. C. Screens: Attach with concealed anchoring devices, as recommended by manufacturer to suit supporting structure. Set units to provide support and to resist lateral impact. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on inswinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on outswinging doors (and entrance swing doors) to return to fully closed position. B. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 10160 TOILET PARTITIONS 10160 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 10425 - SIGNS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of signs: 1. Panel signs. 2. Dimensional letters and numbers. 3. Cast metal plaque, 18 inches by 24 inches. 4. Two Directory Signs under an allowance of $1,000.00 each. S. Interior identification signage B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities" for temporary project identification signs. 2. Division 2 Section "Site Improvements" for roadway signs and traffic signals. 3. Division 10 Section "Directories and Bulletin Boards" for building directories. 4. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for mechanical equipment. 5. Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. 6. Division 16 Section "Emergency Lighting" for illuminated exit signs. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's construction details relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes for each type of sign required. C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement, accessories, layout, and installation details. 1. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale SIGNS 10425 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY details of wording and layout of lettering. 2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections. 3. Furnish full-size rubbings for the sign. 4. Furnish full-size rubbings for metal plaques. a. Dimensional Letters: Provide full-size representative samples of each dimensional letter type required, showing letter style, color, and material finish and method of attachment. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide lighting fixtures and electrical components for illuminated signs that are labeled and listed by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards. B. Single -Source Responsibility: For each separate type of sign required, obtain signs from one source from a single manufacturer. C. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of signs. Other signs with deviations from indicated dimensions and profiles may be considered, provided deviations do not change the design concept. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. D. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of signs and are based on the specific type and model indicated. Signs by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Manufacturers of Dimensional Letters: SIGNS 10425 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY a. Andco Industries Corp. b. A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company, Inc. C. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. d. Gemini, Inc. e. Metal Arts, Division of L & H Manufacturing Co. f. The Southwell Company. g. Spanjer Brothers, Inc. h. Steel Art Company, Inc. 2. Manufacturers of Cast Plaques and Sign: a. Andco Industries Corp. b. A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company, Inc. C. Best Manufacturing Co. d. Gemini, Inc. e. Lake Shore Markers. f. Metal Arts, Division of L & H Manufacturing Co. g. OMC Industries, Inc. h. The Southwell Company. 3. Manufacturers of Interior Identification Signage: a. ABC Architectural Signing System, Division of Nelson -Harkins Industries. b. Allenite, A Division of Allen Marking Products, Inc. C. Andco Industries Corp. d. APCO Graphics, Inc. e. Architectural Graphics, Inc. f. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. g. Best Manufacturing Co. h. Modulex. i. Mohawk Sign Systems. j. Spanjer Brothers, Inc. k. The Supersine Company. 1. Vomar Products, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Bronze Plate: Provide bronze plate, copper alloy UNS C28000, Muntz metal, 60 percent copper. B. Bronze Castings: Provide bronze castings, copper alloy UNS C83600, complying with the requirements of ASTM B 584. C. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface. D. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot -dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 2.3 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND NUMBERS SIGNS 10425 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Cast Letters and Numbers: Form individual letters and numbers by casting. Produce characters with smooth, flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Cast lugs into the back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size. 1. Metal: Bronze. B. Fabricated Letters and Numbers: Fabricate letters and numbers to required sizes and styles, using metals and thicknesses indicated. Form exposed faces and sides of characters to produce surfaces free from warp and distortion. Include internal bracing for stability and attachment of mounting accessories. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size. 1. Bronze Plate: Not less than 20 gage. 2. Letter Height: Varies from 3 to 8 inches. 3. Letter Style: Roman. 2.4 CAST METAL PLAQUES and SIGN: A. Plaques: Castings shall be free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Comply with requirements specified for metal, border style, background texture, and finish and with requirements shown for thickness, size, shape, and copy. Hand -tool and buff borders and raised copy to produce the manufacturer's standard satin polished finish. Refer to "Finish" article for other finish requirements. 1. Metal: Bronze. 2. Border Style: Projected bevel. 3. Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard pebble texture. B. Sign: Casting shall be free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Comply with requirements specified for metal, border style, background texture, and finish and with requirements shown for thickness, size, shape, and copy. Hand -tool and buff borders and raised copy to produce the manufacturer's standard satin polished finish. Refer to "Finish" article for other finish requirements. 1. Metal: Bronze. 2. Border Style: Projected bevel per drawings. 3. Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard texture. C. Low Profile Framed Sign System: Provide a room number and identification of occupant or activity on each wood door, and hollow metal door. Provide vinyl letters attached to glass on Division glass entry doors. 1. Meet ADA requirements. 2. Provide rounded corners. 3. Color as selected by the Architect from manufacturers full range of colors. 4. Square or rectangular, sized to suit information. 5. Provide 16 "NO SMOKING" signs. SIGNS 10425 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY D. Traffic and Parking signs: Provided by Monroe County and installed by the Contractor. Assume 10 signs. 2.5 FINISHES A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standards. B. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and applications recommendations. C. Bronze Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by "CDA" conform to the system established by the Copper Development Association for designating finishes. 1. Statuary Finish: CDA-M31C55O6x (Mechanical Finish: Fine satin directional textured; Chemical Finish: Sulfide conversion coating; Clear Organic Coating: Manufacturer's standard air-dry clear organic coating as specified below.) a. Clear Organic Coating: Air-dried acrylic coating "Incralac" as developed by International Copper Research Corporation, 1.0-mil minimum dry thickness. b. Color: Uniform, matching color of the Architect's sample. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. B. Dimensional Letters and Numbers: Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening methods recommended by the manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 1. Flush Mounting: Mount letters with backs in contact with the wall surface. 2. Projected Mounting: Mount letters at the projection distance from the wall surface indicated. C. Cast Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using the standard method recommended by the manufacturer for the type of wall surface indicated. SIGNS 10425 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. Concealed Mounting: Mount the plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped lugs on the back of the plaque. Set in predrilled holes filled with quick -setting cement. 2. Face Mounting: Mount plaques using exposed fasteners with rosettes attached through the face of the plaque into the wall surface. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. END OF SECTION 10425 SIGNS 10425 - 6 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fire extinguishers. 2. Mounting brackets. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. For fire extinguisher cabinets include rough -in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style, door construction, panel style, and materials. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets from one source from a single manufacturer. B. Coordination: Verify that fire extinguisher cabinets are sized to accommodate fire extinguishers provided by Owner under separate contract of type and capacity indicated. C. UL-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers UL-listed and bear UL "Listing Mark" for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher. D. FM -Listed Products: Fire extinguishers approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher and carry appropriate FM marking. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 2. Walter Kidde, Division of Kidde, Inc. 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each extinguisher cabinet and other locations indicated, in colors and finishes selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard, which comply with requirements of governing authorities. 1. Fill and service extinguishers to comply with requirements of governing authorities and manufacturer. 2. Abbreviations indicated below identify extinguisher types related to UL classification and rating system and not necessarily to type and amount of extinguishing material contained in extinguisher. B. Carbon Dioxide Type: UL-rated 10-B:C, 10-lb. nominal capacity, in manufacturer's standard enameled metal container. 2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Provide brackets designed to prevent accidental dislodgement of extinguisher, of sizes required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated in plated finish. 1. Provide brackets for all extinguishers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. 1. Securely fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following toilet accessory items: 1. Paper towel dispenser. 2. Toilet tissue dispenser. 3. Combination towel dispenser/waste receptacle unit. 4. Grab bar. 5. Sanitary napkin vendor. 6. Sanitary napkin disposal unit. 7. Soap dispenser. 8. Combination utility shelf unit. 9. Mop and broom holder. 10. Stainless steel framed mirror units. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections. B. Product Data for each toilet accessory item specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, method of mounting, specified options, and finishes. C. Samples: Full-size samples of each toilet accessory item for verification of design, operation, and finish requirements. Acceptable samples will be returned and may be used in the work. D. Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room) for each toilet accessory item to be provided for project. E. Setting Drawings: Where cutouts are required in other work, provide templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and for installation of anchorage devices. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY be set in concrete or built into masonry; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. B. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty: Provide manufacturer's written 5-year warranty against silver spoilage of mirrors, agreeing to replace any mirrors that develop visible defects within warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering toilet accessories that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. -- 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 22-gage (.034-inch) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products, ASTM B 19; rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges, ASTM B 16, Castings, ASTM B-30. C. Sheet Steel: Cold -rolled, commercial quality ASTM A 366, 20-gage (.040-inch) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 527, G60. E. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 2 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY ASTM B 456, Type SC 2. F. Baked Enamel Finish: Factory -applied, gloss white, baked acrylic enamel coating. G. Mirror Glass: Nominal 6.0 mm (0.23 inch) thick, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, and with silvering, electro-plated copper coating, and protective organic coating. H. Stainless Steel Mirror Surfaces: Not less than 20-gage (.040-inch), AISI Type 302/304 stainless steel sheet, hand -selected, stretcher -leveled with either No. 8 polished mirror finish or Type 430 "auto brite" annealed reflective finish. Bond to 1/4-inch (minimum) hardboard backing. I. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. J. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of galvanized steel where concealed. K. Keys: Unless otherwise indicated, provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for servicing, resupply, etc. Provide minimum of six (6) keys to Owner's representative and obtain receipt. 2.3 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS A. Recessed Towel Dispensers: Fabricate of stainless steel for nominal 4-inch wall depth, sized to dispense not less than 400 C-fold or 700 multi -fold paper towels without use of special adapters, door equipped with tumbler lockset. 2.4 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS A. Roll -In -Reserve Dispenser: Fabricate of stainless steel for mounting indicated below, sized to store and dispense either 4-1/2-inch-diameter or 5-inch-diameter core tissue rolls, with reserve roll placed in service by automatic release or by action of manual release bar. Hinge front of unit with pivot hinge and secure with tumbler lockset. 1. Mounting: Surface mounted, concealed anchorage. 2. Fabrication: Spindleless chrome -plated steel construction with tension -spring delivery control; designed for surface mounting, self-locking device extends through core and prevents removal of core until roll is completely empty. 2.5 COMBINATION TOWEL DISPENSER/WASTE RECEPTACLE UNITS A. Recessed Unit with Projecting Receptacle: Stainless steel combination unit fabricated for nominal 4-inch wall depth and with continuous seamless 1-inch-wide wall flange. Provide towel compartment in upper TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 3 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY portion of unit, designed to dispense not less than 400 C-fold or 700 multifold paper towels; double -panel door with continuous piano hinge and tumbler lock. Waste receptacle in lower portion of unit provided with reusable heavy-duty vinyl liner, minimum 12-gallon capacity, secured in place by tumbler lock. 2.6 GRAB BARS A. Stainless Steel Type: Provide grab bars with wall thickness not less than 18 gage (.050 inch) and as follows: 1. Mounting: Concealed, manufacturer's standard flanges and anchorages. 2. Clearance: 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar. 3. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard nonslip texture. 4. Heavy -Duty Size: Outside diameter of 1-1/2 inches. 2.7 SANITARY NAPKIN VENDORS A. General: Fabricate cabinet of stainless steel, not less than 22 gage (.034 inch), all welded construction. Provide door of seamless stainless steel, minimum 18 gage (.050 inch), with returned edges and equipped with tumbler lockset. Provide identification reading "Napkins" and "Tampons" at coin slots; brand name advertising is not allowed. Capacity not less than 15 napkins and 20 tampons. 1. Mounting: Semirecessed type, with stainless steel collar to extend unit from nominal 4-inch-thick wall cavity. 2. Operation: 50-cents coin operation, with locked coin box keyed separately from door and other accessory units. 2.8 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL UNITS A. Recessed Type: Fabricate of stainless steel for nominal 4-inch-wall depth. Provide self -closing door and removable stainless steel receptacle of all -welded construction. 2.9 SOAP DISPENSERS A. Liquid Soap Dispenser, Deck -Mounted: Deck -mounted piston and spout -type unit with minimum 16-fluid-ounce-capacity polyethylene reservoir concealed below deck. Piston and 4-inch long spout of stainless steel with bright polished finish with chrome -plated deck escutcheon. 1. Provide unit designed for mounting on vanity deck. 2. Equip unit with valve for dispensing soap in liquid form. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Mop and Broom Holder/Utility Shelf: Combination unit with 18-gage (.050-inch) Type 304 stainless steel shelf with 1/2-inch returns, 16-gage (.062-inch) support brackets for wall mounting; provide 16-gage TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 4 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY stainless steel hooks for wiping rags on front of shelf, together with spring -loaded rubber cam -type mop/broom holders; 1/4-inch-diameter stainless steel drying rod suspended beneath shelf. Provide unit 36 inches long and complete with 4 mop/broom holders and 3 hooks. 2.11 MIRROR UNITS A. Stainless Steel Framed Mirror Units: Fabricate frame with angle shapes of not less than 18 gage (.050 inch), with square corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. Provide in No. 4 satin polished finish. 1. Shelves: Fabricate of stainless steel in same gage and finish as mirror frame, approximately 5 inches deep by width of mirror. Turn down and return edges for additional rigidity. Weld shelves securely to bottom of mirror frame; provide concealed rigid bracket supports for widths exceeding 36 inches. 2.12 FABRICATION A. General: Only a maximum 1-1/2-inch diameter, unobtrusive stamped logo of manufacturer, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath accessory units. On either interior surface not exposed to view or back surface, provide additional identification by means of either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate, indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. B. General: No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of toilet and bath accessory units. On either interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface, provide identification of each accessory item by either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. C. Surface -Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. D. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with full-length stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed. E. Framed Mirror Units, General: Fabricate frames for glass mirror units to accommodate wood, felt, plastic, or other glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that will permit rigid, tamperproof glass installation and prevent accumulation of moisture, as follows: 1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 22 gage (.034 inch) and full mirror size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material. F. Mirror Unit Hangers: Provide system of mounting mirror units that will permit rigid, tamperproof, and theftproof installation, as follows: TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 5 GATO BUILDING - MONROE COUNTY 1. One-piece galvanized steel wall hanger device with spring action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. 2. Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring special tool to remove. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special -- hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. END OF SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 6 GATO BUILDING - FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SECTION 11450 - RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of residential equipment required is indicated on drawings and in schedules. B. Types of residential equipment required include the following: 1. Refrigerators. 2. Range. C. Plumbing requirements are specified in Division 15. D. Electrical services and connections are specified in Division 16. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Certification Labels: Provide residential equipment which complies with standards and bears certification labels as follows: 1. Energy Ratings: Provide energy guide labels with energy cost analysis (annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by Federal Trade Commission. 2. UL Standards: Provide residential equipment with UL labels. 3. ANSI Standards: Provide gas burning residential equipment with American Gas Assoc. (AGA) seal of approval, complying with ANSI Z21-Series. B. Uniformity: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of residential equipment required. 1. To greatest extent possible, provide residential equipment by single manufacturer for entire project. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of residential equipment, including data indicating compliance with requirements. Submit operating and maintenance instructions for each item of residential equipment. RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT 11450 - 1 GATO BUILDING - FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH B. Schedule: Submit schedule of residential equipment, using same room - designations shown on drawings. 1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's undamaged protective containers, after spaces to receive them have been fully enclosed. 1.6 SPECIFIED PRODUCT WARRANTIES: A. Submit manufacturer's standard written warranty for each item of residential equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION: A. Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard colors as shown or scheduled. If no color indicated, provide white. B. Electric Ranges: 1. 30" Freestanding Type: Unit with hinged, recessed, porcelain enamel cooktop; 4 plus -in heating elements with infinitely adjustable controls, including not less than one 811, 2600 watt element; removable porcelain enamel or chrome plated drip bowls; pyrolitic self-cleaning oven equipped with manually switched light, door with window and safety locking feature, 2 adjustable chrome racks, and porcelain enamel broiler -roaster pan with chrome grille insert; control panel with clock, timer, and automatic oven controls; storage drawer below oven; adjustable legs. a. Accessories/Options: Provide ranges with the following additional features: 1) Digital clock. 2) Fluorescent lighting for cooktop 3) Automatic rotisserie attachment for oven. 4) Black glass oven door. b. Available Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Amana Refrigeration Inc. 2) Frigidiare; White Consolidated Ind. 3) General Electric. — 4) Hotpoint. 5) Sears, Roebuck & Co. 6) Modern Maid; Raytheon Co. _ RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT 11450 - 2 GATO BUILDING - FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH 7) Whirlpool Home Appliances. 8) White Westinghouse. C. Refrigerators: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Amana Refrigeration Inc. b. Frigidaire; White Consolidated Ind. C. General Electric. d. Hotpoint. e. Sears, Roebuck & Co. f. Whirlpool Home Appliances. g. White -Westinghouse 2. Top Freezer Type: Freestanding, two -door unit; both compartments frostless, with separate temperature controls, switch for condensation control heating element at freezer opening; storage features including adjustable shelves, meat compartment, vegetable crisper(s), butter conditioning compartment, removable egg trays or bins, door shelves, and not less than 2 ice cube trays; reversible doors; adjustable rollers. a. Capacity: Minimum values, measured according to ANSI B 38.1 and certified by AHAM: 1) Total volume; 17.0 cubic feet. 2) Refrigerator volume: 14.0 cubic feet. 3) Total shelf area: 25.0 square feet. b. Energy Consumption: Measured and certified as follows: 1) Not more than 150 kWh/month under average conditions. C. Accessories/Options: Provide refrigerator/freezers with the following additional features: 1) Porcelain enamel interior lining. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper operation of equipment. C. Utilities: Refer to Division 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT 11450 - 3 GATO BUILDING - FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH requirements. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Testing: Test each item or residential equipment to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. B. Accessories: verify that accessory items required have been furnished. C. Cleaning: Remove packing material from residential equipment items and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation. END OF SECTION 11450 RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT 11450 - 4 GATO BUILDING DIVISION FIFTEEN - MECHANICAL SECTION 15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 INSTRUCTIONS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Instructions to Bidders are hereby made a part of these specifications and the Contractor is to consult them for instructions pertaining to the work of this Section. Work shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for a complete and properly functioning installation in accordance with state codes, and contract drawings and specifications. Work shall be understood to include all work specified in Division 15 Mechanical Specifications. 1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Prior to start of any work, the Contractor shall meet with the Architect and Engineers to determine that no questions remain concerning the intent of the drawings or specifications. The Contractor shall outline his method of procedure and bring up for discussion and decision any questions concerning the project. No work shall be performed prior to this meeting. The Architect/Engineer shall set the date, time, and place of conference. 1.3 LOCAL CONDITIONS A. Contractor shall visit the site and determine all existing local conditions affecting work in this contract. He shall examine architectural plans and specifications and consult them for instructions pertaining to work of this Section. 1.4 PERMITS AND FEES A. Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and inspections required for his work and pay all charges incidental thereto. Deliver to Architect/Engineer all certificates of inspection issued by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 CODES AND REGULATIONS BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-1 GATO BUILDING A. Codes: All work performed under this division shall conform with the Standard Building Code, NFPA and all applicable National, State and Local codes. All electrically operated equipment specified in this section shall comply with the National Electrical Code. B. Regulations: Should it be found that any part of the work shown or specified is not in accordance with requirements, the Architect/Engineer shall be so advised at the time of bidding and all work installed as required to meet the applicable codes. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where any of the Contract Documents are at variance with the applicable Codes governing the work, the Code requirements shall take precedence, and any cost necessary to meet these shall be included in the bid price. B. Mechanical Plans: 1. The Mechanical Plans are intended to be diagrammatic and are based on one manufacturer's equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact dimensions, or all the details of the equipment or proposed systems layout. Before starting work, verify the actual dimensions of the systems (i.e. ducts and piping) and equipment proposed to assure that the systems and equipment will fit in the available space. 2. Installation of all mechanical systems shall be within the limitations imposed by the architectural, structural, and electrical requirements. Provide adequate space for manufacturer's recommended maintenance and Code -required clearances C. Guarantees: All equipment, materials, and workmanship shall be guaranteed including labor and materials for corrective measures, for a period of one year, beginning with the date of acceptance of the project in writing. Special warranties will be called for under some sections of Products. Provide warranties in writing, and include written copies of the factory warranties with expiration dates on items of equipment where the warranty date might differ from the acceptance date, such as four year warranty of refrigerant systems. No warranty shall start before the date of acceptance in writing by the Engineer. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-2 GATO BUILDING D. Substitutions: 1. Where materials or equipment are specified by name of manufacturer, such specification shall be deemed to be used for purposes of establishing a standard of quality for that particular item. Materials or equipment shall conform to the Specifications and Drawings in all respects. Modification to equipment to conform to the Specifications or Drawings is required if the listed manufacturer cannot meet the requirements with a regularly cataloged item. Inclusion of a manufacturer's name as acceptable to provide specific equipment does not indicate that the manufacturer's standard catalogued components will perform as required, or that they will fit in the allocated physical space for the equipment. It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify that the equipment proposed will fit in the allocated physical space, with all required manufacturers and Code required clearances. 2. Equipment submitted for substitution shall meet all Contract Document requirements including quality established by brand specified. Any deviation or non-compliance shall be indicated by an attached letter explaining a proposed change. Acceptance of submitted material does not grant deviation from Contract requirements. Additional expense resulting from the Contractor's decision to use substitute materials must be included in Bid Sum and shall include all costs by other affected crafts. 3. Material description takes precedence over catalog number listed. Contractor shall verify with manufacturer correctness of catalog number against material description and accessories. 4. Variations in Equipment: If approved mechanical equipment of other manufacturer requires modification or additions to other work shown on Drawings, Contractor shall arrange for and pay all costs of such changes at no additional cost to Owner. 5. "Or Equal:" Where equipment make is listed, followed by the phrase "... or equal," this shall require the submittal of the proposed make prior to bidding for review by the Engineer. The documentation provided will be reviewed by the Engineer to substantiate the standard of quality of BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-3 GATO BUILDING the manufacturer's components only. The review will not consider specific characteristics of the manufacturer's specific components in regards to the capability of those components to meet the detailed requirements of specifications or drawings. This detailed review will be performed during submittals (i.e. shop drawings). E. Materials shall comply with applicable standards and requirements including Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., ASHRAE, ASTM, ASME, ARI, CTI, ASPE, NEMA, TIMA or other referenced organizations or publications. 1.7 SUBMITTAL A. Material List: Within twenty (20) days of award of contract, submit to Architect/Engineer a complete list of materials to be provided for the mechanical work. The list shall include suppliers' names and manufacturers' names and number or series for each item on list. Items not shown on said list will be construed to be as specified on drawings or in specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Submit to the Architect/Engineer for approval before commencing work, shop drawings for all materials and equipment to be provided under this contract. The following applies to the shop drawings: 1. Contractor shall submit within 30 days after Award of Contract, drawings or cuts of all materials and equipment for approval by Architect/Engineer. Such submittal must contain outline dimensions, operating clearances, installation, operating and maintenance information and sufficient engineering data to indicate substantial compliance with specifications. All shop drawings for one section of work or one mechanical system shall be submitted at one time. No approval will be given if submitted piece meal. 2. Where Contractor considers additional detail or shop drawings essential to proper fabrication or installation of equipment, ductwork, and piping, he shall prepare such drawings and submit for approval. 3. Approval granted on shop drawings is rendered as a service only and shall not be considered as guarantee of measurements or building conditions; nor shall it be construed as relieving this BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-4 GATO BUILDING Contractor of basic responsibilities under the contract. 4. Design is based on manufacturer named on drawings or in specifications. Shop drawings shall indicate exceptions to or deviations from the design basis. 5. Changes in foundations, bases, connections, starters, electrical equipment, wiring and conduit, space openings, walls and ceilings, and sound and vibration isolation required for prior approved equal equipment shall be made at no cost to the Owner. 6. Indicate on each shop drawing that Contractor has checked that it complies with the drawings and specifications by affixing a stamp indicating the following: Date, specification page and section, drawing note indicating that manufacturer is as specified or that manufacturer is to be approved as "or equal" and signature of person reviewing shop drawing. Leave sufficient area adjacent to Contractor's stamp for Architect/Engineer's approval and date of approval. 7. Contractor shall submit shop drawings and receive Architect/Engineer's approval before installing materials and equipment listed. 8. Approval of any submitted data or shop drawings and/or layouts will not relieve Contractor .from responsibility of furnishing same of . proper dimensions, capacities, sizes, quantities, and installation details to efficiently perform requirements and intent of contract. Such approval will not relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort on submittal data or shop drawings. 1.8 SUPERVISION OF WORK A. Contractor shall have a competent, full time Superintendent in charge of work at the site at all times. Superintendent shall be qualified and have suitable experience in type of work to be installed under contract. B. Anyone not deemed capable by Architect/Engineer shall be replaced immediately upon request, by a Superintendent who is satisfactory. After a satisfactory Superintendent BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-5 GATO BUILDING has been assigned, he shall not be withdrawn without consent of Architect/Engineer. 1.9 WORKMANSHIP A. Materials and equipment shall be installed in a neat and first class workmanlike manner. Architect/Engineer reserves the right to direct removal and replacement of any items which;, in his opinion, do not present an orderly and reasonably neat and workmanlike appearance, provided such an orderly installation can be made using customary trade methods. Removal and replacement shall be done when directed in writing by Architect/Engineer at Contractor's expense and without additional expense to Owner. 1.10 CONNECTING TO WORK OF OTHERS A. Before starting his work, and from time to time as work progresses, Contractor shall examine work and materials installed by others insofar as they apply to his work and shall notify Architect/Engineer immediately in writing if conditions exist which will prevent satisfactory results in installation of system. B. Should Contractor start his work without such _ notification, it shall be construed as an acceptance by him of all claims or questions as to suitability or work of others to receive his work. He shall remove and -- replace, at his own expense, all work under this contract which may have to be removed on account of such defects. 1.11 DRAWINGS A. It is the intent of drawings and specifications to obtain - a complete and fully operational, and satisfactory installation. An attempt has been made to separate and completely define work of the Contractor; however, such - separate divisional drawings and specifications shall not relieve Contractor from full responsibility of compliance with work of his trade which may be indicated on any drawing or in any section of the specifications. B. Contractor shall therefore carefully examine architectural, structural, electrical, and mechanical drawings prior to submitting bid. Contractor will be required to furnish, install, and connect with appropriate service all items shown on any drawings -- BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-6 GATO BUILDING without additional expense to Owner. Architect/Engineer shall be notified of any discrepancies, omissions, conflicts, or interferences which occur between drawings or between drawings and specifications. If such notification is received in adequate time, additional data or changes will be issued by addendum to all bidders. C. Architectural drawings shall take precedence over mechanical drawings with reference to building construction. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of building and work of other trades will permit. Where locations of equipment devices or fixtures are controlled by Architectural features, establish such locations by referring to dimensions on Architectural drawings and not by scaling drawings. Changes from drawings necessary to make work of Contractor conform with building as constructed and to fit work of other trades or rules of bodies having jurisdiction shall be made by Contractor at his own expense. Certain drawings have been prepared from existing drawings with intent of providing the Contractor with all information possible concerning the existing conditions. Data shown has not been completely verified by Architect/Engineer and no guarantee of accuracy of this information is given or intended. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all existing conditions. Data which is shown but proves to be incorrect shall in no way relieve the Contractor from installing his work within the intent of plans and specifications, nor shall it constitute basis for an extra cost to Owner unless, in the opinion .of the Architect/Engineer, it is determined to be an extra cost over and above the basic intent of plans and specifications. 1.12 DAMAGE TO OTHER WORK AND PERSONNEL A. Contractor shall be responsible for proper protective measures when working overhead or in finished areas. He shall repair, replace, or touch-up all finished surfaces which may be damaged as a result of his operations. 1.13 STORAGE AND WORK AREAS A. All equipment other than piping shall be stored either in water -tight trailers on -site or in a warehouse off- site. All materials shall be protected from the weather, damage, moisture, dirt, debris, etc. Use of cardboard, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-7 GATO BUILDING visqueen, or other flimsy materials is not acceptable. 1.14 APPROVAL OF MATERIAL A. Equipment other than specified requires ten (10) day prior approval. Request for prior approval must be received in Architect/ Engineer's office by close of business no later than ten (10) days prior to receipt of Bid. Request shall contain detailed information on the proposed item. This shall include: 1. Catalog cuts 2. Detailed specifications 3. Deviation from specified item B. An addenda shall be issued listing all prior approved manufacturers. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION A. Painting and Marking: 1. Painting of equipment, pipe, and ducts (insulated or uninsulated) is specified under the "Painting" section of these specifications. Touch-up of shop coat shall be performed under section furnishing equipment. 2. Marking: a. Pipes: All exposed piping shall be stenciled with name of service to indicate the use of pipe and with arrows to indicate direction of flow. Stencils shall be applied after final painting is completed. In lieu of stencils, pipe identification labels similar to "Brady" may be used. Bands shall be color coded. All markings shall be in accordance with ANSI Standard A13.1. b. Equipment: air handling equipment, fans, etc., shall be stenciled as specified above. Small equipment such as starters, control devices, etc., shall be neatly labeled with small engraved laminated plastic labels. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-8 GATO BUILDING 2.2 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall be specified in Division 3 - Concrete. 2.3 PAINT A. Touch-up paint shall match items requiring touch up. 2.4 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES OR ESCUTCHEONS IN EXPOSED AREAS A. Provide escutcheons or fabricated plates or collars at each location where pipe or duct passes through a finished surface. Escutcheons for flush sleeves shall be equal to Benton & Caldwell No. 3A chromium plated brass; for sleeves extending above floor shall be equal to Benton & Caldwell No. 36 chrome plate brass. Collars or plates for ducts and large diameter insulated pipe shall be fabricated of 18 gauge galvanized copper bearing sheet steel, secured to structure and neatly f itted around duct or pipe. 2.5 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide as necessary for access to concealed valves, cleanouts, unions, expansion joints, dampers, coils, junction boxes, etc., where no other means of access is shown or specified. Doors shall be manufactured by the Milcor Division of Inland -Ryerson, or an acceptable equal, type as follows: Door Location Drywall Masonry or Tile Acoustical Tile Plaster Fire -Rated Walls Door Type Style "DWI' Style "M-Stainless" Style "AT" Style "K" Style "Fire Rated" B. Each door shall be equipped with two flush, screwdriver operated, cam latches and, other than Style "M", shall be finished to match adjacent surface. Door sizes shall be applicable to the access required for normal service. 2.6 ELECTRICAL A. General: Unless specifically specified otherwise, starters, motors and control devices shall be furnished under the section of specifications that covers driven equipment. All electrical power wiring, conduits, and BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-9 GATO BUILDING connections shall be provided under the Electrical Division. Contractor furnishing driven equipment shall coordinate wiring diagrams with contract requirements and shall furnish coordinated wiring diagrams for installation. B. Motors: Unless specifically specified otherwise in the section covering the driven equipment (or the equipment drives), motors shall comply with the following: 1. Three Phase: NEMA design B, 3 phase, squirrel cage induction type designed for 1800 rpm synchronous speed for operation in 40 degrees C ambient at 1.15 service factor at constant speed on the scheduled -- voltage. Motors shall be insulated with Class B insulation material and shall be cast iron, drip proof, horizontal foot mounted type with ball bearings. 2. Single Phase: Squirrel cage induction type _ designed for 1800 rpm synchronous speed for operation in 40 degree C ambient at 1.15 service factor at constant speed on the scheduled voltage. Motors shall be insulated with Class B insulation materials and shall be two winding capacitor start type with steel enclosure, drip proof, horizontal foot mount and ball bearings. 3. Scheduled Horsepowers: The horsepowers scheduled or specified are those nominal sizes estimated to be required by the equipment when operating at specified duties and efficiencies. If the. actual horsepower for the equipment furnished differs from that specified or shown on the drawings, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to insure that proper size feeders, breakers, starters, etc., are provided at no change in contract price. - 2.7 BELT DRIVE A. Equip each motor -driven machine not direct -connected with a V-belt drive. Belts shall be of correct cross section to fit properly in sheave grooves and shall be carefully matched for each drive. Sheaves shall be cast iron or steel, bored to fit properly on shafts and secured with keys of proper size. The rating of each drive shall be as recommended by manufacturer for service but shall be at least 1.5 times nameplate rating of motor. B. Fan Belt Drives: Variable and adjustment pitch sheaves BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-10 GATO BUILDING shall be selected so that require fan rpm will be obtained with sheave set approximately in mid -position. Fans shall have drives in accord with the following table: Motor Output (Horsepower) 0 to 10 Fan Speed (RPM) Up to 1800 Sheave Type Variable pitch C. Speed Adjustment: Adjust fan speed as necessary to obtain proper design air flow with fan in its installed location. Fans which are to have fixed pitch drives may be first fitted with variable pitch drives until proper speed adjustment is made and then may be fitted with proper fixed pitch drive size, or alternate sizes of fixed pitch drives may be used until proper fan speed is obtained. Provide all drives necessary to obtain proper fan speed needed to deliver necessary air quantity. 2.8 BELT.AND COUPLING GUARDS A. Each belt drive shall be equipped with a guard. Guards shall be constructed of 112 U.S. standard gauge 3/4 inch diamond mesh wire screen, or equivalent., welded to 1-inch steel angle frames, and shall enclose all belts, sheaves. Tops and bottoms of guards shall be of substantial sheet metal or not less than 118 U.S. standard gauge. Braces or supports must not "bridge" sound and vibration isolators. Guards shall be designed with adequate provision for movement of motor required to adjust belt tension. Means shall also be provided to permit oiling, use of speed counters, and other maintenance and testing operations with guard in place. All direct drive equipment shall have coupling guards in accordance with Florida Department of Business Regulation safety regulations and OSHA. 2.9 ASBESTOS A. Do not use products containing asbestos. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-11 GATO BUILDING A. General: Contractor shall set in position all sleeves and inserts required in walls, partitions, ceilings, or floors, and shall have a man on the job during pouring of concrete to maintain position of sleeves and inserts until concrete is set. Close coordination is required to insure that all sleeves are properly set. Correctness of size and location of openings shall be verified by Contractor after framing is in place. Contractor shall do all cutting and patching of existing and/or new building materials required for installation of work herein specified. No structural members shall be cut without approval of Architect/Engineer and all such cutting shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner, _ meeting with approval of Architect/Engineer to match adjoining surfaces and finishes, by mechanics of particular trade involved. Sleeves and openings not used during construction shall be sealed with grout by Contractor. Openings between pipes and sleeves through fire and smoke walls or floors shall be sealed to prevent passage of smoke or heat using an Underwriters' - Laboratories (UL) approved method rated at least equal to the barrier being penetrated. Method of sealing shall be submitted with proof of UL approved with other submittal. _ All'openings required in concrete which were omitted when concrete was poured shall be carefully made by use of core boring operation with 5-inch maximum hole size unless larger size is approved by Architect/Engineer. -- Cut no openings in prestressed or precast members without approval of Architect/Engineer. B. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Walls and Partitions: a. Sleeves 8-Inch Diameter and Smaller (Above Grade): Sleeves shall be mild steel pipe or plastic sleeves built into wall, partition or beam, sized to pass pipe and covering, leaving a clear space of 1/4-inch minimum between covering and sleeve. Penetrations of fire rated barriers shall have mild steel sleeves. b. Sleeves Installed in Exterior Walls Below Grade: Schedule 40 steel hot dipped galvanized after fabrication or cast iron sleeve with 1/4- inch x 3-inch center flange 9 water stop) around the outside. 2. Floors (Above Grade): Sleeves shall be 14 gauge galvanized sheet steel or plastic, set before floor BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-12 GATO BUILDING is poured, sized to pass pipe and covering, leaving a clear space of 1/4-inch between covering and sleeve, and shall extend 1/2-inch above finished floor. 3. Duct Sleeves: Sleeves or openings sized to pass mechanical ducts and covering shall be of framed construction in roof, wall, or partitions. C. Sealing of Sleeves 1. Sleeves Below Grade: Caulk annular space between pipe and sleeve using oakum and poured lead both sides minimum 1-inch deep to make wall penetration water tight. 2. Sleeves above Grade: Openings around pipes, duct, etc., passing through sleeves shall be made draft free and vermin -proof by packing solidly with mineral wool or fiberglass. 3. Sealing of Sleeves through Fire Rated Barriers: Openings around pipes, et., through fire -rated barriers shall be sealed using a UL approved method rated at least equal to the wall being penetrated. 3.2 REMOVAL OF RUBBISH A. Contractor shall at all times keep premises free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused by his employees or work. At completion of the work, he shall remove all tools, scaffolding, materials, and rubbish in accordance with Special Conditions. He shall leave the premises and his work in a clean, orderly and acceptable condition. 3.3 CONCRETE PADS A. Contractor will furnish concrete bases for equipment located in equipment room and elsewhere as noted on the mechanical drawings. Contractor shall furnish all foundation bolts and sleeves to be installed. Concrete shall be placed in accordance with Concrete Section of these Specifications. 3.4 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION A. All excavation, backfilling, compaction, testing, etc., required for the installation of underground piping in this Division of the Specifications shall be done by the BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-13 GATO BUILDING Mechanical Subcontractor. This work shall be done in strict accordance with Excavation and Backfilling Section of Division 2. 3.5 PAINTING A. Painting under this section includes field painting exposed bare and covered pipes, hangers, exposed steel and iron work and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. B. Painting is not required on pre -finished items, finished metal surfaces, operating parts and labels. All parts of the building (structure, piping, insulation, etc.) which are damaged by this construction are to be re-f inished to factory -new condition, or to match existing finishes, a minimum of 3-coat work. C. Surfaces to be painted are to be finish coated in accordance with the following specification: 1. Surface Preparation - After inspection, clean all ferrous metals, complying with SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) SP-1 "SOLVENT CLEANING," removing all oil, grease and similar contaminates. 2. Painting - Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer paint in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and all exposed -- surfaces. 3. Steel not having a factory prime coat shall be - finished by first providing Commercial Blast Cleaning SSPC SP-5 using sandblast; prime with one coat inorganic zinc Mobilzinc No. 7 (BF12) or approved equal and two coats of exterior enamel, colors to be as noted or as selected by the Engineer. 4. All items of work included in this contract shall have a minimum of: 1 coat enamel Undercoating 1 coat enamel Gloss BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-14 GATO BUILDING 1 coat enamel Eggshell Total DFT of 3 coats = 4.5 MILS. Other coating systems may be used as approved by the Engineer. Colors to be as selected by the Engineer. 5. Finished metals such as anodized aluminum, stainless steel, bronze, and similar metals will not be painted; galvanized steel or items being constructed of corrosion -resisting material will similarly not be painted. 6. All exterior pipe insulation shall be painted three (3) coats with special resilient Protective coatings manufactured specifically for this purpose, color to be white, or as selected by the Engineer. 3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENTS A. Upon completion of work, Contractor shall clean, oil and grease all fans, motors, and other running equipment and apparatus which he installs and make certain all such apparatus and mechanisms are in proper working order and ready for test. Refer to Section entitled 'SYSTEMS COMPLETION'. 3.7 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. At the time of substantial completion of Contractor's work, he shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer four (4) complete portfolios containing shop drawings, operating, installation, maintenance instructions, and literature on all equipment furnished under this contract. Portfolios shall be in an indexed three-ring binder. This Contractor shall furnish a competent instructor to advise the Owner as to the proper operation, servicing, etc., of all mechanical equipment. This Contractor shall provide a minimum of eight (8) hours operating instructions to the Owner's personnel on system operation, changeover, and routine maintenance requirements. This instruction shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer. 3.8 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS A. Upon completion of installation, the contractor shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer marked up drawings, to scale, indicating the size and location of piping and ducts, and noting all major changes made during BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-15 GATO BUILDING construction. Drawings shall give accurate dimensions measured from columns, walls, beams, and other fixed parts of the building to the concealed materials. The Contractor shall maintain a set of drawings at the site and each day shall record installation of pipe, ducts, etc., to insure accurate "As -Built" drawings. 3.9 GUARANTEE AND SERVICE A. In addition to the guarantee of equipment by the manufacturer of each piece of equipment specified herein, the Contractor shall also guarantee such equipment and shall be held responsible for a period of one (1) year from final acceptance for necessary adjustments and/or replacements of all defective equipment, materials, and workmanship without expense to the Owner. B. Cleaning of filters and lubrication shall be limited to thirty (30) days after the final acceptance. C. The Contractor shall provide for a representative of his f irm, and the Owner's representative to return to the job at the change of seasons, (summer to winter or winter to summer) for the first year only, to adjust the air conditioning systems and recheck or recalibrate controls as may be required of the season change from cooling to heating or vice versa. 3.10 ACCEPTANCE A. As a prerequisite to requesting final inspection, Contractor shall: 1. Complete all work in Sections 15000 through 15999 inclusive of these specifications. 2. Each system shall be tested and balanced to assure design performance and Architect/Engineer shall be provided with preliminary test results. 3. Complete all work required under Section entitled "SYSTEMS COMPLETION". 4. Provide four (4) bound Operating and Maintenance Manuals as per Section 125, Paragraph 15.2. B. Acceptance will be made by the Architect/Engineer or his representative on the basis of tests and inspection of the job. Contractor shall furnish the necessary mechanics to operate systems, make any necessary BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-16 GATO BUILDING adjustments, and assist with the final inspection. ***END OF SECTION*** BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-17 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15100 - PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included in this Section applies to all Division 15 work to provide all materials, labor, tools, permits and incidentals to provide and make ready for the Owner's use the Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning, Plumbing and Fire Protection Systems for the proposed project. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. The requirements of this Section applies to and are a minimum for each Division 15 Section, unless otherwise stated in each Section, in which case that Section's requirements shall take precedence. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of piping products of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three years. 2. Welding Qualification: Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ANSI B31.1, paragraph 127.5, for shop and project site welding of piping work. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Standard Mechanical Code. 2. Standard Plumbing Code. 3. Applicable Federal, State and Local Codes; and Enforcing Authorities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Piping Materials List: Provide a typewritten list which schedules the piping materials to be used for each system as a function of applicable nominal pipe size ranges. Arrange schedule in outline form for each specific piping system e.g. "Chilled Water System," "Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping System," etc. Include ASTM, ANSI or other numbers and other data as necessary to demonstrate compliance with requirements. PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15100-1 GATO BUILDING B. Test Procedure: Submit a typewritten checklist type of testing procedure indicating testing medium (i.e. water, air, nitrogen, etc.) , pipe service, pipe and fitting type and classification, test pressure, pass/fail criteria and any other pertinent data. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS A. The following shop drawings are required for this section of the specifications: Pumps Piping where revised from drawings. Hangers and supports. Flexible pipe. Pressure gauges. Thermometer. Valves. Strainers. PART TWO - PRODUCTS/MATERIALS/EQUIPMENT 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Materials for piping systems shall be in accordance with the following, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Intended service is listed below description of material. 1. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) piping: PVC Pressure Pipe schedule 40, rated at 160 psi minimum, conforming to the requirements of ASTM D-1785, Schedule 40: Equipment and cooling coil drain. 2. Schedule 40 black steel pipe with black 150 pound class cast iron screw fitting 2 inches and smaller, ASTM A-120, ASA B 16.19, ASA B16.9. - Chilled water 2" and smaller. 3. Schedule 40 black steel pipe 125 pound class with 150 pound class flanged ends conforming to ANSI B16.1. Provide elastomeric gaskets, sizes 4" and larger. Chilled water 2 1/2" and over. 4. Type L hard copper tubing with wrought copper silver solder full socket fittings ASTM A 40.3. PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15100-2 GATO BUILDING Condenser make-up water 2" and under. 2.2 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. 2" and Smaller: ASTM A197/ANSI B16.3, malleable iron unions, with brass seats. Use black malleable iron on black steel piping, and galvanized malleable iron on galvanized steel piping. Use unions of a pressure class equal to, or higher than, specified for the fittings of the respective piping service. B 2-1/2" and Larger: ASTM A181 or A105, grade 1, hot forged steel flanges of threaded, welding neck, or slip- on pattern. Use raised face flanges, ANSI B16.5, for mating with other raised face flanges on equipment with flat ring or full face gaskets. Use flat flanges, ANSI B16.1, for mating with other flat face flanges on equipment with full face gaskets. C. Use material and pressure class compatible with that specified for valves piping specialties, and fittings of the respective piping service. Gasket material to be suitable for pressures and temperatures of the piping system. D. Unions shall be placed near each screwed or soldered type valve and all connections to equipment. Unions shall be so located that when the piece of equipment is valved off, it may be removed without removal of piping or hangers. 2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide all inserts, hangers, angles, channels and other structural members required to properly support all piping and accessories. All supports shall be made from structural beams, joists, columns, slabs or load bearing walls. B. Concrete inserts, preset type, shall be set with reinforcing rods placed through the insert anchor lugs or bars. Individual pipe and rod support shall be malleable iron lateral adjustment type with removal nut, B-Line Fig. B 3014, or approved equal. Continuous slotted inserts shall be malleable iron with formed steel anchors spaced throughout length of insert, B-Line B 3014N, or approved equal. C. Concrete inserts, after set type, shall be Star Self - drill Shields. PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15100-3 GATO BUILDING D. Steel beam clamps shall be adjustable type, with load support on centerline of beam, B-Line B 3050 or B 3054, or approved equal. E. For insulated pipe, hanger is to be sized for the pipe plus insulation outside diameter. Hangers sizes 3 inches and smaller shall be adjustable "J" hangers, B-Line Fig. B 3690, or approved equal. Pipe hangers sizes 4 inches through 8 inches shall be clevis hangers, B-Line Fig. 3108, or approved equal. Hangers larger than 8 inches shall be adjustable swivel roller hanger, B-Line B 3111, or approved equal. F. Pipe supports shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/ASME B31.1, Fed Spec FF-S-325, and ANSI/MSS SP-58. Pipe shall not be supported from other pipe. For concentrated loads, the allowable span shall be reduced proportionately. In addition, there shall be a pipe hanger within 3 feet of the end of each runout and within one (1) foot of each change in direction of the piping. G. Grouped parallel piping may be supported on trapeze hangers, selected to support five times the weight or thrust of piping without failure, B-Line, or approved equal. Pipe requiring roller hangers shall have adjustable socket roller, B-Line B 3114 or B 3120, or adjustable pipe roll stand, B-Line B 3126 mounted on trapeze. Submit detailed data and shop drawings for approval. H. Pipe hangers shall be at the following maximum spacing for horizontal steel pipe. Hangers are to be hung from support with rod size to fit hanger. PIPE SIZE ROD SIZE STEEL PIPE COPPER PIPE PVC PIPE (Inches) (Inches) (Feet) (Feet) (Feet) UP to 1" 3/8" 6 5 4 14 to 1h 3/8" 8 6 4 2 TO 3k 1/2" 10 8 5 4 to 5 5/8" 12 12 6 6 3/4" 12 15 7 8 to 12 7/8" 12 16 7 14 to 18 1" 12 16 7 2.4 VALVES PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15100-4 GATO BUILDING A. Metallic Valves: Provide valves at each point shown on the plans or specified. A specific manufacturer's name and model number is specified to fix standard quality, type, pressure and material. Valves of other manufacturers shown as equal on the standard's valve comparison chart may be used as approved equal. Gate valves: 2" and smaller - Crane No. 430 Larger than 2" - Crane No. 465 1/2 Globe valve: 2" and smaller - Crane No. 382P Check valve: 2" and smaller - Crane No. 34 Larger than 2" - Crane No. 373 Drain valve: Crane B105 3/4" with hose and outlet Manual air vent: Crane No. 700 1/4" Balancing cock: 2" and smaller - Nordstrom No. 114 Larger than 2" - Nordstrom No. 115 Hose bibb: Crane B-104 3/4" loose key with key Modulating Control B. Throttle/Shut-off/Check Valve: 1. Provide in the discharge piping of each pump, at a distance of not less than 5 pipe diameters from the discharge outlet, a Tyler Guston/Bacon Series 340 combination throttle, shut-off, check valve of size and type specified in the pump schedule or approved equal. Valve shall be non -slamming, spring closed, externally guided disk design which returns the disk to the seat before reversal of flow. Body shall be of ductile iron 1251 and all valve components shall be suitable for use with service conditions. Valve shall be designed to permit repacking under full line pressure. Valve shall have provisions for connecting a portable differential pressure meter. Couplings used shall be 150 1, flanged or grooved, rated at or above the system pressure. 2. Provide one portable readout meter to indicate pressure differential across system components. Meter shall be complete with 6" dial, bleed down valve for high and low side, 10'-0" connector hoses, shut-off and vent valve and carrying case. 3. Valves and meters shall be Guston/Bacon, Taco, Crane or approved equal. C. PVC Valves PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15100-5 GATO BUILDING 1. Valves shall be manufactured of the same PVC Type 1, Grade 1 molding compound as the fittings to assure compatibility. All ball valves shall have Teflon or EPT ball seals and Viton or EPT stem and body seals. Ball valves shall carry a pressure rating of 150 psi C.W.P. at 730F. 2. All Butterfly Valves 3" through 8" shall be wafer type single piece body design rated at 150 psi bubble tight shut off. Valve body shall be molded of PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) with disc molded of Polypropylene alternately, PVC. The shaft shall be 416 stainless steel and blow out proof. Liner and o-ring seals shall be EPDM (alternately, Viton or Nitrile). The liner shall have a V-notch retention design and an integrally molded flange face seal. Valves 3" through 6" shall have a plastic molded - lever assembly. As manufactured by Hayward Industrial Products, Inc. 3. All 10" and 12" butterfly valves shall be wafer type single piece body design rated to 150 psi at 70 F. Body shall be molded of Fiberloc Glass Fiber Reinforced PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride). The valve disc to be Type 1, Grade 1 PVC conforming to ASTM D-1784. Alternately, glass fiber reinforced PPL. The valve shaft shall be Type 416 stainless steel and be of blow out proof design. Elastomeric liner shall have an integrally molded flange face seal. Liner and seals to be EPDM (alternately Nitrile). _ Valves to be furnished with a manual gear box operator that direct mounts to the valve. Operator shall have torque output of 3500 inch pounds. Operator case to be of die cast aluminum and epoxy -- coated. As manufactured by Hayward Industrial Products, Inc. 4. PVC valves shall be Hayward or approved equal. 2.5 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Gauges shall be bourdon tube type with bronze movements, plexiglass cover, 4-1/2" diameter, cast aluminum case. Gauges to be furnished with pigtail or snubber end cock. Each gauge shall have a range such that normal operating pressure shall be approximately at half the range. Trerice, Marshalltown, or approved equal. 2.6 THERMOMETERS A. Thermometers shall be 9" V-cast type mercury filled, PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15100-6 GATO BUILDING plexiglass front, with separable wells, installed in such a position as to be readable from the floor. Extension neck shall be furnished for thermometers in insulated pipe. Thermometer stem length shall be such that at least 75% is in the moving fluid stream. Install thermometers with appropriate wells on the chilled water and condenser water supply and return lines to each new chiller. Thermometers should be mercury filled, glass type with a range of 0-100 deg. F for chilled water and 0-120 deg. F for condenser water. Thermometers shall be Trerice, Marshalltown 91302 1/2 or 91C302 1/2 or approved equal. 2.7 FLOW -TAPS A. Install two flowmeter flow -taps or stub -ins at each new chiller and on secondary chilled water loop. One stub -in shall be installed on the chilled water supply or return line. The other stub -in shall be installed on the condenser water supply or return line. Each stub -in shall consist of an 1 1/2 inch long, 1 1/2 inch diameter schedule 40 pipe welded to the required chiller piping. Attached to each stub -in shall be a threaded 1 1/2 inch full port ball valve (or approved equal) . Each stub -in shall be located at least 10 pipe diameters upstream of a pipe fitting and 5 diameters downstream of a fitting. There shall be at least three feet of clearance around the flow tap. 2.8 SUCTION DIFFUSER A. Provide suction diffusers at suction side of pumps. Suction diffusers shall also incorporate field removable stainless steel strainer and 3/4" gate valve blow downs with hose ends. Suction diffusers shall be Taco Model No. SD080080 or approved equal. 2.9 AIR VENTS A. Provide manual air vents of 150 pound rating on water piping systems. Air vents shall have brass body and shall be installed in easily accessible locations. Run 3/8" vent drain to nearest open drain. Crane, or approved equal. B. At all high points on water piping systems not otherwise vented, install 1/4" pet cocks for air vents. Cocks PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15100-7 GATO BUILDING shall be in accessible locations, with 1/4" soft copper pigtails to pipe connections if required. 2.10 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Screwed pipe threads shall be right hand, standard clean cut, full depth and tapering. All threaded joints shall be made tight without caulking or the use of lead or paint. B. Grooved end pipe shall be true and square, with groove cut to coupling manufacturer's standard tolerance. Coupling shall be made up tight as recommended by manufacturer. Suitable screwed or flanged -to -groove end adapters shall be provided for all equipment or accessory connections which are not grooved end. C. After cutting, all pipe shall be reamed out to full bore. Remove all foreign matter from inside of pipe before installing. D. Eccentric reducers shall be provided in all places where air or water pockets would otherwise occur. No bushings shall be used. E. Nipples shall in all cases be of the same material as the pipe with which they are used. Close nipples shall not be used where it is possible to avoid their use. F. Connections between copper and steel piping shall be made with dielectric connectors. G. Where connections to equipment or automatic valves are smaller than pipe sizes shown, reducing elbows or fittings shall be used at the connection only. All stop valves, strainers, flexible connections, etc., shall be of pipe sizes shown. 2.11 SLEEVES A. All pipes that pass through walls, partitions, ceilings, or floors shall pass through sleeves of schedule 40 black steel pipe. Sleeves for insulated pipe shall be of sufficient size to permit insulation to pass through. Sleeves through floor on exposed risers shall be flush with the ceiling and with planed square ends extending 1 inch above the floor. B. Where pipes pass through roof. They shall be provided PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15100-8 GATO BUILDING with flashing, bonded to pipe. Flashings shall be Stoneman, or approved equal. 2.12 ESCUTCHEONS A. In the finished portions of building where pipes pass through wall partitions or floors, provide chromium plated cast brass adjustable floor or ceiling plates, securely fastened to the pipe. Plates will not be required where piping is concealed. 2.13 PIPE MARKING A. All pipes shall be code banded near each valve, branch take -off from the main, and not less than every 15'-0" on long exposed runs. Code banding shall conform to ASA Standard No. A-13 "Identification of Piping Systems", with descriptive name of material in pipe superimposed on the color band. Directional arrows of same color shall also be used to denote direction of flow. S. M. Brady Co. self -stocking, all temperature pipe markers. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install piping and piping components to ensure proper and efficient operation of the equipment and controls and in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide proper supports for the mounting of vibration isolators, stands, guides, anchors, clamps and brackets. Arrange piping connections to equipment so that removal of equipment or components of equipment including tube withdrawal from chillers, pump casing, shaft seals and similar work can be accomplished with the least amount of disassembly or removal of the piping system. Provide piping connected to equipment with vibration isolators with flexible connections which shall conform to vibration and sound isolation requirements for the system. Electric isolation shall be provided between dissimilar metals to reduce the rate of galvanic corrosion. B. Water Piping: ANSI B31.9. 3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS A. Cut to the measurements established at the site and work into place without springing or forcing. Install piping PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15100-9 GATO BUILDING with line flexibility included to absorb the expansion and contraction due to temperature changes of the piping systems. B. Flanged Joints: Faced true, square, tight and used as indicated and where necessary for normal maintenance. Mate with valves and the various equipment connections. Remove the raised faced when used with flanges having a flat face. C. Reducing Fittings: Use to connect changes of sizes in piping lines. Make branch connections with tees except that factory -made -forged -steel welding branch outlets or nozzles having integral reinforcements and conforming to ANSI B31.9 may be used if the nominal diameter of the piping system branch does not exceed one nominal pipe size less than the nominal size of the piping segment containing the fitting. D. Insulation: Piping insulation shall be in accordance with Section 15250, Insulation of Mechanical Systems, with enough clearance allowed between pipes to permit application of the insulation. E. Dielectric Unions or Flanges: Provide between ferrous and nonferrous piping, equipment, and fittings; except that bronze valves and fittings may be used without dielectric couplings for ferrous -to -ferrous or nonferrous -to -nonferrous connections. Flanges and unions shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B16.10. F. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Design and fabrication of pipe hangers, supports, and welding attachments shall conform to guidelines outlined in Section 2 of this specification. Hanger types and supports for bare and covered pipes shall be of sufficient size and configuration to adequately support pipe and also allow for expansion and contraction. 3.3 CHILLED WATER A. Fabrication and Assembly of Piping and Components: Welding, heating, and soldering shall conform to ANSI _ B31.9 and as specified herein. Horizontal runs of piping shall slope toward water chiller at not less than one inch in twenty feet. Provide sufficient pitch to assure _ adequate drainage and venting. Drain valves at low points of piping system, and automatic air vent valves at high points where air pockets would occur. All piping _ PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15100-10 GATO BUILDING shall follow the general arrangement shown, cut accurately to measurements established for the work by the Contractor, and worked into place without springing or forcing, except where cold -springing is indicated. All piping and equipment within buildings shall be entirely out of the way of electrical conduit, lighting fixtures, equipment and doors, windows, and other openings. Run overhead piping in buildings in the most inconspicuous positions. Provide adequate clearance from walls, ceilings, and floors to permit the welding of joints; at least 6 inches for pipe sizes 4 inches and less, 10 inches for pipe sizes over 4 inches, and in corners provide sufficient clearance to permit the welder to work between the pipe and one wall. Provide for expansion and contraction of pipe lines. Make changes in size of water lines with reducing fittings. Do not conceal, or insulate piping until inspected, tested, and approved. Protect materials and equipment from the weather. Run all pipe to be insulated as shown and as required with sufficient clearance to permit application of insulation. Do not miter pipe to form elbows, or notch straight runs to form full-size tees, or utilize any similar construction. Except where shown otherwise, run vertical piping plumb and straight and parallel to walls. Thoroughly clean each section of piping, fittings, and valves to be free of all foreign matter before erection. Prior to erection, hold each piece of pipe in an inclined position and thoroughly tap to loosen sand, mill scale, and foreign matter. Before all final connections are made to apparatus, wash the interior of all piping thoroughly with water. Blow out piping with high pressure steam or compressed air to remove rust scale, oil, and debris. Plug or cap open ends of mains during all shutdown periods. Do not leave lines open at any place where foreign matter might accidentally enter. B. Strainers or Suction Diffusers with Strainers: Provide strainers or suction diffusers with strainers in chilled water and condenser water lines to protect orifices, automatic valves, pump and compressor from foreign materials. Locate strainers or suction diffusers with strainers closest to equipment to be protected. Install strainers or suction diffusers with strainers with screen drum and in the direction of flow, as marked on the strainer body. Strainers or suction diffusers with strainers at pumps shall have gauge connections both upstream and downstream of the strainer or suction diffusers with strainers to indicate increased pressure drop and the need to clean strainer or suction diffusers with strainers screen. Strainers shall have isolating PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15100-11 GATO BUILDING service valves to permit servicing the strainer with minimum loss of fluid. Provide clearance for removal and replacing of strainer screens. The strainers shall have screens of ample net free area and be composed of materials which shall be compatible with the fluid being used. Use reducer fittings for changes in pipeline sizes and strainer connection sizes. Provide a pressure gauge with valved connection to inlet and outlet sides of strainer for determining pressure drop through the strainer, for indicating the need for cleaning. C. Shell and Tube Vessels and Clearance: Provide shutoff valves in water lines to vessels to permit servicing without draining the system. Locate valves so as not to - interfere with head removal. Where water boxes are provided, water piping connections may be made directly to covers. Provide piping with mechanical piping - connections adjacent to covers, and water shutoff valves located so as not to interfere with tube cleaning or pulling operations after pipe sections have been removed. Maintain working space for removal of heads, and on one end of vessel provide a clear space at least equal to the overall length, breadth, and depth of the tube bundle for tube removal. A door openings, window, or wall opening, may be utilized for this purpose. D. Pumps: Support, anchor and guide so that no strains are -- imposed on pump by weight or thermal movement of the piping. Provide air vent valve on pump casing. Pipe drain outlets on pump bases to nearest floor or other _ acceptable drains, with necessary clean -out tees. Provide pigtails or pet cocks for pressure gauges on suction and discharge for water balancing measurements. E. Valves: Install at equipment to allow maintenance or isolation, and to establish proper and sequential operation of the complete system. Shell and tube liquid - coolers shall have fluid valves installed so that tubes are accessible for cleaning or replacing. Provide globe valves or plug cocks where required to regulate flow to _ obtain equal distribution of the gas or fluid handled. Remove valve bonnets, where valve construction permits removal, when connecting valves by brazing to copper tubing. Install globe and angle valves with stems - horizontal where necessary to avoid trapping of fluid. F. Air Vent Valves: Provide at high points in water piping - and at water coils and water heat exchangers. Isolate valves and pipe to run off into the nearest floor drain. PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15100-12 GATO BUILDING G. Automatic Flow Control Valve: Automatic flow control valves may be installed in lieu of balancing valves and associated flow meter, orifice, or venturi pitot tubes, as indicated or specified for constant flow application. If necessary, increase the system pump head to obtain the proper operating differential between body trappings for control of maximum flow; minimum allowance 2 psi, maximum allowance 3 psi. Verify correct flow by establishing that the operating pressure differential across the valve tappings is within the tag range. The pressure measuring apparatus shall be portable and consist of a carrying case, instructions, hoses and connections, and a push- button, three-way valve which transmits either of two pressures to a pressure gauge. The pressure gauge shall have a 4 1/2-inch minimum diameter dial calibrated in increments of one psi or less, and shall have a range of minus 14.7 psig to plus 150 psig. Provide a higher pressure range gauge where system service pressure exceeds 125 psig. Where the flow rate pressure differential is marginal or deficient, use a portable flowmeter to verify flow rate, when requested by the Contracting Officer. H. Thermometers: Provide thermometers and thermal sensing elements of control valves with a separate socket. Install separable sockets in pipe lines in such a manner to sense the temperature of the flowing fluid and minimize obstruction to flow. I. Painting: Exterior condenser water piping to be painted with UV resistant paint in accordance with Painting Specifications, Section 15000. 3.4 CHILLED WATER LOOP PIPING A. Underground pre -insulated chilled water piping shall be PVC solvent welded and installed as outlined below and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 1. A four (4) inch layer of sand or fine gravel shall be placed and tamped in the trench to provide uniform bedding for the pipe. 2. Immediately after installation in the ditch, a partial backfill shall be made leaving joints exposed. 3. The carrier (internal) pipe shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 psig for a period of PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15100-13 GATO BUILDING four ( 4 ) hours. 4. After hydrostatic test, the joints shall be field insulated and protected in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The installed shall seal the field joint area. 5. Upon completion of the field joints, a final backf ill of selected earth shall be hand placed and hand tamped in four (4) inch layers to twelve (12) inches minimum over the top of the jacket. At which the backfill operation can be competed by any convenient means as approved by manufacturer. B. The services of a factory -trained field service representative shall be required. 3.5 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING A. Make-up Water Piping: Provide make-up water piping to water lever control assembly of cooling towers, expansion tanks. Protect potable water system at cross -connection to make-up water piping by a backflow preventer. B. Drain and Overflow Piping: Provide drain and overflow piping for cooling towers. Connect drain piping to area drain system. 3.6 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Motor starters shall be provided complete with properly sized thermal overload protection and other appurtenances necessary for the motor control specified. Interlock chilled water pumps and condenser water pumps with the holding coils of the refrigeration compressor motor starters. 3.7 CLEANING OF SYSTEMS A. When installations of the various components of the piping systems are completed, clean before final closing. Clean all piping and components of scale and thoroughly flush out all foreign matter. provide temporary bypasses for all water coils to prevent flushing water from passing through coils. Clean all strainers and valves thoroughly. Wipe equipment clean, removing all traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots. Maintain the system in this clean condition until final approval. Clean and paint piping and equipment. PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15100-14 GATO BUILDING B. Safety Procedure: Ventilate work area, avoiding skin contact by using solvent resistant gloves. Observe precautions and warnings on the manufacturer's product labels. 3.8 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING A. MIL-STD-101; except that plastic, slip-on labels or tapes with pressure -sensitive adhesive conforming to Fed. Spec. A-A-1689 may be used in lieu of painting or stencilling. Spacing of identification marking on runs shall not exceed 50 feet. Tag equipment, gauges, thermometers, valves, and controllers with tags of brass or approvable nonferrous material and securely mount or attach. 3.9 FIELD TESTS A. After completion of the piping, installation and prior to initial operation, conduct tests on the piping system. Furnish materials and equipment required for tests. Correct defects disclosed by the test. Perform test after installation and prior to acceptance in the presence of the Contracting Officer and subject to his approval. B. Water Piping: Hydrostatically test in accordance with the requirements of ANSI B31.9. Test piping system at one and one-half times system pressure but at.least 100 psig with water not exceeding 100 degrees F. Before tests, remove or isolate gauges, traps, and other apparatus in the new system and existing piping system which may be damaged. Repair leaks tightening, rewelding joints, or renewing pipe or fittings. Do not calk joints. Install a calibrated, test pressure gauge in the system to observe loss in pressure. Maintain the required test pressure for a sufficient amount of time to enable an inspection of joints and connections. Correct defects disclosed by the test. 3.10 STARTUP AND OPERATIONAL TESTS A. Start up and initially operate the chilled water system. During this time, periodically clean the various strainers until no further accumulation of foreign material occurs. Adjust safety and automatic control instruments as necessary to place them in required operation and sequence. ***END OF SECTION*** PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15100-15 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15120 - PIPING SPECIALTIES PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. All work specified in this section shall comply with the provisions of Section 15010. B. The Contractor shall provide equipment, material, and/or labor to install the following: 1. Expansion tank. 2. Air separator. 3. Suction diffuser. 4. P.T. test plugs. 5. Pressure test kit. 6. Pressure gauges. 7. Thermometers. 8. Thermometers test wells. 9. Hydronic pressure reducing valves. 10.. Relief valves. 11. Flow balancing valve. 12. Strainers. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 and Division 7 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods and other Division 15 sections apply to work of this section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit products to Architect/Engineer for approval. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S A. Bell and Gossett ITT B. Patterson -Kelley C. Taco, Inc. D. Thrush E. Peterson Engineering Company F. Moeller PIPING SPECIALITIES 15120-1 GATO BUILDING G. Gerand H. Armstrong I. Dieterich J. Savco K. Hoffman L. Sisco M. Sarco 2.2 EQUIPMENT Standard Corporation A. Expansion Tank 1. Furnish and install as shown on plans a precharged steel expansion tank with replaceable heavy duty Butyl rubber bladder. The tank shall have a 1 1/2 NPT system connection, 3/4" NPT drain, and a .302"-32 charging valve connection (standard tire valve) to facilitate the on -site charging of the tank to meet system requirements. Tank shall be ITT Bell& Gossett Model No. B1400 or approved equal. 2. Tanks to be constructed of carbon steel in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 3. Tank to be constructed and stamped for working pressure of 125 psi. 4. Stamp tanks with ASME "U" symbol and furnish with Form U-1 denoting compliance with ASME Unfired Pressure Vessel Code. 5. Provide tanks with lifting ring. B. Air Separator 1. Furnish and install, as shown on plans, a centrifugal type air separator. The unit shall have 10" (NPT/flanged/grooved) inlet and outlet connections tangential to the vessel shell. Vessel shell diameter to be three times the nominal inlet/outlet pipe diameter. 2. The unit shall have an integral stainless steel air collector tube with 5/32" diameter perforations and 63% open area designed to direct accumulated air to the compression tank via an NPT vent connection at top of unit. 3. The unit shall have a removable galvanized steel system strainer with 3/16" diameter perforations and a free area of not less than five times the cross -sectional area of the connecting pipe. A blowdown connection shall be provided to facilitate routine cleaning of the strainer. 4. Manufacturer to furnish data sheet specifying air collection efficiency and pressure drop at rated PIPING SPECIALITIES 15120-2 GATO BUILDING f low. 5. The air separator must be desi�ned, constructed and stamped for 125 psig @ 350 F in accordance with Section VIII, Division I of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, and registered with the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors. The air separator(s) shall be painted with one shop coat of light gray air dry enamel. 6. A manufacturer's Data Report for Pressure Vessels, Form U-1 as required by the provisions of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code shall be furnished for each air separator upon request. 7. Each air separator shall be equal to ITT Bell & Gossett Model NO. R-10 Rolairtrol Air Separator for 1500 GPM. C. Suction Diffuser 1. Provide at each end suction pump a suction diffuser with integral strainer of size and type noted on the drawings. 2. Unit to consist of cast iron, angle type body with steel inlet vanes and combination diffuser - strainer -orifice cylinder with 3/16" diameter openings for pump protection. 3. Locate permanent magnet within the flow stream and make removable for cleaning. 4. Equip orifice cylinder with a disposable, fine mesh strainer which shall be removed after system start-up. 5. Design orifice cylinder to withstand pressure differential equal to pump shutoff head and have a free area equal to five times cross -sectional area of pump suction opening. 6. Vane length to be not less than 2-1/2 times the pump connection diameter. D. P.T. Test Plugs 1. Provide 1/4" solid brass pressure/temperature test plugs at locations shown on drawings. 2. N2 Nordel self -closing valve to be rated for 275 degrees F. service. E. Pressure Test Kit 1. Provide owner complete portable pressure and temperature test kit. 2. Kit to be complete with pressure test gauge, necessary connector hoses, temperature test thermometer with adapter, shutoff and vent valves and carrying case. PIPING SPECIALITIES 15120-3 GATO BUILDING F. Pressure Gauges - Water 1. Provide 3-1/2" dial gauges where shown on drawings. 2. Gauges to be equal to Marsh "Quality Gauge" with recalibrator integral including copper -clad steel or cast-iron and chrome plated steel ring. 3. Accuracy to be guaranteed with 2% of scale range. 4. Select scale range of gauges to indicate design pressure at midpoint of scale. 5. Gauges to be Marsh Type 1 or approved equal. 6. Gauge cocks for each gauge to be Crane No. 712 or equal 1/4" size. 7. Provide each gauge with impulse dampener equal to Trerice 870. G. Thermometers and Wells 1. Provide 9" scale thermometers, adjustable angle (rear, front and side), with separable brass wells at locations shown on drawings. 2. Provide Moeller 3158 or equal stainless steel thermometer test wells at locations shown on drawings. 3. Test wells to be stainless steel with 2-1/2" extension neck and screw plug capped with chain and shall be filled with light clear oil. H. Hydronic System Pressure Reducing Valves 1. Each reducing valve to be equipped with antisyphon check valve and removable strainer. _ 2. Select reducing valve for operation at midpoint of adjustment range. 3. Pressure reducing valve to be factory set with adjustable range for final system operating { pressure adjustment at job site. I. Relief Valves 1. Provide relief valves for each hydronic system as shown on drawings. 2. Construct valve to ASME requirements, tested by _ National Board, and labeled with ASME symbol. 3. Valve body to be of non-ferrous construction. 4. Valves to be diaphragm type operating with slow opening and closing feature. - 5. Valve to seat against face of EPDM rubber. 6. Set differential between opening and closing pressure to prevent water flash and water hammer. - 7. Unit to include manual level for testing valve. J. Flow Balancing Valve PIPING SPECIALITIES 15120-4 GATO BUILDING 1. To be calibrated non-ferrous valve with provisions for connecting a portable differential pressure meter for flow measurement and balance. 2. Meter connections to have built-in check valves. 3. Integral pointer to register degree of valve opening with tamper proof memory feature. 4. Valve to have drain connection. 5. Construct valve with integral sieves to prevent leakage around rotating element. K. Pipe Escutcheons: 1. General: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings; and pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas. Where sleeves extend above floor finish, provide units with sufficient depth to conceal sleeve. 2. Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water and condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide cast brass or sheet brass escutcheons, solid or split hinged. 3. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged. L. Dielectric Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated, which effectively isolate ferrous from -non- ferrous piping (electrical conductance), prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion. M. Vandal -Proof Vent Caps: Provide cast-iron vandal -proof vent caps, full size of vent pipe, calked base connection for cast-iron pipes, threaded base for steel pipes. N. Drip Pans: Provide drip pans fabricated from corrosion -resistant sheet metal with watertight joints, and with edged turned up 2-1/211. Reinforce top, either by structural angles or by rolling top over 1/4" steel rod. Provide hole, gasket, and flange at low point for watertight joint and I" drain line connection. O. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: 1. Steel -Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized PIPING SPECIALITIES 15120-5 GATO BUILDING steel pipe; remove burrs. 2. Iron -Pipe: Fabricate from cast-iron or ductile - iron pipe; remove burrs. 3. Plastic -Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs. P. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves of one of the following: 1. RTV Silicone Foam: Calked between sleeve and pipe. 2. Lead and Oakum: Calked between sleeve and pipe if below grade in exterior wall. 3. Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped ton continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. Q. Provide bellows type water hammer arresters, stainless steel casing and bellows, pressure rated for 250 psi, tested and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201. R. Low Pressure Y-Type Pipeline Strainers: 1. General: Comply with Fluid Control Institute Standard 73-1. Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping system materials. Select strainers for 125 psi working pressure. 2. Screens for Water Service 2" and Smaller: Monel or Type 304 stainless steel, 20 mesh or 1/32" openings. 3. Screens for Water Service, 2-1/2" through 411: Perforated brass, 1/16" openings. 4. Screens for Water Service, 5" and larger: Perforated brass, 1/8" openings. 5. Screens for Steam Service, 2" and smaller: Monel or Type 304 stainless steel, 30 mesh or 1/50" openings. 6. Screens for Water Service, 2-1/2" through loll: Perforated brass, 3/64" openings. 7. Threaded Ends, 2" and Smaller: Cast-iron, screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 8. Threaded Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron, bolted screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 9. Flanged Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron, PIPING SPECIALITIES 15120-6 GATO BUILDING bolted screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 10. Butt Welded Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Schedule 40 cast carbon steel body, bolted screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted with pipe plug. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 3.2 THERMOMETERS A. Locate thermometers and pressure gauges no higher than 7'-0" above finished floor elevation. 3.3 CONTROL SYSTEM CONNECTORS A. Weld 1" steel half coupling Crane No. 386 or equal, or insert 1" female pipe thread connection at all points shown on drawings and at other necessary points for installation of thermometers and automatic controls. 3.6 RELIEF VALVES A. Route and terminate vent lines from relief valves to the outdoors. B. Provide drip -pan elbow at each valve with drain connection routed to the nearest floor drain. C. Where several relief valve vents connect to a single vent header, vent header cross section area to be equal to the sum of individual vent outlet areas. 3.7 PIPE ESCUTCHEONS A. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining surface. 3.8 Y-TYPE STRAINERS A. Install Y-type strainers full size of pipeline, in accordance with manufacturer's installation PIPING SPECIALITIES 15120-7 GATO BUILDING instructions. Install pipe nipple and shutoff valve in stainer blow down connection, full size of connection, except for strainers 2" and smaller installed ahead of control valves feeding individual terminals. Where indicated, provide drain line from shutoff valve to plumbing drain, full size to blow down connection. 1. Locate Y-type strainers in supply line ahead of the following equipment, and elsewhere as indicated, if integral strainer is not included in equipment: a) Pumps, except those furnished with suction diffusers. b) Steam traps serving steam main drips. c) Temperature control valves. d) Pressure reducing valves. e) Temperature or pressure regulating valves. 3.9 VANDAL -PROOF VENT CAPS A. Install vandal -proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof, and elsewhere as indicated. Locate base of vent cap 6" above roof surface, or higher where required by Code. 3.10 DIELECTRIC UNIONS A. Install at each piping joint between ferrous and non- ferrous piping. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.11 DRIP PANS A. Locate drip pans under piping passing over or within 3' horizontally of electrical equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Hang from structure with rods and building attachments, weld rods to sides of drip pan. Brace to prevent sagging or swaying. Connect 1" drain line to drain connection, and run to nearest plumbing drain or elsewhere as indicated. 3.12 SLEEVES A. Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect/Engineer. Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less PIPING SPECIALITIES 15120-8 GATO BUILDING than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Where insulation includes vapor -barrier jacket, provide sleeve with sufficient clearance for installation. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, and finish flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1/4" above level floor finish, and 1" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves. 1. Install sheet -metal sleeves at interior partitions and ceilings other than suspended ceilings. 2. Install iron -pipe sleeves at exterior penetrations, both above and below grade. 3. Install steel -pipe or plastic -pipe sleeves except as otherwise indicated. 3.13 SLEEVE SEALS A. Install in accordance with the following: 1.: Lead and Oakum: Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe with oakum, calk with lead, on both sides. 2. RTV Silicone Foam: Follow manufacturer's written instructions; mix equal parts of the two liquid components; dispense into properly formed and dammed annular space between pipe and sleeve. Allow time for seal to cure before removing damming forms. ***END OF SECTION*** PIPING SPECIALITIES 15120-9 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Materials and installation for identification of mechanical systems and components. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of identification devices of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years. B. Codes and Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices, unless otherwise indicated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical product data and installation instructions for each identification mat rial and device required. B. Samples: Submit samples of each color, lettering style and other graphic representation required for each identification material or system. C. Schedules: Submit Valve Schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system. system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses by special "flags" in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 15 sections. Where more than a single type is specified for application, provide single selection for each product category. B. Manufacturer: Allen Systems, Inc. Brady (W.H.) Company, Signmark Division. Industrial Safety Supply Company, Inc. MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190-1 GATO BUILDING Seton Name Plate Corporation. 2.2 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS A. Provide one of the following: 1. Snap -on Type: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, -- semi-rigid snap -on, color -coded pipe markers. 2. Pressure -Sensitive Type: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent adhesive, color -coded, pressure -sensitive vinyl pipe markers. B. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6 inch (including insulation, if any), provide full -band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods: 1. Snap -on application of pretensioned semi -rigid plastic pipe marker. 2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. _ 3. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). 4. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color -coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4 inch wide; -- full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2 inches. C. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6 inch and larger (including insulation, if any), provide either full -band or strip -type pipe markers, but not narrower than three times letter height (and of required length) , fastened by one of the following methods: 1. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). 2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color -coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2 inches wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3 inches. 3. Strapped -to -pipe (or insulation) application of semi -rigid type, with manufacturer's standard stainless steel bands. D. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled or shown, and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. E. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190-2 GATO BUILDING separate unit of plastic. 2.3 PLASTIC DUCT MARKERS A. General: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color -coded duct markers. Supply separate color codes for supply, exhaust, outside, and return air. B. Nomenclature: Include the following: 1. Direction of air flow. 2. Duct service (supply, return, exhaust, outdoor air) 3. Duct origin (from AHU, Fan or Room No.). 4. Duct destination (to Room, AHU or Fan No.). 5. Design cfm. 2.4 VALVE TAGS A. Brass Valve Tags: Polished brass valve tags with stamp -engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4 inch high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2 inch high, and with hole for fastener. 1-1/2 inch diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated. B. Valve Tag Fasteners: Solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks. C. Access Panel Markers: Manufacturer's standard 1/16 inch thick engraved plastic laminate access panel markers, with abbreviations and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Include center hole to allow attachment. 2.5 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES A. General: For each page of Valve Schedule, provide glazed display frame with removable mounting as appropriate for wall construction upon which frame is to be mounted. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass. 2.6 ENGRAVED PLASTIC -LAMINATE SIGNS A. General: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, Federal Specification L-P-387, in the size and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color), punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. B. Thickness: 1/16 inch for units up to 20 square inches or MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190-3 GATO BUILDING 8 inch length; 1/8 inch for larger units. C. Fasteners: Self -tapping stainless steel screws, except contact -type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate. 2.7 PLASTIC EQUIPMENT MARKERS A. General: Manufacturer's standard laminate plastic. Color -coded equipment markers. Conform to the following color code: 1. Green: Cooling equipment and components. 2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components. B. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching technology on schedules as closely as possible: 1. Name and plan number. 2. Design capacity. 3. Other design parameters such as pressure drop. water _ entering and leaving conditions, etc. C. Size: Provide approximate 2-112 inch by 4 inch markers for control devices, dampers, and valves; and 4-1/2 inch by 5 inch for equipment. 2.8 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification work with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. B. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as service (as examples: Chiller No. 3, Air Handling Unit No. 42, Standpipe F12, etc.). PART THREE - EXECUTION -- 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to — surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190-4 GATO BUILDING mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. 3.2 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION A. General: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, and intake ductwork with duct markers, showing ductwork service and direction of flow, in black or white (whichever provides most contrast with duckwork identification color). B. Location: In each space where ductwork is exposed, or concealed only by removable ceiling system, locate signs near points where ductwork originates or continues into concealed enclosures (shaft, underground or similar concealment), and at 50 foot spacing along exposed runs. C. Access Doors: Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access door in ductwork and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and other maintenance and operating instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information. 3.3 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A. Install pipe markers on each system and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. B. Locate pipe markers and color bands wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels and plenums), and exterior non -concealed locations, in locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch, excluding short take -offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. 3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non -accessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50 feet along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25 feet in congested areas of piping and equipment, such as Mechanical Rooms. MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190-5 GATO BUILDING C. Paint pipe insulation and non -insulated pipe for color coding of mechanical systems in the Mechanical Rooms. Paint shall be solvent free, hospital grade paint, "break through" paint, or specifically approved by the owner. Paint related pumps, chiller condensers and evaporator, compressor tanks, air separators, valves, strainers. Suction diffusers, and any other piping related appurtenances associated to the systems in these areas. Provide separate colors for the following systems: Primary Chilled Water, Secondary Chilled Water, Condenser Water, Make-up and Potable Water, Drains, Compressed Air, Chemical Treatment Systems, Softened Water, Primary Hot Water, Secondary Hot Water, Steam. 3.4 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system. Exclude check valves, valves within factory fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture faucets, convenience and lawn -watering hose bibbs, shutoff valves at plumbing fixtures, and -- similar rough -in connections of end -use fixtures. List each tagged valve in Valve Schedule for each piping system. B. Install mounted valve Schedule [in each Mechanical Room] [as directed by the Engineer]. 3.5 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or — plastic equipment marker on or near each [major] item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the following general -- categories of equipment and, operational devices: Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets, Pumps, compressors, chillers, cooling towers and similar motor -driven units, Electric duct heaters, coils, and similar equipment, Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, Unitary HVAC equipment, Tanks and pressure vessels, Strainers, filters, water treatment systems and similar equipment. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device _ which has become visually blocked. B. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices, and glass MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190-6 GATO BUILDING frames of valve charts. ***END OF SECTION*** MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190-7 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15240 - VIBRATION ISOLATION PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide vibration materials and related items, and perform work as shown on drawings and as specified herein. B. Factory fabricated vibration isolators shall be sized by the vibration isolation supplier in consultation with equipment supplier. C. Deflection for spring isolators shall be selected in accordance with recommendations in the current issue of ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, unless noted otherwise on drawings. D. Installer is to be responsible for providing vibration isolators of appropriate sizes and weight loading to meet the specified deflection requirements, in accordance with instructions of manufacturer of vibration isolators. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data to Architect for approval as required by Section 15010. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Vibration isolators are to be the product of the following manufacturers or approved equal: 1. Consolidated Kinetics. 2. Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Peabody Noise Control. 4. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 5. Korfund Company. B. Manufacturer's representative is to instruct installer in proper installation procedures. 2.2 ISOLATION MATERIAL A. Fiberglass Pads and Shapes: Glass fibers of not more than 0.18 mil diameter which are bonded annealed and VIBRATION ISOLATION 15240-1 GATO BUILDING stabilized during the manufacturing process to achieve a natural frequency of not more than 12 Hertz. The natural frequency shall be constant over a wide operating load range and the stiffness shall increase proportionately with the load applied. Furnish in the thicknesses and shapes required for use in vibration isolation units. B. Neoprene Elastomer Pads and Shapes: Neoprene elastomers which are resistant to oils, acids and alkalis, and have a temperature range of 00 to 2000F. Pads and shapes shall be furnished of the manufacturer's standard hardness and shall be so designed as to provide features of shear and compression for isolation efficiency and protection against shock overload. Furnish in the thicknesses and shapes required for use in vibration isolation units. C. Steel Springs: Wound -steel compression springs of high strength, heat -treated, spring alloy steel with an outside diameter not less than 0.8 times the operating height; with lateral spring stiffness not less than the vertical stiffness; and designed to reach the solid height before exceeding the rated fatigue point of the steel. 2.3 ISOLATION SUPPORT UNITS A. Type 1 - Pads: Manufacturer's standard molded inorganic fiberglass coded to indicate load capacity. B. Type 2 - Isolator: Double deflection neoprene mounting. All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered to avoid corrosion. Top and bottom shall have no -skid friction ribs. Bolt holes shall be provided for those areas where bolting is required. C. Type 2 - Hanger: Steel housing with one-piece neoprene -in -shear isolation unit having all metallic surfaces covered to resist corrosion. Hanger shall be designed to carry 500% overload without failure. D. Type 3 - Isolator: Free-standing spring type isolator, laterally stable without housing. The spring shall be mounted between top and bottom loading plates and a 1/4" thick isolation pad shall be located between the bottom loading plate and the support. Isolator shall have leveling bolt that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. VIBRATION ISOLATION 15240-2 GATO BUILDING E. Type 3A - Hanger: Steel housing with laterally stable springs and load transfer plate. Hanger shall be designed to carry a 500% overload without failure. F. Type 3B - Hanger: Combination hanger incorporating a precompressed fiberglass or neoprene elastomer isolation pad in series with a steel spring, all encased in a welded steel bracket. Spring diameter and lower bracket hole shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 300 arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Hanger shall be designed to carry a 500% overload without failure. G. Type 4 - Isolator: Restrained free-standing spring type isolator with laterally stable springs and incorporating vertical limit stops to assure a constant operating height if the supported weight is removed, and to reduce movement due to wind loads. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operations and shall be isolated from the housing to prevent short- circuiting. 2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION BASE TYPES A. Type A - Base: Defined as the condition when a separate base is not used and the isolators are attached directly to the supported equipment. B. Type B - Base: Structural steel base or rails constructed of wide flange structural steel with depth equal to 10% of the longest span of the equipment but not less than 611. Bases shall have adjustable motor slide rails built-in where required by equipment. C. Type C - Base: Reinforced concrete inertia base. The structural steel frame shall be designed and supplied by the isolator manufacturer. Concrete shall be poured into the frame at the job site. The welded steel frame shall incorporate prelocated equipment anchor bolts, 1/2" diameter (Number 4) reinforcing bars on nominal 8" centers each way with both ends of each bar butt welded to the base framing. Provide height saving isolator support brackets, and anchor base frame to spring isolator units. The thickness of the base shall be a minimum of 7% of the longest span between isolators but not less than 6 inches deep. D. Type D - Base: Roof mounting curb, vibration control base consisting of extruded aluminum upper and lower members with cadmium plated steel spring isolator VIBRATION ISOLATION 15240-3 GATO BUILDING selected for 1" static deflection. Provide neoprene weather seal continuous between upper and lower base. 2.5 PIPING ISOLATION UNITS A. Type K - Flexible Neoprene Connectors: 1. Flexible neoprene connectors shall be used on equipment as indicated on the drawings or on the equipment schedule. They shall be manufactured of multiple plies of nylon tire cord fabric and neoprene both molded and cured in hydraulic rubber presses. No steel wire or rings shall be used as pressure reinforcement. Straight connectors shall have two spheres. Connectors up to and including 2" diameter may have threaded ends. Connectors 2- 1/2" and larger shall be manufactured with floating galvanized flanges recessed to lock the connector's raised face neoprene flanges. Connectors shall be rated a minimum of 150 psi at 220F. B. Type M - Acoustical Seal: 1. Where piping passes through equipment room walls, floors or ceilings, the vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide a split seal consisting of two bolted pipe halves with 3/4" or thicker neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Seals shall project a minimum of 1" past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 2400F, 101 density fiberglass _ may be used in lieu of the sponge. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS A. General: Comply with the minimum static deflections shown on the drawings or as recommended by the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, including the definitions of critical and non -critical locations, for the selection and application of vibration isolation of vibration isolation materials and units. B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's recommendations VIBRATION ISOLATION 15240-4 GATO BUILDING for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units. 3.2 APPLICATION A. General: Except as otherwise noted on the drawings or in the equipment schedules, apply the following types of vibration isolators at the indicated locations or for the indicated items of equipment. Selection is Contractor's option where more than one type is indicated. 1. Type 3 - Spring Isolators; Type A Base a) Air handling units b) Air compressors, tank mounted 2. Type 3 - Spring isolator; Type C Base a) Flexible coupled pump 3. Type 4 -Spring isolators; Type C Base a) Centrifugal water chillers 4. Type M - Acoustical pipe seal a) Piping passing through fan room walls 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for the installation and load application to all vibration isolation materials and units. B. Anchor and attach units to substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated. C. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where leveling devices cannot be used to distribute loading properly. D. Install inertia base frames on isolator units as indicated, so that a minimum of 2" clearance below base will result when frame is filled with concrete and supported equipment has been installed and loaded for operation. E. Locate isolation hangers as near the overhead support structure as possible. F. Acoustical wall seals: If the piping goes in before the walls, clamp the seal in place and pour the walls around the outside of the seal. If the walls are up VIBRATION ISOLATION 15240-5 GATO BUILDING first, drill or break the wall in the piping location; then clamp the seal on and back pack the concrete around the seal. ***END OF SECTION*** VIBRATION ISOLATION 15240-6 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL SYSTEM INSULATION PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Work required under this section consists of insulation for piping and equipment specified in Division 15. B. Contractor shall provide all necessary labor, materials, tools and equipment to perform work required on the drawings and specified herein. C. Certain equipment and/or systems to be factory insulated by manufacturer. Factory insulation materials to be as specified in applicable sections of the specifications. D. All pipe fittings, valves, and strainers to be insulated. E. Thermal resistance "R" values used herein are expressed in units of "Hour Degrees F. Sq. Ft./BTU per Inch of Thickness" on a flat surface at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F., unless specifically noted. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. "Exposed" equipment, ducts and piping are areas which will be visible without removing ceilings or opening access panels. B. Outdoors is considered exposed to the weather. C. Underground is buried, whereas in a formed concrete trench below grade or slab is considered concealed. 1.3 CERTIFICATION/QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products shall meet applicable national, model, state, and local building codes and be UL (or other recognized testing lab) listed for intended service. B. All insulation, adhesives, coatings, sealers, tapes, shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke development of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84, NFPA 225, UL 723, and further must meet the requirements of NFPA 90-A where applicable and model and local building, plumbing, and MECHANICAL SYSTEM INSULATION 15250-1 GATO BUILDING mechanical codes. C. All insulation materials shall be delivered and stored in manufacturer's containers and kept free from dirt, _ water, chemical, and mechanical damage. D. Insulation shall be applied in a workmanlike manner by experienced, qualified, workmen. E. Insulation shall not be applied until all pressure testing has been completed, inspected and released for insulation application. F. Surfaces shall be clean and dry. G. Insulation joints shall be butted firmly together and all jackets and tapes shall be smoothly and securely installed. H. Installation for duct, pipe, and equipment for above grade exposed to weather outside building shall be - certified as being self -extinguishing for 1" thickness in less than 53 seconds when tested in accordance with ASTM D1692. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit products to Engineer for approval in accordance with Section 15000. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS FOR PIPE AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials for Pipe and Equipment: Provide factory premolded or shop or site metered segment type insulation for pipe, pipe fittings, and valves. Fitting insulation to be of same thickness and material as adjoining pipe insulation. All insulation and related materials such as tape and mastic to meet national and model building code requirements for fire and smoke development. 1. Cellular Glass (Foamglas): a. Equivalent to Pittsburgh Corning "Foamglas". Product must comply with ASTM C 522 and be guaranteed by manufacturer to have an "R" value of 2.86 minimum. b. Mastic for application to pipe and for all MECHANICAL SYSTEM INSULATION 15250-2 GATO BUILDING 2. 3. C. butt joints shall be fire resistive pliable mastic equal to Foster CP-30. Use foamglas for the following services: 1. Underneath cooling coils on built-up units, 2" thick. 2. Exposed chilled water piping, 2" and less pipe, 1-1/2" thick, 2-1/2" and greater, 2" thick. 3. With saddles, instead of other piping insulation (Fiberglass, flexibular tubular elastomeric), to prevent crushing of insulation at hangers. 4. Piping passing through sleeves as specified in other Division 15 sections and part 3 hereof. Flexible Tubular Elastomeric: a. Provide fire -retardant closed -cell slip-on flexible type. Product to have continuous operational temperature limit of not less than 2200F. and a minimum "R" value of 2.57. Product to have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less as tested by ASTM E84-75. b. Product to be equivalent to Armstrong "AP Armaflex Pipe Insulation". C. Applicable products manufactured by Manville, Halstead or Rubatex are acceptable. d. Use flexible tubular elastomeric for the following services: 1. Moisture condensate drains - 1/2" thick. 2. Horizontal runs of waste lines carrying cold condensate from air conditioning equipment - 1/2" thick. 3. Refrigerant lines for kitchen freezer and cooler suction lines: 1-1/2 thick (2 layers each 3/4" thick). 4. Horizontal runs of roof rain leader - 1/2" thick (contractor option) including roof drain bodies. 5. Refrigerant piping between HVAC equipment - suction lines, 1-1/2" thick; hot gas lines, 2-1/2" thick. Flexible Sheet Elastomeric: a. Provide closed -cell flexible sheet type, MECHANICAL SYSTEM INSULATION 15250-3 GATO BUILDING 4. having a minimum "R" value of 3.57. b. Product to be "Armaflex AP" as manufactured by Armstrong, or equivalent by Manville, Halstead, or Rubatex. C. Use flexible sheet elastomeric insulation for the following services: 1. Centrifugal machine cooler, suction piping, and any chiller water pipe connection housings and other portions of the chiller which might sweat: 1- 1/2" thick (2 layers of 3/4" each). 2. Chilled water pump casings and flanges: 1" thick (2 layers of each). Glass Fiber: a. Provide factory -formed, fiberglass pipe insulated factory -jacketed "system: type conforming strictly to fire -resistive qualities specified in Section 1.3, and having a minimum "R" value of 4.0. b. Product to be equivalent to Manville "Micro- Lok 650". Applicable products manufactured by Certain Teed, Knauf or Owens Corning are acceptable. Jacket to be fiberglass reinforced kraft paper with aluminum foil. C. Use glass fiber insulation for the following services: 1. Heating hot water piping, 1" and under: 1" thick; 1-1/4" to 211: 1-1/2" thick; 211/2" and greater: 2" thick. 2. Hot condensate (steam) piping, 2" and under-1-1/2" thick; 2-1/2" and greater - 2" thick. 3. Steam piping to 30 psi (saturated), 2" and under-1-1/2" thick; 2-1/2" and greater - 2" thick. 4. Steam piping above 60 psi (saturated), 1" and under - 2" thick; 1-1/4" to 4" - 2-1/2" thick; 5" and over - 3" thick. 5. Steam converter, 2" thick. 6. Boiler trim including boiler feedwater lines and blowdown piping, and absorption steam generator and piping - 1-1/2" thick. 5. Semi -Rigid, High Temperature, Fiberglass Board Insulation: MECHANICAL SYSTEM INSULATION 15250-4 GATO BUILDING a. Provide noncombustible semi -rigid, high temperature, fiberglass board insulation, 500 F or greater snap on jacket as manufactured by Certain Teed. Insulation to be 3 lbs./Cu.Ft. density and to have a minimum "R" value of 2.63. Jacket to be aluminum or ASJ as set forth below. Equal products by Manville, Owens Corning, or Pittsburgh Corning are acceptable. b. Use for the following: 1. Steam supply piping from boiler outlet to main steam header, headers at boilers: 2-1/" thick-ASJ jacket. 2. OPTION: Deaerator tank: 2" thick cover with aluminum jacket (if not factory insulated). 3. Blowdown separator including vents and drain connections: 2" thick-ASJ jacket. 4. OPTION: Domestic hot water tanks: 2" thick cover with aluminum jacket (if not factory insulated). 6. Calcium Silicate Insulation: a. Provide non-combustible, dimensionally stable calcium silicate insulation, maximum density 11 pounds per cubic foot and having a minimum "R" value of 1.92 at 4500F. Products shall be as manufactured by Owens Corning, CertainTeed, Pittsburgh Corning, or Manville. b. Provide insulation of the following services: 1. Boiler breeching: 3" thickness. 2. Boiler stack within boiler room: 3" thickness. 3. Emergency generator exhaust piping and muffler: 3" thickness. C. Finish insulation with 1/2" coat of mineral wool insulating cement, allowed to dry. Apply 1/4" coat of insulating cement over with 8 oz. canvas is applied between coats of white lagging adhesive. 2.2 MATERIALS FOR DUCTS A. Blanket Type Duct Insulation: 1. Provide minimum 3/4 pound per cubic foot density, MECHANICAL SYSTEM INSULATION 15250-5 GATO BUILDING flexible, factory reinforced, foil faced. 2. Kraft vapor barrier glass fiber blanket insulation, having a minimum "R" value of 4.0. 3. Product to be standard duct wrap as manufactured by Manville, CertainTeed, Knauf, Owens Corning, or equivalent. 4. Insulation to conform strictly to fore -resistive qualities hereinbefore specified in "Certification" paragraph. 5. Use blanket type duct insulation for the following: a. Unlined conditioned supply ducts concealed from view, 1-1/2" thick. b. Make up air ductwork, 1-1/2" thick. C. Ductwork supplying outside air, 1-1/2" thick. B. Board Type Duct Insulation: 1. Provide minimum 3 pound per cubic foot density semi -rigid, factory reinforced foil faced Kraft vapor barrier glass fiber board "system" type insulation, having a minimum "R" value of 4.34. Product to be IB-300 as manufactured by CertainTeed or equivalent by Manville, Knauf, or Owens Corning. 2. Insulation to conform strictly to fire -resistive qualities hereinbefore specified in "Certification" paragraph. 3. Use board type duct insulation for the following services: a. Supply ducts within equipment rooms: 1-1/2" thick. b. Outside air ductwork and connections to mixing plenums of heating and ventilating units: 1-1/2" thick. C. Kitchen range hood exhaust ducts: 1-1/2" thick. (Only where required in horizontal runs by authority having jurisdiction to reduce clearance from combustible construction to less than 1811). C. Material for Noise Insulation: 1. Provide a dampening compound to reduce movement and noise generated by vibration of sheet metal. Compound to be noncombustible, have a smooth finish, be receptive to painting, and have a vibration decay rate of not less than 35 decibels MECHANICAL SYSTEM INSULATION 15250-6 GATO BUILDING per second. Compound to be equivalent to Korfund Dynamics Corporation "Vibradamper type 80". 2. Provide where shown on drawings. 2.3 MATERIALS FOR FITTINGS, VALVES, AND SPECIAL COVERINGS A. Provide coverings and finishes for specific items hereinafter specified. 1. Use premolded insulation fabricated by the supplier of insulation material being used on straight runs for: a. All pipe fittings, elbows, tees, butterfly valves, couplings. b. All grooved coupling installations. 2. PVC fitting covers over blanket fiberglass are NOT acceptable on fittings. B. For heat exchangers, large pipes, etc., in systems operating over 60OF when exposed -to -view inside building or in equipment rooms, cover insulation with a smoothing coat of Keane Powerhouse cement, one layer of white colored woven glass fabric embedded, and finished with Foster GPM mastic. C. For pipe fittings, valves, strainers, air separators and other irregular surfaces, in chilled water or refrigerant systems operating below 60OF when inside building or in equipment rooms, cover insulation with white colored woven glass fabric embedded in white vapor barrier coating, Foster 30-35 or equal. D. For any service when above grade exposed -to -the -weather outside building, cover straight pipe insulation with 0.016" thick aluminum jacket equivalent to Childers and cover fittings with factory formed covers equivalent to Elljacs. E. For any service, except for steam and/or steam condensate, when below grade direct buried, cover straight pipe and fitting insulation with equivalent of Pittsburgh Corning "Pittwrap" or "Pittcoat No. 300 with PC Fabric 79". Valves in systems operating above 60OF and installed in valve boxes shall not be insulated, however, the valves shall be painted with a rust - resistant product equivalent to Rustoleum. F. For flexible tubular elastomeric pipe and fitting insulation when exposed -to -view inside building or MECHANICAL SYSTEM INSULATION 15250-7 GATO BUILDING exposed to weather, finish with two coats of fire retardant self -extinguishing vinyl lacquer type highly flexible coating equivalent to Armstrong "Armaflex", custom color blended to match surrounding surfaces. G. For externally insulated sheet metal ducts when above grade exposed -to -the -weather outside building, cover duct insulation with glass mesh embedded and adhered to insulation using air drying weatherproof plastic fabricated cutback asphalt adhesive and finish with two coats of gray color flexible fire retardant protective coating having proven ability to withstand to wide range of temperature without cracking or crazing and be highly resistant to damage by bumping and abrasing, equivalent to Armstrong Cork Co. "Insucolor". PART THREE- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. No insulation shall be cut where a hanger is located. If hangers have been installed by pipe fitter tradesmen which violates this strict requirement of Owner, notify Owner's Representative immediately. B. Piping and duct systems shall be tested and found free of all leaks prior to installation of insulation covering. C. All surfaces shall be clean and dry when covering is applied. Covering to be dry when installed and before and during application of any finish, unless such finish required specifically a wetted surface for application. D. All adhesives, cements and mastics shall be compatible with materials applied and shall not attack materials in either wet or dry state. E. Install insulation using professional insulators who have adequate experience and ability. F. Exposed -to -view insulation shall have a well tailored appearance. G. See Section 15120 for sleeves and insulation requirements. Fiberglass pipe insulation shall not pass through fire rated partitions. Insulation shall stop at each side of partition. Install Foamglass insulation chilled water, reheat hot water, or in wall MECHANICAL SYSTEM INSULATION 15250-8 GATO BUILDING cavity, where lines pass thru rated partitions. H. Stop all duct coverings, including jacket and insulation, at fire dampered penetrations of walls, floors above grade and roofs. "Fan -Out" or extend jacketed insulation at least 2" beyond angle frames of fire dampers and secure to structure. Maintain vapor barrier. Where insulated access door is not used, install covering over damper access panel so as to be readily removable and identifiable. I. Stop all covering including jacket and insulation at all penetrations of rated firewall walls and smoke partitions. "Fan -Out" or extend jacketed insulation against walls and secure to wall. Seal airtight around duct penetrations of drywall, full circumference. Maintain vapor barrier. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCT AND EQUIPMENT COVERING A. Apply jacketed blanket type glass fiber covering to ducts pulled snug but not so tight as to compress corners more than 1/411. Use insulation having 2" tab, or cut insulation long enough to allow for "peel off" of insulation from jacket to effect a minimum overlap of 211. Staple lap with flare type staples on 2" centers. Cover standing seams, stiffeners, and braces with same insulation blanket, using 2" jacket lap and staple lap as hereinbefore outlined. Cover and seal all staples with Childers CP-30 reinforced with glass cloth. B. Secure jacket to covering using equivalent of Foster No. 85-20 or 85-75 adhesive. C. For duct 24" or wider, mechanically fasten insulation to duct bottom, using weld pins or nylon "stick -clip" base plates having self-locking, coating metal or nylon discs, locating fasteners on not over 12" centers laterally and longitudinally. Seal pins as above. D. For ducts up to 18" deep, mechanically fasten insulation to duct sides, using one row of pins, plates or discs located on not over 12" centers longitudinally and equidistant laterally between duct top and bottom. For ducts over 24" deep, apply fasteners as before only using minimum of two rows. E. Apply jacketed board type glass fiber covering to ducts using weld pins or nylon "stick -clip" base plates MECHANICAL SYSTEM INSULATION 15250-9 GATO BUILDING having self-locking coated metal or nylon discs; locate fasteners on not over 12" centers laterally and longitudinally. If insulation is grooved to fit around corners, in order to eliminate as many joints as possible, pin as required to hold insulation tight to duct, especially on bottom of duct. Seal pins and joints with Foster 30-56 reinforced with glass cloth. F. Cover all joints, rips, tears, punctures, disc head, staples, or breaks in vapor barrier jacket with 4" wide woven glass fabric tape embedded in equivalent of - Childers CP-30 vapor barrier fire resistant adhesive. PRESSURE SENSITIVE TAPE NOT ALLOWED. G. Prior to application of flexible sheet elastomeric insulation, thoroughly clean all metal surfaces, making sure that all dirt, scale, loose paint, plaster, and oil has been removed and that surfaces are dry. If surface has been primed, test a two square foot section using adhesive equivalent to Armstrong No. 520 in order to determine whether solvent in adhesive will loosen or — lift the primer. If primer is loosened, then remove it.' When testing proves acceptable, adhere insulation with smooth side out, using thin but adequate coating of same adhesive. Follow manufacturer's instructions. Coat all but edges of each sheet. Stagger all joints. Insulate all standing seams or flanges with same thickness of insulation material as that used on main surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND EQUIPMENT COVERING A. Where glass fiber or flexible tubular elastomeric insulation is used on piping sized 2" and larger, inset _ a section of Foamglass or calcium silicate insulation, at hanger or support points, between pipe and metal shield for full length of shield, to prevent crushing of insulation. Where insulation passes through pipe hangers and across trapeze supports, 12" long metal saddles shall be used. Insulation thickness to be same as adjoining glass fiber insulation. On cold pipe, vapor barrier should be carried through the hanger and sealed. Saddles shall be used where rigid (Foamglass) insets are not acceptable. B. Foamglas insulation shall be strictly applied as follows: _ 1. The inside full surface of the insulation and both the circumferential and longitudinal joints shall MECHANICAL SYSTEM INSULATION 15250-10 GATO BUILDING be buttered with fire -resistive pliable sealer. Voids and cracks shall be filled with sealer. Mastic shall be Foster CP-95-44 or equal. Insulation shall be secured with 3" wide aluminum bands on 8" centers. 2. The circumferential joints shall be staggered. 3. Fittings, valves, flanges, traps, and air vents shall be insulated with the same thickness of insulation using factory fabricated fitting sections or premolded insulated fittings. 4. Block type insulation shall be adhered by stick - clips or bands, in addition to the sealer, as required to provide support for the insulation. 5. Finish above furred ceiling and in chases shall be the bare insulation. 6. Finish in equipment rooms and elsewhere where exposed -to -view shall be white 8 oz. canvas, paintable jacket. 7. Finish where exposed -to -the -weather shall be .016 inch thick, Childers or equal, aluminum jacket on lines and Elljacs, or equal, preformed aluminum covering on fittings. 8. Finish on underground insulation shall be Pittsburgh Corning Pittwrap as recommended by manufacturer. C. Apply flexible tubular elastomeric insulation to pipe and fitting with all joints tightly fitted and sealed with adhesive. Longitudinally split insulation will not be acceptable unless specifically approved in writing by Owner or Engineer. D. Apply semi -rigid, high temperature, fiberglass board insulation as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Apply flexible high temperature blanket type in two steps. First, cover fitting with 1/2" thick matt only; then apply finished envelope containing 2" thick matt material. Secure envelope using stainless steel or monel bands, hooks, washers, and lacing. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PREMOLDED INSULATION (COUPLINGS, VALVES, ELBOWS, TEES, ETC.) A. Premolded fitting material (inserts) to be precisely cut or metered to fit or be tucked snugly into the throat of fitting and edges adjacent to pipe covering, tufted, tucked, taped, etc., to form a fully insulated pipe covering. Use adhesive and/or tape specified for type of insulation to insure a thorough vapor barrier. MECHANICAL SYSTEM INSULATION 15250-11 GATO BUILDING B. Tape or butt ends securely to adjacent pipe covering. Tape to extend over adjacent pipe insulation and have an overlap of at least 1-1/2" on both sides. **** END OF SECTION **** MECHANICAL SYSTEM INSULATION 15250-12 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING WORK, GENERAL PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Section 15050, Basic Materials and Methods applies to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. All plumbing work and specified associated work specified in other sections in Division 15 and shown on the drawings is governed by this section. Provide labor, service and materials necessary to provide the work as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Plumbing system shall be provided complete. B. Contractor is responsible for complying with all local, state and federal codes even if it means supplying, or installing different or additional equipment and materials, other than those specified in specifications or drawings. He is also responsible for obtaining and paying for all permits and fees related to this section. C. Any negotiations between Owner's representative and city, state, and federal private utilities over permits or fees is also the responsibility of the Contractor. D. Plumbing drawings are diagrammatic and locations of piping and/or equipment must be located in the field. Drawings are not to be scaled, see Architectural Plans for fixture locations or building sizes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturers product data for each plumbing item and material specified in Section 15400. B. If products other than those specified are approved, it is the Contractor's responsibility to see that the approved products will fit in the designated location and are compatible with related equipment. 1.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS PLUMBING WORK, GENERAL 15400-1 GATO BUILDING A. If plans call for verification of size, location, invert, — etc., it is the responsibility of the contractor to do so. If the contractor does not verify the existing condition and additional work or material is required because of not verifying existing conditions, the work and material shall be furnished at no additional expense to the Owner. _ PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS - A. Where multiple items of equipment or materials are required, they shall be the product of a single manufacturer, and shall be of the material specified for that particular system. B. No material other than the material specified in this section or shown on drawings shall be bid or installed without previous permission from the Owner. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Where drain and water connections that are necessary to the operation of fixture or equipment are not _ specifically indicated, extend necessary branches to the closest indicated branch or main. B. Each fixture, equipment drain or floor drain shall be — separately trapped unless otherwise indicated or specified. C. All fixtures, pipe and accessories shall be protected from damage. Cleanouts and floor drain openings shall be temporarily plugged with oakum or test plugs until final connections are made. D. Before installing pipe in any part of the system, the pipe shall be cleaned inside and made free of oil, dirt, and foreign matter. E. Properly align and install systems in a neat arrangement true to the lines of the building. Pitch line at a constant slope for proper drainage. When necessary to achieve this alignment, provide additional hangers or bracing. F. Except as noted otherwise on drawings, piping shall be PLUMBING WORK, GENERAL 15400-2 GATO BUILDING held as high as possible, tight under beams, with due regard to conflicts with other systems and their requirements for space. G. Apply lubricant to screw joint male threads. H. Metal to be soldered shall be cleaned and fluxed as suitable for solder use. ***END OF SECTION*** PLUMBING WORK, GENERAL 15400-3 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15401 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Section 15050, Basic Materials and Methods and 15400 Plumbing Work, General sections apply work of this section. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE SLEEVES A. Pipe sleeves shall be Schedule 40 black steel, PVC, or preformed polyethylene; provide for all pipes thru walls and floors. B. The annular space between pipes and sleeves or openings shall be filled with fire resistant material. 2.2 ESCUTCHEONS Escutcheons shall be provided for all piping thru walls, floors and ceiling where piping is exposed to view in finished areas. Escutcheons shall be chromium plated, two piece, hinged with set screw. 2.3 UNIONS A. Unions shall be ground joint brass unions or flanges; provide on each piping connection to equipment. B. Dielectric unions between copper and steel piping, copper and steel or cast iron equipment or other dissimilar metals. Unions shall be all brass EPCO. 2.4 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanouts on No -Hub pipe shall be bronze fittings with flush brass plugs. B. Cleanouts in wall or concrete floors: PVC fittings shall be installed in bronze cleanout box with bronze cover Wade W- 6030-X or approved equal. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15401-1 GATO BUILDING C. Cleanouts in stack bases in concealed locations: PVC fittings shall have stainless steel wall cover Wade 8640-SS or approved equal. 2.5 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS Arresters shall be Wade Shokstops for washers and flush ^ valves, or approved equal. 2.6 VENT FLASHING Vent flashing shall be a seamless lead roof flashing assemblies using 4 pound steel reinforced lead flashing and caulking collar. Stoneman 1100-2 or approved equal. _ ***END OF SECTION*** PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15401-2 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15402 - PLUMBING VALVES AND HOSE BIBBS PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Sections 15050, Basic Materials and Methods and 15400 Plumbing Work, General sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. All shut-off valves 2" and smaller above grade shall be full port ball valves with bronze body. Valves shall be in accordance with Fed. Spec. WW-V-1967. B. All valves 2 1/2" and larger or below grade shall be a non- rising stem bronze 125/200 non -shock FED. SPEC. WWY.58-B71 Type 1 Class A gate valve. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES A. 2-inch and smaller; 1. Screwed: Watts valve B-6800, or approved equal. 2. Solder Joint: Watts valve B-6801, or approved equal. B. 2-1/2 inch and larger or below grade: 1. Screwed: Hammond 1B645, or approved equal. 2. Solder Joint: Hammond 1B647, or approved equal. 2.2 HOSE BIBBS Shall be loose key semi -recessed hose bibb with 3/4" solder inlet, 3/4" hose outlet and vacuum breaker, Wade W-8630-89 or approved equal. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install valves where shown on drawings. PLUMBING VALVES AND HOSE BIBBS 15402-1 GATO BUILDING B. Install in accessible locations. C. Valves shall not be installed with the stems below the horizontal position. ***END OF SECTION*** PLUMBING VALVES AND HOSE BIBBS 15402-2 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15403 - PLUMBING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 15050 Basic Materials and Methods and 15400 Plumbing Work, General sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 GENERAL Provide hangers for all piping. Use hangers capable of adjustment. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for copper tubing shall be Michigan Hanger Company Model No. 102-A, or approved equal (where applicable). B. Hangers for PVC piping shall be as recommended by the manufacturer (where applicable). C. Trapeze hangers of a type approved by the Design Professional may be used where pipes are designated to run parallel and at same elevation. D. Provide insulation hanger with protective shield, Michigan Hanger Company, Model No. 103, or approved equal, for all insulated piping. E. Strap Hangers: Not permitted. F. Inserts: In concrete, Michigan Hanger Company, Model no. 355 or approved equal, having adjustment from 3/4 inch thru 1-1/4 inch. In metal decks, Redhead SD1 or approved equal, Powder Propelled permitted in new construction where type and location are approved prior to installation. In existing construction, Start Slugin No. 6800 series, or approved equal. G. Other Supports: Obtain Design Professional's approval for other methods of support. PLUMBING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15403-1 GATO BUILDING PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 SPACING OF HANGERS A. Provide hanger and each change of direction. B. Space hangers and supports to prevent sagging and reduce strain on valves and specialties with spacing no greater and rod not smaller than shown on the following table. Hangers shall allow for expansion and contraction. • C. PVC piping maximum spacing and rod size shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Copper Tubing: Diameter of pipe: Maximum Spacing Rod Size: _ 1/2" thru 1 1/2" 6 ft. 3/811 2" thru 3" 10 ft. 1/2" ***END OF SECTION*** PLUMBING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15403-2 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15404 - TESTING OF PLUMBING PIPING PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Sections 15050, Basic Materials and Methods, and 15400 Plumbing Work, General sections apply work of this section. 1.2 GENERAL A. Conduct all tests after piping is installed and before piping is concealed or covered. B. Provide all necessary temporary piping closures. C. Provide all testing equipment, materials and supplies. D. Systems shall remain under test of sufficient length of time to provide tightness thereof and for adequate observation by the Design Professional. E. Materials other than those specified for jointing will not be permitted in the piping systems for the purpose of stopping leaks. F. All leaks disclosed by the testing procedures shall be stopped and testing repeated until the system is proven tight. G. Testing requirements are minimum and are not intended to be limiting where additional testing methods are by the authority having jurisdiction. PART TWO - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL TESTING OF PLUMBING PIPING 15404-1 GATO BUILDING A. Domestic hot water and cold water piping shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 150 psig. Maintain test pressure for a minimum of one hour. B. Sanitary, vent and waste piping previous to connection of �- fixtures and before insulation is installed, shall be filled with water to the top of the system and proven tight. When testing the system by sections, the minimum — height of the water column shall be 10 feet. Examine all joints for leaks. 3.2 STERILIZATION After tests are completed, the complete hot and cold water supply system shall be filled with a solution containing 100 ppm of available chlorine and allowed to stand for a period of two hours before being flushed with clean water. ***END OF SECTION*** TESTING OF PLUMBING PIPING 15404-2 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15405 - PLUMBING DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Sections 15050, Basic Materials and Methods and 15400 Plumbing Work, General sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 GENERAL No product other than the product specified in this section for Domestic Hot and Cold Water shall be installed or bid for this system without previous permission from the Engineer (except, if material has to be changed to meet code). PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING A. Hot and cold water piping inside building: Shall be copper water tube type "L" or "K" with wrought solder fittings. B. Cold water outside building below grade: Shall be Schedule 40 PVC. 2.2 JOINT A. Copper: Solder joints 95/5 tin -antimony solder. B. PVC: Solvent weld. 2.3 INSULATION A. See Sub -Section 15407 titled "Plumbing Insulation". PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Notching of pipe for connection not permitted, except when T-drill system is used. PLUMBING DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD 15405-1 GATO BUILDING B. Not more than one fixture shall be supplied by a 1/2 inch branch. C. No 1/2" supply run shall be over 10 feet. D. Make connection to equipment and fixtures indicated on the drawings or specified herein. E. Hot water branch connections to distribution mains shall be top take -off, swing joint type. ***END OF SECTION*** PLUMBING DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD 15405-2 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15406 - PLUMBING PIPING PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Valves. C. Sanitary waste and vent piping system. D. Domestic water piping system. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 15010 - General Provisions B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor regulations. D. Welders Certification: In accordance with ANSI/ASME Sec 9. and ANSI/ASW D1.1. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of other Sections of this specification. B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, Valves and accessories. 1.4 DELIVER, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of other Sections of the specifications. B. Store and protect products under provisions of other Sections of the specifications. C. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING PLUMBING PIPING 15406-1 GATO BUILDING A. Schedule 40 PVC Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D2665-85. Joints: ASTM D2855-83, solvent weld. 2.2 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Schedule 40 PVC Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D2665-85. Joints: ASTM D2855-83, solvent weld. B. Copper Pipe: ASTM B306, DWV. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3, cast bronze, or ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 50B. - 2.3 WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B52, solder, Grade 95TA, containing no lead. 2.4 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, roll soft and -- seamless. B. Cast Iron Pipe: ANSI/AWWA C151. Fittings: Ductile iron, standard thickness. Joints: ANSI/AWWA C111, rubber gasket with 3/4 inch diameter rods. 2.5 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.23, cast brass, or ANSI/ASME 16.29, wrought copper. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA, containing no lead. 2.6 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Schedule 40 PVC Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D2665-85. Joints: ASTM D2855-83, solvent weld. 2.7 STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Schedule 40 PVC Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D2665-85. Joints: ASTM D2855-83, solvent weld. 2.8 PUMPED WASTE OR STORM WATER PIPING A. Schedule 40 PVC Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D2665-85. Joints: ASTM D2855-83, solvent weld. 2.9 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS PLUMBING PIPING 15406-2 GATO BUILDING A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Smaller: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. B. Pipe Size Larger Than 2 Inches: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping, neoprene gaskets for gas service; 1/16 inch thick performed neoprene bonded to asbestos. C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; "C" shape composition sealing gasket; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe. D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.10 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - VALVES - GENERAL A. Crane 150 pound water valves Model 103 for 2 inch and small, and Model 465-1/2 inch and larger. Crane sweat valves Model 105 for 2 inch and smaller. Approved equivalent by: 1. Powell. 2. Jenkins. 3. Nibco-Scott. 2.11 GATE VALVES A. 2 Inch and Smaller: Bronze body, non -rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, single double wedge or disc, solder or threaded ends, as required. B. 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, non - rising stem and handwheel, flanged or grooved ends as required. 2.12 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BALL VALVES A. Nibco-Scott 150 pound water valves Model T-595 for 2 inches and smaller, Nibco-Scott sweat valves Model S- 595 for 2 inches and smaller. Approved equivalent by: 1. Powell. 2. Jenkins. 3. Nibco-Scott. PLUMBING PIPING 15406-3 GATO BUILDING 2.13 BALL VALVES A. 2 Inch and Smaller: Bronze body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, solder or threaded ends as required. 2.14 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATING BALANCING VALVES A. ITT Bell and Gossett circuit balance valve for sizes 1/2 inch thru 2 inch. 2.15 BALANCING VALVES A. Balances hydronic system flow rates, positive shutoff, flow memory, read-out ports, vent connection and pre- formed insulation. B. Bronze construction including Diss. 2.16 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Crane 150 psi Model 44F for 3 inch and larger. Approved equivalent by: 1. Grinnel. 2. Centerline. 3. Mueller. 2.17 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat for service to 180 degrees F (82 degrees C), water or -lug ends, 10 position lever handle. 2.18 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - SWING CHECK VALVES A. Crane 150 psi Model 17075, solder joint and Model 1707, threaded, for 3 inch and under. Crane 150 psi Model 147, flanged, for 4 inch and larger, or approved equivalent by: 1. Powell. 2. Jenkins. 3. Grinnel. 2.19 SWING CHECK VALVES A. 2 Inch and Smaller: Bronze swing disc, with solder or screwed ends. PLUMBING PIPING 15406-4 GATO BUILDING B. 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. 2.20 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Watts Regulator Company, Model Number 2235 for 2-1/1 inch and smaller including strainer, Model N223 Series with F-27 strainer for 3 inch size, and Model 127W for 4 inch size. Approved equivalent by: 1. ITT Bell and Gossett. 2. Hoffman. 3. Clayton Valve. 2.21 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. 2 Inch and Smaller: Bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded double union ends. B. 2-1/1 Inch and Larger: Cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomer diaphragm and seat disc, flanged. 2.22 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S BACKFLOW PREVENTORS: A. Reduced pressure type: CLA-VAL Co., Model RP-2 for 3/4" and smaller; CLA-Val Co., Model RP-4 for 1" and larger or approved equal. 1. Watts Regulator Company 2. Conbraco Ind. 3. Zurn Ind., Wilkins Division B. 2" and smaller: Bronze body, 2 2/1" larger: Iron body, stainless steel internal parts, bronze or iron body shut-off valves, independent spring -loaded check valves, relief valve and test cocks. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt, inside and outside, before assembly. 3.2 INSTALLATION PLUMBING PIPING 15406-5 GATO BUILDING A. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space or interfere with other — trades. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. G. Provide access doors or panels where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors or panels with other Sections of this specification. H. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than three foot of cover, _ or as required by local codes. I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. J. Extend sanitary vent lines thru roof using required — lengths above finished roof level as required by Federal, State, and Local Plumbing Codes and authorities having jurisdiction. K. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting. Refer to other Sections of this specification. L. Establish invert elevations, slopes for sanitary waste -, an vent piping, and storm water piping, at 1/4 inch per foot for piping 2 inch in size, and 1/8 inch per foot for piping 3 inch and larger. M. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. N. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. PLUMBING PIPING 15406-6 GATO BUILDING O. Provide one gas plug cock wrench for every ten gas plug cocks sized 2 inch and smaller, minimum of one. Provide each plug cock sized 2-1/1 inch and larger with a wrench with set screw. Turn over to Owner. P. Insulation: All waste and drain piping above grade shall be insulated. 3.3 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. Perform trenching, excavating, and backfilling in accordance with Federal, State and Local authorities having jurisdiction, and applicable code requirements for the following piping systems inside the building. 1. Sanitary waste and vent. 2. Storm water. 3. Domestic water. B. Depth of excavation and bury for interior piping shall be as required by the rate of fall for gravity piping systems, and shall be minimum of 24 inches for pressure piping systems. C. Depth of excavation for interior piping shall be carried to a depth of 6 inches below bottom of pipe elevation. Fill below pipe (6 inches), around pipe, and a minimum of 12 inches above pipe with sand or Class "B" crushed stone tampered firm and even. Final backfilling shall be done to exclude use of rock or stone above sand or Class "B" crushed stone. D. Perform trenching, excavating and backfilling in, accordance with Federal, State and Local authorities having jurisdiction and applicable code requirements for the following piping systems of the building. E. Depth of excavation and bury for exterior piping shall be a minimum of 3 foot of top cover for piping systems listed above, and shall be as required by applicable codes and guidelines, and as specified. Fill below pipe (6 inches), around pipe, and to a minimum of 12 inches above pipe with sand or Class."B" crushed stone tamped firm and even. Separate topsoil during excavation. Final layer of dirt (12 inches minimum) shall be topsoil. Final backfilling shall be done to exclude use of rock or stone above sand or Class "B" crushed stone. F. Trenches for both interior and exterior piping shall be PLUMBING PIPING 15406-7 GATO BUILDING at least 18 inches wider than pipe(s) with batterboards placed every 25 foot, if required. G. Compaction of fill both interior and exterior _ excavation and trenches shall meet Federal, State and Local Codes and requirements, and authorities having jurisdiction and if required. H. Furnish and install required trench sheet piling, uprights, stringers, cross -braces, and barricades meeting applicable code requirements and as required by any authorities having jurisdiction and if required. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. _ B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. D. Install gate, ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. 3.6 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. B. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 PPM of available chlorine D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. PLUMBING PIPING 15406-8 GATO BUILDING G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 2 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C601, and requirement of authority having jurisdiction. 3.6 SYSTEMS TESTS A. Hydrostatically test the below listed system as per the requirements of the Federal, State and Local authorities having jurisdiction, including applicable Plumbing Codes and Guidelines. 1. Domestic cold water. 2. Domestic hot water. 3. Domestic hot water recirculating. 4. Sanitary waste and vent. 5. Acid waste and vent. 6. Rainwater leaders and storm water. B. Provide required air pressure tests for the below listed systems as per the requirements of the Federal, State and Local authorities having jurisdiction, including the applicable Plumbing Codes and Guidelines, Gas Codes, and the C.G.A. requirements. C. If required, test(s) shall be witnessed by Federal, State and Local authorities having jurisdiction, Architect/Engineer, and any authority having jurisdiction. D. Provide as many tests as required, and repair any leaks throughout systems. 3.7 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new gas service complete with gas meter and regulators. Gas service distribution piping to have initial pressure as required by equipment it serves. Provide regulators on each line serving gravity type appliances, sized in accordance with equipment. B. Pipe gas pressure relief valve discharge, line thru roof. ***END OF SECTION*** PLUMBING PIPING 15406-9 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15407 - PLUMBING INSULATION PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. No product other than the product specified in this section for insulation shall be installed or bid for this project without previous permission from the Owner. B. Insulation and all components shall meet all requirements of UL 25/50 ratings. C. Division 15050 Basic Materials and Methods and 15400 Plumbing Work, General sections apply to work of this section. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION A. Shall be 1/2" thick with 3.5 pound density molded fiberglass insulation and F. R. all-purpose jacket. 2.2 JACKETS A. Shall be an all-purpose high density, white kraft bonded to aluminum foil, reinforced with fiberglass yarn. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Piping shall be cleaned and dried. B. Testing: All testing should be accomplished before installing insulation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Insulation shall be continuous through walls, floors or pipe sleeves. B. Metal shields shall be provided at each pipe hanger. C. All joints shall be sealed. D. Chrome plated piping requiring the use of a wrench shall be protected from damage. PLUMBING INSULATION 15407-1 GATO BUILDING E. Caulk between fixture and wall or fixture and floor with white silicone caulking. F. All "P" traps below floor shall be deep seal type. 3.3 PIPING TO BE INSULATED A. All hot water piping shall be insulated. B. Any waste piping installed above ceiling, receiving condensation. C. Any roof drains or roof scupper drains installed above ceiling. ***END OF SECTION*** PLUMBING INSULATION 15407-2 _ GATO BUILDING SECTION 15408 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Installation of plumbing fixtures as listed on the drawings. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fixtures: By same manufacturer for each product specified. B. Trim: By same manufacturer for each product specified. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of other Sections of the specifications. B. Include fixtures,, sizes, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. 1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of other Sections of the specifications. B. Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide one year warranty from time of release to Owner and as under provisions of other Sections of the specifications. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - VITREOUS CHINA FIXTURES A. American Standard. B. Eljer. C. Kohler. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIXTURE TRIM (FAUCETS) A. Chicago Faucet or as specified. B.- T. and S. Brass and Bronze Works. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15408-1 GATO BUILDING C. Royal Brass Mfg. Co. -� 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIXTURE TRIM (BELOW FLOOD RIM TYPE) A. McGuire. B. Chicago. C. T. and S. Brass and Bronze works. 2.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS- FLUSH VALVES A. Sloan Valve Company. B. Speakman 2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WATER CLOSET SEATS A. Bemis. B. Beneke. C. Olsonite. '- 2.6 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIXTURE CARRIERS AND SUPPORTS A. Jay R. Smith. B. Wade. C. Zurn. 2.7 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - MIXING VALVES (THERMOSTATIC) A. Symmons. B. Speakman. 2.8 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - MIXING VALVES (PRESSURE BALANCED) — A. Symmons. B. Speakman. 2.9 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS A. Sunroc. B. Oasis. C. Halsey -Taylor. 2.10 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - STAINLESS STEEL SINKS A. Just. B. Elkay. — 2.11 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT A. Potter -Roemer. B. Elkhart Brass. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15408-2 GATO BUILDING C. Croker-Standard. 2.12 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - ROOF DRAINS, WATER HYDRANTS, WALL HYDRANTS, FLOOR DRAINS, AREA DRAINS, FIXTURE CARRIERS SHOCK ABSORBERS, AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT A. Jay R. Smith. B. Wade. C. Zurn. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough -in and installation. B. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough -in work of this Section. C. After completion of installation of fire extinguishers, employ a certified fire suppression contractor to inspect, certify, tag and date each and every fire extinguisher. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Install components level and plumb. C. Install and secure fixtures in place with fire pressure treated wall supports and/or wall carriers and bolts as specified. D. Fixtures shown on Architectural Drawings shall be furnished and installed under this division, whether or not shown on Plumbing Drawings. E. Fixtures shall be mounted to walls and floors to an absolutely rigid condition. F. Provide a dropped eared "L" brass sweat to screwed fitting mounted on fire treated wood backing for rigid support on shower head installations. G. Provide a Sloan -Royal number F-72-Al, trap primer PLUMBING FIXTURES 15408-3 GATO BUILDING connection on water closet flush valves, serving floor drains in toilet room spaces. Refer to Contract Drawings for required locations. H. Provide required length tailpiece on sink and lavatory P-traps, so exposed tubing shall be chrome plated. I. Install lavatories and sinks with a minimum of 4 inches clearance on each side, from a wall, partition, or another fixture. Water closets shall be installed with a minimum of 15 inches clearance from centerline of the bowl, to each side, from a wall, partition, divider, or another fixture. Water closets shall have a minimum of 21 inches clearance in front of bowl. Coordinate dimensions required with Architect. J. Provide General Electric silicon sanitary sealant, or equivalent, caulking at joints on fixtures mounted on walls or floors, or fixtures backed up to walls. K. Provide tailpiece inlet fittings on sinks or lavatories with condensate drain or equipment drain connections as shown or noted on drawings. Tailpiece inlet fittings shall be installed on entering side of P-trap, and shall be required size. L. Installation includes miscellaneous trim considered standard practice, or necessary for installation of fixtures, whether or not they are specifically named in the specifications, or shown on the Contract Drawings. M. Exposed piping outside wall shall be polished, chrome plated. N. Connect to plumbing fixtures and equipment provided under this and other sections of specifications, architectural drawings, and/or manufacturers' approved shop drawings. Provide rough -in connections where called for. O. Follow schedule, details on plans, or manufacturers' approved shop drawings for connection sizes to fixtures. - P. Connect wall hung urinals to waste piping with red brass nipple. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15408-4 GATO BUILDING B. At installation completion, clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. ***END OF SECTION*** PLUMBING FIXTURES 15408-5 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15444 - FUEL OIL SYSTEM PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Fuel Oil Storage Tank 1. Below ground - double wall fiberglass. B. Filler and vent(s), outlets and fittings. C. Fuel oil supply, return, gauge piping encasement, and valves. D. Gauges and Alarms. E. Excavation and backfill. F. Anchor pad and tie -down straps. G. Fuel oil pumps and associated equipment. H. Leak detector monitoring devices and alarms. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ensure storage tank, pumps, piping, valves and other equipment meets codes and references listed in this Section of the Specifications. B. Provide pumps, storage tank, an other associated equipment with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified. C. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following organization: 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 2. national Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 3. Underwriters Laboratory (UL). 4. United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 30 and 31, and 54. B. Conform to O.S.H.A. regulations. C. Conform to Underwriters Laboratory 58, (UL58). FUEL OIL SYSTEM 15444-1 GATO BUILDING D. Conform to Environmental Protection Agency requirements and recommendations. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data, shop drawings, proposed materials list and associated equipment including pump curves under provisions of other Sections of the Specifications. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of other Sections of the Specifications. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data under -- provisions of other Sections of the Specifications. B. Include written maintenance data on components of the system, and _ servicing requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store pumps, fuel tank, and other specifications equipment in original containers with labeling in place under provisions of other Sections of the Specifications. B. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. C. Maintain caps in place until installation. -- PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - UNDERGROUND FUEL OIL STORAGE TANK - DOUBLE WALL FIBERGLASS A. Owens/Corning Fiberglass. B. Xerxes. C. Approved equivalent as under provisions of other Sections of the Specifications. 2.2 UNDERGROUND FUEL OIL STORAGE TANK - DOUBLE WALL FIBERGLASS A. Fuel storage tank shall be horizontal underground tank and shall be designed for vented atmospheric use. The tank shall be — constructed of double wall fiberglass reinforced polyester with multiple reinforcing ribs, and shall have a semi -hemispherical end -cap design with an angle of repose in relationship to the tank of not less than 350. Fiberglass reinforced hold down straps are FUEL OIL SYSTEM 15444-2 GATO BUILDING also required. Tank shall have a smooth 20 mil resin -rich interior surface. B. Tank shall carry the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., label for the storage of flammable and combustible liquids. Tank shall be constructed in accordance with the latest editions of NFPA pamphlet number 31, the manufacturers recommendations, and local authorities having jurisdiction. Tank shall have a thirty (30) year warranty against internal and external corrosion. C. Tank shall be complete with the following connections and accessories: 1. One 4 inch fuel oil fill/overfill prevention valve, OPW Number 6150 and OPW-1 spill container. 2. One 2 inch vent, and cap; OPW Number 63. 3. One 1-1/2 inch remote gauge. 4. Nine (9) tank openings for supply, return and gauge lines. 5. One 2 inch dip gauging (tank shall have a 12 inch sq. FRP encapsulated steel deflector plate under fitting opening for gauging tank). 6. Manhole(s), 2 inch diameter for accessibility and with a flanged opening of suitable diameter for a hot well. (Two required on tanks 3000 gallon and larger). 7. One vertical carbon steel internal ladder attached to the tank bottom with FRP mounting lugs and retained at the top with FRP slip lugs to allow for contraction and expansion of metal ladders. D. Tank shall be tested for tightness at the jobsite by soaping sittings and applying 3-5 PSI air pressure. The test shall be performed before the actual installation. E. Tank shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers installation instructions. (Refer to Contract Drawings for specifics on installation). F. Backfill material shall consist of clean, naturally rounded aggregate with particle size of not less than 1/8 inch nor more than 3/4 inch in diameter. This material is commonly referred to as pea gravel. G. Anchor tanks firmly to concrete pad ensuring tank is empty until backfilling operations are completed. FUEL OIL SYSTEM 15444-3 GATO BUILDING 2.3 LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM A. A fuel oil and water sensing system shall be provided with the underground tank and piping system according to the following: 1. Furnish a complete system, including electronic alarm and locator module, fuel and water sensing cable, graphic display map, and auxiliary equipment. The system shall detect the presence of fuel and water at any point along the cable's length, downstream of the monitoring fitting on the tank, sound an alarm, and pinpoint the distance to the leak. The sensing cable shall be of such construction that no metallic parts shall be exposed to the environment upstream of the monitoring fitting on the tank. The system shall provide pre-connectorized sensing cable and components. The sensing cable shall be suitable for applications which include a secondary containment such that the fluid is contained until it is detected. The system shall be UL listed, FM approved, and CSA approved. 2. The system shall be 502/300 Longline System manufactured by RAYCHEM CORPORATION in Menlo Park, California. 3. The alarm and locator module (TTB-FA-) shall be able to monitor up to 1,500 feet of sensing cable. The module shall indicate that a fluid has contacted the sensing cable by sounding a local alarm, actuating the output relay, and displaying a digital readout on the distance from the start of the sensing cable to the location of the first contact with liquid. The location of the first liquid contact shall be retained on the display until the module is updated. 4. The alarm module shall continuously monitor the sensing cables and interconnecting cables for continuity. Any break in a sensing cable shall result in a audible alarm, a "continuity" LED signal on the face of the module, and actuate an output relay. The module shall have LED's indicating "power" (green), "alarm" (red), and "continuity" (yellow). The module shall be capable of three functions: - Test, acknowledge (or silence) and update (reset). Other functions shall require access by key. 5. The module enclosure shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel with dimensions of 14 x 12 x 4 inches. The enclosure shall be capable of either semiflush or surface mounting. The alarm module shall be powered by (Select: 120 VAC / 240 VAC / 24 VDC). The module shall have a pair of contacts which open on alarm, and a pair of contacts which close on alarm. These contacts shall be used to actuate other alarms and - shall be capable of switching 2.5 amps at 120 VAC. FUEL OIL SYSTEM 15444-4 GATO BUILDING a. Module accessories: Separate continuity relay (TTB- REL) that provides a relay output for continuity. 6. The fuel sensing cable shall consist of a four -sire core, a jacket of semiconductive fluoropolymer, and a fluoropolymer overbraid. The core shall consist of two sensor wires, a continuity wire, and an insulated return wire. The sensor wires shall be jacketed by a conductive polymer. The semiconductive fluoropolymer jacket shall swell on contact with liquid fuel. The overbraid shall be made from fluoropolymer materials which are resistant to fuels and solvents with no metallic parts exposed to the environment. a. The fuel sensing cable shall offer distributed sensing with the ability to detect the location of a liquid fuel at any point along the cable's length. The sensing cable shall ignore the presence of water and other conductive liquids. The cable shall be flexible, and carry less than 24 VDC under normal operating conditions. The sensing cable shall be available in modular lengths of 5, 10, 25 and 50 feet and shall be provided with factory -installed connectors, The cable connections shall be protected by a heat -shrinkable tube making them chemically resistant. 7. The water sensing cable shall consist of four wires: two sensor wires, a continuity wire, and an insulated return wire. The sensor wires shall be jacketed by a conductive polymer. The cable insulation and overbraid shall be made from fluoroploymer materials such that no metallic parts are exposed to the environment. The cable shall be made from fluoropolymer materials which are resistant to acids, bases and solvents. The sensor wires, continuity wire and return wire bundle shall be covered by an abrasion resistant protective braid. The sensing cable shall offer distributed sensing with the ability to detect the location of a aqueous chemical at any point along the cable's length. The cable shall be flexible, and carry less than 24 VDC under normal operating conditions. The sensing cable shall be available in modular lengths of 5, 10, 25, and 50 feet and shall be provided with factory -installed male/female connectors. The cable connections shall be protected by a heat -shrinkable tube making them chemically resistant. 8. A jumper cable (TT-MJC-x-MC) shall be available to interconnect both water and fuel cables. The jumper cable shall be plenum rated and jacketed with fluoropolymer materials per NEC 725-2 (b). The jumper cable shall consist of four (color coded: Y, B, R, G) insulated 18 AWG wires and shall be available in 3, 10, 25, 50, and 100-foot lengths FUEL OIL SYSTEM 15444-5 GATO BUILDING with factory -installed connectors. For distances for more than 100 feet, multiple lengths of jumper cable may be connected together. The cable connections shall be protected by a heat -shrinkable tube making them chemically resistant. 9. Standard accessories: Modular end termination (TT -MET -MC); modular leader cable (TT-MKC-MC); caution tags (TT -TAG); and hold-down clips (TT-HDC-1/2). 10. A graphic display map, suitable for wall mounting, shall be furnished by the manufacturer or other personnel authorized by the manufacturer. The map shall show the TraceTek sensing cable layout. Distance markings shall be indicated on the map such that the alarm module's digital readout can be correlated to actual leak locations. 11. Accessories: Feed through assembly (TT-FTA-MC) that provides a sealed entry into double -containment. 12. System components shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. The installer shall be responsible for providing a clean and functional system. 13. The alarm module (TTB-x) shall be mounted and powered in accordance with NEC and local code requirements prior to installation of the sensing cable. 14. The sensing cable shall be installed according to manufacturer's installation instructions. The fuel/solvent sensing cable shall be replaced upon exposure to fuels/solvents. The load on the sensing cable shall not exceed 20 pounds per linear inch at 60 degrees C (140 degrees F) . 15. A graphic display map shall be prepared after completion of installation from "as -built" drawings furnished by contractor. The map shall indicate the location of the cable, connectors and landmarks such as equipment, piping access ports, change of cable direction and cable distance readings per manufacturer's instructions. The map shall be mounted near the alarm module. 16. The detection system shall be commissioned upon completion of the installation by personnel authorized by the manufacturer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2.4 GAUGING SYSTEM AND ALARM SYSTEM A. Furnish a Meriam or equivalent by Master Level, Simmonds, or FUEL OIL SYSTEM 15444 - 6 GATO BUILDING Hersey, pneumatic direct reading, continuous purge tank gauge, complete with: 1. Compresses air connection from central air compressor with shutoff valve at the gauge and bubbler, and air filter regulator unit. 2. Single tube gauge calibrated and marked in gallons of fuel oil for the tank size installed. 3. Gauge shall have 12 inch diameter scale, a low level alarm switch, and a sight bubbler. 4. Provide two Meriam Monotac relay for low level tank alarm. 5. Provide a 3/8 inch type L copper pipe line to the fuel tank using a Meriam (or approved equivalent) A-26600 hex tank plug fitting in the tank. 6. Provide tank bell and downpipe. B. Furnish a dipstick calibrated in gallons for size tank installed. C. Gauges and alarms shall be as set forth in this Section of the Specifications. 2.5 PUMPING SYSTEM A. Fuel oil circulating pump(s) shall be furnished with the emergency generator day tank, specified under a separate Division for the Specifications. B. Provide check valve on suction side of pump at day tank. C. Fuel oil pump(s) shall be by Viking, Roper, Peabody Gordon -Platt, or approved equivalent, and as specified on the Contract Drawings. D. Pumps shall be furnished complete with the following: 1. Mounting base and oil drip pan. 2. Oil pressure relief and regulating valves, as required. 3. Drive couplings and guards. 4. Discharge and suction check valves. 5. Compound vacuum/pressure gauges. 6. Pressure gauges. FUEL OIL SYSTEM 15444 - 7 GATO BUILDING 7. Oil strainers. 8. Electric motors. 9. Motor starters. - 10. Mechanical seals. 11. Manual on/off switch. 12. Necessary shutoff valves to permit transferring from one system to the other. 13. Any equipment requirements of any authorities having jurisdiction. 2.6 FUEL OIL PIPING AND FITTING MATERIALS A. Fuel Oil Piping, Above Ground: 1. Copper Tubing: (Fuel oil gauge piping) ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.23 cast brass, or - ANSI/ASME B16.23, wrought copper. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA. 2. Steel Pipe: (Fuel oil supply and fuel oil return piping) ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black. Fittings: ANSI/ASTM B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type. Joints: Screwed for pipe two inches and under; ANSI/AWS D1.1, welded, for pipe over two inches. B. Fuel Oil Piping, Below Ground: 1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black. Fittings: ASTM A234 forged steel welding type, with ANSI/AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half -lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. Joints: ANSI/AWS D1.1, welded. C. Secondary Containment Piping System: -- 1. The secondary containment piping system shall be as manufactured by R. and G. Sloan Manufacturing Company, Inc. _ The piping system shall consist of clear unpigmented polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings. The pipe shall be either solid or longitudinally split. Fittings shall be manufactured in two equal halves. Pipe shall align via tongue and groove construction. Pipe and fitting joints shall be welded together via the R. and G. Sloan injection bonding process. Prior to injection bonding, fittings shall be held together by provided clips. Clips shall be affixed FUEL OIL SYSTEM 15444-8 GATO BUILDING over the integral fitting clip locators. Final containment inspection shall be accomplished via low pressure air or hydrostatic test. 2. each fuel oil supply, fuel oil return and fuel oil gauge line shall be encased in a secondary containment pipe as specified above and sized as required. 3. Terminate both ends of secondary containment pipe 3 inches above finished floor surfaces. Seal ends to water and air tightness condition. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install below ground fuel oil gauge lines in an encasement of 2 inch Schedule 40 P.V.C. piping and fittings using solvent weld joints. Turn up end at pumps, thru floor slab 2 inches above finished floor level and seal opening watertight. B. Tank, pumps, gauges and alarms shall be located as shown on the Contract Drawings. C. Tank shall be retested at job site before being put in service, using five psig air pressure and soap solution on welds. D. Protective covering of tank to be patched as required to repair any damage done during shipment. E. Underground tanks to be placed a minimum of 12 inches level layer of sand or gravel bed. Tank shall be surrounded with minimum of 6 inches of sand, earth or gravel, well tamped. Backfill shall be compacted, particularly under tank, to provide adequate support. tank should be covered with minimum of three feet of earth. Refer to NFPA 30 if subjected to traffic. F. Tank trim shall be installed where shown on the Contract Drawings. G. Slope tank at 1/8 inch per foot with high end opposite end with monitoring fitting to facilitate saturation of leak sensing cables in the event of a leak to the interstitial space. H. Piping connections underground shall be flexible connection type equivalent to Dayco No. 7271. I. Vacuum check fuel oil piping for leaks before concealment. Test shall include testing piping as a complete system from tank to equipment to be supplied, including pumps. Vacuum of 28 inches shall be held for 12 hours. TPst shall he renPated after FUEL OIL SYSTEM 15444 - 9 GATO BUILDING concealment. J. Fuel oil pumps shall be located as shown on the Contract Drawings. K. Fuel level gauge shall be located in the equipment room and -- installed according to manufacturer's recommendations. L. The low level alarm shall be wired into the emergency generator _ control panel by the Electrical Contractor as required by NFPA 99, Chapter 8. M. Valves in fuel oil system shall be Nibco with teflon seats or approved equivalent. 3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. Perform trenching, excavation, and backfilling in accordance wit Federal, State and local authorities having jurisdiction, N.F.P.A. codes and requirements for the following piping systems inside the building: 1. Fuel oil supply, fuel oil return and fuel oil gauge. B. Depth of bury for interior piping shall be a minimum of 24 inches. C. Depth of excavation for interior piping shall be carried to a depth of 6 inches below bottom of pipe elevation. Fill below pipe (6 inches), around pipe(s) and a minimum of 12 inches above pipe with sand or Class "B" crushed stone tamped firm and even. Final backfilling shall be done to exclude use of rock or stone above sand or Class "B" crushed stone. D. Perform trenching, excavation, and backfilling in accordance with federal, State and local authorities having jurisdiction, N.F.P.A. codes and requirements and applicable code requirements for the following piping systems exterior of the building: 1. Fuel oil supply, fuel oil return and fuel oil gauge. E. Depth of excavation and bury for exterior piping shall be a minimum of 3 foot of top cover for piping system listed above, and shall be a required by applicable codes and guidelines, and as specified. Fill below pipe (6 inches), around pipe, and to a minimum of 12 inches above pipe with sand or Class "B" crushed stone tamped firm and even. Separate topsoil during excavation. Final layer of dirt (12 inches minimum) shall be topsoil. Final backfilling shall be done to exclude use of rock or stone above sand or Class "B" crushed stone. F. Trenches for both interior and exterior piping shall be at least FUEL OIL SYSTEM 15444-10 GATO BUILDING 18 inches wider than pipe(s) with batterboards places every 25 foot, if required. G. Compaction of fill for both interior and exterior excavation and trenches shall meet Federal, State and local codes and requirements, N.F.P.A., and authorities having jurisdiction. H. Furnish and install required trench sheet piling, uprights, stringers, cross -braces, and barricades meeting applicable code requirements and as required by any authorities having jurisdiction, if required. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean equipment and exposed piping of foreign matter. 3.4 STARTUP, TESTING AND TRAINING A. Start-up system in conjunction with generator test. B. Operate system as a complete system with generators demonstrating operation to Owner's Representative or Engineer. C. Test alarms required by NFPA 99, Chapter 8. D. Instruct maintenance personnel in system operation and maintenance. **** END OF SECTION **** FUEL OIL SYSTEM 15444 -11 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15460 - WATER HEATERS PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section: 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes electric water heaters. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories, and indicating dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components, and piping and wiring connections. C. Wiring diagrams from manufacturers detailing electrical requirements for electrical power supply wiring to water heaters. Include ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring required for final installation of water heaters and controls. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions that are to be field installed. D. Certificates of shop inspection and data report as required by provisions of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide water heaters complying with UL Standards: 1. UL 1453, "Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters." B. Listing and Labeling: listed and labeled. Provide water heaters that are WATER HEATERS 15460-1 GATO BUILDING 1. The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. C. ASME Code Compliance: Provide safety relief valves that comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and that bear the appropriate code symbols. D. Design Concept: The drawings indicate types and capacities of water heaters and are based on specific descriptions and manufacturers indicated. Water heaters having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in capacities, dimensions, operation, or other characteristics are minor and do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. Burden of proof for equality of water heaters is on the proposer. 1.5 WARRANTY Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace water heater units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, tanks, elements, and controls. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 1. Warranty period is 5 years after date of Substantial Completion. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Point -of -Use Tankless Electric Water Heaters: a. Chronomite Laboratories, Inc. b. Controlled Energy Corp. C. Eemax, Inc. d. The Electric Heater Co. e. GSW Water Products Co. f. International Technology Sales Corp. g. Keltec, Inc. h. Mor-Flo Industries. WATER HEATERS 15460-2 GATO BUILDING i. PVI Industries, Inc. 2. Tank -Type Electric Water Heaters: a. Bock Waters Heaters, Inc. b. Bradford -White Corp. C. Bryan Steam Corp. d. Cemline Corp. e. GSW Water Products Co. f. Lochinvar Water Heater Corp. g. Precision Parts Corp. h. Rheem Mfg. i. Ruud Mfg. Div.; Rheem Mfg. j. A.O. Smith Water Products Co. Div.; A.O. Smith Corp. k. State Industries, Inc. 2.2 POINT -OF -USE TANKLESS ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. Description: Automatic, electric, wall -mounting, tankless type; with integral controls. B. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard. C. Jacket: Aluminum or steel with baked -on enamel finish, or plastic. D. Heating Element: Resistance heating. E. Controls: Flow control fitting in inlet piping. F. Safety Controls: Automatic, high -temperature -limit cutoff. G. Flow Control Fitting: 0.5 gallon per minute, fixed orifice type. H. Electric Input: 3.0 kW. I. Electrical Characteristics: Refer to drawings. 2.3 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. Description: Automatic, residential, electric; with vertical, UL certified, 150-psig-rated storage tank, integral controls, drain valve, relief valve, and drain pan. B. Insulation: Fiberglass or polyurethane foam, surrounding tank. WATER HEATERS 15460-3 GATO BUILDING C. Jacket: Steel, with baked -on enamel finish. D. Tank: Glass -lined steel with anode rods and drain valve. E. Heating Elements: Screw -in immersion type. F. Controls: Adjustable immersion thermostat. G. Safety Controls: Automatic, high -temperature -limit cutoff and low-water cutoff. H. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME rated and labeled. I. Drain Pan: Baked -on enamel steel. J. Storage Capacity: As noted on drawings. K. Minimum Recovery Rate: 4 gallons per hour at 100 deg F temperature rise. L. Electric Input: As noted on drawings. M. Electrical Characteristics: As noted on drawings. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. General: Install water heaters on drain pans. Set and connect units in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Orient so controls and devices needing servicing are accessible. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections of Division 15. The Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install piping adjacent to equipment arranged to allow servicing and maintenance. 2. Connect hot and cold water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot water circulating piping to unit with shutoff valve, check valve, and union. Extend relief valve discharge to closest drain pan. WATER HEATERS 15460-4 GATO BUILDING a. Where water heater piping connections are dissimilar metals, make connections with dielectric fittings or dielectric unions specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Piping Materials and Methods." B. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16. 1. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Provide the services of a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect unit installation, provide start-up service, and demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below. 1. Test and adjust operating and safety controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance. 1. Review data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Project Closeout." 2. Schedule training with at least 7 days, advance notice. 3.4 COMMISSIONING A. Perform the following before start-up final checks: 1. Fill water heaters with water. 2. Piping systems test complete. 3. Check for piping connections leaks. 4. Test operation of safety controls and devices. B. Perform the following start-up procedures: 1. Energize circuits. 2. Adjust operating controls. 3. Adjust hot water outlet temperature setting. ***END OF SECTION*** WATER HEATERS 15460-5 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15540 - PUMPS PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Extent of HVAC pumps required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by the requirements of this Section. B. Types of pumps specified in this section include the following: 1. Frame -Mounted End Suction C. Pumps furnished as part of factory -fabricated equipment, are specified as part of the equipment assembly in other Division-15 sections. 1.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS (STANDARDS) A. Aurora Pump - A General Signal Co. B. Paco Pump C. Bell & Gossett D. Armstrong 1.3 COMPATIBILITY OF COMPONENTS A. The pump manufacturer shall furnish and be responsible for the selection, compatibility and performance of each assembly consisting of pump, motor, coupling and baseplate. 1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS A. HI Compliance: Design, manufacture, and install HVAC pumps in accordance with HI "Hydraulic Institute Standards". B. UL Compliance: Design, manufacture, and install HVAC pumps in accordance with UL 778 "Motor Operated Water Pumps". C. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and components which are listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories and comply with NEMA standards. D. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable paragraphs of ANSI B58.1, except as specified herein. PUMPS 15540-1 GATO BUILDING E. Certification, Pump Performance: Provide pumps whose performances, under specified operating conditions, are certified by manufacturer. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's pump specifications, installation and start-up instructions, and current accurate pump characteristic performance curves with selection points clearly indicated, in accordance with Section 15010. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store HVAC pumps and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, construction debris, and physical damage. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts. B. Construction to permit complete servicing without _ breaking piping connections. C. Pumps to rotate at 1750 rpm unless specified otherwise. D. Pump connections to be flanged or grooved joint/mechanical coupling. E. Heating pumps to be suitable for handling water at 230 degrees F. F. Pumps to be of bronze fitted construction with bronze impeller and carbon steel shafts. Shaft defection not to exceed 0.00211 at sealing faces at maximum load. G. Hydrostatic test pump casings at one and one-half times the design working pressure. H. Impeller diameter not to exceed 90% of the maximum diameter which the casing will hold. I. Provide pump and motor with stainless steel nameplate securely fastened to casings. Nameplates to provide all data necessary for equipment identification. 2.2 FRAME -MOUNTED END SUCTION PUMPS PUMPS 15540-2 GATO BUILDING A. General: Provide frame -mounted end suction pumps where indicated, and of capacities and having characteristics as scheduled. B. Type: Horizontal mount, single stage, vertical split case, flexible coupling, base mounted, designed for 175 psi working pressure. C. Casing: Cast iron bronze -fitted, 125 psi ANSI flanges, tappings for gauge and drain connections. D. Shaft: Steel with replaceable shaft sleeve. E. Bearings: Regreasable ball bearings. F. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon seal ring and ceramic seat. G. Motor: Open, drip -proof, regreasable ball bearings. H. Impeller: Enclosed type, hydraulically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft and secured with locking screw. I. Baseplate: Structural steel with welded cross members, and open grouting area. J. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration, equipped with coupling guard. 2.3 NAMEPLATES A. Each pump, motor, and pump/motor assembly shall be provided with a stainless steel nameplate securely fastened to their casing. These nameplates shall provide all data necessary for equipment, identification and replacement. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which HVAC pumps are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS A. General: Install HVAC pumps where indicated, in PUMPS 15540-3 GATO BUILDING accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions, complying with recognized industry practices to ensure that HVAC pumps comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. B. Access: Provide access space around HVAC pumps for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer. C. All end -suction (frame -mounted) pumps shall be furnished and/or installed with soleplates, bedplates, or baseplates which shall be carefully leveled, grouted, and bolted in place. Grout shall be of the expanding type which contains catalyzed metallic aggregate. After grout has set, it shall be cut flush with the bedplate and sealed to prevent fraying deterioration at the edges. D. Support: Install base -mounted pumps on minimum of 4" high concrete base equal or greater than 3 times total weight of pump and motor, with anchor bolts poured in place. Set and level pump, grout under pump base with non -shrink grout. E. Support: Refer to Division-15 section "Vibration Control" for support and mounting requirements of HVAC pumps. F. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory - mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturers' wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division-16 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. Ensure that pump motors are wired properly, with rotation in correct direction, and that pump and motor grounding has been provided. G. Piping Connections: Refer to Division-15 HVAC piping sections. Provide piping, valves, accessories, gauges, supports, and flexible connections as indicated or described below. Provide gauge ports at suction and discharge connections to pumps. Provide air vent cock in high point of casing. Provide line sized butterfly pumps. Provide air vent cock in high point of casing. Provide line sized butterfly valve and strainer on suction side piping, and triple duty valve (or equivalent butterfly, check and balance valve) on PUMPS 15540-4 GATO BUILDING discharge piping for each pump unless otherwise indicated on drawings. H. Alignment: A hot alignment check shall be made on all couplings between motors and end -suction frame mounted and double -suction pumps. All equipment shall be operated until all components have reached operating temperature before the hot check is made. Any and all equipment must be repositioned as required and hot alignment checks repeated until both parallel and angular alignments in both plan and elevation are within limits set by the equipment manufacturer. I. Start -Up: Lubricate pumps before start-up. Start-up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. J. Refer to Division-15 section "HVAC Test -Adjust -Balance" for pump system balancing; not work of this section. K. Cleaning: Clean factory -finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch- up paint. ***END OF SECTION*** PUMPS 15540-5 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15686 - ROTARY SCREW WATER CHILLER PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Work required under this section consists of provision and installation of rotary screw water chillers complete with all necessary controls, pumps, motors, gauges, etc., to comprise a complete system as set forth in Part 2 of this specification and the drawings. Mechanical schedules on mechanical drawings set forth requirements as to size, capacity, operating parameters. B. Contractor shall provide all necessary labor, materials, tools, services and equipment necessary to assure a complete, functioning system as required by the plans and specifications. C. Full responsibility for satisfactory operation and performance shall rest with the contractor and equipment supplier. 1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide chiller which complies with applicable ambient noise level standards. B. Provide chiller with cooler and condenser which complies with applicable standards and codes including ARI 590, ASHRAE 15, ASME Section VIII, NEC and OSHA. C. Provide chiller tested and rated under ARI 590-92 conditions. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data including performance and noise data to Architect/Engineer for approval in accordance with Section 15050. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 CHILLERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Packaged type air cooled chiller by Dunham -Bush, McQuay, Trane or approved equal. ROTARY SCREW WATER CHILLER 15686-1 GATO BUILDING B. Chillers are to be completely factory assembled and wired in a single package complete with screw compressors, cooler, air cooled condenser, staring control and safety and operation controls. It is to be given a complete factory operating and control sequence test under load conditions and is to be shipped with full operating charge of R-22 and full oil charge. C. Chillers shall be built in accordance with the ANSI B31.5 refrigerant piping; ASHRAE Standard 15 safety code; the National Electrical Code and applicable ASME code for Unfired Pressure Vessels. Performance must be rated in accordance with ARI 590-92, where applicable. All cataloged units are ETL listed. D. Unit will be designed for maximum corrosion protection with all panels being of heavy gauge, UL90 approved galvanized construction. E. Cooler shall be direct expansion, shell and tube type. The shell shall be fabricated from carbon steel, with inner -finned copper tubes, and tube sheets of heavy gauge carbon steel with roller expanded or brazed tubes. The heads shall be constructed of carbon steel. The cooler shall be insulated with not less than 4/3" (19.1 mm) of closed cell foamed plastic with vapor seal. F. Condenser: The condenser coil is to be constructed of copper tubes and die formed aluminum fins having self - spacing collars. Fins are to be mechanically bonded to the tubes. G. Fans: The condenser shall have direct -drive, heavy duty, aluminum bladed fans. Motors are to be 6 pole, slow speed type with internal overloads and are to be permanently lubricated. Belt driven designs are not acceptable due to excessive maintenance requirements. H. Compressor: The overall compressor design shall include discharge gas cooled motor, integral lubrication system utilizing compressor pressure differential, and hermetic design. I. Capacity Control: An infinitely variable capacity control system that is capable of exactly matching the demand requirement of the system is to be supplied. a microprocessor based controller shall modulate a compressor slide valve, in response to supply water temperature, and maintain water temperature within ROTARY SCREW WATER CHILLER 15686-2 GATO BUILDING 1/20F of setpoint. This system is to provide precise and stable control of supply water temperature over the complete range of operating conditions. It shall be capable of a system capacity control range from 100% to 15% at specified conditions. J. Refrigerant Circuit: Each compressor shall be provided with an independent refrigerant circuit for maximum standby protection. K. Factory mounted microprocessor -based control panel. Automatic shutdown protection with manual reset shall be provided for low evaporator refrigerant temperature and pressure, high condenser refrigerant pressure, loss of condenser air flow, high motor temperature, low oil flow, motor current overload, phase reversal, phase loss, and severe phase imbalance. Automatic shutdown protection with automatic reset when condition is corrected is provided for loss of chilled water flow, high compressor discharge temperature, under/over voltage, and momentary power loss. L. Microprocessor based chilled water reset based on return water shall be provided. M. Starters - factory mounted reducing voltage type, wye- delta with closed transition Cutler -Hammer, or approved equal by Square D, Allis Chalmers, Allen-Bradley, or General Electric. Starters shall include: a. Terminal blocks for electric auxiliaries. b. Transformer for 120 volt control circuit. C. Main power disconnect. d. Ammeter in cover, red lined at compressor full load operating amperage. e. Built-in capacitors sized to correct the power factor to a minimum of .95 and a maximum of .98 at full load. f. Provisions for de -energizing capacitors when chiller if off. N. The chiller control panel shall be capable of communication with a generic building automation system. For chiller start/stop, set point adjustment, alarm contact and current limit adjustment. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ROTARY SCREW WATER CHILLER 15686-3 GATO BUILDING A. General: The installation of mechanical refrigeration equipment shall meet the requirements of ASHRAE 15. Interlock chiller operation with the chilled water starters so that the chiller cannot start unless the pumps are operating. Keep equipment thoroughly clean and free from all debris with all oil, dirt, and paint spots removed until final acceptance. B. Foundations: Structure for mounting of equipment, accessories, appurtenances, piping, and controls shall be provided, including but not limited to supports, vibration isolators, stands, guides, anchors, clamps, and brackets. Mounting shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations. C. Locations: Equipment shall be located so that working space is available for all necessary servicing such as shaft removal, disassembling compressor cylinders and pistons, replacing or adjusting drives, motors, or shafts seals, access to water heads and valves of shell and tube equipment, tube cleaning or replacement, access to automatic controls, refrigerant charging, lubrication, oil draining and working clearance under overhead lines. D. Identification Tags and Plates: Provide equipment with tags numbered and stamped for their use. Plates and tags shall be brass or nonferrous material. Minimum letter and numeral sizes shall be 1/8-inch high. E. Coordinate electrical installation with electrical contractor. F. Coordinate controls with control contractor. G. Provide all appurtenances required to insure a fully operational and functional chiller. 3.2 FIELD TESTS A. Tests: All tests shall be performed and everything required for test shall be provided by the contractor. Notify the engineer, in writing, 5 days before performing any tests. All tests shall be performed in the presence of a manufacturer's representative. B. Start -Up and Initial Operational Test: All equipment shall be started and operated. Follow the manufacturer's procedures and place the systems under all modes of operation. During testing, the various ROTARY SCREW WATER CHILLER 15686-4 GATO BUILDING strainers shall be periodically cleaned until no further accumulation of foreign material occurs. Care shall be exercised so that minimum loss of refrigerant occurs. Before and during tests, initial charges of refrigerant lubricating oil shall be supplemented to assure maximum operating capacity. Safety and automatic control instruments shall be adjusted as necessary to place them in proper operation and sequence. Record manufacturer's recommended readings hourly. Operational tests shall cover a period of not less than five days. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer to furnish, expense free, the services of a competent, trained representative to completely supervise the installation, dehydration, testing, charging and initial operation of machines. B. Provide qualified instructor to train Owner's operating personnel for 3 working days. C. Furnish owner a signed statement upon completing of the project, that chillers are properly installed. D. Contractor to furnish the owner a statement signed by the refrigeration machine manufacturer that installation was done under their supervision and installation work is complete to their satisfaction including leak testing, dehydrating, charging, and operation of the machine with its auxiliaries (pumps, starter, cooling) as a system, has been satisfactorily demonstrated for NOT less than 24 hours. Final painting of machine, restoration to like new condition, and grouting under feet is to be done by installing contractor. E. Contractor is to insure that field insulation is completed in accordance with Section 15250 with all parts subject to sweating/condensation thoroughly insulated. ***END OF SECTION*** ROTARY SCREW WATER CHILLER 15686-5 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15800 - CONTROL SYSTEM PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 The Control systems as specified herein shall be provided in their entirety by the controls Contractor. The Control shall base his bid on the system as specified, the Sequence of Operations, and the points list. 1.2 In general, the proposal shall be based on a completely electronic system, including valve and damper actuators. 1.3 WORK AND RELATED WORK A. Provide a Building Automation System (BAS) to include all equipment, installation materials, accessories, and labor necessary for a complete integrated operational system as shown on drawings, in schedules, and herein specified/described. B. The BAS is to include the following major subsystems but not limited to the following: 1. Chilled Water Temperature Controls 2. Chiller Automation 3. Chilled Water Pumps Automation 4. HVAC Environmental (Temperature and Humidity) Controls 5. HVAC Automation C. Contractor's Responsibilities The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary hardware, wiring, computing equipment, and software as defined in this specification. D. System Requirements 1. All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured and available and not custom designed for this project. All system components, except site specific software, shall have previously been thoroughly tested and proved in actual use prior to installation on this project. 2. The system architecture shall be BACnet compatible and fully modular permitting expansion of CONTROL SYSTEM 15800-1 GATO BUILDING application software, system peripherals, and field hardware. 3. The system, upon completion of the installation and -- prior to acceptance of the project, shall perform all operating functions as detailed in this specification. E. Equipment 1. The Contractor shall provide the following hardware: a. Control Modules b. All sensing device and necessary transducers to perform the functions listed in the I/O Summary Tables. _ C. All relays, switches, and indicating devices to perform the functions listed in the I/O Summary Tables. d. All chilled water, heating water, and preheat - control valves. e. All motorized dampers with actuators, unless integral part of the equipment. f. All monitoring and control wiring. g. Portable operator terminal (Laptop computer) h. Operator Workstation 2. System Software The Contractor shall provide system graphics of all equipment provided, as well as the associated floor plan. F. References 1. Codes and regulations. All electrical equipment, material, and its installation, shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities: a. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) b. National Electric Code (NEC) c. National Fire Code d. Uniform Building Code e. Uniform Mechanical Code f. Uniform Plumbing Code g. UL916 CONTROL SYSTEM 15800-2 GATO BUILDING 2. Note: Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive apply. Nothing in these plans and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to applicable codes. 1.4 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Control valves, flow switches, temperature sensor wells, gauge taps, and flow meters. B. Equipment wiring systems: Installation and connection of all power wiring. Power wiring shall be defined as follows: 1. Wiring of power feeds through all disconnect starters to electric motors. 2. 120 VAC wiring to all Level 1 and Level 2 controllers. 3. Wiring of any remote start/stop switches and manual or automatic motor speed control devices not furnished by Temperature Controls Contractor. C. Duct accessories: Installation of automatic dampers to include assembly of multiple section dampers with required interconnecting linkages, shafts, and brackets and extend the required number of shafts through the ducts for externally mounted damper motors. Jack shafts will be assembled with sealed roller or ball bearings of stainless steel construction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The control system shall be installed by competent control mechanics under the direct supervision of the manufacturer of the control equipment. All control equipment shall be the product of one manufacturer. The control contractor shall have local maintenance capabilities available to the project site. The control contractor must have installed Direct Digital Controls of the type specified for at least five years prior to commencing this project. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings for all controls, including complete control diagrams, descriptions of control sequence and engineering data of all devices used. CONTROL SYSTEM 15800-3 GATO BUILDING B. Include in the submittals, schedules of valves with data concerning sizes, service, and model number. 1.7 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. Furnish and install a complete control system in accordance with drawings, specifications, and intent of the design. B. The system shall be complete in all respects and shall be installed by factory trained mechanics in the direct employ of the control equipment manufacturer dealer who is to be responsible for the proper installation and operation of the control equipment. The control manufacturer shall furnish the services of an experienced engineer or superintendent to supervise the installation of the work and to insure job coordination. C. All components not specifically indicated or specified, but necessary to make the system function within the intent of the specification, are to be included. D. Size all control apparatus to properly supply and/or operate and control the apparatus served. E. All electrical products shall be listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA Standards and local codes. F. All electrical work required as an integral part of the temperature control work is the responsibility of the control contractor. 1.8 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. The control contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, upon completion of the work, but before final acceptance of the system, three (3) bound copies of typewritten instructions covering complete maintenance and operation of the system and a completed set of as -built drawings. This Contractor shall instruct the Owner on the care, operation, and maintenance of all parts of the system. 1.9 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee the temperature controls to maintain the temperature in rooms within one degree of the setting and further guarantee all work, materials, equipment, and controls against defects in workmanship and material and provide service for a period of two (2) years from date CONTROL SYSTEM 15800-4 GATO BUILDING of acceptance. B. Replace any defective workmanship or material developing within that time as soon as possible at no charge to the Owner. C. After completion of the installation, the control manufacturer shall regulate and adjust all control valves, control motors, and other equipment provided in this contract. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW A. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall consist of fully BAC net compatible microcomputer controllers of modular design equal to that provided by Automatic Logic Corporation providing distributed processing capability, and allowing future expansion of both input/output points and processing/control functions. 2.2 PRODUCTS AND BACnet COMPATIBILITY A. The system must be fully BACnet compatible at the time of installation. This means that the system must use BACnet as the native communication protocol between distributed controllers communicating on the controller network (i.e. Field Bus) and must, as a minimum, be Conformance Class 4 and support the following Objects: Binary Input Binary Output Binary Value Analog Input Analog Output Analog Value The communication network between controllers must be EIA-485, at least 78.4 Kbps, using either MS/TP or 156 Kbps using ARCNET at the Data Link Layer. The system must be fully BACnet compatible at the time of installation. Any hardware or software which would be required to make the system BACnet compatible as specified is to be provided to the owner at no additional cost when it is available. Systems which are not BACnet compatible as specified above, are not acceptable. CONTROL SYSTEM 15800-5 GATO BUILDING 2.3 BUILDING SYSTEMS INTEGRATION The Building Automation and Control System (BAGS) shall be required to have a systems integration product line, as indicated below, which establishes a seamless interconnection with other building, electrical and/or mechanical subsystems as well as other manufacturer's control systems. These systems shall be controlled and monitored through the Graphical User Interface (GUI) software of the BAC's front-end software package and shall be graphically programmed by the BACS. A. All desired system information to or from the indicated mechanical and electrical equipment shall be available to the BACS. The capability to interface with any desired point in the equipment control system shall be available to the BACS. No limits shall be placed by the manufacturer on the owner or BACS with regard to the access of, or the transmission of data provided from the equipment control system. B. Full cooperation by the equipment manufacturer in this open protocol effort shall be a requirement for bidding this project. No exceptions shall be allowed to this requirement, and no bid shall be accepted which does not define precisely how the proposed equipment will comply with this section. C. If the equipment manufacturer does not have this capability, they shall contact the authorized representative of the BACS for assistance and shall include in their equipment price any necessary equipment obtained from the BACS manufacturer to comply with this section. D. Other BAS equipment suppliers shall provide this seamless integration through the use of a BACnet micro -processor - based, Bi-directional Protocol Translator (BPT) as specified below: 1. The BPT shall be a micro -processor -based communication device designed to provide seamless, two-way translation between two or more standard or non-standard protocols. 2. The BPT shall be available for a variety of Data Link\Physical Layer configurations including PTP (point-to-point) via EIA-232, MS/TP via EIA-485, CONTROL SYSTEM 15800-6 GATO BUILDING ARCNET over EIA-485, LonTalk, and Ethernet using the IEEE 802.0 standard approved for BACnet. 3. In addition to BACnet (conformance class 4) the BPT shall also support other protocols including LONworks, SNMP, Modbus, J-Bus, Profibus, Batibus, CAB, and Fieldbus. 4. The BPT shall have at least three communication ports. One shall be for communication between Native BACnet controllers residing on the controller network. This network shall have EIA-485 running at 156 Kbps using ARCNET. The other two communication ports shall have the ability to be configured for different protocols. One of these shall consist of a terminal board connector which is jumper selectable for EIA-232, 2-wire EIA-485, or 4-wire EIA-485. The other port shall consist of an EIA-232, 9-pin collector. Both ports shall be software selectable for up to 38.4k baud. 5. The BPT shall provide full custom programmability of the data flowing between the networks using the same graphical programming as specified in this specification. The system shall have the ability to create custom building control strategies using global data between networks. E. Field hardware must be of a modular design to ensure reliability and system performance. A typical BACnet compatible Local Area Network Gateway (LAN Gateway) may be specified as follows: 1. The LAN Gateway shall be a microprocessor -based communications device which functions as a communications gateway between a controller network and a Local Area Network (LAN). 2. Each LAN Gateway shall support a controller network on which may reside multiple controllers with various I/O capacity, 3. The communications network between controllers must be EIA-485, at least 78.4 Kbps, using either MS/TP or 156 Kbps using ARCNET at the Data Link Layer. 4. The LAN which interconnects LAN Gateways may be configured as EIA-485 (38.4 Kbps), Ethernet (10 Mbps), Token Ring (16 Mbps), or FDDI (100 Mbps), CONTROL SYSTEM 15800-7 GATO BUILDING all of which may be implemented over fiber optic, twisted pair, or coaxial cable. In the case of Ethernet connections, the LAN Gateway may be configured as Ethernet 1OBase-T (10 Mbps) which may be implemented over unshielded twisted pair. 5. The LAN Gateway shall provide two EIA-232 ports which can be connected to Operator Workstations, portable computers, or modems. 6. LAN Gateway shall provide full arbitration between multiple users, whether they are communicating through the same of different LAN Gateways. 7. The LAN Gateways shall be responsible for routing global information from the various controller networks which may be installed throughout a building. 2.4 FIELD HARDWARE/INSTRUMENTATION A. Input Devices Temperature sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy ratings as indicated and/or required for the application and shall permit accuracy ratings of within 11 of the temperature range of their intended use. Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the averaging type and have an. accuracy of +10F (0.50C) . Outside air temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of -52'F to 1520F (-46.60C to 66.60C) and an accuracy of within +10F (0.50C) in this temperature range. Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy, of +0.3 6'F ( 0.2 5'C) in the range of 3 20F to 9 60F (O'C to 35.50C) . Chilled water and condenser water sensors shall have an accuracy of +0.250F (0.150C) in their range of application. B. Instruments Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors. Pressure Switches. Flow Switches. Voltage -to -Digital Alarm Relays. Humidity Sensors. CONTROL SYSTEM 15800-8 GATO BUILDING Current Sensing Relays. C. output Devices Control Relays. Solid State Relays (SSR). Electric Solenoid Operated Valves. D. Valve and Damper Actuators Electronic direct -coupled actuation shall be provided. The actuator shall be direct -coupled over the shaft, enabling it to be mounted directly to the damper shaft without the need for connecting linkage. The fastening clamp assembly shall be of a 'V' bolt design with associated 'V' shaped toothed cradle attaching to the shaft for maximum strength and eliminating slippage. Spring return actuators shall have a 'V' clamp assembly of sufficient size to be directly mounted to an integral jackshaft of up to 1.05 inches when the damper is constructed in this manner. Single bolt or screw type fasteners are not acceptable. The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to the actuator throughout the entire rotation of the actuator. Mechanical end switches or magnetic clutch to deactivate the actuator at the end of rotation are not acceptable. For power failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. Non -mechanical forms of fail-safe operation are not acceptable. All spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counterclockwise spring return operation by simply changing the mounting orientation. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0 to 1OVDC or 0 to 20mA control input and provide a 2 to IOVDC or 4 to 20mA operating range. An actuator capable of accepting a pulse width modulating control signal and providing full proportional operation of the damper is acceptable. All actuators shall provide a 2 to 1OVDC position feedback signal. All 24VAC/DC actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring and shall not require more than 10VA for AC or more than 8 watts for DC applications. Actuators operating on CONTROL SYSTEM 15800-9 GATO BUILDING 120VAC power shall not require more than 10VA. Actuators operating on 230VAC shall not require more than 11VA. All non -spring return actuators shall have an external manual _ gear release to allow manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring return actuators with more than 60 in -lb torque shall have a manual crank for this purpose. All modulating actuators shall have an _ external, built-in switch to allow reversing direction of rotation. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum 3ft electrical cable and shall be _ pre wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make electrical connections. Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 listed and Canadian Standards Association Class 4813 02 certified as meeting correct safety requirements and recognized industry standards. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator's rated torque and shall have a 2-year manufacturer's warranty, starting from the date of installation. Manufacturer shall be ISO9001 certified. _ E. Field Testing and Programming Equipment A portable laptop or notebook computer shall be provided to interface via standard push -in connection at an synchronous serial port located at the Control modules and at selected enhanced zone temperature sensors as indicated on project plans. This portable unit shall be capable of full global communications with all Control modules connected within the respective network and shall provide functionally identical user interface to the Workstation, in non -graphic format. Units shall be able to interrogate all points and alter all programming. F. Operator Worksation The contractor shall provide an Operator Workstation — configuration that includes, as a minimum, the following components: 1. Computer. Minimum requirements are as follows: Windows compatible Pentium CPU, 166 MHZ clock speed, with 750-megabyte (MB) hard drive, 16 MB random access memory (RAM) (expandable to 32 MB). Two parallel and two asynchronous serial ports shall be provided for connection of peripherals. One 1.44M-3 1/2" floppy drive and one 6x CD ROM _ drive. CONTROL SYSTEM 15800-10 GATO BUILDING Operating System. The operating systems for the operator workstation shall be Microsoft Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0. Any software being provided for this system which is not 100% Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0 applications will not be acceptable. Mouse. The primary operator interface device shall consist of a 2-button mouse. Keyboard. The enhanced keyboard with 101-key layout shall contain a full ASCII complement and shall include a dedicated numeric keypad with ENTER key for rapid entry of data. 2. ' Colorgraphics Monitor and Controller. Provide a high resolution, Color SVGA monitor to display real time dynamic graphic data, execute operator commands, and report system activity. Display unit shall consist of at least 15" color monitor with a dark edged screen to reduce glare. The unit shall be configured for a minimum 640 x 480 Pixel resolution at 256 different colors. 3. Alarm and Report Printers. The contractor shall provide an alarm and report printer as a part of each operator workstation, The printer shall be minimally capable of graphics and at least 132 characters per second for data print, and able to provide neat letter quality print. 4. Telephone Modem. Provide a system compatible modem with EIA-232C connection and automatic answer/originate capability for each operator workstation. 5. Software. The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the functions required by the control system with full graphic and control capability with area maps, floor plans, mechanical system graphics, visual displays of environmental and system operational parameters and setpoints. Software shall be modular in design for flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. 2.5 OWNERFS INSTRUCTIONS A. Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, CONTROL SYSTEM 15800-11 GATO BUILDING the installing Contractor shall provide installation/operation information to the Owner's operating personnel who have responsibility for the mechanical system. Training shall be a minimum of 24 Hours. 2.6 DOCUMENTATION A. System information, including product bulletins and installation instructions shall be included in the controls submittals. 2.7 HARDWARE SUPPORT A. The manufacturer of the DDC system shall provide assistance in product applications and system trouble shooting. The materials and installation shall be -- guaranteed to be free of defects for two (2) years from date of beneficial use. 2.8 SYSTEM REPORT A. The installing Contractor shall issue a report upon project completion stating that the system has been completed and adjusted, has had all hardware and software functions verified, and is operating in accordance with the specifications. Any deviations from specified - settings or operations necessitated during system adjustment shall be specifically noted. A demonstration of complete system operation shall be made to the Owner's representative. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install all control equipment and wiring in a neat and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B. All immersion wells, flow switches, valves, and dampers and other such items furnished by the control manufacturer shall be installed by the mechanical contractor under the coordinating control and supervision of the control contractor. — C. Install all control devices in an accessible location. 3.2 CONTROL WIRING CONTROL SYSTEM 15800-12 GATO BUILDING A. Control wiring shall be provided as a part of this specification section. Run all control wiring separate from power wiring, also do not utilize the same conduit for analog sensor wiring and any wiring carrying an AC current. Install wiring in accordance with the National Electric Code, and applicable local codes. All wire and wiring devices used shall be certified by the temperature controls subcontractor to be in accordance with this code section. B. Conduit. All conduit is to be installed in a neat and workmanship manner, and run vertical and horizontal. No diagonal runs will be acceptable. Conduit shall be EMT in all dry areas and install rigid galvanized conduit in damp areas. All conduit shall be minimum of k". This Contractor is responsible for all conduit required for the proper installation of the Control System. C. Cable. All cable used for low voltage (28 volts or less), will be a minimum of 22 awg twisted pair. All cable used for communication on the CMnet shall be 18/2 shielded plenum with a blue 'exterior jacket for identification. No cable shall be run exposed. Wire nuts are not accepted as a means of splicing multiple cables together. The use of terminal strips will be accepted. D. Enclosure. The enclosure shall have the appropriate Nema rating, but shall have as a minimum a Nema 1. All exposed and/or main Control Panels shall be hinged and be lockable. E. Peripherals. All sensors, differential pressure switches, etc. shall be installed neatly and in a location that is easily accessible for service. Care will be taken so that all temperature and humidity sensors are located such that the sensor is not located in a "dead air" space. If after the system is commissioned and it is determined that a sensor is not reading accurately due to its location, it shall be relocated at the expense of the Contractor. F. Power Wiring. The electrician shall provide 120 volts to all control cabinets. Any peripherals that require 24-120 volts shall be provided by this Contractor. *** END OF SECTION *** CONTROL SYSTEM 15800-13 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15830 - FAN COIL UNITS PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Contractor shall provide and install fan coil units in sizes and capacities shown on mechanical drawings and in locations shown on drawings. Characteristics of equipment shall be as shown herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Refer to Division-16 sections for the following work; not work of this section. 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on fan -coil units. Include disconnects and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory -installed, by manufacturer. 2. Interlock wiring between electrically -operated fan -coil units; and between fan -coil units and field -installed control devices. B. Interlock wiring specified as factory -installed is work of this section. C. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of Division-16 sections: 1. Control wiring between field -installed controls, indicating devices and fan coil units. a) Control wiring specified as work of Division 15 for Automatic Temperature Controls is work of that section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fan coil units, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. B. Codes and Standards: FAN COIL UNITS 15830-1 GATO BUILDING 1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate fan -coil units in accordance with ARI Standard 440 "Room Fan -Coil Air Conditioners". 2. UL Compliance: Construct and install fan -coil units in compliance with UL 883 "Safety Standards for Fan Coil Units and Room Fan Heater Units". 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data to Architect for approval in accordance with Section 15010. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable manufacturers are McQuay, York or approved equal. 2.2 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Ceiling exposed cabinet unit (TSC) - Unit shall consist of basic chassis enclosed in an attractive heavy -gauge steel cabinet finished with an electrostatically applied, baked -on Antique Ivory paint. Cabinet shall have a (high impact polymer) (stamped metal) horizontal discharge grille with return air through the (rear grille) (bottom grille) (rear duct opening). Cabinet shall be hinged for service access as standard. B. Coils - Coils shall have aluminum fins with copper tubes mechanically expanded for a permanent bond. Coils shall have a (manual) air vent. Unit performance shall be as tabulated in the schedule. C. Fan Assembly - Fans shall be DWDI forwardly curved, centrifugal type. Fan housing shall be fabricated of heavy -gauge galvanized steel. D. Drain Pan - Drain pan shall be constructed of heavy - gauge galvanized steel, insulated with high density closed cell foam insulation. E. Insulation - Ceiling exposed TSC model shall be insulated with high density closed cell insulation on the exterior of the drain pan and on the top, sides of the chassis. Ceiling recessed model TSC shall be insulated with high density closed cell foam on the (bottom panel only) (Bottom, sides, top and front FAN COIL UNITS 15830-2 GATO BUILDING panels). Hideaway TSH chassis shall be insulated with high density closed cell foam insulation. F. Filters - Filters shall be 30% ASHRAE replaceable type. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fan coil units at location designated on drawings in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Provide piping connections per diagram on drawings. C. Insure proper condensate drainage. 3.2 START-UP AND TEST A. Start-up unit, check for satisfactory performance as required by plans and specifications. B. Test units for fan operation and coil performance. C. Insure that system piping is thoroughly vented, cleaned and all debris is removed from control valves to insure specified water flow. D. Demonstrate operation to owner's maintenance personnel and instruct them in system operation. **** END OF SECTION **** FAN COIL UNITS 15830-3 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15840 - DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Ductwork and accessories for HVAC including Supply air, return air, outside air and general exhaust systems and associated components. B. Definitions: 1. SMACNA Standards as used in this specification means the 1995 HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. 2. Seal or Sealing: Use of liquid or mastic sealant, with or without compatible tape overlay, or gasketing of flanged joints, to keep air leakage at duct joints, seams and connections to an acceptable minimum. 3. Duct Pressure Classification: SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. 4. Exposed Duct: Exposed to view in a finished room. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 and Division 7 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods and other Division sections apply to work of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to article, QUALITY ASSURANCE, in Section 15050, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS. B. Fire Safety Code: Comply with NFPA 90A. C. Duct System Construction and Installation: Referenced SMACNA Standards are the minimum acceptable quality. D. Duct Sealing, Air Leakage Criteria, and Air Leakage Tests: DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840-1 GATO BUILDING 1. Leakage classification and allowable leakage: In accordance with Section 4 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 2. No duct air leakage test is required but the Engineer reserves the right to make leakage tests or to have air leakage tests performed by the contractor at owners expense. Tests shall be performed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. E. Duct accessories exposed to the air steam, such as dampers of all types (except smoke dampers) and access openings, shall be of the same material as the duct or provide at least the same level of corrosion resistance. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 15050, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS. B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: 1. Rectangular ducts: a. Schedules of duct systems, materials and selected SMACNA construction alternatives for joints, sealing, gage and reinforcement. b. Duct liner. C. Sealants and gaskets. d. Access doors. 2. Round and flat oval duct construction details: a. Manufacturer's details for duct fittings. b. Duct liner. C. Sealants and gaskets. d. Access sections. e. Installation instructions. 3. Volume dampers, backdraft dampers. 4. Upper hanger attachments. 5. Fire dampers, fire doors, and smoke dampers with installation instructions. 6. Sound attenuators, including pressure drop and acoustic performance. DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840-2 GATO BUILDING 7. Flexible ducts and clamps, with manufacturer's installation instructions. 8. Flexible connections. 9. Air intake/exhaust hoods. 10. Instrument test fittings. 11. Perforated distribution plates. 12. Diffusers, registers, grilles and accessories. 13. Details and design analysis of alternate or optional duct systems. C. Coordination Drawings: Refer to article, SUBMITTALS, in Section 15050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (MECHANICAL). 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B. Air Diffusion Council Test Code: 1062R4..... Certification, Rating, and Test Manual (1977) C. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA): 500-75.... Test Method and Louvers, Dampers and Shutters D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A167-92.............. Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel, Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip A527-90............. A569-91............. B209-92............. C1071-91............ Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Lock -Forming Quality Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Mineral Fiber, Duct Lining Material) DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840-3 GATO BUILDING E84-91.............. Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 90A-89.............. Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 96-91............... Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease -Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, 1st Edition - 1985 HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 1st Edition, 1985 Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards, 5th Edition, 1979. G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 33-87............... UL Standard for Safety Heat Responsive Links for Fire Protection Service 181-90.............. UL Standard for Safety Factory -Made Air Ducts and Connectors 555-90.............. UL Standard for Fire Dampers 555S-83............. UL Standard for Safety Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCT MATERIALS AND SEALANTS A. General: Except for systems specified otherwise, construct ducts, casings, and accessories of galvanized sheet steel, ASTM A527, coating G90; or, aluminum sheet, ASTM B209, alloy 1100, 3003 or 5052. B. Specified Corrosion Resistant Systems: Stainless steel sheet, ASTM A167, Class 302 or 304, Condition A (annealed), Finish No. 4 for exposed ducts and Finish No. DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840-4 GATO BUILDING 2B for concealed duct or ducts located in mechanical rooms. C. Optional Duct Materials: 1. PVC Coated Duct: Duct internally coated with PVC may be furnished in lieu of stainless steel for laboratory fume hood exhaust duct. a. Duct shall be galvanized sheet steel, ASTM A527, coating G90, coated inside before fabrication with four mil dry film thickness of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic suitable for temperature to 250 degrees F. Material shall comply with UL 181, Class 1 (flame spread rating of not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less in accordance with ASTM E84). Duct exterior may be uncoated or coated with PVC. Provide compatible joint sealant and material for field coating of damaged areas. b. Damper frames, damper blades and shafts, shall be stainless steel or PVC coated galvanized steel, with non-ferrous bearing material. D. Joint Sealing: Refer to SMACNA Standards, paragraph S1.8 and S1.9. 1. Sealant: Elastomeric compound, gun or brush grade, maximum 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed (dry state) compounded specifically for sealing ductwork as recommended by the manufacturer. Generally provide liquid sealant, with or without compatible tape, for low clearance slip joints and heavy, permanently elastic, mastic type where clearances are larger. Oil base caulking and glazing compounds are not acceptable because they do not retain elasticity and bond. 2. Tape: Use only tape specifically designated by the sealant manufacturer and apply only over wet sealant. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used on bare metal or on dry sealant. 3. Gaskets in.Flanged Joints: Soft neoprene. E. Approved factory made joints such as DUCTMATE SYSTEM may be used. 2.2 DUCT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION A. Follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840-5 GATO BUILDING B. Duct Pressure Classes: As shown on the drawings. C. Seal Classes: As shown on the drawings and in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. D. Round and Flat Oval Ducts: Furnish duct and fittings made by the same manufacturer to insure good fit of slip joints. When submitted and approved in advance, round and flat oval duct, with size converted on the basis of equal pressure drop, may be furnished in lieu of rectangular duct design shown on the drawings. 1. Elbows: Diameters 3 through 8 inches shall be two section die stamped, all others shall be gored construction, maximum 18 degree angle, with all seams continuously welded or standing seam. Coat galvanized areas of fittings damaged by welding with corrosion resistant aluminum paint or galvanized repair compound. 2. Provide bellmouth, conical tees or taps, laterals, reducers, and other low loss fittings as shown in SMACNA Standards. 3. Ribbed Duct Option: Lighter gage round/oval duct and fittings may be furnished provided certified tests indicating that the rigidity and performance is equivalent to SMACNA standard gage ducts are submitted. a. Ducts: Manufacturer's published standard gage, G90 coating, spiral lock seam construction with an intermediate standing rib. b. Fittings: May be manufacturer's standard as shown in published catalogs, fabricated by spot welding and bonding with neoprene base cement or machine formed seam in lieu of continuous welded seams. 4. Provide flat side reinforcement of oval ducts as recommended by the manufacturer and SMACNA Standard S3.13. Because of high pressure loss, do not use internal tie -rod reinforcement unless approved by the Resident Engineer. E. Casings and Plenums: Construct in accordance with SMACNA Standards Section VI, including curbs, access doors, pipe penetrations, eliminators and drain pans. Access doors shall be hollow metal, insulated, with latches and door pulls, 20 inches wide by 48 - 54 inches high. Provide viewpoint in the doors where shown. Provide drain for DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840-6 GATO BUILDING outside air louver plenum. Outside air plenum shall have exterior insulation. Drain piping shall be routed to the nearest floor drain. F. Volume Dampers: Single blade or opposed blade, multi -louver type as detailed in SMACNA Standards. G. Duct Hangers and Supports: Refer to SMACNA Standards Section IV. Avoid use of trapeze hangers for round duct. 2.3 DUCT LINER (Where indicated on drawings) A. Duct sizes shown on drawings for lined duct are clear opening inside lining. B. Rectangular Duct or Casing Liner: ASTM C1071, Type I (flexible), or Type II (board), one inch minimum thickness, applied with mechanical fasteners and 100 percent coverage of adhesive in conformance with SMACNA, Duct Liner Application Standard. C. Round and Oval Duct Liner: Factory fabricated double -walled with one inch thick sound insulation and inner perforated galvanized metal liner. Construction shall comply with flame and smoke rating required by NFPA 90A. Metal liner shall be 20 to 24 gage having perforations not exceeding 3/32-inch diameter and approximately 22 percent free area. Metal liner for fittings need not be perforated. Assemblies shall be complete with continuous sheet mylar liner, 2 mil thickness, between the perforated liner and the insulation to prevent erosion of the insulation. Provide liner couplings/spacer for metal liner. At the end of insulated sections, provide insulation end fittings to reduce outer shell to liner size. Provide liner spacing/concentricity leaving airway unobstructed. 2.4 DUCT ACCESS DOORS, PANELS AND SECTIONS A. Provide access doors, sized and located for maintenance work, upstream, in the following locations: 1. Each duct mounted coil and humidifier. 2. Each fire damper (for link service), smoke damper and automatic control damper. 3. Each duct mounted smoke detector. DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840-7 GATO BUILDING B. Openings shall be as large as feasible in small ducts, 12-inch by 12-inch minimum where possible. Access sections in insulated ducts shall be double -wall, insulated. Transparent shatterproof covers are preferred for uninsulated ducts. 1. For rectangular ducts: Refer to SMACNA Standards (Figure 2-12). 2. For round and flat oval duct: Access sections shall be not less than 20 gage housing welded or riveted to a duct section. 2.5 FIRE DAMPERS A. Galvanized steel, interlocking blade type, UL listing and label, 1-1/2 hour rating, 160 degrees F fusible link, 100 percent free opening with no part of the blade stack or damper frame in the air stream. B. Fire dampers in fume hood exhaust or wet air exhaust shall be stainless steel construction, all others may be galvanized steel. 1. The damper frame may be of design and length as to function as the mounting sleeve, thus eliminating the need for a separate sleeve, as allowed by UL 555. Otherwise provide sleeves and mounting angles, minimum 14 gage, required to provide installation equivalent to the damper manufacturer's UL test installation. 2. Submit manufacturers installation instructions conforming to UL rating test. 3. Combination fire and smoke dampers: Multi -louver or curtain type units meeting all requirements of both dampers shall be used where shown and may be used at the Contractor's option where applicable. 2.6 SMOKE DAMPERS A. Maximum air velocity, through free area of open damper, and pressure loss: Low pressure and medium pressure duct(supply, return, exhaust, outside air): 1500 fpm. Maximum static pressure loss: 0.13 inch wg. B. Maximum air leakage, closed damper: 4.0 cfm per square foot at 3 inches wg differential pressure. C. Minimum requirements for dampers: DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840-8 GATO BUILDING 1. Meet requirements of Table 6-1 of UL 555S, except the Fire Endurance and Hose Stream Test. 2. Frame: Galvanized steel channel with side, top and bottom stops or seals. 3. Blades: Galvanized steel, inch maximum width, edges or felt, if required Airfoil(streamlined) type and pressure drop are dampers. 4. Shafts: Galvanized steel. parallel type preferably, 12- sealed with neoprene, rubber to meet minimum leakage. for minimum noise generation preferred for duct mounted 5. Bearings: Nylon, bronze sleeve or ball type. 6. Hardware: Zinc plated. 7. Operation: Automatic open/close. No smoke damper that requires manual reset or link replacement after actuation is acceptable. See drawings for required control operation. D. Motor operator (actuator): Provide pneumatic or electric as required by the automatic control system, externally mounted. 2.7 FIRE DOORS A. Galvanized steel, interlocking blade type, UL listing and label, 160 degrees F fusible link, 3 hour rating and approved for openings in Class A fire walls with rating up to 4 hours, 100 percent free opening with no part of the blade stack or damper frame in the air stream. 2.8 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT CONNECTORS A. General: Factory fabricated, complying with NFPA 90A for connectors not passing through floors of buildings. Flexible ducts shall not penetrate any fire or smoke barrier which is required to have a fire resistance rating of one hour or more. Provide approximate lengths indicated on the drawings. Provide insulated acoustical air duct connectors in supply air duct systems and elsewhere as shown. B. Flexible ducts shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., complying with UL 181. Ducts larger DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840-9 GATO BUILDING than 8 inches in diameter shall be Class 1. Ducts 8 inches in diameter and smaller may be Class 1 or Class 2. C. Insulated Flexible Air Duct: Factory made including mineral fiber insulation with maximum C factor of 0.25 at 75 degrees F mean temperature, encased with a low _ permeability moisture barrier outer jacket, having a puncture resistance of not less than 50 Beach Units. Acoustic insertion loss shall not be less than 3 db per foot of straight duct, at 500 Hz, based on 6-inch duct, of -' 2500 fpm. D. Application Criteria: 1. Temperature range: 0 to 200 degrees F internal. 2. Maximum working velocity: 4000 feet per minute. 3. Minimum working pressure, inches of water gage: 10 inches positive, 2 inches negative. E. Duct Clamps: 100 percent nylon strap, 175 pounds minimum loop tensile strength manufactured for this purpose or stainless steel strap with cadmium plated worm gear tightening device. Apply clamps with sealant and as approved for UL 181, Class 1 installation. 2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Where duct connections are made to fans and air handling — units, install a non-combustible flexible connection of 29 ounce neoprene coated fiberglass fabric approximately six inches wide. For connections exposed to sun and weather provide hypalon coating in lieu of neoprene. Burning characteristics shall conform to NFPA 90A. Securely fasten flexible connections to round ducts with stainless steel or zinc -coated iron draw bands with worm gear fastener. For rectangular connections, crimp fabric to sheet metal and fasten sheet metal to ducts by screws two inches on center. Fabric shall not be stressed other than by air pressure. Allow at least one inch slack to insure that no vibration is transmitted. B. Where ducts, fire damper frames or after filter frames of dissimilar metal are connected, provide a coupling consisting of flanges, neoprene gaskets, fabric, and nuts and bolts. 2.10 SOUND ATTENUATING UNITS DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840-10 GATO BUILDING A. Casing, not less than 20 gage galvanized sheet steel, or 18 gage aluminum fitted with suitable flanges to make clean airtight connections to ductwork. Sound -absorbent material faced with glass fiber cloth and covered with not less than 24 gage or heavier galvanized perforated sheet steel, or 22 gage or heavier perforated aluminum. Perforations shall not exceed 5/32-inch diameter, approximately 25 percent free area. Sound absorbent material shall be long glass fiber acoustic blanket meeting requirements of NFPA 90A. B. Entire unit shall be completely air tight and free of vibration and buckling at internal static pressures up to eight inch water gage at operating velocities. C. Pressure drop through each unit: Not to exceed indicated value at design air quantities indicated. D. Submit complete independent laboratory test data showing pressure drop and acoustical performance. E. Cap open ends of attenuators at factory with plastic, heavy duty paper, cardboards, or other appropriate material to prevent entrance of dirt, water, or any other foreign matter to inside of attenuator. Caps shall not be removed until attenuator is installed in duct system. 2.11 GRAVITY TYPE AIR INTAKE/EXHAUST HOODS A. Aluminum, ASTM B209, louvered, spun, or fabricated using panel sections with roll -formed edges, 1/2-inch mesh aluminum or galvanized welded wire bird screen, with gravity or motorized dampers where shown, accessible interior, designed for 100 mph winds. B. See hood schedule on the drawings. Sizes shown designate throat size. Area of hood perimeter opening shall be not less than the throat area. C. Dampers For Gravity Ventilators Without Duct Connection: Construct damper of the same material as the ventilator and design to completely close opening or remain wide open. Hold damper in closed position by a brass chain and catch. Extend chains 12 inches below and engage catch when damper is closed. 2.12 PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS A. Galvanized steel or extruded aluminum 12 inches overall height, continuous welded corner seams, treated wood DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840-11 GATO BUILDING nailer, 1-1/2 inch thick, 3 pound density rigid mineral fiberboard insulation with metal liner, built-in cant strip (except for gypsum or tectum decks). For surface insulated roof deck, provide raised cant strip (recessed mounting flange) to start at the upper surface of the insulation. Curbs shall be constructed for pitched roof or ridge mounting as required to keep top of curb level. 2.13 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Section 15050, (MECHANICAL). 2.14 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL A. Refer to Division 7. 2.16 THERMOMETER (AIR) BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS A. Section 15800, CONTROL SYSTEM. 2.17 INSTRUMENT TEST FITTINGS A. Manufactured type with a minimum two inch length for insulated duct, and a minimum one inch length for duct not insulated. Test hole shall have a flat gasket for rectangular ducts and a concave gasket for round ducts at the base, and a screw cap to prevent air leakage. B. Provide instrument test holes at each duct or casing mounted temperature sensor or transmitter, and at entering and leaving side of each heating coil, cooling coil, and heat recovery unit. 2.18 AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVES (AFCV) A. Section 15899, AIR TERMINAL UNITS. 2.19 PERFORATED DISTRIBUTION PLATE A. Material: 60 percent free area perforated plate made of 10 gage galvanized steel with round openings equally spaced over entire face area. Maximum air pressure drop through distribution plate for air volummes scheduled shall be 0.10-inch WG. Bolt plate to a sturdy steel support frame. B. Location: Where shown on the drawings. 2.22 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840-12 GATO BUILDING A. Materials: 1. Steel or aluminum: gasket. Provide manufacturer's standard 2. Exposed Fastenings: The same material as the respective inlet or outlet. Fasteners for aluminum may be stainless steel. B. Performance Test Data: In accordance with Air Diffusion Council code 1062R4. C. Air Supply Outlets shall be as indicated on the drawings. 1. Ceiling Diffusers: Suitable for surface mounting, exposed T-bar or special tile ceilings, off-white finish, square or round neck connection as shown on the drawings. Provide plaster frame for units in plaster ceilings. a. Square, louver, fully adjustable pattern: Round neck, surface mounting unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Provide equalizing or control grid and volume control damper. b. Louver face type: Square or rectangular, removable core for 1, 2, 3, or 4 way directional pattern. Provide equalizing or control grid and opposed blade damper. C. Perforated face type: Manual adjustment for 1, 2, 3, or 4 way horizontal air distribution pattern without change of air volume or pressure. Provide equalizing or control grid and opposed blade over -lapping blade damper. 1. Perforated face diffusers for VAV systems shall have the pattern controller on the inner face, rather than in the neck and designed to discharge air horizontally at the ceiling maintaining a constant effect. d. Slot diffuser/plenum: 1. Galvanized steel boot lined with 1/2-inch thick fiberglass conforming to NFPA 90A and complying to UL 181 for erosion. Form slots or use adjustable pattern controllers, to provide stable, horizontal DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840-13 GATO BUILDING air flow pattern over a wide range of operating conditions. 2. Provide inlet connection diameter equal to duct diameter shown on drawings or provide transition coupling if necessary. 3. Maximum pressure drop at design flow rate: 0.15 inch wg. 2. Linear Grilles and Diffusers: Extruded aluminum, manufacturer's standard finish, positive holding concealed fasteners. a. Margin: Flat, 3/4-inch wide. b. Bars.: Minimum 3/16-inch wide by 3/4-inch deep, zero deflection unless otherwise shown. Reinforce bars on 18-inch center for sidewall units and on 6-inch center for units installed in floor or sills. C. Provide opposed blade damper and equalizing or control grid where shown. 3. Registers: Double deflection type with horizontal face bars and opposed blade damper with removable key operator. a. Margin: Flat, 1-1/4 inches wide. b. Bar spacing: 3/4-inch maximum. C. Finish: Off white baked enamel for ceiling mounted units. Wall units shall have a prime coat for field painting, or shall be extruded with manufacturer's standard finish. 4. Grilles: Same as registers but without the opposed blade damper. D. Return and Exhaust Registers and Grilles: Provide opposed blade damper without removable key operator for registers. 1. Finish: Off-white baked enamel for ceiling mounted units. Wall units shall have a prime coat for field painting, or shall be extruded aluminum with manufacturer's standard aluminum finish. 2. Standard Type: Fixed horizontal face bars set at 30 to 45 degrees, approximately 1-1/4 inch margin. DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840-14 GATO BUILDING 3. Perforated Face Type: To match supply units. 4. Grid Core Type: 1/2-inch by 1/2-inch core with 1-1/4 inch margin. 5. Linear Type: To match supply units. 6. Door Grilles: Are furnished with the doors. 7. Filter Grilles: Standard face hinged to a mounting frame with space for a one inch throwaway filter. Hold face closed by a locking screw. Provide retaining clips to hold filter in place. Provide one inch thick fiberglass throwaway filter. 2.23 WIRE MESH GRILLE A. Fabricate grille with 2 x 2 mesh (1/2-inch) galvanized steel or aluminum hardware cloth in a spot welded galvanized steel frame with approximately 1-1/2 inch margin. B. Use grilles where shown in unfinished areas such as mechanical rooms. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with provisions of Section 15050, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS, particularly regarding coordination with other trades and work in existing buildings. B. Fabricate and install ductwork and accessories in accordance with referenced SMACNA Standards: 1. Drawings show the general layout of ductwork and accessories but do not show all required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect ducts to equipment, boxes, diffusers, grilles, etc., and to coordinate with other trades. Fabricate ductwork based on field measurements. Provide all necessary fittings and offsets at no additional cost to the government. Coordinate with other trades for space available and relative location of HVAC equipment and accessories on ceiling grid. Duct sizes on the drawings are inside dimensions which shall be altered by Contractor to other dimensions with the same air handling characteristics where necessary to avoid interferences and clearance difficulties. DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840-15 GATO BUILDING 2. Provide duct transitions, offsets and connections to — dampers, coils, and other equipment in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section II. Provide streamliner, when an obstruction cannot be avoided and must be taken in by a duct. Repair galvanized areas with galvanizing repair compound. 3. Provide bolted construction and tie -rod reinforcement in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section VI. 4. Construct casings, eliminators, and pipe penetrations in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section VI. Design casing access doors to swing against air pressure so that pressure helps to maintain a tight seal. C. Install duct hangers and supports in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section IV. D. Install fire dampers in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to conform to the installation used for the rating test. E. Seal openings around duct penetrations of floors and fire rated partitions with fire stop material as required by NFPA 90A. F. Flexible duct installation: Refer to SMACNA Standards, Section III. Ducts shall be continuous, single pieces not over fourteen feet long (NFPA 90A), as straight and short as feasible, adequately supported. Centerline radius of _ bends shall be not less than two duct diameters. Make connections with clamps as recommended by SMACNA. Clamp per SMACNA S3.33 and S3.34 with one clamp on the core duct and one on the insulation jacket. Flexible ducts shall not penetrate floors, or any chase or partition designated as a fire or smoke barrier, including corridor partitions fire rated one hour or two hour. Support ducts SMACNA Standards. G. Where diffusers, registers and grilles cannot be installed to avoid seeing inside the duct, paint the inside of the duct with flat black paint to reduce visibility. H. Control Damper Installation: 1. Provide necessary blank -off plates required to install dampers that are smaller than duct size. Provide necessary transitions required to install dampers larger than duct size. DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840-16 GATO BUILDING 2. Assemble multiple sections dampers with required interconnecting linkage and extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper motors. 3. Provide necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification and provide air volummes specified. Locate baffles by experimentation, and affix and seal permanently in place, only after stratification problem has been eliminated. I. Air Flow Measuring Devices (AFMD): Install units with minimum straight run distances, upstream and downstream as recommended by the manufacturer. J. Low Pressure Duct Liner: Install in accordance with SMACNA, Duct Liner Application Standard. K. Protection and Cleaning: Adequately protect equipment and materials against physical damage. Place equipment in first class operating condition, or return to source of supply for repair or replacement, as determined by Resident Engineer. Protect equipment and ducts during construction against entry of foreign matter to the inside and clean both inside and outside before operation and painting. When new ducts are connected to existing ductwork, clean both new and existing ductwork by mopping and vacuum cleaning inside and outside before operation. 3.2 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS AND REPAIR A. Perform tests if required. See article, QUALITY ASSURANCE. B. Seal all visible openings in ducts particularly at notches on rectangular duct joints. Seal air leaks audible at system operating conditions. 3.3 FIELD TESTS A. Tests: All tests as required by Section 15050 shall be performed and everything required for test shall be provided by the contractor. Notify the engineer, in writing, five (5) days before performing any tests. All tests shall be performed in the presence of a manufacturer's representative. B. Start -Up and Initial Operational Test: All equipment shall be started and operated. Follow the manufacturer's procedures and place the systems under all modes of DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840-17 GATO BUILDING operation. Safety and automatic control instruments shall be adjusted as necessary to place them in proper operation and sequence. Record manufacturer's recommended readings hourly. Operational tests shall cover a period of not less than five ( 5 ) days. ***END OF SECTION*** DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840-18 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15850 - AIR -HANDLING UNITS PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Schedule and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Specification. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Specification provides the technical requirements for constant and variable volume air -handling units with coils for indoor installations. B. Air handlers shall double wall casing construction. The AHU shall be factory fabricated and factory or field assembled. The AHU shall include all air treatment and air handling components required for application. C. Air handlers to provide loot outdoor air to be equipped with Dehumidifier Heat Pipes to precool the outdoor air (OA) in a wrap around configuration. The precool heat exchanger shall be located immediately before the OA cooling coil and the reheat heat exchanger located immediately after the OA cooling coil. Both heat exchangers shall be inside the integral to the equipment cabinet. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ARI 430 - Standard for Central Station Air Handling Units. B. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. C. ANSI/AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. D. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards. E. ARI 410 - Standard for Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Air -Heating Coils. F. ANSI/UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units. G. AMCA 301 - Method for Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices. AIR -HANDLING UNITS 15850-1 GATO BUILDING 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Air Handling Units: Product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of components who issues complete catalog data on total product offering. B. Air Handling Units: Certify capacity, static pressure, fan speed, brake horsepower and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 430-89. C. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410-87. D. Heat Pipes: Product of manufacturer regularly engaged in _ production of components who issues complete catalog data on total product offering. E. Air Coil/Heat Pipe Combination: Certify capacities, -- pressure drops and selection procedures. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as -built drawings and product data. B. As -built drawings shall show unit configuration in direction of airflow, and shall indicate assembly and unit dimensions. C. Product data shall indicate dimensions, weights, capacities, fan performance, motor electrical characteristics, and finishes of materials. D. Submit product data of filter sizes and quantities, filter performance, and filter frames. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. F. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data. B. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, — motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams. 1.7 DELIVER, STORAGE, AND HANDLING AIR -HANDLING UNITS 15850-2 GATO BUILDING A. Deliver products to site on a factory -installed 6" high base rail or shipping skid. B. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 CABINET A. Materials: Formed and reinforced galvanized steel panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed. 1. Medium - and high-pressure units shall be constructed with additional bracing and supports. Units rated at 5.5 inches w.g. and higher shall connected to accessories sections with double - thickness neoprene -coated flexible connection. 2. All cabinet sections shall be double -wall constructed with fiberglass insulation between walls. Interior wall shall be two inches thick of 20 gauge, solid plate galvanized steel. Unit access doors or panels shall be of same construction. B. Insulation: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," for insulation. 1. Type: Coated, glass -fiber insulation, 1 inch thick and having a minimum density of 1-1/2 pcf. 2. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of section panels downstream from and including the cooling coil section. C. Access Panels and Doors: Same materials and finishes as cabinet and complete with hinges, latches, handles, and gaskets. AIR -HANDLING UNITS 15850-3 GATO BUILDING 1. Fan section shall have inspection and access panels and doors sized and located to allow periodic maintenance and inspections. D. Double -Wall Drain Pans: Formed sections of stainless sheet steel. Fabricate pans in sizes and shapes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections and return bends) when units are pirating at the maximum cataloged face velocity across the cooling coil. Fill space between double -wall construction with foam insulation and seal moisture tight. 1. Drain connections: Both ends of the pan. 2. Pan top surface coating: Elastomeric compound. 3. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan or a drain trough to collect condensate from top coil. 2.2 FANS SECTION A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required: 1. General: Sound power level ratings shall comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data" and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating." Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings Seal. 2. Unit's fans performance ratings for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency shall be factory tested and ratings established in accordance with AMCA Standard 210/ASHRAE Standard 51 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. B. Fan Section Construction: Fan section shall be equipped with a formed steel channel base for integral mounting of fan, motor, and casing panels. The fan scroll, wheel, shaft, bearings, and motor shall be mounted on a structural steel frame with frame mounted on base with vibration isolators. C. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fan wheel shall be double -width, double -inlet type with forward -curved blades or backward -curved airfoil section blades as AIR -HANDLING UNITS 15850-4 GATO BUILDING indicated. Forward -curved blade wheels shall be galvanized steel or bonderized steel painted with baked -enamel finish. Airfoil wheels shall be steel painted with zinc chromate primer and an enamel finish coat. Fan shaft shall be solid steel, turned, ground, and polished. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft. D. Shaft Bearings: Grease -lubricated ball bearings selected for 200,000 hours' average life, with grease fittings extended to an accessible location outside the fan section. 2.3 MOTORS A. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate the driven loads satisfactorily. B. Motor Sizes: Large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate outside the service factor range. C. Temperature Rating: 50 deg C maximum temperature rise at 40 deg C ambient for continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation). D. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors. E. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B. 1. Bases: Adjustable. 2. Bearings: The following features are required: a. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals. b. Grease lubricated. C. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motor. 3. Enclosure Type: The following features are required: a. Open drip -proof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation. b. Guarded drip -proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants. 4. Overload protection: Built-in, automatic reset, AIR -HANDLING UNITS 15850-5 GATO BUILDING F. 2.4 COILS A. thermal overload protection. 5. Noise rating: Quiet. 6. Efficiency: Energy -efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. If efficiency not specified, motors shall have a higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors" in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. 7. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction, and special features. Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices are specified in Installation Requirements, Section 3. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required: 1. Coil Performance Tests: Cooling and heating coils, except sprayed surface coils, shall be factory tested for rating in accordance with ARI 410 - Standard for Forced -Circulation Air- Cooling and Air -Heating Coils. B. Coil Sections: Common or individual insulated, galvanized steel casings for heating and cooling coils. Coil section shall be designed and constructed to facilitate removal of coil for maintenance and replacement and to assure full air flow through coils. Coils deeper than six rows shall be separated into two coils with a two foot (21) separation between the coils to allow for cleaning and inspection. 1. Multizone units shall have air deflectors and air baffles for balanced air flow across both heating and cooling coils. 2. Medium - and high-pressure units shall have double gaskets between sections and coil connection penetrations through casing sealed to minimize leakage. C. Coils, General: Drainable, rigidly supported across the full face of the coil, and pitched to allow drainage. 1. Fins: Aluminum or copper, constructed from flat AIR -HANDLING UNITS 15850-6 GATO BUILDING plate with belled collars for tubes. Fins shall be bonded to tubes by mechanically expanding copper tubes. 2. Tubes: Seamless copper. 3. Coil Casing: Galvanized steel. 4. Headers for Steam and Water Coils: Steel or cast iron, with connections for drain valve and air vent and threaded piping connections. D. Direct -Expansion Refrigerant Coils: Designated and fabricated in compliance with ASHRAE Standard 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." Coils shall have the following features: 1. Suction Headers and Distributor Tubes: Seamless copper. 2. Venturi -type refrigerant distributor, designed for low pressure drop, arranged for down feed with solder connections, and having a maximum of 12 circuits for each distributor. a. Coils with more than 12 circuits shall have two distributors. b. Split circuit coils shall have two distributors. 2.5 DAMPERS A. General: Leakage rate when tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters, shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity calculated at 2,000 fpm face velocity through damper and 4.0 inches w.g. pressure differential. 1. Damper operators shall be electrically operated. 2. Damper operators are specified in Division 15 Section "Electric Controls Systems." B. Face and Bypass Dampers: Opposed -blade galvanized steel dampers, with steel operating rods rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted in a single galvanized steel frame, and with operating rods connected together with a common linkage. Damper blades shall be break -formed at the edge, have gaskets and edge seals, and shall be mechanically fastened to the operating rod. C. Zone Dampers: Two single -blade galvanized steel dampers offset 90 degrees from each other on the same steel operating rod. Operating rods shall rotate in sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted in a single galvanized AIR -HANDLING UNITS 15850-7 GATO BUILDING steel frame. Damper blades shall be break- formed at the -- edge, have gaskets and edge seals, and shall be mechanically fastened to the operating rod. D. Mixing Boxes: Parallel -blade dampers in a reinforced, galvanized steel cabinet. Damper blades shall be galvanized steel mechanically fastened to steel operating rod. Connect operating rods for each set of dampers together with a common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously and in the opposite direction (one opens when the other closes). E. Combination Filter/Mixing Box: Parallel -blade dampers in a reinforced, galvanized steel cabinet. Damper blades shall be galvanized steel mechanically fastened to steel operating rod. Connect operating rods for each set of dampers together with a common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously and in the opposite direction (one opens when the other closes). Cabinet shall have support members to hold 2-inch-thick, pleated, flat permanent or throwaway filters. Mixing boxes shall have hinged access panels or doors to allow removal of filters for both sides of unit. 2.6 FILTERS SECTION A. General: Filters shall comply with NFPA Standard 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and -- Ventilating Systems." B. Filter Section: Cabinet material, finish and construction shall match the air -handling unit cabinet, with filter media holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation. C. Disposable Filters: Provide disposable type air filters 2 inches thick, consisting of viscous coated fibers with filtering media encased in fiberboard cell sides having perforated metal grids on each face to provide media support. Filters shall have a rated average dust spot efficiency of not less than 25 to 35 percent and final filters shall have 90% efficiency when tested in accordance with ASHRAE 52-76 atmospheric dust spot method. D. Design face velocity should not exceed 500 FPM for all air filters. 2.7 HEAT PIPES AIR -HANDLING UNITS 15850-8 -- GATO BUILDING A. Tubes shall be copper of specific design for heat pipe application, permanently expanded onto the fin collar to form a firm, rigid and complete pressure contact at all operating conditions. The submittal shall include evidence that the heat pipes are U.L. listed. B. Fin surface shall be continuous plate type aluminum fins of specific design to produce maximum heat transfer efficiency for heat pipe applications. Maximum airside pressure loss shall be 0.10 inches W.G., Maximum fin density shall be 12 fpi. C. Heat transfer fluid shall be classified as Safety Group Al in BSR/ASHRAE Std 15-1989 R. D. Heat pipe shall provide sixteen (16) degrees of precooling and reheat to outdoor air at design conditions. E. Heat pipes shall be installed in the air handlers as shown on the drawings. F. Frames and mounting structure shall be minimum 20 ga. Galvanized sheet metal. G. Heat Pipe piping and circuitry circuit shall be individually processed, charged, hermetically sealed and tested. 2.8 DRAIN PANS A. Condensate drains and drain pans shall be sloped 1/4 in. per ft and constructed to allow for complete drainage. B. Drain pans shall be lined with an antimicrobial coating, copper bearing paint, or coppersheet and extend downstream a minimum of 1/2 the height of the coil. C. Intermediate drain pans spaced at a maximum of 42 inches vertically shall be provided for coil over a height of four feet (41). D. Intermediate drain pans to have a separate pipe to condensate drain pan or drain. 2.9 CONTROLS AHU shall be provided with a control panel with hinged access doors and an approved locking device. The units control system shall control both temperature and relative humidity AIR -HANDLING UNITS 15850-9 GATO BUILDING with dehumidification (coil operation) to outdoor air temperatures of 480. The control system shall include the following components required for automatic operation and integration and existing BAS. A. Main fused disconnect switch. B. Main control panel with fused brancsh circuits (motors and control circuit transformer). IEC fan motor starters with bimetallic, ambient compensated overload relays (class 20 trip time), and terminals for interconnecting control wiring (occupied/unoccupied mode, and smoke detector safeties). C. Supply air dew -point controls. D. Outside air temperature sensor and humidity transducer, CHW coil discharge air temperature sensor, and supply air temperature sensor shall be provided for field mounting and wiring by A.T.C. E. Remote control panel with system on -off auto switch and supply fan status light. PART THREE - INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, housekeeping pads, and other conditions affecting performance of central -station air- handling units. B. Examine rough -in for steam, hydronic, condensate drainage piping and electrical to verify actual locations of connections prior to installation. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install central -station air -handling units level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Support floor -mounted units on equipment bases using neoprene pads. 2. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural AIR -HANDLING UNITS 15850-10 GATO BUILDING B. steel support frame using threaded steel rods and vibration isolation springs. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air -handling units for service and maintenance. 3.3 EQUIPMENT BASES A. Construct concrete equipment pads as follows: 1. Coordinate size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 4 inches larger in both directions than the overall dimensions of the supported unit. 2. Form concrete pads with framing lumber with form release compounds. Chamfer top edge and corners of pad. 3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate securing units. 4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of units. Use Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C 150, 4,000 psi compressive strength, and normal weight aggregate. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 sections. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, valves, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Arrange piping installations adjacent to units to allow unit servicing and maintenance. 2. Connection piping to air -handling units with flexible connectors. 3. Connect condensate drain pans using 1-1/4-inch, Type M copper tubing. Extend to the nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction. B. Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 15 sections. Make final duct connections with flexible connections. C. Electrical Connections: The following requirements apply: 1. Electrical power wiring is specified in Division AIR -HANDLING UNITS 15850-11 GATO BUILDING 16. 2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring is specified in Division 15 Section "Electrical Control Systems." 3. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Arrange and pay for a factory- authorized service representative to perform the following: 1. Inspect the field assembly of components and installation of central -station air -handling units including piping, ductwork, and electrical connections. 2. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective actions. 3.6 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING A. Adjust water coil flow, with control valves to full coil flow, to indicated gpm. B. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. C. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel, fan cabinet, and coils entering air face. 3.7 COMMISSIONING A. Final Checks Before Start -Up: Perform the following operations and checks before start-up: 1. Remove shipping, blocking, and bracing. 2. Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify proper thermal overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects. 3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor and verify proper motor rotation direction and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards. 5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory -recommended lubricants. AIR -HANDLING UNITS 15850-12 GATO BUILDING 6. Set zone dampers to full open for each zone. 7. Set face -and -bypass dampers to full face flow. 8. Set outside -air and return -air mixing dampers to minimum outside- air setting. 9. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation. 10. Install clean filters. 11. Verify manual and automatic volume control, and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in the full -open position. 12. Disable automatic temperature control operators. B. Starting procedures for central -station air -handling units: 1. Energize motor, verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated RPM. a. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. 2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage. C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature control operators. D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for air -handling -system testing, adjusting, and balancing. 3.8 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstration Services: Arrange and pay for a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel on the following: 1. Procedures and schedules related to start-up and shut down, troubleshooting, servicing, preventative maintenance, and how to obtain replacement parts. 2. Familiarization with contents of Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" and Division 15 Section "Basic Materials and Methods." B. Schedule training with at least 7 days' advance notice. **** END OF SECTION **** AIR -HANDLING UNITS 15850-13 GATO BUILDING. SECTION 15862 - CENTRIFUGAL EXHAUST FANS PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Contractor shall provide and install centrifugal exhaust fans, as specified herein, of sizes and capacities scheduled and in locations shown on drawings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE A. Power roof exhauster to have ACMA seal for air and sound as scheduled. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data to Architect for approval as required by Section 15050. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers are Cook, Greenheck, Acme, Penn or approved equal. 2.2 ROOF MOUNTED FANS A. Drives: Variable pitch V-belt drives or direct driven as scheduled. V-belt drives shall be rated for 150% of motor horsepower. B. Housings: Heavy gauge/spun aluminum enclosing motor outside airstream. Hinge housing for ready access to motor. C. Motor: Ball bearing type, designed for heavy duty vertical mounting. Isolate motors and fans from base with rubber isolators. Motor BHP not to exceed nameplate at rated conditions. D. Fans: Centrifugal type, statically and dynamically balanced. E. Provide fans complete with the following: 1. Lubricated lifetime sealed ball bearings. 2. Sparkproof constructions with explosion proof CENTRIFUGAL EXHAUST FANS 15862-1 GATO BUILDING motor suitable for Class I, Group C, Division 2 service, where scheduled on drawings. 3. Gravity dampers where not specified to be motorized. 4. Motorized backdraft dampers interlocked as shown in control drawings. 5. Disconnect switch. 6. Bird screen around fan discharge. 7. Where required, prefabricated, 1" thick fiberglass insulated, roof curb of same materials as fan housings and manufactured by the fan manufacturer. 8. See architectural drawing for roof pitch. 9. Upblast housing where shown on drawings. 10. Solid state speed controller, where required to properly balance airflow on direct drive fans. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 ROOF MOUNTED FANS A. Secure fans to curbs with stainless steel screws. B. Connect duct to fans to allow for straight and smooth airflow. C. Provide flexible connections (minimum of 4" between fan and duct. D. Install fan level - plus or minus 5 degrees in vertical. Final installation to be free of all leaks both from fan interior and roof -to -curb interface. 3.2 START-UP, TESTING, DEMONSTRATION A. Start-up fans after checkout to insure proper alignment and phased electrical connections. B. Test fans individually and as part of a system, where required, in accordance with Section 15030. C. where required, insure that fans are interlocked with supply and/or return fans and with fire detection and control system. D. Demonstrate operation to Owner and instruct his personnel in operation. ***END OF SECTION*** CENTRIFUGAL EXHAUST FANS 15862-2 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15899 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for all air terminal units as indicated , in accordance with the provisions of the contract documents. B. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades to maintain sufficient clearances for servicing valves, actuators, etc. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA 90A, Standard for the installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data to architect for approval as required by Section 15050. 1.4 GUARANTEE A. Manufacturer guarantees resultant noise levels to be within NC rating specified. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products manufactured by York, Trane, or Titus. 2.2 SHUT-OFF VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES A. Casing shall be welded 22 gauge galvanized steel. Outlet connections sized to fit standard round, flexible duct diameters. Leak rate shall not exceed 2 percent at o.5 inch WG. B. Interior surface of casing shall be acoustically and thermally lined with 1/2 inch thick, 1-1/2 lb. density fiber insulation, with high density facing insulation shall be UL listed and meet NFPA 90A requirements. C. Modulation shall be by cylindrical die cast aluminum airflow control device with integral actuator, tapered to AIR TERMINAL UNITS 15899-1 GATO BUILDING fit standard round flexible duct diameters. Integral flow tap and calibration chart shall be provided on unit. Leak rate shall not exceed 4 percent at 3.0 inches WG. D. Regulator shall be thermostatically reset velocity controller which provides constant delivery air control within +5 percent of rated flow, down to 25 percent of unit rated CFM, independent of changes in system static pressure. Factory calibrated field adjustable set points shall be provided to set maximum and minimum CFM. E. Thermostats shall be remote, electronic, DDC wall -mounted type. 2.3 CONSTANT/VARIABLE VOLUME REHEAT BOXES A. Casing shall be welded 22 gauge galvanized steel. Outlet connections sized to fit standard round, flexible duct diameters. Leak rate shall not exceed 2 percent at 0.5 inch WG. B. Interior surface of casing shall be acoustically and thermally lined with 1/2 inch thick, 1-1/2 lb. density glass fiber insulation, with high intensity facing. Insulation shall be UL listed and meet NFPA 90A requirements. 1. Constant/variable volume boxes serving operating rooms, delivery rooms, recovery rooms, ICU/CCU rooms, isolation rooms, or other patient treatment areas shall have a polyvinyl liner covering fiberglass insulation to prevent entrainment of glass fibers into airstream. Liner shall be factory applied. C. Modulation shall be cylindrical die cast aluminum airflow control devise with integral actuator operating, tapered to fit standard round flexible duct diameters. Integral flow taps and calibration chart shall be provided on unit. Leak rate shall not exceed 4 percent at 3.0 inches WG. D. Regulator shall be thermostatically reset velocity controller which provides constant delivery air control within +5 percent of rated flow, down to 25 percent of unit rated CFM, independent of changes in system static pressure. Factory calibrated field adjustable set points shall be provided to set maximum and minimum CFM. E. Thermostats shall be remote, electronic DDC, wall -mounted AIR TERMINAL UNITS 15899-2 -- GATO BUILDING type. F. Reheat coil shall be factory mounted to box, of size indicated on drawings, and of the following type: 1. Hot water coil consisting of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes with maximum 16 gauge galvanized steel angle frames for bolting coils to ductwork. Provide coils with drain and air vent connections. Coils shall be ARI certified and tested for 200 PSIG maximum operating pressure. 2. Electric resistance heating coil with primary and secondary over -temperature protection, built-in magnetic contractors, air flow switch, PE switch and disconnect switch mounted in a single control enclosure. Heater and all components shall be UL listed. 2.4 FAN POWERED VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES A. Casing shall be 26 gauge galvanized steel with rectangular discharge. A one piece aluminum backdraft damper shall be provided on the discharge of the fan. This damper shall be factory set and aligned for precise seal. Leak rate shall not exceed 2 percent of 0.5 inch WG. B. The interior surface of the casing shall be acoustically and thermally lined with 1/2 inch thick, 1-1/2 lb. density glass fiber insulation with high density facing. Insulation shall be UL listed and shall meet NFPA 90A requirements. C. Modulation shall be cylindrical die cast aluminum airflow control device with integral actuator operating over a 5 to 10 PSI spring range, tapered to fit standard round flexible duct diameters. Integral flow taps and calibration chart shall be provided on unit. Leak rate shall not exceed 4 percent at 3.0 inches WG. D. Regulator shall be thermostatically reset velocity controller which provides constant delivery air control within +5 percent of rated flow, down to 25 percent of unit rated CFM, independent of changes in system static pressure. Factory calibrated field adjustable set points shall be provided to set maximum and minimum CFM. E. Fan shall be forward curved be style with galvanized steel wheel. Housing shall be 18 gauge steel and fanboard AIR TERMINAL UNITS 15899-3 GATO BUILDING 16 gauge steel. _ F. Motor shall be a permanent split capacitor type, direct drive, three speed with low voltage starting and shall _ have an extended oil tube. Motor temperatures rise shall be less than 50 degrees centigrade on all speeds. G. Fan controls shall include an on -off switch factory — mounted on the unit. H. An expanded metal or hardware cloth cover shall be furnished and installed on the recirculated air inlet. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install all units as indicated and in accordance with — manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. B. Check connections to insure they are tight with all leakage of 1% or less. _ C. Contractor to coordinate control installations with controls contractor. — 3.2 CLEANING, TESTING, START-UP, DEMONSTRATION A. Clean, test, start-up units in accordance with Section 15050. Check units for proper operation of all controls. Check connected ductwork for leakage and correct any deficiencies found. B. Demonstrate operation of units as a complete system to hospital engineering personnel and instruct them in the — operation, adjustment and repair of the system. **** END OF SECTION **** AIR TERMINAL UNITS 15899-4 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15930 - WATER SYSTEMS TEST ADJUST BALANCE PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division - 15 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section. 1.2 GENERAL A. This Contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete test -adjust -balance (TAB) work of all systems including systems and the equipment and apparatus connected. B. The work required shall consist of setting volume (flow) and speed adjusting equipment provided or specified for the systems, recording data, making tests and preparing reports, all as herein specified. C. The TAB work shall be performed by a separate, independent Contractor, who is specifically and actively engaged in the balancing business and regularly does such work. D. The Test and Balance Agency executing this work shall have a current certification of qualification from Associated Air Balance Council, or from National Environmental Balance Bureau, or, in lieu thereof, shall be qualified as follows: 1. The supervisor directly in charge of this testing shall have a certificate of qualification as above, or shall be a Registered Engineer in the State of Florida with competence in this specific area and shall have not less than two years of experience in test and balance work, and 2. The organization shall have an experience record of two years minimum and shall show results of completed test and balance work on at least one job of similar size and scope to the work herein, and 3. The organization shall demonstrate ownership of suitable instruments for air and water testing and system performance and data sheets and reporting forms. WATER SYSTEMS TEST ADJUST BALANCE 15930-1 GATO BUILDING 4. The Contractor shall agree to carry the test and balance as set forth in the AABC or NEEB Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation. E. Name of test and Balance Agency shall be submitted for approval by the Architect and Consulting Engineer within 30 days after receipt of construction contract by air conditioning contractor. If the contractor fails to submit name of selected test and balance agency within the above prescribed period, the Consulting Mechanical Engineer may select the agency of his choice and contractor must then issue purchase order for this work as directed. F. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish to the balancing -- agency a complete set of plans and specifications and shop drawings as may be required. G. The TAB work may be performed by the installing Contractor with prior written approval by the Architect and/of Engineer. H. Upon direction of the Architect, Engineer or the balancing Contractor, the installing Contractor shall provide, at no additional cost to the Owner, any additional work and/or devices necessary to properly balance the system, including calibrated balancing valves, gauge toppings, flow sensors, and thermometer wells. He shall also be responsible for trimming and balancing pump impellers as necessary to obtain design pump flow rated, or maximum pump efficiency. 1.3 PROCEDURES A. Unless otherwise specified, the water systems, including all equipment, apparatus and distribution systems, shall be tested, adjusted and balanced in accordance with the latest edition of the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems or the latest standards of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) . 1.4 INSTRUMENTS A. All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate, and calibration histories for each instrument shall be available for examination. Calibration and maintenance of all instruments shall be in accordance with the requirements of NEBB or AABC Standards. WATER SYSTEMS TEST ADJUST BALANCE 15930-2 GATO BUILDING 1.5 REPORTS A. Submit two certified copies of the final reports on applicable NEBB or AABC Reporting forms of approval. Provide one copy at the site prior to request for final inspection. B. A completed and approved certified copy of the test and balance report shall be available at the project site at the 100% HRS inspection. C. Each individual final Reporting Form submitted shall bear the name of the person who recorded the data and the seal of the Supervisor of the Balancing Contractor. D. Include identification of all types of instruments used and their latest dates of calibration with the Final reports. E. Note any and all discrepancies in design flows on the report Forms. F. All incomplete Report Forms will not be approved. 1.6 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee that all test, adjust and balance work be performed in accordance with NEBB of AABC Standards and that all water systems operate within plus or minus 10 percent of the design flow rated as shown on the plans/or as scheduled. PART TWO - PRODUCTS (Not applicable to this Section) PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Test, adjust and balance all water systems and the associated components in accordance with the procedures outlined in the Standards. B. When measurements are made at other than design conditions, all test data shall be extrapolated to show the quantities, capacities and conditions that will exist at the specified design temperatures as shown on the plans. The extrapolated capacity of each coil, chiller and other heat exchange apparatus shall be included. WATER SYSTEMS TEST ADJUST BALANCE 15930-3 GATO BUILDING C. Contractor shall prepare the water system for balancing as follows: 1. Open valves to the full position, including coil stop valves, close by-pass valves, and open return - line balancing cocks. 2. Strainers shall be clean. _ 3. Examine water and system to determine they have been treated and are clean. 4. Check pump rotation. 5. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full of water. 6. Check air vents at high points of water system to make sure they are properly installed and are operating freely. Make certain air is removed from circulating system. 7. Set temperature control so coils are calling for full cooling. 8. Check operation of tower automatic by-pass valves. 9. Check and set operating temperature of all equipment, heat exchangers, and chillers to design requirements. D. The test and balance Contractor shall perform the following tests and balance of the system in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Set chilled water and hot water pumps to proper gallons per minute delivery. 2. Adjust water flow of chilled water through chiller. 3. Check leaving water temperatures and return water temperatures through chiller. Reset to correct design temperatures. 4. Check water temperatures at inlet side of cooling and heating coils. Note rise or drop of temperatures from source. 5. Proceed to balance each chilled water coil. WATER SYSTEMS TEST ADJUST BALANCE 15930-4 GATO BUILDING 6. Upon completion of flow readings and adjustments at coils, mark all settings and record data. 7. After adjustments to coils are made, recheck settings at the pumps and chillers and readjust if required. 8. Install pressure gauges on coils, read pressure drop through coil and set flow rate on coil for full cooling and on full heating. Set pressure drop across bypass valve to match coil full flow pressure drop. 9. Same procedure on chiller to adjust chiller bypass valve. 10. Record and check the following items at each cooling element: A. Inlet water temperatures B. Leaving water temperatures C. Pressure drop of each coil D. Pressure drop across bypass valve E. Pump operating suction and discharge pressure and final Total Dynamic Head (TDH). 11. List all mechanical specifications of pumps. 12. List rated and actual running amperage of pump motor. 13. List water metering device reading. E. Upon completion of TAB work, mark equipment settings, including valve indicators, and similar devices, to indicate final settings in an approved manner. ***END OF SECTION*** WATER SYSTEMS TEST ADJUST BALANCE 15930-5 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15940 - AIR SYSTEMS TEST ADJUST BALANCE PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions or Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division - 15 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. The owner will select and employ an impartial, independent balancing agency to provide testing and balancing services for the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) systems of this project. These services will be paid for by the owner. Final approval of the balancing contractor shall be by the owner. B. This Contractor shall be responsible for providing complete test -adjust -balance (TAB) work of all systems including systems and the equipment and apparatus connected. C. The work required shall consist of setting volume (flow) and speed adjusting facilities provided or specified for the systems, recording data, making tests and preparing reports, all as hereinafter specified including opposite season test and balance. D. The TAB work shall be performed by a separate, independent Contractor, who is specifically and actively engaged in the balancing business and regularly does such work. E. The Test and Balance Agency executing this work shall have a current certification of qualification from Associated Air Balance Council, or from National Environmental Balance Bureau, or, in lieu thereof, shall be qualified as follows: 1. The supervisor directly in charge of this testing shall have a certificate of qualification as above, or shall be a Registered Engineer in the State of Florida with competence in this specific area and shall have not less than two years of experience in test and balance work, and 2. The organization shall have an experience record of AIR SYSTEMS TEST ADJUST BALANCE 15940-1 GATO BUILDING two years minimum and shall show results of completed test and balance work on at least one job of similar size and scope to the work herein, and 3. The organization shall demonstrate ownership of suitable instruments for air and water and sound testing and system performance and data sheets and reporting forms, and 4. The Contractor shall agree to carry the test and balance as set forth in the AABC National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation. F. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish to the balancing agency a complete set of plans and specifications and -- shop drawings as may be required. G. Upon direction of the Architect, Engineer or the balancing Contractor, the installing Contractor shall provide, at no additional cost to the Owner, any additional work and/or devices necessary to properly balance the system, including fan sheave, motor sheave and/or drive belts. 1.3 PROCEDURES A. Unless otherwise specified, the water systems, including all equipment, apparatus and distribution systems, shall be tested, adjusted and balanced in accordance with the latest edition of the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems or the latest standards of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC). 1.4 INSTRUMENTS A. All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate, and calibration histories for each instrument shall be available for examination. Calibration and maintenance of all instruments shall be in accordance with the requirements of NEBB or AABC Standards. B. Application of instruments and accuracy of measurements shall be in accordance with NEBB or AABC Standards. 1.5 REPORTS A. Submit two certified copies of the final reports on applicable NEBB or AABC Reporting forms of approval. AIR SYSTEMS TEST ADJUST BALANCE 15940-2 GATO BUILDING Provide one copy at the site prior to request for final inspection. B. A completed and approved certified copy of the test and balance report shall be available at the project site at the 100% inspection. C. Each individual final Reporting Form submitted shall bear the name of the person who recorded the data and the seal of the Supervisor of the Balancing Contractor. D. Include identification of all types of instruments used and their latest dates of calibration with the Final reports. E. Note any and all discrepancies in design flows on the report Forms. F. All incomplete Report Forms will not be approved. 1.6 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee that all test, adjust and balance work be performed in accordance with NEBB of AABC Standards and that all water systems operate within plus or minus 10 percent of the design flow rated as shown on the plans/or as scheduled. PART TWO - PRODUCTS (Not applicable to this Section) PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST PREPARATIONS A. The Test and Balance Contractor shall obtain necessary information, drawings, equipment data, performance curves, and shall perform a preconstruction plan check and construction review to insure system's balanceability and shall inspect all systems prior to the test and balance work. The preliminary procedures shall be observed or as outlined in the 1989 AABC National standards, 5th Edition, Section 5. The Testing Contractor shall ensure that all systems are complete, ceilings installed in plenums, except as herein specified, and equipment is operational before testing begins. Also, the Testing contractor shall prepare schematics for the air distribution system showing each measurement location and keying the locations on these AIR SYSTEMS TEST ADJUST BALANCE 15940-3 GATO BUILDING schematics back to the Contract Drawings by room number and compass orientation or other acceptable method. 3.2 TESTING A. Test, adjust and balance all water systems and the associated components in accordance with the procedures outlined in the Standards. B. When are made at other than design conditions, all test data shall be extrapolated to show the quantities, capacities and conditions that will exist at the specified design temperatures as shown on the plans. The extrapolated capacity of each coil, chiller and other heat exchange apparatus shall be included. - C. Two copies of the complete test report shall be submitted to the engineer prior to final inspection and acceptance of the project. D. Contractor shall prepare the air side for balancing as follows: 1. Mechanically check fans, blowers and air handling equipment and make available to operate under design conditions. 2. Set volume dampers, fire dampers, and vanes in their normal position. 3. Set grilles, diffusers, etc., installed with vanes and blades in their normal position. 4. Mechanically check controls, whether they are electronic, electric or pneumatic or a combination thereof, and make available to operate under design conditions. 5. Verify filters installed and acceptable to the Engineer with regard to design static drops for clean filters. 6. Verify damper shafts and locking devices marked to truly represent the position of their respective dampers. E. Contractor to make changes in the pulleys, belts, and dampers as required for correct balance as recommended by the air balance and testing agency, at no additional cost to the Owner. AIR SYSTEMS TEST ADJUST BALANCE 15940-4 GATO BUILDING F. The air balance agency shall perform the following tests and balance of the system in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Test adjust blower RPM to design requirements. 2. Test and record motor full load amperes. 3. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply ducts and obtain design CFM at fans. 4. Test and record system static pressures, and suction and discharge. 5. Test and adjust system for design recirculated air CFM. 6. Test and adjust for design CFM outside air. 7. Test and record entering air temperatures (DB heating and cooling). a. Test and record entering air temperatures (WB cooling). 9. Test and record leaving air temperatures (DB heating and cooling). 10. Test and record leaving air temperatures (WB cooling). il. Adjust all main supply and return air ducts to proper design CFM. 12. Adjust all zones to proper design CFM, supply and return. 13. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register to provide uniform room air temperatures. 14. Each grille, diffuser and register shall be identified as to location and area. 15. Test and record all room temperatures, DB and WB. Test shall be made near room thermostat locations where they exist. 16. Size, type and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers and all tested equipment shall be identified and listed. Manufacturer's ratings on AIR SYSTEMS TEST ADJUST BALANCE 15940-5 GATO BUILDING all equipment shall be used to make required calculations. 17. Readings and tests of diffusers, grilles and registers shall include required FPM velocity and test resultant velocity, required CFM and test resultant CFM after adjustments. 18. In cooperation with the control manufacturer's representative, set adjustments of automatically operated dampers to operate as specified, indicated, and/or noted. Testing agency shall check all controls for proper calibrations and list all controls requiring adjustment by control installers. 19. All diffusers, grilles and registers shall be adjusted to minimize drafts in all areas. E. Upon completion of TAB work, mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, fan speed control levers, and similar devices to indicate final settings in an approved manner and deliver two (2) copies of the complete test and balance report to the engineer. ***END OF SECTION*** AIR SYSTEMS TEST ADJUST BALANCE 15940-6 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15950 - SYSTEM COMPLETION PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 INSTRUCTIONS Contractor shall coordinate the work of all sections pertaining to HVAC system installation and insure that it is accomplished in a timely and proper manner. Prior to requesting Substantial Completion Inspection, the Contractor shall provide the Architect/Engineer with a letter stating that the requirements of this section have been met. The letter shall contain an itemized list indicating that each item has been personally checked by the Superintendent and that it is ready for inspection. With letter, provide reports, schedules, etc. as required. This section is intended as a checklist for the Contractor to insure that items specified are properly installed and to insure that a premature Substantial Completion Inspection is not requested. PART TWO - EXECUTION 2.1 PERFORMANCE A. Check air distribution systems and insure that systems are properly tested and balanced, see Section 15940. B. Check filters. If dirty, install new filters. Dirty shall be defined as pressure drop exceeding .5" wg. Provide one additional set of filters. C. Lubricate fans, motors, etc. Provide a schedule listing each piece of equipment requiring lubrication, the points to be lubricated, the product and device to be used, and the frequency of lubrication required. D. Check and insure that all equipment is properly installed, mounted as specified and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. At the time of equipment start-up insure that control, power wiring, and interlocks are complete. Check the alignment of motors and drives. Verify that overload heaters are properly sized. Check motor rotation. E. Provide system identification as specified. F. Provide for a thorough cleaning of the installation. This shall include removing temporary covers, removal of adhesive applied stickers except those giving specific maintenance instructions which were intended to remain on SYSTEM COMPLETION 15950-1 GATO BUILDING the equipment, remove cord and wire affixed tags, clean paint spatters, clean coating and adhesive spatters, and vacuum inside of heat pump plenums. G. Provide for touch-up painting of factory finished equipment. Touchup painting is intended to cover minor dents, scratches, etc. Surface shall be prepared by light sanding or derusting with chemical compounds such as naval jelly, then coated with a compatible primer and followed by a matching top coat. Where major damage has occurred or equipment is deeply or widely rusted, the entire piece shall be refinished as directed by the Architect/Engineer. H. The Contractor shall provide manuals (four required) containing operational, installation, and maintenance data for each system. Manuals shall be organized in a 3-part format using 3-ring binders. All materials shall be bound in as many 3-ring notebooks as required to contain the required information. Part One - General: Provide data on installing Contractor, with principal Subcontractors and equipment suppliers, including home address, telephone numbers, and special telephone numbers for service departments on normal and emergency call basis. Include copies of certificates issued for the building system and copies of start-up reports. Part Two - Operating Instructions: Provide narrative description of system start -stop procedures, seasonal changeover, and routine maintenance. Part Three - Maintenance Instructions; Provide copies of the manufacturer's maintenance instructions along with approved shop drawings of the specific equipment and complete parts list. On packaged equipment, provide a bill of materials with purchase order numbers for the supplier's identification of equipment orders. Provide lubrication schedule and charts and Test and Balance Report. Final payment to the Contractor will not be made until receipt of manuals. I. Provide for normal eight hour instruction and orientation session to instruct Owner's operating personnel in the system's operation. The Contractor shall also provide for an orientation tour of the facility to properly instruct the operating personnel. The Contractor shall obtain a receipt from the Owner's Representative stating that operating instructions have been completed. **** END OF SECTION **** SYSTEM COMPLETION 15950-2 GATO BUILDING SECTION 15995 - HVAC SYSTEM COMMISSIONING PART ONE - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Purpose 1. Verify operation and functional performance of HVAC systems for compliance with "Design Intent." a. Design criteria and assumptions b. HVAC system description and contract documentation and C. Intended methods of system operation and maintenance 2. Document HVAC tests and inspections. 3. Verify application of operation and maintenance manuals, as built (record) documents, spare parts listing, special tools listing, and other items as may be specified herein for support of HVAC systems and equipment. 4. Coordinate and direct training to personnel for operation and maintenance of HVAC equipment and systems. B. General 1. The commissioning work shall be performed by a sperate, independent contractor, who is specifically and actively engaged in the commissioning business and regularly does such work. 2. Furnish labor and materials to accomplish HVAC commissioning as specified herein. Complete interim commissioning of HVAC systems during initial season operation and follow-up commissioning of required HVAC systems during additional season operation. 3. The HVAC Commissioning Authority shall be a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Florida, with the following qualifications: a. A minimum of eight (8) years of experience in the HVAC design/construction industry. b. A successful history of other projects HVAC COMMISSIONING 15995-1 GATO BUILDING similar in size and complexity in which commissioning of the HVAC systems has been performed. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standard: 1. ASHRAE Guideline 1-1989, Guideline for Commissioning of HVAC Systems. 1.3 DOCUMENTATION A. The General Contractor shall provide the HVAC Commissioning Authority the following: 1. Project plans and specifications (contract documents), authorized revisions, approved HVAC shop drawings and submittals, Test and Balance reports, equipment start-up and certification reports, etc. — 2. Records of required code authority inspections, documentation sign -offs, etc. _ 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. HVAC Commissioning Authority will submit to the - Engineer and the General Contractor the following information for approval prior to starting the commissioning process. _ 1. Commissioning Plan 2. Training Plan — 3. Tool List 1.5 RESPONSIBILITIES OF OTHERS A. General Contractor: _ 1. General Contractor shall verify completeness of the building envelope, perimeter and interior items which effect proper operation and control of HVAC equipment and systems. 2. The General Contractor will assure participation and cooperation of specialty subcontractors (electrical, Test and Balance, control/energy HVAC COMMISSIONING 15995-2 GATO BUILDING management and HVAC) under his jurisdiction as required for the commissioning process. 3. The General Contractor shall secure the services of a professional video service to record all training sessions provided by the specialty subcontractors. B. Specialty Subcontractors: 1. The specialty subcontractors will be responsible for providing labor, material, equipment, etc., required within the scope of their specialty to facilitate the commissioning process. These subcontractors will perform tests and verification procedures required by the commissioning process when requested by the Commissioning Authority and directed by the General Contractor. C. Owner/Operator: 1. Owner/Operator will schedule personnel to participate in the HVAC Commissioning process and associated training. a. This may include building security personnel, HVAC operation personnel, and maintenance personnel. Personnel operating and maintaining equipment and systems will attend training sessions, factory schools and educational institutions where indicated. b. Owner/Operator will advise HVAC Commissioning Authority regarding changes in building occupancy and/or usage. PART TWO - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUMENTATION A. Instrumentation will be provided by agency (Specialty Contractor) performing prior tests. Instruments will be operated by individual agency requested by the HVAC Commissioning Authority, as specified elsewhere herein. PART THREE - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL HVAC COMMISSIONING 15995-3 GATO BUILDING A. HVAC Commissioning Authority will actively participate in construction phase of the project to assure compliance with HVAC Commissioning requirements. 3.2 PROCEDURE A. The Commissioning Authority will attend a pre - construction meeting and establish requirements for HVAC Commissioning which shall outline: 1. Responsibility of each trade affected by HVAC Commissioning, as required by appropriate section of this specification. 2. Requirements for documentation as listed elsewhere herein. 3. Requirements for documentation of HVAC test and inspections required by code authorities. 4. Requirements for the HVAC Commissioning program during specified operational seasons, part and full loads and as further delineated in Paragraph 3.3. 5. Format for training program for operation and maintenance personnel. B. Periodically attend construction and coordination meetings. 3.3 HVAC COMMISSIONING A. To assist in the commissioning process. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be completed and turned over to the commissioning authority as soon as possible during the course of the project, but in no case later than two months prior to the initial date scheduled for substantial completion. B. Develop and submit for approval a specific start up, check out and sign off form for every piece of major HVAC equipment as well as other equipment hereinafter listed. These forms and lists do not necessarily have to indicate all the activities, tests and procedures which will be required for the commissioning and start up of each piece of equipment and system. C. Develop and submit for approval a specific start up check out and sign off form for each and every system. HVAC COMMISSIONING 15995-4 GATO BUILDING D. Systems shall be operated under actual or simulated full load conditions. Identify the operating conditions in the work place. E. Where appropriate, systems shall be operated, tested and started up, to assure operation for each of their seasonal or different characteristics. (For example heating and cooling). F. After all components and every system has been completely commissioned, provide a two -week, 24-hour per -day fully functional automatic operation period of all systems simultaneously. This shall be successfully concluded before systems are accepted by the Owner. G. Execute the final approved start up and commissioning plan. H. HVAC Commissioning shall begin after HVAC equipment and systems, along with related equipment, systems, structures and areas are complete. 1. Verify Test and Balance readings including, but not limited to: Supply and return air volumes Fan performance Hydronic performances Branch duct readings Chiller performance Cooling Tower performance 2. Verify calibration of thermostats and related controls including, but not limited to: VAV Boxes and Fan Terminal Units Damper settings Valve positions 3. Verify readings of remote data and control systems (Central Energy Management System) including, but not limited to: HVAC COMMISSIONING 15995-5 GATO BUILDING Temperatures -- Air Flows Damper positions _ Water Pressure Water Temperatures 4. Verify operation of smoke removal system modes, as follows: Smoke damper and fan operation Smoke Detector response Smoke Zone response Smoke Control Panel manual operation 5. Verify that total HVAC system is performing to provide conditions as outlined in "Design Intent", for seasonal full load and part load conditions, as follows: Temperature Humidity Air changes _ Air movement Air quality Zone control Energy Management Pressurization Smoke Control Control Response _ 3.4 HVAC START-UP PROCEDURES A. Prior to start-up of any air handling equipment, the commissioning authority shall inspect the installation HVAC COMMISSIONING 15995-6 GATO BUILDING and verify that: 1. Ductwork is complete, clean and pressure -tested per specifications. 2. Prefilters and final filters are installed by the Contractor per design specifications: prefilters are to be replaced by the Contractor as required during this start-up period. The final filter shall be replaced by the Contractor at any time that the static pressure drop across the filter exceed 1.011. The filters installed shall meet design specifications and shall be dated with a felt-tip marker upon installation. 3. All electrical work is complete. 4. Safety devices are in place and operational 5. Energy Management controls are installed and have been verified to be operational by the controls contractor. 6. Water piping and condensate piping have been installed and insulated per specifications. B. Prior to Occupancy: 1. No less than two weeks prior to substantial completion, the HVAC system for the space to be occupied shall be approved by the commissioning authority to be operational under start-up procedures and shall be set up by the Contractor to operate continuously on a 24-hour basis. The following requirements shall be established by the commissioning authority and adhered to by the contractors during this period: a. The Energy Management Systems is completely installed, and the EMS Contractor has submitted a statement verifying that the system is complete and operational. b. The HVAC air side and water systems shall be balanced at design levels by the Contractor, all systems and devices shall be operating according to specifications and the Contractor's TAB report has been submitted to and approved by the HVAC system Design Engineer. HVAC COMMISSIONING 15995-7 GATO BUILDING C. Outdoor air shall be set at maximum design levels and maintained at those levels continuously during the two -week ventilation period. d. Chilled water temperature (where applicable) shall be operating at design levels. Supply air off -coil temperatures shall be at design levels. e. All exhaust systems are operational and functioning according to design CFM and specifications. f. All electric heaters and hydronic reheat systems are installed and operational. g. Prefilters shall continue to be replaced by the Contractor as required per the start-up schedule. The final filter shall be replaced by the Contractor at any time that the static pressure drop across the filter exceeds 1.0". h. All interior spaces are secured with doors and windows normally closed. i. Interior air quality shall be maintained at 78OF and relative humidity less than 55%. C. At Occupancy: 1. Following the date of final completion and prior to occupancy, the commissioning authority shall verify all prefilters and final filters have been replaced with new, approved, specified filters. **** END OF SECTION **** HVAC COMMISSIONING 15995-8 GATO BUILDING SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Basic Requirements: The Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Provisions: Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make ready for use a complete electrical system as specified herein and shown on the drawings. C. Provide and Install: The word "provide" where used on the Drawings or in this Division shall mean "furnish, install, mount, connect, test, complete, and make ready for operation". The word "install" where used on the Drawings or in this Division shall mean "mount, connect, test, complete, and make ready for operation". The Contractor shall perform all work required by, and in accordance with, the Contract Documents. D. Installation: Provide and place in satisfactory condition, ready for proper operation, all conduits, wires, cables, and other material needed for the complete electrical systems required by the Contract Documents. Additional conduits and wiring shall be provided wherever necessary to complete the installation of the specific equipment provided. Include all auxiliaries and accessories for complete and properly operating systems. Provide all electrical systems and any necessary accessories per NEC and local codes and ordinances. It is the intent of these Specifications that the electrical systems shall be suitable in every way for the service required. All material and work which may be reasonably implied as being incidental to the work of this Contract shall be provided at no additional cost to the Contract. E. Field Connections: Provide field connections to process instruments and control panels provided under other Divisions of these Specifications. Provide all conduit, wire, and interconnections between process instrumentation primary elements, transmitters, local indicators, and receivers. Provide all lightning and surge protection equipment at process instrumentation transmitters and receivers as required. Install field connections to "packaged" equipment provided under other Divisions of these Specifications. F. Engineer Reference to "Engineer" shall also mean the same as "Architect", however, when the reference is related to a technical directive only the "Engineer" shall apply. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. General: The work provided under this Division shall include all labor, materials, permits, inspections and reinspection fees, tools, equipment, transportation, insurance, temporary protection, temporary lighting, supervision and incidental items essential for proper installation and operation, even though not specifically mentioned or indicated but which are usually provided or are essential for proper installation and operation of all Electrical systems as indicated in the contract documents. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-1 GATO BUILDING B. Minimum Requirements: The contract documents describe the minimum requirements that must be met for an acceptable installation. C. Notices: Give all notices, file all Plans, pay all fees, obtain all permits and approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. Include all fees in the Bid Price. 1.3 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS A. General: The Drawings are diagrammatic and are not intended to show exact locations of conduit runs, outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, etc. The locations of equipment, appliances, fixtures, conduits, outlets, boxes and similar devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Exact locations shall be as accepted by the Engineer during construction. Obtain in the field all information relevant to the placing of electrical work and in case of interference with other work, proceed as directed by the Engineer and provide all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an acceptable manner. B. Discrepancies: Notify Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies found during construction of the project and do not proceed with that portion of the project, until a written definitive statement is received providing clear direction. If a conflict exists between the contract documents and any applicable code or standard, the most stringent requirement shall be included for this project. The Engineer shall make the decision regarding questionable areas of conflict. C. Wiring: Each three-phase circuit shall be run in a separate conduit unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer, conduit shall not be installed exposed unless specifically directed to be exposed. Where circuits are shown as "home -runs" all necessary fittings and boxes shall be provided for a complete raceway installation. D. Surface Supports: Surface mounted panel boxes, junction boxes, conduit, etc., shall be supported by spacers to provide a clearance between wall and equipment. E. Layout: Circuit layouts are not intended to show the number of fittings, or other installation details. Provide all labor and materials necessary to install and place in satisfactory operation all power, control, lighting, and other electrical systems shown. All connections to _ equipment shall be made as required, and in accordance with the accepted shop and manufacturer's setting drawings. 36Y Architectural and Structural drawings. Layout before installation so that all trades may install equipment in spaces available. Provide coordination as required for installation in a neat and workmanlike manner. 1.4 EQUIPMENT SIZE AND HANDLING A. Coordination: Investigate each space in the structure through which equipment must pass to reach its final location. If necessary, the equipment shall be required to be shipped in sections of specific sizes to permit the passing through the necessary areas within the structure. B. Handling: All equipment shall be kept upright at all times. When equipment has to be tilted for ease of passage through restricted areas BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-2 GATO BUILDING during transportation, the manufacturer shall be required to brace the equipment suitably, to insure that the tilting does not impair the functional integrity of the equipment. 1.5 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Production: The Contractor shall provide two (2) sets of black or blue line on white drawings to maintain and submit record "as -built drawings". One set shall be maintained at the site and at all times be accurate, clear, and complete, showing the actual location of all equipment as installed. The Record Drawings shall show actual locations of all underground lines and accurate wiring diagrams of all power, light and other systems marked in colored pencil "As Installed". The underground lines shall be shown "Dashed". The "As -Built" drawings shall show all Electrical work installed complete to the present stage of progress, actual routing of all branch wiring, homeruns and the location of all junction boxes and access panels. These drawings shall be available to the Architect/Engineer's field representatives at all times. B. Completion: At the completion of the Work, transfer onto the Second set all changes marked in colored pencil and submit to the Architect. The "As -Built" drawings shall be made available to the Engineer to make the final punch list of the work completed under this Contract. C. Final: Upon Contractor's completion of the Engineer's final punch list, transfer all "As -Built" conditions and all requirements by the Engineer to a reproducible set of drawings. Submit drawings and CAD disks for review and acceptance. The Contractor shall provide updated discs which shall include final As -Built conditions. Base drawing discs are available from the engineer for $75 per drawing including shipping or electronic transfer. Include all disc and drawing costs in the base bid. 1.6 A. ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviations: The following abbreviations or initials may be used: A/C Air Conditioning AC Alternating Current ABV CLG Above Ceiling ADA American Disabilities Act AF Ampere Frame AFF Above Finished Floor AFG Above Finished Grade AHU Air Handler Unit AIC Amps Interrupting Capacity AL Aluminum AMP Ampere ANSI American National Standards Institute ASA American Standards Association AT Ampere Trip ATS Automatic Transfer Switch AUX Auxiliary AWG American Wire Gauge BC Bare Copper BIL Basic Impulse Level BRK Breaker CAB Cabinet C Conduit CB Circuit Breaker BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-3 GATO BUILDING CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers CATV Cable Television CCTV Closed Circuit Television CKT Circuit CLG Ceiling COAX Coaxial Cable COND Conductor CONN Connection CPU Central Processing Unit CRT Cathode Ray Terminal (Video display terminal) CT Current Transformer CU Copper CW Cold Water DC Direct Current DEG Degree DGP Data Gathering Panel DISC Disconnect DO Draw Out DN Down DPST Double Pole Single Throw EMT Electrical Metallic Tubing EO Electrically Operated EOL End of Line Resistor EWC Electric Water Cooler FAAP Fire Alarm Annunciator Panel FACP Fire Alarm Control Panel FCU Fan Coil Unit FLA Full Load Amperes FM Factory Mutual GFI Ground Fault Interrupter GND Ground HD Heat detector HOA Hand -Off -Automatic HORIZ Horizontal HP Horsepower IC Intercom ICU Intensive Care Unit IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IES Illuminating Engineering Society IMC Intermediate Metallic Conduit IN Inches IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association JB Junction Box KV Kilovolt KVA Kilo -Volt -Amps KW Kilowatts LBS Pounds LED Light Emitting Diode LT Light LTG Lighting MAX Maximum MCB Main Circuit Breaker MCC Motor Control Center MCP Motor Circuit Protector MIC Microphone MIN Minimum MLO Main Lugs Only MTD Mounted MTG Mounting MUX Multiplex (Transponder) Panel BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-4 GATO BUILDING MVA Mega Volt Amps N Neutral NEC National Electrical Code NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NIC Not in Contract NF Non Fused NL Non Linear NO Number 0 Phase OL Overload OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration P Pole PB Pullbox PIV Post Indicator Valve PNL Panel PR Pair PWR Power PF Power Factor PRI Primary PROJ Projector PT Potential Transformer PVC Polyvinylchloride REF Refrigerator RMS Root -Mean -Square RPM Revolutions Per Minute RECPT Receptacle SCA Short Circuit Amps SD Smoke Detector SEC Secondary SIN Solid Neutral SPKR Speaker SPST Single Pole Single Throw SW Switch SWBD Switchboard TEL Telephone TTB Telephone Terminal Board TTC Telephone Terminal Cabinet TVEC Television Equipment Cabinet TYP Typical UCR Under Counter Refrigerator UH Unit Heater UL Underwriters Laboratories V Volt W Wire WP Weatherproof XFMR Transformer 1.7 CODES, FEES, AND STANDARDS A. Application: The codes, standards and practices listed herein generally apply to the entire project and all specification sections. Other codes, standards or practices that are more specific will be referenced within a particular specification. B. Requirements: All articles, products, materials, fixtures, forms or types of construction covered in the specifications will be required to meet or exceed all applicable standards of manufacturer, testing, performance, capabilities, procedures and installation according to the BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-5 GATO BUILDING requirements of ANSI, NEMA, IEEE, and NEC referenced documents where indicated and the manufacturer's recommended practices. Requirements indicated on the contract documents which exceed but are not contrary to governing codes shall be followed. C. Compliance and Certification: The installation shall comply with the governing state and local codes or ordinances. The completed electrical installation shall be inspected and certified by all applicable agencies that it is in compliance with all codes. D. Applicability: The codes and standards and practices listed herein, and their respective dates are furnished as the minimum latest requirements. 1. State of Florida. 2. Monroe County. 3. City of Key West. E. Utility Company: Comply with latest utility company regulations. F. State Statutes: Florida Statutes 1. 4A3, The State Fire Prevention Code 2. 4A47, The Uniform Fire Safety Standards for Elevators. G. Building Code: Standard Building Code H. Standards: American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI-A17.1 Elevator Code. I. Manuals: Accessibility Requirements Manual Florida Department of Community Affairs. J. Labels: All materials shall be new and free of defects, and shall be U.L. listed, bear the U.L. label or be labeled or listed with an approved, nationally recognized Electrical Testing Agency. Where no labeling or listing service is available for certain types of equipment, test data shall be submitted to validate that equipment meets or exceeds available standards. K. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards most current edition NFPA-13 Installation of sprinkler systems. NFPA-70 National Electrical Code. NFPA-72 Installation, maintenance and use of fire alarm systems. NFPA-780 Lightning protection code. NFPA-90A Installation of air conditioning and ventilation systems. NFPA-101 Life Safety Code. NFPA-110 Emergency and standby power systems. 1.8 INVESTIGATION OF SITE A. General: Before commencing the work, verify existing conditions at the premises including, but not limited to, existing structural frame, location and all dimensions; existing openings and characteristics; existing wall and partition locations, characteristics and relationship to each other; existing mechanical and electrical work, equipment type, and shall examine all adjoining work on which his work is in anyway BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-6 GATO BUILDING dependent for its perfect efficiency according to the intent of the Contract Documents. B. Responsibility: No waiver of responsibility for defective and inadequate work or additional cost as a result of existing conditions which should have been verified shall be considered unless notice of same has been filed by the Contractor and agreed to in writing by the Architect before the bid date. 1.9 SUPERVISION OF THE WORK A. Supervision: Provide one field superintendent who has had a minimum of four (4) years previous successful experience on projects of comparable sizes and complexity. The Superintendent shall be present at all times when work is being performed. The Superintendent shall have passed a proctored H.H. Block Journeyman Exam with 75% grade or better and shall be a licensed Journeyman. A resume of the Superintendent's experience shall be submitted to Engineer before starting work. At least one member of the Electrical Contracting Firm shall hold a State Master Certificate of Competency. 1.10 COORDINATION A. General: Compare drawings and specifications with those of other trades and report any discrepancies between them to the Architect. Obtain from the Architect written instructions to make the necessary changes in any of the affected work. All work shall be installed in cooperation with other Trades installing interrelated work. Before installation, all Trades shall make proper provisions to avoid interferences in a manner approved by the Architect. B. Adjustments: Locations of conduit and equipment shall be adjusted to accommodate the work with interferences anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact routing and location of all systems prior to fabrication or installation. C. Priorities: Lines which pitch shall have the right of way over those which do not pitch. For example, plumbing drains shall normally have the right of way. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have the right of way over lines whose elevations can be changed. D. Modifications: Offsets and changes of direction in all conduit systems shall be made as required to maintain proper headroom and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the drawings. Provide elbows, boxes, etc., as required to allow offsets and changes to suit job conditions. E. Replacement: All work shall be installed in a way to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of all other system components provided under this Contract requiring periodic replacement or maintenance. All conduit shall be arranged in a manner to clear the openings of swinging overhead access doors as well as ceiling tiles. F. Layout: The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic only intending to show general runs and locations of conduit and equipment, and not necessarily showing all required offsets, details and accessories and equipment to be connected. All work shall be accurately laid out with other Trades to avoid conflicts and to obtain a neat and workmanlike installation which BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-7 GATO BUILDING will afford maximum accessibility for operation, maintenance and headroom. G. Contract Conflicts: Where discrepancies exist in the Scope of Work as to what Trade provides items such as starters, disconnects, flow switches, etc. such conflicts shall be coordinated between the divisions - involved. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that all work shall be provided complete as one bid price. H. Drawing Conflicts: Where drawing details, plans or specification requirements are in conflict and where sizes of the same item run are shown to be different within the contract documents, the most stringent requirement shall be included in the Contract. Systems and equipment called for in the specification or as shown on the drawings shall be provided under the Contract of each trade as if it was required by both the drawings and specifications. Prior to ordering or installation of any portion of work which appears to be in conflict, such work shall be brought to Architect's attention for direction as to what is to be provided. I. Working Clearances: Working clearances about electrical equipment shall be as referenced NEC 110-16, and shall include new equipment installed in existing ceiling spaces. J. Motor Circuits: Contractor shall coordinate circuit breaker, wire and conduit sizes with actual motors supplied. All changes required shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Specified Method: Where several brand names, make or manufacturer are listed as acceptable each shall be regarded as equally acceptable, based on the design selection. Where a manufacturer's model number is listed, this model shall set the standard of quality and performance required. Where no brand name is specified, the source and quality shall be subject to Engineer's review and acceptance. Where three manufacturers are listed, one of the listed manufacturers shall be submitted for acceptance. B. Certification: When a product is specified to be in accordance with a trade association or government standard requested by the Engineer, Contractor shall provide a certificate that the product complies with the referenced standard. Upon request of Engineer, Contractor shall submit supporting test data to substantiate compliance. C. Basis of Bid: Each bidder represents that his bid is based upon the manufacturer's, materials, and equipment described in the Contract Documents. D. Space Requirements: Substituted equipment or optional equipment where permitted and accepted, must conform to established space requirements within the project. Accepted substituted equipment which does not meet _ space requirements, shall be replaced at no additional expense to the Contract. All modifications of related systems as a result of substitutions shall be made at no additional expense to the Contract. Submit all modifications to the Architect/Engineer for acceptance. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-8 GATO BUILDING E. Samples: Samples are to be submitted for all substituted light fixtures, wiring devices, and other items deemed necessary by the Engineer to determine that the substituted item meets all specifications and requirements before substitutions are allowed. Samples shall be submitted within 30 days after the award of the contract. 2.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. General: Shop drawings shall be submitted for every item of equipment and material provided under this Division unless noted herein. One copy shall be submitted to the engineer prior to ordering equipment. Shop drawing formal approval is not required when the manufacturers and model numbers are listed. Refer to Basis of approval paragraph. B. Responsibility: It is the Contractors responsibility to provide all material in accordance with the plans and specifications. Material not provided in accordance with the plans and specifications will be removed and replaced at the Contractors expense. The contractor shall submit one of the manufacturers specified. No substitutions are allowed. C. Official Record: The shop drawing submittal shall become the official record of the materials to be installed. If materials are installed which do not correspond to the record submittal they shall be removed from the project without any additional cost to the Owner or delays in construction completion. D. Information: The shop drawing record submittal shall include the following information to the extent applicable to the particular item; 1. Manufacturer's name and product designation or catalog number. 2. Standards or specifications of ANSI, ASTM, ICEA, IEEE, ISA, NEMA, NFPA, OSHA, UL, or other organizations, including the type, size, or other designation. 3. Dimensioned plan, sections, and elevations showing means for mounting, conduit connections, and grounding, and showing layout of components. 4. Materials and finish specifications, including paints. S. List of components including manufacturer's names and catalog numbers. 6. Internal wiring diagram indicating all connections to components and the terminals for external connections. 7. Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation, operation, and maintenance. 8. Manufacturer's recommended list of spare parts. E. Preparation: Prior to submittal, all shop drawings shall be checked for accuracy and contract requirements. Shop drawings shall bear the date checked and shall be accompanied by a statement that the shop drawings have been examined for conformity to Specifications and Drawings. This statement shall also list all discrepancies with the Specifications and Drawings. Shop drawings not so checked and noted shall be returned to Contractor unreviewed. F. Basis of Review: The Engineer's review shall be for compliance with the Specifications and Drawings. If the product is one of the manufacturers specified, no shop drawing approvals are required. G. Responsibility: The responsibility that all dimensions are confirmed and correlated with proper coordination of all other trades shall be included as part of the Contract Documents. The responsibility and the necessity BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-9 GATO BUILDING of providing materials and workmanship required by the Specifications and Drawings which may not be indicated on the shop drawings shall be included as part of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for any delays in job progress occurring directly or indirectly from late submissions or resubmissions of shop drawings, product data, or samples. H. Ordering Equipment: No material shall be ordered or shop work started until the Engineer's has officially received the shop drawings record submittal and has formally released the Contractor for submittal requirements. I. Brochure Requirements: Submit Technical Information Brochures at the start of construction or no later than 30 days after Award of the Contract. Each brochure shall consist of an adequately sized, hard- cover, 3-ring binder for 8-1/2" X 11" sheets. Provide correct designation on outside cover and on end of brochure. When one binder is not enough to adequately catalog all data, an additional binder shall be submitted. J. Brochure Contents: First sheet in the brochure shall be a photocopy of the Electrical Index pages in these specifications. Second sheet shall be a list of Project Addresses for this project. Third sheet shall list Project Information. Provide reinforced separation sheets tabbed with the appropriate specification reference number and typed index for each section in the Electrical Schedule. Technical Information consisting of marked catalog sheets or shop drawings shall be inserted in the brochure in proper order on all items specified and shown on drawings. At the end of the brochure, provide and insert a copy of the specifications for this Division and all addenda applicable to this Division. K. Contractor's Review: Review the brochures before submitting to the Engineer. No request for payment shall be considered until the brochure has been reviewed, stamped and submitted for review. L. Cost: Submit cost breakdown on work in the Technical Information Brochures. The cost of material and labor for each item shall be indicated. The cost of fittings and incidentals are not required. M. Title Drawings: Title drawings to include identification of project and names of Architect -Engineer, Engineer, Contractors, and/or supplier, data, number sequentially and indicate in general; 1. Fabrication and Erection dimensions. 2. Arrangements and sectional views. 3. Necessary details, including complete information for making connections with other work. 4. Kinds of materials and finishes. 5. Descriptive names of equipment. 6. Modifications and options to standard equipment required by the contract. 7. Leave blank area, size approximately 4 by 2-1/2 inches, near title block (for Engineer's stamp imprint). 8. In order to facilitate review of shop drawings, they shall be noted, indicating by cross reference the contract drawings, notes, and specification paragraph numbers where items occur in the contract documents. 9. See specific sections of specifications for further requirements. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-10 GATO BUILDING N. Technical Data: Submit technical data verifying that the item submitted complies with the requirements of the specifications. Technical data shall include manufacturer's name and model number, dimensions, weights, electrical characteristics, and clearances required. Indicate all optional equipment and changes from the standard item as called for in the specifications. Provide drawings, or diagrams, dimensioned and in correct scale, covering equipment, showing arrangement of components and overall coordination. O. Samples: Provide two samples of materials and finishes. Each sample shall be tagged, labeled, or marked, "Sample of ..........for (PROJECT). Accompany samples with copy, in duplicate of manufacturer's instructions regarding installation, and maintenance. P. Same Manufacturer: In general, relays, contactors, starters, motor control centers, switchboards, panelboards, dry type transformers, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, manual motor starter switches, etc., shall be supplied and manufactured by the same manufacturer. 2.3 EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, AND SUPPORTS A. General: Each item of equipment or material shall be manufactured by a company regularly engaged in the manufacturer of the type and size of equipment, shall be suitable for the environment in which it is to be installed, shall be approved for its purpose, environment, and application, and shall bear the UL label. B. Installation Requirements: Each item of equipment or material shall be installed in accordance with instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer, however, the methods shall not be less stringent than specified herein. C. Required Accessories: Provide all devices and materials, such as expansion bolts, foundation bolts, screws, channels, angles, and other attaching means, required to fasten enclosures, conduits, and other electrical equipment and materials to be mounted on structures which are existing or new. D. Protection: Electrical equipment shall at all times during construction be adequately protected against mechanical injury or damage by the elements. Equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters. If apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired at no additional cost or time extension to the Contract. If apparatus has been subject to possible injury, it shall be thoroughly cleaned, dried out and put through tests as directed by the Manufacturer and Engineer, or shall be replaced, if directed by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Contract. 2.4 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT A. General: All electrical items shall be identified as specified in the Contract Documents. Such identification shall be in addition to the manufacturer's nameplates and shall serve to identify the item's function and the equipment or system which it serves or controls. Refer to Identification Section of the specifications for additional information. 2.5 CONCRETE PADS A. General: Provide reinforced concrete pads for transformers, switchgear, and motor control centers, etc. Unless otherwise noted, pads shall be BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-11 GATO BUILDING four (4) inches high and shall exceed dimensions of equipment being set on them, including future sections, by six (6) inches on all sides, except when equipment is flush against a wall, then the side or sides against the wall shall be flush with the equipment. Chamfer top edges 1/211. Trowel all surfaces smooth. Reinforce pads with #°5 reinforcing bars at 24" centers each way, unless specifically detailed on drawings. 2.6 SURFACE MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. General: Surface mounted fixtures, outlets, cabinets, panels, etc. shall have a factory applied finish or shall be painted as accepted by Engineer. All conduits and fittings, where allowed to be installed surface mounted, shall be painted to match the finish on which it was installed. Paint shall be in accordance with other applicable sections of these specifications. Refer to additional specifications note herein, regarding conduit, boxes, etc. 2.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Core Drilling: The Contractor shall be responsible for all core drilling as required for work under this section, but in no case shall the Contractor cut into or weld onto any structural element of the project without the written approval of the Architect. B. Cutting and Patching: All cutting, rough patching and finish patching shall be provided as specified in the contract documents. All cutting and patching shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. C. Openings and Sleeves: Locate all openings required for work performed under this section. Provide sleeves, guards or other accepted methods to allow passage of items installed under this section. D. Roof Penetration: Provide roofer with all pitch pans, fittings, etc., required for electrical items which penetrate the roof. Roof penetrations are to be waterproofed in such a manner that roofing guarantees are fully in force. 2.8 SLEEVES AND FORMS FOR OPENINGS A. Sleeves: Provide all sleeves for conduits penetrating floors, walls, partitions, etc. Locate all necessary slots for electrical work and form before concrete is poured. Water -tight sleeves shall be line seal type WS. Fire rated partition sleeves shall be mild steel. Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC or galvanized rigid steel unless specifically noted otherwise. Size shall be one standard diameter larger than pipe being installed or of a larger diameter to below 1/4" minimum clearance. B. Forms: Provide boxed out forms for conduit penetrations only where allowed by the Architect. Fill opening after conduit installation, with equivalent material. 2.9 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. General: Thoroughly instruct the Representative of the Owner, to the _ complete satisfaction of the Architect and Engineer, in the proper operation of all systems and equipment provided. The Contractor shall make all arrangements, via the Architect, as to whom the instructions are to be given in the operation of the systems and the period of time in which they are to be given. The Architect shall be completely satisfied that the Representative of the Owner has been thoroughly and completely BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-12 GATO BUILDING instructed in the proper operation of all systems and equipment before final payment is made. If the Engineer determines that complete and thorough instructions have not been given by the Contractor to the Owner's Representative, then the Contractor shall be directed by the Engineer to provide whatever instructions are necessary until the intent of this paragraph of the Specification has been complied with. B. Submittals: Submit to the Architect for approval five (5) typed sets, bound neatly in loose-leaf binders, of all instructions for the installation, operation, care and maintenance of all equipment and Systems, including instructions for the ordering and stocking of spare parts for all equipment installed under this contract. The lists shall include part number and suggested suppliers. Each set shall also include an itemized list of component parts that should be kept on hand and where such parts can be purchased. C. Information Requirements: Information shall indicate possible problems with equipment and suggested corrective action. The manuals shall be indexed for each type of equipment. Each section shall be clearly divided from the other sections. A sub index for each section shall also be provided. D. Instructions: The instructions shall contain information deemed necessary by the Engineer and include but not limited to the following; 1. Introduction: a. Explanation of Manual and its use. b. Summary description of the Electrical Systems. C. Purpose of systems 2. System: a. Detailed description of all systems. b. Illustrations, schematics, block diagrams, catalog cuts and other exhibits. 3. Operations: a. Complete detailed, step by step, sequential description of all phases of operation for all portions of the systems, including start up, shutdown and balancing. Include all posted instruction charts. 4. Maintenance: a. Parts list and part numbers. b. Maintenance and replacement charts and the Manufacturer's recommendations for preventive maintenance. C. Trouble shooting charts for systems and components. d. Instructions for testing each type of part. e. Recommended list of on -hand spare parts. f. Complete calibration instructions for all parts and entire Systems. g. General and miscellaneous maintenance notes. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-13 GATO BUILDING 5. Manufacturer's Literature: a. Complete listing for all parts. -- b. Names, addresses and telephone numbers. C. Care and operation. d. All pertinent brochures, illustrations, drawings, cuts, bulletins, technical data, certified performance charts and other literature with the model actually furnished to be clearly and conspicuously identified. e. Internal wiring diagrams and Engineering data sheets for all items and/or equipment furnished under each Contract. f. Guarantee and warranty data. 2.10 SERVICE AND METERING A. Company: The utility company serving this project is City Electric which will be referred to as the Utility Company herein. B. Service: Make all arrangements with the power company for obtaining a complete service. Pay charges and provide all labor and material for the service. Service shall be obtained at 120/208 volts from the Utility Company. Provide underground cables and conduits for incoming services from the utility's pad mounted transformer to distribution equipment. Install meter socket furnished by utility company, and provide C.T. wiring. C. Fees: Contact the Utility Company to determine if any fees, charges or costs will be due the Company, as required for temporary power, permanent power, installations, hook-ups, etc. This fee, charge or cost shall be included in the bid price. D. Payment: Pay for all required licenses, fees and inspections. Include all costs in the proposed construction cost submission. These costs shall include but not be limited to all applicable taxes, permits, necessary notices, certificates and all costs required to obtain same. E. Codes: Install a complete system in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and the latest regulations of all governing local, State, County and other applicable codes, including the Utility Company requirements. 2.11 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER A. Capacity: Provide capacity from new temporary service. Make arrangements with the Owner for temporary service and pay all related expenses. Temporary light and power shall be provided constantly during the project dependent upon Owner's safety requirements. B. Lighting: Temporary light shall be based on one 200 watt lamp covering each 1,000 square foot of floor area in the building. Each room 100 square foot and over shall have a minimum of one 100 watt lamp with guards. Provide power for motors up to 3/4 horsepower only. Provisions are to be made for electric welders, if required. C. Outlets: Provide outlets located at convenient points so that extension cords of not over fifty (50) feet will reach all work requiring artificial light or power. D. Other Connections: Contractors of all other trades shall furnish their own cords and sockets, as may be required for their work and shall also BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-14 GATO BUILDING pay for cost of all temporary wiring of construction offices and shanties used by them. E. New Fixtures: Permanently installed lighting fixtures may be used for temporary lighting at the Contractor's option with the provision that cool white lamps for fluorescent, clear lamps for incandescent and marked temporary for all other types shall be installed. At job completion, all lamps shall be replaced with permanent lamps specified. F. Wiring: All temporary electrical work shall be furnished and installed in conformity with the National Electrical Code and in accordance with the requirements of the local ordinances and shall be maintained in a workmanlike manner throughout their entire construction period and shall be removed after installation of the permanent electrical systems. All extension cords shall be GFCI protected or shall be fed from GFCI circuit breakers. G. Payment: The Contractor will pay for the cost of energy consumed by all trades. Any temporary wiring of a special nature for light and power required other than mentioned above shall be paid for by the Contractor using same. 2.12 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Support: All existing conduit and cables within the area of renovation shall be provided with proper supports as specified for new work in other sections of this specification. B. Installation: All existing electrical which is designated for reworking or requires relocation, repair or adjustment shall conform to all applicable codes and shall be treated as new work complying to all sections of this specification. C. Violations: Where existing conditions are discovered which are not in compliance with the codes and standards, the Contractor shall submit proper documentation to the Architect for clarification and corrective work direction. Existing conditions shall not remain which will create a disapproval of the renovated area. D. Patching: All existing conduit and cable penetrations shall be properly fire treated per code and specification requirements. The Contractor shall thoroughly inspect all existing locations and include the cost of patching and repair in his proposed construction cost. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP A. General: The installation of materials and equipment shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike and timely manner by an adequate number of craftsmen knowledgeable of the requirements of the Contract Documents. They shall be skilled in the methods and craftsmanship needed to produce a quality level of workmanship. Personnel who install materials and equipment shall be qualified by training and experience to perform their assigned tasks. B. Acceptable Workmanship: Acceptable workmanship is characterized by first -quality appearance and function, conforming to applicable standards of building system construction, and exhibiting a high degree of quality BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-15 GATO BUILDING and proficiency which is judged by the Architect as equivalent or better than that ordinarily produced by qualified industry tradesmen. C. Performance: Personnel shall not be used in the performance of the installation of material and equipment who, in the opinion of the Architect, are deemed to be careless or unqualified to perform the assigned tasks. Material and equipment installations not in compliance with the Contract Documents, or installed with substandard workmanship and not acceptable to the Architect, shall be removed and reinstalled by qualified craftsmen, at no change in the contract price. 3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEAN UP A. Protection and Restoration: Suitably protect all equipment provided — under this Division during construction. Restore all damaged surfaces and items to "like new" condition before a request for substantial completion inspection. B. Handling: All materials shall be properly protected and all conduit openings shall be temporarily closed by the Contractor to prevent obstruction and damage. Post notice prohibiting the use of all systems provided under this Contract, prior to completion of work and acceptance of all systems by the Owner's representative. The Contractor shall take precautions to protect his materials from damage and theft. C. Safeguards: The Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain proper _ safety guards for the prevention of accidents that might be caused by the workmanship, materials, equipment or systems provided under this contract. D. Cleanup: Keep the job site free from all debris and rubbish. Remove all debris and rubbish from the site and leave premises in clean condition on a daily basis. 3.3 SYSTEMS GUARANTEE A. General: Provide a one-year guarantee. This guarantee shall be by the Contractor to the Owner for any defective workmanship or material which has been provided under this Contract at no cost to the Owner for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion of the System. The guarantee shall include all lamps, for ninety days after date of Substantial Completion of the System. Explain the provisions of — guarantee to the Owner at the "Demonstration of Completed System". 3.4 FINAL OBSERVATION A. General: All work shall be completed, and all forms and other information shall be submitted for acceptance one week prior to the request for final observation of the installation. 3.5 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Attire: All workmen shall wear proper work clothing attire at all times. Shirts shall not be removed. Cleanliness of clothing shall not cause _ discomfort or problems with building residents and employees. END OF SECTION BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-16 GATO BUILDING SECTION 16020 - TESTS AND PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Time: Perform verification work as required to show that the System is operating correctly in accordance with contract documents and manufacturers literature. All verification shall be done after 3-day full operational period. B. Submission: Submit check out memos and completed testing results of all systems, cable, equipment, devices, etc., for acceptance prior to being energized or utilized. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compliance: Testing shall comply to the following standards; 1. NEMA 2. ASTM 3. NETA 4. ANSI C2 5. ICEA 6. NFPA 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS OF TESTING FIRM A. Qualification: The testing firm shall be an independent testing organization which can function as an unbiased testing authority, professionally independent of the manufacturers, supplier, and installers of equipment or systems evaluated by the testing firm. B. Experience: The testing firm shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment devices, installations, and systems. C. Accreditation: The testing firm shall meet OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907, or be a Full Member company of the International Electrical Testing Association. D. Certification: The lead, on -site, technical person shall be currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) or National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) in electrical power distribution system testing. E. Personnel: The testing firm shall utilize engineers and technicians who are regularly employed by the firm for testing services. F. Proof of Qualifications: The testing firm shall submit proof of the above qualifications when requested. G. Companies: NETA certified pre -qualified testing firms for this project are; 1. Southeast Electrical Testing of Florida, Inc. (941) 693-7100 2. Industrial Electrical Testing, Inc. (954) 456-7020 3. ABB Service Company, (407) 383-0241 TESTS AND PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 16020-1 GATO BUILDING PART 2 - TESTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Instruments: Supply all instruments required to read and record data. _ Calibration date shall be submitted on test reports. All instruments shall be certified per NETA standards. B. Adjustments: Adjust system to operate at the required performance levels _ and within all tolerances as required by NETA Standards. 2.2 APPLICATIONS A. Panelboard and Mechanical Equipment Feeders: After feeders are in place, — but before being connected to devices and equipment, test for shorts, opens, and for intentional and unintentional grounds. B. Ratings 600 Volts or Less: Cables 600 volts or less in size ,#1/0 AWG and larger shall be meggered using an industry approved "megger" with 500 internal generating voltage. Readings shall be recorded and submitted to the Engineer, for acceptance prior to energizing same. Submit 5 copies of tabulated megger test values for all cables. C. Ratings Above 600 Volts: Cables above 600 volts in all sizes shall first be meggered, using an industry approved "megger" having 1000 internal generating voltage. When proper readings are obtained, the cables shall — be "hy-potted" using potentials and time periods as recommended by cable manufacturer for the type and voltage class of cables installed. Readings ("megger" and "Hy -pot") shall be recorded and submitted to the Engineer, for acceptance prior to energizing same. Submit 5 copies of -- tabulated megger test values for all cables. D. Location and Tabulation: Take readings of voltage and amperage at building main disconnect switch and at main for each panel, and at the end of the longest branch circuit at each panel. The above readings shall be taken (1) "no-load" conditions and (2) at "full -load" conditions with all equipment using electricity. Tabulate readings, complete s "Tabulated Data Voltage and Amperage Readings" form (found at the end of this section) and submit 5 copies to the Engineer at substantial completion. 2.3 GROUNDS — A. Electrode Ground: The resistance of electrodes (main service, generators, transformer, etc.) shall not exceed 25 ohms and shall be measured by The Contractor before equipment is placed in operation. Testing shall be performed on all grounding electrode installations. Testing shall be 3 point method in accordance with IEEE No. 81 Section 9.04 Standard. Submit all ground test readings to the Engineer in tabulated format at substantial completion. - 2.4 EMERGENCY SYSTEM A. General: Submit emergency system tests in accordance with NFPA 110. Refer to emergency section of the specification for additional information. PART 3 - EXECUTION — 3.1 SUBMITTALS A. Cable Test Report: Submit Cable Test Report in Triplicate. _ B. Tabulated Data: Submit data on 8-1/2 x 11 inch sheets with names of the personnel who performed the test. C. Final: Submit accepted memos before a request for final inspection. TESTS AND PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 16020-2 GATO BUILDING 3.2 QUANTITIES A. Quantity: Submit 5 copies of the check out memo on each major item of equipment. Insert accepted memos in each brochure with the performance verification information and submittal data. END OF SECTION GATO BUILDING SECTION 16030 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Extent: Electrical identification work as required by the Contract Documents or other specifications. B. Types: Electrical identification work specified in the Contract Documents include the following; 1. Electrical power, control and communication conductors. 2. Operational instructions and warnings. 3. Danger signs. 4. Conduits, boxes, etc. 5. Distribution Equipment. 6. Cabinets. 7. Equipment/system identification signs and tags. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of electrical identification products of types required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of identifying labels and markers for wiring and equipment. C. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standard 969, "Marking and Labeling Systems", pertaining to electrical identification systems. D. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI Standard A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems", and ANSI Standard Z53.1 "Color Designation." E. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Standard No's. WC-1 and WC-2 pertaining to identification of power and control conductors. F. ADA Compliance: All signage shall meet ADA standards. Identification for maintenance purposes shall be as specified herein. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit shop drawings of all identification materials to be used for this project. Submit one sample of each item with the shop drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE SUPPLIERS OR MANUFACTURERS A. General: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering electrical identification products which may be incorporated in the work include, but not limited to, the following; 1. Alarm Supply Co, Inc. 2. Direct Safety Co. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16030-1 GATO BUILDING 3. Ideal Industries, Inc. 4. LEM Products, Inc. 5. Markal Company 6. National Band and Tag Co. 7. Panduit Corp. 8. Seton Name Plate Co. 9. Thomas and Betts Co. 10. Carlton Industries, Inc. 2.2 LANGUAGE A. General: Provide all products in this section in English. 2.3 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. Where more than one single type is specified for an application, selection shall be at the installer's option, however, provide a single selection for each application. B. Conduit System Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, flexible, permanent, conduit markers, extending 360 degrees around conduits. Markers shall be designed for attachment to conduit by adhesive, adhesive lap joint, matching adhesive plastic tape at each end of marker, or pretensioned snap -on. Color shall match system printing requirements. C. Voltage Marking: Except as otherwise indicated, provide lettering which indicates voltage of the conductor(s) in conduit. Provide 4 inch minimum length with 7/8 inch minimum lettering for 2 inch and smaller conduit. Provide 8 inch minimum length with 1-1/4 inch minimum lettering for larger than 2 inch conduit. Provide one marker for each 20' section of conduit. Color shall match system printing requirements. D. Cable/Conductor Identification Bands: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl cloth self-adhesive cable/conductor markers of the wrap -around type; either pre -numbered plastic coated type, or write -on type with clear plastic self-adhesive cover flap; numbered to show circuit identification. E. Plasticized Tags: Manufacturer's standard preprinted or partially preprinted accident prevention and operation tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3-1/4 x 5-5/8 inch, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre- printed wording including large size primary wording, e.g., DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE. F. Baked Enamel Danger Signs: Provide manufacturer's standard "DANGER" signs of baked enamel finish on 20 gauge steel; of standard red, black and white graphics; 14 x 10 inch size except where 10 x 7 inch is the largest size which can be applied where needed, and except where larger size is needed for adequate vision; with recognized standard explanation wording, and subsequent directive e.g. HIGH VOLTAGE, KEEP OUT; BURIED CABLE, DO NOT DIG; LIVE PARTS, DO NOT TOUCH SWITCH. G. Engraved Plastic Laminate Nameplates: Provide engraving phenolic plastic laminate, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with 1/16 inch thick lines with square standard pica lettering and wording as specified herein, black face and white core plies (letter color) for normal systems, kelly green and white for equipment, bright orange and white for critical, bright yellow and white for life safety, and red and white for fire alarm and where noted in the specifications. Punch for mechanical fastening, except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. Material thickness shall be 1/16 inch. Provide beveled edge in order to eliminate sharp corners. Provide self -tapping stainless steel round head screws. Provide contact type permanent adhesive where ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16030-2 GATO BUILDING screws cannot or shall not penetrate the substrate. Adhesive nameplate shall be permanently installed. Titles shall be 1/2 inch high and all other lettering shall be 1/4 inch high. H. Underground Type Plastic Line Marker: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright colored, continuous printed, metal backed plastic tape, intended for direct burial service; not less than 6 inches wide x 4 mils thick. Provide tape with printing which most accurately indicates the type of service or type of buried cable. I. Junction Box Identification: Provide neat indelible felt tip, stenciled marking on junction box and pullbox covers. Letter sizes shall be 1 inch high minimum. Provide non -stenciled markings inside the junction box and on the exterior edge to match the cover markings. 2.4 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in electrical identification work, with corresponding designations specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by the manufacturer and as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of the electrical system equipment. Comply with ANSI A13.1 pertaining to minimum sizes for letters and numbers. B. Size: System identification labeling consists of providing minimum 1/2 inch high stenciled black letters for raceway systems. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A. Installation: Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, as required by the NEC and as specified herein. B. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require a field finish application, install identification after completion of such application. C. Regulations: Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing authorities for the identification of electrical work. D. Hazards: Identify all rooms, spaces, and equipment which house potential electrical hazards, and label with appropriate signage or indicators. 3.2 RACEWAY SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A. Color Coding: All electrical conduit shall be identified by color -coding. Apply color -coded identification on electrical conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner. Utilize a stencil for application of paint. B. Identification: Identify all raceways provided or utilized as part of this project as follows; 1. Apply bands 10 feet on center along the raceway system and at each side of walls or floors, and at branches from mains. 2. Identify the following services; Service Label a. Low Voltage 120/208 Voltage b. Fire Alarm Fire Alarm C. Telephone Telephone d. Computer Computer e. Telephone/computer Telephone/computer f. Emergency Emergency 1) Life Safety Life Safety ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16030-3 GATO BUILDING 2) Critical Branch Critical Branch 3) Equipment Branch Equipment Branch 3. Sl?ot Painting on Rough -in; a. Conduit, raceways, boxes, backboxes, panelboards, etc. shall be spot painted. Conduit shall be identified within 6 inches of the box or enclosure. The entire box and coverplate shall be painted. b. Use following colors for color bands and for color coding; System Color 1) Life Safety Bright Yellow 2) Critical Branch Bright Orange 3) Equipment Branch Kelly Green 4) Essential Distribution Purple (from Generator to Generator Distribution Panel) 5) Normal Power Royal Blue 6) Miscellaneous Communications Brown 7) Fire Alarm Red 8) Telephone\Computer Black 3.3 CABLE/CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION A. General: Apply cable/conductor identification, including voltage, phase and feeder number, on each cable/conductor in each box/enclosure/cabinet where conductors of more than one circuit or communication (such as color coded conductors) is provided. Match identification with marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents, and similar previously established identification for the project's electrical work. B. Color Coding: Color code all power and lighting cable. Use wire colored by integral pigmentation, making the wire 100 percent colored. Where not practicable or available (in larger conductor sizes), color code the wire by using colored plastic tape, painting the ends accessible at junction or pull boxes, or other method acceptable to the Engineer. Use the following chart as applicable; 120/208 CONDUCTOR VOLTS Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue Neutral White Equip.Ground Green 3.4 OPERATIONAL IDENTIFICATION AND WARNINGS A. General: Provide identification and warning wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of the electrical systems. Provide identification and warning identification if necessary for signage to help prevent misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel. B. Plasticized signs: Install self-adhesive plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction or warnings on switches, outlets and other controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosures. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized tags with clearly written messages adequate for the intended purposes. C. Locations: In addition to installation of danger signs required by governing regulations and authorities, install appropriate danger signs at locations indicated and at locations subsequently identified as constituting dangers for persons in or about the project. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16030-4 GATO BUILDING D. High Voltage: Install danger signs wherever it is practicable, for persons to come into contact with electrical power of voltages higher than 277 volts to ground. E. Critical Switches/Controls: Install danger signs on switches and similar controls, regardless of whether concealed or locked up, where untimely or inadvertent operation (by anyone) could result in significant danger to persons, or damage to or loss of property. F. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Provide warning signage at the entrance to each such room; identify the hazard, and direct non -qualified personnel to stay away. G. Equipment Identification: 1. Nameplates: Install an engraved phenolic plastic laminate nameplate on each unit of electrical equipment in the building, including central or master unit of each electrical system unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification or signal system. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. a. Normal system shall be 1/2 inch high white lettering in a black field. b. Emergency system shall be 1/2 inch high white lettering in a red field for life safety, orange for critical and green for equipment branch. 2. Locations: Provide nameplates for each unit of the following categories of electrical work; a. Switchboard, panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. 1) Provide a nameplate inside, outside and above the door (if equipped with one) listing its designation, voltage, source and circuit number. b. Access panel/doors to electrical facilities. C. Major electrical switchgear and switchboards. d. Electrical Substations. e. Motor Control Centers. f. Power Transfer Equipment. g. Disconnect switches. h. Enclosed circuit breakers. i. Communication Control Panels, Terminal Cabinets and Equipment Cabinets. j. Telephone Switching Equipment k. Remote Annunciators 1. Terminal Boards M. Other similar equipment as designated by the Engineer. 3. Viewing: Install nameplates at locations indicated and where not otherwise indicated at a location for the best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. a. Secure to substrate with rigid fasteners. Utilize adhesive where fasteners cannot penetrate substrate. b. Designate branch of essential power system (i.e. Life Safety, Critical, or Equipment branch) on nameplate after the word emergency, and Equipment designation. 4. Names: The names or wording used for a particular machine shall be the same as the one used on all motor starters, disconnects and remote button stations nameplates for that machine. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16030-5 GATO BUILDING END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16030-6 GATO BUILDING SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide all supports, hangers and inserts required to mount conduit, pullboxes and other equipment provided under this Division. B. Support: All items shall be supported from the structural portion of the building. Supports and hangers shall be of a type approved by Underwriters' Laboratories. Wire shall not be used as a support. Boxes and conduit shall not be supported or fastened to ceiling suspension wires or to ceiling channels. Do not install any devices supported by ceiling tiles. C. Installation: The Contractor shall lay out and provide his work in advance of the laying of floors or walls, and shall provide all sleeves that may be required for openings through floors, walls, etc. Where plans call for conduit to be run exposed, provide all inserts and clamps for the supporting of conduit. D. Systems: Provide conduit system of empty raceways including terminal cabinets, backboards and outlets as described and specified herein. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Manufacturers shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of conduit systems and fittings of types and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years in the USA. B. Aluminum Conduit: Aluminum conduit shall not be used unless specifically called for. Install with aluminum fittings only, when specified. C. Compliance: Materials shall comply with the latest edition of the following standards as they apply to the different raceway types specified herein; 1. ANSI: a. ANSI C80.1: Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) b. ANSI C80.3: Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 2. UL: a. UL 1: Flexible Metal Conduit b. UL 6: Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) C. UL 360: Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit d. UL 514: Fittings for Metal Conduit e. UL 651: Nonmetallic Conduit (PVC) f. UL 797: Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) g. UL 886: Fittings for Hazardous Locations h. UL 1242: Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 3. NEMA: a. NEMA TC2: Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (PVC) b. NEMA TC3: Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNMC) C. NEMA TC8: Utility Duct Type EB-35 d. NEMA RN1: Plastic Coated Metal Conduit RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT 16110-1 GATO BUILDING e. NEMA VE-1: Ladder Cable Tray f. NEMA 8A, 8B, 8C, & 12A: Spine Cable Tray 4. Federal Specifications: a. WW-C-581: Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) b. WW-C-563: Electrical Metallic Conduit (EMT) C. WW-C-566: Flexible Steel Conduit d. WW-C-581E: Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC) e. WC-1094A: Nonmetallic Rigid Conduit (PVC) f. WC-582A Conduit, Raceway, Metal and Fittings; surface 5. ASTM: a. ASTM-F-512: Utility duct type EB-35 b. ASTM-A525 & ASTM-386: Tray manufacturers 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Products: Submit manufacturer's product data, including technical information on each type of raceway system; 1. Conduit - PVC 2. Conduit - Metal 3. Conduit fittings 4. Plastic (PVC) solvent 5. Black mastic coating for conduit 6. Insulating and grounding bushings for conduit 7. Galvanizing and protective coatings for conduit B. Compliance: Product data shall show compliance with this section of the specifications, including U.L. label, manufacturer and manufacturer's written installation instructions. 1.5 CONDUIT A. General: Provide a complete and continuous system of raceways to maintain a protected path for wires and cables to distribute electric power, and low voltage systems throughout the project, utilizing U.L. listed and labeled materials. B. Accessories: Provide conduit accessories of types, sizes, and materials, as specified herein complying with manufacturers published product information, which match and mate conduit and tubing. C. Interior Minimum Size: Minimum conduit size for light and power systems shall be 3/4 inch conduit for all power and lighting circuitry homeruns from panelboard to outlet box at first power consuming devices. The remainder of circuitry may be in 1/2 inch conduit, if it contains no more than 4 conductors per conduit (excluding the equipment grounding conductor), and phase conductors no larger than #12 AWG. Switchlegs may be 1/2inch conduit unless otherwise noted on drawings. D. Site Underground Conduit: Unless otherwise noted, minimum underground -- raceways shall be 1 inch conduit. Homeruns from the branch circuit overcurrent device, through any control devices to the first exterior junction box or consumption device shall be 1 inch minimum. E. System Conduit: Provide end bushings on all conduits. F. Pull Strings: Provide pull strings in all empty raceways. Pull strings shall be nylon and shall be impervious to moisture. Pull strings -- installed in one inch and smaller conduits shall have a tensile strength of not less than 30 lbs. Pull strings installed in conduits larger than 1 inch shall a tensile strength not less than 200 lbs. G. Conduit Bends: The use of NEC Table 346.10 Exception is not allowed. RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT 16110-2 GATO BUILDING 1.6 LOCATIONS A. Materials Above Grade: The following conduit types are to be installed above grade where specifically noted herein; 1. Electrical metallic tubing (thin wall) 2. Intermediate metallic conduit 3. Flexible metal conduit 4. Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit 5. Heavy wall Schedule 40 PVC 6. Galvanized rigid steel conduit 7. Extra heavy wall Schedule 80 PVC B. Materials Below Grade: The following conduit types are to be installed below grade where specifically noted herein; 1. Rigid galvanized conduit (heavy wall) 2. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) 3. Schedule 40 PVC - not allowed in patient care areas 4. Utility Grade Type EB plastic 5. Schedule 80 PVC - not allowed in patient care areas C. Materials on Roofs: The following conduit types are to be installed on roofs where specifically noted herein; 1. Rigid steel conduit (PVC) coated 2. Rigid steel conduit 3. Intermediate grade conduit 1.7 SURFACE RACEWAY A. General: Provide surface mounted raceway where specifically indicated on the drawings. Raceway shall be metallic and one-piece type. Where wiring channels are specifically specified, they shall be two-piece type. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING A. Fittings: Provide steel set screw fittings. Steel fittings shall be fitted with nonremovable insulated throats, and male threaded ends provided with a locknut. B. Locknuts: Provide locknuts for securing conduit to enclosures with sharp edges for digging into metal, and ridged outside circumference for proper fastening. 2.2 BUSHINGS A. Bushings: Bushings shall be provided on all terminations, all essential system conduits,mounted on the ends of all EMT connectors 1-1/4 inches and larger and within all equipment. B. Construction: Bushings shall have a flared bottom and ribbed sides, with smooth insides to prevent damage to cable insulation. C. Insulating Ring: Mold a phenolic insulating ring into sizes 1-1/4 inches and larger. D. Grounding: Provide a screw type grounding terminal on all sizes. E. Grounding Bushings: Grounding bushings shall be provided on all essential electrical system feeder conduits. RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT 16110-3 GATO BUILDING 2.3 RIGID METAL CONDUIT - A. Conduit: Conduit ends shall have precision cut hi -torque threads. One end of the conduit shall have a coupling and the other shall be covered with a color -coded plastic thread protector. Conduit shall be manufactured in 10 foot lengths. B. Fittings: Fittings shall be cut groove steel. Cast fittings are not acceptable. 2.4 FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT A. Conduit and Standards: A continuous length, spirally wound steel strip, zinc -coated, each convolution interlocked with following convolution into a helix form. Product shall meet Federal Specification WW-C-566 and UL 1242. B. Fittings: Provide conduit fittings for use with flexible steel conduit of the threadless hinged clamp type, and a male threaded end provided with a locknut. 1. Straight terminal connectors shall be one piece body, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit. 2. 45 and 90 degree terminal angle connectors shall be 2 piece body, with removable upper section, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit. 2.5 LIQUID -TIGHT FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT A. Conduit: Plastic jacketed (PVC) liquid -tight flexible steel conduit with copper bonding conductor, and steel material galvanized inside and outside. B. Fittings: Provide cadmium plated, malleable iron fittings with compression type steel ferrule and neoprene gasket sealing rings with insulated throat. 2.6 HEAVY WALL PVC CONDUIT (SCHEDULE 40) A. Conduit: Schedule 40, 90 degrees C. UL rated, PVC conduit shall be composed of High Impact PVC (polyvinyl chloride C-2000 Compound), and shall conform to industry standards, and be UL listed in accordance with Article 347 of National Electrical Code for underground and exposed use. Materials must have tensile strength of 55 PSI, at 70 degrees F., flexural strength of 11,000 psi, compression strength of 8600 psi. Manufacturer shall have five years extruding PVC experience. 2.7 EXTRA HEAVY WALL PVC CONDUIT (SCHEDULE 80) A. Conduit: Schedule 80, 90 degrees C. UL rated, PVC conduit shall be composed of High Impact PVC (polyvinyl chloride C-2000 Compound), and shall conform to industry standards, and be UL listed in accordance with Article 347 of National Electrical Code for underground and exposed use. Materials must have tensile strength of 5500 PSI, at 73.4 degree F., flexural strength of 12,500 psi, compression strength of 9000 psi. Manufacturer shall have five years extruding PVC experience. 2.8 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT A. Type: Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) shall be high frequency electro- welded into tube form to produce a high ductile conduit that can be easily bent with standard tools approved for IMC. B. General: Conduit ends shall have precision cut hi -torque threads. One end of the conduit shall have a coupling and the other shall be covered with a color -coded plastic thread protector. Conduit shall be manufactured in 10 foot lengths. RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT 16110-4 GATO BUILDING C. Finish: The electro-galvanized zinc finish shall be corrosion resistant and shall not crack or flake. A chromate conversion coating shall be applied over the entire tube as an additional corrosive preventative. The interior shall be protected and lubricated with a special silicone hard finish enamel. 2.9 HEAVY WALL PVC TYPE EB-35 UTILITY DUCT A. General: Duct shall be composed of high modulus C-250 compound and conform to all applicable industry standards, U.L. listed for underground concrete encasement only. Conform to NEMA TC-8 and ASTM Standard F-512 for utility duct. Duct shall have a low coefficient of expansion (3.30 X 10-5 IN/IN/degree F.), be U.L. listed and have a tensile strength of 4800 PSI. Manufacturer shall have five years experience extruding PVC of this specific type. 2.10 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Hangers: Hangers shall be made of durable materials suitable for the application involved. Where excessive corrosive conditions are encountered, hanger assemblies shall be protected after fabrication by galvanizing, or approved suitable preservative methods. B. Materials: Insert anchors shall be installed on concrete or brick construction, with hex head machine screws. Recessed head screws shall be used in wood construction. An electric or hand drill shall be used for drilling holes for all inserts in concrete or similar construction. Installed inserts, brick, shall be near center of brick, not near edge or in joint. Drilled and tapped, and round head machine screws shall be used where steel members occur. All screws, bolts, washers, etc., used for supporting conduit or outlets shall be fabricated from rust -resisting metal, or accepted substitution. Gunpowder set anchors are not permitted. C. Exterior: Supporting devices for exterior use shall be 316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted on drawings. D. PVC Coated Conduit: Supporting devices for PVC coated conduit shall be as manufactured by the PVC coated conduit manufacturer and shall match in color and appearance. 2.11 WIREWAYS A. General: Wireway shall be sized as shown on drawings, NEMA 1, lay -in type. Wireway sides and bottom shall contain no knock -outs. The Contractor shall punch holes required. The cover shall be hinge type with quarter turn fasteners to hold cover shut. Covers and bodies shall be 16 gauge steel. Wireway shall be as manufactured by Hoffman Engineering Company, Square "D" or Steel City. 2.12 UNDERGROUND DUCT LINES A. Description: Underground duct lines where shown shall be of individual conduits encased in concrete. The conduit shall be of plastic, unless indicated or specified otherwise. The conduit used shall not be smaller than 4 inches in diameter, inside, unless otherwise noted. The concrete encasement surrounding the duct bank shall be reinforced as shown and rectangular in cross-section, having a minimum concrete thickness of three inches. Conduit shall be separated by a minimum concrete thickness of 2 inches. B. General: The concrete work shall conform to Section on "Concrete". The top of the concrete envelope shall be not less than 18 inches below grade. Concrete shall be installed in a continuous pour to eliminate joints in the duct run. Duct lines shall have a continuous slope downward toward manholes and away from buildings with a pitch of not less than 3 inches in 100 feet. Changes in direction of runs exceeding a RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT 16110-5 GATO BUILDING total of 10 degrees either vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished by long sweep bends having a minimum radius of curvature of 25 feet, except that manufactured bends may be made up on one or more curved or straightened sections or combinations thereof. Manufactured bends shall have a minimum radius of 36 inches. C. Conduits: Conduits shall terminate in end -bells where duct lines enter manholes. Provide 4 to 6 inch reducers as required. Separators shall be of pre -cast concrete, high impact polystyrene, steel or any combination of these. The joints of the conduits shall be staggered by rows so as to provide a duct line having the maximum strength. During construction partially complete duct lines shall be protected from the entrance of debris, such as mud, sand and dirt by means of suitable conduit plugs. As the duct line is completed, a testing mandrel not less than 13 inches long with a diameter 1/4 inch less than the size of the stiff bristles shall be drawn through until the conduit is clear of all particles of earth, sand or gravel; conduit plug shall then be immediately installed. D. Conduit: Plastic conduit, fittings and joints shall not have been stored in the sun or weather, in any excessively heated space, or unevenly supported during storage. Use and installation shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code requirements for the installation of non-metallic rigid conduit. Plastic conduit shall be protected against the direct rays of the sun prior to installation. Conduit shall be Carlon Type EB, Queen City Plastics, or accepted substitution. Conduit shall be U.L. listed and conform to NEMA Standard TC6-1972. E. Trench: Trenches for duct banks shall be completely dry before setting conduits or pouring concrete. Well pointing as required shall be provided -cif necessary to keep trench dry. F. Racks: Wires and cables in manhole shall be placed on cable racks. Manhole shall be cleaned of all loose materials, dirt and debris immediately after completion of new work and shall be in a clean condition when project is completed. All racks shall be complete with insulators. Racks shall be McGraw Edison NOB-LOC type, Chance or accepted substitution. G. Excavation: Backfilling shall be in layers not more than 8 inches deep, and shall be thoroughly tamped. The first layer shall be earth or sand, free from particles that would be retained on a 1/4 inch sieve. The succeeding layers shall be excavated material having stones no larger than would pass through a 4-inch ring. The backfill shall be level with adjacent surface, except that in sodded or paved areas, a space equal to the thickness of the sod or paving shall be left. H. Finish: The surface disturbed during the installation of duct shall be restored to its original elevation and condition if not refinished in connection with site work. I. Plugging: All unused conduit openings shall be plugged or capped with a suitable device designed for the purpose; caulking compound shall not be used for plugging conduit openings. J. Counterpoise: Two #4 AWG bare stranded copper counterpoise shall be run above all duct banks and shall be run into all manholes and handholes and grounded. Counterpoise shall run to building and be grounded at each building service ground. 2.13 SURFACE RACEWAY A. General: Provide a surface raceway system with raceway, boxes and appropriate fittings. Raceway shall be Wiremold V500 or equal. RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT 16110-6 GATO BUILDING B. Wiring Channel: Metal raceway where specifically indicated on the contract drawings shall be Wiremold G4000 series, unless otherwise noted. C. Devices: Provide 20 ampere duplex receptacles 36 inches center -to -center unless otherwise noted. 2.14 TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARDS A. Terminal Boards: Telephone Boards shall be 8 foot high and of the width shown unless otherwise noted. Terminal boards shall be 3/4 inch A/C grade exterior plywood painted light gray with fire resistant paint. B. Grounding: Each terminal board shall be provided with a #6 AWG bare copper conductor installed in 3/4 inch conduit to the building service ground. Service ground attachment shall be made with an approved lug. Provide 6 foot excess ground conductor length at terminal board for connection to equipment. C. Terminal Board Conduits: Conduits at Terminal board locations shall be neatly racked on a Kindorf Type rack secured to wall above and below terminal boards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUITS A. Provide as a minimum 3/4 inch conduit from each of the following device locations to cable tray. Terminate in corridor ceiling cavity only when cable tray is not available in department. Provide insulated bushings at ends of all conduits. 1. Telephone 2. Public Address/Music 5. Data 3. Computer System 4. Fire Alarm 3.2 TELEPHONE COMPANY COORDINATION A. Telephone Company: The Contractor shall notify the Telephone Company when the conduit system is being installed. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with the Telephone Company as required. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION OF BOXES A. Tags: During installation of pull strings all pull strings shall be marked with vinyl tags indicating where the opposite end may be found. 3.4 BLANK PLATES A. Plates: Unless otherwise noted all outlet boxes shall receive blank plates matching the finish of plates on electrical devices in the same room. 3.5 RACEWAY INSTALLATION A. Support: All raceways shall be run in a neat and workmanlike manner and shall be properly supported and in accordance with the latest edition of the NEC. Supporting conduit and boxes with wire is not acceptable. Exposed raceways where allowed, shall be supported with clamp fasteners with toggle bolt on hollow walls, and with lead expansion shields on masonry. All conduits shall be securely fastened in place with at least one support per eight foot section. Support within one foot of changes RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT 16110-7 GATO BUILDING in direction. All required hangers, supports and fastenings shall be provided at each elbow and at no more than one foot from the end of each straight run terminating at a box or cabinet. The use of perforated iron for supporting conduits shall not be permitted. The required strength of the supporting equipment and size and type of anchors shall be based on the combined weight of conduit, hanger and cables. Horizontal and vertical conduit runs may be supported by one -hole malleable straps, clamp -backs, or other accepted devices with suitable bolts, expansion shields (where needed) or beam -clamps for mounting to building structure or special brackets. B. Hanger Installation: Where 2 or more conduits 1 inch or larger run parallel trapeze hangers may be used consisting of concrete inserts, threaded solid rods, washers, nuts and galvanized "L" angle iron, or Unistrut cross members. These conduits shall be individually fastened to the cross member of every other trapeze hanger with galvanized cast one hole straps, clamp backs, bolted with proper size cadmium machine bolts, washers and nuts. If adjustable trapeze hangers are used to support groups of parallel conduits, U-bolt type clamps shall be used at the end of a conduit run and at each elbow. J-bolts, or approved clamps, shall be installed on each third intermediate trapeze hanger to fasten each conduit. C. Sealant: Provide a closed cell silicone foam sealant rated to provide a rating equal to the wall, ceiling, or floor assembly rating. Provide seals for the exterior of conduit penetrations consisting of a cast -in - place sleeve with a compressible rubber gasket between the conduit and the sleeve. Provide seals for the interior of the conduit penetrations consisting of gland type sealing bushing or closed cell silicone foam. Provide duct seal inside an appropriate seal -off fitting to seal the interior,�of the conduit system from water seepage or hazardous gases. D. Routing: Conduits shall be run parallel to building walls wherever possible, exposed or concealed as specified, and shall be grouped in workmanlike fashion. Crisscrossing of conduits shall be minimized. E. Location: All raceways except those from surface -mounted switches, outlet boxes or panels shall be run concealed from view. Surface mounted devices and equipment shall be specifically noted on the contract drawings. It is the intent that all raceways shall be run concealed unless specifically noted. F. Protection: All raceway runs, whether terminated in boxes or not, -shall be capped during the course of construction until wires are pulled in and covers are in place. No conductors shall be pulled into raceways until the raceway system is complete. G. Coordination: All raceways shall be kept clear of mechanical equipment and plumbing fixtures to facilitate future repair or replacement of said fixtures without disturbing wiring. Except where it is necessary for control purposes, all raceways shall be kept away from items producing heat. H. Masonry Installation: All raceway runs in masonry shall be installed at the same time as the masonry so that no face cutting is required, except to accommodate boxes. I. Arrangement: All raceways shall be run connecting outlet to circuits generally as shown on the drawings. Provide circuit connection arrangement shown. Actual final arrangement shall be in accordance with the record drawings section as specified herein. J. Grounding: All branch circuit and feeder raceways shall have a copper system ground conductor within the conduit throughout the entire length of the circuit. All conduit shall be electrically continuous to establish redundant grounding. RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT 16110-8 GATO BUILDING K. Empty Raceways: Raceways which do not have conductors provided under this Division of the specifications shall be left with an acceptable nylon pullcord in raceway. L. Manufacturer: Rigid Metallic Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, Flexible Steel Conduit, Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit, and PVC Conduit shall be manufactured within the United States, and each shall be as manufactured by one manufacturer. M. Roof Installation: Conduit installations on roofs shall be kept to a bare minimum. Conduit shall be supported above roof at least 6 inches using approved conduit supporting devices. Supports shall be fastened to roof using roofing adhesive as specified in other sections of this specification. N. Firewall Installation: Provide pullboxes, junction boxes, fire barrier at fire rated walls etc., as required by NEC Article 300 where required. O. Dissimilar Metals: Avoid the use of dissimilar metals to reduce the possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat all surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling. P. Identification: Provide appropriate identification as required by codes and as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the methods specified herein. Q. Conduit: Conduits shall be anchored down to prevent floating while pouring in concrete. 3.6 SITE UNDERGROUND CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. General: All underground raceways (with exception of raceways installed under floor slab) shall be installed in accordance with Section 300-5 of the NEC except that the minimum cover for any conduit or duct bank shall be two feet, unless otherwise indicated. B. Stubs: Spare conduit stubs shall be capped and accurately dimensioned on as -built drawings. C. Separation: All conduit run underground, or stubbed above floor shall be separated with plastic interlocking spacers manufactured specifically for this purpose, or shall be strapped to Kindorf channel supported by conduit driven into ground or tied to steel. D. Coating: Rigid metallic conduit installed underground shall be coated with waterproofing black mastic before installation, and all joints shall be recoated after installation. 3.7 RIGID METALLIC CONDUIT A. Locknuts: Rigid steel box connections shall be made with double locknuts and bushings. Turn down on threads to solidly connect raceway to box or enclosure. B. Bushings: Grounded insulated bushings shall be used on all rigid steel conduits terminating in panels, wire gutters, or cabinets in accordance with NEC 517. Bushing shall be impact resistant plastic molded in an irregular shape at the top to provide smooth insulating surface at top and inner edge. Material in these bushings must not melt or support flame. 3.8 PVC CONDU .................................................................... ..................................................................... .................................................................... ..................................................................... .................................................................... ..................................................................... .................................................................... ..................................................................... .................................................................... ..................................................................... .................................................................... ..................................................................... A. �eneralePgC shaTl""be�used for lightning protection down conductors and grounding electrode raceways. RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT 16110-9 GATO BUILDING B. Floor Penetrations Exposed: Where PVC penetrates a floor in an exposed - location from underground or in slab, a black mastic coated steel conduit elbow shall be used. C. Location: No PVC shall be allowed anywhere except underground or in — slab, with the exception that PVC conduit may be used in non -fire rated poured block walls and poured in place columns. D. Floor Penetrations in Block: PVC may also be used for penetrations of - floor into concrete block or hollow walls up to first outlet box provided outlet box is at a maximum height of 48 inches above finished floor. E. Ground Conductor Installation: All individual bare copper ground conductors (i.e. service, transformer, or lightning protection grounds) shall be installed in PVC conduit. F. Joints: PVC joints shall be solvent welded. Threads shall not be - permitted on PVC conduit and fittings, except for rigid steel to PVC couplings. Installation of PVC conduit shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. G. Restrict Support: PVC conduit shall not be used to support fixture or equipment. H. Bonds: Field bends shall be made with an approved hotbox. Heating with flame and hand held dryers are prohibited. 3.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Vibrating Equipment Connection: All connections to motors or other vibrating equipment (except dry type transformers) or at other locations where required shall be made with not less than 12 inches of flexible _ liquid -tight steel conduit, using special type of connectors with strain relief fittings at both terminations of conduit, Kellems Type 074-09 Series or accepted substitution. B. Normal Type: Flex connectors shall have insulated throat and shall be — T & B 3100 Series or accepted substitution. C. Angle Type: Use angle connectors wherever necessary to relieve angle strain on flex conduit. D. Transformer Connection: Connections to dry type transformers -shall be made with flexible conduit. 3.10 EXPANSION FITTINGS A. Installation: Provide expansion fittings in each conduit run wherever it crosses an expansion joint. Install the fitting on one side of the -- joint with its sliding sleeve end flush with joint, and with a length of bonding jumper in expansion equal to at least three times the normal width of joints. B. Location: Provide expansion fittings in each conduit run which is mechanically attached to separate structures to relieve strain caused by shift on one structure in relation to the other. C. Length: Provide expansion fittings in straight conduit runs above ground which are more than one hundred feet long. 3.11 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING A. Location: Install Electrical Metallic Tubing (thin wall) inside buildings, above the ground floor where not subject to mechanical injury. B. Handling: All cut ends shall be reamed to remove rough edges. RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT 16110-10 GATO BUILDING END OF SECTION RACEWAYS AND CONDUIT 16110-11 GATO BUILDING SECTION 16120 - WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified of this section. 1.2 WIRES AND CABLES A. Description: Provide a complete and continuous system of conductors as specified herein. All conductors shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the NEC. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Manufacturers shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of wire systems and fittings of types and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years in the USA. B. Compliance: Materials shall comply with the following standards as they apply to the different wire types specified herein. 1. UL: a. 44 - Rubber insulated wire and cables. b. 83 - Thermoplastic insulated wires. C. 486-A-80 - Wire connectors and soldering lugs for use with copper. d. 486B - Splicing wire connectors e. 493 - Thermoplastic insulated underground feeder and branch circuit cables. 2. NFPA: a. 70 NEC 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit product data on all different types of conductors specified. 1.5 FLEXIBLE WIRING SYSTEMS A. General: Provide a flexible wiring system used to supply power to lighting fixtures, poke-thru power outlets and wall receptacles as shown on the contract documents. B. Description: The prefabricated system shall be complete with all 120 and/or 277 volt 3 and/or 4 wire power getaway boxes, fixture adapters, jumper cable sets, wall switch boxes, wall power boxes, poke-thru power outlets etc. C. Compliance: The system and its components shall comply with the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall be U.L. listed or labeled for intended use on this project and UL listed and labeled for use in return air plenum and rated to make and break under rated load. All work and materials shall comply with the National Electrical Code and applicable state and local building codes. WIRES AND CABLES 16120-1 GATO BUILDING D. Final Condition: The system shall be of construction such that when installation is complete all system components shall be metal enclosed, in a locked mode and shall comprise a fully grounded system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Conductors: Branch circuit and feeder conductors for electric power shall be copper type. Utilize THHN/THWN insulation for branch circuits and THWN/XHHW insulation for feeders, unless specifically noted otherwise. Conductors #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid, #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. No aluminum wiring shall be permitted. All -- wire shall be sized as shown on the drawings. If no size is shown, wire shall be #12 AWG, except that branch "homeruns" over 50 ft. in length shall be 010 AWG for 120/208V circuits. Wire in vicinity of heat - producing equipment shall be type XHHW insulation. All wiring shall be -- manufactured in the USA and of 98 percent resistivity. #14 AWG minimum size conductors shall be used for fire alarm system. B. Taps and Splices: All copper taps and splices in #8 AWG or smaller wire — shall be fastened together by means of "wirenut" connectors (Ideal or accepted substitution). All taps and splices in wire larger than #8 AWG shall be made with compression type connectors and taped to provide insulation equal to wire. All taps and splices in manholes or in ground pull box shall be made with compression type connectors and covered with Raychem heavywall cable sleeves (type CTE or WCS) with type "S" sealant coating. Provide sleeve kits as per manufacturer's installation instructions. C.- Color Coding, General: All power feeders and branch circuits #8 AWG and smaller shall be installed with color -coded wire with the same color used for a system throughout the building. Power feeders above #8 AWG shall either be fully color -coded or shall have black insulation and be similarly color -coded with tape or paint in all junction boxes and panels. Tape shall cover the conductor insulation within the box or panel in such a manner so as to allow standard markings to be readily observed. D. Colors: Unless otherwise accepted, color -code shall be as indicated in the Identification section of the specifications. All switchlegs, other — voltage system wiring, control and interlock wiring shall be color. -coded other than those listed in the Identification Section of •these specifications. E. Submittals: Submit cut sheets on all major types of wires and cables including splicing tape, and terminating/splicing lugs or connectors and cable sleeves. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. General: Branch circuit and feeder conductors shall be manufactured by one of the following: General Cable Co., Anaconda, Pirelli or Rome Cable Corporation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. General: All wiring shall be installed in conduit (power, low voltage and control wiring), unless otherwise indicated or specified under other Sections of this specification. All wiring shall be installed per the latest edition of the NEC. B. Connections: Conductors 110 and #12 AWG shall be connected with pre - insulated spring connectors incased in a steel shell and rated at not WIRES AND CABLES 16120-2 GATO BUILDING less than 105 degrees C. A minimum of 3/8 inch skirt shall cover the bare wires. The connector shall meet with UL approval for fixture and pressure work, and shall be "Scotch Lok" Type Y, R and B electrical spring connectors as manufactured by the 3M Company or approved equal. C. Connector Manufacturers: Lugs and wire connectors shall be one of the following: Burndy Corporation, Thomas & Betts, Co., Appleton or ILSCO. D. Equipment Installations: Neatly form, train and tie the cables in panelboards, cabinets, wireways, switches and equipment assemblies. END OF SECTION WIRES AND CABLES 16120-3 GATO BUILDING SECTION 16130 - OUTLET BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. General: Outlet boxes shall be of such form and dimensions as to be adapted to the specific use and location, type of device or fixtures to be used, and number and size of conductors and arrangement, size and number of conduits connecting thereto. B. Ceiling Size: Ceiling outlet boxes shall be 4 inch octagonal or 4 inch square by 1-1/2 inches deep or larger as required for number and size of conductors and arrangement, size and number of conduits terminating at them. C. Wall Size: Switch, wall receptacle, telephone and other wall outlet boxes in drywall shall be 4 inch square by 1-1/2 inches deep. For exposed masonry, provide one piece 4 inch square by 1-1/2 inches deep wall boxes with appropriate 4 inches square cut tile wall covers Steel City series 152-C-49/52-C-52 or accepted substitution. For furred -out block walls, provide 4 inch square box with required extension for block depth and required extension for drywall depth. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Manufacturers shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of conduit systems and fittings of types and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years in the USA. B. Compliance: Materials shall comply with the following standards as they apply to the different raceway types specified herein. 1. UL-50 & UL-514 2. NEC 70 1.4 FLOOR OUTLETS A. General: Provide floor outlet boxes as shown on the plans. Installation shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code, and shall be complete with service fittings as indicated. Equipment shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 1.5 SPECIAL PURPOSE OUTLETS A. Location: Locate special purpose outlets as indicated on the drawings for the equipment served. Location and type of outlets shall be coordinated with appropriate trades involved. The securing of complete information for proper electrical roughing -in shall be included as work required under this section of specifications. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals: Submit product data on all different types of outlet boxes and associated trim/plaster rings. OUTLET BOXES 16130-1 GATO BUILDING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL PURPOSE BOXES A. General: Provide standard galvanized one-piece steel outlet boxes at all concealed outlets for electric lights, switches, convenience receptacles, telephone outlets, etc. Acceptable manufacturers shall be T&B, Steel City, Raco. Surface outlet boxes and conduit bodies shall be the heavy cast aluminum or iron with external raised hubs - Appleton, Crouse Hinds or Steel City or accepted substitution. Trim rings shall also be of one piece construction. 2.2 FLOOR OUTLET BOXES A. Standards: Outlets in slab on grade shall conform to Federal Specifications No. WC-526b, Type 1, with threaded conduit hubs. B. Carpet Locations: In carpeted areas, Lexan carpet flanges shall be installed to protect carpet edges where flush floor boxes are installed. C. Construction: All assemblies shall be designed and installed to maintain grounding continuity, fireproofing and watertight integrity. Connections to boxes in slabs on grade shall be made tight or sealed to prevent entrance of moisture. D. Accessories: Box trim, service fittings and accessories shall be as required to provide a complete installation. E. Special Consideration: Flush caps removed to provide service fittings shall be turned over to the Owner. Approved manufacturer is Walkerduct. F. Manufacturer: Approved manufacturer is Walker, Raco, Steel City or Hubbell. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES A. Installation: All flush outlets shall be mounted so that covers and plates shall finish flush with finished surfaces without the use of _ shims, mats or other devices not submitted or accepted for the purpose. Add -a -Depth ring or switch box extension rings (Steel City #SBEX) are not acceptable. Plates shall not support wiring devices. Gang switches with common plate where two or more are indicated in the same location. Wall - mounted devices of different systems (switches, thermostats, etc.) shall be coordinated for symmetry when located near each other on the same wall. Outlets on each side of walls shall have separate boxes. Through - wall type boxes shall not be permitted. Back-to-back mounting shall not _ be permitted. Trim rings shall be extended to within 1/8 inch of finish wall surface. B. Stud Walls: Outlet boxes mounted in metal stud walls, shall be supported to studs with 2 screws inside of outlet box to a horizontal stud brace between vertical studs. C. Blank Covers: All outlet boxes that do not receive devices in this contract are to have blank plates installed matching wiring device plates. 3.2 MOUNTING HEIGHT A. Mounting Height: Height of wall outlets to center or bottom of box above finished floor shall be as follows, unless specifically noted otherwise. Verify all heights with the Architectural plans and shop drawings for installation. The following dimensions are a guide only. Specific heights required by governing institutions and laws shall apply. OUTLET BOXES 16130-2 GATO BUILDING Switches & Dimmers 4 foot 0 inches to centerline Receptacles 1 foot 6 inches to centerline Branch Panelboards 6 foor 6 inches top of panel trim Telephone & Data Outlets 1 foot 6 inches to centerline B. Counter Tops: Bottoms of outlets above counter tops or base cabinets shall be minimum 2 inches above counter top or backsplash, whichever is highest. Outlets may be raised so that bottom rests on top of concrete block course, but all outlets above counters in same area shall be at same height. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to secure cabinet drawings and coordinate outlet locations in relation to all cabinets as shown on Architectural plans, prior to rough -in, regardless of height shown on documents. C. Wall Outlets: Height of wall -mounted fixtures shall be as shown on the drawings or as required by Architectural plans and conditions. Fixture outlet boxes shall be equipped with fixture studs when supporting fixtures. 3.3 FLOOR OUTLET BOXES A. Adjustment: Where floor or fill depth is 3 inches or more, adjustable boxes with maximum vertical and angular adjustment for after concrete pour shall be used. After pour is complete, boxes shall be set and readjusted to provide a smooth surface conforming to the elevation and slope of the surrounding finished floor. END OF SECTION OUTLET BOXES 16130-3 GATO BUILDING SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide factory fabricated wiring devices in type, color and electrical rating for the service indicated to provide convenient access to the electrical system for portable and permanent connections, and control of fixed outlets. B. Ratings: Voltage and ampere rating of switches and receptacles shall be marked on the device, and shall conform to Voltage and Ampacity of system to which applied. C. Hardware: Devices consist of all the necessary hardware to complete an installation and provide a margin of safety by inaccessibility of live electrical components. 1.3 WALL DIMMING CONTROLS A. General: Incandescent - Provide dimming controls as indicated on drawings, and as specified herein to provide complete method of controlling the artificial illumination intensity portion of the project. Provide dimmers, controls, interfaces, and ancillary equipment to make a complete dimming system. Devices shall be terminal connected. Do not "back -stab" devices. Devices are to be rotary. B. General: Incandescent - Provide dimming controls as indicated on drawings, and as specified herein to provide complete method of controlling the artificial illumination intensity portion of the project. Provide dimmers, controls, interfaces, and ancillary equipment to make a complete dimming system. Devices shall be terminal connected. Do not "back -stab" devices. Devices are to be slide. C. General: Fluorescent - Provide dimming controls as indicated on drawings, and as specified herein to provide complete method of controlling the artificial illumination intensity portion of the project indicated. Provide dimmers, controls, interfaces, and ancillary equipment, dimming ballast, magnetic or electronic for use with specific control, to make a complete dimming system. D. Standards: Voltage and ampere rating of dimmer controls shall be marked on dimmer, and shall conform to voltage of system to which applied. 1. WD-2-1970 for dimmers. 2. ANSI/IEEE Standard C62.41-1980 a. Test withstand voltage surges of up to 6000 Volts and current surges of up to 200 Amps for dimmers without damage. 3. Nema WD-1 4. UL 20 1.4 DIMMING CONTROLS QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of wiring devices, of types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Fully test all dimmers for proper operation prior to shipment from the factory. Equipment shall WIRING DEVICES 16140-1 GATO BUILDING be as that manufactured by Lutron Electronics Co., Hubbell Manufacturing - Co., Leviton Manufacturing. B. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that - required for the project. C. Warranty: Provide a minimum one-year warranty from time of installation acceptance. 1.5 RECEPTACLES AND SWITCHES QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Manufacturers shall be companies regularly engaged in manufacture of wiring devices, of types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Acceptable manufacturers are Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, and Leviton Manufacturing. - B. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project. C. Compliance: Comply with the latest edition of the following standards; 1. NEMA WD1, WD3 and WD5 2. UL 5, 20 and 231 3. UL 1449 D. FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS UL HOSPITAL GRADE ABRUPT REMOVAL TEST -- a. Using cable and 10 pound weight. 1. ANSI/IEEE Standard C62.41-1980 (Formerly IEEE 587) a. Test withstand voltage surges of up to 6000 volts and current surges of up to 200 amperes without damage. E. Warranty: Provide a minimum one-year warranty from time of final acceptance. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Wiring Devices: Submit manufacturer's product data on all wiring devices listed on the drawings including; 1. Colors 2. Dimensions 3. U.L. Label 4. Finish 5. Voltage -" 6. Wiring diagrams 7. Application information B. Coverplates and Identification: Submit type of identification used for coverplates to comply with the Identification Section as specified herein. Screws to match coverplate color. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordination: Coordinate with other work including wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways, to properly interface installation of all wiring devices. WIRING DEVICES 16140-2 GATO BUILDING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL DIMMERS A. Color: Unless otherwise noted, standard device and matching faceplate color shall be as specified in other sections. Match colors with other devices, particularly when multi -gang application requires devices by other manufacturers. B. Dimensions: Profile projection off the wall of dimmer shall not exceed 0.295 inches beyond the surface of the wall. Dimmers in excess of 1500 watts shall not exceed 0.627 inches. Dimmer shall not exceed 2-3/4 inches in width for units 1000 watts or less and 4-1/2 inches for 1500 watt units. The height of all wattage units shall not exceed 4 1/2 inches. Depth of dimmer within backbox shall not exceed the following; 1. 1-5/16 inches for units 1000 watts and lower. 2. 1-5/8 inches for 1500 watt units. 3. Selected low voltage and 2-location dimmers may exceed the above depth, but shall in no case exceed 1-11/16 inches. 4. All dimmers within the same room or vicinity shall be of the same profile projection. Varying depths or projections shall not be tolerated. C. Mounting: Dimmers shall be mounted individually in a single gang standard switchbox, and be gangable without removing side sections (fins) or derating each unit's capacity. D. Operation: No auxiliary dimmers cabinets, control modules, or interfaces shall be required for operation at single location incandescent dimming of 2000 watts or less systems. 3-way dimmers shall be 3-way not one master arid one slave. E. Rating: All devices shall be capable of operating at rated capacity indicated on the drawings without affecting rated lifetime. F. Temperature: Dimmers shall be capable of operating in an ambient temperature of 0 to 40 degrees C. ( 30 to 104 degrees F.) G. Static Discharge: Dimmers shall not be susceptible to damage or loss of memory due to static discharge. H. Short Circuit Test: Dimmers shall meet the UL 20 short circuit test requirement for snap switches. I. Filtering: Dimmers shall utilize an LC filtering network to minimize interference with properly installed radio, audio, and video equipment. Provide heavy duty toroidal choke to suppress RFI interference. J. Type: Dimmers shall be rotary type. K. Type: Dimmers shall be slide type. 2.2 LINEAR SLIDER DIMMERS A. Operation: Linear Slider Preset Systems Operation shall provide a continuous linear slider movement, which controls lighting intensity in direct proportion to the movement of the slider. Provide a smooth and continuous Square Law Dimming curve. Slider shall be of the dual wiping type, with a smooth movement, and an even pressure requirement for movement along the entire length of the slider. Encase the slider within the dimmer enclosure to prevent accumulation of dust on the control movement. B. Power -Failure Memory: When power is interrupted and subsequently returned, the lights shall come back on to the same levels set prior to WIRING DEVICES 16140-3 GATO BUILDING the power interruption. Restoration to some other default or pre-set — point is not acceptable, unless specifically noted elsewhere. C. Regulation: Regulate voltage so that a 10 percent variation in the line voltage shall cause no more than a 5 percent variation in the load voltage when the dimmer is operating at 40 volts (5 percent light output). D. Full -On Bypass: Dimmer shall contain latching contacts to bypass dimming circuitry when placed in the full on position to achieve 100 percent lighting output. E. Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall be Pass & Seymour, Leviton or Hubbell. 2.3 FLUORESCENT DIMMING A. Lamps: Dimmers shall be rated at 120 volts to control 40 lamps of the same current rating, but may be of different lengths. B. Operation: Dimming operation and performance shall be as follows; 1. Dimming range from 100 to 1 percent light output 2. One and two -lamp fixture packs shall track evenly, with no perceptible difference in light levels for the same type lamps. 3. Different lengths of lamps shall track evenly, with no perceptible _ difference in light levels for the same type of lamps. 4. Fixture packs shall be inaudible with no apparent humming or buzzing at any point in the dimming range. 5. Use standard lamps for dimming applications. Do not use energy- saving krypton -fill gas lamps. Where applicable, use knife-edge lamp sockets. a. Burn fluorescent lamps for 100 hours to "season lamps" before _ acceptance by the owner. b. Warrantee does not become effective until after system is "seasoned" by 100 hour burning time. 6. Electrical noise shall be suppressed to a level that shall not interfere with the normal operation of other properly designed and installed electrical equipment. 7. Minimum light levels shall be user -adjustable in order to compensate for different loading of each dimmer. 8. Use and interface control where necessary for preset systems, or for two location dimming of fluorescent fixtures. 2.4 DIMMER FACEPLATES A. Features: Faceplate shall snap on to device with no visible means of attachment. Heat fins shall not be visible on front of device. B. Multigang: Using 2 or more dimmers and/or other wiring devices together. Include mounting frame for proper device alignment and faceplate attachment. Dimmers ganged with other devices in a common location shall be included under a single faceplate of the size and shape to accept all devices located in the ganged mounting. Utilize similar shaped wiring devices to dimmer configuration to keep alignment and appearance uniform. C. Materials: Color and finish to be selected by the Architect/Engineer unless otherwise noted on the plans, or in these specifications. 2.5 CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES A. Twenty Ampere Receptacles: Provide commercial specification grade single or duplex receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, ground terminals and poles internally connected WIRING DEVICES 16140-4 GATO BUILDING to mounting yoke, 20 ampere, 120 volts, with metal plaster ears, side wiring, NEMA configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated. B. Color: Devices connected to the normal system shall be ivory in color, unless otherwise noted. C. Device Type: Unless otherwise noted, in all public areas, provide all receptacles as the duplex modular type. Provide standard devices in non- public areas such as storage rooms, janitor's closet, penthouses & mechanical spaces, and electrical rooms. D. Construction: Heavy duty nylon face and wraparound mounting strap, locked into and on the body, utilizing heavy -gauge brass ground contacts riveted to strap. Include automatic self -grounding spring to assure ground continuity between mounting strap and metal wall box. T-slot one piece copper alloy contact wipes which interface with plug blades inserted at 3 points. Line terminals shall be screw terminals and accept #14 to #10 AWG copper conductors. E. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter: Provide commercial specification grade, duplex, ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles, grounding type, UL rated Class A, Group 1, 20 ampere ratings, 125 volts, 60 Hz; with solid state ground fault sensing and signalling; with 5 milliampere ground fault trip level; equipped with 20 ampere receptacle configuration, NEMA 5-20R. Device shall contain test and reset pushbuttons, with a visual display of the tripped position. All exterior receptacles (weatherproof) shall be duplex GFI type. Interrupter shall resist tripping from the effects of radio frequency (RF) signals from 10 to 450 MHz. F. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter: Provide hospital grade, duplex, ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles, grounding type, UL rated Class A, Group 1, 20 ampere ratings, 125 volts, 60 Hz; with solid state ground fault sensing and signalling; with 5 milliampere ground fault trip level; equipped with 20 ampere receptacle configuration, NEMA 5-20R. Device shall contain test and reset pushbuttons, with a visual display of the tripped position. All outside receptacles (weatherproof) shall be duplex G.F.C.I. type. Interrupter shall resist tripping from the effects of radio frequency (RF) signals from 10 to 450 MHz. G. Clock Receptacles: Provide Simplex receptacle, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding, 15 ampere, 125 volts, with recessed female receptacle which permits an appliance (or clock) to be mounted flush against the wall and cover the outlet. Unit to include metal hook to support clock. H. Isolated Ground Receptacle: Provide a duplex receptacle, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding, 20 ampere, 125 volts, with the equipment ground terminal separated electrically from the mounting strap, and isolated from the conduit system. Provide positive isolated ground device identification by the use of an orange color on the entire device face, or an orange triangle located in the upper left hand corner of the device. 2.6 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR RECEPTACLE A. Modes of Protection: Surge suppression devices shall supervise Line to Neutral, Line to Ground, and Neutral to Ground conditions. B. Energy Capacities: The surge suppression device shall have equal surge protection of not more than 140 Joules of energy absorption in each mode, 3,000 amperes current handing in each mode, and 6000 volts protection in each mode. C. Noise Reduction: Provide device with EMI and RFI noise filters at an average of 7:1 noise reduction from 500 KHz to 30 MHz. D. Modular: Construct as a modular, heavy duty, Hospital Grade device. WIRING DEVICES 16140-5 GATO BUILDING E. Identification: Each device shall have a long life LED diode covered by a wide angle viewing lens for positive identification of surge protection. Provide a zig-zag symbol on the face of the device. F. Response Time: Response time shall be not more than 5 Nanoseconds. _ G. Attenuation: Common mode noise attenuation shall be 500 KHz to 30 MHz; up to 35 db (50 ohm source impedance). H. Operating Temperature: Operating temperature shall be -20 to 55 degree C. (-4 to 131 degrees F.) I. Color: a Match the color of other devices listed elsewhere in this Specification. J. Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall be Pass & Seymour, Leviton or Hubbell. Pass & Seymour Leviton Hubbell P/S 15A P/S 20A 15A 20A 15A 20A 6262-ISP 6362-ISP 8280-I 8380-I 8200 HIS 8300-HIS 2.7 SWITCHES ` A. Toggle Switches: Provide specification grade, fast -make positive -break, flush single -pole, three and four way, silent operation toggle switches, 20 ampere, 120 volt AC or 277 volt AC as required, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equipped with plaster ears, and side -wired screw terminals. Switches connected to the normal system shall be ivory; red for emergency system. B. Toggle Switches: Provide commercial specification grade, fast -make positive -break, flush single -pole three and four way as indicated; silent operation toggle switches, 20 ampere, 120 volt AC or 277 volt AC as required, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equipped with _ plaster ears, and side -wired screw terminals. Switches connected to the normal system shall be ivory; red for emergency system. C. Two Pole Switches: Provide two pole switches where drawings indicate the switching of 208 volt systems consisting of two phase conductors, D. Life Safety Key Switches: Provide key switches where drawings indicate, for switching of life safety lighting circuits. E. Security Key Switches: Provide key switches where drawings indicate, where a degree of security requires limited access to control of the lighting system. F. Pilot Light Handle: Handle glows when switch is on. Handle color shall be clear, unless otherwise indicated. G. Thermal Switch: Provide fractional horsepower switch with melting alloy type overload relay, with number of poles to coordinate with the equipment being controlled. Surface or flush mounted cover, as required, equipped with padlocking device and pilot light. Provide overload relay heaters for each pole of the switch, sized per the manufacturer's instruction, and adjust heater size to permit normal operation of the motor. H. Color: Provide red switches for emergency circuits. Match receptacle devices for normal circuits. 2.8 PLUGS AND CONNECTORS WIRING DEVICES 16140-6 , GATO BUILDING A. Standard: Comply with NEMA Standards Pub. No. WDl. 2.9 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES A. Faceplates: Unless otherwise noted, provide smooth faced nylon, single and ganged switch, receptacle, telephone, blank and other outlet wall plates for wiring devices, with ganging and cutouts as required. B. Multigang: Provide all necessary hardware and frames to properly mount various devices in combinations. C. Exterior, Device Covers: Provide "Weatherproof" duplex with stainless steel hinged cover. Device opening shall be standard or modular, to be compatible with the device provided for elsewhere in these specifications. D. Color: Unless otherwise noted, provide colored faceplates to match devices listed elsewhere in these specifications. 2.10 PRODUCT DESIGN SELECTION A. Commercial Specification Grade Receptacles: Provide commercial specification grade receptacles as follows; Description Leviton Hubbell P & S 15 amp Simplex #16251 #2151 15261 15 amp Duplex #16252 #2132 026252 20 amp Simplex #16351 02161 05361 20 amp Duplex #16352 #2142 #26352 15 amp Duplex GFCI #6598 #GF-5252 11591-S 20 amp Duplex GFCI #6898 #GF-5352 12091-5 20 amp Duplex Isolated Gnd. #16362-IG #IG-2162 #IG-26362 20 amp Duplex TVSS #5380 05352-IS 06362-SP B. Clock Receptacle: Provide clock receptacles as follows; Description Leviton Hubbell P & S 15 amp Simplex - Clock #5261-CH 05235 OS3733-SS C. Standard Commercial Grade Switches: Prpvide standard commercial grade switphes as follows; Description Leviton Hubbell P & S 20 amp Single #CS 120-2 #CS120 0521 20 amp 3-way #CS 320-2 #CS320 1523 20 amp 4-way #CS 420-2 01224 1524 20 amp Single -Locking 01221-2L 01221-L 1521-L 20 amp 3-way-Locking #1223-2L #1223-L 0523-L 20 amp 4-way-Locking #1224-2L #1224-L #524-L 20 amp Single -Pilot #1221-2PL 01221-PL 120ACl-CPL 20 amp 3-way-Pilot 11223-2PL 11223-PL #20AC3-CPL D. Dimmers: Provide dimmers as follows *per wattage requirements: WIRING DEVICES 16140-7 GATO BUILDING Description Lutron Leviton Hubbell Linear Slide Nova T Star 80,000 series AS series Fluorescent Nova T Star 86,000 series AS series Rotary Centurion 60,000 series AR series E. Motor Starter Switches: Provide motor starter type switches as follows; Description Square D Manual motor starter Class 2510 switch with overloads Manual motor starter Class 2510 switch with overloads and pilot light F. Device Covers: Provide device covers as follows; Description Leviton Hubbell P & S Thermoplastic nylon 807--series ---- RP series coverplate 804--N series Weatherproof stainless ---- #5221-5222 WP-8 steel coverplate Weatherproof stainless ---- ---- SP-26L steel coverplate locking type PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES A. General: Provide wiring devices, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and National Electrical Contractors Associations "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. B. Completion: Delay installation of devices until wiring and wall finish is completed. C. Support: Devices shall be securely supported to box, not supported to device plate. Device shall trim out flush with front of plate. Do not support the device by loosening device mounting screws and attaching the coverplate for leveling. D. Adjustment: Provide receptacles and switches only in electrical boxes which are clean, free from excess building materials, debris, etc. Adjust devices to plumb when tightened, and in position to receive faceplate. Devices shall not be leveled by using the mounting screws, outlet boxes shall be flush to wall finish prevent leveling problems. Tighten devices and provide securely, so that there shall be no movement during usage. E. Position: Position ground pin at the top of the device in vertical application, unless otherwise noted. F. Wiring: Provide screw terminal connections using a single conductor only. Do not "back -stab" devices. Provide single whips for all multiple conductor connections within each box. WIRING DEVICES 16140-8 GATO BUILDING 3.2 WALL DIMMER INSTALLATION A. General: Provide dimmers in accordance with manufacturer's written application, wiring, and installation instructions. Applicable requirements of NEC and National Electrical Contractors Associations "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. B. Mounting: Provide dimmers only in electrical boxes which are clean and free from excess building materials, debris, etc. Adjust dimmers to plumb when tightened, and in position to receive faceplate. Tighten dimmers'Vo that there shall be no movement during usage. C. Cover Plates: Provide dimmers and cover plates in true vertical or horizontal alignment as applicable. Plates shall be properly secured by means of screws which have heads with finish matching the plate. Secure plates so as to maintain a snug fit against dimmer surfaces, with no gaps. D. Position: Position ground pin at the top of the device in vertical application, unless otherwise noted. Slider to be in off position before connection to system. 3.3 APPLICATION OF COVER PLATES A. Mounting: Provide coverplates in true vertical or horizontal alignment as applicable. Plates shall be properly secured by means of screws which have heads with finish matching the plate. Secure plates so as to maintain a snug fit against wall surfaces with no gaps. B. Replacement: Replace all coverplates which are warped, cracked, chipped, or whose`,color does not match the balance of the installation. Replace screws whose threads do not allow the drawing up tight of the coverplate to the device. 3.4 CLEANING A. Soiled Devices: Clean devices soiled prior to acceptance inspection, to remove all debris and foreign materials, such as paint, varnish, drywall compound, etc. B. Solutions: Do not use liquid cleaning solutions, etc. on the face of the devices without written direction from the Engineer/Architect. 3.5 TESTING A. Ground testing: Provide ground testing procedures as specified herein. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring devices for electrical continuity, and for short circuits. B. Polarity: Subsequent to energization, test wiring devices for proper polarity, and to demonstrate operations as required in this and other sections of this Specification. C. Recording: Record all tests as required in other sections of this specification. END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES 16140-9 SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Description of System: In general, all electrical equipment (metallic conduit, motor frames, panelboards, etc.) shall be bonded together with a green insulated or bare copper system grounding conductor in accordance with specific rules of Article 250 of the N.E.C. Bonding conductor through the raceway system shall be continuous from main switch ground bus to panel ground bar of each panelboard, and from panel grounding bar of each panelboard to branch circuit equipment and devices. B. Ground Conductor: A main ground, bare copper conductor, NEC sized but in no case less than 02/0 AWG, shall be run in conduit from the Main Switchgear to a driven ground field outside the building. This ground conductor shall also be bonded to the main water service and the metal frame of the building nearest the Main Switchgear. Provide properly sized bonding shunt around water meter and/or dielectric unions in the water pipe. C. Preparation: All contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before connections are made to insure good metal to metal contact. 41 D. Bonding: Mechanical lugs or wire terminals shall be used to bond ground wires together or to junction boxes and panel cabinets and shall be manufactured by Anderson, Buchanan, Thomas and Betts Co., or Burndy. E. Exterior Grade Equipment: All exterior grade mounted equipment shall have their enclosures grounded directly to a separate driven ground at the equipment in addition to the building ground connection. F. Conductors: All raceways shall have an insulated copper system ground conductor run throughout the entire length of circuit installed within conduit in strict accordance with NEC. Grounding conductor shall be included in total conduit fill determining conduit sizes, even though not included or shown on drawings. Grounding conductors run with feeders shall be bare only. G. Medical Project Bonding: Provide bonding of the equipment grounding terminal busses of normal and essential branch circuit panelboards serving the same patient area with a continuous 010 AWG copper conductor, in compliance with NEC 517-14. H. Bushings: Provide insulated grounding bushings on all conduits within all panelboards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit product data on ground rods, ground wire, ground connectors and data on exothermic weld. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compliance: The entire ground system shall comply with NEC 250. GROUNDING 16450-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. General: Provide UL and NEC approved types of copper with THWN, THHN, or XHHW with green insulation. 2.2 GROUND RODS A. General: Provide copperclad steel, 5/8 inch diameter by 20 feet long ground rods. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 GENERAL A. Installation: Grounding conductors shall be so installed as follows; 1. To permit shortest and most direct path from equipment to ground 2. Be installed in metal conduit with both conductor and conduit bonded — at each end 3. Have connections accessible for inspection and made with accepted solderless connectors brazed (or bolted) to the equipment or structure to be grounded 4. Shall in NO case be a current carrying conductor 5. Have a green jacket B. Connection: The main grounding electrode conductor shall be exothermically welded to ground rods and water pipe. — END OF SECTION GROUNDING 16450-2 _ GATO BUILDING SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Description: Provide panelboards with main breaker or main lugs where shown on the drawings, of a dead front, distributed phase sequence design. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal -magnetic molded case circuit breakers with frame and trip ratings as indicated in the schedules. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ANSI: the latest edition of the Reference Standards for the American National Standards Institute shall apply as follows; 1. American National Standard Institute (ANSI); a. ANSI Y32.2 - Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronic Diagrams. b. ANSI Z55.1 - (R1973) Gray finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment. B. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association shall apply as follows; 1. NEMA PEl-1984 Panelboards 2. NEMA PBl-57 Gutter space C. NFPA: The latest edition of the National Fire Protection Association shall apply as follows; 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); a. NFPA 70-1993, National Electrical Code (NEC). D. UL: The latest edition of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Incorporated shall apply as follows; 1. Underwriters' Laboratories, Incorporated (UL); a. UL Electrical Construction Materials List, panelboards-dead front type. b. UL 67 Panelboard wiring gutter space, bus heat rise test. C. UL 50 Cabinets - Rigidity and gauge of steel. E. Listing: Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and bear the UL or other nationally recognized testing laboratory label. Where required, panelboards shall be listed for use as service entrance equipment. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: 1. Product data shall be submitted on: a. Panel b. Cabinet C. Bus d. Construction e. Dimensions PANELBOARDS 16470-1 GATO BUILDING 2. Shop drawings shall be submitted for every panel, and shall clearly -- indicate all of the following information: a. U.L. Label b. Each circuit breaker amperage rating, circuit number and - position/location in panel C. Electrical characteristics of panel d. Main bus rating e. Main device rating f. Mounting type g. Dimensions, (width, depth, height, weight) h. Bus material i. Interrupting capacity of minimum rated breaker j. Panelboard classification k. Submit coordination curves on log -log paper for all breakers, fuses, transformers, etc. 1. If dimensions for equipment proposed in submitted shop drawings are different than was shown on drawings, contractor shall submit sketches showing layout of proposed equipment. 3. Coordination Study: The Contractor shall expect an additional 10 working days for panelboard and switchboard review to allow the Engineer to design the coordination study. 1.5 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES - DESCRIPTION A. Description of System: Connections of all items using electric power shall be included under this division of the specifications, including necessary wire, conduit, circuit protection, disconnects and accessories. Securing of roughing -in drawings and connection information for equipment involved,,shall also be included under this division. See other divisions for specifications for electrically operated equipment. Provide overcurrent protection for all wiring and equipment in accordance with the NEC, all federal, state and local codes as required and/or as shown on the drawings. 1.6 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES - SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings and product data: Shop drawings shall clearly indicate; 1. Frame sizes and interrupting capacity of all circuit breakers. — 2. Horsepower ratings of rated voltage of fused switches and/or circuit breakers. 3. Size and type of fuses being provided. 4. Device is U.L. Listed, and bears the U.L. Label. 5. Device complies with these specifications, drawings, and applicable standards of NEMA, IEEE, ANSI, and ASA. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS A. Equipment: The panelboard bus assembly shall be enclosed in a steel — cabinet and shall be surface or flush mounted as shown in the schedules. The box shall be fabricated from galvanized steel with standard baked enamel finish. Panelboard front shall include a door and shall have a flush, cylinder tumbler -type lock with catch and spring -loaded stainless -- steel door pull. Panels shall have door -in -door construction. All panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. All panel cabinets shall be a minimum of 20 inches wide. Fronts shall have adjustable indicating trim clamps which shall be completely concealed when the doors are closed. — Doors shall be mounted with completely concealed steel hinges. Panel front shall not be removable with door in the locked position. PANELBOARDS 16470-2 GATO BUILDING B. Bus: Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main circuit breaker shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. Bus shall be insulated and bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be of the "distributed phase" or phase sequence type. All current carrying parts of the bus structure shall be tin plated copper. A full size insulated neutral bus bar shall be provided. Provide system grounding tin plated copper bus bar bonded to the panelboard cabinet for connection of system grounding conductors. This bar shall be mechanically and electrically isolated from the neutral bar except where panelboard is used as service entrance equipment. C. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: All panelboard branch circuit breakers shall be plug-in or thermal -magnetic molded case type. Breakers shall be 1, 2 or 3 pole with an integral crossbar to assure simultaneous opening of all poles in multi -pole circuit breakers. Breakers shall have an overcenter, trip -free, toggle -type operating mechanism with quick - make, quick -break action and active handle indication. Handles shall have "ON", "OFF", and "TRIPPED" positions. Plug-in circuit breakers shall be able to be installed in the panelboard without requiring additional mounting hardware. D. Solid State Circuit Breakers: Provide solid state circuit breakers for all breakers 600 amperes and above. Breakers shall have adjustable settings for long time, short -time, instantaneous, long time delay and short time delay. E. 120/208 Rating: 120/208 volt circuit breakers shall have interrupting ratings a minimum of 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 volts AC maximum. F. Switching Type: Single pole, 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers intended to switch fluorescent lighting loads on a regular basis shall carry the SWD marking. G. Directories: A typed panelboard directory shall be provided for each panelboard and shall indicate the actual circuit number used, room name and type of load. Room names shall be the actual name or room number used not necessarily as shown on the drawing. Panel directories shall include all room numbers and names. Where panel schedules are indicated on the drawings as "receptacles or "lighting", etc., it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to include the specific area served. H. Bracing: Panelboard as a complete unit shall be braced for a•minimum short circuit rating equal to or greater than the lowest breaker symmetrical interrupting capacity as shown on the schedule. However, all panelboards shall be fully rated. No series ratings are allowed. I. Grounding: All panelboard cabinets shall have a system grounding bar bonded to the panelboard cabinet for connection of system grounding conductors. This bar shall be mechanically and electrically isolated from the neutral bar. J. Stubs: Provide four 3/4 inch conduits from all flush mounted panels to adjacent accessible ceiling space and mark "for future use". Provide pull cord in all empty conduits and provide plastic end bushing. K. Design Selection: 120/208V Square "D", NQOD, Westinghouse: Pow-R-Line 1 General Electric: A -Series PANELBOARDS 16470-3 GATO BUILDING 600A thru 1200A Square "D": I -Line Square "D": I -line Westinghouse: Pow-R-Line 4 Westinghouse: Pow-R-Line 4 General Electric: Spectra Series General Electric: Spectra Series PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. General: Examine area to receive panelboard and assure that there is adequate clearances to meet NEC requirements and normal maintenance issues. B. Correction: Start work only after any unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Provide panelboards in complete accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and all applicable codes. B. Support: Panelboards shall be rigidly supported and installed per manufacturers recommended supporting instructions, with beams provided if necessary, to suit actual site conditions. Panels shall not be directly mounted to masonry walls. Use kindorf or similar channel. C. Storage and Delivery: Panelboards shall be delivered to the site during that phase of panelboard installation in order to avoid storing panels on site where damage may occur. Replace any damaged parts prior to energizing panel. Cover panelboard to avoid damage to finish. D. Mounting: Do not mount equipment directly to masonry or concrete walls. Provide two uni-strut spacers between wall and panelboard. E. Operations and Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions for tightening bus connections, cleaning, operation and maintenance. 3.3 QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Field test prior to energization; 1. Megger check, and record all data, of phase to phase and phase to ground insulation levels. 2. Continuity. 3. Proper phase relationship. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS 16470-4 GATO BUILDING SECTION 16490 - AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide automatic transfer switches of the size, number of poles, amperage, voltage and withstand ratings as shown on the contract drawings and as specified herein. B. Description: Using a Nema 1 enclosure, the switches shall automatically transfer the load to the generator during normal power outages. The switches shall be fully rated, electrically operated, mechanically held unit with both electrical and mechanical interlocks to prevent simultaneous energizing of both sides. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Requirements: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of automatic transfer switches, of types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements of this specification, provide an automatic transfer switch manufactured by one of the following: Manufacturer a. Russelectric, Inc. b. Automatic Switch Company C. Westinghouse Company C. Standards: Comply With The Following Standards: 1. UL-1008 a. As a precondition for acceptance, transfer switch, complete with timers relays and accessories shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. in their Electrical Construction Materials Catalog, and accepted for use on emergency systems. b. When conducting temperature rise tests to Paragraph 99 of UL- 1008 the manufacturer shall include post -endurance temperature rise tests to verify the ability of the transfer switch to carry full rated current after completing the overload and endurance tests. C. Produce UL 1008 closing and withstand ratings for 3 cycles at 480 volts. certified test reports from an independent testing laboratory to verify the identical samples have been subject to three phase short circuit current at voltage indicated on drawings, for a minimum of 3 cycles duration, without contact damage or contact welding and without the use of current limiting fuse protection. Oscillograph traces are to be supplied to verify that the test parameters have been met. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 16490-1 GATO BUILDING 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide all equipment cabinet dimensions and wiring diagrams as required. B. Product Data: Provide all applicable options, accessories, and interrupting or withstanding current ratings. Provide all electrical characteristics and data as required to show compliance with these specifications. C. Testing: Provide test results from UL 1008 as listed above. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Equipment Storage: The Contractor shall store items provided under this specifications until time of installation. Such storage shall meet the requirements of the system supplier and be accepted by the Engineer. The stored equipment shall not be delivered to the site until it is to be installed. B. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials from the activities of all other trades. C. Replacement: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the acceptance of the Engineer and at no cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.1 GENERAL A. Type: Provide 3 pole automatic transfer switches as shown on plans, with full load current and voltage rating as shown, 60 Hz normal and emergency. B. Load Types: The transfer switch shall be capable of switching all classes of load, and shall be rated for continuous duty when installed in a nonventilated enclosure that is constructed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL-1008. C. Accessories: All relays, timers, control wiring and accessories to be front accessible. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Features: Provide the following transfer switch features; 1. The transfer switch shall be double throw, actuated by a single electrical operator momentarily energized; and mechanically connected to the transfer mechanism by a simple over center type linkage with a total transfer time not to exceed 1/6 of a second. 2. The mechanism shall be a high speed actuator, capable of transferring successfully in either direction with 70 percent of rated voltage applied to the switch terminals. 3. Circuit breaker switches are not acceptable. 4. Mechanical interlocking of transfer switches to prevent unintended interconnection of the normal and alternate sources of power. -- 5. A means of safe manual operation of the transfer switch. B. Main Contacts: The normal and emergency contacts shall be positively -- interlocked mechanically and electrically to prevent simultaneous closing. Main contacts shall be fully rated, arc quenching, mechanically AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 16490-2 GATO BUILDING locked in both the normal and emergency positions without the use of hooks, latches, magnet, or springs and shall be renewable silver -tungsten alloy protected by arcing contacts, with magnetic blowouts on each pole. Contacts shall be able to withstand high fault current levels without contact damage or separation. Parallel main contacts are not acceptable. C. Exercise Timer: Include an exerciser with the transfer switches for exercising the generator in loaded or unloaded condition, up to every 168 hours for a period adjustable from a minimum of 20 minute intervals to 24 hours. D. Dual Motor: Provide off -time capability with controls for transfer and retransfer of motor and inductive loads so that inrush currents do not exceed normal starting currents. E. Engine Start Delay: Time delay to override momentary normal source power outages to delay engine start signal and transfer switch operation. Adjustable 0.5 to 3 seconds, factory set at 3 seconds. F. Load Test Switch: Load test switch to simulate normal power failure. (Maintained type). G. Contact Failure indicators: Contact to close on failure of normal source to interface with data acquisition panel. Contact to open on failure of normal source to initiate customer functions. H. Pilot lights: Green push to test pilot light on the cabinet door to indicate the main switch in normal position. Red push to test pilot light on the cabinet door to indicate the main switch in emergency position. I. Auxiliary Contacts: Provide an auxiliary contact closed in normal position. Provide an auxiliary contact closed in emergency position. J. Load Shed Relay: Provide a relay energized by 24 volt DC signal from generator control switchgear to disconnect the load from the emergency source when an overload condition occurs. K. Additional Contacts: Two sets of relay contacts shall be provided to open and close upon loss of the normal power supply. L. Elevator signal: Supply 2 time delay contacts that open prior to transfer in either direction. Provide wiring and connection to ,elevator controllers. 2.3 OPERATION A. Low Voltage: Provide engine starting contacts in transfer switches to start the generating plant if any ungrounded phase of the normal source drops below 70 percent of rated voltage, after a non-adjustable time delay period of 1 to 3 seconds, to allow for momentary dips. B. Transfer: The transfer switch shall transfer to emergency as soon as the generator source voltage and frequency have reached 90 percent of rated values. C. Stabilization; After restoration of normal power on all phases to 90 to 95 percent of rated voltage, adjustable time delay period of 2 to 25 minutes shall delay transfer to normal power until it has had time to stabilize. If the emergency power source shall fail during the time delay period, the time delay shall be by-passed, and the switch shall return immediately to the normal source. D. Generator No -Load Operation: Whenever the switch has retransferred to normal, the engine -generator shall be allowed to operate at no load for a fixed period of time (5 minutes) to allow it to cool before shut -down. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 16490-3 GATO BUILDING E. Test Switch: The transfer switch shall include a test switch to simulate -- normal power failure with actual load transfer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Inspection: Prior to performing the work required by this section, carefully inspect the installed materials and equipment of all other trades and verify that the project has progressed to a point where this inspection may properly begin. B. Verification: Verify that all equipment provided under this section of the specification may be installed in accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the referenced standards. C. Discrepancies: If any discrepancies are found, immediately notify the Engineer. Do not proceed with the installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Tightening Connectors: Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds. 486A and 486B. END OF SECTION AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 16490-4 GATO BUILDING SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Description of System: Light fixtures provided under this Division shall be provided complete with lamps and all necessary trim and mounting hardware, and installed as shown on the drawings. Light fixtures shall be neatly and firmly mounted, using standard supports for outlets and fixtures. Lamps shall be included in the system guarantee for a period of 90 days after final acceptance of the building. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be submitted for all fixtures that require modifications either as specified or as required to fit this projects' architectural field conditions (i.e. luminous ceiling, wall/slot fixtures, special fixtures). 1. Shop drawings shall be complete showing all dimensions and installation instructions required for this projects' architectural/field conditions. 2. Shop drawings for exterior post/pole mounted light fixtures shall clearly indicate handhole and lightning protection ground lug mounted to post/pole at handhole inside post/pole. B. Product Data: Product data shall be submitted for all light fixtures showing: -dimensions -U.L. Label -fusing -metal gauge -lens/louver thickness -finish -voltage -lamps 1. Product data shall be submitted showing manufacturer's written recommendations for storage and protection, and installation instructions. 1.4 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protection: Physically protect fixtures against damage as recommended by manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Fusing: All fluorescent fixtures provided under this Division which do not have electronic ballasts shall be individually fused with a renewable fuse in an external GLR holder. All fluorescent ballasts shall be CBM- ETL accepted, and shall be of the automatic thermal resetting type Class P. Provide ten extra renewable fuses to the Owner. All ballasts shall be securely mounted to eliminate resonate humming. LIGHTING 16500-1 GATO BUILDING B. Testing: All fixtures shall adhere to UL Test Standard No. 1571 and `- Section 410-65(c) of the National Electrical Code. C. Mounting: The contractor shall provide fixture trims and supports as required to match type of ceiling system. No ceiling fixture shall be ordered until the Ceiling System Installer has given written acceptance of the method and location of fixture hanging and fixture type. Fixtures shall be supported independent of the suspended ceiling system. Provide closed link jack chain at all four corners of fixtures utilizing a trapeze inverted "Y" connection. Provide individual supports at all four corners when trapeze connections conflict with mechanical work. D. Exterior Poles: All exterior post/pole mounted light fixtures shall have handhole near base. Hand hole shall provide easy access to light fixture fusing and lightning protection ground lug. Lightning protection ground lug shall be provided inside post/pole, electrically in contact with pole, for connection to ground rod. Provide ground wire from ground lug to ground rod, concealing ground wire through post/pole base. Anchor bolts shall be galvanized. E. Labels: All light fixtures and ballasts shall be UL listed. All light fixtures shall not have any labels exposed to normal viewing angles. This includes manufacturer labels and U.L. labels. All labels shall be concealed within the body of the fixture. No manufacturers name or logo shall appear on the exterior of any light fixtures unless accepted in writing by the engineer. F. Exterior Fixtures: All lighting fixtures mounted outdoors subject to dampness and insects shall have gasketing material between lens door and frame to completely seal interior of fixture. Knockouts and holes in fixtures', housing shall be closed and sealed. All fixtures shall be complete with lamps, shielding, brackets, concrete bases, anchor bolts and all necessary fittings and accessories for a complete installation. G. Lamps: Provide two extra lamps for every HID lamp type. Provide ten extra lamps for every incandescent lamp type. Provide ten extra lamps for every fluorescent lamp type. 2.2 MAGNETIC BALLASTS ( for HID fixtures only) A. General: Ballast shall have internal regulation of power consumption and light output under input line voltage fluctuations. Ballast shall be minimum "A" sound rated and operate quiet. Ballast case temperature shall not exceed 90 degrees C. All ballasts shall be high power factor rated at 95 percent power factor. Ballast shall be rated for voltage system to which applied. B. Interior Construction: Ballast shall have a thermo-setting, fire retardant partial filler to serve as a conformal coating and protective insulator against both internal and external damage. C. Warranty: Ballast shall carry the manufacturers written warranty, for a period of 3 years after factory code production date against defects in material and workmanship under normal conditions of use. D. Compatibility: The following ballasts shall be compatible to lamps provided: 1. Universal by MagneTek 2. Maxi -Miser II by Valmont 3. Mark III by Advance 2.3 ELECTRONIC BALLAST (for all fixtures except HID) A. General: Ballast shall be electronic type, high power factor and shall be covered by a three-year warranty against defects. Warranty shall include payment for normal labor costs of replacements of inoperative in - LIGHTING 16500-2 GATO BUILDING warranty ballasts. Ballast shall be rated for voltage system to which applied. The electronic ballast shall incorporate the following min. features: 1. Solid state ballast shall be compatible for use with F-32(32W), F- 25(25W) and F-17(17W) straight biax-type lamps. 2. Ballast shall be high frequency (20-62.5 KHz) and operate without detectable flicker. 3. Ballast shall be constant current rated 95 percent power factor. 4. Ballast shall have a thermo-setting, non -toxic, fire retardant partial filler to serve as a conformal coating and protective insulator against both internal and external damage. 5. Ballast shall have internal regulation of power consumption and light output under input line voltage fluctuations. 6. Ballast shall be minimum "A" sound rated and operate quiet. 7. Ballast case temperature shall not exceed 90 degrees C. 8. Ballast shall contain MOV transient surge protection. 9. Ballast shall not cause RFI interference. 10. Ballast shall have total harmonic distortion of less than 20 percent. B. Manufacturers: Ballasts shall be provided by one of the following manufacturers: 1. MagneTek 2. Advance 3. Valmont 4. Motorola 2.4 HID BALLASTS A. General: High intensity discharge ballasts shall be constant wattage auto transformer, high power factor type with renewable type KTK fuses in HEB holders. Voltages shall comply with system to which •applied. Provide ten extra renewable fuses to the Owner. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Valmont, Advance, MagneTek. 2.5 HID BALLASTS (INDOOR FIXTURES): A. General: Ballasts shall be encapsulated in standard fluorescent type ballasts cases for quiet operation. Ballasts shall be high power factor. Sound rating shall be minimum "B". B. Ballasts: The following ballasts shall be compatible with lamps provided: 1. Linear by Valmont 2. 73B series by Advance 3. E&P by MagneTek 2.6 T-8 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. General: Provide lamps as follows: 1. 2 foot lamps, T-8, 17 watts, 3500 degrees K, 80 minimum CRI, 1350 minimum initial lumens, 20,000 average life. LIGHTING 16500-3 GATO BUILDING 2. 3 foot lamps, T-8, 25 watts, 3500 degrees K, 80 minimum CRI, 2150 minimum initial lumens, 20,000 average life. 3. 4 foot lamps, T-8, 32 watts, 3500 degrees K, 80 minimum CRI, 2850 minimum initial lumens, 20,000 average life. B. Design Selection: OSRAM-Sylvania, GE, or Philips. 2.7 INCANDESCENT LAMPS A. General: Incandescent lamps shall be rated 130 volts. Average minimum rated lamp life shall be 2500 hours. Design Selection: SuperSaver by OSRAM-Sylvania, Watt -miser by GE, or Econo-watt by Philips. 2.8 2 FOOT BIAX LAMPS A. General: Lamps shall be 40 watts, 3500 degrees K, CRI of 82 minimum, 3150 lumens, 20,000 average rated hours. B. Design Selection: F40/30BX/SPX35/RS by GE or DULUX 40W/35K/RS by OSRAM- Sylvania, or PL-L 40W/35/RS by Philips. 2.9 BIAX/COMPACT FLUORESCENT A. Lamps shall be 3500 degrees K, CRI of 82 minimum, lamps 13 watts and -- below shall be rated minimum 10,000 hours life. Lamps 18 watts and above shall be rated minimum 20,000 hours life. Refer to light fixtures schedule for wattage of lamps. 1. OSRAM-Sylvania, Inc. 2. GE F _ BX/SPX35/RS series. 3. Philips PL _ _/35 2.10 COMPACT FLUORESCENT DIMMING A. Dimming: All compact fluorescent lamps indicated to be dimmed shall be provided with a 4 pin base and be of the quad tube design. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Sealing: Ducseal shall be installed to seal all conduits -entering exterior light fixtures from underground. B. Instructions: Provide all fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and NEC. C. Suspended Installation: Pendant mounted fluorescent fixtures installed in exposed ceiling areas are to be suspended from structure with all - thread rods and 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inch Kindorf channels, full length of fixture/row. Mount outlet box at structure with flexible connection to fixture. D. Coordination: Coordinate fixtures installed in mechanical rooms with piping and ductwork prior to installation and relocate fixtures as required to provide proper illumination and access. 3.2 CLEAN-UP A. Luminaires: Prior to the Owner move -in, the Contractor shall clean all fixtures and remove any dust or dirt. Wash lens and glassware using cleaner such as "Windex" and dry with absorbent cloth. Clean plastic per manufacturer's recommendations; do not wipe. Clean "Alzak" aluminum surfaces (reflectors, fixture cones and the like) per manufacturer's recommendations being careful to remove finger prints and smudges. LIGHTING 16500-4 GATO BUILDING END OF SECTION LIGHTING 16500-5 GATO BUILDING SECTION 16650 - ENGINE GENERATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.3 A. B. RELATED DOCUMENTS General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified of this section. DESCRIPTIION General: This section describes an engine generator set, with auxiliary support system, to be a utility power failure. SUBMITTALS materials, installation and testing of main breaker, thermal heat pump and used for standby power in the event of Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010 of this specification. Submission: Show applicable ratings, sizes, materials, manufacturers and part numbers, and overall dimensions and weights, for the following equipment; 1. Itemized bill of material 2. Manufacturer and model of engine 3. Manufacturer and model of generator 4. Control panel 5. Battery charger 6. Batteries and rack 7. Electric governor 8. Daytank with accessories and piping 9. Exhaust silencer 10. Main line circuit breakers 11. Base and isolators 12. Annunciator panels 13. Voltage regulator 14. Jacket water heaters 15. Fuel, lube oil and intake air filters 16. Thermal heat pump 17. System schematic diagram showing wiring interconnections with sizes and quantities. 18. Modification fact sheet giving fuel, coolant, lubricating oil, and exhaust and ventilation requirements. 19. Torsional vibration analysis for engine and generator. 20. Factory test report. 21. A start-up inspection report signed by the engine manufacturer's authorized field service representative. 22. Provide an information copy of the standard engine inspection and maintenance service contract. The contract shall be for the complete system including all auxiliary support systems. 23. Weatherproof housing with location of batteries 24. Emissions 25. Remote Shunt Trips 26. The name and location of parts and service facility which shall service equipment. 27. Parts and service as required in this section for engine and generator. Submit preventive maintenance program. 28. Manufacturer's Warranty 29. Bore, stroke, piston, speed and number of cylinders. 30. Engine displacement. ENGINE GENERATORS 16650-1 GATO BUILDING 31. Temperature rise by resistance of both rotor and stator, maximum KVA and KW rating, generator efficiency, type of excitation, generator regulator and regular accessories. 32. Submit current cost of oil sampling. 4 33. Shop drawings on exhaust muffler and exhaust piping showing all parts, dimensions, and required mounting accessories. 34. Shop drawings on remote radiators showing all parts, dimensions manufacturer, mounting accessories and all product data required to show compliance with these specifications. 35. Dimensions, installation, and connection requirements for generator units. 36. CFM requirements for each generator. 37. Manufacturer's recommended hours of operation between overhauls. 38. Submit generator thermal damage curve, generator current decrement curve and overcurrent protective device curve on full size 11" x 17" log -log paper. Time in seconds on Y axis and current on X axis. 1.4 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Services: Provide authorized equipment manufacturer's services at the jobsite. Install equipment, check the modifications, supervise start-up, and supervise testing and adjustment of the equipment. Provide two man -days to instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance manuals prior to this instruction. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Equipment furnished under this section shall be guaranteed against defective parts or workmanship for a period of 2 years from date of field testing and acceptance by the Owner, whichever comes last. 1.6 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Intent: It is the intent of these specifications to secure, for the purchaser, a diesel engine driven generator set of the latest commercial type and design as specified herein. All material and equipment shall be new and undamaged. B. Service: It is essential that the engine -generator supplier maintain a local parts and 168 hour/week service facility located within a 60 mile radius of jobsite. In addition, and in order not to penalize the Owner for unnecessary or prolonged periods of time for service or repairs to the emergency system, the generator set supplier must have no less than 60 percent of all engine replacement parts in his stock within the State at all times. Certified proof of this requirement shall be available from the dealer, and a personal inspection of the dealer's facilities shall be made by the consulting engineer or his appointed representative to substantiate claims made by the generator set supplier. The supplier shall provide all installation and test supervision necessary for final acceptance and testing. The generator set supplier shall provide all equipment except underground fuel storage tanks and fuel piping. All power feeders and service entrance conductors and conduit shall be provided and completely installed. All generator control alarm and interlock wiring including conduit shall be completely provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for the generator set supplier and related requirements. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: The generator, and major items of auxiliary equipment, shall be manufactured in the U.S. by manufacturers currently engaged in the production of such equipment. ENGINE GENERATORS 16650-2 _ GATO BUILDING B. Location and Parts: An authorized distributor maintaining a parts depot and 168 hour/week service facility shall be located within a 60 mile radius of the jobsite. C. Qualifications: The engine -generator manufacturer shall be an authorized full service dealer. D. Manufacturers: Accepted Manufacturers shall be Kohler 600rozd or equal by Caterpillar, Onan/Cummins. E. General: The units shall be manufactured in the U.S.A. and shall be the product of a firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of engine sets and shall meet the requirements of these specifications. It must be a standard model in regular production at the manufacturer's place of business. Engine, generator and control panels shall be serviced by the same supplier so that there shall be one source and one responsibility. 2.2 RATING A. General: The rating of the standby engine -generator shall be as listed below and based on operation when equipped with all operating accessories, including air cleaners, fans, lubricating oil pumps, fuel injection pump, and jacket water pump. The specified standby KW shall be rated for continuous electrical service during interruption of the normal utility source. The engine generator shall have the following ratings; 1. Standby 600 KVA 2. Engine Speed: 1,800 RPM (maximum) 3. Voltage: 120/208 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire 4. Frequency: 60 hertz 5. Power Factor: .8 6. Altitude: 100 feet above sea level. 7. Engine Room Temperature: 120 degrees F. maximum, 40 degrees F. minimum. 2.3 ENGINE A. General: Provide an engine with the following features; 1. Full compression ignition diesel 2. Four-stroke cycle 3. Water cooled 4. Air cooled 5. Replaceable cylinder liners 6. Replaceable valve seat inserts 7. Capable of the rated output when operating on a commercially available No. 2 diesel oil (ASTM D 396). 8. Capable of extended no load operation without loss of lubricating oil. 9. 1129 BHP (brake horse power) at 1800 rpm. B. Accessories: Provide the engine with the following accessories; 1. Fuel, lube oil, and intake air filters 2. Intake air silencer, high frequency type 3. Lube oil cooler 4. Flexible fuel lines 5. Gear -driven water pump 6. Coolant and oil drain valves 7. Fuel priming pump 8. Fuel cooler for return fuel installed on radiator or as required 9. Crankcase fumes disposal system 10. Engine control wiring - multi -strand plastic insulated cable enclosed in nylon flexible slotted conduit terminated in bulkhead fittings. ENGINE GENERATORS 16650-3 GATO BUILDING 2.4 STARTING A. Starting Motor: A DC electric starting system with positive engagement drive shall be provided. The motor voltage shall be as recommended by the engine manufacturer. B. Automatic Control: Fully automatic generator set start stop controls in the generator switchboard shall be provided. Controls shall provide _ shutdown for low oil pressure, high water temperature, overspeed, overcrank, and two auxiliary contacts for activating accessory items. Controls shall include a 30 second single cranking cycle limit with lockout. C. Batteries: A nickel -cadmium storage battery to be used in conjunction with the electric starting system and generator control switchgear shall be provided for each engine. The batteries shall have sufficient capacity to provide for one minute total cranking time without recharging and shall be 12 hour rated. The battery shall be rated by the battery manufacturer in accordance with requirements set forth by the engine manufacturer. Provide a battery rack of fiberglass construction with bottom insert to insulate the batteries and prevent corrosion and necessary cables, clamps and replaceable connectors. Batteries shall be mounted in the building where shown and required. Wiring shall be sized as required by manufacturer for distance involved. _ D. Battery Charger: Current limiting battery charger shall be provided to automatically recharge batteries. Charger shall float at 1.4 volts per cell and equalize at 1.6 volts per cell. It shall include overload protection silicon diode full wave rectifiers, voltage surge suppressor, DC ammeter, DC voltmeter, and fused AC input. AC input voltage shall be 120 volts, single phase. Amperage output shall be no less than 20 amperes and size based on load of gear and recharge of battery in 24 hours. Charger shall be Lamarche model A46. Charger shall have auxiliary contacts to close on low voltage and N.O. AC input for connection to respective generator control cubicle in generator switchboard. Charger shall be capable of fully charging batteries during running conditions and shall be coordinated with generator provided. E. Governing System: Governing system shall be as follows; 1. Provide a Woodward 2301 or Barber Coleman equal, electronic adjustable isochronous governor with electronic speed sensing-. 2. Governor shall provide adjustable speed setting from 58 to 62 hertz and maintain the frequency within plus of minus 0.25 percent from no load to full load. Upon load change of not more than 25 percent of rated load, the governor shall re-establish stable operation in not less than one and one-half seconds. Stable operation is defined as operation at a frequency within plus of minus 0.25 percent of rated frequency. 3. The maximum change of frequency during the one and one-half second load change surging period shall not exceed 0.5 Hz. 4. After any sudden load change of not more than 25 percent of rated load, the governor shall reestablish stable operating conditions in not less than 1-1/2 seconds. Stable operation is defined as operated at a frequency that is constant within plus or minus 0.25 percent of rated frequency. 5. The maximum change of frequency during the one-half second surging period shall not exceed 0.5 Hz. 6. Governor module shall be mounted inside generator control panel. ENGINE GENERATORS 16650-4 _ GATO BUILDING 7. The engine shall be equipped with a compatible actuator and the necessary magnetic pick-up to drive the governor. 8. All connections between the engine governor, engine and switchgear auxiliary switching points shall be made with shielded cable. 9. Governor cable shall not be run in the same conduit with AC control of primary voltages. F. Cylinder Liners, Pistons, and Valves: Cylinder liners, pistons, and valves shall be as follows: 1. The engine shall be provided with removable wet -type cylinder liners of close grained alloy iron, heat treated for proper hardness to obtain maximum life. 2. Pistons shall be aluminum alloy with cast iron top ring banks and chrome -faced rings. 3. valve train shall employ replaceable valve seat inserts, alloy steel valves and cast iron guides. G. Lubrication: Lubrication shall be as follows: 1. A gear -type lubricating oil pump shall supply oil under pressure to main bearings, crank pin bearings, pistons, timing gears, camshaft bearings and valve rocker mechanism. 2. Pistons shall be spray cooled. 3. Effective full flow lubricating oil filters shall be provided and so located that lubricating oil is continuously filtered except during periods when oil is by-passed to protect vital parts such as when filters are clogged. 4. Replacement resin impregnated cellulose type filter elements shall be accessible and easily removable. Filter system shall be equipped with a spring -loaded bypass valve as an insurance against stoppage of lubricating oil circulation in event the filters become clogged. 5. A suitable water-cooled, engine -mounted lubricating oil cooler shall be provided. The diesel oil sump drain shall be brought to the outside of the set for ease of changing oil. H. Air Cleaners: One or more engine -mounted dry type air cleaners of sufficient capacity to protect working parts of the engine from dust and grit shall be provided. I. Fuel System: Fuel system shall be as follows: 1. Injection pumps and injection valves shall not require adjustment in service. The engine shall have an individual mechanical injection valve for each cylinder, any one of which may be removed and replaced from parts stock. 2. Fuel injection pump shall be positive action, constant -stroke pumps, actuated by a cam driven by gears from the engine crankshaft. Fuel lines between injection pump and valves shall be heavy seamless tubing, and, to eliminate irregularity of fuel injections, shall be of the same length for all cylinders. 3. Fuel system shall be equipped with replaceable fuel filter elements which may be easily removed without breaking any fuel line connections or disturbing the fuel pumps or any other part of the engine. Fuel filter shall include fuel pressure gauge, bypass valve (normally closed), manual shutoff valve. ENGINE GENERATORS 16650-5 GATO BUILDING 4. All fuel filters shall be conveniently located in one accessible housing, ahead of injection pump so that fuel shall have been thoroughly filtered before it reaches the pump. No screens or filters requiring cleaning or replacement shall be used in injection pump or injection valve assemblies. 5. Engine shall be equipped with a built-in gear -type engine -driven fuel transfer pump, capable of lifting fuel against a head of 12 feet, for supplying fuel through the filters to the injection pump at constant pressure. 6. Provide a water separator on the engine just ahead of the fuel filters constructed of heat -resistant glass, with aluminum - perforated baffle for viewing amount of water contained. J. Jacket Water Heater: Jacket water heater shall be as follows; 1. Provide a unit -mounted thermal circulation -type water heater incorporating a self-contained thermostatic switch, controlled by the exit coolant temperature from the heater to maintain engine jacket coolant to 90 degree F. 2. The heater shall be single phase, 60 Hz, 208 volts. Heater shall be Chromalox, or Kim-Hotstart. 3. Provide hand valves in the heater hoses to facilitate changing heating elements without draining the entire cooling system. K. Thermal Heat Pump: Provide a separately mounted, single phase, 208 volt heat pump housed in an anodized aluminum enclosure as follows; 1. Unit shall be a high efficiency (coefficient of performance of 3 or better), air to water design that shall maintain the diesel engine coolant within plus of minus 5 degrees F. of the manufacturer's recommended temperature. 2. Install the heat pump with the coolant flow in series with the -- jacket water heater. 3. Provide hose kit with two 3/4 inch shut off ball valves and two-20 feet long, 3/4 inch diameter hoses rated at 250 psi with connectors compatible with engine. 4. Freon: Freon shall not be R-12. 5. Manufacturer: Geothermal Systems, Inc., Model DH12 or equal. L. Duty Cycle: The engine shall be capable of operation at light loads for extended periods of time and shall provide for pre -combustion of fuel or a similar means for the prevention of carbonization. M. Engine Instrument Panel and Safety Switches. 1. Engine Instrument Panel: Provide an engine -mounted instrument panel with gauges for items in the following table. 2. Safety Switches: Provide devices for indication and control of the items in the following table requiring pre -alarm and shutdown. Indicator Function (at Battery Voltage) CV S RA (a) Overcrank X X X ( b ) Low Water Temp. <70°F ( 21°C ) X X ENGINE GENERATORS 16650-6 GATO BUILDING N. (c) High Engine Temp Prealarm X X (d) High Engine Temperature X X X (e) Low Lube Oil Pressure Prealarm X X (f) Low Lube Oil Pressure X X X (g) Overspeed X X X (h) Low Fuel Main Tank X X (@ 48 hrs. fuel remaining) (i) EPS Supplying Load X X (j) Control or Test Switch Not in Auto. X X Position (k) Battery Charger Malfunctioning X X (1) Low Voltage in Battery X (m) Lamp Test X (n) Contacts for Local & Remote Com. Alarm X X* (o) Audible Alarm Silencing Switch X (p) Low Starting Air Pressure X (q) Low Starting Hydraulic Pressure X (r) Air Shutdown Damper when used X X X (s) Remote Emergency Stop X (t) Day tank Hi -low Alarm X X (u) Remote Radiator Breaker Position X X KEY: CV Control panel-mtd. visual indication RA Remote Audible S Shutdown of EPS X Required * Remote common for 1, m, p, q, & s Exhaust System: The exhaust system shall be as follows; 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Exhaust system shall consist of a critical silencer, Maxim M51 or Donaldson TCU Series, flexible exhaust fitting, exhaust piping, insulation, and mounting hardware. Install muffler and exhaust piping as part of Division 15. Provide a critical type silencer constructed of mild steel. Exhaust noise shall not exceed 75 dBA at 25 feet. Provide brackets, companion flanges, gaskets, and fasteners. Provide Type 316 stainless steel bellows -type flexible exhaust fitting at least 18 inches long. Provide horizontal discharge tailpipe. Undercut at 45 degrees and cover with 80 percent expanded metal bird screen. Provide exhaust system consisting of adapters, elbows, lined bellows, piping, supports, drain tees, and support assemblies. The system shall be a custom -fitted fabrication. ENGINE GENERATORS 16650-7 GATO BUILDING 6. Pitch horizontal runs of exhaust pipe away from the engine. Provide condensate traps with petcocks or valves at low spots in the exhaust system. 7. Insulate complete exhaust system to limit the exterior insulation - temperature to 200 degrees F. 8. Inlet and outlet size shall be 10 inch. _ 9. Provide heat recovery when specified, in accordance with the parameters indicated and the engine manufacturer's recommendations. 2.5 EXHAUST EMISSIONS A. General: To maintain environmental quality, the engine shall be equipped with a precombustion chamber fuel system or have suitable emission Y control equipment to ensure that gaseous exhaust emissions do not exceed: NOx (Calculated as Not) 8.75 GRAMS/BHP-HR HC 0.25 GRAMS/BHP-HR _ CO 1.50 GRAMS/GHP-HR These maximum levels shall be at manufacturer's rated speed and load as measured by SAE J177 and SAE-J215 recommended practices. Verification of _ the ability to meet these emission specifications shall be available from the engine manufacturer. 2.6 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT _ A. General: The engine block and heads shall be provided with factory applied acoustical dampening. The amount and location of treatment shall be the normal available from the engine manufacturer. The exhaust manifolds, turbochargers and mufflers shall be wrapped with HITCO A.I.M. flexible layered fiberglass blankets or accepted substitution supplied by engine manufacturer installed by the Contractor. An air intake acoustical silencer as manufactured by Donaldson, or Maxim shall be provided for each engine air intake. Silencers shall be of the packed chamber design and sized for the engine combustion air flow. 2.7 GENERATOR _ A. General: Provide the following; 1. The random wound generator shall be a 3 phase, 60 Hz, 480/277 volt, insulated, single -bearing, drip -proof, rotating field, synchronous type, with 3 phase brushless PMG exciter. 2. The form wound generator shall be a 3 phase, 60 Hz, 480/277 volt, insulated, single -bearing, drip -proof, rotating field, synchronous type, with 3 phase brushless PMG exciter. 3. Provide Class H insulation limited to Class "B" (130 degrees C) rise. 4. Provide 100 percent epoxy varnish impregnation and a coat of epoxy asphalt insulating material to increase resistance to abrasive dust - or sand, high humidity, and light acidic, oil, or salt -laden atmospheres, as well as prevent fungus growth. B. SCR Equipment: Generator shall be designed for operation of SCR type equipment. C. Wave Form: The wave form deviation factor of the line -to -line voltage at no load and balanced rated load at 0.8 power factor not to exceed 4 percent. The rms of all harmonics shall be less than 2 percent and that -- ENGINE GENERATORS 16650-8 GATO BUILDING of any one harmonic less than 1 percent at full rated load. TIF shall be under 50. D. Transient Dip: The transient dip shall not be greater than 20 percent of rated voltage when full load at rated power factor within 5 cycles is applied to the generator. E. Voltage Regulator: Provide a static type voltage regulator to maintain a constant and stable generator output voltage within plus or minus 0.5 percent of nominal for all steady-state loads from no load to full load with isochronous speed control and plus or minus 2 percent speed droop operation. A 5 percent variation in frequency and the effects of field heating will not affect the unit's regulation. Provide stability and voltage range adjustments. F. Fault Current: Provide permanent magnet generator boost to provide a minimum of 300 percent of fault current for 10 seconds. G. Manufacturer: Marathon, Caterpillar or Kato. 2.8 STRUCTURAL STEEL BASE A. Base: Isolate the structural steel base from the engine with 6 quad spring -type isolators with neoprene -jacketed pre -compressed molded fiberglass noise isolation pads, steel load plate, built-in leveling bolt, welded steel or cast housing, and high deflection steel springs. B. Isolators: Isolators shall be Peabody Noise Control, Inc.; Kinetics brand, Type SM; Norfund or Dynamics Corporation. 2.9 GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL A. General: Provide a NEMA 12, vibration isolated, dead front, 12 gauge steel control panel with lockable hinged cover. Mount and wire the control panel to the engine -generator set. The panel shall include the following equipment; 1. Voltmeter, 1 percent accuracy with 3 phase fuse protection digital type to read true rms. 2. Ammeter, 1 percent accuracy, digital type to read true rms. 3. One ammeter and one voltmeter phase selector switch. 4. Frequency meter, 1 percent digital type. 5. Running time meter. 6. Instrument transformers. a. Automatic starting controls, cycle crank. 7. Voltage level adjustment rheostat, minus 25 to plus 10 percent. 8. Dry contacts for remote alarms wired to terminal strips. a. Fault indicator lights with press to test feature for low oil pressure, high coolant temperature, low coolant level, overspeed, and overcrank. 9. Visual alarm indicators for impending shutdown from oil pressure and high coolant temperature. 10. Visual alarm indicators for low fuel level and low coolant temperature. 11. Three -position function switch marked "manual", "off/reset", and "auto". ENGINE GENERATORS 16650-9 GATO BUILDING 12. Emergency engine stop pushbutton. 13. Panel illumination lights and switch. B. Components: Pilot lights and pushbuttons shall be standard duty type. C. Devices: Provide relays and timing devices with clear polycarbonate dust covers. Devices shall be plug-in type with holddown spring retainers. Output contacts shall be rated 10 amperes at 24 volt dc. D. Controls: Provide engraved or etched nameplates to show position of switches and function of pilot lights, pushbuttons, and meters. E. Provide fully automatic set start -stop controls in the generator panel. Controls shall operate as follows; 1. With switch in automatic position closure of a set of external contacts or switch in manual position, the engine shall automatically crank. 2. An adjustable cranking limiter shall allow from 2 to 5 cycles of 30 -J seconds continuous cranking. a. If the engine fails to start, starting circuit shall be locked out and the overcrank light illuminated. 3. The engine will shut down when operating in the automatic mode and the remote engine run contact open. 4. Initiation of any safety shutdown shall immediately stop the engine and light the appropriate light. 5. Upon correction of the fault, the shutoff system shall be made operable by moving the function switch to off/reset and then back to the "auto" position. F. Main Line Circuit Breaker: Provide main line circuit breaker as follows; 1. Provide a main line circuit breaker sized in accordance with the NEC with surge suppressors. Solid state circuit breaker shall have adjustable settings for long-time, short -time instantaneous, long- time delay and heat -time delay. 2. Install on the generator in a NEMA 1 enclosure to function as a load circuit interrupting and protection device. 3. Circuit breaker shall be trip free of the handle. 4. The handle position, or a luminescent flag, shall indicate "off", "on", or "tripped" breaker positions. 5. The trip unit for each pole shall have elements providing inverse time delay during overload conditions and instantaneous magnetic tripping for short-circuit protection. Breaker shall also include a 24 volt D.C. shunt trip for remote trip. 6. Insulated neutral terminals and a ground terminal shall be provided and marked. 7. The circuit breaker shall meet standards established by UL, NEMA, and NEC. 8. Do not use generator exciter field circuit breakers. 9. Manufacturer: General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse. ENGINE GENERATORS 16650-10 _ GATO BUILDING G. Exhaust Connection: Provide mounting brackets for the critical exhaust silencer specified. In addition, as tail pipe extension terminating in a horizontal plane and cut at a 45 degree angle to prevent the entrance of rainwater shall also be supplied. Further, a stainless steel, seamless, flexible exhaust tube and all necessary bolts, flanges, and gaskets to mate with the engine and the critical exhaust silencer shall be provided. The length of the flexible tubing shall be such that additional solid metal nipples or sections shall not be required to be provided as spacers between engine exhaust or the exhaust silencer. H. Rain Skirt: Provide "rain skirt" and collar to prevent the entrance of rain and allow for expansion and vibration of the exhaust piping without chafing or stress to the exhaust system. I. Rust Inhibitor: Prime paint with a minimum of two coats rust inhibitor primer. The final finish painting shall be a minimum of two coats of color selected by Owner. 2.10 FUEL DAY TANK A. General: One day tank shall be provided and installed for each engine. Day tank shall be a Simplex Model SST100, or Electric Specialties, 100 gallon day tank and shall include the following items; 1. Duplex pump control system shall include the following items and shall be contained entirely on the day tank requiring no additional mounting. 2 float switches, 2 one-way check valves, one duplex pump control with automatic alternator system. Alternator system shall provide both alteration and both pumps on demand. Pump control system shall include starters and disconnects required for pumps. 2. 6 inch square gasket inspection port in top of tank. 3. Drain petcock in bottom of tank. 4. Centrifugal fuel filter and water separator at day tank. Filter shall be Raycor Model 1000, or Purolator. 5. Sight glass with two hand valves and guard. 6. Power available green pilot light connected to line side of float switch. 7. High and low fuel alarms from separate float switch for remote DC alarm in main generator switchboard. 8. Hand operated emergency 5 gpm pump. 9. Day tank shall be minimum size as indicated above and shall be minimum size as required for genset provided. B. Mounting: Coordinate configuration, height and methods with job conditions. Do not locate below the storage tank elevation. 2.11 FUEL PIPING AND STORAGE TANKS A. Tank: Underground fuel storage shall be provided under Division 15. All fuel oil piping, remote fuel level gauges, underground lube oil sump tank lube oil piping and all necessary valves and fittings shall be provided and installed by Division 15. The Contractor shall be responsible for a complete fuel system installation. B. Coordination: It shall be the responsibility, however, of the generator set supplier to coordinate all materials and work of other trades so that the total installation is complete and fully operational and meets all engine manufacturers requirements. Any materials or installation ENGINE GENERATORS 16650-11 GATO BUILDING required for proper interfacing of all trades shall be provided and installed by the generator set supplier. C. Fuel Filter: Fuel system shall be equipped with replaceable fuel filter elements which may be easily removed without breaking any fuel line connections or disturbing the fuel pump or any other parts of the engine. 2.12 TORSIONAL VIBRATION ANALYSIS A. General: Submit a torsional vibration analysis of the engine -generator combination, showing it free of harmful torsional vibration stresses within plus or minus 10 percent of its normal operating speed range, the natural frequency, critical speeds, relative amplitudes of angular displacement, and approximate nodal locations of the complete elastic system of the engine and driven equipment. 2.13 SYNCHRONIZING AND EMERGENCY DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD A. General: The switchboard associated with the generator control and emergency distribution system shall encompass all switchgear that is fed from both a normal and emergency source and contains intelligence network circuitry requiring the openings and reclosing of load breakers and contains transfer switchgear arrangements for transferring from the power company source to the emergency source. B. Functions: The intelligence systems of the switchboard shall provide for automatic paralleling of the generators to the common bus, automatic frequency control, electronic governors for load sharing, automatic power factor control, so that both the real and reactive power from the generators shall be automatically shared, automatic engine starting and shutdown''systems and load shedding. C. Load Control: The distribution intelligence network shall provide for sequential load breaker closing, based on the hydraulic design of the system, and shall also provide for load shedding when necessary because of engine failure or system overload. D. Control: All control equipment as specified in Emergency Power Control Section of these specifications shall be considered part of the emergency generator system and shall be supplied by the emergency generator supplier. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of the entire emergency system. E. Manufacturer: Switchboard shall be "Russelectric", Square D, or Onan. PART 3 - EXECUTION - EMERGENCY GENERATOR - MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS 3.1 GENERAL A. Miscellaneous Requirements: Provide the following: 1. Equipment nameplate. 2. Operating manual (5 copies). 3. Parts list (5 copies). 4. Special tools (as required). 5. Lubricants (6 months supply). 6. As -built shop drawings (5 sets). 7. Services of a Manufacturer's Representative, minimum ten (10) days. 3.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM REQUIREMENT A. General: The manufacturer of the Power Generation System equipment shall develop a computerized preventative maintenance program. Specific recommendations for actual equipment application shall be made for a computerized program based on operating hours and/or elapsed time. The ENGINE GENERATORS 16650-12 _ GATO BUILDING preventative maintenance recommendations shall be submitted with the shop drawings. 3.3 SYSTEM SERVICE CONTRACT A. General: The supplier of the power system must provide a copy of and make available to the Owner his standard service contract which, at the Owner's option, may be accepted or refused. This contract shall accompany any documents, drawings, catalog cuts, specification sheet, wiring or outline drawings, etc. submitted for acceptance to the designing engineer. 3.4 REMOTE ANNUNCIATION A. General: All necessary relays and wiring shall be provided by the generator system supplier for remote annunciation for each generator of the following information on the central system computer in the main control room; 1. Normal power on/off. 2. Main breakers, 1, 2, and 3 open/closed. 3. Generators 1, 2, 3 and 4 running. 4. Pre -alarm trouble on generator 1, 2, 3 and 4 (single signal). 5. Generator 1, 2, 3 and 4 trouble shutdown (single signal). 6. Emergency system operating. 7. Peaking system operating. 8. Main diesel tank low level. 3.5 FACTORY TESTING A. General: ', Perform factory tests prior to shipment. Include the following; 1. Demonstrate proper operation of all safety devices. 2. Conduct load tests utilizing resistive load banks as follows: Load Hours half 1 three quarter 1 full 4 3. At the end of two hours at full load, the engine -generator shall be block loaded from no load to full load for a total of two tithes, and the voltage dip shall be recorded by a strip chart recorder. 4. Record current, voltage, frequency, water temperature, lube oil pressure, and lube oil temperature every 15 minutes. 5. Perform factory testing in the presence of the Owner's Representative. Submit request and test verification to the Engineer. 3.6 FUEL A. General: Fill the tank with No. 2 fuel oil meeting ASTM D 396. After field testing is complete, refill the tank. 3.7 PAINTING AND COATING A. Finish: Coat enclosure and structural steel base per as specified in other sections. Color of finish coats shall be selected by Owner. 3.8 STARTUP A. Initial: On completion of the installation, the initial startup shall be performed by a factory -trained service representative of the engine ENGINE GENERATORS 16650-13 GATO BUILDING supplier, who shall thoroughly inspect, operate, test and adjust the — equipment. B. Provisions: The inspection shall include the soundness of all parts, completeness of all details, proper operation of all components with special emphasis on safety devices, correctness of settings, proper alignments, and correct phase rotation to match other sources. C. Tests: Field tests shall include the following; 1. Simulate power failure by tripping the main breaker and demonstrate complete manual and automatic start, load, unload, and stop sequence of the engine -generator. 2. Conduct a two-hour run with generator operating, utilizing maximum available load. If available load is less than 100% of the generator's rating, then furnish and add loads to obtain 100% generator loading. 3. Conduct a block loading test in accordance with NFPA-110. 3.9 SCHEDULED OIL SAMPLING A. Sampling Analysis: In order to minimize engine failure, the supplier of the equipment shall provide a quarterly (every three months) oil sampling analysis (for each engine) for a period of two years from date of acceptance. B. Method: This scheduled oil sampling shall be of the atomic absorption spectrophotometry method accurate to within tl ppm for the following elementsr, lead, iron, chromium, copper, aluminum, and silicon. C. Test Requirements: In addition, test the sample for the presence of water, fuel, dilution, and antifreeze. D. Equipment: Provide equipment needed to take oil samples in a kit at the time of acceptance. Include a sample gun kit, bottles, mailers, and written instructions. E. Notification: Provide immediate notification (within two hours of analysis) by telephone or fax to the owner when analysis results show any critical reading. If readings are normal, provide a report by -mail showing that the equipment is operating within established requirements. F. Owner Availability: This scheduled oil sampling program to be available to the owner at the supplier's normal rate, after the mandatory 2 years and shall be continued thereafter at the Owner's option. 3.10 SYSTEM SERVICE CONTRACT A. General: The supplier for the standby engine -generator shall provide a copy of his standard engine -generator inspection and maintenance service contract for Owner review. 3.11 HEATER AND ANTIFREEZE A. General: Each engine shall be provided with antifreeze, (a solution of 30 percent ethylene glycol) and suitable unit mounted thermal circulation type water heaters incorporating a thermostatic switch to maintain engine jacket water to 90 degrees F in an ambient temperature of 30 degrees F. The heaters shall be sized as recommended by manufacturer, single phase, 60 Hz 480 volts. Heaters shall be Kim-Hotstart, Chromalux or accepted substitution. ENGINE GENERATORS 16650-14 GATO BUILDING END OF SECTION ENGINE GENERATORS 16650-15 GATO BUILDING SECTION 16670 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide a complete lightning protection system as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. The lightning protection system shall be installed by a professional firm presently engaged in installations of Master Labeled or LPI certified lightning protection systems. The system as completed shall comply with the latest edition of UL96A, Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems, and NFPA-780 "Lightning Protection Code." The system shall meet all requirements of these codes and the Lightning Protection Institute Standard of Practice LPI-175. All components required for a full LPI certification plate shall be provided whether or not such materials are specifically addressed by the contract drawings or described herein. B. Qualification: All installers shall be experienced and LPI certified or of equivalent qualification, as accepted in writing by the engineer of record. An LPI certified installer shall be on the project site at all times during installation of the systems and shall supervise all of the installation. 1.3 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COUNTERPOISE CONDUCTOR A. General: The structure shall be provided with a below -grade continuous counterpoise conductor, equal in size to the largest conductor in the building lightning protection system, or sized as indicated on the drawing. This conductor shall be installed at a minimum depth of two feet below finished grade and a minimum of two feet from the exterior foundation wall of the building. The counterpoise conductor shall be copper and extend continuously around the entire perimeter of the building. B. Counterpoise: As a minimum, the counterpoise conductor shall be connected to each of the following system components utilizing heavy duty, U.L. products: 1. Each down conductor. 2. All counterpoise conductors on power and communications ducts which enter the building. 3. The building electrical service ground. 4. All metallic water and gas services entering the building (ahead of meter). S. Counterpoise conductor on adjacent buildings (within fifty feet). 6. All metallic fence posts, safety railings, etc., or any other metallic item within fifty feet of the project building. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Shop drawings identifying all system wiring and component placement, including all details, shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. The Contractor shall not perform any portion of the Work until the respective submittal has been accepted. All work shall be in accordance with accepted submittals. B. Detail Submission: Details shall be submitted to the Engineer for review indicating the method of cabling connections and attachments starting at LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 16670-1 GATO BUILDING the top of the project building to the ground rods at the counterpoise. All details shall be appropriate for the project. C. Identification: All product data sheets submitted, for proposed system components, shall clearly identify the item being submitted and shall indicate the UL label. D. Suppression Device: All transient voltage surge suppressors for the project shall be submitted at the same time the lightning protection floor plans, details and product data sheets are submitted. Each suppressor shall clearly indicate the item to be protected. E. Deviations: The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the acceptance of shop drawings, product data, samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Engineer in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and the Engineer has given written -- acceptance to the specific deviation. F. Certification: Provide documentation of LPI certification or equivalent qualification of exact installer intended to do this particular job. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Labels: All materials used for the system installation shall comply in size, composition and weight to all requirements of NFPA and LPI for the class of system in which they are installed. All materials shall be -- labeled or listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in master labeled or LPI certified lightning protection systems. B. Material: Generally, the external lightning protection system at the roof level shall be constructed of aluminum cable and aluminum compatible components. The internal lightning protection system, starting with the down conductors and concluding at the ground termination system (counterpoise and dissipation points) shall be constructed of copper cable and copper compatible components. Likewise, all bonding conductors, equipotential loop conductors, etc, shall also be constructed of copper cable and components. C. Compatibility: All portions of the system, weather copper or aluminum, shall be galvanically compatible to the building material to which they are to be attached. Connections between copper and aluminum portions of the system shall be made with appropriate bimetallic coupling devices. In all areas, the conductor shall be supported to maintain clearance from all galvanically incompatible materials and/or installed from same. D. Components: All system components (i.e. air terminals, bases, connectors, cable, thru-roof fittings, ground rods, etc.) shall be, to the maximum extent possible, the product of a single manufacturer. All components shall be heavy duty construction utilizing hexagonal head bolts for fastening. All hospital project air terminal bases shall be - securely mounted to the project roof by means of mechanical fasteners. Adhesive type air terminal bases are not acceptable. Submit in shop drawings for proposed air terminal mounting details. 2.2 AIR TERMINALS A. General: Air Terminals shall be aluminum or copper as required to match the building system to which they attach. Air terminals shall protrude — a minimum of 10 inches above the object to be protected. B. Base: Each air terminal shall be equipped with the correct type of base for the location in which it is mounted. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 16670-2 _ GATO BUILDING 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. General: Main roof conductors shall be aluminum and provide a two-way path from each air terminal horizontally or downward to connections with ground terminals. Conductors shall be free of excessive splices and sharp bends. No bend of a conductor shall form an included angle of less than 90 degrees nor have a radius of bend of less than 8 inches. Conductors shall be secured to the structure at intervals not exceeding 3 feet. B. Down Conductors: Down conductors shall be copper and shall be concealed in the exterior wall construction or structural columns. Down conductors shall be spaced at intervals averaging not more than 100 feet around the perimeter of the structure. In project structures of structural steel frame construction, down conductors may be omitted and roof conductors shall be connected to the structural steel frame at intervals averaging not more than 100 feet around the perimeter of the structure. Connections to the steel frame shall be made with heavy duty bonding plates having 8 square inches of contact surface. C. Main Conductor: Main conductor cable shall be 28 strands of 14 gauge copper wire, 1� inch diameter, 115,000 cm, 35 lbs per 1000 feet (2/0 minimum). D. Shop Drawing: Submit all conductor type in shop drawing form. Each conductor shall be identified as to location in the lightning protection system. 2.4 ROOF PENETRATIONS A. General:--, Roof penetrations required for down conductors or for connections to structural steel framework shall be made using thru-roof type assemblies with solid bars and appropriate roof flashing. Roof flashing shall be compatible with the roofing system and shall be provided under this contract and installed by the roofing contractor. Submit roof flashing data sheets and letter of acceptance from roofing contractor in shop drawing package. 2.5 COMMON GROUNDING A. General: Common grounding of all ground mediums within the project building shall be made by interconnecting with main size conductors and heavy duty fittings. B. Bonding: Grounded metal bodies located with the required bonding distance (as determined by the bonding distance formulas in NFPA 78) shall be bonded to the system using bonding conductors and fittings. Bond to rebar utilizing Cadweld braze connections. C. General: Three ground terminations shall be provided for each down conductor rod and shall consist of three 5/8 inch x 20 feet copper -clad ground rod with 10 feet separation. Each down conductor shall be connected to the ground rods by an exothermic weld connection. All ground rods shall be located 2 feet below finished grade and 2 feet from the foundation wall and shall extend a minimum of 20 feet vertically into the earth. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Conductor fasteners shall be manufactured of a material which is compatible with the type of conductor being supported. Fasteners shall be of sufficient strength to properly support each conductor or terminal base, etc. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 16670-3 GATO BUILDING 2.7 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Equipment manufactured by Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. Harger Lightning Protection or Heary Brothers shall be considered acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS A. General: Conductors shall be installed to interconnect all air terminals to the system of grounding electrodes, and in general provide a minimum of at least 2 paths to ground from any point on the system. Conductors shall provide a horizontal or downward path between the system air terminals and grounding electrode system. No bend in any conductor shall exceed 90 degrees or have a radius of less than 8 inches. B. Routing: Conductors shall be routed in such a manner that maximum concealment from public view is achieved. Down conductors shall be in one -inch PVC conduit from roof to grade. C. Counterpoise Conductors: Counterpoise conductors shall be installed after finished grades are established to insure specified depth and to minimize the possibility of damage. Any counterpoise conductor which is cut or damaged shall be repaired or replaced with no additional cost to the contract. D. Connections: All connections between conductors below grade shall be exothermically welded. Improper application of weld shall be replaced at no additional cost to the contract. 11 3.2 INSTALLATION OF GROUND RODS _ A. General: Ground rods shall be installed vertically at each down conductor position at a minimum of 2 feet from the building foundation wall. Inspection and documentation at each grounded location, weld, depth of counterpoise, etc., shall be made by the owners representative prior to backfill. Contractor shall notify engineer in writing at conclusion of his work. Allow a minimum of one week for engineer to make the inspection after notification from contractor. 3.3 BONDING OF SECONDARY METALLIC BODIES A. General: All metallic equipment located within 6 feet of a lightning protection conductor shall be bonded to the lightning protection system. B. Structure Grounding: Provision shall be made at the roof level on reinforced concrete structures for bonding between the down conductors, metallic elements of the roof system and metallic exterior wall systems. C. Bonding: All down conductors run in concrete columns shall be bonded to the reinforcing steel at the top and the bottom of the column. All metallic items within 6 feet of each down conductor shall be bonded to the down conductor. 3.4 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP A. General: All elements of the Lightning Protection System shall be installed in a professional and workmanlike manner consistent with the best industry practices. B. Concealed Installation: All system components shall be concealed to the maximum extent possible to preserve the aesthetic appearance of the project building on which the system is installed. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 16670-4 GATO BUILDING 3.5 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Coordination: The Contractor shall coordinate his work with all trades, to insure the use of proper materials and procedures in and around the roof in order not to jeopardize the roofing warranty. B. Fasteners: Where fasteners are to be embedded in masonry or the structural system, those fasteners shall be provided to insure installation at the proper time of installation. C. Certification: Upon completion of the installation the Contractor shall provide to the owner the Master Label issued by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for the installation, or the LPI certification issued by LPI. END OF SECTION LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 16670-5 GATO BUILDING SECTION 16709 - TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. General: Transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) or surge protection device (SPD) is the description and equipment required for the protection of all AC power electrical circuits and low voltage electronic equipment from the effects of lightning induced voltages, external switching transients and internally generated switching transients. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS A. General: The latest edition of the following standards and publications shall comply to the work of this section; 1. ANSI/IEEE C62.33 Standard for Test Specifications for Varistor Surge Protection Devices. 2. ANSI/IEEE C62.41 1991 (IEEE 587) Guide for Surge Voltages in Low - Voltage AC Power Circuits Categories A, B and C. 3. ANSI/IEEE C62.45 Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected Low Voltage AC Power Circuits. 4. IEEE Standard 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding 5. IEEE Standard 518 Recommended Guide on Electrical Noise 6. UL-1283 for EMI Filters 7. UL-1449 Standard for Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors 8. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 9. NFPA 75 Standard for the protection of electronic computer/data producing equipment. 10. NFPA 780 Lightning Protection Standard. 11. Military Standard (MIL Std.) 220A 12. CCITT Rec. K-17 Waveform specification for electronic systems 13. NEMA LS-1. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. General: Surge suppression, grounding and bonding shall effectively protect the systems to which it is applied against lightning, transients, internal spikes, and other surge transients throughout the useful life of the system. Surge protection devices and related grounding and bonding systems shall be designed and installed in such a manner that normal operation, performance ratings, and listing of the system is not impaired by the installation of such devices, wiring or connections. B. Intent: The intent of this specification is to allow manufacturers with varying equipment concepts to provide transient voltage surge suppression which will properly protect equipment within the guidelines set forth herein. Specific manufacturers listed shall be used as the basis of design, however, submitted components shall comply to the minimum and maximum values listed. The specified ratings of the specific manufacturer's model numbers specified herein shall be the basis of design and shall be used as the minimum and maximum values required. The specified manufacturers shall not change the specific product values to TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 16709-1 GATO BUILDING correspond with maximum or minimum values listed. The listed data specified herein shall be used for the comparative analysis of all manufacturers. 1.5 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS A. Repair: The surge protection device manufacturer shall offer factory repair service and replacement for all units. The manufacturer shall provide this service within four working days, and provide replacement components shipped to the Owner for installation within the allocated response time. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Only the following acceptable manufacturers shall be considered; Leviton, LEA Dynatech and Liebert/CC, Inc for line voltage tvss and LEA Dynatech, EDCO and Innovative Technology for low tension signal circuits. C. Installation Certification: The manufacturer shall furnish a letter indicating that the installation was inspected by a factory authorized representative and meets all of the manufacturer's wiring and installation requirements. The Contractor shall submit a check -letter to the manufacturer indicating the date when the equipment was put into service and the actual method of installation. Submit three copies of the manufacturer's and the contractor's letter to the Engineer for review. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Period: All surge protection devices and supporting components shall be guaranteed by the installing contractor to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of five years from the date of substantial completion or service activation for the system to which the suppressor is attached. B. Replacement: Any suppressor which shows evidence of failure or incorrect operation during the warranty period shall be repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner including labor and materials. Since "Acts of Nature" or similar statements include the lightning threat to which these suppression devices shall be exposed, any such clause limiting warranty responsibility in the general conditions of this specification shall not apply to this section or the product installed. The warranty shall cover the entire device not just the modules. C. Installation: Installation of SPD's in or on electrical distribution equipment shall in no way compromise or violate equipment listing, labeling, or warranty of the distribution equipment. 1.7 SUBMITTAL A. General: SPD wiring, bonding, and grounding connections shall be indicated on the manufacturer's wiring diagrams for each system. Include installation details demonstrating mechanical and electrical connections to the equipment to be protected. B. Testing: The test data submitted shall be specific for the actual method of installation proposed. Submittals will not be reviewed unless they include proper project related data. Interpretation of standard manufacturers published data will not be acceptable unless the data coincides with the actual installation procedure. TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 16709-2 GATO BUILDING C. Submittals: The surge protection submittal shall also include, but shall not be limited to, the following additional data; 1. Complete data for each suppressor type indicating conductor sizes, conductor types, connection configuration, lead lengths and all appropriate dimensions. 2. Dimensions for each suppressor type indicating mounting dimensions and required accessory hardware. 3. Manufacturers certified test data indicating the ability of the product to meet or exceed requirements of this specification. 4. If requested, a sample of each suppressor type to be used for testing and evaluation shall be submitted. 5. Drawings shall be provided indicating surge protection device mounting arrangement and lead length configuration, and mounting arrangement of remote diagnostic equipment and assemblies. 6. List and detail all protection systems such as fuses, disconnecting means and protective materials. TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 16709-3 GATO BUILDING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SINGLE SOURCE SUPPLY A. Single Source Supply: All AC power SPD's shall be manufactured by a -- single manufacturer. All system SPD's shall be manufactured by a single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE A. Data: The surge suppression equipment shall meet or exceed the minimum performance criteria as follows; MINIMUM COMMON & SYSTEM COMPONENT NORMAL MAXIMUM MAXIMUM MODE RESPONSE RESPONSE NOISE EQUIPMENT MINIMUM TOTAL SURGE TIME IN NANOSECS TIME IN REJECTION TYPE CURRENT/PHASE CAT NANOSECS IN DB. SERVICE 150,000 A C3 5 1 40 ENTRANCE DISTRIBUTION 75,000 A B3 5 1 40 EQUIPMENT OVER 400 AMPERES PANEIBOARDS 25,000 A A3 5 1 40 B. Voltage Ratings: Voltage ratings shall be as follows; 1. 120, 120/208, 3¢ 4W "Y" or 120/240 volt systems 2. 277/480 30 4W "Y" volt systems 3. 208V. or 480V. 30 3W delta C. Clamping Voltage: Clamping voltage ratings shall be 4 modes for service entrance. The service entrance modes shall be phase to neutral and phase _ to ground for main service. Provide 7 modes, phase to neutral, phase to ground and neutral to ground, for distribution equipment and panelboards. The following shall be used for clamping voltage values allowed; TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 16709-4 GATO BUILDING Im W4 BIWAVE MAXIMUM CURRENT CLAMPING EQUIPMENT 3 PHASE 4 WIRE VOLTAGE RATINGS TEST WAVE CATEGORY VOLTAGE TEST RATING TEST WAVE RATING VOLTAGES 7 MODE: L, NGG LN 4 MODE: LNNG 3Q, 3W: LL, LG 120/240V C3 20 KV 10 KA 600 V 120/208V C3 20 KV 10 KA 600 V SERVICE ENTRANCE 277/480V C3 20 KV 10 KA 1000 V DISTRIBUTION 120/240V B3 6 KV 3 KA 600 V 120/208V B3 6 KV 3 RA 600 V EQUIPMENT 277/480V B3 6 KV 3 KA 1000 V 120/240V B3 6 KV 3 KA 400 V 120/208V B3 6 KV 3 KA 400 V PANELBOARDS 277/480V B3 6 KV 3 KA 800 V Throo PhaRP_ Three Wire: BIWAVE MAXIMUM CURRENT CLAMPING EQUIPMENT TEST VOLTAGE TEST VOLTAGES 3 PHASE VOLTAGE WAVE TEST WAVE 3 WIRE RATINGS CATEGORY RATING RATING L-L, L-G SERVICE 480V C3 20 KV 10 KA 1500 V ENTRANCE DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 480V B3 6 KV 3 KA 1500 V TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 16709-5 GATO BUILDING D. Insertion Loss: Standardized insertion loss data shall be obtained utilizing MIL-STD-E220A 50 ohm insertion loss methodology. Minimum insertion loss shall be as follows; Insertion Frecruencv Loss (dB) 100kHZ 34 1MHZ 51 1OMHZ 54 100MHZ 48 E. Unit Operating Voltage: The nominal unit operating voltage and --. configuration shall be as shown on the contract documents. The maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of all components shall not be less than 125% at 120V. and 115% at 220, 240, 277, and 480 volts. F. Power Interruption: During normal suppression operation, the unit shall not short circuit or crowbar the power flow that would result in an interruption to the load. Building power shall not require interruption for maintenance. G. Visual Indication: Visual indication on the cover of the enclosures shall indicate proper system operation. Visual indication shall also indicate mode failure. 2.3 SURGE SUPPRESSION A. Type of Surge Suppression operation: Modular, solid state componentry, bipolar and bi-directional operation shall be provided for service entrance and distribution equipment. B. Fused Disconnect: SPD's shall be provided with integral fused disconnect switch for service entrance and distribution equipment. Switches shall have an AIC fault withstand rating equal or greater than the AIC rating of the equipment being protected. The withstand rating of the current limiting fuse will not suffice as the withstand rating of the device. The rating shall be UL listed for the entire device. C. Enclosures: Enclosures shall be as follows; 1. Minimum 14 gauge painted steel with fully hinged door for SPD's at service entrance and distribution equipment over 400 amperes. a. NEMA 1 for General Purpose. 2. Minimum 14 gauge painted steel with pre -wired leads for SPD's at distribution equipment 400 amperes and less and for panelboards. a. NEMA 1 2.4 PLUG-IN RECEPTACLE TVSS DEVICES A. Specified under Section 16140. 2.5 MANUFACTURERS TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 16709-6 GATO BUILDING 12o/20av TVSS SERVICE DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS MANUFACTURER ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT 400 AMPERES >F LARGER LEA DYNATECH GB-100- GB-50-120/208 LS110-120/208 120/208 LIEBERT/ LCG120YC3 LCG120YC2 ACV120Y111REK CONTROLS CONCEPTS LEVITON 57000-M3S 47000-007 47000-007 * Manufacturer is contingent on meeting criteria in paragraph Z.Z. 277/4ROv TVSS SERVICE ENTRANCE DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS MANUFACTURER EQUIPMENT 400 AMPERES i I.ARGER LEA GB-100 GB-50 - LS110-277/480 DYNATECH 277/480-3Y 277/480-3Y LIEBERT/ LCG277C3 LCG277YC2 ACV277Y11REK CONTROL CONCEPTS LEVITON 57000-M3S 47000-007 47000-007 * Manufacturer is contingent on meeting criteria in paragraph 2.2. 2.6 BONDING AND GROUNDING CONDUCTORS AND MATERIALS A. Size: Conductors utilized for surge suppressor bonding shall be a minimum of 16 AWG solid insulated copper unless otherwise specified. B. Bus: Ground bus or strip material shall be copper, a minimum of 16 gauge in thickness and three inches wide unless otherwise specified. Bus materials may be secured to surfaces with an appropriate mastic material or mechanical fasteners. Bus connections shall be bolted and reinforced as necessary to provide a permanent and secure connection. C. Rods: Unless otherwise specified, all surge suppression grounding electrodes, where provided, shall be 5/8" diameter copperweld rods, twenty feet in length minimum. D. Connections Compliance: Connectors, splices, and other fittings used to interconnect grounding conductors, bonding to equipment or ground bars, shall comply with requirements of the National Electric Code and be accepted by Underwriters Laboratories for the purpose. TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 16709-7 GATO BUILDING E. Connectors: Connectors and fittings for grounding and bonding conductors shall be of the compression type in above grade locations. Connections below grade shall be exothermically welded or brazed. F. Dissimilar Materials: Bonding connections between electrically dissimilar metals shall be made using exothermic welds or using bi-metal connectors designed to prevent galvanic corrosion. 2.7 COMMUNICATION LINES A. General: The following standard for telephone and data lines shall apply; TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 16709-8 GATO BUILDING B. Customer -Owner Lines: C. EZ E. F. For data rates under 20,000 baud, Peak surge current (per Pair): Occurrences at peak current: Response time: Clamp voltage (at peak surge current): Capacitance: Protection modes: Mechanical: Circuit design: UL approval Manufacturer: 400 amps (10 x 700 us) >100 1 nanosecond <2 times peak op. voltage <2000pf L-L, L-G (all modes) Plug in modules - no tools one or two pair increments Series hybrid - no MOV's UL 497B listed EDCO PC642 for two pair and COHP Series for one pair or approved equal For data rates between 20,000 baud and 2 MHz: Same as A above except, Capacitance: Manufacturer: <100pf EDCO (PC642LC or LCHP Series) or approved equal For data;rates between 2Mhz and 100Mhz: Same as A above except, Peak surge current: Capacitance: Mechanical: Circuit design: UL approval: CATEGORY 5 (if required): Manufacturer: Leased Lines - Telephone Network: Peak surge current (per pair): Occurrences at peak current: Response time: DC breakdown voltage: Peak -on - state voltage: Capacitance: Circuit Design: UL approval: Recommended Manufacturer: 40 amps (10 x 700us) <40pf Plug-in modules, up to 4 pair increments/module SAS array UL 497B listed EIA/TIA TSB 40B certified EDCO (LANBLK-24 or LAN 16) or approved equal 100 amps >100 <1 nanosecond 300 - 380 volts 3 volts <125pf Fused silicon foldback UL 497A listed* EDCO (TSP-200 for trunk pairs or FAS- TEL for trunk secondary pairs) or approved equal *Note: Intended to be used in conjunction with a telephone network - supplied primary protection (UL 497) in accordance with NEC 800;30. If not UL listed a nationally known testing agency shall be acceptable. Coaxial Video Cables (50 Ohm) 1. CCTV: Peak surge capability of 5,000 amperes (8 x 20us) TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 16709-9 GATO BUILDING UL 497B rated Implements hybrid technology Recommended Manufacturer: EDCO (CX06-BNCY) 2. CATV: Peak surge capability of 5,000 amperes (8 x 20us) Implements gas tube technology Recommended Manufacturer: EDCO (CATV-145) G. Manufacturers: EDCO is indicated as the Basis of Design. LEA Dynatech shall be considered as an equal utilizing TE series and other equivalent devices. INNOVATIVE TECHNOLOGY FOR COMMUNICATION ONLY. TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 16709-10 GATO BUILDING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SEGREGATION OF WIRING A. General: All system wiring shall be classified into protected and non - protected categories. Wiring on the exposed side of suppression devices shall be considered unprotected. Surge suppressor grounding and bonding conductors shall also fall into this category. B. Protection: All wiring between surge suppressors and protected equipment shall be considered protected and connected in accordance with the latest edition of the NEC. C. Separation: A minimum of three inches of separation shall be provided between parallel runs of protected and unprotected wiring in control panels, terminal cabinets, terminal boards and other locations. In no case shall protected and unprotected wiring be bundled together or routed through the same conduit. Where bundles of protected and unprotected wiring cross, such crossings shall be made at right angles. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Installation at Service Entrance and Distribution Panels: Suppressors shall be installed in Service Entrance switchboards or switchgear as close as practical to distribution equipment to be protected consistent with the available space, however, do not exceed three feet. Where installation space permits and where no code restrictions apply, SPD's may be installed within the distribution panel cabinet. SPD's installed in this manner shall utilize the equipment chassis as a medium for bonding of their ground terminals. Bonding jumpers not exceeding two inches in length shall be installed between the chassis and suppressor ground terminals. Bolted connections with star washers shall be used to insure electrical and mechanical integrity of connections to the equipment chassis. Conductors from SPD's shall attach to main service bus connection in the service entrance equipment on the load side of the electrical utility company metering equipment. B. Installation at Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: The SPD shall be installed as close as practical to the electric panel or electronic equipment to be protected, consistent with available space. SPD's shall be close nippled to the device being protected in a position near the neutral bus which will minimize lead length between the SPD's and the buses and disconnect means to which the SPD connects. Prewired leads shall be field cut to minimize the length between the SPD and panel connection point. SPD leads shall not extend beyond the suppressor manufacturer's recommended maximum lead length without specific approval of the Engineer. Leads shall be twisted up to the connection points. C. Workmanship: SPD's shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner. Lead dress shall be consistent with recommended industry practices for the system on which these devices are installed. D. Disconnect: The main service entrance and distribution panel devices shall be provided with an integral disconnect switch with fuses. The disconnect switch shall be fused with current limiting fuses. Switches must have a fault withstand AIC rating equal to or greater than the power distribution equipment being protected. All panelboard SPD's shall be fused. 3.3 TESTING TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 16709-11 GATO BUILDING A. General: Disconnect SPD prior to meggar testing of service entrance, distribution equipment and panelboards. 3.4 SPARE PARTS A. General: Furnish to Owner one set of manufacturers recommended replacement parts, modules, spare L-N, L-G and N-G surge suppression module for all modular equipment. END OF SECTION TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 16709-12 GATO BUILDING SECTION 16720 - ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. System: Provide a multiplex type fire alarm system as indicated in the contract documents, including all required interconnections to the Owner - provided central station telephone circuit. B. Monitor Points: The systems shall incorporate monitor points, and control outputs, from designated devices located throughout the building, and provide point identification of an alarm. C. Zoning: System devices shall be zoned as indicated on the contract drawings. System devices shall be microprocessor based, utilize digital addressing techniques, and function as described herein. D. Supervisory Functions: The system shall provide control and supervision of all system functions and, in conjunction with addressable analog sensors and circuit modules, provide information which is translated into the processor. E. Memory: The execution of custom requirements shall take place through non-volatile rom memory which shall maintain the system configuration even when AC power and battery back-up power is lost. F. Codes: This system shall be fully usable as a UL listed fire alarm system and shall conform to all state and local codes covering, this project. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms shall be regularly engaged in manufacture of equipment of types and service required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Testing: Fully test all control panels for proper operation prior to shipment from the factory. C. Manufacturer: Equipment design shall be as manufactured by Simplex, Pyrotronics, Honeywell or Secutron. D. Installer: The installing firm shall have at least 3 years of successful supplying and installation experience on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project. ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720-1 GATO BUILDING E. Installation: The Contractor, shall provide all conduit, cable, - equipment, accessories and materials as detailed in the manufacturer's installation manual and required for the satisfactory operation of the fire alarm system, the elevator detection system, mechanical systems — control, and the interface between components and systems. F. Equipment Certification: All fire alarm equipment, including accessories _ to the system and including all wires and cable unless otherwise noted, shall be listed Underwriters Laboratories and Factory Mutual. G. Single Manufacturer: List each and every item of the Fire Alarm System as a product of single alarm system manufacturer complying with the standards as specified herein. H. Warranty Acceptance: The Contractor must warranty service and make available to the Owner, a duly authorized and franchised distributor who shall service the fire alarm system and supply on -the -premise maintenance by factory trained service technicians during normal working hours. I. Warranty Period: The Contractor shall provide maintenance at no additional cost to the Owner for a period of 12 months from the date of - substantial completion of the installation. Maintenance shall be for the standard use of the system and does not include damage caused by natural forces or physical abuse. The Contractor shall also agree that service, when provided at other than normal working hours, shall be made at a normal working hours labor rate. J. Yearly Tests: The Contractor shall, at no expense to the Owner, observe the systems in operation and conduct tests to assure that systems are performing in full compliance with specified requirements at least twice during the initial 6 months of operation. The testing shall be coordinated with a designated Owners representative, at a time convenient to the Owner, with results reported in writing to the Owner. K. Maintenance Contract: Make available to the owner, a maintenance contract proposal to provide a minimum of 2 inspections and tests per year, in compliance with NFPA-72 guidelines. L. Standards: Comply with the following standards as they apply to Fire Alarm Systems: 1. UL 217 Single and Multiple Station Smoke Detectors. 2. UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protection Signaling Systems. 3. UL 268A Smoke Detector for Duct Applications. 4. UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling System. 5. NFPA 72 6. NFPA 101 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be complete showing all wiring diagrams, and point to point connections required for this project. The point to point connections shall be indicated on drawings showing routing ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720-2 GATO BUILDING of raceways, connections, components, and conductor quantities and types. The Contractor shall apply his company name, address, telephone number, etc. on an individual title block indicating "This drawing for fire alarm wiring only". Computer CAD drawings are required. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard catalog data on all components and sub -systems. Product data shall be submitted showing manufacturer's written recommendations for storage and protection, and installation instructions. Manufacturer's product data shall be submitted for all system equipment including; 1. application information 2. dimensions 3. listing agency file 4. wiring diagrams 5. installation information 1.5 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protection: Physically protect smoke and heat detectors against damage as recommended by manufacturer. Minimize exposure of detectors to dirt and dust from construction. Provide plastic covers during construction. Remove covers after the project has been cleaned and is ready for operation. Testing must be done after the removal of protective covers. B. Packaging: Store equipment in original packaging. Store inside well ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, dust, extreme temperatures, and humidity. C. Damage: Remove and replace with new, all broken pull stations, detectors, annunciation devices and other accessories, damaged before final acceptance at no additional expense to the contract. No allowance shall be made for breakage or theft before final acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM OPERATION A. Manual: Upon activation of the fire alarm system by any manual initiating device, including manual pull stations, the following shall take place; 1. Sound the audible fire alarm signals throughout the building. 2. Flash the visual fire alarm signals throughout the building. 3. Alert the local fire department via the owner provided monitoring service. 4. Release all doors held open by electro-mechanical release devices in the zone or area in alarm and in each adjacent area or zone. S. Cause the alarm location to be displayed on the local system control panel, the main fire alarm control console, and all remote annunciators and printers. B. Automatic: Upon activation of the fire alarm system by any smoke detector, any sprinkler flow alarm when applicable or other automatic ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720-3 GATO BUILDING detection device, the following shall take place in addition to the above; 1. Shut down all air handlers and exhaust fans supplying or exhausting — air in the area or zone where the alarm is initiated and in each adjacent area or zone. 2. Close all automatic smoke dampers or smoke and fire combination dampers in ducts associated with the air handling units and exhaust fans which will shut down. 3. Shut down all fan coil units serving exit access corridors. _ 4. Activate existing smoke control system as indicated in the Division 15 of these specifications. C. Elevator Lobby Detection: Activation of any elevator lobby (except the first floor lobby), hoistway or machine room smoke detector shall initiate the elevator Phase I recall system to the affected elevator and initiate an alarm for the zone it is located within. Activation of the lobby smoke detector on the first floor shall send a separate signal to the elevator controller to send the car to the alternate fire department access level. D. Elevator Machine Room Detection: The elevator machine room smoke detector shall energize the flashing warning light at the designated and alternate fire department access levels. - E. Elevator Shunt Trip: Activation of any elevator hoistway heat detector or the machine room heat detector shall initiate shunt trip of the affected elevator power supply, and by use of an auxiliary contact, initiate an alarm for the zone it is located within. Provide all necessary interfaces and materials to connect to the shunt trip circuit of the elevator circuit breaker, and power the mechanism. Utilize shunt trip power from the breaker controlled. Provide wiring system to the elevator controller for final connection by the elevator contractor. F. Elevator Alarm: Elevator lobby detectors shall be cross zoned, by .means of software, to indicate an alarm in the zone covering the corridor where located and indicate that the vertical elevator zone is in alarm as well. G. Supervisory: System supervisory faults, such as shorts, opens, and grounds in conductors, operating power failure, or faults within supervised devices, shall cause an audible and visual trouble indication at the control panel. It shall be possible to silence the audible trouble signal. Once the trouble is corrected the signal shall again sound until the silence switch is restored to its normal position. 2.2 CONTROL PANEL A. Construction: The control panel shall be semi -flush mounted in code gauge cabinet with smooth semi -gloss baked enamel finish, transparent door panel, and key lock. Construction of all function modules shall be face plate attached to edge -contact printed circuit boards. All components shall be mounted as a module to printed circuit boards. Cabinet shall provide guideway for PCB to internal wiring bus system. All printed circuit boards shall be glass epoxy high quality construction ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720-4 GATO BUILDING with smooth, bright soldering and completely free of solder paste residue. B. Indication: All lamps, LEDs test and reset switches shall be front panel mounted, and all equipment shall be within a single FACP cabinet unless indicated otherwise. Face plate indicator shall be LEDs, and an 80 character, 25 line, electroluminescent alphanumeric display. The display shall provide information as to the point status, type of alarm, number of alarms in the system, and a custom location label. Each adapter module shall be labeled. All LEDs and switches shall be identified with silk screen or similar permanent type labeling. System status LED's shall provide immediate indicating of any abnormal event. (Trouble or alarm). Immediate indication of any abnormal event shall be displayed in the window of the video terminal. During normal system operation, a green LED shall indicate normal operation. The LCD display shall indicate with a message, normal system operation along with the present time and date. An alarm supervisory and trouble conditions are indicated by dedicated LEDs and a tone -alert. C. Accessories: The control panel shall contain all necessary components to completely service and operate the system. Signal circuits shall be provided as required. Provide integral side located wiring gutter and field wiring terminal strip. Provide blank panels for all empty spaces. The FACP requires "dry" normally open (N/O) contacts to initiate control functions. 41 D. zone Modules: Provide sufficient zone adapter modules to perform all functions listed in the System Operation Section of this specification. E. Expansion: Provide empty space for four additional boards and one 24 VDC signal circuit. F. Interface: Thru a standard four -position telephone jack, called a serial port, the central control unit shall be capable of interfacing with an IBM PC compatible computer. The connection shall allow the user to directly interface, through software, with a microcontroller board.and all of the systems' operational functions. Access shall be guarded by a security code clearance program. G. Optional Output: The central control unit shall be capable of providing a fiber optics or equivalent out -put to a remote graphics annunciator. H. Operation: The system database shall be permanently stored using non- volatile memory technology and shall be 100 percent field programmable not requiring any specialized programming equipment. System boot up shall be automatic upon power up and shall not require tape or disk boot - up procedures. An event history buffer shall provide a 600 event history buffer minimum. All system configurations including -detector sensitivity levels shall be stored in memory. The buffer shall remain intact even in the event of power loss. I. Addressable Points: Detection concepts for local or system wide sensors shall be controlled for each addressable point in the system. Each addressable point shall be capable of being individually assigned a detection logic. Communication between the field panels, FACP's and the ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720-5 GATO BUILDING CPU consist of multiple 16 bit digital messages with start, data, parity, and stop bits. Data address, parity, overrun, framing and check -sum test must be passed in order for the FACP to consider the message valid. The FACP's shall provide continuous supervision of the alarm input circuits, and are capable of reporting an alarm, open circuit, shorted circuit or ground fault. J. Sensitivity: A minimum of 12 levels of sensor sensitivity shall be available for maximum sensor flexibility. Fire alarm control panel shall determine the condition of each sensor's smoke density by comparing the sensor value to the stored values. The control panel shall maintain a moving average of the sensor's smoke chamber value to automatically compensate (move the threshold) for dust and dirty conditions that could affect detection operations. The system shall automatically maintain a constant smoke obscuration sensitivity for each sensor (via the floating threshold) by compensating for environmental factors. The smoke obscuration sensitivity shall be adjustable to within 0.3 percent of either limit of the UL window (0.5 to 4.0 percent) to compensate for any environment. The system shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs maintenance. Dirty sensors shall in no way decrease the amount of smoke obscuration necessary for system activation. K. Supervision: The FACP shall be equipped to supervise and operate 2 wire smoke detectors and other devices. All signal circuits (speakers, chimes, horns, bells, strobe lights) shall be optional 2 or 4 wire configuration. L. Power Supply: The FACP shall be equipped with an internal 24 VDC power supply and have battery back-up function. Provide 120 VAC, operating power single phase, 20 ampere circuit from the building Life Safety Branch Electrical System. The system power shall be supervised and it's failure indicated by an audible and visual trouble alarm. Provide low voltage DC power supply modules to provide filtered power for all system modules and system devices. Provide over -current devices for protection of system components. Provide status devices for normal power, .power supply trouble and battery fuse trouble. The power supply modules shall supervise the loss of AC, loss of DC and low DC output. Provide the required quantity of power supplies to adequately supply power. 1. Provide Secondary Standby Power system from the system battery set as described with 60 hour capacity followed by 10 minutes of alarm with rechargeable (24VDC) gel cell type battery and enclosure with sufficient capacity to operate system for 4 hours standby then 5 minutes in alarm to maintain operation through limited power outages. M. Self Test: The control panel shall continuously perform an automatic self -test routing on each sensor which will functionally check sensor electronics and ensure the accuracy of the values being transmitted to the control panel. Any sensor that fails this test shall indicate a "SELF TEST ABNORMAL" trouble conditions with the sensor location at the control panel. ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720-6 GATO BUILDING N. Manual Access: An operator at the fire alarm control panel or at the central control monitor, having a proper password access level, shall have the capability to manually access the following for each detector; 1. Information a. primary device type b. present average value C. present sensitivity selected (in percent obscuration) d. peak detection values (in percent obscuration) e. sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.) f. enable or disable any system point (Disabling any device shall create a trouble signal, which may not be software eliminated.) 2. Operator shall have the ability to set the detector sensitivity and the verification frequency. 0. System Functions: Provide control circuitry for operation of the system and indication of all system functions. The functions shall include system reset, alarm lock -in, grounded system trouble, signal silenced, ammeter and LED test. System function keys shall be provided at a minimum for acknowledge, alarm silence, trouble silence, reset, next alarm, next trouble. P. Operation&l Controls: Provide dedicated alarm supervisory and trouble condition acknowledge buttons. Operation of the appropriate acknowledge button silences the tone -alert. The LED remains illuminated until all conditions in that category are restored to normal. Q. Ground Detection: Provide ground (earth) detection capability to detect either positive or negative voltages when ground (earth) connections of 50,000 OHMS or less are encountered. R. Initiating Modules: Provide initiating modules to interface between initiating devices and FACP. Provide modules to accept normally•open current limited (Style B) 2 - wire initiating circuits. S. Signal Modules: Provide signal modules for DC signals wired in parallel, and for supervision of opens, shorts and earth grounds. T. Control Modules: Provide auxiliary function modules as required for operation of air handler and exhaust shutdown, door release and other system control functions as applicable. Each function shall have an associated programmable control key and associated LED. Each shall be individually password protected to allow limited access level to perform that function control. U. Programming: Unit shall be programmable for individual acknowledgement of each point in an abnormal condition as well as restoration to normal status. V. Regeneration: The network, upon failure of the polling CPU or a severed data cable line, shall sense the missing remote controllers or field ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720-7 GATO BUILDING panels and regenerate itself into a system or systems dependent on the remaining hardware. Such a failure shall result in a trouble alarm. W. Design Selection: Simplex 4110-9101 with all support components required for a complete system. Provide 4009-9806 and 2081-9274, 4090-9002, 2088- 9021, 4090-9001, 4090-9101 and 2088-9008 as required. 2.3 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL STATIONS A. Pull Station: Manual fire alarm pull station shall be semi -flush, non - coded, normally open double action type with single contacts. A downward pull of the lever shall activate a switch to sound the alarms and light the zone lamps at the control panel. Station shall remain actuated until station is reset by means of a special key. Design Selection: Simplex 2099-9756-ID4090/9001 B. Address: Provide dip switches to set address code to communicate with control panel. C. Mounting Height: 48 inches above floor to centerline. 2.4 ALARM SIGNALS A. Type: General alarm signals shall be supervised horns semi -flush mounted with flashing strobe lights. The device shall be labeled "FIRE". Design Selection: 4903-9424 B. Sound Level: Sound pressure level shall be 92 DB at 10 feet across the frequency range of 400 to 4,000 Hz- C. Lamp: Rate to peak light intensity shall be minimum 75 canedela for the DC strobe. Flash lamp at a rate of 1 flash per second. D. Mounting Height: 80 inches above floor to top. E. Sound and Light Intensity: Sound level and light intensity shall conform to ADA standards. F. Alarm Silence: Strobes shall continue to flash after alarm has been acknowledged. Devices shall be 4-wire. 2.5 AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTABLE ADDRESSABLE SMOKE DETECTORS A. General: The detector shall not require replacement or readjustment after a fire alarm has been given. Two LED's indicate the presence of polling and alarm conditions. Equip detector with dip switches to set addressable codes to communicate with the control panel. The detectors shall be listed for both ceiling and wall mount applications. B. Sensitivity: The detector sensitivity shall be individually adjustable and set by the software program of the fire alarm control panel and shall communicate actual smoke chamber values to the system control. Sensors shall have no self contained alarm set point (fixed threshold) or addressable setting ability. The detector shall communicate actual smoke ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720-8 GATO BUILDING chamber values to the system control. The detector shall automatically compensate for environmental changes. C. Wiring: Wire detectors for alarm annunciation and supervision to allow the removal of any detector without disturbing the alarm capability or supervision of any other detector. D. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type smoke detectors shall communicate actual smoke chamber values to the system control panel: Design selection 4098-9710 E. Duct Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: The duct smoke detectors shall be photoelectric and shall communicate actual smoke chamber values to the system control. The duct housing shall contain an LED which shall pulse to indicate power on and glow continuously to indicate an alarm or detector trouble condition. The lamp in the detector and at the remote alarm lamps shall light to indicate the initiation of the alarm. Detector, when duct -mounted, shall be mounted on sheet metal collar installed in duct so that detector is firmly secured even after repeated removal. Design Selection: 4098-9714 2.6 REMOTE ALARM LAMPS A. Location: A red remote flush alarm light shall be provided for each duct or concealed detector, adjacent to it's location, in a public space, to annunciate smoke detector operation remotely. Where multiple lamps are shown, all lamps shall be mounted on a single plate: Design selection 2098-9806 B. Identification: Label shall be red with white lettering, 3/4 inch high. refer to Identification section of the specification. C. Mounting Height: 84 inches above floor to centerline. 2.7 ELEVATOR WARNING LIGHT A. Location: Provide an elevator warning light on primary and secondary firefighters' entrance levels. Light shall conform to ANSI A17.1. B. Mounting Height: 60 inches above floor to centerline. 2.8 UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY A. General: Provide a self contained fully operational unit which can provide 1500 VA continuous filtered power during power outage for a minimum period of 7 minutes. B. Performance: Performance shall be as follows; 1. Output regulation shall be plus or minus 5 percent. 2. Output Frequency Stability plus or minus 0.5 Hz. 3. Output Harmonic Distortion Maximum 5 percent total, and 3 percent for a single harmonic. ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720-9 GATO BUILDING 4. Output overload capacity of 12 percent for 1 second without hardware damage. 5. Complies with FCC Part J, Class A for EMI/RFI. 6. Tested to comply with IEEE 587 7. Maximum audible noise produced is 47 DBA C. Construction: Construction shall be as follows; 1. 15 in. wide x 14.8 in. deep x 2.3 in. high. 2. Weighs a maximum of 23 pounds. 3. Mounting a. On top of the PC cabinet of the Central Processing Computer, and under associated video display. _ b. Below or adjacent to remote printers. 4. Battery is self contained within the unit. a. Sealed b. Captive electrolyte C. Non -corrosive d. Exerts no flammable gases 5. Forced air, fan cooled. 6. Main circuit breaker provides protection from overload conditions. 7. Cont6ins 5 receptacle outlets on back end for equipment connection. a. Three outlets provide UPS outputs. b. Two outlets provide conditioned power only D. Manufacturer: Unit shall be as manufactured by Liebert, Model PC -ET - 2.9 AIR HANDLING SYSTEM SHUTDOWN ADDRESSIBLE MODULE A. Operation: Provide a data addressible module at each air handling system and exhaust fan for shutdown on alarm from the fire alarm system as per the systems operation description. The unit shall be wired such that it shall be self monitoring for integrity. A failure of the relay or associated wiring shall cause unit shutdown. The coil voltage of the relay shall match the fire alarm control panel voltage and a fire alarm signal shall initiate interruption of the air handling unit starting circuit. 2.10 DOOR HOLD OPEN DEVICES A. Equipment: Devices as indicated on the drawings shall be as follows: 1. Door solenoid holder/closer header type 24 volt where required. `- 2. Two piece magnetic door and wall mount unit 24 volt where required. B. Operation: Door holders shall be deenergized from the FACP during alarm. — C. Power: 24 VAC power shall be provided from the power supply of the FACP. ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720-10 GATO BUILDING 2.11 FIELD CONTROL PANELS A. Materials: Provide a multiplex system using distributed memory, processing and control figured in a regenerative network. Insure survivability in life safety emergency situations. Provide RS-485 datalines as standard. B. Configuration: Provide Style B dataline configuration as required. Each field panel shall be capable of regenerating into a fully operational system as specified herein. C. Interaction: Alarm silence, trouble silence and drill switches shall remain coordinated and interactive with remaining operative panels and other system components. D. Spare Capacity: Provide each cabinet with capacity for 2 additional full size modules to be installed at a later date. E. Mounting Height: 72 inches above floor to top. 2.12 PRINTER A. Configuration: Provide series configured printers with front panel switching, LED status indicators, bidirectional printing carriage and RS- 232C interface. B. Supervision: Unit shall be supervised, and send a trouble alarm to the Fire Alarm Control Panel when off line, during loss of power, when out of paper, or any other disabling function that would prevent a hard paper recording of logged events. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF CEILING DETECTORS A. General: All ceiling mounted detectors shall be installed in accordance with requirements of NFPA 72. Detectors shall be positioned to avoid drafts from supply air diffusers and an adequate distance from equipment producing sudden temperature changes which would result in nuisance false alarms. Ceiling smoke detectors shall be so located as to not allow supply air grills to impede the effective operation of the detector. Position detector a minimum of 3 feet from supply air grills. B. Spacing: The corridor system layout shall maintain a maximum 30 feet on center and 15 feet from the ends of all corridors spacing. Additional detectors shall be located within 5 feet and no closer than 12 inches of doors in smoke walls. C. Protection: Provide temporary protection for all detectors installed prior to completion of construction. D. Location: Locate smoke detectors a minimum of at least 15 feet from any type of furnace, hot water heater, or a gas space heater. ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720-11 GATO BUILDING 3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCT DETECTORS A. General: Installation of duct mounted smoke detector housings and sampling tubes within the supply and return air ductwork shall be done — by an experienced sheet metal worker. B. Location: Detector shall be mounted at least 6 duct widths downstream, from any duct opening, deflection plates, sharp bends or branch connections. Provide air pressure differential test data to engineer in areas where distance is limited by physical restraints. C. Assurance: Proper air velocities shall be maintained per the manufacturer's specifications. D. Wiring: It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide the proper backbox and sampling tubes for installation within the ductwork. All electrical connections shall be completed by the Fire Alarm Contractor as required for a complete system. E. Access: Provide access panels in ductwork to afford proper service and maintenance of the duct detector. 3.3 DOORS IN SMOKE WALLS A. Hold Open Devices: All doors in smoke walls shall be required to have magnetic door hold open devices. Doors normally kept closed or locked such as toilets, dressing rooms, closets, and mechanical/electrical rooms. Do not require hold -open devices. B. Type: Contractor shall review all doors in the smoke walls to determine the most appropriate type of door holder. Doors with no convenient — adjacent wall require the installation of header type units. C. Identification: Doors in smoke walls not protected by magnetic hold -open devices shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer and be provided with a sign, mounted at normal viewing height with the following statement: "Fire Door - Keep Closed At All Times" The sign shall be of laminated plastic with 2 inches high minimum letters, red on white background. The sign shall be permanently secured to the door with brass screws minimum #4. D. Smoke Detectors: Smoke detectors located at doors in smoke walls shall be located no further than 5 feet and no less than 1 foot from the door. 3.4 ELEVATOR RECALL AND DETECTION SYSTEM A. Installation: Contractor shall provide all conduit wiring and associated devices and detectors for Phase I recall and emergency elevator power disconnection. ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720-12 GATO BUILDING 3.5 PRINTER A. Terminal: When associated with a monitor terminal, connect printer to uninterruptable power receptacle of UPS unit. B. Modem: Configure as a serial device, and connect data input via short haul modem. 3.6 INSPECTIONS AND INSTALLATION TESTING A. Local Authority Having Jurisdiction: Equipment shall be installed and located in accordance with requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. B. Demonstration: Upon completion of installation and inspection by the Contractor, an authorized Owner representative shall physically inspect the installed equipment, workmanship, and witness Contractor performed acceptance tests of the fire alarm systems that demonstrate compliance to specifications. C. Personnel: The Contractor shall provide equipment and personnel as required for acceptance tests and any tests required by inspecting authorities. D. Deficiencies: The Contractor shall correct all system deficiencies and make all Necessary adjustments at no cost to the Owner. Perform another acceptance test after correction of deficiencies. E. Notification: Before proceeding with any testing, inform the staff of the location where the alarm signal will sound to prevent any unnecessary action. At the conclusion of testing, those previously notified (and others necessary) shall be further notified that testing has been concluded. F. Hazardous Locations: Any method or device used for sensing.,in an atmosphere or process classified as hazardous by Article 500 of NFPA 70, National Electrical code, shall be listed, and suitable for such use. G. Reports: Records of all inspections and tests shall be made and submitted at the conclusion of the work. 3.7 SMOKE DETECTOR SENSITIVITY TESTING A. Testing: Sensitivity settings shall be recorded for all heads and submitted to Engineer at completion. B. Reporting: Utilize "Detector Sensitivity Report" included at the end of these specifications for recording test results. 3.8 HEAT DETECTOR TESTING A. Procedure: A restorable heat detector and the restorable element of a combination detector shall be tested by exposing the detector to a heat ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720-13 GATO BUILDING source, such as a shielded heat lamp, until it responds. After each heat — test, the detector shall reset. B. Precaution: Precaution shall be taken to avoid damage to the non - restorable fixed temperature element of a combination rate -of -rise fixed temperature detector. The manufacturer's instructions shall be followed. 3.9 SMOKE DETECTOR TESTING A A. Response: To assure that each smoke detector is operative and produces the intended response, it shall be caused to initiate an alarm at its installed location with smoke or other aerosol, acceptable to the manufacturer, that demonstrates that smoke can enter the chamber and initiate an alarm. B. Method: To assure that each smoke detector is within its listed and marked sensitivity range, it shall be tested using either one of the following; 1. A calibrated test method. 2. The manufacturer's calibrated sensitivity test instrument. 3. Listed control equipment arranged for the purpose. 4. Other calibrated sensitivity test method acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. C. Range: Detectors found to have a sensitivity outside the accepted range shall be replaced. D. Exception: Detectors listed as field adjustable may be either adjusted within an accepted range or replaced. Note: The detector sensitivity cannot be tested or measured using any spray device that administers an unmeasured concentration of aerosol into the detector. 3.10 CLEANING A. Method: Clean all detectors and remove dust or dirt that has accumulated. For each detector, the cleaning, checking, operating, and sensitivity adjustment shall be attempted only after consulting the — manufacturer's instructions. These instructions shall detail methods such as vacuuming to remove loose dust and insects and washing to remove heavy grease and grime deposits. In lieu of these cleaning methods, the — manufacturer may provide cleaning service at the field location. Following partial disassembly or washing of the detector to remove contamination, the appropriate sensitivity test required shall be _ performed. END OF SECTION ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16720-14 SET NO: -o?3 ADDENDUM NO. 1 June 23, 1999 To all general contract bidders of record on the Work titled: RESTORATION AND ADAPTIVE USE of THE GATO CIGAR FACTORY 1100 SIMONTON STREET KEY WEST, FLORIDA 33040 Re -Bid Monroe County Administrative Offices ;RECEIVED pURCH "ce�.�r The proposed Contract Documents for Monroe County Project "A" Re- Bid are modified as follows: ITEM #1: ALTERNATE BIDS AND REVISED BID FORM: Prices for the following deductive alternatives shall be provided by all general contract bidders. A revised bid form reflecting these alternate bids is attached. Alternate Bid No. 9: The base bid includes all construction and finishes for "Tower West", the two story break room tower. State the amount to be deducted from the base bid to delete the break room tower in its entirety, including foundations. Under this alternate, install the specified pavers over the ground area of the break room tower location. Landscaping will be modified as to location but types and number of plants will not be changed. Under this alternate, install the typical window unit complete with impact resistant glazing at the second floor openings and locate door No. 216 accessing the courtyard, including its landing and ramp, at the opening currently accessing Room 1-216. 410AngeIaStreet Key West, FIorid a33040 Pagel Telephone (305)296-1347 Facsimile (305)296-2727 Florida License AAC002022 [-,,.�% L-D) Alternate Bid No. 10: The base bid includes glass transoms as shown on the drawings. State the amount of deduction from the base bid to delete glass transoms from corridor walls north and south of the central courtyard running from column line 4 to column line 8, a total of 8, 16 foot bays, leaving the wall open above. Therefore, these partitions, Type 7 under the base bid will become Type 4 partitions under this alternate. Also, change partition Type 5 to Type 4 at the east wall of Room 2-269. Alternate Bid No. 11: State the amount of deduction from the base bid to change all type "D" doors to Type "E" doors. ITEM #2: PRIOR APPROVALS: 1. Tate Access Floors Accessible Flooring System, with pedestals located at 2' centers, is approved as an equal substitute for the framed raised floor system at the second floor. Provide toppings or other methods required for stability. 2. Section 03310, Concrete Repairs, equal products of Thoro, Tamms, and Sika are acceptable for use on this project. ITEM #3: MECHANICAL, CHILLERS: Bidders are advised that individual chillers to be provided to the Gato Building shall have a capacity equivalent to the 108 ton design basis chiller, as shown in schedule (100 tons nominal at 42� chilled water temperature. The design intent is to ensure that 60% - 70% of the building load can be met using one chiller during emergency power operation. Chillers that do not meet requirements as indicated on the drawings will not be acceptable. ITEM #4: LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM: Specifications call for design and installation by the Contractor, or a landscape irrigation system. The intent of the specification is to include all of the landscape areas. ITEM #5: IMPACT FEES: Impact fees will be paid to the City by Monroe County. Do not include impact fees in your bid. ITEM #6: EXTENT OF WORK CLARIFICATION: 1. All finishes and related construction for Corridor, 1-185, north of column line "D" and east of column line "3"are included under this contract. Page 2 2. Demolition of the courtyard roof is a part of this contract. 3. All mechanical, plumbing, and electrical questions from the original bid package have been addressed in the rebid. However, as a further clarification, installation of all chiller piping to all A. H. units for Monroe County and the Department of Health mechanical equipment is a part of this contract. The actual connection of piping to the unit will be the respective contractor. All A.H. units marked with a "C" are Monroe County contract and all A.H. units marked with an "H" are Department of Health units, e.g. AHU1-Cl is "County" and AHUl-H1 is "Health". 4. Concrete repairs to be included in the base bid have been identified on Sheets A-1 and A-2 with revision dates of 6/29/99. In addition, the contractor will include in his base bid an amount sufficient to patch all holes through walls with non shrink grout or other specified patching materials. The contractor will be responsible for quantifying and patching all interior and exterior wall surfaces to match adjacent construction. 5. Lobby/Museum, Room No. 1-102 is a part of this contract, north of column line "F". ITEM #7: SECTION 00310 -SUPPLEMENTARY BID FORM FOR UNIT PRICES / CONCRETE BID ALLOWANCE: Allow in your bid $20,000 to cover the cost of concrete repairs beyond those identified as "base bid" in item #6 above and throughout the documents. In the highly unlikely event that additional concrete repairs are allowed as an extra to the contract, they will be applied against this allowance and the balance will be refunded to the Owner by Change Order. Use the attached "Supplementary Bid Form For Unit Prices", Section 00310, to provide costs for potential additional concrete repairs. ITEM #8: CONCRETE REPAIR FOR RAINLEADER BEAMS: 1. Cut off cast iron pipe above and below concrete beam and remove. 2. Remove cast iron pipe within concrete beam. 3. Remove loose concrete and expose corroded reinforcing to sound reinforcing. Treat with a corrosion inhibitive bonding agent per manufacturer's recommendations. If more than 20% of reinforcing has been compromised, remove compromised reinforcing and replace mechanically, splicing to existing reinforcing out of zone of corrosion. 4. Patch area with concrete repair per manufacturer's recommendations. END OF ADDENDUM Enclosures: Section 00110 (8 pages plus Bid Bond) Sheet Al and Sheet A2 reduced to 11" x 17" size Section 00310 (2 pages) Page 3 SECTION 00110 BID PROPOSAL The Bid Proposal shall be submitted on the forms included in this section of the Bidding Documents as previously instructed herein. Item Description Pages 1. Proposal Form 2-5 2. Non -Collusion Affidavit 6 3. Lobbying and Conflict of Interest Clause 7 4. Drug -Free Workplace Form 8 5. Bid Bond 6. Contractor License Current Copy to Be Submitted with Bid Subcontractor Licenses to Be Submitted Prior to Award of Notice to Proceed BID PROPOSAL 00110-1 SECTION 00110 PROPOSAL FORM BID TO: MONROE COUNTY BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS c/o PURCHASING DEPARTMENT PUBLIC SERVICE BUILDING, ROOM 002 5100 COLLEGE ROAD, STOCK ISLAND KEY WEST, FLORIDA 33040 BID FROM: The undersigned, having carefully examined the Work and reference Drawings, Specifications, Proposal, and Addenda thereto and other Contract Documents for the construction of: and having carefully examined the site where the Work is to be performed, having become familiar with all local conditions including labor affecting the cost thereof, and having familiarized himself with material availability, Federal, State, and Local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations affecting performance of the Work, does hereby propose to furnish all labor, mechanics, superintendents, tools, material, equipment, transportation services, and all incidentals necessary to perform and complete said Work and work incidental hereto, in a workman -like manner, in conformance with said Drawings, Specifications, and other Contract Documents including Addenda issued thereto. The undersigned further certifies that he has personally inspected the actual location of where the Work is to be performed, together with the local sources of supply and that he understands the conditions under which the Work is to be performed. The successful bidder shall assume the risk of any and all costs and delays arising from the existence of any subsurface or other latent physical condition which could be reasonably anticipated by reference to documentary information provided and made available, and from inspection and examination of the site. dollars. (Total Base Bid - words) 1. Alternate No. 1: The Base Bid on the first floor, includes wood flooring, glued to a DURA- CAP substrate. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to eliminate the wood flooring system, and substitute thin set quarry tile and base over a leveling coat of DURA- CAP. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words BID PROPOSAL 00110-2 2. Alternate No. 2: The Base Bid includes fire resistant glazing in interior fire rated transoms, fire rated glass wall systems, fire rated sidelights and fire rated glazed doors. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to omit the specified fire resistant glazing and substitute wire glazing, diamond pattern, installed as required by code for a fire rated assembly. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words 3. Alternate No. 3: The Base Bid includes aluminum fencing with concrete masonry unit piers on auger cast piles 4'-0" into grade, along the west, south and east property lines. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to omit all the aluminum fencing, auger cast piles, and piers, and leave the existing chain link fence along the west property line. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words 4. Alternate No. 4: In lieu of Alternate No.3 above, state the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to omit the aluminum fencing, auger cast piles, and piers, from the south and east property lines only. Under this alternative, new fencing will be installed at the west property line only. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words 5. Alternate No. 5: The Base Bid includes 3/4" BC PT plywood, installed horizontally, at partition types 11,12 and 14. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to omit the horizontal 3/4" BC PT at partition types 12 And 14. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words 6. Alternate No. 6: The Base Bid includes providing one rotary screw chiller and installing two roof mounted screw chillers.. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid by deleting the purchase of this rotary screw chiller, only. Installation of the two chillers and associated piping, and wiring remains as part of the Base Bid. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words 7. Alternate No. 7: The Base Bid includes payment of construction permit fees required by the City of Key West. State the amount to be deducted from the base bid should the City waive these fees. Permit fees are calculated by the Building Department at the rate of $24.00 per $1,000.00 of valuation. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words 8. Alternate No. 8: The Base Bid on the second floor, includes wood flooring on a plywood subfloor. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to delete the wood flooring and substitute the specified carpet over pad. Under this alternate the wood base will be changed to 4 inch rubber cove base. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words 9. Alternate No. 9: The Base Bid includes all construction and finishes for "Tower West", the two story break room tower. State the amount to be deducted from BID PROPOSAL 00110-3 the base bid to delete the break room tower in its entirety, including foundations. Landscaping will be modified as to location, but types and number of plants will not be changed. Under this alternate, install the typical window unit complete with impact resisting glazing at the second floor openings and locate door No. 216 accessing the courtyard, including its landing and ramp, at the opening currently accessing Room 1-216. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words 10. Alternate No. 10: The Base Bid includes glass transoms as shown on the drawings. State the amount to be deducted from the base bid to delete glass transoms from corridor walls north and south of the central courtyard running from column line 4 to column line 8, a total of eight (8) 16 foot bays, leaving the wall open above. Therefore, these partitions, Type 7 under the base bid will become Type 4 partitions under this alternate. Also, change partition Type 5 to Type 4 at the east wall of Room 2-269. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words 11. Alternate No. 11: State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to change all type "D" doors to type "E" doors. Deduct from the Base Bid Dollars Words I acknowledge receipt of Addenda No.(s) No. Dated No. Dated No. Dated No. Dated No. Dated I have included pages 2 through 6 of the Bid Proposal which entails the Proposal Form , the required Bid Security , the Non -Collusion Affidavit , and the Lobbying and Conflict of Interest Clause . In addition, I have included a certified copy of Contractor's License. 11.. - 1 • 1 . 1 • BID PROPOSAL 00110-4 Mailing Address: Phone Number: Date: Signed: (Name) (Title) Witness: (Seal) BID PROPOSAL 00110-5 SECTION 00110 NON -COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT I, of the city according to law on my oath, and under penalty of perjury, depose and say that: 1. I am of the firm of the bidder making the Proposal for the project described in the notice for calling for bids for: and that I executed the said proposal with full authority to do so; 2. the prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication or agreement for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor; 3. unless otherwise required by law, the prices which have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder prior to bid opening, directly or indirectly, to any other bidder or to any competitor, and 4. no attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other person, partnership or corporation to submit, or not to submit, a bid for the purpose of restricting competition; 5. the statements contained in this affidavit are true and correct, and made with full knowledge that Monroe County relies upon the truth of the statements contained in this affidavit in awarding contracts for said project. (Signature of Bidder) STATE OF: COUNTY OF: (Date) PERSONALLY APPEARED BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, who, after first being sworn by me, (name of individual signing) affixed his/her signature in the space provided above on this day of , 19 NOTARY PUBLIC My commission expires: BID PROPOSAL 00110-6 ETHICS CLAUSE SECTION 00110 LOBBYING AND CONFLICT OF INTEREST CLAUSE SWORN STATEMENT UNDER ORDINANCE NO. 010-1990 MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA (Company) warrants that he/it has not employed, retained or otherwise had act on his/its behalf any former County officer or employee in violation of Section 2 of Ordinance No. 010-1990 or any County officer or employee in violation of Section 3 of Ordinance No. 010-1990. For breach or violation of this provision the County may, in its discretion, terminate this contract without liability and may also, in its discretion, deduct from the contract or purchase price, or otherwise recover, the full amount of any fee, commission, percentage, gift, or consideration paid to the former County officer or employee'. (Signature) Date: STATE OF: COUNTY OF: Subscribed and sworn to (or affirmed) before me on or has produced identification) My commission expires: (name of affiant). NOTARY PUBLIC (date) by He/She is personally known to me as identification. (type of BID PROPOSAL 00110-7 DRUG -FREE WORKPLACE FORM The undersigned vendor in accordance with Florida Statute 287.087 hereby certifies that: (Name of Business) 1. Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. 2. Inform employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug -free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. 3. Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). 4. In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of Chapter 893 (Florida Statutes) or of any controlled substance law of the United States or any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. 5. Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, or any employee who is so convicted. 6. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug -free workplace through implementation of this section. As the person authorized to sign the statement, I certify that this firm complies fully with the above requirements. Bidders Signature Date MCP#5 REV. 6/91 BID PROPOSAL 00110-8 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS AIA Document A310 Bid Bond KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Contractor) as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Surety) a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Owner) as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of Dollars ($ ), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for (Here insert full name, address and description of project) NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this day of 19 (Witness) (Witness) (Principal) (Seal) (Title) (Surety) (Seal) (Title) I I CAUTION: You should sign an original AIA document which has this caution printed in red. An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. AIA DOCUMENT A310 • BID BOND • AIA ® • FEBRUARY 1970 ED • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 N.Y. AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D. C. 20006 00310 SUPPLEMENTARY BID FORM FOR UNIT PRICES TO: Monroe County hereinafter called "Owner" 1. The undersigned, having examined the proposed Contract Documents titled: Restoration and Adaptive Use of The Gato Cigar Factory Monroe County 1100 Simonton Street Key West, Florida 33040 and having visited the site and examined the conditions affecting the Work, hereby proposes and agrees to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and appliances, and to perform operations necessary to complete the Work as required by said proposed Contract Documents. The following prices include all General Contractor mark-up and are net to the Owner. 2. Should additional concrete repairs be required, the undersigned proposes the following unit prices. A. Overhead spalled concrete slab patching not requiring complete slab replacement. 1. Unit price for each additional sq. ft. of slab area: DOLLARS ($ 1 B. Spalled concrete beam repairs per lineal foot of beam. 1. Unit price per lineal foot of beam. DOLLARS ($ C. Spalled concrete column repairs. 1. Unit price per lineal foot of column. DOLLARS ($ SUPPLEMENTARY BID FORM FOR UNIT PRICES 00310-12 D. Cracks in concrete repaired using epoxy injection methods. 1. Unit price per lineal foot of crack. DOLLARS ($ 3. Should the Owner elect to add additional back mounted acoustic wall panel, the undersigned proposes the following unit price: 4. 5 A. Acoustic panel in place, complete. 1. Unit price per sq. ft. DOLLARS ($ The undersigned understands and agrees to comply with and to be bound by any instructions to bidders issued for this Work. The undersigned acknowledges receipt of Addenda: NO. DATED: NO. DATED: NO. DATED: NO. DATED: NO. DATED: NO. DATED: BIDDER: BY: ADDRESS: LICENSE NO.: LICENSE TYPE: Bid dated this day of , 19_. SUPPLEMENTARY BID FORM FOR UNIT PRICES 00310-13 li •I83M AN VOM7AVNOINOVN HI1V3H d0 INmayd3a VaRIOid aw ALNf100 3011NOYI u' AW10VA WEA D OBE) o n N.WIE [o-d =-_- SZDHZIHDHV "v ��= 31'DI30ssv H! Q ? .1apua8 a.P IllI 3sn3213AawaV aNV NOIIVa0IS319 I wnAV tt 03WV Wb9M Qi am" G3= VMS UUM CU73W" WV1 �1 0 or ----- --- --- -------- na i an®_ l fillII t II 11 II •1 �� (g3 I I•I 1•I I• I a II 4P:: zj �I I I I I I I I =,p I I I J W `f-� Ili w• I Q ='�L--- -.� - d fit ---- --------W = of p I I I I `II�IIICC`�� ; a� I I I; 9 I I I I I I p W fill I I'I 1'I w I'I 111111 I X ' !e� 1 I 1 L__ $ 11 �_ ,4 " I I I 11 I W tf I --l�=, 9f, I I =gyp+ I I I ��i� 1 I I � I I I I6 I I I I I I I 1 6 8 III I �;I -_--- �- --- I I - � I I I p ----------.-- --------- - ---------------------- 1 II � 11 I I II II I �- fill I II II 1 ® Of iill---=----===----_=---=-- I �' _-----===---=-----=--- I II II I O ® I �� II II l 0 IL I III III I I ~ III III I I II II '�`"'�` II I I I 0 I I1 II f I � =.o-� I•I II I 1 II II I I I 11 I{ t V I II II I t i i i ♦ i i I • ��" I• •� �� r1 t N; $ O I II II a 1 I yak i i i x_� W I II II I 1 D I 11 I ��� O I 1.1 I 1'I I•I I•I `�J , i•i � 1�1 I p fill t III II II II II II I I II I 1 II II II '� II I '� I II I'I II 11 II II 11 I iF� 0 ii ii ii # 1 ��p __�=o III III I III fl�� i I � ,l I I I III � � I1 I•I I•I I.1 �� I I I•I I 11 II 11 JOE II II 1 ---- -------- I I 1 a- --�L= -------- ----------„---------- ® I I 11 II II II i I 11 � � II 11 II I II II II II II II 1 I.1 I,I I,I 1,1 I.I 11 I I III III I III I I ' I ----- I I - - - - - - - - 11- - - - - - - ----1 1 ---L -" ---- I t 1 1 11 ®Wsill I I (D ® it I Ill 1 111 fill Ml fill Bill 'H I MAM VIN HVJNOANOM ALN= 30HNOW WIN ANoi0di W913 OldJ e n � ro d v- i I SZJ HZIHJHV samoossd q .tapuag 3Sn3H 3AIIcNGV aNV NOIIV'dOIM F E L SWAN labow G; m YYIW, 97J01 OwJIgDJC IDICH WLSW GiG : ItlLLMitlN •MiU7fW19 ON IM/19 9Mi Gi1�iAW WIH 17 ■r---—,__,T==� .—fir—_ice 1-— ,�----- of II ,► . �. ;o o � .r !►v i� O.ii; —••� i;• , , •; Ali: gill nil v v y r v v r w v r v a 0 r Bender / i SET NO: 23 ADDENDUM NO. 2 July 1, 1999 To all general contract bidders of record on the Work titled: 2 i999 RESTORATION AND ADAPTIVE USE of P THE GATO CIGAR FACTORY 1100 SIMONTON STREET NG KEY WEST, FLORIDA 33040 Re -Bid Monroe County Administrative Offices The proposed Contract Documents for Monroe County Project "A" Re- Bid are modified as follows: ITEM #1: ELECTRICAL: The following 11" x 17" sheets (enclosed) are to be substituted for the contract documents. E-1 OK as released E-8 OK as released E-2 Replace with revised drawing E-9 OK as released E-3 OK as released E-10 Replace with revised drawing E-4 OK as released E-11 Replace with revised drawing E-5 OK as released E-12 OK as released E-6 OK as released E-13 Replace with revised drawing E-7 OK as released E-14 OK as released ITEM #2: MECHANICAL & PLUMBING First floor partitions were modified but not changed on Mechanical and Plumbing backgrounds. Bid ducts, diffusers, etc. as shown. Any cost impact will be negotiated after award, but no .cost impact is anticipated. END OF ADDENDUM 410AngeIaStree t Enclosures: Sheets E-2, E-10, E-11, E-13. K e y W e s t, Florida 3 3 0 4 0 Telephone (305)296-1347 Facsimile (305) 296-2727 ` Flo ridaLicenseAACO02022 ,` ILO Page 1 m C) O O m o 0 ri T n rr rn n i' v $ft2 r Imo a z m rt m� m M I L r 5 c-� N r � 2 NOg1M D -1 011 .1; MBender & Associates N ARCHITECTS Ra RESTORATION AND ADAPTIVE REUSE i C GATO CIGAR FACTORY M" MONROE COUNTY AND FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH sa�arro►wrsoirw W WW R 0 2 0 m r z m v a w !$siplir.$T.r::$YYYl4Y4448$s4lE rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr F1I ssdYppC��ybsiyy{ii;,iG��jjtGjjG��i$88i848$ Sl3R888llYbilltYBiy�ifils!!d8'Y4lS r I� .( 3 82.1Is I � ■ �� all 11Vill111101111111111rl FeQ 110101111101111111111, isms O s it a6� ^G Lei r I� s alga �raasaaa� %• 1 r 9q %417D,ENDi it , 0,2) � v T mBender & Associates C RESTORATION AND ADAPTIVE REUSE ARCHITECTS GATO CIGAR FACTORY � Fm MONCOUNTY AND FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH KEY WEST, FL tl li 8 z o I3p ja O z O —I so a � t � al p $ it I1a$ is In A !11 ;1111 1.1 i I a y3M %• 1. 5'9 (.4DOE.uv"—, _ 71 L1 "1► 1 I* JL114 rnBender & Associates' RESTORATION AND ADAPTIVE REUSE � ARCHITECTS a � GATO CI GAR FACTORY PMR ■�, I pa. MONROE COUNTY AND FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH summwMW W wear, FL I 0 ■ �000CCC�© 000CC�CC �CCCCCCD© �CCCCC�D aQQOQoaoQQooQ000QOQoco ooQQ00000cQocoQcoocac caeceeecc�e�e��aaaaa�o � ceveeceaa�aa�aa�aa�a� cccccccccQQ�oQ�oo�Qa�o � ccccQQ�ccccccaQ�Q�ccc QQQOQQQQQQQ�QQ�QQ�QQ�o QQQQQQ�QaQaQQQQ�Q���� . ©CCCDDODO ©CCCC�CD ©C�TCTC�DDOD© ©CCCOCDDTi ceccccccccWccecceccecm ceccccccccccccoccccoci ©CCCCDD6© DODDCDDDDDDI ©o oCCCCOD© ©CCCDDC�DDDI 1111111111111INNccco QQQQQQQQCQacQQCQQCQaoQQCQQCQQci voocevecccacaceececcao vecavecevaa�aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa�� : ccccccccaccccaccccc�co • � cccccccQQCQacQocQQCQQCQQcacQQci _ Q��DQQ�QQQQ�CCuC��CC! _ QQQ�QQQQQvQQ�QQ�Q�QCQQr'Q�QQ�1 ©CCOCDDD© ©CCDCOCDDDC� ©�CCCCCOD© ©CCDCCCDODO� ��CCCCAG�© �COODCCDDDD� ■ .�lt:i�h r.+r.t.ih.r't: �t.,FtJ��_7� N o000i1[�0©00�1 �����CCE3CECB�C ©CDCOCCD� Qoo�QQ�Qa�oQCQo�oQ�oco ccacaa�aacaacaaccacac� cQQ�QQ�QQ�QQ�Q�cccQQco QQo�Qo�Qa�QQ�Q�QQ�QQ�o D���CDDD© O D D D C D C C D OC_DDCCCC© Al 0 . ki WITH to SET NO: AR9 ADDENDUM NO. 3 July 8, 1999 To all general contract bidders of record on the Work titled: Bender/ i1 R 1 T E �Tl� p. a. ;V, RESTORATION AND ADAPTIVE USE of THE GATO CIGAR FACTORY 1100 SIMONTON STREET KEY WEST, FLORIDA 33040 Re -Bid Monroe County Administrative Offices LECE-IT-E JUL - 9 1999 The proposed Contract Documents for Monroe County Project "A" Re- Bid are modified as follows: ITEM #1: (QUESTIONS SUBMITTED BY D.L. PORTER CONSTRUCTION) Q: Section 16010-7:1.9A requires at least one member of the electrical contracting firm to hold a "State Master Certificate of Competency." Does the attached license meet with your requirements under Division 16 for this project? This would include electrical and alarm work. NOTE: the submitted license was: EC0001216 - Certified Unlimited Electrical Contractor Qualifying Agent - Delor J. Ellis Florida Keys Electric, Inc. A: Yes. The intent of the specification is to use qualified tradesmen meeting the applicable licensing requirements of all governing agencies having jurisdiction over the project. No special licensing requirements are intended. ITEM #2: (QUESTIONS SUBMITTED BY BENSON ELECTRIC) Q Sheets C3 and E2 (revised 1/4/99) direr with regard to the site lighting as follows: (denotes count) C3 E2 (revised) Fixture V (Bollard) (8) (11) Fixture F1 (Single Assym.) (10) (6) Fixture W (Spot) (Sign) (3) (1) Which plan should we bid? 4 1 0 A n g e l a S t r e e t Key West, Florida 33040 Telephone (305)296-1347 Facsimile (305) 296-2727 Flo ridaLicenaeAACO02022 LD Page 1 N A: Use C-3 for location and count. Comply with E-2 for all other requirements. Q: C3 and E2 (revised) differ with respect to service routing. Should we bid E2 (revised) and ignore C3? A: Yes. Q: Sheets A43, A44, M7, E7, E8 and El (revised) differ with respect to Fire Alarm devices and appliances. Also Specs refer to "Hospital." Should we bid EI I (revised) and disregard others where there is conflict? A: Bid E 11 (revised). Coordinate requirements of all documents and comply with all applicable codes. Q: There were numerous questions during the first bid with responses which are not necessarily incorporated into revised plans. In general, can we rely on previous responses to indicate your intent? A: The legal bidding documents are only those issued for this bid. However, it is not likely that I would make a different interpretation of these documents since they are not substantially different than the previous bid set. Q: Panel MDP-1 is not designated as "County" or "DOH" on Sheet E13 (revised). Can we assume that it is County? A: Yes. Q: Panels designated both "DOH" and "County" on Sheet E13 (revised) were bid as "County" previously. Are these panels (EDP, MDP2, and MDP3) to be bid as "County"? A: Yes. Q: Sheet E 10 (revised) does not have any ballooned areas denoting changes. It appears to be the same as the previous E10 except for some TVSS clarifications. Are there any other changes to E 10? A: No. The bubbles were inadvertently deleted when the sheet was plotted. END OF ADDENDUM Page 2